I
CORSO DI STUDIO ITALIANO,
COURSE op STUDY FOR THE ITALIAN LANGUAGE, prepared
by Dr. BACHI, Instructor in Harvard University ; and
for sale by C. C. LITTLE & Co., Washington Street,
Boston ; and at theJCJ^jocE&sj^^BooKSTORE, Cambridge.
UHIVEESITY
,
A GRAMMAR OF THE ITALIAN LANGUAGE ; a New Edition
revised and improved, with the addition of Practical Exercises and
numerous Illustrations, drawn from the Italian Classic Writers.
1 vol. 12mo.
PART II.
RACCOLTA DI FAVOLE MORALI, or a Collection of Italian
Fables in Prose and Verse, with Interlinear Translations. 1 vol.
12mo.
PA RT III.
SCELTA DI PROSE ITALIANS, or Extracts from the Works
of the best Italian Prose Writers, both Ancient and Modern. 1 vol.
12mo
PART IV.
TEATRO SCELTO ITALIANO, or a Selection of Italian Dra-
mas, from the Works of Goldoni, Nota, Giraud, Alfieri, Monti, and
Manzoni, with Notes. 1 vol. 12mo.
PART V.
I POETI ITALIANI MAGGIORI, or Extracts from Tasso, Ari-
osto, Poliziano, and Petrarca, and the Inferno of Dante, with Ana-
lytical and Historical Notes. 2 vols. 12mo. (The first volume is
in Press.)
PART VI.
CONVERSAZIONE ITALIANA, or a Collection of Phrases and
Familiar Dialogues in Italian and English. 1 vol. 12mo.
PART VII.
A KEY to the EXERCISES contained in the Italian Gram-
mar. 1 vol. 12mo. (In Press.)
At the Bookstore of C. C. LITTLE &, Co. may be had
also the following Works of the same Author :
I.
RUDIMENTS OF THE ITALIAN LANGUAGE, or Easy Lessons
in Spelling and Reading, with an Abridgment of the Grammar.
Adapted to the Capacity of Children. 1 vol. 16mo.
II.
MRS. BARBAULD'S HYMNS FOR CHILDREN, in Italian ; being
a Sequel to the " Easy Lessons in Reading," in the aboveraen-
tioned Rudiments. 1 vol. 16mo.
III.
A COMPARATIVE VIEW OF THE ITALIAN AND SPANISH
LANGUAGES, or an Easy Method of Learning the Spanish Tongue
for those who are already acquainted with the Italian. 1 vol. I2mo.
IV.
A COMPARATIVE VIEW OF THE SPANISH AND PORTUGUESE
LANGUAGES, or an Easy Method of learning the Portuguese Tongue
for those who are already acquainted with the Spanish. 1 vol.
12mo.
CORSO DI STUDIO ITALIANO.
PART I.
ITALIAN GRAMMAR.
CAMBRIDGE:
FOLSOM, WELLS, AND THURSTON,
PRINTERS TO THE UNIVERSITY.
A
GRAMMAR
ITALIAN LANGUAGE
BY \
PIETRO BACHI,
INSTRUCTER IN HARVARD UNIVERSITY.
A NEW EDITION REVISEEL- AND IMPROVED,
WJT^I* THE ADDITION OF
PRACTICAL EXERCISES AND NUMEROUS ILLUSTRATIONS,
DRAWN FROM THE ITALIAN CLASSICS.
,*t K'DIUI*
uso per base, P esempio per consiglio,
BOSTON:
CHARLES C. LITTLE AND JAMES BROWN.
LONDON:
RICHARD JAMES KENNETT.
M DCCC XXXVIII.
. -
Entered according to act of Congress, in the year 1838; by
PIETRO B ACHI,
in the Clerk's office of the District Court, for the District of Massachusetts.
"DE exteris hominibus jam nunc dicam, quorum de-
merendi, si tibi id cordi est, persane ampla in praesens
oblata est occasio. Ut enim apud eos ingenio quis
forte floridior, aut moribus amoenis et^ elegantibus,
linguam Etruscam in deliciis habet prsecipuis, quin et
in solidd etiam parte eruditionis esse sibi ponendam
ducit, prsesertim si Grasca aut Latina vel nullo, vel
modico, tinctu imbiberit. Ego certe istis utrisque
linguis, non extremis tantummodo labris madidus, sed,
si quis alius, quantum per annos licuit, poculis ma
joribus prolutus, possum tamen nonnunquam ad ilium
Dantem et Petrarcam, aliosque vestros complurimos,
libenter et cupide comissaturn ire. Nee me tarn ipsae
Athena3 Atticas cum illo suo pellucido Ilisso, nee ilia
vetus Roma sua Tiberis ripa retinere valuerunt, quin
scepe Arnum vestrum et Fassulanos illos colles invisere
amem."
MILTON. Epist. ad Benedictum Buommattei ;
Florent., Sept. 10., 1638.
PREFACE
TO THE FORMER EDITION.
As A NATURAL consequence of the general advancement of
this country in literature, the importance attached to an ac-
quaintance with the Italian Language, as a part of polite ed-
ucation, has considerably increased. Not only does it now
enter into the circle of the elegant studies of females, as the
handmaid and ally of the ornamental arts, but the spirit of
its higher literature begins to be understood by the culti-
vated of both sexes ; and within a short time a place has been
conceded to Dante and Tdsso in the same academic course
with Homer and Virgil.
But while the other languages of the continent of Europe
have possessed the advantage of a variety of good gram-
mars written in English, the Italian Instructer has had the
mortification to see in almost universal use the farrago of
Veneroni* to the disparagement of his native tongue and
the perplexity of those who would learn it. It is true, that
other grammars are extant of various degrees of merit, and
those of Galigndniy Sanlagnello, and Vergani are entitled to
much praise ; the first two, however, are hardly known here,
* Veneroni was a native of Verdun, a small town of Burgundy, in
France; his real name was Vigneron ; but, having learnt Italian, and
wishing to teach it in Paris, he Italianized his name and called himself
a Florentine. The Complete Italian Master by Signor Veneroni was
written for a few crowns by Roselli, the extraordinary adventurer,
who has left us his history in the romance entitled The Unfortunate
Neapolitan.
PREFACE. XI
and the last, which is perhaps the best of them all, has been
confined principally to New- York ; where indeed the want of
a suitable grammar has been far less felt than in other places,
from the singular good fortune of that city in enjoying the
living instruction of the venerable Da Ponte, whose own writ-
ings, in prose as well as in verse, form an integral and perma-
nent part of the noble literature, which he has done so much
to propagate in America.
The field, therefore, was open for attempting to treat in
English the Grammar of the Italian Language in a man-
ner better suited to the wants of the public ; and the au-
thor, in entering it, has flattered himself that he should
render an acceptable service, if, after a thorough study of
Italian writers on their own tongue, and a diligent examina-
tion of the labors of his predecessors both in Great Britain
France, and Germany, he should be able to produce a more
complete, and methodical, and, at the same time, strictly prac-
tical treatise, than now exists in English, however far he
might fall short of that perfection of which he has the idea.
In the Introduction are given very summarily the principles
of general grammar, and the terms are defined in which those
principles are afterwards applied to the Italian tongue.
The Part devoted to Pronunciation affords, it is believed,
more full information on the subject than can elsewhere be
found ; and, as the words are carefully represented by English
combinations of letters of equivalent sound,* students who can-
* The vowel a is represented by the combination of letters ah, pro-
nounced without aspiration as in the words sirrah, hallelujah, &c. : e,
by ay, as in day, except when it occurs before certain consonants
with which in English it has what is called the short sound, nearly
resembling the sound in Italian, as in the syllables em, el, &c. ; be-
fore r, however, e is sounded long, like ay : i, by ee, as in sleep : u, by
oo, as in ooze. In the combinations k,y — g,y — l,y — n,y, a comma
is inserted to prevent the letter before it from coalescing with the y,
which is to be pronounced with the following vowel as if it began the
syllable.
Xll PREFACE.
not avail themselves of oral instruction, may yet make such an
approximation to a just pronunciation, as to perceive and enjoy
in a good degree the rhythm and harmony of the classic au-
thors, and, with few errors to unlearn, be prepared to take ad-
vantage of future opportunities of improving their pronuncia-
tion by intercourse with accomplished speakers of the lan-
guage.
In treating of the different Parts of Speech, in the division
called Analogy, while the author has wished that nothing
should be wanting to the completeness of this part of his trea-
tise, he has striven so to methodize the various particulars that
they should lie ready for use. The verbs, especially, are given
with unexampled fulness; and to both the regular and irregular
verbs are annexed the poetical forms, which constitute no small
difficulty for learners, even in reading the older prose writers.
This is an advantage not afforded to the same extent in any
preceding grammar.
As to the Syntax, a few scattered observations only are to be
found in the best grammars. These are here digested under
their proper heads, increased by various new ones, and all of
them supported by citations from those Classics from whose
authority no appeal can be allowed, though colloquial usage
may in a few instances be at variance with them.
The Orthography contains the result of what has been writ-
ten by Italian authors on the subject, and such rules as have
been deduced from the usage of the best writers.
Throughout the Grammar, it should be observed, the
principal rules are placed under their appropriate heads, in
large type ; exceptions to general rules and subordinate obser-
vations are printed in smaller type. Every Italian word of
more than one syllable is carefully accented, that the mere
perusal of the Grammar may operate as a perpetual lesson
in pronunciation, preparing the pupil to read currently the
first author put into his hands, and sparing the instructer the
PREFACE. Kill
trouble of much inculcation. For an analogous reason, every
Italian word and sentence is accompanied by a literal English
version, which is often indispensable to the beginner, and can
rarely be unuseful.
The author is well aware of the amount of indulgence
which his English style will require on the part of his readers,
whose very pursuit of a foreign literature implies a degree of
cultivation in their own, which must make them impatient of
the constraint and want of idiomatic propriety they will here
meet with. Grammatical propriety, however, and perspicuity
were the highest qualities to which he could at present pre-
tend, in a language whose idioms are so remote from his own ;
and, if he has been in any good degree successful in attaining
these, he relies on the candor of ingenuous scholars to attrib-
ute his defects to the difficulty of the case, and not suppose
that he undervalues or is insensible to the charms of a good
style ; which would indeed be inexcusable in one whose ambi-
tion it is to spread a knowledge of the most graceful of mod-
ern dialects :
"Illam, quidquid agit, quoquo vestigia movit,
Componit furtim subsequiturque Decor."
TIEULL. /. 4. c. 2.
PREFACE TO THE PRESENT EDITION.
THE flattering reception, which the former edition of this
Grammar has met with, both in this country and abroad, and
the wide circulation, which in a few years it has obtained in the
different quarters of this Union, have made it the duty of the
author to redouble his efforts to approach nearer to the end
which he originally proposed to himself.
A long experience in teaching, the useful suggestions made
to him by friends who have been using his book both in private
and public instruction, together with an incessant study of his
native tongue in the works of the classic writers, have enabled
him to make such improvements, as to render the work more
deserving of the public favor.
But the light, which the writings of Monti, Compa^noni,
Romdni, Ambros6li, Lucches'tni, and others, have shed on Phi-
lology, in Italy, has given origin, within the last few years,
to so many valuable treatises on Grammar, that, to derive ad-
vantage from their works, and to suit this book to the present
times, it was necessary to remodel the former plan, and intro-
duce such changes, as appeared to be required by the philoso-
phy of the language, and the progress of grammatical science.
To obtain this object, the Grammar has been newly writ-
ten, the arrangement altered, the method simplified, and the
style generally improved. Several remarks, which had been
found useless, have been omitted, and many important rules,
which had been omitted, have been introduced. The verbs
have been better displayed : and the Syntax has been increased
PREFACE. XV
by several important chapters, such as those on the Regimen of
Words, the Agreement of Participles, &c.
Sensible of the truth of the principle, that a grammarian
ought not to limit himself to a mere exposition of principles,
but should deduce them from sound reason and verify them
by the authority of the classic writers, — (" Grammaticorum
sine ratione testimoniisque auctoritas nulla est." — SANCT.
Minerv. 1. 1. c. 2.) — the author has, in this new edition, endeav-
oured first to write and explain his rules, and then to add, by
way of illustration, the classical authorities, which have furnished
him the Examples corroborating the principles he has laid
Convinced, too, of the advantage which the student naturally
derives from the practical application of abstract principles,
he has introduced, in each chapter of the Grammar, one or .
more Exercises, as the subject or the importance of the rules * >..<P
seemed to require.
The Examples, as well as the Exercises, have been chiefly
drawn from the writers of the fourteenth century, such as Ddnte,
Petrdrca, Boccdccio, Villani, &c. ; in many instances from those
of the sixteenth, as Machiavelli, Guicciardini, Ariosto, Tdsso,
&c. ; and, when these have failed to supply apposite illustra-
tions, from the best poets and prose writers of the eighteenth
century, and from those among the moderns who have distin-
guished themselves for purity of diction and elegance of style,
as Alfieri, Foscolo, Botta, Manzoni, &€.
To prevent any interruption in the regular progress of the
different 'parts of the book, and to reduce the principles to a more
compact form, it was at first thought advisable to throw into an \
Appendix, at the end of the volume, certain lists of words and
supplementary remarks, which formerly occupied a place in the
Analogy ; but the size, which the work had already attained,
XVI PREFACE.
determined the author to reserve it to be published in a separate
form, particularly as its omission at present affects in no man-
ner the completeness of the Grammar, however useful such an
appendage might be.
Sorae improvements have also been made in the typo-
graphical execution of the work. The most important parts
of the rules have been printed in italics. In the examples,
which immediately follow, the words which directly illustrate
the rules are printed in SMALL CAPITALS ; and the whole of
these examples, which always recur in the succeeding citations
from the classics, are there printed in SMALL CAPITALS, to en-
gage the attention of the learner to their connexion with the
longer passages, from which they were at first detached.
Should the volume appear to any one larger than is necessary
for common use, he should observe, that, of the whole number
of pages, 351 only are occupied by the rules of the language
and their immediate illustrations, and that the remainder of the
book is filled by Exercises (which are commonly printed in a
separate volume), and by a collection of eighteen hundred cita-
tions from the classics, which exhibit all the principal phenomena
of the language, in a form which gives the student ready access
to a high authority for, and a happy exemplification of, every
principle, thus making him familiar beforehand with the idioms
and constructions, which would be the chief impediments in
his reading the most difficult authors.
As to the mode of using this Grammar, the author would
recommend the following plan. Let the principles first be prop-
erly explained and exemplified by the instructer, and let them be
properly learned and recited by the student. This done, let the
instructer point out the application of them in the citations from
the classics which follow the rules of each chapter, and let the
student account for them (and for as many others as he may have
PREFACE. XV11
already learned), by parsing the words which form the subjects of
the rules with which he is already acquainted ; and, when he
has become familiar with them, let him be directed to write out
the Exercises. This method, if strictly adhered to, cannot
fail to prove highly useful to the learner, and satisfactory to the
teacher.
Desirous that his book should not fall short of that perfection,
which grammatical science seems lately to have reached in
Italy, the author has spared neither expense nor diligence in
procuring all the best treatises on the Italian language, which
have hitherto been published in Europe. Some of these have
been of great assistance to him in his labors, and in many in-
stances he has not hesitated to adopt from them many excellent
hints and valuable remarks. Still he trusts, that the manner
in which he has combined his scattered materials into a body
of principles, all illustrated by a variety of unquestionable clas-
sical authorities, will secure to his work the character of origi-
nality, so far as this can belong to any grammar of a language
long since settled in its usages and idioms :
" Etiamsi omnia a veteribus inventa sunt, hoc tamen erit
semper novum, usus et dispositio inventorum ab aliis."
SENEC. Epist. 64.
Cambridge, September, 1838.
A LIST OF WORKS
EXAMINED WITH REFERENCE TO THE COMPILATION OF THIS
GRAMMAR.
ALBERTI (di Villanuova, Francesco <T), Dizionario Universale
Critico Enciclopedico della Lingua Italiana. Lucca, 1805.
6 vol. 4to.
Jllberti (de Villeneiwe, Francois eT), Grand Dictionnaire Fran-
gois-Italien, et Italien-Francois. Bassano, 1831. 2 vol. 4to.
Algarotti [Francesco), Lettere Filologiche, raccolte da Bar-
tolommeo Gamba. Venezia, 1826. 1 vol. 12mo.
Alunno (Francesco), Le Ricchezze della Lingua sopra il Deca-
merone. Venezia, 1557. 1 vol. 4to.
Ambrosoli (Francesco), Manuale della Lingua Italiana. Milano,
1829. 1vol. 12mo.
Barberi (J. Ph.), Grammaire des Grammaires Italiennes, ou
Cours Coraplet de Langue Italienne. Paris, 1819. 2 vol. 8vo.
, Petit Tresor de la Langue Francaise et de la Lan-
gue Italienne. Paris, 1821. I vol. 8vo.
Baretti (Joseph), A Dictionary of the English and Italian Lan-
guages. London, 1835. 2 vols. 8vo.
Bdrtoli (Daniele), Trattato dell' Ortografia Italiana. Milano,
1830. 1 vol. 12mo.
Bazzarini (Antonio), Ortografia Enciclopedica Universale.
Venezia, 1824. 1 vol. 8vo.
Bimbo (Pietro), Prose, nelle quali si ragiona della Volgar Lin-
gua, colle Giunte di Lodovico Castelv^tro. Milano, 1824.
1 vol. 12mo.
Berganiini (Giov an- Pietro), Voci Italiane d' Autori Approvati
dalla Crusca, nel Vocabolario di essa non registrate. Vene-
zia, 1745. 1 vol. 4to.
Biagioli ( G.), Grammaire Italienne Elementaire et Raisonnee.
Paris, 1825. 1 vol. 8vo.
Borelli (Pasqudle), Principj dell' Arte Etimologica. Napoli,
1830. 1 vol. 4to.
Brosse (Charles de), Trait£ de la Formation Mecam'que des
Langues. Paris, 1801. 2 vol. 12mo.
WORKS EXAMINED. XIX
Bruni (Donato Antonio), Osservazioni sopra la Lingua Toscana.
Napoli, 1759. 1 vol. 12mo.
Bullet (J. B.) Memoires sur la Langue Celtique. Besanc,on,
1760. 3 vol. fol.
BuommatUi (Benedetto), Delia Lingua Toscana, Libri Due,colle
note di Anton-Maria Salvini. Milano, 1807. 2 vol. 8vo.
Caleffi ( Giuseppe) Grammatica della Lingua Italiana, compilata
su-lle migliori moderne Grammatiche. "Firenze, 1832. 1 vol.
12mo.
Cardindli (Francesco), Dizionario portatile della Lingua Italiana.
Bologna, 1828. 2 vol. 8vo.
Carducci (Facondo), Element! della Lettiira, ed Ortografia Ita-
liana. Siena, 1828. 1 vol. 8vo.
Cesari (Antonio), Dissertazione sopra lo Stato della Lingua
Italiana. Verona, 1810. 1 vol. 4to.
Cesarotti (Melckior), Saggi sulla Filosofia delle Lingue, e del
Gusto. Milano, 1821. 1 vol. 12nio.
Cinonio [alias Mambelli (Marc-Ant6nio)], Osservazioni della
Lingua Italiana, illustrate ed accresciute da Luigi Lamberti.
Milano, 1811. 4 vol. 8vo.
Cittadini (Celso\ Le Origini della Toscana Favella. Siena,
1628. 1 vol. 8vo.
Compagnoni (Giuseppe), Teorica de' Verbi Italiani, regolari,
anomali, difettivi, e mal-noti ; compilata sulle opere del Cino-
nio. del Pistolesi, del Mastrofini, e d' altri piu illustri Gram-
matici. Livorno, 1830. 1 vol. 8vo.
Corticelli (Salvadore), Regole ed Osservazioni della Lingua
Toscana. Bassano, 1827. 1 vol. 8vo.
Coureil ( Gio. de), Nuova Grammatica della Lingua Italiana per
gl' Italiani. Livorno, 1816. 1 vol. 8vo.
Dalmistro, Osservazioni intorno alia Lingua Italiana. Venezia,
1821. 1 vol. 8vo.
Da-P6nte (Lorenzo), Elementi della Lingua Italiana. Nuova-
Y6rk, 1831. 1 vol. 12mo.
DeW Arte della Parola, considerata ne' varj Modi della sua
Espressione. Milano, 1827. 1 vol. 8vo.
Del-Muro (Vincenzo), Grammatica Ragionata della Lingua
Italiana. Napoli, 1804. 1vol. 8vo.
Destutt-de-Tracy (Antonio Luigi Clemente), Grammatica Gene-
rale, colle Annotazioni di Giuseppe Compagnoni. Milano,
1817. 2vol. 8vo.
XX WORKS EXAMINED.
Diziondiio della Lingua Italiana. Padova, 1827. 7 vol. 4to.
Dolce (Lodovico), Osservazioni sulla Lingua Italiana. Venezia,
1562. 1vol. 8vo.
Elementi della Lingua Italiana ad tfso delle Scuole. Venezia,
1810. 1 vol. 8vo.
della Grammatica, e della Ortografia Italiana, ricavati
dal Pallavicino, Bartoli, Rogacci, Buommattei. Napoli, 1829.
1 vol. 12m o.
Faccioldti (Jdcopo), Ortografia Moderna Italiana. Napoli, 1831.
1 vol. 4to.
Ferrarii (Octavii), Origines Linguae Italic®. Patavii, 1676.
1 vol. fol.
Fornasari, Theoretisch praktische Anleitung zur Erlernung
der Italienischen Sprache, in einer neuen, und fasslicheren
Darstellung. Wien, 1830. 1 vol. 8vo.
Franscini (Stefano), Grammatica Inferiore della Lingua Italiana.
Milano, 1832. 1 vol. J2mo.
Galignani (J. .#.), Grammar and Exercises, in Twenty-four
Lectures on the Italian Language, enlarged and improved
by Antonio Montucci. London, 1823. 1 vol. 8vo.
GiambuUdri (Pier-Francesco), Lezioni, aggiuntovi 1' Origine
della Lingua Fiorentina, altrimenti il Gello. Milano, 1827.
1 vol. 12mo.
Gianntlli (Leonardo), Regole Grammaticali per chi vuol par-
lare, e scrivere correttamente Toscano. Liicca, 1820. 1 vol.
12mo.
Gigli (Girolamo), Lezioni di Lingua Toscana. Venezia, 1722.
1 vol. 8vo.
Gioia ( Melchior), Ideologia. Milano, 1822. 2vol. 8vo.
Gorio (A. F.), Storia Antiquaria Etrusca. Firenze, 1749.
1 vol. 12mo.
Gran Diziondrio della Lingua Italiana. Bologna, 1828. 7 vol.
4to.
Grdssi (Giuseppe), Saggio intorno ai Sinonimi della Lingua
Italiana. Firenze, 1832. 1 vol. 8vo.
Jagemann (Chr. Jos.), Neues Deutsh-Italianishes Hand-Wor-
ter-Buch. Leipzig, 1799. 2 vol. 8vo.
Jaklitsch (Giuseppe), Principj Elementari della Lingua Italiana.
Milano, 1829. 1 vol. 8vo.
Lemmi (Giov. Spirito), Element! ragionati della Lingua To-
scana. Liv6rno, 1808. 1 vol. 8vo.
WORKS EXAMINED. XXI
Lucchesini (Cesare], Dell' Illustrazione delle Lingue Antiche e
Moderne, e principalmente dell' Italiana. Lucca, .
2 vol. 8vo.
Mdier (Andrea), Delia Lingua Comune d' Italia. Venezia,
1822. 1 vol. 12rno.
Mdnni (Dom&nico Maria), Lezioni di Lingua Toscana. Milano,
1824. 1 vol. 12mo.
Martignoni ( Girolamo), Nuovo Metodo per la Lingua Italiana la
piil Scelta, estensivo a tiitte le Lingue. Milano, 1743. 2 vol.
4to.
Mastrofini (Marco), Teoria e Prospetto, ossia Dizionario Critico
de' Verbi Italian! coniugati, speciahnente degli anomali, e
mal-noti. Roma, 1814. 2 vol. 4to.
Mastroti (Francesco), Corso di Lingua Italiana. Napoli, 1833*
1 vol. 8vo.
Mazzinghi, Ortografia Italiana. Napoli, 1829. 1 vol. 12mo.
Meidinger, Praktische Italienische Grammatik, wodurch man
diese Sprache auf eine ganz neue, und sehr leichte Art
in kurzer Zeit griindlich erlernen kann. Leipzig, 1821. 1
vol. 8vo.
Mendgio (Egidio), Origini della Lingua Italiana. Parigi, 1669.
1 vol. fol.
Menzini (Benedetto), Delia Costruzione Irregolare della Lingua
Toscana. Verona, 1744. 1 vol. 4to.
Momo (Giovanni), Sintassi, Frasi, e Voci per perferzionarsi nella
Lingua Italiana. Milano, 1809. 1 vol. 8vo.
Monti ( Vincenzo], Proposta di alciine Correzioni ed Aggiiinte al
Vocabolario della Crusca. Milano, 1826. 7 vol. 8vo.
Mucci (Domenico), Nuova Grammatica Italiana, formata su i
Principj di Grammatica Generale. Napoii, 1832. 1 vol. 12mo.
Muratori (Ludovico Jlntdnio], Dissertazioni sopra le Antichita
Italiane. Milano, 1751. 3 vol. 4to.
Napione (Francesco Galedni), Dell' Uso e de' Pregi della Lingua
Italiana. Milano, 1830. 2vol. 12mo.
JVe^t (Lorenzo), Dizionario Ortologico Pratico della Lingua Ita-
liana. Pavia, 1825. 1 vol. 8vo.
Nuova Ortografia Italiana, con 1'Aggiiinta di varie Voci Dubbie.
Padova, 1825. 1 vol. 12mo.
Onorati (Niccolb), Dizionario di Voci Dubbie Italiane. Napoli,
1783. 1 vol. 4to.
Ortografia della Lingua Italiana. MiUno, 1829. 1 vol. 18mo,
XX11 WORKS EXAMINED.
Panizzi (Antonio), An Elementary Italian Grammar. London,
1828. 1 vol. 12ino.
Parenti (Marc-Ant6nio), Annotazioni al Dizionario Italiano, che
si etampa in Bologna. Modena, 1826. 3 vol. 8vo.
Peretti (Vincent), Grammaire Italienne compose*e d'apres les
meilleurs Auteurs et Grammairiens d'ltalie. Paris, 1815. 1
vol. 8vo.
Pergamini ( Gidcomo), Trattato della Lingua Italiana. Venezia,
1613. 1vol. 8vo.
Pezzdna (Angelo), Osservazioni concernenti alia Lingua Italiana,
ed ai suoi Vocabolarj. Parma, 1823. 1 vol. 8vo.
Pistolesi ( Giam-Battista), Prospetto de5 Verb! Italian! regolari
e irregolari. Pisa, 1813. 1 vol. 4to.
P6nza (Michele), L' Annotatore degli Errori di Lingua. Tori-
no, 1829. 1 vol. 8vo.
, Grammatica della Lingua Italiana. Torino, 1834. 1
vol. 12mo.
Puoti (Basilio), Regole Elementari della Lingua Italiana. Na-
poli, 1836. 2 vol. 12mo.
Rabbi (Carlo Costdnzo), Sinonimi ed Aggiunti Italiani. Vene-
zia. 1817. 1 vol. 4to.
Romdni ( Giovanni), Teorica della Lingua Italiana. Milano, 1825.
2vol. 8vo.
'• — , Teorica de' Sinonimi Italiani. Milano, 1825. 1 vol.
8vo.
, Dizionario Generale de' Sinonimi Italiani. Milano, 1826.
3 vol. 8vo.
, Osservazioni sopra Varie Voci del Vocabolario della
Criisca. Milano, 1826. 1 vol. 8vo.
, Opiiscoli Scelti sulla Lingua Italiana. Milano, 1826. 1
vol. 8vo.
Rosdsco (Girolamo), Delia Lingua Toscana, Dialoghi Sette. Mi-
lano, 1824. 2 vol. 12mo.
Roster (Gidcomo), Osservazioni Grammatical! intorno alia Lin-
gua Italiana. Firenze, 1826. 1 vol. 8vo.
, Element! Grammatical! Ragionati di Lingua Italiana.
Firenze, 1827. 1 vol. 8vo.
Salvidti (Leondrdo), Avvertimenti della Lingua sopra il Deca-
merone. Milano, 1810. 3 vol. 8vo.
Saniagnello (M.\ A Complete Grammar of the Italian Lan-
guage, London, 1828. 1 vol, 12mo.
WORKS EXAMINED. XX111
Scilta di V6ci della Lingua Italiana, con Regole ed Osservazioni.
Milano, 1828. 1 vol. 12mo.
Sodve (Francesco), Grammatica Ragionata della Lingua Ita-
liana, colle Aggiiinte di Antonio Bianchini. Brescia, 1829.
1 vol. 12mo.
Solddti (Matteo), Sullo Stato presente della Lingua Italiana.
(Atti dell' Acad. Ital., vol. I.)
Sortsi (Pier-Domenico), Erudimenti della Lingua Italiana.
Milano, 1831. 1 vol. 12mo.
Spadqfora (Pldcido), Prosodia Italiana, colla Giunta di tre brevi
Trattati ; T uno della Z, e sua varieta ; e P altro dell' E e
O : il terzo della buona e rea Proniinzia. Venezia, 1820.
2 vol, 8vo.
Tommaseo (Niccolb), Nuovo Dizionario de' Sinonimi della Lin-
gua Italiana. Firenze, 1830. 1 vol. 8vo.
Toselli (Ottdvio), Origine della Lingua Italiana. Bologna,
1831. 3vol. 8vo.
Fdnzon (Carlo Antonio^ Grammatica Ragionata della Lingua
Italiana. Livorno, 1834. 1 vol. 8vo.
, Dizionario Universale della Lingua Italiana. Livorno,
1827. 3 vol. 8vo.
Vdrchi (Benedetto), L' Ercolano, o Ragionamento sulle Lingue,
ed in particolare della Toscana e Fiorentina. Milano, 1803.
1 vol. 8vo.
Vergani (M. A.), A New and Complete Italian Grammar. Leg-
horn, 1824. 1 vol. 12mo.
Vocdboldrio degli Accademici della Crusca. Venezia, 1763.
7 vol. 4to.
? colle Aggiunte di Antonio Cesari. Verona,
7 vol. 4to.
— — Universale della Lingua Italiana. Napoli, 1829 —
[Iprimi]5 vol. 4to., [che contengono le lettere A — RU.
(Opera in corso.)]
Zanobetti ( Giovanni), Nuovo Dizionario Portatile della Lingua
Italiana. Livorno, 1827. 1 vol. 16mo.
Zotti (Romualdo), Grammaire Italienne, et Themes sur la Lan-
gue Italienne. Paris, 1823. 2 vol. 12mo.
A TABLE
OF THE ABBREVIATIONS OF THE NAMES OF AUTHORS AND OF
THE WORKS QUOTED IN THIS GRAMMAR.
AGN. PAND, o. Pandolfmi (Jgnolo), 'Trattato del Governo
deila Famiglia,' pagina o.
Alam. Colt. o. o. Jllam&nni (Luigi), ' La ColtivazioneJ libro
o. pag. o.
Alberg. Nov. *#/&erga/i-Capacelli (Francesco), < ./Vbi'£//e.5
Albert. ) JUbertano, Giudice da Brescia, Volgarizza-
Abertan. c. o. ] mento de' ' Tre Trattati,' capitolo o.
. o. o. , , Trattato o. cap. o.
Alf. Fil. o. o. ? Alfiiri (Vittorio), 'Tragedie,' Filippo, atto
Filip. o. o. \ o. scerm o.
Antig. o. o. , Jlnligone, atto o. scena o.
Saul. o. o. , S'litt. atto o. scena o.
Alg. lett. A!gar6Ui (Francesco), 'Lettered
Alleg. ^ Allteri (Alessandro), { Lettere e Rime,'
Allegr. o. \ x pag. o.
Ambr. Cof. o. o. Ambra (Francesco d'), * La Cofandria^
comedm, atto o. sc^na o.
Am. Ant. ^l Jlmmaestramenti degli JlntichiJ raccolti e
Amm. Ant d. o. r. o. > volgarizzati da Fra Bartolommeo da San
o. o. o. ) Concordio, distribuzione o. rubrica o. am-
maestra mento o.
Amor. Amortlti (( arlo), i Viaggio ai Tre Laghi ;
Maggiore, di Lucano, e di Cdmo.'
Ann, Car. Vedi Car., Caro.
Ann. Vang. * Jlnnotazidni sopra gli Evangtlj.' (Testo a
ptnna. citato nel Vocabolario della Criisca.)
Ariost. ) Ariosto (Ludovico), ' Orlando FurwsoJ can-
Far, o. o. £ to o. stanza o.
B. Vedi Boc.c.
Barb. Gr. Gr. Barberi (J-Ph.), * Grammaires des Gram-
maires Italiennes.'
Bellinc. Beltincioni (Bernardo), ' Rime.'
Bemb. ? Bimbo (Pietro), 4 Stdria di Venezia,' lib. o.
Stor. o. o. J pag. o.
Lett. o. o. o. ., l Leliere Volgari,' voliime o. lib. o.
pag. o.
Ben.Varch. Vedi Parch.
TABLE OF ABBREVIATIONS.
XXV
Bent. \Bentivoglio (Cardinal Guido), « Letter ej
lett. o. S lettera o.
Benv. Cell. Oref. o. Cellini (Benvenuto\ 'Trattati (due) delP
Oreficeria, e della Scultura,' pag. o.
Ber. Tass. lett. Tdsso (Bernardo), ' Lettere?
Bern. Orl. o. o. Berni (Francesco), ' Orlando InnamordtoJ
canto o. stanza o.
, 'Rime Burlesche,' vol. o. pag. o.
^ Boccdccio (Giovanni), < Decamerone,' Intro-
duzione.
'Decam.' Proemio.
giorndta o. Proemio.
giorndta o. novella o.
giornata o. canzone.
Conclusione.
Rim. o. o.
B.
Bocc.
Intr. i
Introd.
Proem.
g. o. Proem.
g. o. n. o.
g. o. canz.
Concl.
Corb.
A met. o.
Fiam.
Fiamm. o. o.
Pdloc. o.
Lab.
Laber. o.
Tes. o. o.
Testam.
Vis. o.
Vis. Amor.
Com. Dant.
Vit. Dant. o.
Boccal.
Boez. Varch. o. o.
Borgh. Rip. o.
Tosc. o.
Arm. Fam. o.
tine,' discorso, pag. o.
Bott. Stor. Am. 1. o. Botta (Carlo), « StMa della Guerra della
Independenza degli Stati Uniti di^m^n-
ca,' lib. o.
Brun. iBrunetto Latini, 'II Tesoro' volgarizzato
Brunet. Tes. o. o. £ da Bono Giamboni, lib. o, cap. o.
Pataff. o. , < II Patdffio,' cap. o. (Testo a pen-
na, citdto nel Vocabolario.)
Vedi Lab., Laber. o.
, 'JlmetoJ pag. o.
, ' FiammettaJ lib. o. numero o.
, { Fildcolo ' e ' FilocopoJ lib. o.
, ' Laberinto d' Amore,' ossia * il Cor-
baccio,' num. o.
, * Teseide,' canto o. stanza o.
, * Testament
, ' Jlmor6sa Visione,' canto o.
, 4 Comento sopra i primi Diciassette
Canti delP Inferno di Ddnte.'
, ' Vita di Dante JLlighieriJ pag. o.
Boccallni (Traiano), 'Ragguagli di Par-
nasso.'
Vedi Varch.
Borghini (Raffaello), 4I1 RiposoJ num. o.
, ( Vincenzo), * Delia Toscdna, e delle
sue Citta,' discorso, pag. o.
-, * DelP Arme delle Famiglie Fioren-
XXVI
TABLE OF ABBREVIATIONS.
Buom.
Ling. Tosc. o.
o. o.
Buon.
Buonar. Rim. o.
Fier. Introd.
Buommattei (Benedetto), ' Delia Lingua
Toscdna, Libri Due,' lib. o. trattato o.
cap. o.
Buonarroti ( Michel- A*ngelo, il vecchio),
1 Rime,' pag. o.
(Michel-Angelo, il giovane), 'La
* FieraJ comedia in cinque giornate, Intro-
L duzione.
o. o. o. J giornata o. atto o. scena o.
Burchiell. p. o. s. o. Burchiello, l Soneiti^ pdrte o. sonetto o.
But. Com. Dant. Buti (Francesco di Bartolo da), i Comento,
ovvero Lettura sopra il Pcema di Dante.1
Inf. Purg. Par. o. Inferno, Purgatorio, Paradiso, canto o.
Cant. Cam. o. Cdnti Carnascialeschi, pag. o. (Testo a
penna, citato net Vocabolario.)
Car. >Caro (Aimibal), 4 Lettere Familiari,' parte
Caro. lett. o. o. 5 °- P'^S- °-
Matt. s. o. , ' Mattaccini1 sonetto o.
Casa Galat. o. Cdsa (Monsignor Giovanni della), * II
Galateo1 pag. o.
lett. o. , « Lettere1 lettera o.
Castigl. Cort. 1. o. o. Castiglione (Baldassare), ' II
lib. o. pag. o.
Cavalc. > Cavdlca (Fra Domenico), Volgarizzamento
Att. A post o 5 degli ' Atti degli Apostoli? pag. o.
Sin '
-Espos. Simb.
o. o.
Frutt. Ling.
Med. cuor.
Pungil. o.
Speccri. Cr.
Stolt. o.
Cavalcanti.
Cecch. Dot. o.o.
Esalt. cr.
Inc. o. o.
Spir. o. o.
Cesar.
Cinon. t o.
1 Esposizione del Simbolo degli
Apdstoli,' lib. o. pag. o.
, ' Trattato de' Frutti delta Lingua.1
, ' Medicina del Cuore.'
, ' PungitinguaJ cap. o.
1 Specchio della CroceS
Trattato deile * Trenta Sloltizie
dell' Uomo,' pag. o.
'Esposizione delle sue Canzoni.'
Cer.chi (Giovan-Maria), l La DoteJ comedia,
atto o. scena o.
, ' L' Esaltazione della CroceJ come-
dia, atto o. scena o.
1 Gl' Incantesimij' comedia, atto o.
sc£na o.
4 Lo SpiritoJ comedia, atto o. sce-
na o.
CesaroHi (Melchior), Traduzione dell' l Ili-
ade d' Om^ro.'
Cindnio, * Osservazioni della Lingua Itali-
ana,' tomo o.
TABLE OF ABBREVIATIONS.
XXV11
Class, Esempio tirato da Auto re Cldssico, del
quale non si rimembra il nome. Occorre
rarissime volte.
Cort. Osserv. Corticelli (Salvadore), ' Regole ed Osserva-
zioni della Lingua Toscana.'
Cr. ? Crescenzi (Pietro de'), 'Trattato dell' Agri-
Cresc. o. o. o. $ coltura, lib. o. cap. o. num. o.
Cron. Mor. * Crimea di Giovanni Morelli.'
Cms. ? ' Vocabolario degli Accademici della Cru-
Crusca. S sc(1*'
Dant. Inf. o. Dante Atighifri, 'Divina Commedia,' Infer-
wo, canto o.
, * Comm.' Purgatorio, canto o.
, , Paradiso, canto o.
, ' ConvivioS
,'Rime.'
— Pur. & Purg. o.
— Par.&Parad.o.
Conv.
Rim.
Dav.
Davan.
Seism, p. o.
Colt.
Tac. ann.l.o. o.
> Davanzdti (Bernardo), '6pere.'
, < Scisma d' Inghilterra,' pag. o.
— , t Coltivazione Toscana.'
, Volgarizzamento degli ; Anndli di
Cornelio Tacito,' lib. o. pag. o.
~, Volgarizzamento delle c Storie di
Taciio? lib. o. pag. o.
, Volgarizzamento della * Germdnia
di TdcitoS pag. o.
, Volgarizzamento della ' Vita di
Giulio Agricola di Tacito,' pag. o.
-, Volgarizzamento del * Dialogo del-
St. )
Stor.
Tac. Stor. o. o.)
Tac. Germ. o. -
Vit. Agr. o.
— Tac.Perd.Eloq.o.-
Tac. Post. o.
traduzione degli Anndli di Tacito? pag. o.
Declam. Quintil. C. Volgarizzamento delle ' Declamazioni di
Quintilidno, testo a penna di Matteo
Caccini. (Citato nel Vocabolario.)
Volgarizzanento della 'Locuzidne
trio Falereo ' di Piero Segni, pag. o.
le Cagioni della Perduta Eloquenza di
Tacito,' pag. o.
1 Postille ai primi se*i libri della sua
Demetr. Segn. o.
Den.
Riv.Ital. l.o.
c. o.
Letter.
Lett.
Sag. Letter.
[ Denina (Carlo),
I o. cap. o.
Rivoluzioni dj ItdliaJ lib.
, ' Discorso Sopra le Vicende della
LetteraturaS
, * Sdggio sopra la Letterattira Itali-
dna.'
XXVlll TABLE OF ABBREVIATIONS.
Dep. Decam. o. 'Annotazioni e Discorsi sopra alcuni luoghi
del Decamerone di Giovanni Boccaccio,
fatti da' Deputdti ' [eletti dal Gran-Diica
Cosimo 1. 1' anno 1565, per la correzione
di quell' 6pera], pag. o.
Dial. S. Greg. m. Volgarizzamento de' ' Didloghi di San Gre-
gorio Jlldgno.9
Din. Comp. o. o. Compdgni (Dmo\ < Storia, ovvero Oronaca
Fiorentina, lib. o. pag. o.
JDittam. ) l II Dittamondo ' di Fazio degli Uberti, lib.
o. o. $ o. cap. o.
Eriz. Giorn. Erizzo (Sebastiano), « Le Sei Giorndte.'
Fav. Esop. o. Volgarizzamento delle * Fdvole d* Esopo?
pag. o. (Testo a ptnna, citato net Vo-
cabolario.)
Fior. Vt. c. o. * Fiore di Virtu? cap. o.
A . ? Firenzuola (ignolo), Traduzione dell' «^-
— As d' 6r. o. I sino * «* d' Apuleio,' pag. o.
— dial. bell. donn. o. , * Didlogo dilU Bellezze delle D6n-
we,' pag. o.
disc. an. o. , ' Discdrso degli AnimdliJ pag. o.
Luc. o. o. , 1 1 Liicidi? comedia, atto o. scena o.
nov. o. ' , l NovelleJ novella o.
Trin. o. o. , l Trinuzia? comedia, atto o. scena o.
Fosc. Foscolo (Ugo), ' Esame Critic o de' Commen-
tatori di Dante.'
Fr. Giord. ? Fra Giordano da Ripalta, « Prediche, '
Fra Giord. o. J pag. o.
S. Pred. o. , testo (a penna) Salvidti, prtdica o.
(Citato nel Vocabolario.)
Fr. Guitt. ? Fra Guittone d' Arezzo, « Lettered lette-
Fra Guitt. lett. o. $ tera o.
Franc. Barb. o. o. Barberino (Francesco), * Document! d' A-
more,' poesie, pag. o. verso o.
Fr. Sacch. ^
Fran. Sacch. > Vedi Sacch.
Franc. Sacch. }
Fris. Elog. Galil. Fiisi (Paolo), « EUgio di Galileo Galilei:
|^|j Q \ Galileo Galilei, « Saggiat6re,' pag. o.
Mach. Sol. o. , * Istoria e Dimostrazioni intorno
alle Mdcchie Soldri, e loro accident!,'
pag. o.
Gang. ? Ganganelli (Giovan-Vincenzo Antonio [Pa-
lett. S Pa Clem6nte XIV.] ), < Lettered
TABLE OF ABBREVIATIONS.
XXIX
Cell.
Circ. o. o.
Giamb. 1. o.
Gian. Stor. Civ.
Nap. 1. o. c. o.
Gio. Fior. Pecor.
g. o. n. o.
Gio. & Giov. Vill.
1. o. c. o. o.
Giral. lett.
Gold.
Avvent.
Ver. Am.
Gr. ?
S. Gir. o. o. £
Gram. Gram.
Guar. Past. Fid. o. o.
Guicc.
Stor. o. o.
Stor. Ital.
Guid.
o.
Incer. c. o.
Lab. o.
Lasc. Sibill. o. o.
Spir. o. o.
Lib. Cur. Malatt.
Libr. Adorn. Donn.
Lipp. M. o. o. ?
Malm. o. o. $
Liv. dec. o.
Lod, Mar. Rim. o.
Lod. Nov.
Lor. Med. c. o.
Gelli (Giovam-Battista), * La Circe,' dialogo
o. pag. o.
Giambulldri (Pier-Francesco), ' Storia d'
Europa,' lib. o.
Giannone (Pielro), ' Stdria Civile del Regno
di NdpoUJ lib. o. cap. o.
Vedi Ser Giov. Pecor.
Vill&ni ( Giovanni), c Storia,' lib. o. cap. o.
num. o.
Girdhli (Giraldo), « Ltttere.'
Goldoni (Carlo), < L' Avventurttre Onorato,'
comedia.
* II Vtro AmicoJ comedia.
Volgarizzame'nto de' c Grddi di San Giro-
lamoj cap. o. pag. o.
Vedi Barb. Gr. Gr.
Guarini (Giovam-Battista), 'Pastor Fido,'
atto o. scena o.
Guicciardini (Francesco), * Stdria d? Italia?
lib. o. pag. o.
Guido Giudice dalle Colonne di Messina,
Volgarizzamento della* Storia della Guer-
ra Troiana' pag. o. (Testo aptnna, citato
nel Vocabolario.)
' Rime Antiche d' Incerti JlutoriJ canzone o.
Vedi Bocc. Lab., Laber.
Grazzini (Anton-Francesco) detto il Ldsca,
1 La SibillaS comedia, atto o. scena o.
, ' La SpiritdtaJ comedia, . atto o.
scena o.
Volgarizzame'nto del l Libro, ossia Trattato
della Cura di tutte le Malattlo: (Te»to
a penna, citato nel Vocabolario.)
' Libro degli Jldornamenli delle DdnneS
(T6sto a penna, citato nel Vocabolario.)
Lippi (Lorenzo), { II Malmantile Racqui-
stato,' canto o. stanza o.
Volgarizzamento delle * Deche (Prima e
Terza) di Tito LivioJ deca o. (Testo a,
penna, citato nel Vocabolario.)
Martelli (Lodovico,) * .Rime,' pag. o.
Lodoli (Francesco), « Novelle.'
Medici (Lorenzo dP), *Canzoni a Ballo,
canzone o.
XXX
TABLE OF ABBREVIATIONS.
— , .LIU. ./veftGfcu, siaiiz-a v.
dia, Prdlogo.
Mach. j
Stor. Fior. 1. o. ]
Cnm
^Machiavelli (Niccolo), ' Istorie Florentine,'
I lib. o.
4 f^nvn^rf'tP '
lett.
, i Lettered
i Tl Pry-noVnr '
Maestruzz. o. o.
Volgarizzamento della ' Somma Pisanella,
Maff. Mer. o. o.
Manz. Prom. Spos.
c. o.
Matt Fran. )
— Franz. Rim. o.o. {
Matt. Vill. o. o.
Mes. Bin. Rim. 1. o.
Cin. o.
Metast. Artas. o. o.
lett.
Miliz. Art. Dis.
Mor. S. Greg. &
Gregor. o. o.
Nov. Ant. o.
Ovid. Pist.
Pall.
detta il Maestruzzo? lib. o. cap. o. (Testo
a penna, citato nel Vocabolario.)
Maffei (Scipione), ' MeropeJ tragedia, atto
o. scena o.
Manzoni (Alessandro), ' I Promessi SpfoiJ
cap. o.
Franzesi (Matteo), l Rime Burlesche,' vol. o.
pag. o.
Villdni (Matteo], t Storia,' lib, o. cap. o.
Messer Bino, l Rime Burlesche,' lib. o.
- Cino da Pistoia, ' Rime.' pag. o.
Metastdsio (Pietro), 'JlrtaserseJ dramma,
atto o. scena o.
Passav. o.
Ver. Pen.
Spec. Ver.
Pen.
Past. Fid. o. o.
Pataff. o.
Pecor. g. o. n. o.
Petr.]
8. O.
C. O.
lett.
m
Milizia (Francesco), cDizionario delle Belle
Arti del Disegno.'
Vedi Zan. da Strat.
4 II Novellino, ossia Cento NbMe JlnticlieJ
novella o.
Volgarizzamerrto delle 'Pistole rf' Ovidio.'
(Testo a penna, citato nel Vocabolario.)
Pallavicino, ' Concilio di Trento.'
Passavdnti (Fra Jacopo), ' Specchio di Ver a
Penitenza, pag. o.
Vedi Guar. Past. Fid. o. o.
Vedi Brun., Brunei. Pataff.
Gio. Fior. Pecor.
I Petrdrca (Francesco), ' Rime.'
• , ' Rime,' sonetto. o.
I , , canzone o.
, l Letter e Familiari:
TABLE ON ABBREVIATIONS.
XXXI
• Tri.
• Trionf.
Am. )
• Amor. 5
Fam.
— - Mort.
Tern. ?
Temp. $
c.o.
Uom. ill. o.
, l TrMnfi.'
, < Trionfo tf Amore?
, - £ delta Fdma?
'del Tempo^
, cap. o.
< Vite degli Uomini lllustri? volga-
rizzate, pag. o.
Pign. Fav. Pignotti (Lorenzo), ' j
Poliz. St. o. o. Polizidno, (Agnolo), ' Stdnze per la Giostra
di Giuliano,' canto o, stanza o.
Pros. Fior. o. 'Prose Florentine,'- p&g. o.
Red. annot. Ditir. Redi (Francesco), ' AnnoJ,azi6ni al suo Di-
tirdmbo'
cons. o. o. ' Consulti Medici, vol. o. pag. o.
Ditir. o. , 'Bacco in Toscana,' ditirdmbo, pag. o.
Ins. o. , ' Esperienze intorno alia generazione
degP Insetti' pag. o.
lett. o. o. , ' Lettere Familiari,' vol. o. pag. o.
Vip. o. o. , ' Osservazioni intorno alle Vipere?
lettere, vol. o. pag. o.
Ricett. Fior. o. ' Ricettdrio FiortntinoJ pag. o.
Rim. Ant p. o. ' Rime Antiche, ossia Raccolta di Sonetti,
Canzoni, ed altre Rime di diversi antichi
poeti Toscani,' pdg. o.
Rosasco. Rosdsco (Girolamo), ' Delia Lingua Tosca-
na, Dialoghi Sette.'
Sacch. n. o. Saccketti (Franco), ' NovelleJ novella o.
rim. o. , l Rime? pag. o.
Op. div. o. , ' O'pere Diverse,' pag. o.
Sag. Nat. esp. o. ' Sdggi di Naturali Esperienze' fatte nell'
Accademia del Cimento, descritti da Lo-
renzo Magalotti, pag. o.
I Salvidti( Leonardo), 'Avvertimenti della Lin-
gua sopra il Decamerone,' vol. o. lib. o.
I cap. o.
, ' II GrdnchioJ comedia, atto o. sce-
Salv. Avvert. vol.
o. 1. o.
o. o. o.
1 Granch. o. o.
Spin. o. o.
, 4 La SpmaJ comedia, atto o. sce-
Salvin.Pros.Tosc. o. Salvini (Anton-Maria), 'Prose ToscdneJ
pag. o.
XXX11 TABLE OF ABBREVIATIONS.
Seal. S. Agost. Volgarizzamento della * Scdla del Paradise,'
attribuita a San? Jlgostino. (Testo a pin-
na, citato ml Vocabolario.)
Segn. Crist, instr. ) Segneri (Paolo), <I1 Cristidno Instruito nella
o. o. $ siia Legge,' parte o. ragionamento o.
Mann. Marz. o. , ' Manna dell' anima,' mese di Mar-
zo. giorno o.
Nov. o. , , mese di Novembre. giorno o.
Sen. ) Volgarizzamento delle * Pistole di Seneca?
Pist. o. £ pistola o,
Ser Giov. Fior. 1
Pecor. f Ser Giovanni Fiorentino, ' II Pecoronc,'
— Gio. Fior. Pe- £ giorndta o. novella o.
cor. g. o. n. o, )
Soav. Nov. Sodve (Francesco) ' Novelle Morali.'
Sod. Colt. o. Soderini (Giovan-Vittorio), * La Coltivazwne
delle Viti,' pag. o.
St. Agost. Citt. Dio. Volgarizzamento della < Citta di IM di
o. o. SanV Jlgostino, lib. o. cap. o. (Testo a
penna, atdto nel Vocabolario.)
Stor. Pistol, p. o. * Storie Pistolesi, ovve.ro delle cose avvenute
in Toscana dal 1300 al 1348,' pag. o.
Stor. Semif. o. Volgarizzamento della ' Storia di SemifonteJ
pag. o.
Tass. Am. o. o. ? Tdsso (Torquato), 4 Jlminta, Favola Bos-
Amint. o. o. ^ chereccia,' atto o scena o.
Ger. o. o. , l Gerusalemme Liberata, canto o. stan-
za o.
Teor. Verb. Ital. < Teorica de> Ferbi Italian^ di Giuseppe
part. o. §. o. Compagnoni, pdrte o. pardgrafo o,
^^^ett. I Tolommti (Claudio), « Ltttere.'
Tratt. segr. cos. < Trattdto delle Segrete cdse delle Donne:
donn. (Testo a penna, citato nel Vocabolario.)
Vanz. Fdnzon (Carlo Antonio), « Gframmatica Ra-
gionata della Lingua Italiana.'
Varch. ) Varchi( Benedetto), Traduzione della4 Con-
Boez. o. o. \ solazione Filosofica di Boezio, lib. o. pro-
sa & rima o.
Ercol. o. — , < Ercoldno, ossia Ragionamento sul-
le Lingue,' pag. o.
Rim. o. l Rime,7 pag. o.
Sen. ben. o. o. Traduzione de' libri de' l Benefaj di Stne-
caj lib. o. cap. o.
Vas. Vasari (Giorgio), ' Trattato d^lla Pittura.'
Vill. Vedi Gio. &f Giov. Vill.
TABLE OF ABBREVIATIONS.
XXX111
Vine. Mart. rim. o.
Vit. S. Ant
— S. Cater.
— S. Franc.
— S. G. Bat.
Martelli( Vincenzo), 'Rime e Lettere,' pag. o
6 Vita di SanC Antonio.'9 (Testo a penna,
citato nel Vocabolario)
6 di Santa Caterina da Siena.'
' di San Francisco?
r- S. Giov. Guald.
(Guad. lib.) o.
— SS. PP. o. o.
-- Pad. o. o.
Zan. da Strat. o. o.
di San Giovam-Battista.'
- - — di San Giovam-Battisfa, MS. della
Librerla de' Guadagni, pag. o. (Citato
Vite dff Sdnti Pa-
Zibald. Andr. o. o.
nel Vocabolario.)
> Volgarizzamento delle
drij vol. o. pag. o.
Zandbi da Strata, Volgarizzamento de'
f Morali di San Gregorio Magno,' lib. o.
num. o.
* Zibaldone, ovverp Libro di Varie Cose,'
testo a penna di Andrea Andreim, parte
o. pag. o. (Citato nel Vocabolario.)
ITALIAN GRAMMAR.
INTRODUCTION.
(jrR AMMAR is the art of speaking and writing correctly.
SPEAKING and WRITING are the expression of our thoughts
by words.
WORDS may be considered as articulate sounds, or as signs
of our thoughts.
Words considered as ARTICULATE SOUNDS, are formed of
syllables, and syllables of letters.
SYLLABLES consist of one or more letters pronounced
by a single impulse of the voice, and constituting a word, or
part of a word.
Words that consist of one syllable, are called monosyllables;
those that consist of two syllables, are called dissyllables ; and
those that consist of more syllables, are* called poly syllables.
LETTERS are certain figures or characters, which represent
sounds and articulations.
SOUNDS are simple emissions of the voice ; and ARTICULA-
TIONS are the modifications which sounds receive by the
movements of the organs of speech. The letters which repre-
sent the sounds, as, a, e, i, fyc., are called vowels ; and those
which represent the articulations, as, b, c, d, fyc., are called
consonants, because they can only be sounded ivith a vowel.
The union of two vowels, pronounced by a single impulse of
the voice, is called a diphthong; and that of three vowels pro-
nounced in like manner, is called a triphthong.
Words considered as SIGNS OF OUR THOUGHTS, are
divided into several classes, which constitute the different
PARTS OF SPEECH. These in Italian are nine ; viz. the
article, noun, pronoun, verb, participle, adverb, preposition, con-
junction, and interjection.
Of these nine Parts of Speech, the article, noun, pronoun,
verb, and participle, are VARIABLE, that is, change their ter-
mination ; the rest are INVARIABLE.
1
2 INTRODUCTION.
The ARTICLE is a word placed before a noun to denote
the extent of its signification ; as, il, lo, la, ' the' : — IL libro,
' the book' ; LO sprone, i the spur' ; LA. cdsa, l the house'.
The NOUN is either substantive, or adjective.
A SUBSTANTIVE noun is a word, which serves to denote a
person or thing ; as, Pietro, ' Peter' ; sole , ' sun' ; virtu, ' virtue'.
, Substantive nouns are either proper or common.
A proper noun is one, which is individually applicable to a
person or thing ; as, Cesare, ' Caesar' ; Roma, t Rome'.
A common noun is one, which may be applied to all persons
or things of the same kind ; as, uomo, ' man' ; citta, ' city'.
Some common nouns are also called collective, from their
presenting to the mind the idea of a collection of persons or
things ; as, gente, ' people' ; esercito, ' army'.
An ADJECTIVE noun is a word added to a substantive to ex-
press its quality; as, dotto, 'learned' ; bella, 'beautiful': — un uo-
mo DOTTO, ' a learned man' ; una BELLA citta, ' a beautiful city'.
Adjectives may express the quality of an object, either abso-
lutely, that is, without any relation to other objects, or relatively
to other objects ; which produces different degrees of qualitica*-
tionr^ these have been reduced to the following three, viz. the
positive, comparative, and superlative.
The positive is the adjective itself, expressing the quality of
an object, without any relation of comparison ; as ncco, ' rich' ;
po'vero, ' poor'.
The comparative is the adjective expressing a relation of
superiority, inferiority, or equality, between two or more objects
in comparison ; as, piu,meno, or si ricco, ' more, less, or so rich' ;
piu, meno, or si povero, ' more, less, or so poor' : — Pietro e PIU,
or MENO RICCO di Tommdso, ' Peter is more, or less rich than
Thomas' ; Tommdso e PIU, or MENO POVERO di Paolo, ' Thomas
is more, or less poor than Paul' ; Pietro e Tommdso sono si Ric-
CHI, or si POVERI come Paolo, ' Peter and Thomas are so rich,
or so poor as Paul'.
The Superlative is the adjective expressing the quality of the
object in the highest degree of superiority, or the lowest degree
of inferiority.
There are two kinds of superlative, the relative, and the
absolute.
The relative superlative expresses the superiority or inferi-
ority of an object, with relation to others ; as, il piu, or il meno
ricco, ' the most, or the least rich' ; il piu, or il mtno povero,
' the most, or the least poor' : — Tommdso e IL PIU, or IL MENO
RICCO, — Paolo e IL PIU, or IL MENO POVERO, di tutti ; ' Thomas
is the most, or the least rich,— Paul is the most, or the least
poor, of all'.
INTRODUCTION. 3
The absolute superlative shows that the object spoken of
possesses a quality in the superlative degree, but without
reference to any other ; as, ricchissimo, ' very rich' ; poverissimo,
4 very poor'.
A great number of Italian nouns are susceptible of a change
of termination, which, modifying the primitive idea expressed
by them, augments or diminishes their signification ; as, uo'mo,
4 man' ; OMONE, i large man' : ruscello, ' brook' ; RUSCEL.LETTO,
'small brook'. The nouns thus altered, are called AUGMENTA-
TIVES and DIMINUTIVES.
With nouns are usually classed the NUMERALS, which are
either cardinal, or ordinal.
Cardinal numbers are those, which determine a collection of
objects, with regard to their number or quantity; as, uno,
1 one' ; died, i ten'.
, Ordinal numbers determine objects with regard to their order
or arrangement ; as, primo, ' first' ; decimo, ' tenth'.
Italian nouns are varied by gender and number.
Gender is a division of nouns according to sex. Nouns
denoting males are masculine; nouns denoting females are
feminine. This division, which properly regards only nouns
having sex, is in Italian extended also to all other nouns,
though they have no sex ; so that every noun is either of the
masculine or feminine gender. But there are certain nouns
which belong to both genders, and these are said to be of the
common gender.
JVumber is the designation of one or more objects. There
are two numbers, viz. the singular and plural. The singular
designates one single person or thing ; the plural, more than
one person or thing.
The various relations of nouns, which in Latin are denoted
by different terminations, or cases, are expressed in Italian
by certain prepositions placed before them ; and for the nom-
inative and accusative of the Latin, have been substituted the
terms subjective, and objective ; and for the genitive, dative, and
ablative, — the terms relation of possession, of attribution, and of
derivation.
A PRONOUN is a word used instead of a noun, already
expressed, to prevent its frequent repetition ; and like the noun
is either substantive or adjective.
Substantive pronouns are either personal, conjunctive, relative,
or interrogative ; and adjective pronouns are either possessive,
demonstrative, or indefinite.
4 INTRODUCTION.
The personal pronouns are those, which mark the persons.
The persons are three, viz. the first, second, and third. The
first is the person speaking ; as, io, ' I' ; no'i, ' we' : — the second
is the person spoken to ; as, tu, ' thou' ; voi, ' you' : — and the
third is the person spoken of; as, egli, 'he' ; ella, ' she' ; eglino.
elleno, l they'.
The conjunctive pronouns are those, which are always joined
to a verb. They are derived from the personal pronouns, and
are divided into conjunctive, property speaking ; as, mi, ' me', or
' to me' ; ti, l thee', or ' to thee' ; si, ' one's self, or l to ones'
self: — MI duole, 'it grieves me' ; TI parla, ' he speaks to thee' ;
si loda, 'he praises himself: — and relative conjunctive pro-
nouns ; as, ne, ' of it, of him, of her', or i of them' ; — NE vorrei
veder la fine, ' 1 should like to see the end of it'.
The relative pronouns are those, which refer to a person or
thing, that has been before spoken of; as, chi, ' who' or ' he
that'; die, il qudle, 'who', or 'which that': — CHI si umilia si
esalta, 'who', or 'he that humbles himself exalts himself: V uo-
mo, CHE or il QUALE scrive, 'the man, who or that writes'; il libro,
CHE or il QUALE io leggo, ' the book, which or that I read'.
The person or thing, which relative pronouns refer to, is
called the antecedent.
The interrogative pronouns are those, which are used to
interrogate, or ask a question; as, chi? 'who?' che? 'what?7
qudle ? 'which?' — CHI e? 'who is it?' ciiE/dfe? 'what are
you doing ?' QUALE volete^ ' which will you have ?'
The possessive pronouns are those, which mark the possession
of a person or a thing ; as, mio, ' my', or ' mine' ; tuo, ' thy', or
' thine' ; suo, ' his, her, hers', or ' its' : — MIO fratello, ' my bro-
ther' ; U TUO cappello, 'thy hat' ; questo e suo, 'this is his, hers',
or 'its'.
The demonstrative pronouns are those, which point out the
particular person or thing of which we speak; as, questo, ' this' ;
quello, 'that'; cotesto, 'that near you': — QUESTO giovine, ' this
youth'; QUELLO specchio, 'that looking-glass'; COTESTO libro,
' that book near you'.
The indefinite pronouns are those, which express a person
or thing in a general and unlimited sense ; as, alcuno, ' some
one' ; ogni, ' every' ; niente, ' nothing'.
Italian pronouns, like the nouns, are varied by gender and
number.
A VERB is a word, which by itself implies affirmation ; as,
essere, ' to be' : — ESSERE amabile, ' to be amiable' : and neces-
sarily supposes a subject and a quality, to which it affirms that
the subject is, or is not attributed ; as, la VIRTU e AMABILE,
INTRODUCTION. 5
4 virtue is amiable' ; la PIGRIZIA non & LODEVOLE, * slothfulness
is not laudable'.
There is but one verb, stricldy speaking ; essere, ' to be' ;
because this alone expresses affirmation. But there are other
words, which in themselves contain both the verb essere, and
the quality, which it affirms to belong- to the subject of which
we speak ; as, amdre (essere amdnte), l to love (to be a lover
of)'; sprezzdre (essere sprezzdnte), ' to despise (to be a despiser
of)': — egli AMA (egli E AMANTE), 'he loves (he is a lover of)';
ella SPREZZA (ella E SPREZZANTE), ' she despises (she is a
despiser of)' ; and to these has also been given the name of
verbs, and they are used to express the quality of the subject,
or the action it performs or it undergoes.
Verbs are commonly divided into active, passive, neuter, pro-
nominal, and unipersonaL
Active verbs are those, that express an action, which falls or
may immediately fall upon an object ; as. amdre, t to love' : —
amdre LA VIRTU, ' to love virtue'.
The object upon which the action of the verb falls, is called
the regimen or complement of this verb. Besides this first com-
plement, which is called direct, many active verbs may have a
second complement, which is called indirect ; as, scrivere. ' to
write' : — scrivere UNA LETTERA, * to write a letter' : — scrivere
una lettera AD UN AMICO, i to write a letter to a friend.' This
last, however, properly speaking, is rather a complement of the
preposition, which always precedes it.
Passive verbs are those, that express an action which falls
upon the subject ; as essere amdto, ' to be loved' : — LA VIRT& e
amdta, ' virtue is loved'.
JVew/er verbs are those, that express a state of being, or an
action which does not fall directly upon an object ; as, dormire,
1 to sleep' ; nuocere, l to be noxious'.
Pronominal verbs are those, that are varied with two pro-
nouns of the same person ; as, vender-si, ' to sell ' or ' to be
sold' : — QUESTO LJBRO si vende cdro, l this book sells', or * is
sold dear'.
To pronominal, properly, belong reflective and reciprocal verbs.
Reflective verbs are those, that express either the action of a
subject which acts upon itself; as, difender-si, 'to defend ones'
self: — io MI difendo, ' I defend myself; or an action of the sub-
ject, which terminates finally in itself; as,/dr-si un dovere ' to
make to ones' self a duty' : — EGLI si faun dovere, 'he makes to
himself a duty'.
Reciprocal verbs are those, that express the action of several
subjects, who act respectively the one upon the other ; as,
aiutdr-si ; 'to assist each other'; NOI ci aiutidmo, 'we assist
each other'.
1*
6 INTRODUCTION.
Unipersonal, or, as they are usually called, impersonal verbs,
are those, that are used only in the third person singular of
each tense ; as, accadere, l to happen': — accdde, ' it happens'; ac-
cddde, ' it happened' ; accaderd, ' it will happen'.
There are moreover two verbs, which generally assist to
vary other verbs, and which, consequently, are called auxiliary
verbs: these are, avere, 'to have'; and essere, 'to be': — AVERE
letto, f to have read' ; ESSERE paiiito, 'to (be) have departed'.
Italian verbs are varied by mood, tense, number, and person.
Mood is a particular form of the verb, which shows the man-
ner in which the action, or the state of being, is represented.
There are five moods, viz. the infinitive, indicative, conjunc-
tive, conditional, and imperative.
The infinitive, represents the action in an indefinite manner,
and without distinction of person or number ; as, scrivere, ' to
write'.
The indicative represents the action absolutely, and without
dependence on any other word ; as, io scrivo, ' I write'.
The conjunctive represents the action as depending upon
another verb with which it is connected by a conjunction ; as,
bisogna, che io SCRIVA, ' it is necessary, that I write'.
The conditional
a condition ;
could'.
The imperative represents the action in commanding, exhort-
ing, or intreating ; as, sciivi, ' write thou' ; scrivete, i write ye' ;
scrividmo, ' let us write'.
C lit SUJVI.VA, it 10 iicocooai^, tuai a. VVJ.IL^ •
iitional represents the action with dependence upon
i ; as, io SCRIVEREI, se potessi, 1 1 should write, if I
Each of these moods, except the imperative, has different
tenses.
Tense is a distinction of time, which shows when the action is
done. Time, strictly speaking, is either present, past, ex future.
The present denotes the action doing by a subject at the
very time in which we are speaking ; as, io, CANTO, ' I sing'.
The past or preterite denotes the action done by a subject
before the time in which we are speaking; as, io CANTAI, 'I
sang'.
The future denotes the action to be done by a subject after
the time in which we are speaking ; as, io CANTERO, { I will
sing'.
The preterite is divided into imperfect and perfect.
The imperfect expresses an action done in a time past, but
present in respect to another action done in a time also past :
as, io CANTAVA, qudndo voi entrdste, ' I was singing, when you
came in'.
The perfect expresses an action done in a time completely
INTRODUCTION. 7
past, and without reference to any other action ; as io CANTAI
tm' aria, ' 1 sang an air'.
Tenses are either simple or compound.
Simple tenses are those, which are formed without the assist-
ance of either the auxiliary verbs avere, i to have', or essere,
4 to be'; as, pdrlo, *I speak'; venni, 'I came'; lodero, * I, will
praise'.
Compound tenses are those, which are formed of the simple
tenses of the auxiliary verb avere, ' to have', or essere, ' to be',
and the participle of the verb varied ; as, ho parldto, i I have
spoken' ; sono venuto, 1 1 (am) have come' ; avrb loddto, or sarb
loddto, 'I will have praised,' or ' will be praised'.
Each tense contains two numbers ; the singular and plural.
The number is singular, when one single subject causes
the action of the verb ; as, fo mdngio, i I eat' ; — and it is plural,
when more subjects contribute to the same action; as, NOI
mangidmo, * we eat'.
Each number has three persons, which are denoted by the
personal pronouns, io, ' I' ; tu, ' thou' ; egli, i he', or ella, ' she' ;
in the singular ; — and not, * we' ; voi, * you' ; eglino, or elleno,
t they' ; in the plural ; as, io vedo, 1 1 see' ; TU vedi, l thou seest';
EGLI or ELLA vede, 'he or she sees' : — NOI vedidmo, ' we see' ;
voi vedete, l you see' ; EGLINO or ELLENO vedono, l they see'.
The assemblage of several verbs, forming all their moods,
tenses, numbers, and persons, according to the same rule, is
called a conjugation.
Such verbs as conform to the rule of any conjugation, are
called regular; and such as differ in any respect, are called
irregular.
Verbs which are not used in certain tenses, numbers, or per-
sons, are called defective.
The PARTICIPLE is a word which partakes at the same time
of the nature of the verb and of the adjective ; as, amdnte,
'loving' ; amdto, l loved.' It partakes of the nature of the verb,
because it has its signification, and has reference to time ; as,
amdnte (che AMA) Dio, * loving (who loves) God' ; AMATO (che K
AMATO) da Dio, ' loved (who is loved) by God' ; and it partakes
of the nature of the adjective, because, like an adjective, it
qualifies a noun ; as, uomo ONORATO, * honored man' ; virtu PRO-
VATA, l tried virtue'.
Participles are divided into present and past .
The present participle expresses the action of the subject, or
the ^quality of a noun, at the moment in which we speak ; as.
amdnte, '• loving' : — dimna AMANTE, ' a loving woman'.
The past participle expresses the action or quality as per-
8 INTRODUCTION.
fected or past; as, temuto, 'feared': — castigo TEMUTO, 'feared
punishment'.
With the participle is usually classed the GERUND, which,
like the participle, is an inflexion of the verb, but has nothing
in common with the adjective.
Italian participles are varied by gender and number.
An ADVERB is a word, which serves to modify a verb, an
adjective, or another adverb, expressing the manner, or circum-
stances of its signification ; as, m'w, ' more' ; mdlto, ' very' ; dis-
tintamente, 'distinctly' : — egliparla DISTINTAMENTE, 'he speaks
distinctly'; siete MOLTO savio, 'you are very wise' ; PIU since-
ramente, ' more sincerely'.
Adverbs are divided into those of quality, order, time, place,
quantity, comparison, fyc.
Adverbs of quality are those, which express the manner in
which things are done; as, saviamente, 'wisely'; elegant entente,
' elegantly' ; inconsideratamente, ' inconsiderately' : — egli pensa
SAVIAMENTE, ' he thinks wisely' ; ilia scrive ELEGANTEMENTE,
'she writes elegantly'; hdnno agito INCONSIDERATAMENTE.
c they have acted inconsiderately'.
Adverbs of order serve to express the arrangement of things
in regard to one another ; as, prima, ' first' ; poi, ' then' ; da
principio, ' before' ; in seguito, ' afterward' : — PRIMA andremo in
Frdncia, ' we will go first to France' ; POI in Italia, ' then to
Italy' ; DA PRINCIPIO si deve evitdre il male, ' we must before
avoid evil'; IN SEGUITO si deve far del bene, ' afterward we must
do good'.
Adverbs of time are those, which express some relation of
time ; as, ieri, ' yesterday'; oggi, ' to-day'; domdni, 'to-morrow':
— lo vidi IERI, ' I saw him yesterday'; mini OGGI, 'come to-day';
partirb DOMANI, ' I shall depart to-morrow'.
Adverbs of place serve to denote the situation or the distance
of an object ; as, qui, ' here' ; la, ' there' ; vicino, ' near' ; Ion-
tdno, ' far' : — son qui, ' I am here' ; guarddte LA, ' look there' :
sta qul VICING, ' he lives near here' ; e troppo LONTANO, ' it is
too far'.
Adverbs of quantity are those, which modify an object in re-
lation to quantity ; as, poco, ' little'; assdi, ' much'; abbastdnza,
'enough': — pdrla ASSAI, 'he speaks much'; riftette POCO, 'he
reflects little' ; ne ha ABBASTANZA, ' he has enough of it'.
Adverbs of comparison serve to denote the different degrees
of quality of the objects compared ; &B,piu, ' more' ; meno, 'less7;
cosi — -come, ' so — as' :— V onore vale PIU delle ricchezze, ' honor is
worth more than riches' ; il suo cuore non e MEN bello del viso,
INTRODUCTION. 9
* her heart is not less beautiful than her face' ; egli non e si do-
cile, COME e vivace, ' he is not so docile as he is lively'.
Adverbs are either simple or compound. Simple adverbs are
those which consist of a simple word ; as, qui, ' here'; poi, 'then';
be"ne, ' well' ; and compound adverbs are those, which consist of
an adjective and the word m&nte, l manner' ; as, dolcemtnte (con
dolce mente), ' sweetly (in a sweet manner)'. There are besides
several expressions, which in several words announce the same
idea that might be expressed by one adverb ; as, di buon grddo,
' willingly' ; qudnto prima, l very soon' ; aW improvviso, ' unex-
pectedly'; and these are called ADVERBIAL PHRASES.
A PREPOSITION is a word, which is placed before a noun, a
pronoun, or a verb, to show its relation to some other word ; as,
in, ' in' ; con, ' with' ; senza, ' without' : — non e IN cdsa, ' he is
not (in the house) at home'; verro CON vat, 'I will come with
s you' ; SENZA anddr piu dlle lunghe, ' without going any further'.
Prepositions have several denominations, viz. of place, order,
time, union, opposition, fyc. according to the several relations
they express.
The word which follows the preposition is called its regimen
or complement.
A CONJUNCTION is a word, which serves to join words and
sentences together ; as, e, * and' ; ne, ' nor, neither' ; ma, * but' ;
nondimtno, 'nevertheless': — bella E buona, l handsome and good';
is'i; mdngia NE beve, l he neither eats nor drinks' ; egli e povero
MA onordto, ' he is poor but honored' ; ella e molto gidvane, e
NONDIMENO e molto sdvia, ts\\e is yet very young, and never-
theless she is very wise'.
Besides the general use of connecting words and sentences
together, conjunctions sometimes express the particular point
of view in which the mind considers the words and sentences
so connected ; hence the division of conjunctions into explica-
tive, adversative, alternative, conclusive, fyc.
An INTERJECTION is a word, which is used to express an
emotion or affection of the mind ; as, ah! ' ah !' oh! l oh !' aime!
« alas !'
The affections of the mind may be of joy, grief, indignation,
contempt, fy-c. which give to the interjections different denomi-
nations.
Of the foregoing Parts of Speech, some are occasionally em-
ployed, when they are not absolutely necessary to grammatical
construction, but serve, nevertheless, to give strength and
energy to the discourse; as, gid, mica, pure, mdi : — GIA Dio non
voglia, 'may God forbid'; non son MICA fdvole, 'they are not
10 INTRODUCTION.
fables'; la cosa andb PUR cosi, 'the affairs went off so'; MA: si,
che io le conosco, 'yes, that I know them'. These words, when
so used, are called EXPLETIVES.
WORDS form the whole subject of Grammar. They may
be either expressed by the voice, or represented in writing by
characters.
The collection of letters of which the words of a language
are formed, is called the ALPHABET.
That part of Grammar, which teaches how to express the
sounds of words, is called PRONUNCIATION.
That part which treats of the different sorts of words and
their various modifications, is called ANALOGY.
That part of Grammar, which treats of the connexion and
right order of words among themselves, is called SYNTAX.
That part, which teaches how to write words correctly, is
called ORTHOGRAPHY.
ITALIAN ALPHABET.
THE Italian Alphabet contains twenty-two letters,
which the modern Romans, following the Latin, name
and pronounce as follows :
(Figur
e)
(Nome)
(Pron.)
(Figure)
(Namo)
(Pron.)
A
a
a
ah
M m
em
aytn
B
b
be
bay
JV n
en
ayri
C
c
ce
chay
O o
o
o
D
d
de
day
P p
pe
pay
E
F
e
f
e
ef
ay
ayf
I I
qu
er
koo
ayr>
G
ge
j<*y
S s
es
ays'
H
acca
ahk'-kah
T i
te
tay
1
m
i
i
ee
U u
u
00
J
j
Je
yay
V v
ve
vay
L
I
el
w
Z z
zeta
dsay'-tah
The Florentines, on the authority of the " Fathers of
the Language," * name and pronounce them as follows :
(Figur
A
e)
a
(Name) (Pron.)
a ah
(Figure)
M m
(Name)
6mme
(Pron.)
aym'-may
B
b
bi bee
JY n
cnne
ayn'-nay
C
c
ci chee
0 o
0
0
D
d
di dee
P p
Pi
pee
E
e
c ay
Q 9
qu
koo
F
f
efie ayf-foy
R T
erre
ayr'-ray
G
S
gi j'ee
S s
6sse
ays'-say
H
h
acca ahk'-kah
T t
ti
tee
I
i
i corto ee cor'-to
U u
u
00
J
j
i liingo ee loon1 -go
V v
vi
vee
L
I
611e ayl'-lay Z z
z<ka
dsay'-tah
* E di qutsti cotdli sdno mdlti ididti,
che non suprebbono I1 ABBICCI. (Dant.
Conv.)
E'gli il crederebbe alldra, che guar-
ddndo v6i, igli creder6bbc, che voi sa-
p6ste V ABBICCI. (Bocc. g. 6. n. 5.)
E f& edificare tdnte badte, qu&nte tet-
tere ha nelV ABBICC!. (Giov. Vill. 1. 1.
c. 13.)
And of such ones, there are many so
ignorant, that do not know even the
ah-bee-chce1 .
He might thiirk so, if looking at you
at the same time, he should think that
you had learned your a-b-c.
And caused so many convents to be
built as there are letters in tho a-b-c.
12 ALPHABET.
Of these twenty-two letters, A, E, I, O, [7, are
vowels ; B, C, D, F, <?, L, M, JV, P, Q, #, S, T,
T7, 2T, are consonants ; .7 is considered as a voitfeZ ; and
H is a simple sign, having 710 sound.
The Latin letters K k, X x, Y y, have no place in
the Italian Alphabet.
Instead of &, either c or ch is used ; as,
Senza fallo tf caUndi sara Without fail by the kalends
capildno Buffalmdcco. (Bocc. Buffalmacco will be captain.
g.8.n.9.)
Diceva un cmrie ed un He said a Kyrie and a
Sdnctus* (Bocc. g. 8. n. 2.) Sanctus.
X is sometimes translated into s or 55, and sometimes
into cc ; as,
Jlcciocchb io prima es£mplo So that I might first set the
dea a tutti vol. (Bocc. Intr.) example to all of you.
Un giovane lor nipote, che They sent a young man,
avta nome Alessdndro, mandd- nephew of theirs, called Alex-
rono. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 3.) ander.
S6pra gli alii palagi, e so- It [the wind] leaves it [the
pra V ecctlse torn la Idscia. dust] upon the high palaces
(Bocc. g. 4. Proem.) and the lofty towers.
The word ; Xerxes' is written with an s, — S6rse ; but the word t Xan-
thus ' is written with an x} — Xdnto, * the Scamander ' ; to distinguish
it from Sdnto, ' Saint'
For T has been substituted i ; as,
Feggio lunge da? Idghi Jhtr- I see far from the Avernian
nt, € Stigi. (Petr. s. 265.) and Stygian lakes.
The English and German W w, in translating proper
names, is commonly changed into u when it is a vowel,
and into v or g when a consonant ; as, Neuton, * New-
ton ' : Fallenstein, ' Wallenstein ' ; Galles, ' Wales.'
PART I.
ITALIAN PRONUNCIATION.
CHAPTER I.
SOUNDS OF THE VOWELS.
A is sounded like a in the English word/ArfAer; as,
(Pronounce)
ArA, ah' -rah, altar ;
A/WIA, ahZ'-mah, soul.
E has two sounds, one open, the other close :
E open is sounded like ai in the English word
/Air; as,
*Ema, t&i'-mah, theme ;
VEna, vai'-na/i, oats.
E close is sounded like ai in the English word
as,
Ivga, l&if-gah, alliance ;
m&if-lah, apple.
J is sounded like ee in English ; or like i in the
English word machine ; as,
inwo, een'-no, hymn ;
fate, lee'-tay, strife.
O has two sounds, one open, the other close :
O open is sounded like o in the English word
cord; as,
fcofta, lot'-tdh, blow ;
rof-sah, rose.
14 PRONUNCIATION.
O dose is sounded like o in the English word
bone ; as,
folia, foU-lah, crowd;
or a, o'-rah, hour.
U is sounded like oo in the English word ooze ; as,
uso, oo'-so, use ;
tvtto, toot1 -to, all.
When these vowels are at the end of words marked
with an accent, they have a quick and sharp sound,
which very seldom occurs in the English language ; as,
bontA, Zxm-tah7, goodness ;
affE, ahf-fay', in truth ;
ball, bah-lee', bailiff;
/o/6, fah-lof, bonfire ;
tribu, tree-boo', tribe.
[For Rules how 10 Determine when the vowels .E, O, are Pronounced open,
or close, see APPENDIX, A.]
CHAPTER II.
PRONUNCIATION OF THE CONSONANTS.
ITALIAN consonants, except C, G, R, S, Z, are pro-
nounced as in English.
C followed by the vowels e, i, is pronounced like
ch in the English words cuerry, cm'% ; as,
cena, chay'-nah, supper ;
cibo, cheef-bo, food.
G followed by the vowels e, i, is pronounced likey
in English ; or like g in the English words Gem,
GinGer ; as,
Gelo, ^jay'-lo frost ;
Giro jee'-ro, turn.
R in the beginning of words, or in the middle
CONSONANTS. 15
when it begins a syllable, is pronounced like r
in the English words wain, marine ; as,
Rupe, loo'-pay, rock ;
mdRe, mah'-iay, fcea :
But at the end of words, or when it ends a
syllable, or when preceded by another conso-
nant, or when doubled, it has a rolling sound to
which there is nothing similar in the English lan-
guage, and which can be acquired only by oral
instruction ; as,
peR, pay? ', for;
eRto, ay^-to, steep ;
atRo, ah'-tw, black ;
oRRido, otf-ree-do, horrid.
S in the beginning of words, or when preceded
or followed by another consonant, or when dou-
bled, is pronounced sharp, like s in the English
words saint, pulse, discount, assembly; as,
santo, sahnf-to, saiit ;
film, jayV-sah, mulberry ;
sea, ay'-skah, bait ;
lesso, lays' -so, . boiled.
Between two vowels, and in the last syllabic
of all substantive and adjective nouns that end
in ise, uso, usa, it is pronounced flat, or soft like
z ; or like s in the English word rose ; as,
viso, vee'-zo, visage ;
palese, pah-layf-zay, manifest ;
abuso, ah-boo'-zo, abuse ;
confusa, con-foo1 -zah, confounded.
In the last syllable of all adjective nouns end-
ing in 050, osa, it is pronounced sharp ; as,
virtuoso, veer-too, o1 '-so, virtuous ;
maestosa, ?nah,ay-sto' -sah, majestic.
Z cannot be submitted' to certain rules. It can
only be said, that, in the beginning of words, or
when single, it is pronounced flat, or soft like ds
in the English word Winnsor ; as,
zodiaco, dso-dee' ,ah-ko, zodiac ;
zanzdra, dsahn-dsah' -rah, gnat.
1.6 PRONUNCIATION.
When preceded by a consonant, or when fol-
lowed by two vowels, or when doubled, it is
pronounced sharp, like is in the English word
benefiTS ; as,
c&lza, kahV-tBoh, stocking ;
grdzia, grdk r-tsee,a/i, grace ;
belUzza, bayl-layf -tsah, beauty.
In the last syllable of words ending in dnza.
enza, onza, it is pronounced something like z in
the English word razor ; as,
danza, dahn'-zah, dance ;
clemtnza, klay-maynf-zah, clemency ;
lonza, lon'-zah, panther.
[For a list of Words varying from the general Rules, respecting the Pronuncia*
tion of Z, see APPENDIX, B.J
CHAPTER III.
OF / AND II.
J is considered as a vowel in Italian. It is used
instead of ii, at the end of words, in the plural of
some nouns ; * and it is sounded like ee in the
English word /EE, each e being distinctly pro-
nounced ; as.
temps, ? for £ tempiiy taym'~pe,Q, temples ;
studs, S ( studu, stoof-de,e, studies.
H has no sound. It is only used to denote the hard
sound of the consonants c, g, before the vowels e,
i; as, in
CHerico,
kayf-ree-ko,
clerk ;
cuitdrra,
kee-tahr' -rah,
guitar ;
gutzzo,
gty'-tso,
Moor;
gniro,
geef-ro,
dormouse :
DOUBLE CONSONANTS. 17
To prolong the sound of the vowels a, e, i, o, u,
in the interjections,
an! ah! ah!
den ! day ! alas !
IH! ee! ih!
j?oH ! po ! pooh !
UH I do ! uh !
To distinguish the words,*
I have, HO, o, j r o, o, or;
thou hast, Hai, a^,ee, f f ) di, ah',ee, to the ;
he has, He*, aft, f T Q W a^i, to ;
they have, Hanno, akn'-no, } ( anno, ahnf-no, year.
And in each case it is a sign, a mark of distinction
rather than a letter.
CHAPTER IV.
DOUBLE CONSONANTS.
Cc followed by the vowels e, iy is pronounced like
tch in the English word W«TCH ; as,
accento, aht-chayn'-to, accent;
accidio, aht-chee' -dee,o, slaughter.
Gg I followed by the vowels e, i, is pronounced
like dg in the English word /ODoe ; as,
oGGtito, o&-jaytf-to, object;
oQGidi, od-jee~dee', now-a-days.
Ch followed by the vowels e, i, is pronounced
like k in the English words, Kept, Keep; as,
CH&O, kayf-to, quiet;
cuino, kee'-wo, inclined.
O.UU. , lit, lilt! j 7t(?j Ol 1L • Ot-U.j WHICH 1UUUC DOCHia IU "o pi oi^iu.w.^ j
simplifies the orthography of the words, and dispenses with a useless letter.
18 PRONUNCIATION.
Followed by the vowels ia, ie> io, iu> it is pro-
nounced like Jci in the English word Kind; as,
cmave, k,y«V-tww, key ;
cmesa, k,yayf-sah, church ;
CHwma, k,yo'-maft, head of hair ;
cmusa, k,yoo'-sa/z, hedge.
Gh followed by the vowels e, i, is pronounced like
g in the English words oe£, Giddy ; as,
GH^m&o, gaymf-bo, crooked ; v
GHiro, gee'-ro, dormouse.
Followed by the vowels ia, ie, zo, £w, it is pro-
nounced like gui in the English word cuic?e ; as,
Gmanda, g,yahnf-dah, acorn ;
GHiera, g,yayf-rah, quiver ;
Gmdtto, - g,yotf-to, glutton ;
tegGHiuzza, tayg-g,yoot'-sah, baking-pan.
Gl followed by the vowel i: and in all words in
which i is followed by another vowel, is pro-
nounced like II in the English word brilliant ;
as,
GLI, l>yee', the ;
601,1, «y-l,yee, he ;
vdQiAa, vof-l,yah, desire ;
CIGLW, cheef-l,yo, eye-brow:
But in all words in which gli is followed by a
consonant, it is pronounced like gl in the Eng-
lish word Glimmer ; as,
neGijigtnte, nay-g\ee-jayn'-tay, negligent ;
anGi*icano, ahn-g\ee-kahf-no, Anglican.
It has the same sound in the words,
ahn1 -glee, Englishmen ;
ahnf -glee,ah, England.
Gn followed by the vowels «, e, i, o, u, is pro-
nounced something like ni in the English word
as,
mah-gahf-n9yah, blemish ;
ah-n,yayy~lo, lamb ;
SYLLABLES. 19
incoGmto, een-ko'-n,yee-io, unknown;
bisoGNo, &ee-s</-n,yo, need ;
iGNudo, ee-n,yW-cfo, naked.
Sc followed by the vowels e, i, is pronounced
like sh in the English word sneZ/, smp ; as,
sc^na, shayf-nah, scene ;
scimicf, 9 sheef-mee,ah, ape.
Sch followed by the vowels e, i, is pronounced like
skin the English words SKeteA, &K.ill ; as,
scHrnio, skai/r'-no, mockery ;
scni/b, skee^o, skiff.
Followed by the vowels ia, ie, io, iu, it is pro-
nounced like sJc in the English word SK^ ; as,
scuiavOj sk,ya^-vo, slave ;
scHi^na, 8k,yayf -nah, the back ;
scmoppo, skflop-po, musket ;
scnmma, sk^oo'-r/ia/i, froth.
CHAPTER V.
OF SYLLABLES.
CIA', do, ciu, are pronounced like cha, cho, chooyin
the English words CHAHW, cnop, cnoo^e ; as,
ciAZda, chaM-rfa, wafer;
cibmpo, chom'-po, clown ;
ciurwa, choo/^-ma/i, crew.
Gid, gio, giu, are pronounced like ja> jo, ju, in the
English words jAr, jore, jury ; as,
. jahZ'-Zo, yellow ;
jor'-wo, day ;
ju'-^fo, just.
Scid. scio, sciu, are pronounced like sha, sho, shoo,
in the English words SHA#, snop, SHOO^; as,
sciAme, shah'-mai/, swarm ;
scio/fo, sholf-to, loose ;
sciugd^o, shoo-gah'-to, wiped.
20 PRONUNCIATION.
Gud, gue, gui, are pronounced like gua, gue, gui,
in the English words /anGUAge, Za/iGUE/, lanGuid ; as,
GUAncia, gwa.hnf -chah, cheek,
GUErra, gwayr'-raft, war ;
Gvida, gwee'-dah, guide.
Qua, qui, qui, quo, are pronounced like qua, que, qui,
quo, in the English words quality 9 Question, quibble,
quote ; as,
quAnto, kwahn'-/o, how-much ;
QUES/O, kway'-^o, this ;
quinto, kween'-fo, fifth ;
quotidiano, kwo-tee-dee,ah'-no, daily.
CHAPTER VI.
DIPHTHONGS AND TRIPHTHONGS.
ITALIAN diphthongs are so pronounced as to give to
each vowel its proper sound. They are generally di-
vided into two classes, the long and the short.
Long diphthongs are those, in which each vowel is
as distinctly pronounced as if they formed each a sep-
arate syllable ; as,
tie
AEre,
ah', ay -ray,
air;
di
mAi,
mah^ee,
never ;
do
pAolo,
pah^o-Zo, .
a pau] ;
du
Aura,
ah^oo-?*^,
breeze ;
ea
borEA,
bof~ro.y,&h,
the north-wind :
ee
VEEmenza
v&y,<iy-mctynf-z(th
, vehemence ;
ei
€0
ZEI,
EoZo,
Zay^ee,
ay'jO-Zo,
her;
^Eolus ;
en
fan do,
jTayr,oo-c?o,
feud ;
6i
vbi,
vo^ee,
you ;
06
cobrte,
/co,o?v-tav,
cohort ;
ui
coZui,
ko-loof,ee,
that-one.
GENERAL RULES. 21
Short diphthongs are so pronounced, that, of the two
vowels, one is so faintly heard as to seem blended
with the other ; as,
id /iA<0, /eejah'-fo, breath;
ie CIE/O, chee,&yf-lo, heaven;
id pibva, pee^-vah, rain ;
iu piuma, pee,oof-mah, feather ;
ud quAnto, kwtihnfto, how-much ;
ue guE/fo, gvr*.yf-fah, cage;
ui quinto, kween'-to, fifth ;
u6 Juono, foo,o'-no, thunder.
Triphthongs are generally classed with the short
diphthongs, and are pronounced,
dio gAio, gah',yo, gay;
Ui miEi. meejay'jee, mine ;
uai fcuoi, 600^ ,ee, oxen;
udio- guAio, g-wah^yo, wailing ;
teoio cuoio, Xwo^yo, leather ;
iuoi lacciuoi, laht-choo,of ,ee, snares.
CHAPTER VII.
GENERAL RULES ON THE ITALIAN PRONUN-
CIATION.
ITALIAN words are pronounced exactly as they are
written, there being no silent letter except h.
Every vowel always preserves its proper sound, inde-
pendently of the consonants which accompany it.*
* There is, perhaps, no greater difficulty for foreigners in pronouncing Ital-
ian, than that of the vowels E, O, whose sound, either open or close, often
determines the signification of words ; as in melc, pesca, t&ma ; collo, /ore, voto,
which pronounced with .E and O open, mean, 'honey', 'a peach', 'theme';
' neck', ' the bar', ' void' : and pronounced with E and O close, signify, ' apples',
'fishing', 'fear'; 'with the', ' a hole', 'vow'.
[For a list of Words of Similar Orthography, but of Different Signification,
distinguished by the Different Sound of E, O, see APPENDIX, A. (2)]
PRONUNCIATION.
When consonants are doubled, each of them is sepa-
rately pronounced ;* as,
frah-tayV -lo, brother ;
a/id-dob'-bo, ornament;
%cRR^re, ayr-ro' -ray, error ;
aTTre'zzi, a/it- trayt' -see, utensils.
If a word ends with a consonant, and the following
word begins with a vowel, the consonant of the former,
in the pronunciation, is joined to the vowel or first syl-
lable of the latter ; as,
/?CR Amore, ^?e-R A-more, pay-Yzh-mof-ray,
for love sake ;
qudi, Angostia, qua-i* AN-goscia kwah-lahn-go'-shahj
what anguish;
granrf inviio, gran-v iy-vito, grahn-deen-veef -to,
great invitation.
When gti precedes a word beginning with a vowel,
the vowel or first syllable of the latter is joined to gli,
so as to form a single syllable ; as,
GLI onorij GLI o-non", l,yo-n</-ree, the honors ;
OCC/IT, &e-GLi oc-chi, bay-l,yokf -kee, beautiful eyes.
In all Italian words of more than one syllable, there
is always one, upon which the voice, in pronouncing
the word, is heard stronger than upon the others. This,
which is generally effected by raising the voice upon
that syllable and letting it fall upon the rest, is com-
monly called the tonic accent of the word. The sylla-
ble upon which the tonic accent falls, is pronounced
longer than the other syllables ; each of which is not to
* The importance of the observance of this rule will at once be perceived by
the learner, when, in advancing in the study of the language, he observes a great
number of words written with a double consonant, whose signification would be
entirely altered by pronouncing them with a single consonant; as in COIRRO,
Jiocco, presso, rdssa, seRRa, SONNO, 'car', 'tassel', 'near', 'red', 'saw', 'sleep':
which pronounced with a single consonant, cdRO, fioco, preaoj rdsa, SCRG, SOKO.
signify 'dear', 'hoarse', 'taken', 'rose', 'evening', 'lam'.
[For a list of Words, whose Signification is determined by the Pronunciatioik
of double Consonants, see APPENDIX, C.]
EXERCISE. 23
occupy more than half the time employed in pronounc-
ing the accented syllable ; as,
oNda, ox-ddh, wave ;
WCCEL/O, do2-chayl-Z0, bird ;
E&ano, &y-bah-no, ebony ;
dh-mee-stah, amity.
EXERCISE ON THE PRONUNCIATION.
Cedro, citron ; cenere, ashes ; celebre, celebrated ; cicatrice,
scar ; cicaldta, chit-chat ; cipolla, onion ; cidncia, story ; ciarldre,
to prate ; cidlda, wafer ; cielo, heaven ; cieco, blind ; cioccoldte,
chocolate ; cio'cco, stump ; do, this ; fanciullo, child ; ciurma,
crew ; ciuffb, a tuft of hair ; gente, people; genere, gender ;
giro, turn ; gigdnte, giant ; ginocchio, knee ; giardino, garden ;
giammdi, never ; gidllo, yellow ; gio'rno, day ; gidgo, yoke ; gio-
condo, 'merry ; giovane, youth ; giugno, June ; giulio, gay ;
giudice, judge ; giudicare,to judge ; rdwe, copper ; rovina,Tuin ;
orroVe, horror; parlare, to speak; firro, iron; drZo, border ;
merce, reward ; bardo, bard ; arrovelldre, to be angry ; iiretire,
to ensnare ; crudele, cruel ; /orza, force ; territdrio, territory ;
tartdreo, tartarean ; 5ct/w^, health ; servo, servant ; sorte, fate ;
sire, sire ; so'pra, above ; cosi, so ; singoldre, singular ; sole, sun ;
su, upon ; superdre, to surmount; palese,' manifest ; cortese, cor-
teous ; speso, expended ; reso, rendered ; rosa, rose ; sposa,
spouse ; ma, laughter ; musa, muse ; virtuoso, virtuous ; con-
fuso, confounded ; zolla, clod ; zio, uncle ; zuppa, soup ; zerbino,
a spark ; zimdrra, night-gown ; pozzo, a well ; carezze, caresses ;
carrozza, couch ; tdzza, cup ; ammazzdre, to kill ; pizzico, pinch ;
orzo, barley ; zizzdnia, tare ; rezzo,' shade ; vizio, vice ; zotico,
rude ; letizia, joy ; nazione, nation ; timpj, temples ; studj, stu-
dies ; esempj, examples ; vizj, vices ; eccidj, slaughters ; augurj,
auguries ; ho, I have ; hdi, thou hast ; ha, he has ; hdnno, they
have ; ah ! ah ! deh ! alas ! ih ! ih ! poh ! pooh ! uh ! uh ! accidio,
steel ; accento, accent ; accidioso, sluggish ; Idccio, noose ; fdc-
cia, face ; lacciuolo, snare ; oggetto, object ; soggwmo, abode ;
24 PRONUNCIATION.
pioggia, rain ; rdggio, ray ; aggiunta, addition ; oggi, to-day .
cMto, quiet ; chino, inclined ; cherubino, cherubim ; chimico,
chymist ; chermes, cochineal ; chimera, chimera ; chicchessia,
whosoever ; chidve, key ; chwstro, cloister ; chiusa, hedge ; chia-
mdrc, to call ; chttsa, church ; chiodo, nail ; chitrico, clerk ;
ghembo, crooked ; ghermfoe, to gripe ; ghiro, dormouse ; ghiribiz-
20, whim ; ghervne, gore, ghirldnda, garland ; ghidia, gravel ;
ghidccio, ice ; lusinghiere, flattering ; preghtera, prayer ; ghiotto,
greedy; tegghiuzza, baking-pan ; figli, children ; fdgli, leaves ;
piglidre, to take jfamiglia, family ; moglie, wife ; orgoglio, pride ;
imbroglio, embarassment ; fogliuto, leafy ; figliuolo, son ; negli-
genza, negligence ; negUtto, neglected ; dngli, Englishmen ;
dnglia, England ; anglicdno, Anglican ; campdgna, the country ;
magndminp, magnanimous; ingegntre, engineer; spignere, to
push ; magnifico, magnificent ; sigrwre, sir ; ttgno, wood ; ignu-
do, naked ; scesa, descent ; scemdre, to diminish ; sctttro, scep-
ter ; scimia, ape ; scisma, schism ; sciagura, misfortune ; scidme,
swarm ; sciancdto, hipped ; scitnza, science ; coscitnza, con-
science ; sciocco, foolish ; sciorre, to loose ; sciugatoio, towel ;
sciugdre, to wipe ; schidvo, slave; schiantdre, to tear; schttna,
the back ; schittto, candid ; schioppo, musket ; schiuma, froth ;
guadagndre, to gain ; guerra, war ; guarddre, to look ; guerire,
to heat ; guercio, squint-eyed ; guida, guide ; guiddre, to guide ;
qudttro, four ; qualitd, quality ; quddro, picture ; qudle, which ;
qutsto, this ; quercia, oak ; quitte, quiet ; quindici, fifteen ; quivi,
there ; quotididno, daily.
PART II.
ITALIAN ANALOGY.
PARTS OF SPEECH.
(Variable) (Invariable)
L' AR-HCOLO, the Article; L' AVVERBIO, Jhe Mvtrb ;
IL NOME, the Noun ; LA PREPOSIZIONE, the Preposi-
[tion ;
IL PRONOME, the Pronoun ; LA CONGIUNZIONE, the Conjunc-
[tion ;
JL VERBO, the Verb ; L' INTERIEZIONE, the Interjec-
[tion.
JL PARTicipio, the Participle :
CHAPTER L
ARTICLES.
THERE are three articles in Italian ; ?7, lo, la, ( the5, in
the singular; i or li,* gli, le, c the', in the plural number.
It, lo, and i or li, gli, are used with masculine, la and
/e, with feminine nouns.
I/, and i or K, are put before masculine nouns begin-
ning with a consonant, except z, or s followed by ano-
ther consonant ; as,
IL vratello, the brother ; i Figliuoli, the children ;
IL Marito, the husband ; LI Fadri, the fathers.
* We meet with li frequently in the Classics, especially in poetry ; but modern
writers generally use i in preference to it.
3
26 ANALOGY.
Lo and gli, are put before masculine nouns beginning
with z, s followed by another consonant, or a vowel ; *
as,
LO zio, the uncle ; GLI zejiri, the zephyrs
LO STrepito, the noise ; GLI sprom, the spurs ;
LO innocente, the innocent man ; GLI bcchi, the eyes.
EXCEPTIONS.
The noun Dwt ' God', before its plural, Dei, t Gods', takes the
article gli; as,
GLI Dei, "the Gods.
After the preposition per, ( for, by, or through', whether the
nouns begins with z, s: or any other consonant, the article lo is more
properly used; as,
per LO anwre, for the love ; per LO braccio, by the arm.
In the plural, however, if the noun begins with any consonant
but z, or s followed by another consonant, we may use indifferently,
either gli or li ; as,
per GLI boschi, through the woods ;
per LI regni, through the regions.
La and le, are put before all feminine nouns begin-
ning either with a consonant, or a vowel; as,
LA Reina, the queen ; LE cortesie, the courtesies :
LA sorella, the sister ; LE mddri, the mothers ;
LA yobillct, the nobleness ; LE Anime, the souls.
The articles lo, la, before a noun beginning with a
vowel ; and gli, le, before a noun beginning with i, e ;
* Poets very often use lo before nouns beginning with other consonants than z,
or 8 followed by another consonant; and il before nouns beginning with those
consonants ; as,
Lo oi6rno se n'anddva e Va.tr bruno; The day was closing, and the dusky
(Dant. Inf. 2.) air ;
Seguielo appresso it, splendido, e on- Next followed the splendid and hon-
•rdndo—Pricivdllc; (Bocc. Vis. 1.) orable Pricivalle ;
GLI Rdwii schidnta, abdtte, e porta Tears off the boughs, beats down,
fuori ; (Dant. Inf. 9.) and hurls away ;
but in prose this usage is, by all good writers, carefully avoided.
ARTICLES. 27
generally drop o, #, i, e, and take an apostrophe instead
of them ;* as.
(for
infirm ;
(for
Sometimes the article il drops the i after a word
ending with a vowel, and takes an apostrophe instead
of it; as,
E' L viso, ? and the coun- uscio *L colpo, ) the blow
(for E IL viso), $ tenance ; {for uscio IL cdlpo), $ issued,
EXAMPLES.
L' vn fratello L' kltro abban-
dondva,e LA SORELLA IL FRA-
TELLO, e spesse volte LA donna
IL swo MARITO. (Bocc. Intr.)
E che maggior cosa e, LI PA-
DRI 6 LE MADRI, I FIGLIUOLI dl
risitdre e di sermre schivdvano.
(Bocc. Intr.;
LA REINA non si sapeva sazi-
dre d'udire LA NOBILTA e LE
CORTESIE del giovane re. (Nov.
ant. 35.)
JVbw istette gudri a levdrsi IL
ne, il qudle LO STREPITO del ca-
ricdnti e delle bestie aveva desto.
(Bocc. g. 7. Proem.)
Avevan LO INNOCENTE per fal-
sa suspizione accusdto. (Bocc.
g\ 3. n. 7.)
E con amor si Idgna — Ch1 ha
si cdldi GLI SPRON, si duro IL
vreno, (Petr. s. 140.)
Lucdvan GLI OCCHI suoi piu
che LA stella. (Dant. Inf. 2.)
»#Z tempo DEGLI DEI fdlsi e
bugidrdi. (Dant. Inf. 1.)
One brother abandoned the
other, and the sister the broth-
er, and oftentimes the wife her
husband.
And what is more, the fath-
ers and the mothers shunned
to visit and serve their chil-
dren.
The queen could not be sat-
isfied with hearing of the no-
bleness and the courtesies of
the young king.
The king was not long in get-
ting up, whom the noise of the
beasts and of those who loaded
them had already awakened.
They had accused the in-
nocent man on a false suspi-
cion.
And complains of love, that
has so sharp spurs, and so hard
a bit.
Her eyes shone more than
the star.
In the time of fabled and
false deities.
* Le drops the e sometimes, and takes
poetry, even before words beginning with
Ei sonfra iS&.nimc piu were. (D.Inf. 6.)
C&nto L» \rrni pietdse. (Tass. Ger. 1.)
an apostrophe instead of it, chiefly in
any o.her vowel } as,
They are amidst blacker souls.
I sing the pious arms.
28
ANALOGY.
Sempre tenendo PERLO BRAC-
cio LO infermo. (Bocc.g.2.n.8.)
PER LO suo A MORE adunque
a noi tipiega. (Dant. Purg. 1.)
Ldsciane anddre PER IA tuft
sctte REGNI. (Dant. Purg. 1.)
L' ANIMA tua e da viltdte offe-
sa, — LA quail molte fidte L' UOMO
ingombra, — Sicche cV onrdta im-
presa lo rivolve. (Dant. Inf. 2.)
/ pcnsier son saette E' L viso
un sole — E' L desirfoco. (Petr.)
Zefiro torna, E'L lei tempo
rimenat~E ifiori, e L'ERBE, sua
dolce famiglia. (Petr. s. 269.)
hcchi vostri uscfo 'L
COLPO mortdle. (Petr.)
Del bel paese Id dovx JL si
suona. (Dant. Inf. 33.)
Holding always the sick man
by the arm.
Then for her love condescend
to our desires.
Let us pass through thy se-
ven regions.
Thy soul is by vile fear as-
sailed, which oft, — So overcast
a man, that he recoils — From
noble undertaking.
The thoughts are arrows,
and the countenance a sun, —
and the desire fire.
Zephyr returns, bringing
back flowers, and herbs, his
sweet family.
From your eyes the mortal
blow issued.
Of that fair land where si is
spoken.
When the articles il, lo, la ; i or li, gli, le, are im-
mediately preceded by the prepositions di, c of; #?
c to'; da, c from or by7 ; in or ne, ' in? ; con, ' with';
per, c for, by, j>r through' ; su, c upon' ; fra or tra7
6 amongst' ; in order to avoid the harshness of sound
produced by two monosyllables coming together, they
are united to them, so as to form a single word ; as,
a i, AI, to the ; da gli,
su la, SULLA, upon the ; tra le,
DAGLI, from or by the ;
TRALLE, amongst the.
Union of the Prepositions DI. A, DA, IN or NE, CON,
PER, su, FRA or TRA, with the Article
di il,
a H,
dail,
in or ne il,
con iZ,
per il,
TL, the;
DEL,
AL,
DA.L,
NEL,
COL,
PEL,
of the ;
to the ;
from or by the ;
in the;
with the ;
for, by or through the;
ARTICLES.
suit,
f™?,
tra il,
SUL,
FRAL,
TRAL,
upon the ;
amongst the.
i or LI, the,
di i or di li, DEI or BELLI,*
a i or ali, AI or ALLI,
da ?* or da li, DAI or DALLI,
in or ne i, or in or ?ie Zi, NEI or NELLI,
con i or con li, coi or COLLI,
per i or per Zi, PEI or PELLI,
su i or su li, sth or SULLI,
fra i or fra li, FRAI or FRALLI,
fra i or Jra /i, TRAI or TRALLI,
of the ;
to the ;
from or by the ;
in the ;
with the ;
for, by or thro.' the;
upon the ;
amongst the.
LO, the ;
di Zo,
DELLO,*
of the ;
a Zo,
ALLO,
to the ;
dalo,
DALLO,
from or by the ;
in or ne lo,
NELLO,
in the ;
con lo.
COLLO,
with the ;
per lo,
PELLO,
for, by or thro.' the;
su Zo,
Sl^LLO,
upon the ;
fra Zo,
tra Zo,
FRX.LLO, ?
TRALLO, ^
amongst thee.
GLI, the ;
di gli,
DEGLI,*
of the ;
a gli,
AGLI,
to the ;
da gli,
DAGLI,
from or by the ;
in or ne gli,
NEGLI,
in the ;
con gli,
COGLI,
with the ;
per gli,
PEGLI,
for, by or thro.' the;
sugli,
StJGLI,
upon the ;
fra gli,
tra gli,
FRAGLI, )
TRAGLI, ^
amongst the,
* Poets very often
N6 mai nascdse il citl si f6lta nilb-
fcia, — CAe, sopraggiunta dal fur6r d&
venti, — Non fuggisse DA I p6ggi, e DA
LE valli. (Petr. c. 14.)
DA L' erba, e DA LI fi6r ddntro a
quel stno — Pdsti, ciascun saria di coUr
vinto. (Dant. Purg. 7)
' Al Padre, al Figlioy A LO Spirito
Santo*— Comindt * gl6ria> tutto H Pa-
ra<Hso. (Dant. Par. 27.)
use them separate ; as,
Nor ever did the aky conceal so thick
a cloud, that, overtaken by the fury
of ihe wind, it would not flee from the
hills, and the valleys ;
By the herbs and flowers, placed
in that recess, in color all would be
surpassed ;
* Glory to the Father, to the Son,—
And to the Holy Spirit,' rang aloud—
Throughout all Paradise.-
30
ANALOGY.
LA, the ;
di lat
a la,
da la,
in or ne la,
con la,
per la,
sula,
fra lay
tra Ia9
DELLAy
ALLA,
DALLA,
NELLA,
COLLA,
PELLA,
SULLA,
FRALLA,
TRALLA,
of the ;
to the ;
from or by the ;
in the ;
with the ;
for, by or through the ;
upon the ;
amongst the.
di le,
ale,
dale,
in or ne le.
con Ie9
per le,
su le,
fra le,
tra le?
LE, the ;
DELLE,
ALLE,
DALLE,
WELLE,
COLLE,
PELLE,
SULLE,
FRALLE, >
TRALLE, 5
of the;
to the ;
from or by the ;
in the ;
with the ;
for, by, or through the ;
upon the ;
amongst the.
D6i, di, ddi, nei, coi, pei, sui, frdi or trdi, followed
by a noun beginning with a consonant, drop the i, and
take an apostrophe instead of it ; as,
DE' prati, of the meadows ; A' cdnti, to singing ;
DA' varenti, by the relations ; NE' Giardini, in the gardens ;
co' Raggi, with the rays ; PE' Monti, through the moun-
[tains ;
su' itibri, upon the books ; TRA' ¥wri, amongst the flow-
[ers.
Pel, petto, pella, and pelli, pegli, ptlle, in elegant
style are better written per lo, per la, and per li, per
gli, per le ; as,
PER LO Dwca, by my guide ; PER LA pieta, through pity ;
PER GLI occhi, through the PER LE frondi, on account of
[eyes ; [the leaves*
ARTICLES.
31
And scrupulous writers before nouns beginning with z
or s followed by another consonant, use collo, trallo,
colla, trdtta, and cogli, tragli, colle, trdlle, and sugli,
always separated ;* as,
CON LA zazzera, with the
[head of hair ;
CON GLI sciocchi, with the
[ignorant ;
su GLI scudi, upon the
[shield.
CON LO splendore, with the
[splendor :
su LO SMalto, upon the
[enamel ;
among the
[stars ;
EXAMPLES.
Come NE' Lucidi sereni sono
le stelle ornamento DEL cielo, e
NELL A primavera i fiori DE'
PRATI, e DE' cdlli i rivestiti ar-
buscelli ; cost DE' laudevoli co-
stumi,e DE' nagionamenti belli
sono i leggiddri motti. (Bocc.
g. 6. n. 1.)
E divenuti piu lieti} su si le-
vdrono, ed A' suoni., ed A' CANTI
cd A' •Ralli da capo si dierono.
(Bocc. g. 3. Proem.)
Ok, sventurdta! che si dird
DA' Tiwi fratelli, DA' PARENTI,
DA' vitini, qudndo si saprd, eke
tu sii qui trovdta ? (Bocc. g. 8.
n. 7.)
Qudndo NE' GIARD£NI entrdtc,
disttsa la dilicdta mdno, coglietc
le rose, e lascidte le spine stare.
(Bocc. g. 5. n. 10.)
Omlrose selve, 6ve per cote il
sole, — Che vi fa co' suoi RAGGI
dlte e superbe. (Petr. s. 129.)
As in the bright clear sky,
the stars are the ornament of
the heavens, and in the spring
the flowers are of the meadows,
and the verdant shrubs of the
hills, so witty sayings are the or-
naments of praiseworthy man-
ners and fine conversations.
And having become more
gay, they arose and gave them-
selves once more to playing,
singing, and dancing.
Oh, unfortunate woman ! what
will be said by thy brothers, by
thy relations, by thy neighbors,
when it shall be known, that
thou hast been found here ?
When you enter into the
gardens, extending your deli-
cate hand, you cull the roses,
and leave the thorns.
Shady woods, where strikes
the sun, which renders you
with its rays so lofty and noble.
* And in poetry even before nouns beginning with any other letter ; as,
Ecco la Jiera CON LA coda agfaia.
(Dant. Inf. 17.)
Vidi Solon— CON GLI dltri sei di a'ti
Grtcia, si vtinta. (Petr. Tr. Fam.)
.Behold the beast with sharpened
tail;
I saw Solon with the other six of
whom Greece boasts.
ANALOGY.
E quindi passdi in terra
d'Jibruzzi, dove gli uomini c le
femmine vdnno in zoccoli su PE'
M6KTI. (Bocc. g. 6. n. 10.)
Ldscio lo file, e vo PE' nolci
pomi — Promessi a me PER LO
verdce DUCA. (Dant. Inf. 16.)
Cosl avestu riposti — DE' Bei
vestigi spdrsi, — Ancor TRA' Fi6-
meVerba. (Petr. c. 26.)
PER GLI OCCHI mi passb den-
tro la mente. (Rim. ant. p. 49.)
Era 'Z giorno eft al Sol si sco-
lordro — PER LA PIET.A del suo
Fattore i red. (Petr. s. 3.)
Giunsc nel bosco PER LE FR6x-
DI ombroso. (Bocc. Tes. 5. 33.)
CON LO SPLENDOR die SUa l)d-
'{ezza adduce. (Incer. c. 4.)
JYVm errdr CON GLI sci6ccHi.
(Petr. c. 47.)
And then I passed to the land
of Abruzzi, where men and wo-
men go in wooden shoes up
over the mountains.
I leave the gall, in quest of
the sweet fruit, which has been
promised to me by my faithful
guide.
Thus would that thou, (O
heart,) hadst still preserved
some of the beautiful footsteps,
here and there, amongst the
flowers and the grass.
It passed through my eyes
to my mind.
It was the day when the rays
of the sun grew pale, through
pity for his Maker.
He arrived in the wood, shady
on account of its leaves.
With the splendor which
brings her beauty.
Do not wonder in error with
the ignorant.
The English indefinite article a, an, is expressed in
Italian by the indefinite pronouns un, uno, una, accord-
ing to the rules already given with regard to the articles
il, lo, la, ' the' ; as,
UN wercatdnte, a merchant ; UNO spirdglio, a breathing-hole ;
UIT A Fiamma, a flame ; UNA zeba, a goat.
Uno, like lo, before a noun beginning with a vowel,
drops the o, but takes no apostrophe instead of it ; una
drops the a and takes an apostrophe ; as,
UN uomo, a man ; UN' bmbra, a shade ;
UN Arrwre, a love ; UN' bra, an hour.
When a noun is taken in a partitive sense, the Eng-
lish adjectives some and any are expressed by ther
ARTICLES. 33
words del, dello, della, in the singular ; and dei, degli,
delle, or alcuni, alcune, in the plural ; as,
DEL pane, some bread ; DELL' olio, some oil ;
ALCTJNE cose, some things ; ALCUNI udmini, some men ;
DEGLI STromenti, some instru- DELLE ardnce, some oranges,
[ments ;
EXAMPLES.
In Parigi fu UN gran MER-
CATANTE. (BOCC. g. 1. n. 2.)
lEra Arriguccio UN Fiero uo-
MO, e UN Forte. (Bocc. g. 7.
n. 6.)
Nella qudl grotta ddva alqudn-
to lume tfNO SPIRAGLIO fat to nel
monte. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 1.)
UN volerc, UN AMORE ci ha
sempre tenuti legdti e congiunti,
cd UN wedesimo giorno ci diede
al mondo ; pidcciavi, poiche UN'
ORA ci toglie, che similemente
UNA uedesima FIAMMA ci con-
siimi. (Bocc. Filoc.)
Gli diedi DEL PANE e DEL cd-
cio. (Firenz.)
tfno de' famiglidri di Mes-
ser Neri accese il fuoco. e po-
sta la padella sopra il treppie,
e DELL' OLIO messovi, comincio
ad aspettdre, che le giovani gli
gittdssero DEL pesce. (Bocc. g.
30. n. 6.)
Di niuna cosa sermeno, che di
porgere ALC^NE COSE dagl' in-
fermi addomanddte, (B. Intr.)
There was in Paris a great
merchant.
Arriguccio was a haughty
and strong man.
In which grotto came some
light through a breathing-hole,
opened in the mountain.
One will, one love, has al-
ways kept us bound an'd united,
and the same day gave us to
the world ; may it please you,
then, since the same hour takes
us from it, that one same flame
should consume us.
I gave him some bread and
some cheese.
One of the domestics of Mes-
ser Neri kindled the fire, and
having put the frying-pan up-
on a trevet, and having put
some oil in it, he began to wait
that the young women should
throw into it some fish.
They ^ rendered no service,
but to reach some things called
for by the sick.
34 ANALOGY.
EXERCISE I .
[Let the learner here put the right Article according to the gender marked,
against the Italian nouns, and the number of the same, as indicated by the
English words.]
The sacred Tiber, the Egyptian obelisks, the temples
sdcro Teveretm.y Egizidni obellschi^m^ tempj,m.
still dark with the vapor of the sacrifices, the Flavian
ancora foacki vapore}m. sacrifizj^.j Fldvioz
Amphitheatre which lies like a mangled giant,* the
anfitedtro1 ,m.* il qudle gidce come sbrandto"2 gigdnte^m.,
columns which describe the customs of the soldiery,
colonnejf. che descrwono costumdnzef. mili,zia,f.,
the triumphal arches, the space of the Forum, the
trionfdli* drchijm., spdzio,m: ,F6r0,ra.,
mausoleums, the majestic ruins of the circuses and of the
mausolei,m., maestosc" rume,1?. circhi,m. e
baths, and all the remains of the Roman splendor,
terme,f., e tutti avdnz^m. Romano? splendidezza,1?.,
fill the mind
empiono dnimo,m.
withf I delightful wonder.
di I sodvc maramglia.
Nero to appease them, ordered that the fasces of the
JYerone per appacidr^ li}t bandi che fdsci,m.
emperor
imperat6re,m.
should be borne I with the laurel. The
si portdssero \ allorojm.
senators complained against I the insolence of the
di insolenzaS.
against
the avarice of the
senatdri,m. si dolivano
plebeians, and the plebeians
plebei,m., e plebei,m. di avariziaS.
magistrates and of the great.
magistrdti,m. e grdndi,m.
* In this and the following Exercises, the numbers affixed to the Ilalian words
are intended to denote the order in which they are to be placed ; as, 'Flavioz anfi-
tectlro*', — aitfittatro Fldvio.
| When an English word or phrase cannot be rendered literally, but by an
equivalent Italian word or phrase, they are both included between brackets" [ ] ;
as, * with' con ; di, * of.
J The sign ^, is used to denote, that the words under which it is found, are to
be joined in one •, as, per appaciar^_,li, — per appacidrli.
ARTICLES.
He proposed that (the) honors [should be rendered! to Galba,
— * Propose che 2 on6ri,3m.\ si rendessero1 \ a Gdlba,
and that the memory of Piso also
e che 3 memoria^ f. di5 Pisone6 dnche2
He departed
— Parti
should be celebrated.
si celebrdsse1.
the temple of (the)
to I carry to I
per I portdre in I
the standards of the empire. (The) princes
ijnpero,m. principijU
reputation and I with their
reputazione e \ con il
hand and I with their 1 arms.
e con le \ drmi.
insegnefi.
with their I
con la 1
I with their
I con la
Concord
Conc6rdia,f.
do more
fdnno piu
advice, than
consiglio, che
Not pardoning, as in (the) other armies, the first fault,!
Non pcrdondndo, come in dltri csercitiym., prima fdltaj'.,
he who left the standard
chi lascidva insegnaj'.
was immediately beheaded. It appeared to him that he heard
era subitamente decapitdto. — pdrve2 Gli1 sentire6
nor
Tie
the second, but
secondaf., ma
I about (the) mid-night people descend in the house.
I insu? 4 mezzanbttcfL pcrsone™ scendere7 8 cdsa,9f.
Having entered into the tower, she began to weep. For
Entrdta torref., — comincio a pidngere. Per
the pain he felt, he began to roar, so that he seem-
doldr.m. — sentito, — comincio a mugghiar, che — pareva
ed a lion. Fleeing through the woods.
ledne,m. Fuggendo per bdschi,m.
He was
Fu
seen by
veduto da
to come
venire
a companion
compdgnofm.
I to a gossip
\da comdrc,2?.
of his.
suo.1
of hers.
sva.1
Having
caused him
Fdtto^ lo
1 He gav
1 — diedi
to him
Gli1
a purse
3 bdrsa*f.
with some florins
con5 7 fiormifm.
in it.
dentro0.
Having found in the garden some capons, some wine, and
Trovati 6rto,m. cappdni,m.,
some eggs, lie supped
uovaf.. — ceno
entirely at his ease.i
a suo bell' dgio.\
Such words, as, though necessary in English, are not to be expressed in
Italian, are in this part marked with a dash j and such words as are necessary
in Italian, but are not expressed in English, are in this language introduced,
•in Dalies, and included between parentheses ; as, 'He proposed that (the) honor*
nhould be rendered',— Propose che si rendessero gli ontri.
36 ANALOGY.
CHAPTER II.
SUBSTANTIVE NOUNS.
ALL Italian substantives end with one of the vowels
o, a, e, i, u* It is these vowels that show their gendei
and number.
GEND ER.
Nouns ending in o are of the masculine gender ; as,
Ubro, book ; specchio, mirror ;
oriuolo, watch ; scrittoio, scrutoire.
EXCEPTIONS.
Proper names of women ; as,
Sdffo, Sappho ; E'ro, Hero ; Catisto, Calisto :
Erato, Erato ; dtropo, Atropos ; Metto, Alecto :
Some contracted nouns, generally used in poetry ; as,
immdgo,(foT \ . testudo,(for 7 . , . Cartdgo, (for ) Car-
immdgine) $l™%e > testudint) J tortoise ' Cartdgine) 5 thage:
And the nouns3
mdnO) hand ; eco} echo,
are feminine.
Some nouns of animate beings ending in o, in the feminine
change o into a; as,
Colombo, pigeon ; Colombo, hen-dove ;
cavdllo, horse ; cavallA, mare ;
gdtto, cat; gattA, she-cat.
* Lapis, l pencil', and some very few foreign nouns, as, ribes, ' currants', cher-
me^, * cochineal 5* &c., are the only exceptions to this rule. But, then, we meet
in'Italian with many nouns, which, in composition, are made to end with a
consonant ; and this on principles, which will be explained in Part IIP. when
treating of ITALIAN ORTHOGRAPHY.
SUBSTANTIVES. 37
Nouns ending in a are of the feminine gender ; as,
cdsA, house ; strddA, street ;
port A, door; chits A, church.
u x c K p T i o N s .
Proper names of men ; as,
^Eneas ; Andrea, Andrew , Tobza, Toby ;
, Attila ; Battista, Baptist ; Luca, Luke :
Nouns of professions exercised by men ; as,
artista, artist; scriba, scrivener; alchimista, alchymist;
legisla, lawyer ; potta} poet; ebanista, cabinet-maker -
Nouns of dignity ; as,
papa, pope ; duca, duke ; g&rdrca, high-priest ;
patridrca, patriarch ; mondrca, monarch ; demdrca, demarch :
Nouns derived from the Greek, ending in ma^mma ; as,
clima, climate ; diadema, diadem ; pocma, poem ;
prisma, prism ; enimma, enigma ; progrdmma, programma :
Nouns formed of a verb and a noun ; as,
pascibietola, logger- santinfizza, hypocrite: guardaroba, the ma»-
[head ; °[ter of the wardrobe ;
And the following,
j sofa ; sdrra, ; sciloma, long discourse ;
cipa, sot ; canape, hemp; baccald, cod-fish :
ire masculine.
The nouns,
diota, idiot; eremita, hermit; anacoreta, anchorite;
pocrita, hypocrite; apostata, apostate; patriotta, patriot;
deicida, deicide ; parriclda, parricide ; regicida, regicide ;
raticida, fratricide ; omiclda, homicide ; matricida, matricide ;
intagonista, antagonist; regalista, royalist; monopolista, monopo-
[list;
Deista, Deist ; ateista, atheist; Calvinista, Calvinist;
Are of the common gender.
38
ANALOGY.
Some names of animate beings ending in a, in the masculine
change a into o ; as,
, doe ; c^rvo, stag ;
A, she- wolf ; lupo, wolf;
OTSA, she-bear ; orso, bear.
The nouns, tima, piantta, drdmma, podesth, in the significa-
tion of * theme', ' planet', ; drama', ' civil magistrate', are mas-
culine ; and in the signification of ' fear', ' cope', ' drachm',
'power', are feminine.
EXAMPLES.
Galedtto fu IL LIBRO e chi lo
scrisse. (Dant. Inf. 5.)
O'ra eke debbo dire di quelli
che escono DALLO scRiTToio/ra
la ginte cdlla pinna neW orec-
chio. (Casa Galat. 86.)
Gli abitatdri di questo Castillo
con ARMATA MANO pervennero at
lido. (Guid. 60.)
Tdle che di lontdno Nelle
valli ECO TRISTA risuondva.
(Bocc. Tes. 11, 30.)
V&ro diro fdrse, e parr a men-
z6gna — C/i' i sent? trdrmi delta
PROPRIA IMAGO (Petr. c. 4, 8.)
Siccdme qudndo IL COLOMBO
si pons, — Prisso al compdgno.
(Dant. Par. 25.)
Niuna gldria a uri1 dquila
& Vaver vinto UNA COLOMBA.
(Bocc. g. n.)
In CASA TUA sei orgoglidso e
incomp or labile ; a case altrui,
umile e dimesso. (Varch. Sen.
ben. 3. 28.)
Mise dissenzione NELLA CHIE-
SA, ttnindo sitta c6ntro al Pa-
pa con certi cardindli ed dltri
c^rici. (Giov. Vill. 1.4,21, 1.)
The book and he who wrote
it were [to us] Galeotto.
No.w what must I say of
those, who come out of their
study among the people with
a pen over the ear.
The inhabitants of this castle
with arms in their hands reach-
ed the shore.
Such that at a distance
sounded in the valleys like a
sad echo.
Perhaps I shall tell the truth
and it will appear false, that 1
felt myself drawn away from
my own body.
As when the dove alight*
by his mate.
.
No glory comes to an eagl<
from having conquered a dove I
In thy house thou art prouc |
and insupportable; and at the
houses of others, humble an<{
submissive.
He put dissension in th<|
church, plotting against th
Pope with certain cardinal
and other priests.
SUBSTANTIVES.
39
fu IL maggtore, e ipiu SAVIO
LEGISTA, che fdsse fino al suo
timpo. (Giov.'Vill. 8. 65, 2:)
II tnio signdre nella liber alitd
a QLVEL gran MONARCA non cede.
(Red. Vip. 1. 7.)
Ecoslfigurdndo 'I Paradiso,-
Convien saltdr LO SAGRATOPOE-
MA, — Cdme chi trudva suo cam-
min reciso. (Dant. Par. 23.)
Ribdldo, SANTINFIZZA, gabba-
dei, — Che a quel d'dltri pon cin-
que e cam sei. (Lipp. M. 7. 68.)
Orfinisci dra auESTO TT^O sci-
6MA, che tuavevi comincidto di
colui Id. (Salv. Spin. 1. 3.)
Parole, le qudli lo Spirito
Sdnto sdpra la lingua delV u6MO
ID i6T A ponev a. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 4.)
Ed T^NA LtfpA, che di tutte
brdme — Sembrdva cdrca. (Dant.
Inf. 1.)
Ed ecco, memo a lei, uscir d*
unamdcchiafolta UN itipogrdn-
de e terribile. (Bocc. g. 9. n. 7.)
Perocche s\ mi cdccia IL LtiN-
GO TEMA. (Dant. Inf. 4.)
Da, auESTA TEMA acciocche tu
ti sdlve. (Dant. Inf. 2.)
Lo BEL PIANETA, che ttd flWOT
conforta — Faceva tutto rider
VOriente. (Dant. Purg. 1.)
Aricora, Idscio #NA PIANETA
di zendddo vermzglio. (Bocc.
Testam.)
DRAMMA e un componimento
poetico rappresentatzvo. (Cru-
S«»z' essa non fermdi peso di
DRAMMA. (Dant. Purg. 21.)
Qudndo verrd lor NIMICA PO-
(Dant. Inf. 6.)
He was the greatest and the
wisest lawyer, that had been
seen until his time.
My master in liberality does
not yield to that monarch.
And with such figuring of Pa-
radise,—The sacred strain must
leap, like one that meets-A sud-
den interruption to his road.
Ribald, hypocrite, mocker of
God, who 'add five to that of
others, and take out six.
Now finish that long discourse
that thou hadst begun about
that man.
Words, which the Holy
Ghost put into the mouth of the
ignorant man.
And a she-wolf who seemed
to be laden with wants of every
When lo ! near her, came
out from a thick hedge a large
and terrible wolf.
For my wide theme so urges
me on.
That thou mayest be relieved
from this fear.
The beautiful planet that in-
vites to love, made all the
orient laugh.
I bequeath, moreover, a cope
of crimson silk stuff.
The drama is a poetical
composition to be represented.
Without which, I did not
rest a moment.
When shall come the Power
adverse to them.
40 ANALOGY.
Come piu tosto pots, rfandS a As soon as he could, he went
eolui}ckein luogo DEL PODKST! to him who filled the place of
(Bocc. g, 2. n. 1 .) ' Podestk.
Nouns ending in e are some of them masculine, and
some feminine ; as.
cdrmE, m., poem ; falcEj f., reaping hook ;
co'Z/E, m., hill ; siepE, f., hedge ;
t/?orE, m., flower ; ntw, f., snow.
Those ending in ge, les me, re, se, nte, are generally
masculine ; as,
?GE, king ; inaLE, path ;
MME, river ; CMO'RE, heart ;
;, utensil ; WO'NTE, mountain.
EXCEPTIONS.
The nouns,
I6gge, law, faldnge, phalanx ; laringe, larynx ",
indolej disposition ; prole, offspring ; pelle, skin ;
bile, bile; voile, valley; ipirbole. hyperbole;
drme, arm; fame, hunger; spsme, hope;
scure, hatchet; polvere, dust; vepre, brier;
torrc, tower; febbre, fever; mddre, mother;
frdsc, phrase ; buiose, dungeons; ge.nte,, people ;
mente, mind ; lente, lens ; patente, patent ;
corrente, current; sorgente} source; scmente, seed;
are feminine.
Those ending in be, ce, pe, te, ve, ie, ine, one, are,
generally, feminine ; as,
JO^BE, common people ; cicatrice, scar ;
hedge ; a?*TE, art ;
key ; s^riE, series ;
, image ; tncuifiNE, anvil ;
reason ; nozt&KE, nation.
SUBSTANTIVES. 41
EXCEPTIONS.
The nouns,
dice, elk ; pesce, fish ; mdntice, bellows ;
eodice, code ; cdlice, chalice ; vortice, vortex ;
pepe, pepper ; presepe, stable ; recipe, recipe ;
vdte, bard; Idtte, milk; limite, limit;
breve, a brief; conclave, conclave; architrave, architrave;
erzne, hair ; cdrdine, hinge ; confine, confine ;
disordine, disorder ; glutine, glue ; pettine, comb ;
lastone, stick ; mattone, brick ; paragone, comparison;
are masculine.
The nouns, .
dere, air ; cdrcere,* prison ; c^nere,* ashes j
tirbore, tree ; fdlgore, thunderbolt ; fronted forehead ;
fonte, fountain ; /tmc,t rope; trdve, beam;
grtgge,* flock; cons&rte, consort; ertde, heir;
partnte, parent;
are of the common gender.
Names of animate beings, ending in c, are generally of the
common gender ; as,
Uprv, hare; strpv, snake.
The noun dimdne, when it means i to-morrow', is masculine ;
but when it signifies 'the beginning of the day', is feminine.
The noun mdrgine, when it means 'scar', is feminine ; but
when it means * margin,' ' extremity', is of the common gender.
The nouns /ante, and^ne, when they mean 'foot-soldier'; and
aim' or ' design', are masculine : but when they mean ' ser-
vant'; and ' end' or ' termination', are of the common gender.
The nouns oste, and ordine, when they mean ' host', an * inn-
keeper' ; and ' order', a ' command', are masculine : but when
they mean ' host,' an ' army'; and ' order', ' arrangement', or a
4 religious order', they are of the common gender.
* Corcere, ccnere, and gregge, in the plural number, cdrceH, * prisons', c6nerir
4 ashes' j and grcggi, * flocks', are feminine only,
t Frtnte and /tine, in prose, are feminine only.
4*
ANALOGY.
EXAMPLES.
Ennio di quel cantd RTJVIDO
CARME. (?etr. s. 153.)
Qucsta era molto bine affossa-
ta, e con BUONA SIEPE. (Sacch.
n. 91.)
Vidigente, alia riva <f UN gran
FIUMK. (Dant. Inf. 3.)
Un rlv!) d'dcqua chiarissima,
il qudle d'una montagnetta di-
scendera in UNA VALLE oMBu6-
s&. (Bocc. g. 1. n. I.)
Serrdtalacella COLLA CHIAVE,
dirittamente sen ando alia came-
ra dclloMate. (Bocc. g. 1. n.4.)
Fawns dal cielo una colomba
bidncac'jme neve, e, messo il bec-
CO BEL C ALICE, tllttO 'I SOingUt
si bevre. (Pass. 136.)
Ed evvi, oltre a questo. TAERE
assdipiii TKESCO. (Bocc. Intr.)
Ma poicche Z'AERE a divenir
incomincio.(Bocc. Araet.)
Ed entrdta nel CHIARO FONTZ
tutta si rnise nellc deque. (Bocc.
Amet.)
Dintorno ALL A F^NTE sipose-
roasedere. (Bocc. g. 6. n. 1.)
JWm credo UN SERPE, che ha 'I
cor cotdnto accrbo. (Dittam. 2.
12.)
Te non colomba, ma VELENOSA
SERPE conosctndo, con tutta la
forza di perseguire intendo.
(Bocc. g. 8. n. 7.)
Lo stolto semprc procrdstina
di far btne, dicendo : ' Dimdn
farb bsne'; e sempre Z'UN DI-
MANK diman^Z'A
(Aibertan. c. 61.)
Ennius sang of him a rude
song.
This was well f rtified by a
ditch, and by a good hedge.
I beheld a throng upon the
shore of a great stream.
A. stream of very clear water,
which descended from a little
hill into a shady valley.
Having locked the cell with
the key, he went directly to the
chamber of the Abbot.
There descended from Hea-
von a dove as white as snow,
and, having put its b *ak into the
chalice, it drank all the blood.
And there, besides this, the
air is a great deal more fresh.
But when the air began to
be good.
And having entered into the
clear fountain, she plunged
herself into the water.
They sat around the fountain.
I do not beliewe a serpent,
who has a heart so cruel.
Knowing thee to be not a
dove, but a venomous serpent,
I intend to persecute thee with
all my power.
The fool always delays to
do good, saying: 'To-morrow
1 will do good.' And one to-
morrow ever requires another.
SUBSTANTIVES.
Qudndofui desto inndnzi LA
DIMANE, — Pidnger senlii fra 'I
sonno i miei figliuoli. (Dant.
inf. 33.)
Si ricordo lei doverc avere
tfsA MARGINE, a gmsa d'una
€7ocetta, sopra I'orecchia sini-
stra, (Bocc. g. 5. n. 5.)
Lofondo suo, ed dmbo le pen-
did — Fdtte eron pietra, e i MAR-
TINI d'alldto. (Dant. Inf. 14.)
Posciachfr ella sifu condotta
ALLA MARGINE delCdlta ripa,
nuotdndo scampdmmo . (Firenz.
Aein.)
Manddndo cinquccento FANTI
UHIBELLINI del contddo di Fi-
renze. (Giov. Vill. 1. 7. c. 109.)
DoLcm6so piu che dltro — Se '
fdtto FANTE. (Bocc. Tes. 4.
83.;
Jiveva Giacomino in cdsa UNA
FANTE ATTEMPATA. (BOCC. g.
5. n. 5.)
Un uomo a LIETO FfNE per-
venuto. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 4.)
Questa fu LA FINE delV im-
pzratore Arrigo. (Giov. Vill.
1.7. c. 22.)
Volendo IL stio OSTE esser
pagato, primieramente GLI die-
de r una. (Bocc. g. 1. n. 7.)
Cosi avvenne nel nostro bene
AVVENTURATO OSTE. (GlOV.
Vill. I. 11. c. 53.)
CongregdtfjtA BELLA, egrdn-
de, K PODEROSA 6sTE. (Bocc. g.
2, n. 7.)
Dal Signdr Jlnnibale Ruccelldi,
potrd ella intendere L' ORDINE
deUe cose. (Casa, lett. 8.)
Se con sdna msnte sard RI-
eOARDATO L,' ORDINE delle COSC.
(Boec. g. 9. n. 9.)
When I awoke before the
morning, I heard my sons sob
in their slumber.
He recollected that she ought
to have a scar, like a cross,
above the left ear.
Its bed and sloping sides, and
both the margins, were petri-
fied.
After that she came to the
margin of the high bank, we
escaped by swimming.
Sending five hundred Ghi-
belline foot-soldiers from the
territory of Florence.
Wretched more than any
other, thou art made a servant.
Giacomino had in his bouse
an elderly servant maid.
A man who had come to a
happy end.
This was the end of the Em-
peror Henry.
His host desiring to be paid,
he first gave him that one.
Thus he fell in with our for-j
lunate army.
He collected a fine, large and
powerful army.
From Mr Annibal Ruccellai,
you may hear the order which
I have given to him.
If we should consider with
sound mind the order of things.
44 ANALOGY.
PRESA L' ORDINE tra loro, il Having made the arrange -
trattdto fu riveldto al Duca. raent among themselves, they
Stor. Pistol, p. 171.) revealed the subject to the
duke.
Jo ho avuta sempre special I have always had a special
divozione AL VOSTRO ORDINE. devotion to your order.
(Bocc. g. 1.. n. I.)
Al tempo del ditto Papa Jnno- In the times of the said Pope
cenzo si comincio LA SANTA OR- Innocent, was instituted the or •
DINE d& Frdti Minori. (Giov. der of the Minor Friars.
Vill. 1. 1. c. 24.)
Nouns ending in i are some of them masculine, and
some feminine ; as,
eclissi, m., eclipse ; crisi, f., crisis ;
brindisi, m., toast ; f&i, f., thesis.
Nouns of dignity, as,
ball, bailiff; pdri, peer; guardasigitti, keeper
'[of the seal:
The noun di, * day', and its compounds ; as,
buond\t good day ; mezzodl, noon ; oggidi, now-a-days:
Nouns formed of a verb and a noun in the plural ; as,
lavaceci, dunce ; graffiasdnti, hypocrite ; guardaportoni, porter -r
leccapidtti, glutton ; cacciadidvoli, exorcist; cavadenti, tooth draw-
[er:
And the following,
alealt, alkali ; ambdssi, ambs-aces ; zdnni, merry-andrew ;
abbiccif alphabet ; barbagidnni, owl ; soprattieni, delay ;
cremisl, crimson ; diesi, diesis [in music] ; appigionasi, notice of
[a house to let :
are masculine.
The noun Gencsi, * Genesis', is of the common gender.
SUBSTANTIVES.
45
Nouns ending in u are some of them masculine, and
some feminine; as,
me'u, m. dill ;
ragUy m. ragout-,
soprappib, m. overplus ;
gru,f. crane ;
tribhf. tribe ;
gioventuf. youth.
EXAMPLES.
Signijicdva gran sccco nslla
vegnentc state, e poi nella oppo-
sizione di CUJELLO ECCLISSI
gran sovcrchio d> deque. (Giov.
Viil. 1. 11. c. 2.)
Qucl, eke i medici nostri ckid-
man CRISI. (Bern. Rim. 1. 16.)
Cingonlo intorno i suoi FA MO-
ST PARI. (Ariost. Far. 38. 79.)
H medico si f ice loro incontro
dicendo, che Iddio dtsse~l6ro IL
UONDL (Bocc. g. 8. n. 9.)
IL maggior CACCIADIAVOH
non & in Toscdna. (Lor. Med.
Arid. 2. 5.)
Ma tdli cose hdnno piu DEL
Ayyi,esondison6ste. (Demetr.
Seng. 67.)
Comincertmo dal principio
DEL GENESI. (GlOV. Vill. 1. 11.
c.2)
Lascidsse loro nn per cento
di quanta kdnno, e guadagnds-
sonsi quell uno col sudore del
ro/io, come comdnda LA GENESI.
(Dav. Seism, p. 38.)
IL MEU i CALDO cd c erba, il
cui s6me e detto con simlglidnie
nome. (Cr. 6. 78. 1.)
lo ho giudicdto, che egli sia
oramdi bene con qwilche freno
riientre i cdldi impeti BELLA
stf A GiovKNTilL. (Firenz. Asin.
178.)
It announced a great drought
in the following summer,and af-
terward at the opposition of that
eclipse, a great abundance of
water.
That, which our physicians
call crisis.
His famous peers surround
him.
The physician went to meet
them, wishing God would give
them a good day.
A greater exorcist is not to
be found in Tuscany,
But such things more become
a merry-andrew, and are in-
decent.
We will commence from the
beginning of Genesis.
That he should leave them
one per centum of what they
have, and that they should earn
that one by the sweat of their
brow, as is commanded in Gen-
esis.
The dill is warm, and it is an
herb whose seed is called by
the same name.
I have thought, that it is
now proper to moderate, with
some restraint, the warm im-
pulses of his youth.
46 ANALOGY.
Adjectives, verbs, adverbs, prepositions, when used
substantively, are of the masculine gender ; as,
lello, beautiful : seguitdre, to continue ;
dove, where; quando, when;
come, how; perche, why;
sl> yes ; no, no.
The names of the days of the week, except Dome-
nica, « Sunday'; and those of the months, are masculine ;
as,
Mercoledl, Wednesday; Sabato, Saturday;
Sprite, April; dgosto, August.
Names of trees are masculine ; as,
olmo, elm-tree; mirto, myrtle-tree ;
no'ce, walnut-tree;, limone, lemon-tree.
EXCEPTIONS.
Queraa, oak-tree ; vite, vine ; ginestra, broom ;
are feminine.
Names of fruits are feminine* ; as,
pera, pear; ardncia, orange;
susina, plum; ciriegia, cherry.
EXCEPTIONS.
Pdmo, apple ; fico, fig ; d&ttero, date ;
cedro, citron \ pino, pine ; limdne, lemon,
are masculine.
Some masculine nouns, when used to denote a femi-
nine object, take a different termination; as,
amico, friend, m. ; arnica, friend, f. ;
cugino, cousin, in. ; cugina, cousin, f. ;
genitore, father; genitrice, mother; -
autore, author ; autrice, authoress ;
poita, poet ; poetessa poetess ;
sacerdote, priest ; sacerdotessa. priestess ;
duca, duke ; duchessa, duchess ;
principe, prince; principessa, princess;
re, king ; regina, queen.
* These are generally formed from the names of trees, changing o into a; as,
mdxdorZo, * almond-tree' ; widndorM, * an almond' igtlso, 'mulberry-tree';
' a mulberry.'
SUBSTANTIVES.
47
Some names of animate beings denote the feminine
by a different word ; as,
uomo, man; donna, woman;
tdro, bull; vacca, cow;
pdrco, pig; troia, sow;
Some in the feminine take a different termination ; as.
cane, dog ;
/eone, lion;
cag-na, bitch ;
leondssa, lioness ;
And others are either masculine or feminine, and
designate both genders ; as,
corvo, m., crow ;
panUra* £, panther.
EXAMPLES.
Le donne, gudndo arrivano a
quardnta dnni perdono IL BELLO
dilla gioventudinc. (Libr.
Adorn. Donn.)
La regina a Filomina, voltdta,
le impose IL SEGUITARE. (Bocc.
g. 3. n. 3.)
IL D6vE w ho gia pensdto.
(Bocc. g. 2.)
Sarei continto di sapere IL
GIUANDO. (Petr. s. 306.)
DEL C^ME non ti cdglia IL
PERCHE ti diro. (Bocc. Filoc.)
Son certa DEL si. (Bocc. g.
7. n. 7.)
Ciascuno rispdsc DEL NO.
(Bocc. g. 1. n. 7.)
Jlncora JL MERCOLEDI, e 7
Venerdlj e IL SABATO. (Maes-
truzz. 1. 33.)
L*AMOR6 SOMIRTO — Crescepiu
volontitr net cespo intiro. ( Alam.
Colt. 1. 16.)
LA vfTE appo ?i6i t assai co~
noscitita. (Cr. 4. 1. 1.)
When women arrive at forty
years they lose the beauty of
youth.
The queen turning to Filo-
mena, ordered her to continue.
I have already thought of the
where.
I should be happy to know
the when.
Do not trouble yourself about
the how, I will tell you the
why.
I am certain of the .affirma-
tive.
Every one answered in the
negative.
Even Wednesday, and Fri-
day, and Saturday.
- The amorous myrtle grow*
better in the whole bush.
The Vine among us is very
well known.
46
ANALOGY.
Ti sir bo gclse, mdndorle,
e SUSINE. (Bocc. Amet. 15.)
Tson qutl dellefruUc del mat
6rto — Chequiriprendo DATTERO
per FICO. (Dant. Inf. 33.)
E di qu&sto consiglio fu au-
trice una ch'tbbe n6me Polisso.
(But. Com. Dant.)
D6xNA e nume generico dilla
FEMMIXA dilla spezie umdna.
(Crusca.)
Mi sovvihied'avcrfdtlo man-
gidre al LE6NK della cdrnc d'u-
naLEONEssA. (Red. Ins. 71 .)
Infra molte bidnche colombe
aggiugne.piu di bellezza UN NE-
no c6RVo, chc un cdndido cAgno.
(Bocc. g,9n. 10.)
I keep for thee mulberries, al
monds, and plums.
He — am I, who fruit from
evil garden brought ;— And here
my fig is with a date repaid.
And the author of this coun-
sel was one who was named
Polisso.
Woman is the generic name
of the female of the human
species.
I recollect to have made the
lion eat of the flesh of the li-
oness.
Amongst many white doves
a black crow adds more beauty
than a white swan.
NUMBER, Or FORMATION OF THE PLURAL,
Masculine nouns, ending in 0, a, e, form the plural by
changing 0, a, e, into ?*; as,
/i&ro, book; Zi&ri, books;
cavdllo, horse ; cavdlli, horses ;
^O&A, poet; potti, poets;
climA, climate ; c/imi, climates ;
JWTE, flower ; fior^ flowers ;
leprE, hare ; lepn, hares.
Feminine nouns, ending in 0, e, form the plural by
changing 0, e, into i; as,
mdno, hand; mdm, hands;
drtE, art; drti, arts;
fontE, fountain ; . font i, fountains.
Feminine nouns ending in a, form the plural by chang-
ing a into e; r s,
house ;
, table ;
COSE, houses ;
E, tables;
SUBSTANTIVES. 49
Nouns ending in t, u, or in ie, or with an accented
vowel, do not change their termination in the plural ; as,
estasi) extacy ; tstasi, extacies ;
gru, crane; gru, cranes;
sptciE, sort; sptciE, sorts;
rE,* king; rE, kings;
cittA* city; cittA, cities;
virtu* virtue ; virth, virtues.
The following nouns in the plural have an irregular
formation :
Dw,
udmo,
bue,
God ;
man ;
ox ;
D6i,t Gods ;
uomini, men ;
budi^ oxen.
EXAMPLE:
ALCUNI CAVALLI si diputano
a vettura, dltri a cdrr&.(Cr. 6. 9.)
Ef dimsa la terra in SETTE
CLIMI. (But. Com. Dant.)
Ed io 9l provdi sul primo
uprir DE' Fi6ri. (Petr. c. 38.)
COLLE mie MANI avrei gid
posto in terra — Queste meinbra
noiosc. (Petr. s. 29.)
Qualcuna rf' este ndtti — Chiu-
da omdi quisle DIJE r6NTi di
pitinto. (Petr. c. 46.)
E diquello un mezzo bicchier
per uomo desse ALLE prime MEN-
SB. (Bocc. g. 6. n. 2.)
E questo e essere in ESTASI.
(But. Com. Dant.)
LE GRU hdnno un loro re, e
tutte lo servono, (Fior.Vt. c. 19.)
De* qudli animdli sono quasi
infinite LE SPECIE. (Gell. Circ.
2. 29.)
Some horses are destined for
burden, others to the carriage.
The earth is divided into
seven climates.
And I experienced it at the
first blooming of the flo\yers.
I should have already with
my own hands laid in the
ground thes« wearisome limbs.
Let one of these nights
close these two fountains of
tears.
And of that [wine] he should
give half a tumbler to each man
at the first course.
And this is to be in extacy.
The cranesJiave a king, and
all serve him.
Of which animals, the spe-
cies are almost infinite.
* Such nouns are generally contracted ; as re from rjge, cittd from cittAde,
virtu from virtude ; and when :h.'V are used entire, that is, without the suppres-
sion of any syllable rege, cittdde, virtude, they change their termination, and
make in the plural rcgi> 'kings'; cittddi, ; cities'^ mrtudi^ 'virtues' according
to the general rule.
5
50 ANALOGY.
LE CITTA son nemiche, amici Cities are unfriendly, the
i boschi — A' miiipcnsieri. (Fetr. woods are friendly to my
c. 37J thoughts.
Tutti iREGidel mondo sono All the kings in the world
mino a vostro sposo. (Fr. Guitt. are inferior to your husband.
lett. 10.;
Tosto GLI DEI d' abisso in Soon the go ds of the Abyss
vdrie tdrme — Concorron dogni in different bands, rush from
intorno alV dlte porte. (Tass. all sides to the lofty gates.
Ger. 3. 5.)
Veggendo MOI/TI UOMINI nil- Seeing many men frequent
La cdrte del padre usdre. (Bocc. the court of her father.
g. 4. n. 1.)
Perche addiv6nne, che i su6i. Wherefore it happened, that
gli dsini, le pecore, per li cdmpi the oxen, the asses, the goats,
.96 n'anddvano. (Bocc. Introd.) went astray through the fields.
Many nouns in o in the plural end in i, and more
elegantly in a ; as,
audio, ring; \ Qr rings ;
labbm.
Some have only the termination in a in the plural ; as,
miglio, mile ; ml^/iA, miles ;
staio, bushel; stdiA, bushels;
udvo, egg; UOVA, eggs.
[For a list of Words in 0, making the plural in i or a, see APPENDIX, D.]
Riso, l laughter' ; membto, ' limb', or t member of the human
body', form their plural in i and a ; risi, risa, * laughter' ; w^m-
brit membra, l limbs' : but riso, ' rice' ; mtmbro, ' member of a
corporation or political body', form their plural in i only ; risi,
* rice' ; mtmbri, ' members'.
Gtsto, ( exploit' ; frutto, l the fruit of a tree' ; Ugno, i fire-
wood,' form their plural in i and a ; gtsti, gtsta, i exploits' ;
frutti,frutta, ' fruits' ; Itgni, Ugna, { wood' : but gtsto, i gesture' ;
frutto, * production of the earth', or ' income' ; ttgno, l the hard
substance of a tree', ' a ship,' or ' a coach', form their plural in i
only ; g&ti, ' gestures ' ; frutti, ' produce' or ' income ' ; Ugni,
* billets of wood', * ships', or * coaches'.
SUBSTANTIVES.
51
Osso, i bone', has a treble termination in the plural, making
dssi, osse, ossa, ' bones'.
When these nouns take the termination in a in the
plural, they become feminine, and receive the article It
before them ; as, le anilla, ' the rings' ; le miglia, * the
miles ' ; lefrutta, * the fruits' ; le osse or le ossa, ' the
bones.'
Finally there are, in Italian, as well as in all other languages,
some nouns which have only the singular number; as, all
proper names,* names of metals, and the words prole, ' genera-
tion' ; progenie, ' progeny' ; stirpe, ' race' ; mane, * morning' ;
miele, ' honey,' &c. ; and others which have only the plural ; as,
Idri, * household gods'; annali, 'annals'; calzoni, 'breeches';
vdnni, l wings' ; forbid, l scissars' ; nozze, ' nuptials' ; esequie,
1 exequies' ; reni, ' the reins' ; molle or molli, ' tongs' ; spezie or
spfaj, ' spices' ; froge, l the skin over the nostrils of a horse' ;
&c.
EXAMPLES.
Fdttosi prestdre a Madonna
Giacomma un DE* suoi ANELLI,
guivi per sua moglie sposd la
ddi.iina. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 4.)
Lalunga gutrra — Che DEL-
L'ANELLA fe' si dlte spoglie.
(Dant. Inf. 28.)
E'lla fcce portdre i due cap-
poni Ihsi, e M6LTE u6vA
fresche. (Bocc. g. 7. n. 1.)
Lascidrono anddr Calandrino
con LE maggior EISA del mondo.
(Bocc. g. 8. n. 3.)
Lo spirto DALLE lille MEM-
BRA scidlto. (Petr. s. 259.)
Tdnto piu celebrd_ Tiberio
SIJE GESTA in sendto. (Dav.
Tac. ann. 1. 2.)
Viveano quasi come lestie di
FBT^TTA, e di ghidnde. (Giov.
Vill. 1. 1. c. 23.)
Having asked Madonna Gia-
comina to lend him one of her
rings, there took Catharine to
wife.
That long war, in which was
made the rich booty of the
rings.
She caused to be brought
the two boiled capons, and
many fresh eggs.
They let Calandrino go with
the greatest laughter in the
world.
The spirit freed from the
beautiful limbs.
Tiberius celebrated so much
the more his exploits in the se-
nate.
They lived like beasts on
fruit and mast .
* When proper names of persons^ however, are taken as common, they are
used also in the plural ; as, t Chiabrera, i Filicaia, i JKedi, i Jtfenzini, i Ouidi, i
Frugdni, e tanti dltri sublimi e pr igiatkssimi irtgtgni, « the Chiabreras, the Fili-
caias, the Redis, the Menzinis, the Guidis, the Frugonis, and so many other sub-
lime and most worthy geniuses.'
52 ANALOGY,
ttfuoco cresce per LE I.E-INA, Fire is increased by wood,
e qudnte piii ce ne metti mag- and the more you put on, the
giore si fa. (Fr. Giord. 146.) larger it becomes.
Fu r,on solamtnte vcciso, ma He was not only killed, but
fino ALL' OSSA divordto. (JBocc. devoured even to the bones,
g. 2. n. 9.)
LA ST£KPE non fa le singu- Family does not make ex-
Idri persone nlbili, ma le singu- traordinary persons noble, but
Idri persone fdnno nobile LA extraordinary persons render
BTIRPE. (Dant. Conv.) their family noble.
Cristo voile per sva prcsenza Christ wished to honor with
onordr LE NOZZE di Cdna Ga- his presence the nuptials of
lil-ia,) equimfdre ilpTinio mird- Cana of Galilee, and there to
colo. (Cavalc. Espos. simb. 1.) work the first miracle.
Independently of the change of termination, there are
in Italian many nouns, which in the plural undergo a
certain change of orthography.
Thus all nouns ending in ca, ga, in order to preserve
in the plural before the vowels i, e, the same sound
which c, g, have in the singular before the vowel #, take
an h, in the plural after the consonant c, g ; as,
monarcA, monarch; mcmdrcm, monarchs ;
cotflGA, colleague; collegni, colleagues;
monacA9 nun ; mo'nacHe, nuns ;
rod ; vergHe, rods*
Nouns ending in co, go, consisting of two syllables,
also take an h in the plural after c, g ; as,
g-two'co, sport; giuocm, sports:
place ; luogui, places.
EXCEPTIONS.
Greco, { Greek' ; porcoj 'hog' ; in the plural make, Greet, c Greeks';
porcij ' hogs.' Mdgo, - magician', in the plural makes either i
or magi, ' magicians'.
SUBSTANTIVES.
53
Nouns in co, go, of more than two syllables, if co, go,
are preceded by a consonant, take an h in the plural ;
and if they are preceded by a vowel they are written
without h ; as,
bifdlco, laborer ; bifolcni, laborers ;
albtroo, inn ; albtrgui, inns ;
mtdico, physician; mtdici, physicians;
tedloGo, theologian ; te&oQi, theologians.
EXCEPTIONS.
The following nouns,
cdrico, charge ;
fondaco, warehouse ;
pdrroco, parson ;
stdmaco, stomach ;
mdnico, handle ;
traffico, trading ;
in the plural make,
cdricm, charges ;
fdndacui, warehouses ;
pdrrociii, parsons ;
stomacni, stomachs ;
mdnicui, handles ;
tradings ;
dbbligo, obligation ;
ripiegOj expedient ;
catdlogo, catalogue ;
impiego, employment ;
gastigo, punishment;
intrigo, intrigue ;
obbligui, obligations j
ripidgm, expedients ;
catdlogni, catalogues;
impiegui, employments ;
gastigRit punishments ;
intrigui, intrigues.
Several other nouns in co,go, are indifferently written
with or without the h ; as,
mendzco, beggar ;
equivoco, equivoque ;
didloGO, dialogue ;
apologue ;
[ For a list of Nouns ending in co, go, and making the plural in ci, £t, or eftt,
ghi, see APPEKVIX D. (2.)}
5*
54 ANALOGY.
Nouns ending in cm, gia, and ccia, ggia, unaccented,
form their plural by changing a into e, and suppressing
the i ; as,
IdnciA, lance ; ZdncE, lances ;
frdnGiA, fringe ; frdnGE, fringes ;
arrow; jWccE, arrows;
A, strand f ^idcGE, strands.
Nouns ending in do, gio, and ccio, gg*io, unaccented,
form their plural by changing o into i, and suppressing
the i that they have in the singular; or what is the same,
by suppressing only the o ; as,
fcdcro, kiss ; 6dci, kisses ;
/r^Gio, honor; freGi, honors ;
Jdccio, snare 5 Zacci, snares ;
"raGGio, ray ; rdcei, rays.
But if cia, gia, and ccia, ggia, or cio, ^zo and ccio, ggio are ac-
cented, the i is never suppressed ; as,
c/eoiA, elegy; elegie, elegies j
farmaciA, pharmacy ; fairnacie, pharmacies;
reading-desk ; leggii, reading-desks.
Nouns ending in chio, ghio, glio, form the plural by
suppressing the o ; as,
OCCHIO, eye ; OCCHI, eyes ;
mwg-GHio, bellowing ; mwg-GHi, bellowings ;
5coGi,io, rock ; ^CO'GLI, rocks.
Nouns ending in dio* 6io, also form their plural by
suppressing the o ; as,
fornAio, baker ; fornAi, bakers;
Jttatbio, spinning-wheel; JXatoi, spinning-wheels,
All other nouns ending in io, if io is unaccented,
* Most nouns in dio end alsoindro; as, libraioor librA.Ro,for> dioor/ornARO;
when they take this last termination, in the plural they make librari, ' booksel-
lers' ;/or«dri, * bakers' ; according to the general rule.
SUBSTANTIVES,
55
form their plural by changing io into j ; but if io is ac-
cented, they form it by changing the o of io into t; as,
studj, studies,
benefits, benefits ;
rii, rivulets ;
desii, desires.
studio, study;
benefizio,* benefit ;
rio, rivulet ;
desio, desire ;
The noun moglie, ' wife', forms the plural by suppres-
sing the e ; mogli, ' wives'.
EXAMPLES.
La contessa Mateldafondo un
ndbile monasterio di MONACHE.
(Giov. Vill. 1. 4. c. 20.)
II dl che costei ndcque eran le
stelle — In Lu6aHi alii ed eietti.
(Petr. c. 44.)
Tra brutti PORCI piu degni di
gdlle, — Che d' dltro cibofdtto in
umdn uso. (Dant. Purg. 14.)
/ sdvj si partirono, e torndrsi
a* I6ro ALBERGHI. (Nov. ant. 6.)
Si su6l ricdrrere n& mdli
pericolosi a' MEDICI eccellenti.
(Casa. Jett. 41).)
Ponendo loro grandissimi
CARICHI di montte. (Stor. Fist.
170.)
Le risptiste xive, le novel* e vi
erano, e gli APQLOGT. (Pros.
Fior. 6.)
Spdrti costdro per la piccolo,
cdsa, pdrte ri1 andd nella c6rte, e
poste giii lor LANCE, avvenne
che uno di loro gittb la sua
LANCIA net fieno. (Bocc. g. 5.
n. 30
The countess Matilda found-
ed a noble convent of nuns,
On the day when this lady
was born, the stars were in
high and chosen places.
'Midst brute swine — Worth-
ier of acorns than of other food
— Created for man's use.
The sages went away, and
returned to their dwellings.
In dangerous diseases we
are accustomed to have re-
course to excellent physicians.
Laying upon them
great imposts of money.
very
There were witty answers,
stories, and fables.
These having spread them-
selves through the small house,
and having laid down their lan-
ces, it happened that one of
them threw his lance into the
hay.
* Many nouns in zio, end also in do or gio ; as, benefizio or benefkc i o, sertAzio
or*er73iaioj but, however they may end, constantly form the plural in j ; aa,
benefizj or benejicj, l benefits' 5 servizj or sermgj, * services'.
56
ANALOGY.
Gia nella sommita de piu
alii monti apparivano i RAGGI
delta surge nte luce. (Bocc. g.
8. proem.)
Le giocdnde ode, e le lascive
ELEGIE, a tutte le dltre studiose
drti antipongono. (Dav. Tac.
Perd. Eloq.)
10 soleva esseruno degli OCCHI
del capo vdstro. (Pecor. g. 4.
Mi parea per tutto, dove che
io mi volgessi, sentire MTJGGHI,
urlif e strida di diversi c fero-
cissimi animdli. (Lab. 29.)
Che giova dunque, per che tut-
ta spdlme — La mia barchetta,
poicht infra gli sc6GLi E'
ritenuta. (Petr. c. 39.)
Donne, n6i sidmo gidvani
roRNAi. — Dell' drte nostra buon
maestri assdi. (Cant. Cam.
34.)
11 qudle, n& liberdli STTJDJ
ammaestrdto, sommamente i xa-
lordsi udmini onordva. (Bocc.
Vil. Dant.)
Jlppresso costdro le sirdcchie
e le M6GLI loro, tutte di brimo
vestite. nennero. (Bocc. g. 3.
n.7.)
Already on the summit of
the highest mountains appeared
the rays of the rising light.
They prefer the merry odes
and the lascivious elegies to all
the other studious arts.
I used to be one of the eyes
of your head,
I seemed to hear, wherever
I turned, the bellowings, the
bowlings, and the cries of dif-
ferent and very ferocious ani-
mals.
What does it avail to spread
all the sails of my bark, if she
is impeded among the rocks.
Ladies, we are young bakers
very well skilled in our art.
Who, being well skilled in
liberal pursuits, greatly honored
learned men.
After them came their sisters
and their wives, all dressed in
mourning.
VARIATION OF NOUNS.
Italian nouns are varied by means of certain preposi-
tions placed before them ; viz. DI, { of, in the genitive,
or relation of possession ; A, * to', in the dative, or rela-
tion of attribution ; DA, c from or by', in the ablative,
or relation of derivation. The nominative, or subjective,
and the accusative, or objective, are distinguished by the
place they occupy in the sentence.
Proper nouns are generally varied with the prepositions
only : common nouns with the prepositions and the ar-
SUBSTANTIVES. 57
tides il, lo, la ; i or li, gli, le, « the'. When common
nouns are used in an indefinite sense, they are varied
with the prepositions and the pronouns uno, una, ' a 'or
an' ; alcani, alcune, ' some'.
Variation of a Proper Noun.
Subjective (N.)*— ..... Chare, CaBsar :
C Possession (G.) — di Ces ire, of Caesar;
Relation of 2 Attribution (D.) — a Cesare, to Caesar;
( Derivation (Ab.) — da Chare, from or by Caesar;
Objective (Ac.) — ...... Cisare, Caesar.
Before a noun beginning with a vowel, the preposi-
tion di drops the i and takes an apostrophe in its stead ;
and the preposition a takes a d after it ; as,
D> AHtdnio, > f Anth . AD Antonio, > Anthonv
(for DI Antonio), $ y ' (for A Ant6mo), $
Variation of Common Nouns.
Masculine Noun, beginning with a Consonant, varied
with the article iL
Singular. Plural.
Subjective (N.) — il Lihro, the book ; i or li libri, the books ;
- C Poss. (G.) — del libro, of the book ; dei libri, of the books ;
Relat. -? Atlr. (D.) — al Libro, to the book ; di libri, to the books ;
( Der. (Ab.) — dal libro, from the dai libri, from the
[book ; [books ;
Objective (Ac.) — il libro, the book ; i libri, the books.
* To facilitate i he Variation of these and other nouns, to those who are ac-
customed to the Latin Declension, we have added to each relation the Initial of
the name of the corresponding case in Latin; thus (N.) stands for nominative ; (G.)
for genitive ; &c.
58 ANALOGY.
Masculine Noun, beginning with a Consonant, varied
with the article lo.
Singular. Plural.
Subjective (N.) — lo spicchio, the mirror ; gli specchi, the mirrors ;
f Poss. (G.) — dello specchio, of degli spscchi, of the
[the mirror ; [mirrors ;
Relat J Attr. (D.) — dllo specchio, to dgli specchi, to the
[the mirror ; [mirrors ;
I Der. (Ab.) — ddllo specchio, from ddgli spicchi, from the
L [the mirror; [mirrors;
Objective (Ac.) — lo specchio, the mirror; gli specchi, the mirrors.
Masculine Noun, beginning with a Vowel.
Singular. Plural.
Subjective (N.) — V amico, the friend ; gli ani i, the friends ;
f Poss. (G.) — delV amici, of the degli amici, of the
[friend ; [friends ;
Relat J ^ttr' (^') — a^' amic°i to t^ie ^* amid, to the
' j [friend ; [friends; .
I Der. (Ab.) — daW amico, from ddgli amid, from the
l_ [the friend ; [friends ;
Objective (Ac.) — V amico the friend ; gli amwij the friends.
Feminine Noun, beginning with a Consonant.
Singular. Plural.
Subjective (N.) — la cdsa, the house ; le case, the houses ;
f Poss. (G.y-deUa cdsa, of the > din ^ f ^ houge
[house ; $
Relat J Attr' (-»•)-««« cdsa, to the _ ^^^ to the houses .
J Der. (Ab.) — ddlla cdsa, from dalle case, from the
^ [the house ; [houses ;
Objective (Ac.) — la cdsa, the house ; le case, the houses.
SUBSTANTIVES. 59
Feminine Noun, beginning with a Vowel.
Singular. Plural.
Subjective (N.) — V dnina, the soul ; le dnime, the souls ;
Poss. (G.)-deH' dnima, of the
e ^ ^e ^^ of the soujs.
Relat.- Attr* (D-)~«H' anima, to the ' > ^ dj|i to the goulg .
[SOUl; }
Der. (Ab.)---daW dnima, from <Z«We dnime, from the
[the soul ; [souls ;
Objective (Ac.) — V dnima, the soul ; le dnimc, the souls.
Variation of Common Nouns used in an Indefinite
Sense.
Masculine Noun.
Singular. Plural.
Subjective (N.) — un uccello, a bird ; alcuni uccelli, some birds ;
fPoss. (G.) — d> un uccilioj of a d* alcuni uccdlli, of some
1 [bird; [birds;
Relat j Attr.(D.) — adunuccello,toa. ad alcuni uccelli, to some
[bird ; [birds ;
Der. (Ab.) — da un uccello, da alcuni ucc&li, from some
| J-»CA. \f\.\J . J^—U,l* €*/«/ U.H/Ct't/t/j U.I* tH/OM./C/t' W^Ubl/CC'j •* V»** OWIliO
[from a bird ; birds ;
Objective (Ac.) — un uccello, a bird ; alcuni uccelli, some birds.
Feminine Noun.
Singular. Plural.
Subjective (N.) — una mela, an apple ; alcune mele, some apples ;
fPoss. (G.) — d) una mela, of an dj alcune mele, of some
[apple ; [apples j
P , , J Attr. (D.) — ad una mela, to ad alcune mele} to some
[an apple ; [apples ;
', Der. (Ab.) — daunavnela, da alcune mele , from some
^ [from an apple ; [apples ;
Objective (Ac.) — unamela^ an apple ; alcune mele, some apples.
60 ANALOGY.
EXERCISE II.
[The learner will supply the article according to the Gender of the nouns,
and will form their Plural and vary them, according to the preceding rules.]
The study of (the) belles lettres. The country of the
studio bella letter a. paese
Amazons. The fable of the frogs. The virtues of the
Jlmazone. fdvola rdna. virtu
Romans. The hatred of the enemies. The poets of (the)
Romdno. odio nemico. poeta
Latium.
Isizio.
He gave praise to the valiant,* consolation to the infirm,*
— Dava lode valente, conforto infer mo,
example to all.* He has bought the horse of the prince for
essmpio tutto. — Ha comprdto cavdlLo principe per
a small sum of money. (The) fortune is sometimes
piccolo, somma da.na.ro . fortuna e gudlche volta
who deserve
che meritano
a better fate. He proposed the model of the future
miglitir sdrte. — Propose modillo avvenire2
government, avoiding all the things, which had I
governo1, scanzdndo tutte cosa, che erano \
lately displeased. The prince took the public
frescamente spiaciute. principe tdlse 4 publiciG
books I from the hands I of the I questors, and
tibro^ di mdno1 \ di2 \ questdre3, e
I entrusted I them I to the praetors.
diede cura2 \ nel \ pretore.
The cries and (the) bowlings of the ravages spread (the)
strido e urlo salvdgio spdrsero
- terror among the Europeans. Thousands of people, who
terrore Europto. Migliaio ginte, che
were present at the speech of Regulus to the Romans,
erano pres nti a orazicne Regolo Romano,
* To the valiant^ to the infirm, tt all, here used in the plural number.
unjust towards (some) unhappy creatures,
ingiusta verso alciini infelice.
SUBSTANTIVES.
61
wept ; and he departed to return to Carthage, as he
pidnsero ; ed egli partissi per ritorndre Cartdgine, come —
had promised, amidst the acclamations of the multitude.
Gva promesso, fra acclamazione moltitudine.
Thetis, wishing to render Achilles invulnerable, dipped him
Tetide, bramdndo di rtndere Jlchille i-nvulnerdbile, immerse? lol
in the river Styx, holding him by one I of his
heels.
fiiime Siige, tenendo^^lo per uno \ delle calcdgno.
They conducted him to the spot, and by threats and
condussercfi Lol sito, e eon mindccia t
promises they disposed him to ascend the walls.
promessa disposero^ lol a salirc miiro.
He led into | the field twelve hundreds of buffaloes, nine
— Mend a \ cdmpo dodici centindio di lufala, nove
hundred cows, many calves, and over a thousand hogs.
cento vdcca, assdi2 vitelld1, e oltre a mille porco.
She had I her I cheeks all burnt by the many tears she
- Jlveva I le \ gudncia, tutte arse per molte Idgrima —
had shed. Weeping, she I fell
-- — . Piangendo, — J si Lascio cadert2
and humbly asked | his pardon
perdondnzcfi
auu. nuifiuiy aoivcu. / ma
ed umilmtntc domando^ \ gli*
feet,
piede4.
at I his
a'3 '\glii
for I (the) past
dil \ 3 passdti*
injuries.
oltrdggio.3
book,
in ON city of Lycia, a
in citta, di Libia,
There was found
Si trovo
which had brass leaves, - — (the) leaves of brass.
che avca — : — foglio rdme.
Calandrino waited all the following evening with his
Calandrmo stette tidta
contrivances to
artificio per
catch
piglidre
vegnente2
bat.
vispistrdllo.
serai
con snot-
ANALOGY.
CHAPTER III.
ADJECTIVE NOUNS — COMPARATIVES AND
SUPERLATIVES.
ITALIAN Adjectives end with one of the vowels, o, a, e.
GENDER.
Adjectives ending in 0, are masculine, and become
feminine by changing o into a ; as,
virtuoso, ) Yimous • \ uomo virtuoso, m., virtuous man ;
virtues A, $ \fanciullA virtuo'sA, f., virtuous
[young woman :
sinctro, ? sincere, ^ amo'rE sinctro, m., sincere love ;
sincerA, \ blameless ; \ naturA sinctrA, f., blameless na-
[ture.
Adjectives ending in e, are of the common gender ; as,J
f modo cortisE, m,, courteous
, m. & f-.courteous ; j &n^A ^^ ^ cofeouf '
\ •• [soul: ;
L consigUo fedelEj m., faithful
, m. & f., faithful ; [counsel;^
( guidAfedelE, f., faithful guide.
FORMATION OF THE PLURAL.
Adjectives ending in o, e, form the plural by chang- J
ing o, e, into i ; as,
$piactrE ameno, s., delightful pleasure ;,j
{ludghi amtni, p., delightful places :
. . Cg-en^E prudtntE, s., prudent people ;
/' c Pru<^en^ 5 i uomini prudtnti, p. m., prudent men ;^
^li> ) ( vtrgim prudenti, p. f., prudent virgins.
ADJECTIVES. 63
The adjective bello, ' handsome', ' beautiful', before nouns be-
ginning with s followed by another consonant, z, or a vowel, makes
bcgli in the plural ; as,
leG-Li spdcchi, beautiful mirrors ;
Sec LI zaffiri, beautiful sapphires ;
team occhi, beautiful eyes.
Adjectives ending in a, form the plural by changing a
into e ; as,
preziosA, ) . $ g-iw A prezwsA, s., precious jewel;
preziosE, $ p ' J pi^^rE preziosE, p., precious stones.
Adjectives ending in co, ^*o; ca, ga ; do, gio ; cia,
gia ; cftto, g"Aio, glio ; and io, in the singular, follow,
in the plural, the rules already given for the formation
of the plural of Substantives.
AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES.
Italian adjectives agree with their substantives in gen-
der and number ; as,
uomo dotto ed ammaestralo, a learned and well-instructed
man ;
bwhiA. e virtuosA glnfe* good and virtuous people ;
valordsi udmini, btllE donnE, brave men,, fair women, pretty
leggiddn gifoam, youths.
EXAMPLES.
Grdnde intendimento e quello Great is the understanding
(Cun UOMO VIRTUOSO, come fu of a virtuous man, as he was.
costui. (Fr. Sacch. n. 75.)
La Sibilla e bellzssima ' FAN- The Sibyl is a very beauti-
ciULLA,i£ne alletata, e VIRTUO- ful young woman, well bred,
SA. (Lasc.Sibill.il.) and virtuous.
64
ANALOGY.
Sia manifesto, la dcmenza, c
SINCERO AM6RE, che U dcttO re
portava al nostro comune. (Giov.
Till. 1. 1. c. 2.)
Questa NATURA al stio fai-
tdre uriita, — Qualfu crcdta, fu
SINCERA e buona. (Dant. Par/7)
O ANIMA CORTESE MantOTa-
na. (Dant . Inf. 2.)
In dubbio stdto si FEDEL
COXSIGLIO. (Petr. c. 49.)
Prese a persuader Tibirio,
ch' e' rivesse fuori di PKmat in
LU6GHI AME5I. (Day. Tac. am.
4. 95.)
Laonde, secJndo chr w posso
far congkiettura, chc e quillu
eke i PRUDENTI UOMINI chidma-
no indovindre, tu mostri d'essere
innamordta agramente. (Firenz.
Asin. 150.)
Vtrgine saggia, e del Id
numero una — Delte be&te VER-
GINI PRUDENTI. (Petr. c. 49.)
In me movindo de> BEULI
occnri rdi — Crin d' amor pen-
sflcri. (Petr. s. 9.)
E trovo in quella cdssa moltc
FREZi6sE PIETHE, e legate, &
sciolte. (Bocc. g. 2 n. 4.)
Rice HI dttlc prede de' Fio-
rcntini. (Giov. V ill. 1. 9. e. 320.)
4
Molti cherici, eziandio da LUN-
GHE parti, cominciarono a ve-
nire al servo di Dw. (Vit. S.
Giov. Gualb. 295.)
D'un medcsmo peccdto al
'/nando LERCI. (Dant. Inf. 15.)
Qite/Ze drche d'argcnto. — Chc
stinieresti pieno di tesoro,—
Sporte son piene di vesciche
r.uor. (Tass. Am. 1.2.)
Let the clemency, and sin-
cere love, which the said king
bore to our community, be
manifest.
This nature with its Maker
thus conjoined, — Created first
was blameless, and good.
O courteous Mantuan soul.
In a doubtful condition so
faithful counsel.
He undertook to persuade
Tiberius, that he should live in
some delightful place, ont of
Rome.
Therefore, as far as I can
conjecture, which is what pru-
dentmen call to guess, you ap-
pear to be greatly in love.
Wise Virgin, and one of the
beautiful number of the blessec
prudent virgins.
Turning the .beams of her
beautiful eyes to me, creates
thoughts of love.
And she found in that chest
many precious stones, some
set, and some not set.
Enriched with the booty of
the Florentines.
Many clergymen, even from
distant parts, began to come to
see the servant of God.
By one same sin polluted in
the world.
Those chests of silver, which
you would imagine to be filled,
with treasures, are baskets fill-
ed with empty bladders.
COMPARATIVES.
Cost per li gran SAVJ si con-
jessa, — Chela Femce muore, e
poi rindsce. (Dant. Inf. 24.)
UOMO DOTTO delle scritture,
ED 'AMMAESTRATO dtlld fide dt
Crzsto. (Add. Cavalc. Att.
Apost. 113.)
Mia sorella e quest a — Ndta di
BU6NA E VIRT06SA GENTE.
(Arios. Fur. 18. 82.)
Qudnti VALOROSI UOMINI,
qudnte BELLE D6NNE, qudnti
LEGGIADRJ GI(SvANI, la SGTOj V6-
' gnente, nelV dltro mondo cendro-
no con li loro passdti ! (Bocc.
Intr.)
So mighty sages tell, that the
Phoenix dies, and springs forth-
with renascent.
A man learned in Holy
Writ, and well instructed in
the Christian faith.
This is my sister, born of
good and virtuous people.
How many brave men, how
many fair women, how many
pretty youths, the coming
evening, supped in the other
world with their departed
friends !
COMPARATIVE
Comparatives are generally
the adjective or positive the adverb pia, '
press a relation of superiority : meno, ' less', to express
a relation of inferiority : and si or cost; * so', tanto, ' so',
c so much' ; quanto, i as', ; as much' ; quanto piu, * the
more' ; quanto meno, ' the less' ; altrettdnto, 'as', f as
much' ; to express a relation of equality, between the
objects compared $ as,
- litto, happy :
PIU LIETO,
more happy ;
(dtera, proud ;
MENO ALTERA,
less proud ;
bella, beautiful ;
si or co si BELLA,
so beautiful ;
sdno, healthy ;
TANTO 8 A NO,
so healthy;
famoso, famous :
QUANTO FAM6SO3
as famous;
altitroj proud ;
QUANTO PIU ^.LTIERO,
the more proud ;
nocente, guilty ;
QUANTO MENO NocENTE, the less guilty ;
contenti, pleased ; <
TKIVTI. (
as much pleased.
Comparatives of superiority and inferiority generally
require before the second of the objects compared, or,
what is the same, the second term of comparison, the
<tf ANALOGY.
preposition di, c than', if it be a substantive noun or pro-
noun, or a numeral adjective ; and the conjunction die.
4 than', if it be any other adjective, a verb, or an ad-
verb ;* as,
FIU lieto DI ME, more happy than I ;
MEN bello DEL viso. less beautiful than the face ;
FIU DI M!LLE scogli. more than a thousand rocks ;
PIU f6rte C:;E SAVIO, more strong than wise ;
non MENO odorifere CHE > not less odoriferous than are the
siENoZe sptzie, $ drugs ;
PIU Mlla CHE MAI, more handsome than , ever.
Sometimes these comparatives are formed by the adverbs meglio.
' better', and peggio. c worse' : and then they always require dit or
che> before the second term of comparison ; according to the gen-
eral rule ;* as.
MEGLTO D5 ALTiir. diccimilia better than another ten thou-
dobbre, sand pistoles ;
rtina dellc PE'jeio maritdtc one of the worst-married that
CHE sf A, there is.
Very often the second term of comparison is a verb understood
or $ pronoun and a verb, and then this second term of comparison
always requires che before it; as.
scorgevasi PIU pom-pa CHE , there was perceived more
[scorg£vasi] Icalta, pomp than sincerity.
PIU bclla CHE [(•'] iina lamia. more beautiful than a lamia.
scappo PEGGIO CHE [scappa] he ned worse (more violent-
un toro. ly) than a bull :
inttndi MEGLIO CH' io non thou understandest better
RAGioNOj than I can speak ;
•'« This, however, is not without exception, as we not seldom meet, in the
Classics, with expressions similar to these ;
U'na donna PIU bella assdi CHE 'L A woman^a great deal more bean-
SOLB. (Petr. c. 24.) tiful than the sun.
Reputiamci w6No care CHE TUTTE Do we-consider ourselves less dear
Z' nitre .* (Bocc. Introd.) than all the others ?
To so M£GLIO CHE SLTRO iidmofar 1 know how to do what I wish, be' -
«td cfte io t>6glio. (Bocc. g. 9. n. 5.) ter than any other man.
COMPARATIVES.
67
Comparatives of equality always require before the
second term of comparison another adverb correlative to
that by which they are formed. Thus,
si or cosij so, as ; ^ ( come, as ;
tdnto, so, so much ;
j qudnto, as ;
qudnto, as, as much ;
quanta piu, the more ;
g 1 tdnto,
•§ i tdnto piii, or
: g* \ tdnto mtno,
as ;
the more, or
the less ;
qudnto mtno, the le"ss ;
** I tdnto mtno, or
j tdnto piu,
the less, or
the more ;
ultrettanto, as, asmuch;^
( qudnto. or come, as :
"si lieta COME lella,
TANTO sdno QUANTO zo,
quANT.o [6gli] era fanwso,
TANTO [ella] £ra bellissima,
QtlANTO PIU dltitro, TANTO
MENO amdto,
3IEN0 noctntt) TANTO
ALTRETTANTO COntentl, COME
se fosse venvto il Diica,
as glad as fair ;
as healthy or strong as I ;
as much as he was famous,
she was beautiful ;
the more proud, the less be-
loved ;
the less guilty, the more im-
patient;
as pleased as if the Duke
had come.
Sometimes come, l as ', and qudle, l as ', 'like.9, are used to form
these comparatives, and then they require the correlatives cosi,
' thus ', and tale, ( such ' ; as.
COME il f red do mi offese, cosi il
cdldo mi fa noia, *
<U?ALE [colpo] adino dd in pa-
rtte, TAL [colpo] riceve.
as the cold injured me, thus
the heat annoys me ;
the ass who kicks against the
wall, receives such a blow as
he gives.
Tdnto, qudnto, altrettdnto^ and qudle, and their correlatives,
sometimes are made to agree with the nouns with which they are
^i.-.c-d j as.
as many times as ;
as many as they see, so many
they desire ; ,
fifty Paternosters, and as many
Ave-Marias ;
paid in such money, as the
provisions had been sold for.
qudntr.,
qudntE NE veggono. tdntx
desiderano,
cinqudnta Paterndstri, e altret-
td -
pagdto di tdlv moneti, qudh le
derrdtr. erano state rcndt'ite,
-
'ANALOGY.
Often the adverbs cosl and tdnto are suppressed, and
the comparative is formed by the use of their correlatives
only ; as,
Tcosi] bianco COME we're, white as snow ;
fattenderb [tanto] QUANT o
I will wait for thee as long
as thou wishest.
To increase or diminish the force of comparatives,
we make use of the adverbs troppo, molto or assai, or
via or vie, < far', ' much,' or ' a great deal', before piu,
and meno ; as, troppo, motto, or assai piu — via or vie
ply,, ' much,' or < a great deal more ' ; troppo, molto, or
assai meno — via or vie meno, ' much ' or ' a great deal
less ' ; as,
TROPPO PIU "bella, a great deal more beautiful ;
MOLTO PIU core, much more dear :
ASSAI PIU lucente* far more bright ;
V!E PIU forte, a great deal more strong ;
MOLTO MEN fo'rti. much less able.
EXAMPLES.
Iiu rividi piu Leila c MENO
ALTERA. (Petr.s.261.)
JVessun tisse giammdi riu
BI ME LIETO. (Petr. c. 7.)
Dek ! senonhdi BEI^ viso it
cor .MEN BELLOW (Ariost: Fur.
c. 4.)
E sperdndo venire in miglwr
porio — Poi mi condussc in PIII
DIMII.LE scdGM. (Petr. c. 21.)
Sapvidte che guellecdmere s6-
nO NON MENOr ADORIFERE, CHE
S1ENO i LOSSOU rft'?LE S FEZ IE
delta vostra lottega. (Bocc. g.
8. n. 9.)
Saro PIU CITE MAI BELLA.
(Petr.)
Quello, che vdlse MEGLIO
IV ALTRE DIECIMILIA DOBBRE.
(Bocc. g. 10. n. 9.)
I saw her again, more beau-
tiful and legs proud.
None ever lived more happy
than I.
Ah ! if thou hast not aj
heart less beautiful than thy
face.
And hoping to come to a bet-;
ter harbor, he conducted me up-
on more than a thousand rocks.
Know that those chambers,
are not less odoriferous, than
are the boxes of drugs jn yourj
shop.
1 shall be more beautiful •<
than ever.
That, which was more valu-
able than another ten thousand
pistoles.
COMPARATIVES.
16 son pur TJNA DELLE PEG-
t;io MARITATE femine che sia
etl mondo. (Firenz. Lye. 4. 1.)
SCORGEVASI in questo parldre
di Tib6rio PIU POMPA CHE LE-
ALTA. (Dav. Ann. Tac.l. 1.)
E'lla e una giovane quaggiu
che e PIU BELLA CHE TJNA LA-
MIA. (Bocc/g. 9. n. 5.)
PEGGIO CHE UN TORO SCAFFO
dcAV altar e. (Dav. Storie.)
•Se' sdvio'E 'NTENDI ME' CH'I'
NON RAGIONO. (Dant. Inf. 2.)
Vdltaver me si LIETA COME
BELLA. (Dant. Par. 2.)
Sew avessi co si BELL A COTTA
COME ELLA. (Nov. ant. 25.)
TANTO il fdccia Dw SANO
delle rtni GIUANTO io. (Bocc.)
CluANTO trd* cavalier i ERA
il Marchese FAMOSO, TANTO la
d6nna tra tutte V dltre ddnne del
mondo ERA BELLISSIMA. (Bocc.
g. l.n.5.)
TANTO ,PIU cieco son w di te
Q.U \NTOPiusdnoamante. (Guar.
Past. Fid. 3. 3.)
E'ssa TANTO PIU IMPAZIEN-
TjLmente sosteneva questa noia
duANTO MENO SI SCntlVd NOCEN-
TE. (Bocc. g. 7. n. 5.)
Delia vcnuta de* cavalieri, i
Fiorentinifurono ALTRETTANTO
CONTENTI, COME SE FOSSE VENU-
TO IL DTJCA inpersona. (Giov.
Till. 1. 10.)
Demetrio, ndstro amico, su6l
dire, che ALTRETTANTO gli e del-
le parole dellafdlle gentc, auAN-
TO d& sudni che fa il vento. (Sen.
fist.)
I am indeed one of the worst-
married women in the world.
There was perceived. in this
speech of Tiberius more pomp
than sincerity.
There is a young woma»
here below more beautiful than
a lamia.
He fled from the altar worse
(more violently) than a bull.
Thou art wise, and under -
standest better than I can speak.
Turning to me with aspect
as glad as fair.
If I had so beautiful a dress
as she.
May God make him as strong
in his loins as I am.
As much as the Marquis was
famous among the knights, the
lady was beautiful among the
other ladies.
I am as much more blind than
thou as I am more enamoured.
She rbore this vexation so
much the more impatiently,
the less she felt guilty.
The Florentines were as
pleased with the arrival of the
knights, as if the Duke had
come in person.
Demetrius, our friend, used
to say, that it happens with th«
words of foolish persons, as it
does with the sounds which the
wind makes.
70
ANALOGY.
£ COME It troppo FREDDO
{•aista notte MI OFFESE. cosi it
CALDOyi'incominciaa TAT gran-
dissima NOT A. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 7.)
Assai dee bastare a clascuno,
St 'ClUALE ASINO DA IN PARETE,
TAL RICEVE', senza volere dltre
ingiuridre. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 8.)
TANTE VOLTE Q.UANTE etla
nclla memdria mi vitne. (Bocc.
Filoe.)
.Yon s6no i giovani d1 unci^
eontenti, ma GIVANTE NE TEG-
C-OSa, TANTE NE DESIDERANO.
(Bocc. g. 8. n. 7-3
La mattina si vudle ariddre dl-
tachiesa, e quivi dire CINQCAN-
TA PATERNOSTRI E ALTRET-
TANTE AvEMARlE. (BoCC. g.
3.n. 4.)
Videsi DI TAL MONETA PAGA-
TO, aUALI LE DERRATE ERANO
?TATE VBNDtJTE. (BoCC. g. 6.
ft. 5.)
Un vestimento di lino sottilis-
simoj e BIANCO COME NEVE.
(Bocc. g. 10. n. 6 )
I'p volentieri — T' ATTENDE-
RO auANTo vroi. (MaiF. Mer.
4.2.)
TROPPO Fill BELLA gli pdrVt ':.
che stimdto non avea. (Bocc. g.
7.n.7.)
MOLTO piu belle e _PIU CARE,
che ndinon sidmo.(Bdcc. Intr.)
Ond' ella Jessi — LUCENTE
Flu ASSAI di qitel cfc dV era.
(Dant, Par. 5.)
Vedi Sansone — VIE PIU FOR-
TE CHE SAVIO. (Petr.Tr. Amor.)
E'lle s6no MOLTO MEN FO:ITI
$he gli udmini a sostenere.
(Bocc. Introd.)
And as the excessive cold
last night injured me, thus the
heat begins now to annoy me
greatly.
It ought to be quite sufficient
for any one, that ' the ass who j
kicks against the wall, receives
such a blow, as he gives,' with-
out wishing to cause any far-
ther injury*
As many times as she comes
into my remembrance.
people are not satisfi-
ed with one; but as many they
see. so many they desire.
In the morning we must go
to church, and there say fifty
Paternosters and as many Ave-
Marias.
He saw himself paid in such
money as the provisions had
been sold for.
A garment of linen very fine,
and white as snow.
I will wait for thee willingly
as long as thou wishest.
She appeared to him a great
deal more beautiful than he
had imagined.
Much more fair and much
-more dear, than we are.
Whence she became far more
brisrht than she had been.
See Sampson a great deal
more strong than wise.
They are much less able
than men to bear.
COMPARATIVES.
EXERCISE III.
He has no other — more children than him. I know not, who.
— ha2 Mm1 — figliuolo lid. — so% JY0n,l chi
could recover I my property I more properly than thoiL
possa riscuotere \ il jfwo convenevole te.
Peter, who had more desire of eating than of sleeping",
Pietro, che aviva vdglia mangidre dormire,
asked whether there was any thing for I supper. We
domanddva se vi fosse alcuna cosa
da cena.
are less powerful than the Greeks, ~they have more
sidmo podcrdso Greco, essi fydnno
bravery, wealth, and wisdom than we. Who I would fare I
prodezza, tesoro, c sapere n6i. Chi \ starebbe
better than I, if that money* were mine ? In this
me, se quel dendro fossero miei ? quests
season the nights are longer than the days. He began
stagione n6tte sono lungo dl: — Comincw
to coast along (the) Barbary, robbing every- one who
a costeggidre — Barberia, rubdndo ciascuno che
was less powerful I than he. I I do not
poteva meno lui. \ non
say, that it
dico, - che 6i
is not a sin, but God pardons | (of) I greater sins to
sia* non1 — peccdto, ma Iddio perddna \ (de}) \ grdnde a
him who I repents himself. It appeared that she was
chi I pente2 si.1 ' — Parea che ilia fosse
whiter than (the) snow. She afflicts more than she con-
bidnco . n&ve. — rfffligge — con-
soles (not).
sola2 won1.
None in this wretched world was so miserable as I
Niuno questo sciagurdto mdndo fu miser o w
am. Am' I not as beautifulf as (is) the wife of
— . sono* i03 JVbnl bello sm moglie
Richard ? Who commended him so much as thou ?
Riccidrdo ? Chi commendo2 il l tu f
* That money, in the plural number.
t Beautiful, in the feminine gender.
72 ANALOGY.
The master gave as much faith to the words of Bruno, as
maestro diede fide parola Bruno,
was
due I to any truth. I began
I si sarebbe convenuta \ qualunque veritd. comincidi3
to flee as much as I could. I will defend her certainly
a4 fuggire5 l — poteiz. I'o difendero^ la? - per certo*
as much as I
shall be able.
potrd.
The more the heart is excited, the less can (the)
cuorfr £ commosso, pud
man express I his feeling. The more crazy he is
uomo esprimcre \ il siw
sentimenlo. pdzzo egli* e1-
than you, the more he is enamoured, As I it came into his
rat, — e innamordto . \ gli venne in
mind, I so he did. I wish to go to hear (the) mass,
pensiero, \ — fece. I'o voglio anddre mtgsa,
and recommend myself to God as much as I can.
e raccomdndar^mi Dio — posso.
I His,
I La sua
joyful.
allegro.
presence J will make it appear to us i much more
presenza \ celo fard parere
For I (the) which object (the) fortune was | a great
A J qudle oggetto for tuna fu2
deal more I propitious to him. This family is far greater^
3 J propizia* gli-1 Questo famiglia e grdndej^
and a great deal more known. A great deal more pure
conosciuta. pura
than a white dove.
Candida Colombo, .
SUPERLATIVES.
Relative superlatives are formed by prefixing the
article* il, i or li, ' the', for the masculine, and la, h\
' the', for the feminine, to the comparative ; as,
piu forte, more strong ; IL piu forte, the most strong ; ;
piii vezzosi, more graceful ; i piii vezzosi, the most graceful ;
mtnofresca, less fresh ; «A meno fresca, the least fresh ;
piu belle, more beautiful ; LE piu belk, the most beautiful.
SUPERLATIVES. 73
When these superlatives are followed by a second
term of comparison, and this is a noun or a pronoun,
they require the prepositions di, i of or in '; fra or tra,
' amongst' ; after them ; as,
il piii forte DI TUTTJ gli the strongest of all men ;
uomini,
i piu vezzdsi fanciulli the most graceful children in
DEL HONDO, the world ;
il piu perfttto TRA TANTI, the most perfect amongst so
many.
If the second term is a verb, the superlative requires
the conjunction che, c that' ; after it ; as,
ilpiufelice CHE'SI TROVI the happiest man that can be
sotto le stille, found under the stars ;
il piu sdvio uomo CHE the wisest man ever was in the
FOSSE al mondo, world.
When the object compared, or the first term of com-
parison, precedes the superlative, the article of this
superlative is generally suppressed ; as,
iljwre [il] piu bello, the most beautiful flower;
/' eta [la] menfr&sca, the least fresh age.
Absolute superlatives are formed by changing the last
vowel of the plural of adjectives, into issimo for the
masculine, and into issima for the feminine ; as,
Ulhy beautiful ; bellissmo, very beautiful ;
HCC&E, rich ; n'ccMssiMA, very rich ;
JMk, faithful;
A few adjectives take the termination errimo, for the
masculine, and errima, for the feminine, in their super-
lative ; as,
ceZe&re, celebrated; ccZcfeERRiMO, very celebrated;
salubre, wholesome ; sa/w&ERRiMA, very wholesome ;
dcre, severe ; «CERRIMO, very severe.
7
74 ANALOGY.
These superlatives may be also formed by prefixing
the adverbs troppo, molto, or assai, ' very5, to the posi-
tive ; as,
pitne, full ; TROPPO piene, very full ;
rtire, rare ; MOLTO rare, very rare ;
vicini, near; ASSAI vicim, very near:
Or by making use of such expressions as, sopra ogni
dltro, £ above every other one' ; stnza modo, * exceed-
ingly' ; senza fine, c extremely' ; fuor di misura, { be-
yond measure' ; &c. ; as,
SOPRA OGNI ALTRo/eJice, happy above every other one ;
grosso SENZA MODO, exceedingly coarse ;
bedta SENZA F!NE, extremely blessed ;
doUnte FUOR DI MISURA, grieved beyond measure.
Very often we form them by repeating the adjective ;
as,
vivo, lively ; vivo vivo, very lively ;
piccino, small ; piccino PICCINO, very small ;
lenta, slow ; Unta LENTA, very slow.
To increase the force of superlatives, we use the
adverbs, piu9 ' more'; molto, ' much'; tanto, ' so much';
before them ; and sometimes we raise the repeated
adjective to the superlative degree ;* as,
piti nobiHssimo, very noble ;
MOLTO bellissima, extremely beautiful ;
T^NTO bellissima, so very beautiful ;
grdndi GRANDISSIMI, exceedingly great.
There are a few adjectives, which beside their regular
* This form of expression ia found in the earlier classics, though very seldom
adopted by modern writers.
SUPERLATIVES.
75
Italian form, retain in the comparative and superlative
degree the irregular form which they have in Latin ; as,
buono, \piuluono,
[good;}orMiGLi6RE,
cattivo, ]piucattivo,
bonissimo,
J cattivissimo,
\ or PESSIMO,
\
beflt.
b<
worst .
W
to which may be added,
suPERi6RE, superior;
INFERIORE, inferior;
INFIMO, lowest.
EXAMPLES.
Raccontano ancora, die tra
lorofu E'rcole, IL piu FORTE DI
TIJTTI GLI UOMINI. (Day. Tac.
Germ.)
E'ran i piu belli, e i PIU VEZ-
zosi FANCIIJLLI DEL HONDO.
(Bocc. g. 3.)
E di tdrtole ho preso una
nidmta — LE PIU BELLE del
mondo. (Bocc. Amet. 15.)
TRA TANTI, e si Hi xolti IL
PIU PERFETTO. (Petr. B. 201.)
.They relate also, that among
them was Hercules, the strong-
est of all men.
•*. They were the most beau-
tiful and the most graceful
children in the world.
And I have taken a nest-full
of turtles, the most beautiful in
the world.
The most perfect amongst so
many, and so beautiful coun-
tenances.
* From these two comparatives are derived the substantives maggidre and
mindre, which, used in the plural, are equivalent — maggi6rit to 'parents', * ances-
tors', 'superiors'; — mmdri, to 'inferiors'; as,
a' su6i MAUGIUUI ; Disobedient to his parents.
Who were thy ancestors?
Therefore he neither treats with
due reverence his superiors, nor
with due mildness his inferiors.
Disubbidiente
(Pass.)
Chi fur li MAGGIOR tudi? (Dant.
Int. 10.)
E perd non rtndc debita reverenza alii
MAGOIORI, nd debita mansuetudine
alii MiN6m. (Bocc, Com. Dant.
Inf. 8.)
ANALOGY.
Sard IL nu FELfcE, e con-
lento urfmOf CHE si TR6vi SOTTO
LE STELLE. (Macch. Com.)
E'gli era IL rm SAVIO, cd il
piu avveduto UOMO CHE AL
MONDO FOSSE. (Bocc. ff. 10. n.
10.)
IL FIORE PIU BELLO delV eta
nostra. (Lod. Mart. Rim.)
Quel fudco, ch'io pensdi, eke
fosse spento — Da L'ETA. MEN
FRESCA. (Petr. c. 13.)
Assdi sostenne — Per BELLIS-
SIMO amor quisti al suo tempo.
(Petr. s. 172.)
Fdtta fare una RICCHISSIMA
corona d'oro e dipietre prezidse,
per corondrsi re di Lombardia.
(Giov. Vill.l. 11. c. 76.)
Per la loro singoldr pietd
verso questa Santa St=de, e verso
tutti ndij suoi FEDELISSIMI ser-
vitdri. (Casa, lett. 23.)
Archita, ingegner CELEBER-
HIMO tra gli antichi. C^egn.
Crist, instr. 3. 2.)
H reobdrbaro si e loro medi-
cina SALUBERRIMA. (Tratt.
segr. cos. dorm.)
11 Duca di Ghelderi, ACCER-
RIMO nimico suo. (Guicc. Stor.
6-)
JVe dubito punto die non sien
di quelli, che dirdnno le c6se
dette esser TROPPO PIENE di m6t-
ti e di cidncc. (Bocc. Concl.)
Son MOLTO RARE a cercdre le
notizie. (Borgh. Tosc. 352.)
E un giorno, ASSAI VICINI
della camera^ sico medesmi,
comincidrono a ragiondre.
(Bocc. n. 1.)
I shall be the most happy
and the most contented manj
that can be found under the
stars.
He was the most wise, and
the most wary man ever was in
the world.
The most beautiful flower of
our age.
That fire, which I thought
would be extinguished by ma-
turer age.
This one suffered much in
his time for the love of a very
beautiful person.
Having caused to be made a
very rich crown of gold and of
precious stones, in order to
crown himself king of Lombar-
dy.
Through their singular piety
towards this Holy See, and to-
wards us all, its most faithful
servants.
Archytas, a very celebrated
architect amongst the ancients.
Rhubard is for them a very
wholesome medicine.
The Duke of Ghelderi, his
most severe enemy.
Nor doubt I at all, that there
are many, who will say, that
the things which 1 have said
are very full of words and idle
stories.
News is very rare to be
found.
And one day, very near that
room, they began to'talk among
themselves.
SUPERLATIVES.
77
JSstimdva il prince SOFRA
OGNI ALTRO FELICE. (BoCC. g.
2. n. 7.)
Uomo mater idle, e G ROSSO
SENZA MODO. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 6.)
Fdmmi, die puoi, ddlla sua
grdzia ddgno, SENZA FINE o
BEATA. (Petr. c. 49.)
DOLENTE FUOR DI MISURA,
senza alciin indugio, cid che il
re domanddva f6ce. CBocc. g.
2. n. 7.)
Efbbe un cavdllo, e dd> suoi
fdnti ilfice, vivo vivo scorticdre.
(Nov. ant. 54.)
Basi, e divento PICCIN picciNO.
(Buonar. Fier. 2. 4.)
E'lla sen na notdndo LENTA
LENTA. (Dant. Inf. 17.)
Iddio ftce Vuomo PIU NOBI-
LISSIMO che gli dltri animdli.
(Crusca.)
Vide Vdmbra sua MOLTO BEL-
LISSIMA. (Nov. Ant. 43.)
Appr6sso i qudli Biancafiore
veniva TANTO BELLI SSIMA, che
dgni comparazidne ci surza
scdrsa. (Bocc. Filpc. 7.)
O'ndc prona nillo stdmaco
travdgli GRANDI GRANDissiMi.
(Red. cons. 1. 16.)
I'o non potrii tr attar c per la
salute d& midifratelli con MAG-
uioR affezion (Vdnimo, ne con
MIGL.IOR modo di qudllo, che ho
w trattdto. (Casa. lett. 21.)
Col PEGGIORE spirto di Ro-
mdgna — Trovdi un tal di voi,
che per su' opra — In dnima in
Cocito gid si bdgna. fDant.
Inf. 33.)
O'nde nel circhio M IN ORE in
eterno e consunto. (Dant. Inf.
11.)
He thought the prince happy
above every other one.
An exceedingly coarse and
uncouth man.
Make me, O you who can,
extremely blessed lady, worthy
of his favor.
Grieved beyond measure,
without any delay, he did that
which the king wished.
He had a horse, and caused
it to be flayed all alive by his
servants.
He came near dying, and
became very small.
It went on sailing very slow.
- God made man much more
noble than the other animals.
He saw his shadow extreme-
ly beautiful.
Next whom came Biancafiore
so very beautiful, that every
comparison would fail.
Wherefore he experiences
exceedingly great pains in his
stomach.
I could not act for the wel-
fare of my brothers with greater
interest, nor in a better manner
than that in which I have
acted.
In company with the worst
spirit of Romagna I found such
an one of you, as, for his do-
ings, even now in soul is plung-
ed in Cocytus.
Whence in the smaller circle
is eternally consumed.
7*
78
ANALOGY.
n qudle ddlla pdrie SUPERI-
ORE alia INFERIORS da il suo
dolce, e consondntc suono.
(Declam. Quintil. C.)
Le vdlte pidne d1 OTTIMI mni.
(Bocc. g. 3.)
; Essindo stdto in mta un
PESSIMO uomo. (Bocc. n. 1.)
La MASSIMA attimtd dd' rdggi
soldri. (Sag. Nat. esp.)
Le MINIME alterazioni del
frtddo. (Sag. Nat. esp.)
Which from the superior to
the inferior part gives its sweet
and harmonious sound.
The cellars full of the best
wines.
Having been in his life a
very bad man.
The greatest power of the
solar rays.
The smallest alterations of
cold.
EXERCISE IV.
Let the strongest of all the Romans come forward.
4 5 tutto* 7 Romano* V&nga\ inndnzi*
The
rostra were immediately covered
rostro3 Furond subitamtnte5 copdrti*
with the
heads of the most illustrious patricians.
ttschio 2 illustre* patrizio.1
a short space of time, I to be made
— piccolo spdzio ttmpo \ fare
beautiful, and of the largest, and of the richest palaces,
bdllo grdnde ricco palagio.
He caused, in
— Ftce,
one of the most
which - had ever been seen.
fossero" mdi1 stdti veduti.
I esteem him the most
I'o rtputo2 il1 ,
handsome, the most agreeable, the most graceful, and the
b'UlOf piactvole, leggiddro,
most wise knight that I can be found I in the kingdom of
sdvio cavalier e \ trovdr si possa5 \ 1 redme* 3
Prance. He was the most amusing man in the world.
Frdncia* — E'ra sollazzdvole uomo rnondo.
She is the most happy woman in the world.
— E1 1 3 felice* donncfi mondo.
The
planet most remote from the earth.
piantta remoto tirra.
The most furious
SUPERLATIVES
mies with I their I tall persons, and long spears strik
ico1 \ le loro \ alto persona, lungo dsta fediscon
enemies
nemico
I from a distance.
da disco sto.
79
strike
Having taken a very large stone, she I let it fall I into
Prtsa grdnde pidtra, — | la lasqio cadtre \ in
the well.
pozzo.
The stone in reaching (in) the water made a
pietra — giungindo dcqua flee
very great noise.
grande rumor e.
of very fine linen.
sottile2 lino.1
They were dressed
E'rano vestiti
in
di
a garment
vestimdnto
She was a very beautiful woman,
E'ra — ddnna,
wise, and very virtuous. He is a very austere man. A
sdvio, ondsto. E'gli e acre2 uomo.l
very celebrated poet. They would commit themselves
celebre poeta. E'lle vorrebbero2 metter* si1
quite alive
to the flames. I
nel fudco. \
You are exceedingly good.
— Siete buono.
I will be the best husband in the world. He was
I'o sard marito mondo. E'gli era
ie worst man, that I perhaps ever was born. 1 Be sure*
uomo, I forse mdi nascesse. Siate certo,
lat I have a greater desire
ic w ho% — 3 vdglia^
of it I
nel
than you.
voi.
The
2
ery great confidence which he has with us I makes him say
3 confidenza* che$ — ha$ con7 nois \ Gliel fa dire1
fa dire1
We have drunk I of the I best wine. He
~- Abbidmo bevuto \ d' un \ vino.
the smallest fault. The highest
j colpa.
in | a dark cloud.
oscuro* nebbia.1
does not pardon him
JVon gli perdona
arts were wrapt
drte erano avvdlte \ d'
80 ANALOGY.
CHAPTER IV.
AUGMENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES.
AUGMENTATIVE^.
THERE are three kinds of augmentatives ; those that
express bigness or grandeur ; those that express vigor
or beauty ; and those that express contempt.
To express bigness or grandeur, we change the last
vowel of nouns, if masculine, into one, ozzo, and, ii
feminine, into one, ozza; as,
cappello, hat ; cappettb&B, large hat ;*
foresA, country girl ; /oresozzA, fine country girl ;
btllo, handsome ; bdtixE, large and handsome ;
frtscA, fresh ; frescbzzA, fine and fresh.
When a feminine noun takes the termination one, in the aug
mentative, it becomes masculine; as,
donnA, f., woman ; donnoxE, m., large woman ;
campdnA, f, bell ; camjpanoNE, m., large bell.
To express vigor or beauty, we use otto, occio, fo
the masculine, and otta, occia, for the feminine ; as,
gidvanv, youth; giovanoTTo, handsome an
[vigorous youth
bellA, fair ; bellbcciA, very fair ;
gratidE, large ; grandbi'TA, handsome anl
[large!
grossA, large; grossbc CIA, very large and firm^
* It is impossible to give in any other tongue the full and exact meaning of
Italian Augmentatives and Diminutives ; the translations, therefore, throughout
this chapter, must be regarded as attempts at expressing by several wordw
and as far as the English permits it, the change of signification wh ch, in Italian,
is effected by a simple change of termination, forming one of the striking beautiei
of this language.
AUGMENTATIVES. 81
To express contempt, we use the terminations accio,
azzo, astro, for the masculine, and accia, azza, astra,
aglia, for the feminine ; as,
Zifero, book ; librAccio, bad book j
popolo, people ; popolAzzo, populace ;
giwanv, young man ; giovanA.sTE.0^ contemptible
[young man ;
gentE, folks : gentAGLiA, rabble.
We can join the augmentative termination of bigness
o that which expresses contempt, and that of contempt to
that of bigness ; and thus form a double augmentative ;
idmo, man; omAccio, bad man; owiAcciO'NE, a very
[bad man ;
ibaldo, ribald ; ribaldbNV, great ribald ; ribaldoNA'CCIQ, very
[great ribald.
And sometimes by repeating the termination of con-
empt, we form a treble augmentative ; as,
idnco, white ; feiancASTRo, whitish ;
ianc A STRONE, slightly whitish; feiancASTRONaccio, of a
[dirty white.
EXAMPLES.
Per in capo CAPPELLONI Having on their heads very
rdndi alia Spagnuola. (Lasc. large hats after the Spanish
ibill. 2. 2.) fashion.
E'ra una piacevole, e fresco, She was a pleasant and fresh
ORESOZZA. (Bocc. g. 8. u.S.) fine country girl.
JYVm vidi mdi uomini piu I never saw more large,
ELLONI. (Caro. lett. 2. 137.) handsome men.
Vedi tu, donna mia, come le Dost thou see, my good
ostre s6no tutte FKESCOZZE ? woman, how ours are all fine
Agn. Pand. 47.) and fresh ?
TA'lle guagnel, tu s&i UN BEL In truth, you are a fine large
ONNONE. (Bern. rim. 2. 7.) woman.
82
ANALOGY.
Son&ten CAMPANONE. (Buo-
nar. Fier. 2 . 3. 9.)
11 valoroso, e gia Id GIOVA-
N6xxo Mdbiade fa molto famo-
so. (Matt. Franz, rim. 169.)
Oh ! c6me ella e 6rat e fre-
scoccia, e BELLOCCIA. (Las,
Spir.)
JF'o avea una conca assdi
GRAKDOTTA. (Mes. Bin. rim.
1. 202.)
E'Ua e GROSSOCCIA, tarchid-
ta, e giuliva. (Lor. Med.
Nenc.)
Fee1 egli di quelle un famdso
LIBRACCIO. (Allegr. 92.)
Fo non son ndto Ailla feccia
del POPOLAZZO. (Bocc. g. 10.
n. 8.)
N6i non temidmo d1 un GIO-
VANASTRO. (Dav. Tac. Ann.
Ring the large belt
The valorous and handsoin
and vigorous youth Alcibiade
was very famous.
Oh ! how very fresh, an<
fair she is now.
I had a pan very handsom
and large.
She is very large and firn
well-limbed, and gay.
He made of them a famou
bad book.
I was not born of the drej
of the populace.
"We do not fear a contemp
ible young man.
Guiddva, gli accoltelldnti
Giulidno, le ciurme Appollinare,
non cdme capitdni, ma licenziosi
e pigri, c6me la lor GENTAGLIA.
(Dav. Tac. Stor. 3.)
Jlccddde, eke quest i OMAcci6Ni
Jurono sconoscenti do1 beneficj
ricevuti da Gidve. (Fir. dial.
bell, donn.)
Quel RIBALDONACCIO delfra-
tello ha consumdlo tdnto.
(Cecch. Dot. 1. 2.)
Essendo qudsto un cfrrto
BIANCASTRONACCIO senza trop-
po bdrba. (Fir. nov. 7.)
Julian led the gladiator
Appollinaris the rowers, not
captains, but as licentious, an
slothful men, like their rabb]
It followed, that these vei
bad men were ungrateful fort
benefits received from Jupitt
That very great ribald oft!
brother has consumed so muc
This one being a certain
man of a dirty white (palj
color and without much beard.
AUGMENTATIVES. 83
EXERCISE V.
[This and the following Exercise on Diminutives, are introduced
)lely for the purpose of habituating the learner to the formation
f such words; but as all nouns are not susceptible of the same
lodification, and as the employment of one termination in prefer-
ice to the others depends entirely on usage and euphony, nothing
nt constant reading, and the study of the classics, can teach the
per use of these words.]
He is a coarse and I good-for-nothing I man. That
— Ef grdnde,2 t$ | da nidla* \ udmo.l Cotesta
a dirty, ugly servant. The kitchens of (the) great
sudicio'2 fdntcl cucina
jttons are always filled I with I cooks. I Go home,
tidtto s6no sempre pieno \ di \ cuoco. \ Anddtevene a cdsa
to be beside I
uscito
eat contemptible fool, you appear to me
sciocconej voi parete% mi1
f) yourself. Take that large cup, and wash it well. Thou
vdi. Ptglia quel tdzza, e Idva^^lo bene. Tu
a fine large woman. He had in that chamber a
donna. E'gli aveva quello camera
ge old chest, which had been made I since the time I of his
cassdne, che era fdtto \ fin ddllo
her's grand-father. He bites them all with that ugly a
dre* dvolo.l E'gli mdrde* /el tutte con quello
outh. This great fool
cca. Questo pecora
wants to teach me how to know
-mi vu6l far conoscerc
he) thing's, as if I were born yesterday. Each of
cdstf, crime sc io fossi ndta ieri. ognuno- —
em had a bad large sword. They opened a large box
— Aveva1 spdda. — Aprirono cdssa
of I their father. I speak only of ungrateful, and very
del I Idro2 pddrel I'o pdrlo s6lo ingrdto, e
oud men. Ring the large bell, behold the council of
perbo — . Sundte campdnttj ecco consiglio
e widows, that enter, People, that are born of the uregs
veddva, che entra. Gente, che e ndta feccia
'the rabble. I 1 never saw I men so very handsome.
popolo. — j Non vidi mdi \ uomo cosi bello.
84 ANALOGY.
She would appear to you a fine large woman. They I scat-
E'lla parrebbe2 m*l . bella femina. — |
tered themselves i through that rabble.
Si spdrsero per quelto ciurma.
DIMINUTIVES.
Diminutives may be divided into four classes, viz.
those that express kindness or tenderness ; those that
express smallness or prettiness ; those that express
compassion ; and those that express contempt or indig-
nation.
To express kindness or tenderness, we change the
last vowel of nouns into erello, for the masculine, and
into erella, for the feminine ; as,
ioj old man ; VCCC/WERELLO, poor old man ;
fool ; pazzERELLA, poor little fool.
To express smallness or prettiness, we use the ter-
minations ino, etto, ello, uccio, uzzo, for the masculine,
and ina, etta, ella, uccia, uzza ; for the feminine ; as,
Of boy ; fanciuttixo, little boy ;
rusctllo, brook ; ruscelteTTo. small brook ;
JintstrA, window ; ^/wes/rELLA, little window ;
6o'ccA, mouth; &OCCUCCIA, pretty little mouth ;
umido, damp; umiduzzo, slightly damp.
Some feminine nouns take the terminations ino, etto, ello. in the
diminutive, and then they become masculine ; as,
COSA, f., house ; CASINO, m., small house, or
[country-house ;
capdnnA} f., cottage ; copawiETTO, m., little cottage ;
portA, f., door; portELio, m., small door, or
[carriage-door.
To express compassion, we use the termination tc-
ciuolo, for the masculine, and icciuola, for the feminine ;
DIMINUTIVES. 85
x and all those terminations used to express smallness or
prettiness ; as,
udmo, man ; omicciu6LO, poor little man;
t&wu, woman ; «ftmnicciuoi,A, wretched little woman ;
To express contempt or indignation, we use the ter-
minations iccidtto, icciattolo, for the masculine, and
iccidtta, iccidttola, for the feminine ; and all the termi-
nations used to express compassion, except ino, and ma;
as,
man; 5 omicciiTTO, ? despicable
\ OTWICCIATTOLO, $ puny fellow ;
t
No rule cnn be given how to determine in which sig-
nification the terminations bo, etto, ello, uccio, uzzo,
icciuolo, are used; the connexion of the words, is the
only guide. Thus,
ftmina, woman; vile /emt'riELLA, vile, contemptible little
[woman ;
gidvine, giri; gentile g-tortn^LLA, genteel little girl;
utimo, man ; bud,io omicciuoLo, good, poor little man.
Very often, instead of diminishing the substantive we
diminish the adjective which qualifies it ; and sometimes
we diminish both the substantive and the adjective ; as,
figliuoli Uneri, young children ; Jiglivdli ienen&L!.!, very young
[children;
bdcca piccola, little mouth; feoccueciA piccolixA., pretty
[little mouth ;
C c?onnicciuoLE vedov^TTE^
ddnmvtdove, widowed women ; < wretched young
^ [widowed women.
Besides the above terminations there are some nouns
which have a peculiar ending in their diminutive ; as,
parte, part ; pa/^icELLA, small part ;
lume, light; touciivo, small light;
Mama, white; 6iancoLiNA, pretty white:
Hfi ANALOGY.
Others have quite an irregular termination ; as,
mercctnte, merchant ; mercantooLO, little miserable merchant ;
paglia, straw ; />ag-ZiucA, small piece of straw ;
bacio, kiss; fcactozzo, cordial smacking kiss ;
amdro, bitter; amaroGNO^o, bitterish.
[For a List of such Diminutives, see APPENDIX, E.]
We may join two different terminations in the formation
of diminutives ; and then we form a double diminutive,
which sometimes, besides the idea of kindness or tender-
ness, expresses also that of prettiness or compliment; and
sometimes serves%to diminish the object still more, and to
convey also the idea of prettiness ; as,
cattivo, miserable man ; caftwELLo, a wretched man ;
cafti'tJELLU'CCIO, wretched little man ;
Zi&ro, book ; libr^TTO, small book ; Zt&rETTPNO, pretty little
[book.
Sometimes we make use of the diminutive termination
to diminish the augmentative; and when we wish to
express contempt for the object represented by the
name already diminished, we augment the diminutive ;
as,
Iddro, robber ; ZadroNE, highwayman ; fodrowCE'LLO ;
[pilferer ;
(ZdwiA, lady ; damiizzA, petty lady ; damuzz A'CCIA,
[pretended lady.
^Finally, such is the genius of the Italian language in
this respect, that we may even modify the verbs and
adverbs by one or more syllables added to them; thus,
T to give many
From feocidre, to kiss ; we make ftaciuccHiARE < little kisses
} one after
' another ;
" cantdre, to sing; « 5 canteRELLARE, ? ,
I orcawfrccHiARE, 5 lo
" pdco, little; « 5/^ocMNO,
btne, well; « \ Jeni,NO» pretty well ;
very well.
DIMINUTIVES.
87
E X A M P L E I
M6vesi 'I VECCHIEREL canu-
tox e bidnco. (Petr. s. 14.)
O PAZZERELLA, tU HOH Sttl
quello eke si bfdtto. (Macch.)
Che ancdr ?n' odidsti essendo
FANCiuLLiNO. (Bern. Ol. 1.
21.)
Che non per mstdj ma per
suono e n6to — D' un RI*SCEL-
LETTO. che quivi discende.
(Dant. Inf. 34.)
Vide entrdre un tdpo per la
FINESTRELLA. (Nov. ant. 90.)
Quella BOCCUCCIA sdnta.
(Bellinc.)
Dubito che non sia un poco
UMIDIZZO. (Crusca.)
Dal mmo piano di CIUESTO
CASINO si scende in dltre stdnze
sotto terra. (Borgh. Rip. 132.)
Che abbidmo ndi a fare, se
non a mendrlo in GUJESTO CA-
PANNETTO. (BOCC. g. 3. n. 1.)
Sdlsesulfico, e fu giunto AL
PORTELLO. (Lor. Medic. 119.)
Un OMICCIUOLO di piccola
condizidne. (Franc. Sacch. Op.
div. 134.)
Avete vdi mdi pdsto wienie a
queste DONNICCIUOLE ? (Agn.
Pand 6.)
E'gli k, un certo OMICCIATTO,
che non e nessun di vdi, che veg-
gendolo non Vavesse a noia.
(Lor. Med. Arid, prol.)
E m mdndano, a lor capric-
ClO, gli OMICCIATTOLI 71071 SO
iamente, ma i barbassdri. (Al-
leff. 181.)
The hoary and white-headed
poor old man moves on.
O poor little fool, you don't
know what has been done.
For you hated me from the
time I was a little boy.
Discovered not by sight, but
by the sound of a small brook
that descends there.
He saw a mouse enter
through the little window.
That divine, pretty little
mouth.
I doubt whether it is not
somewhat slightly damp.
From the first story of this
small house we descend into
other rooms under ground.
What else have we to do,
but to bring him into this little
cottage.
He climbed the fig tree, and
reached the small door.
A poor little man of low
condition.
Have you ever thought of
these wretched little women ?
He is a certain despicable
puny fellow, that there is none
of you, who on seeing him
would not dislike him.
£
And they send to you, ac-
cording to their whim, despi-
cable ignorant men as well as
great and learned.
88
ANALOGY.
VlL FEMIKELLA in Puglld U
prende. (Petr.)
U'na GF.NTIL piacevol GIO-
YINELLA. (Mes. Gin.)
l/TCBUON OMICCIUOLO. (BoCC.
g. 3. n. 1.)
/FIGLIUOI.I ancdr TENEREL-
LI. (Fir. Disc. an. 79.)
Con Una BOCCUCCIA PICCO-
LiwA. (Bocc. g. 4. n. W.)
Qy.este DONNicciu6LE vn-
DOVETTE. (Agn. Pand. 6.)
Essendo gia una PARTICELLA
delta n6tte passdta. (Bocc g. 1.)
Avendo un LUMICINO in md-
no. (Matt. Fran, Rim.)
Con quelle site man'ne BIAN-
«OL!NE. (Fir. Asin. 41.)
MERCANTUOLO di qu&ttro de-
ndri. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 7.)
Tra veccia, t I6glio, f. Irucio-
li, e PAGLI^CHE. (Car. Matt.
..8.)
Se non m' avessi dato tal
BACi6zzo. (Pataff. 9.)
Di sapore AMAROGNOLO,
mnlto acre, e penetrative. (Ri-
cett. Fior. J9.)
Ritorni dlla corte piu gialloy
epiu CATTIVEL:^CCIO, r/icmai.
(Franc. Sacch. nov. 74.)
Mi hdnno portdto qui il LI-
BRETT IN o degli enimmi del Si-
gnCr Coltcllini. (Red. lett. 2.)
Vi prego, che, inndnzi che
COtSstO LANDRONCELLO vddd dl-
truve, mi f accidie render e un
miopdio d' uJse. (Bocc. g. 8.
a, 5.)
A vile, contemptible little
woman, in Apulia captivate**
him.
A genteel, agreeable little
girl.
A good, poor little man.
The young ones [of the
dove] yet very young.
With a pretty little mouth.
These wretched
widowed women.
young
A small part of the night
having already passed.
Having a small light in hi»
hand.
With her
white hands.
small pretty
Little miserable merchant
worth four farthings.
Between vetch, darnel,
shavings, and small pieces of
straw.
If thou hadst not given me
such a cordial smacking kiss
Of a taste bitterish, very
acrid, and penetrating.
He returned to the court
more pale, and wretched than
ever.
They have brought me here
the pretty little book of enig-
mas of Mr Coltellini.
1 pray you, that, before
this pilferer goes elsewhere,
you would make him return to
me a pair of spatterdashes Q£
mine.
DIMINUTIVES.
Essendomi accattdta un po' di
DAMUZZACGiAsafoata'ca. (Alleg.
57.)
Allor la BACICCUHIAI. (Pa-
taff. 9.)
dccertdtevi, che w *vi pdrto
un BENONE grandone. (Car.
lett. 1.)
Having obtained somewhat
of the character of an uncouth
pretended lady.
Then I gave her many little
kisses one after another.
Be assured, that I love you
hugely.
EXERCISE VI|.
The little boy took out all the flowers, that he
giovine trdsse tutto fioret che egli
With a pretty little mouth,
Con b6ccat
had in the little basket.
avevn canestro.
Dost thou
tu*
whose lips looked like two little rubies.
le cui Idbbro parevano — due rubmi.
think | that I will suffer that thou 1 shouldst pawn my
Credit \ che 'to sdffera che tu \ ?»' impegni la
little gown ? He conducted
gonnellal E'gli mise* mi* p
remote narrow lanes. Like the little sheep that
fuor di mdnof strdda.l C6me
come out I of the I fold, I first one,
escono \ dal \ chiuso, \ ad una}
three, I and the others remain a little
tre, I e dltra stdnno
down I their I eyes and I their I nose.
do I gli j occhio e il \ muso.
sackcloth, with a miserable little
con • — vil
me through certain
mi1 per certa
pecora, che
I then two, I then
a due, I a
timid, lowering
timida, atterdn-
Clothed ,
Vestito
in
di
me
avdra
very
hat She wag
cappello. E'lla tre,
I have found him with a
Po ho% trovdto3 lol con
I Do not be sparing with
I Non voglidte essermi
of a discreet little smile. The other was a child
discrete rzso. dltro era fanciullv
not yet one year old.
nori* anc6ra* un4 dnnrf — •
8^
somewhat slightly malicious
alqudnto malizitiso.
little book in his hand.
libra — mdno.
small, who
piccolo, che
wai
avecfi
90
ANALOGY.
Who is this contemptible little man, that has come
Chi e questo
insult
to
adir
I us in
ci1 5 r
a torn little cap.
rdtto bcretta.
Accompany the little
Accompagndte
child flatters
fanciullo lusinga
having heard
uonio, che tz vcnitto^
ur house ? He had I on I his head
itra7 cdsa f* — Aveva \ in \ — capo
Little boxes made I of I boards.
casstinc fdtti \ con \ dsse.
Thus the blind little
Cost cieco
master.
padionc.
(the) lovers.
amdnte.
these
questo
words,
pardia,
The poor little woman,
vccchia,
said, Have a very
disse, Abbiidt
little
tdnto
(of) , patience.
pazitnza.
CHAPTER V
NUMERALS.
CARDINAL NUMBERS,
U'no,
due,
one ;
two;
vent* uno, ?
or ventuno, £
twenty-one r
tre,
three ;
ventidue,
twenty- two ;
qu&ttro,
cinque.
four;
five;
ventitre,
ventiqudttro,
twenty- three ,
^twenty-four j
**
six ;
ventidnque,
twenty-five;
sttte,
seven;
venlisei,
twenty-six ;
6tto,
eight ;
ventiselte,
twenty -seven^
nove,
died,
nine ;
ten;
venf otto, )
or ventotto, $
twenty-eight ;
undid.
eleven ;
ventinove,
twenty-nine ;
dodid,
twelve ;
trenta,
thirty ;
tredid,
thirteen ;
trentuno,
thirty-one ;
quattordid,
fourteen ;
.
• . • •
quindid,
fifteen ;
trentttlo,
thirty-eight ^
sedici*
sixteen ;
4
didassette,
seventeen ;
quaranta,
forty ;
didotto,
eighteen ;
. . .
»
didannove,
nineteen ;
cinquanta,
fifty;
venti,
twenty ;
sessdnta,
setidnta,
ottdnta,
novdnta,
cento,
duecento, J
ducenlo, >
or dugento, j
trecento,
quattrocento,
NUME
sixty;
seventy ;
eighty ;
ninety ;
hundred ;
two hundred ;
three hundred;
four hundred ;
RALS.
mills,
duemila,
or dumUa,
tremila,
mittecento, or i
mille e cento, (
91
thousand ;
£ two thousand ;
three thousand;
eleven hun-
, [dred ;
diecimUa,
centomila,
milione,
ten thousand ;
hundred thoua-
[and;
million.
The numbers vcntisei, ventfsette, quarantasei, ottantasette, are
sometimes contracted into venziiy 'twenty-six' ; venzette, { twenty-
seven' ; quaranzei, ' forty-six' ', ottanzitte, ' eighty-seven*.
Cento, when followed by quardnta, cinquanta, sessdnta, settdnta,
loses its last syllable, and makes cenquardnta, 'one hundred and
forty' ; cencin quanta, * one hundred and fifty' ; censessdnta, * one
hundred and sixty'; censettdnta , * one hundred and seventy.'
Cardinal numbers, except uno and its compounds, are
generally of the common gender; as,
siltz dnni, m.,
quindici sUlle, f.,
seven years;
fifteen stars.
The Italians make use of these numbers, instead of the
ordinal, to indicate the days of the month ; and then
they are preceded by the masculine articles i or li; or
by the words di, alii, or addi ; as,
LI vENTiquATTRo Giugno, the 24th of June ;
AI DICIOTTO di Dicembre, on the 18th of December;
ALLI QUATTORDICI di Gennwo, on the 14th of January ;
ADD! DODICI di Mdrzo, on the 12th of March.
EXCEPTION.
The first day of the month is indicated by the ordinal number
imot ' first,' preceded in like manner by i7, al, or add\.
pnmo
92 ANALOGY.
When they are used to indicate the hours of the day,
they are preceded by the feminine article Za, le ; but
then the word 6ra, * hour3 ; ore, * hours' ; is either ex-
pressed or understood ; as,
LE DUE ore, two o'clock ;
LE QUATTRO [ore], four o'clock.
Una, and its compounds ventuno, trentuno, &c.,
before feminine nouns, like other adjectives, change o
into a; as,
IMA L!BRA, one pound ;
novantunA RTTOTA, ninety-one wheels.
When cardinal numbers are used as substantives, all
but tre and those ending in i, are made to vary .in the
plural ; as,
due cinqui, two fives ;
tre novi, three nines.
Mille and milione, in the plural make mila and milio-
ni; as,
diciotto MiLA, eighteen thousand ;
un milione di MILIONI, a million millions.
EXAMPLES.
Vivettednni VENZEI. (Franc. He lived twenty-six years.
Sacch. rim. 40.)
JVe figlio TENZETTE (lello It [a scorpion] brought forth
stisso colore. (Red. Ins. 47.) twenty-seven [scorpions] of the
same color.
Dintro La citld di Roma vi Within the city of Rome
sono auARANZEic/ziese cardina- there are forty-six cardinal
lane. (Brun. Tes. 3. 3.) churches.
Un milione, e OTTANZETTE One million" and eighty"
miglidia, e cinquecento fiormi seven thousand and five hand"
d'oro. (*Dav. Tac. Tost. 429.) red gold florins.
&v6ndor>i in quel eoncilio There being in that council
CENduARANTeftto vescovi. (Petr. one hundred and forty-eight
Uoin. ill. 82.) bishops.
NUMERALS.
CKNCINQUANTA de' suoi cava-
liiri mandd incontra air 6ste d&
Fiorentini. (Giov. Vill. 1. 9.)
Piu di CENSETTANTA dnni
ttdtivarono gli Dei scnza tdalo.
(St. Agost. Citt. Dio. 4. 31.
La voglia e la ragion combat-
tut' hanno — sette, e SETT' AMU.
(Petr. s. 80.)
QUINPICI STELLE, che in di-
verse plage — Lo cielo aovivan
di tdnto aereJio. (Dant. Par.
13.)
Di Ferrara, LI VENTICIUATTRO
GitfcNo, Mille seictnto sette.
(Bent. lett. I.)
A'l D1CIOTTO DI DlCEMBRE.
(Bav.)
A'LLT auATTORDici DI GEN-
WAIO. (Macch.)
II detto anno ADD! DODICI DI
MARZO. (Giov. Vill.)
Che 6ra e f — Sono LE Q.UAT-
THO. (Class.)
E'ccoii la notte, ecco LE Dt/E
«K«, 6cco le qudttro. (Firenz.)
TJgli tiNA LIBRA di castrone.
(Burchiell. p. 2. s. 1.)
Jintre NOVANTUNA Ru6rA.
(Dant. Conv.)
E dicidmo DUE cfwftui, due
stlti, THE NOVI, perchb questi
numerdli, sempre che stdnnoper
sustanttvi, si dedinano. (Buom.
Ling. Tosc. 2. 8. 13.)
Efran per numero DICIOTTO
M!LA. (Bemb. Stor. 12. 176.)
Al padre Carrara rinda in
mio njme UN MI LION E DI MILIO-
wj di saluti. (Red. lett. 2.)
He sent one hundred and
fifty of his horsemen against
the Florentine host.
They adored their gods, with-
out idols, for more than one
hundred and seventy years.
Inclination and reason have
'striven for seven after seven
years. . ^ V
Fifteen stars, which in dif-
ferent spheres enliven the .
skies with so much serenity.
Ferrara, 24th June, 1607.
On the 18th December.
On the 14th January.
On the 12th of March of the
said year.
What o'clock is it? — It i»
four o'clock.
Behold night, behold two
o'clock, behold four o'clock.
Take one pound of mutton.
Other ninety-one wheels.
And we say two fives, two
sevens, three nines, because
these numerals, when thej
stand as substantives, are de-
clined. .
They were eighteen thous-
and in number.
Give to father Carrara, in
my behalf, a million millions
of salutations.
ANALOGY.
ORDINAL NUMBERS.
Primo,
secondo,
terzo,
quarto,
quinto,
s6sto,
settimo,
ottdvo,
nono,
ddcimo,
decimoprimoj
*und6cimo or
undictsimo,
' decimosecondo,
first;
second ;
third ;
fourth ;
fifth ; .
sixth ;
seventh ;
eighth ;
ninth ;
tenth ;
eleventh ;
dodecimp,™ twelfth;
dodicesimo,
*decimoterzo,
terzodtcimo, or > thirteenth;
tredictsimo, }
*decimoqudrto, >
quartodtcimo, or > fourteenth
quattordicesimo, )
>• sixteenth
seven-
teenth ;
*quaranUsimo, or
quadragtsimo,
quint sdtcimo, or > fifteenth ;
qumdicesimo, )
*decimos6sto, ^
sestodtcimo, or
sedictsimo,
*decimos6ttimo,
settimodtcimo, or
diciassettesimo,
*decimottdvo,
'ottodecimo, or
diciottisimo,
*decimonono,
nonodecimo, or
diciannovtsimo,
t
eight-
eenth ;
nine-
teenth ;
*ventesimoprimo,
vige imoprimo or
ventuntsimo,
*ventesimosecdndo,
' twenty-
first:
*trentesimoprimo,
trigesimoprimo, or S i;"11^
trentunesimo, >
*sessanUsimo, or
> fortieth :
quinquagtsimo, or > fiftieth j
quingenttsimo, 5
> sixti
? seven-
5 tieth ;
*settantesimo or
stttuagtsimo,
*ottardtsimo,m > eightieth :
ottagtsimo, J
*novanttsimo, or
nonog&toto,
y ninetieth ;
centesimo, hundredth ;
ducenUsimo, or ? two
dugenttsimo, $ hundredth ;
trecenttsimo, three hundredth:
milltsimo,
thousandth :
millionth,
* We mark with an asterisk those, amongst the different names of the same
numbers, that are most in use.
NUMERALS.
95
The ordinal numbers from primo to decimo, and ven-
tesimo, trentesimo, &c., before feminine nouns change o
into a; and in the plural change o into i, for the mascu-
line, and a into e, for the feminine ; as,
la primA. DONNA, the first woman ;
le ttrzE PERCOSSE, the third stripes ;
l& cinquantesimA. LETTERA, the fiftieth letter ;
i primi* DI, the first days :
And their compounds, quartodecimo, decimosettimo,
&c., change both the last vowel of the last, and the last
vowel of the first of the two component numbers ; as,
la quartA.decimA. CONDIZIONE, the fourteenth condition ;
la decwi&stttimA. STOLT!ZIA, the seventeenth folly.
EXAMPLES.
Delle quali LA PIUMA
chiameremo Pampinea, la se-
cdnda Fiamm6tta, Filomena la
terza, fyc. (Bocc, Introd.)
Nessuno — Le seconde aspettd-
va ne LE TEKZE [percosse.]
^Dant. Inf. 18.)
Fra Guittone, nella LETTERA
che nel mio c6dice e la CINGIUAN-
TESIMA. (Red. annot. Ditir.)
E ne' DI PRIMI dentro al
divznseno — Nasccimmo. (Bocc.
Araet. 96.)
LA aUARTADECIMA CONDI-
XIONE, che deve avere la confes-
yione9 si & accelerdta, (Passav.
176.)
LA DECIMASETTIMA STOLTI-
ZIA, e diqutlli che vogliono fug-
gire. (Cavalc. Stolt. 228.)
Tlie first of whom, we will
call Pampinea, the second
Fiammetta, the third Filome-
na, &c.
None waited for the second,
nor the third [stripes .]
Fra Guittone, in the letter
which in my MS. copy is the
fiftieth.
And in the first days we
were born in the divine bosom.
The fourteenth condition,
which the confession ought to
have, is that of being early.
The seventeenth folly, is
that of those who desire to flee.
* Pr'tmi is sometimes used as a substantive, and then has the signification of
'ancestors', 'parents' ; as,
Fieramtntcfuro avversi — A me e They were fiercely adverse to roe,
a> miei PRIMI, e a miapdrte. (Dant. to my ancestors, and to my party,
laf. 10.)
96
ANALOGY.
COLLECTIVE, DISTRIBUTIVE, AND PRO-
PORTIONAL NUMBERS.
Pdio,
Colle
a pair ;
ctive.
quarantina,
cinquantina,
sessantina,
letlantina,
ottantina,
novantinat
centindiOj
miglidio,
two scores, or
[forty ;
fifty, or two scores
[and a half;
three scores, or
[sixty :
seventy, or three
[scores and a half;
four scores, or
- [eighty;
ninety, or four
[scores and a half;
a hundred ;
a thousand ;
cinquina.
the number of five;
settina,
the number of
[seven ;
decina,
ten, or half a
dodicina
or dozzina
> a dozen ;
veniina,
treniina,
a score, or twenty ;
thirty, or a score
[and a half
Distributive.
Una metdt
un tirzo,
un quarto,
un quinto,
one half;
one third ;
one fourth;
one fifth ;
un ststo,
un stltimo,
un ottdvo,
un nowo,
one sixth ;
one seventh ;
one eighth ;
one ninth ; &<
Proportional.
Ddppio,
triplo,
quddruplo,
double ;
triple ;
quadruple ;
quintuple,
ctntuplo,
quintuple
ten-fold ;
a hundred-fold*
Collective, distributive, and proportional numbers
low the rules of other adjectives.
* TVeina, quattriwa, seina^ otti-na &c., are sometimes used by the It lians im
common language, to express ( the number of thti-e*, l f four', 'of six*, * 9f
eight', &c., but they have never been employed by good writers.
NUMERALS.
97
With numeral adjectives are generally classed the fol-
lowing words ; viz,
ambiduo, \
ambeduo, I
amboduo, v both, both
amenduo, ( of them.
dmbi,
dmbe,
dmboj
amenduni,
amendune,
entrdmbi,
ambidue,
ambedue,
ambodue,
amendue,
ambidui,
ambedui,
A'mbi, its compounds, and amenduni, are used in
speaking of masculine objects : dmbe, its compounds,
and amendane, in speaking of feminine : the others
may be used for both genders ; as,
both lovers ;
both sages ;
both eyes ;
both women ;
both turned ;
both arms ;
both hemispheres ;
both shores ;
both hogs ;
both things, or both of them ;
Sofronia and Olindo both of
the same city.
dmbi AMANTI,
ambidue SAVJ,
dmbe LE L\icr,
ambedue DONNE,
dmbo CONVERSI,
dm6oi,E BRACCIA,
amenduo GLI EMISPERI,
amendue LE SPONDE,
amenduni PORCI,
aniendum COSE,
SOFRONIA ed OLiNDO
d^una cittdde entrdmbi,
EXAMPLES.
FILKNO e TIRSI AMBI novelli
\MANTI. (Vine, Mart. rim.
4-)
jL' UNO e Z'ALTRO SAVIO diced
vero, percid ad AMBIDUE donoe.
(Nov. ant. 23.)
E sien nel cuor puriite AMBE
LE LUCI — Ch'dlla strdda d?am6r
mi furon dud. (Petr. c. 8.)
Allora AMBEDUE [d6nne]
entrtrono netla fossa, (Nov.
ant. 35.)
Alfine, AMBO CONVERSI al
giusto seggio. (Petr. c. 48.)
Philenus' and Thyrsis both
new lovers.
Both sages told the truth,
therefore he gave to both.
And let the heart bear pun-
ishment for both eyes, which
led me to the road of love.
Then both [women] entered
into the ditch.
Finally both turned to the
seat of justice.
9
98
ANALOGY.
Con AMBO IE BRACCIA mi
prese. (Dant. Inf. 19.)
n confine — D' AMENDED GLI
IMISPERI. (Dant. Inf. 20.)
Per cui tremdvano AMENDtJE
IE SPONDE. (Dant. Inf. 9.)
AMENDTJNI [porci] M6RTI
cdddero in terra. (Bocc. In-
trod.)
Ntlla vostra elezione sta, di
tdrre qudl piu vi pidce DELLE
D#E [COSe], O AMENDTJNE.
(Bocc. g. 7. n. 1.)
Colii SOFRONIA, OLINDO egli
s?app&lla — DJ una cittdde EN-
TRAMBI, e d'una fede. (Tass.
Ger. 2. 16.)
He seized me with both
arras.
The confine of both hemi-
spheres.
On account of which both
shores trembled.
Both [hogs] fell dead to the
earth.
It is at your choice, to take
which of the two [things] you
like best, or both.
She is called Sofronia, he
Olindo, both of the same city
and of the same faith.
EXERCISE VII.
He sent
— Mando
his
suo
five
hundred horsemen
cavdllo
brother with six cohorts, and
fratello coorte, e
to I Terra di Lavoro. He made him
in I — fece* GM
grieve for this sin forty days. He passed
pidngere — questo peccdto di. — Passo
Tunis I to I Apulia with more than eight hundred Spanish
Tuni&i I in \ Puglia Spagnuolo^
horsemen. Metellus was already in Lombardy I with j
cavaliere.1 Metello era gid, Lombardia \ colla \
his army of three legions, who
suo* 6stel legidne, che
France.
Frdncia.
I
I'o ho qui lira, \ di
to have bought a farm. And this was four hundred years
comprdre podere. E do fu anno
was coming
veniva
from
di
from
di
Being already about (to) thirty years
Essendo gia, di vresso* — 3 4 dnno^
old.
Essendo gid, dipresso* — 3 4 dnno5 xecchio.1
have here two hundred livres, | with | which I intended
io voleva
before (that) Rome I was begun. I
dn*t che Roma3 \ si eomintidsse.1 \
He was of the age
— E'ra — eta,
NUMERALS. 99
of twenty-six or twenty-seven (years). One hundred and
o anno. —
seventy archers. He sent one hundred and fifty I of I
sagittdrio. — Mandd — — | de* \
his soldiers.
suo fdnte.
They went to Messina the twenty-fourth of December.
— Anddrono Dicembre.
He was baptized I on the sixteenth, in St. John's. On
— Battezzos-si \ San Giovanni.
the eighteenth of December, having heard of the insurrection
Dicdmbre, - udita rivdlta
of the legion, he went out I (of) the palace dressed I in I
legione, s' uscl \ — paldgio vestito \ di \
black. The first of the month I will pay you. Come at
nero. mese — pagherd* vi.1 Venite a
(the) six o'clock, and we will speak I of it. I He arrived
- . « — parleremo* \ Tit.1 | — Giunse
at Milan at (the) one o'clock 1 in I the night. At (the)
a Mildno a ••• | di \ notte. A
twelve o'clock I I went to see I our ambassador.
i I mi ported dal • \ ndstro ambasciaddre,
It I was worth I thirty-one livres. Thou didst usurp one
— I Valeva \ lira. - Usurpdsti
He came
jf
to an agreement I on I condition of paying sixty thousand
accordo \ con \ eondizidne pagdre
ducats to the conquerors. Salute him I for me I a thousand
ducdto mncitore. Salutatc^, lo% [ me^i | —
millions of times.
volta.
Here begins the eleventh book. He arrived happily
Qui commcia 2 libro.1 — Arrivd felicemente
to the fortieth year I of 1 his life. Contradicting (to)
anno \ della \ suo vita. Contradicendo
himself in the fourteenth chapter. Boniface the Eighth
*e medesimo 2 capitolo.1 Bonifdxio3 —
hundred and seventy-five thousand gold florins.
d' dro* fiorincil.
100 ANALOGY.
being Pope in Rome, the Abb£ of Cligni came to the
Essendo* pdpa2 5 Roma,6 10 Abbdte" « 13 venne7
court. In
cdrte.9 A
The twenty-first stanza.
stanza.
the time of the Emperor Frederic the First,
tempo Imperatofe Federico —
He had tied both
his
feet. II bit I both I my |
— Jlveva legdti i pitde. \ Mi morsi
hands through grief. They entered both I into I the garden.
mdno per dolor e. . — Entrdrono \ in \ gia^dino
I gave it to both.
— ho* date* Lo.1
CHAPTER VI.
SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS,
PERSONAL AND CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS,
THE Italian personal pronouns are the following :
Singular. Plural.
1st Person, T.O, m. & f., I; noi} ra. & f, we;
2d Person, tu, ra. &f., thou; , voi} m. & f., you;
f { effli. 1
eSh> he; lotegiino,
3d Person,^ 0*°**0> m- he or itj , or^"' m- Uhey.
ella. she: ^ ^
j ella,
6h^ U^o,
she or it; or ess e, f., J
Singular and Plural.
o r C one's self, himself, herself
3d Person, se, ra. & f, £ .^ tneraselves.
Conjunctive pronouns are derived from the personal
pronouns, and are divided into conjunctive, properly
speaking, and relative conjunctive pronouns.
Personal pronouns are varied with the prepositions
only.
PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
101
VARIATION OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS,
70.
SINGULAR.
Personal. Conjunc. Relat.
Subjective (N.) — io, I;
fPoss. (G.) — dime, of me;
Relat. < Attr. (D.) — a me, mi, to me ;
( Der. (Ab.) — da me, from me ;
Objective (Ac.) — me, mi, me :
PLURAL.
Personal. Conjunc. Relat.
Subjective (N.
)— noi,
we ;
(Poss. (G.
) — di noi,
of us;
Relat. <Attr. (D.'
(Der. (Ab.;
) — a noi, ne or ci,
) — da noi,
to us;
from us
Objective (Ac.]
) — noi, ne or czj
USr
TV.
SINGULAR.
Conjunc. Relat.
Personal.
Subjective (N.) — tu,
( Poss. (G.)— di te,
Relat. I Attr. (D.)— a te, ti,
(Der. (Ab.V— da*e,
Objective (Ac.) — te, ti,
PLURAL.
Personal.
Subjective. (N.) — voi,
(Poss. (G.)— divoi,
Relat. < Attr. (D.) — a voi,
( Der. (Ab.) — da voi,
Objective (Ac.) — voi,
thou ;
of thee ;
to thee ;
from thee .
thee :
Conjunc. Relat.
ye or you ;
of you;
to you;
from you ;
you.
EGLI.
SINGULAR.
Personal. Conjunc. Relat.
(N.)— -egli, he;
(Poss. (G.)—dilui, ne, of him ;
< Attr. (D. )— a lui, gli or li, to him;
(Der. (Ab.)— da lui, ne, from him ,
Objective. (Ac.)— lui, ilotlo, him:
Subjective
Relat
102 ANALOGY.
PLURAL.
Personal. Conjunc. Relat.
f wrsuuui. wuujuiit. jrvuiui.
Subjective (N. ) — egli or eglino, they ;
C Poss. (G.) — di loro, nt, of them ~,
Relat. \ Attr. (D.)— a Idro, Idro, to them ;
( Der. (Ab.) — da Idro, ne, from them ;
Objective (Ac.) — I6ro, gli or li} them.
SINGULAR.
Personal. Conjunc. Relat.
Subjective (N.) — esso, he or it;
C Poss. (G.) — d' esso, ne, of him or it;
Relat. < Attr, (D.) — ad esso, gli, to him or it ,
{Der. (Ab.) — da esso, , ne. fromhimorit;
Objective (Ac.) — esso. lo. him or it :
PLURAL.'
Personal, Conjunc. Relat.
Subjective (N.) — essi, they ;
C Poss. (G.) — d1 essi, ne, of them ;
Relat. < Attr. (D.)~ ad essi, to them :
(Der, (Ab.) — da essi, ne, from them
Objective (Ac.) — essi, gli or li, them.
ELLA.
SINGULAR.
Personal. Coujune. Relat.
Subjective (N.)— ella, she ;
(Poss. <G.)— dilei, ne, of her;
Relat. ] Attr. (D.)— a lei, h, to her ;
(Der. (Ab.)— da lei. ne, from her ;
Objective (Ac.)-lei, la, her:
PLURAL.
Personal. Conjunc. Relat.
Subjective (N.) — elle or elleno? they ;
C Poss. (G.) — dildro, nc, of them;
Relat. \ Attr. (D.)— a I6ro9 Idro, to them ;
(Der. (Ab.)— da Uro, nt, from them
Objective (Ac.)— loroj l«, -them.
PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
103
SINGULAR.
Personal.
Subjective (N.) — essa,
fPoss. (G.) — d1 essa ,
Relat. < Attr. (D.) — ad essa,
( Der. (Ab.) — da essa,
Objective (Ac.) — essa^
Conjunc. Relat.
le,
la,
.
she or it :
of her or it;
to her or it ;
from her or it ;
her or : :
PLURAL.
Personal.
Subjective (N.) — esse,
£ Poss. (G.) — d> esse,
Relat. < Attr. (D.)— ad esse,
(Der. (Ab.) — da esse,
Objective . (Ac.) — esse,
Conjunc, Relat.
they;
ne, of them ;
to them /
ne, from them ;
le. them.
Personal.
Subjective (N.)— ..
CPoss. (G.) — di se,
Relat. <Attr. (D.) — a se,
( Der. (Ab.) — da se,
Objective (Ac.) — se}
Conjunc. Relat.
of one's self;
to one's self;
from one's seli ;
one's self.
la, tu, egli, ella ; noi, voi, egli or eglino, elle or
etteno, are- applied to animate beings ; esso, essa ; essi,
esse ; se, may be applied both to animate and inanimate
beings.
The pronouns esso, essa, are used sometimes to express
the self-same, the very object of which we speak ; and
then they are elegantly supplied by the words desso,
dessa, but in the subjective only ; as,
in ESSA luce, in that very light ;
ESSO Messtr Teddldo, the same Messer Tedaldo ;
tu non par DESSO, thou dost not seem thyself;
el? e ben DESSA, it is she, herself.
* Se is used to express a relation of identity with the subject, and has no
jectivc.
104 ANALOGY.
In familiar conversation, the Italians very often employ lui, and
lei, as subjectives, instead of egli and ella ; but this usage,
though authorized by some writers, ought never to be followed in
the written language.
We find also in some classics egli and ella, used for lui and lei ;
and elle for loro ; as, memoria d' ELLA, ' memory of her' ; e sudn
di man con ELLE, * and striking of hands with them' : and 'tllo for
•a*MVj gu.u,j.ii j\j\A*.a^ii u,g UJ. .i* o i/ iiim , XjLiLil OlUjUUiItU X/C//tofcC// <J 3 t-, V1JH3JT
were pensive' ; c/t' alcuna gloria i rei avrebber d' ELLI, * for the
guilty souls would derive no glory from them' ; this license, never-
theless, must be left entirely to the Poets.
La for ella, le for elleno, and gli for egli and for eglino ; as, LA
mi scusi, 'excuse me' ; LE mi dzcano, * tell me' ; GLI era qui, ' he
was here'; &c.; are contractions, which, however common they
may be in Tuscany, and supported by the authority of several
writers, are notwithstanding to be carefully avoided in the written
language, especially in an elevated style of composition.
The pronouns zo, tu, egli, ella, esso, are often used
as mere expletives ; as,
5' io moinssij io, if I should die ;
tu di1 tue parole, TU, thou mayest say what thou
[pleasest;
EGI.I k una compassione a it excites pity to see him ;
[vedtrlo,
JELLA non andra cosi, it shall not be so ;
dndiamo con 6s so lui, let us go with him.
I'o is sometimes written f ; and egli, eglino , are con-
tracted into 6i, and often written e' ; as,
i' non so ridire, I cannot say ;
EI dtbbe avtr inteso, he must have heard ;
EI sigittaro in sulla spiagga, they leaped upon the shore ;
E' penso, he thought ;
domandb chi tffossero, he asked who they were,
When the pronouns me, te, se, are preceded by the
preposition con, 'with', we often transpose the preposi-
PERSONAL PRONOUNS. „ 105
lion, make an elision of tne n, and form of them a single
word ; as,
ton me, MECO, wirth me ;
con te, TECO, with thee ;
con s£, SECQ, with one's self, himself, &c.
We find in the classics ndsco, vosco ; used for £on not, e with us1,
and con voi, ' with you' ; but these expressions have become
obsolete.
Italian personal pronouns are very often suppressed,
the termination of the verb being sufficient to indicate
the person ; as,
andidmo [n6i] a Roma, let us go to Rome ;
[egli] domandbchifossero, he asked who they were.
The English reflective pronouns myself, thyself, our-
selves, &c., are expressed in Italian by the personal
pronouns, and the word stesso, m., stessa, f., or me-
desimo, m., medcsima, f., for the singular; and stessi,
m., stesse, f., or medisimi, m., medesime, f , for the
plural; as,
Singular. Plural.
f w stessot ~] C noi stessi,
1st ! or medesimo, m. ^ lf \ or m^mmi..,m. ^
Per.) vo stessa, ndi stesse, f
^or medesima, f. J \^ormedesime, f.)
2d C tu stesso, m. 7 ft lf C »oi .(>*«, m. 7 yourseives;
Per. (^ tu stessa, f. $ C ^e stesse, i. yj
3d
Per.
* stesso, ~) himself, C eglino stessi,
or esso stesso, m. 5 or itself; ^ or essi stessi, m.
ella stessa, > herself, C elleno stesse,
or essa stessa, f. 3 0** itself; ^ or eisse st£sse, f.
Tone's self, ^
se stesso, m. J himself, I se sttssi, m.
5e stessa, f. j herself, [ se stesse, f.
L or itself; J
them-
selves
106
ANALOGY.
EXAMPLES.
Vld' W IN ESS A LtJCE dltTG
lucerne. (Dant. Par. 8.)
Quantunque il maggiore a
diciotC dnni non aggiugnesse,
qudndo ESSO MESSERTEDALDO,
ricchissimo venne a mdrte.
(Bocc. g. 2. n. 3.)
Tu NON mi PAR DESSO.
(Bocc. g. 9. n. 3.)
ELL' E BEN DESSA, ancora e
in vita. (Petr. s. 290.)
Chefarebbe egli s'fo MORISSJ,
fo? (Macch. Com.)
Tu Di' TUB PAROLE, TU J W
per me non mi terro mdi sdlva,
se noi non la incantidmo. (Bocc.
g. 7. n. 1.)
E'GLI E 1JNA COMPASSIONS A
VEDERLO. (Macch. Com.)
E'LLA NON ANDRA cosi, c/i' io
non te ne pdghi. (Boce. g. 9.
n. 5.)
ANDIAMO CON ESSO LUI A
ROMA. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 3.)
I' NON BO ben RIDIR com' i'
v* entrdi. (Dant. Inf. 1.)
E'l DEBBE AVERE 1NTESO,
che tu ,ragioni di lui. (Gell.
Circ. 2. 39.)
Ond' EI SI GITTAR tuttl IN
STJLLA SPIAGGIA. (Dant. Purg.
2.)
Laonde E' gli PEN so di volere
la seguente mattzna ristordre.
(Bocc. g. 10. n. 9.)
Mendti i gentiluomini nel
giardinOj cortesemente gli DO-
MANDO, CHI E' F6SSERO. (BoCC.
g. 10. n. 9.)
In that very light 1 saw
other luminaries.
Although the eldest was not
arrived to the age of eighteen,
when this same Messer Tedal-
do died very rich.
Thou dost not seem to me
thyself.
It is she herself, she is yet
alive.
What would he do if I should
die?
Thou mayest say what thou
pleasest; as for me I shall
never consider myself safe, if
we do not enchant her.
It excites pity to see him.
It shall not be so, that I will
not pay }^ou for it.
Let us go to Roms with him.
I cannot say how I entered
it.
He must have heard, that
thou speakest of him.
Wherefore they leaped all
upon the shore.
Therefore he thought to
restore them on the following
morning.
Having led tke gentlemen
in the garden, he courteously
asked them, who they were.
PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
107
E in segno di .cid, ne rdeo
ME co delle sue cose piu care.
(Bocc. g. 2. n. 9.)
Miofiglio otf £, e per che non
e TECO ? (Dant. Inf. 10.)
Quel giorno ch' w lascidi
grave, ejtensosa — Madonna, e'l
mio cor SECO. (Petr. s. 212.)
I'o MEDESIMO non so quel
ch' i1 mi voglio. (Petr. s. 103.)
.E tut TU STESSO, talora a me
usbergo di mm gloria tu sembri.
(Alf. Saul. 2. 1.)
Ma com9 &, che si gran rom6r
non suone — Per dltri messi, o
per LEI STESSA il sentaf (Petr.
s. 213.)
Non come fidmma che per
forza e spenta,—Ma che per
SE MEDESMA siconsume, (Petr.
Tri.)
And as a proof of this, I will
take with me those things
which are the most dear to her.
Where is my son, and why
is he not witk thee ?
That day when I left my
lady serious and pensive, and
my heart with her. •
I know not myseif what I
want.
And thou, thyself, sometimes
seemest to me the shield of my
glory.
But how is it, that so great a
rumor does not sound through
other messengers, or. that she
does not hear it herself.
Not like a flame which is
extinguished by force, but like
one which consumes itself.
EXERCISE VIII.
I know, better than any other man, how to do
so, — dltro udmo, — far
that which I please. God never will ^have
do che voglio. Iddio mdi non amcL
me for this sin. Thou wilt ask
quisto peccdto.
dirdi2
mercy on
misericdrdia \ di
her whether she wants any thing. You appear
lei se vudl nulla. parete
to
o be a man of God, how do you say such
uomo Dio, come — ditel cotesto
words? Without expecting any reprehension from
pardla? Senza attendere ripfensione
you. The magistrate begun to have pity
Podestd. comincid ad aver compassi6nt
108 ANALOGY.
1 upon j her. She pleases me so much, that I
I dii I pidce* mi1 tdnto, che
could not express it. Having taken leave I of I him,
potrei2 nonl dir^, lo. Preso commidtcfi \ da.1 \ ' 2,
he I returned I to his house. They never return^
I sene torno — cdsa. mdi non rendono2
it, and we return it
Zo,1, e rendidmo^ la*
as soon as we have
come — abbidmo2
used it. We are ready I to I do it, since
adoperdtcfi lal. sidmo presti \ di \ fdr^,lo, poicke
it pleases you. She would drive me out of the
— place2 vfi. scaccercbbc2 mil fu6r —
house. I have spoken I to him of you. We
cdsa. ko2 rhgiondto3 \ gli1
make better work. You promised I to me I to
faccidmo lavorw. . prometteste* \ mi* \ di
let me speak with I your wife.
fdr^^mi partdre \ con la \ .vdstra2 donna?. [State
joyful, I you are in your house. j Do not trust
lietamente, \ siete vostra? cdsa1. \ Non vi fiddte
to J them. They* had all gone to church.
di erano tuttc anddte chiesa.
It is he, himself. She I does not seem I I to
— E1 — , non sembra \ di
lo herself. Many years (they) have not passed.
t :.,:?• . molto5 dnno6 sono3 non* passdti4.
They went with him. Come with me. II have
- - Anddron : Venite . non
nothing j to do with thee. We have seen them
ho nitnte \ a far — albidmo* veduti3 Gli l
ourselves. She herself has brought I them I to me.
Thou hast said it thyself. They began to
- kdi* ditto3 Lo1 . - comincidrontf a*
speak amongst themselves.
ragiondre* Seco1 z.
* They, in the feminine gender.
CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS.
109
Conjunctive Pronouns.
Singular. Plural,
let Per. t»i, m. <fc f., £ ^eme '> I ne or ci, m. & f. , J ^ ?s >
3dPe, «,,..*£, {t^ehf' } ,i,m.&f., |j£jj3
1^ZiorZ£,*m., to him or it; Wro, m., to them ;
«7 or Zo,* m., him or it ; gli or II f m., them ;
Ze,*f,, to her or it; Mro, f., to them ;
la,* f; , her or it ; Ze,* f, them.
3d Per.
Singular and Plural.
' si, m. &
jTto one's s«lf, "
to himself,
J to hererelf,
] to itself or
^ to themselves; j
^ of him or it,
, nc, m. & f, < of her or it,
^ of them ;
Tone's self7
I himself,
m. & f., <( herself,
j itself or
^ themselves ;
C from him or it,
w«, m. & f., < from her or it,
/from them.
Mi, ti, ne or ci, ui, are applied to animate beings
only ; the others may be applied both to animate and
inanimate beings.
Conjunctive pronouns take the place of personal
pronouns, when these pronouns are in the objective or
relation of attribution, and are closely connected with
a verb ; as,
MI poUte torre [for poUtt torre
A ME],
non TI pdssono mudvere [for
non pdssono muovere TE],
NE sar&bbe gran bidsimo [for
sarMe A NOI gran bidsimo],
you can take away from
me;
they cannot move thee ;
it would be in us a great
fault ;
* The pronouns z7, Z0, £a, K, gli, le, appear, in orthogr phy, to bo th • same
words^as the articles i'Z, lo, la, li, gli, le. The learner, however, will observe,
that when the words i/, Zo, &c., are followed by a noww, a verb in the irtfnitiv*
wood, or any other word used as a noun, they are always articles ; but whom
'Ihey are followed by a Terb in a tense of the indicativ , the conjunctive, or "he
conditional mood, or when they are joined to a verb, thej arc alway* *
pronouns.
10
no
ci ha guiddti [for ha guiddti
NOI],
OLI vinne a memoria [for vtn-
ne a memoria A LUI],
LI si bra, mostrdto [for si ira,
mostrdto A LUI],
LI conddnni [for conddnni
LORO],
IL chiamb [for chiamb LUI],
LO avtsse fdtto duUnte [for
avtssefdtto LUI doUnte,~\
LA mandb [for mandb LEI],
LE poUsse torndre [for pottsse
torndre A LEI],
LE donerb [for donerb LORO],
&•« paruto LORO [for ^ra pa-
mfo A LORO],
si t^efe davdnti [for v&fc rfa-
vdnh' A SE],
si Zaseid cadtre [for toct'6 ca-
ctere SE],
mipidn di parldryv [for^id-
cc c: me diparldre DI ESSO],
a qudn'i NE giactvuno [for a
qudnti DI LORO giactvano],
ANALOGY.
it has guided us ;
there came into his mind ;
he had shown himself to
him;
it should condemn them ;
she called him ;
it had afflicted him ;
he sent her ;
it might cause her;
I will give them ;
it had seemed to them ;
he sees before him ;
she let herself fall;
it pleases me to speak of
it;
from as many of them as
were abed.
If the conjunctive pronouns mi, ti, ct, vi, li, lo, le, la,
si, ne, are followed by a verb beginning with a vowel,
they commonly lose the i and take an apostrophe in its
stead; as,
M' hA rotto,
c' immdlle,
L' offendtva,
N' Avrtmmo,
he has bruised me ;
thou suckest us ;
he offended them ;
we should have from him.
When they are preceded by a verb they are joined to
it so as to form one single word ; as,
dondrMi,
pdrveTi,
to give me ;
it appeared to thee ;
to send him ;
CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS.
11
, he being in want ;
telling him.
In using the pronouns il, lo, li, gli, la, le, we follow
the rules already given with regard to the articles il, lo,
la, < the ' ; as,
IL consentiy
chi LO scrisse,
L' Amero,
GLI Aspettdva,
thou consentest to it ;
he who wrote it ;
I will love him ;
he expected them.
The pronouns mi, ti, ci, vi, si, ne, are often used
as mere expletives ; as,
io MI 5o?io, I am ;
se tu TI hdi posto mente, whether thou hast minded ;
s empre che tu ci viverdi. as long as thou livest ;
£t'o che voi vi dite, what you say ;
si uscl del paldgio, he went out the palace ;
the NK fosse del budn what had become of the good
udmo, man.
xx AMP L ES,
V6l MI POTETE Tt)RRE qudntO
tengo, e DonAKMi,siccdmev6stro
uomo a chi vi pidce. (Bocc. g.
3. n.9.)
S' egli PARVETF il fallo mio
cosi grdnde, che ^ON TI rtissoNO
Mc6vERE a pietdtc alcuna le
amdre Idgrime, ne gli umili
prieghi, muovafi almeno questo
sdlo mio atto. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 7.)
11 MANDARLO fuOI'l dl COLSCL
ndstra cos), infermo NE SAREBBK
GRAN BIASIMO. (BoCC. g. 1. n.l.)
II vostro sennot piu che il
nostro avvedimento, ci HA GUI-
BATI. (Bocc. Intr.)
BlSOGNANDOGLI WIO,
quantitd di dandri, GLI VENNE
A MEMOKIA tm ricco Giudco.
(Bocc. g. 1. n. 3.)
You can take away from me
all I have, and give me, like
one of your men, to whomso-
ever it pleases you.
If my fault appeared to thee
so great, that neither my bitter
tears, nor my humble prayers,
can move thee to pity, at
least let this single act of mine
move thee.
To send him out of our house,
so infirm as he is, would be in
us a great fault.
Your wisdom, more than our
foresight, has guided us.
Being in want of a good sum
of money, there came into hi§
mind a rich Jew.
ANALOGY.
11 stgutnte, di appdrve per
visidne Cristo a Ruberto, DICEN-
DOLI, che in fdrrna di lebbroso
LI SI ERA MOSTRATO, VOlendo
provdre la sua pietd. (Giov.
Vill. 1. 4. c. 18.)
O LI CONDAKW i a sempiterno
pidnto. (Petr. s. 214.)
Assdi volte invdno IL CHIAMO.
(Bocc. g. 4.n. 6.)
Se d'una cosa sola non LO
AVESSE la fortuna FATTO DO-
LEKTE. (Boec g. 5. n. 1.)
Ad una lor possessions LA nc
MANDO. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 7.)
Cumincid a dubitdre, non quel
suo guarddr cost fiso movesse
la sua rusticitd ad alcuna cosa,
che vtrgogna LE POTESSE TOR-
HARK. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 1.)
5' elle vi pidccionot w LIB vi
DONERO. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 9.)
JVe ERA ancora LOR
alcuna volta, tdnto gaiamente
eantdr gli usignuoli, quanta
quella mattina pareva. (Boce.
g. 7. Proem.)
DAVANTI si VEDK due, che
verso lui con una lanterna in
mdno Tenitno. (Bocc. g. 2. n.
5.)
E'ssa sopra il sdno del Cdnte
si LASCIO con la tisia CADERE.
(Bocc. g. 2. n. &.)
E'gU ill PlAcE DI PARLARME.
(Bocc. g. 1. n. 7.)
E'gli, pianamtnte anddndo,
A aUANTI NE GIACEVANO, a tutti
in simil mani6rataglid icaptlli.
(Bocc. g. 3. n. 2.)
M' HA con un bastone tutto
SOTTO. (Bocc. g. 7» n. 7.)
The following day, Christ
appeared in a vision to Robert,
saying to him, that he had
shown himself to him in the
form of a leper, to try his pity.
Or it should condemn them
to eternal woe.
She called him many times
in vain.
If fortune had not afflicted
him in one thing alone.
He sent her to a farm of
theirs.
She began to doubt, lest her
looking so fixedly should more
his uncouthness to do some-
thing, which might cause her
shame.
If you like them, I will giy«
them to you.
Nor had it ever seemed to
them, that the nightingales had
at any time sung so cheerfully,
as they appeared to do that
He sees before him two per-
sons, who came towards him
with a lantern in their hands.
She let her head fall on the
bosom of the Count.
It pleases me to speak of it.
He, walking softly, from as
many of them as were abed, cut
a tuft of hair in the same man-
ner.
He has bruised me all over
with a stick.
CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS.
113
2£ nelV eterna pot si mal
€'iMn6LLE. (Dant. Inf. 12.)
Dicendo che quello che dovea
rft/ender/eL'oFFENDEVA. (Fav.
Esop. 67.)
Sc egli sapesse lavordr V6rtot
io mi credo, che noi N'AVREMMO
buon servigio. (Bocc. g. 3. n.
1.)
JVe tu IL CONSENTI, Amor6.
(Tass. Ger. 2. 15.)
Galeoltofu il libra, e CHI LO
SCRISSE. (Dant. Inf. 5.)
I'o ho amdto, ed dmo GuiscAr-
do, e quanta viverd L'AMERO.
(Bocc. g. 4. n. 1.)
GLI ASPETTAVA. (BOCC. g.
3. n. 7.)
I'o MI SONO un povero pelle-
grmo. (Bocc. Filoc. 1. 5.)
I'o non so, SE TU T'HAI POSTO
MENTE, come noi sidmo tenute
strttte. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 1.)
Con tuo ddnno ti ricorderdi,
SEMPKE CHE TU CI VIVERAI, del
ncme mio. (Bocc. g. 6. n.,4.)
Anddte, goccioloni ; vdi non
sap6te cid CHE voi vi D!TE.
(Bocc. g. 6. n. 6.)
DEL PALAGIO s'usci, e fug-
gissi a cdsa. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 8.)
La ddnna se ne venne, e DEL
BUON UOMO domandd, CHE NE
FOSSI. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 2.)
And in the eternal [life]
thus miserably thou suckest us
Saying that he who ought to
have defended them, offended
them.
If he knew how to cultivate
the garden, I believe that we
should have from him good
service.
Nor thou dost consent to it,
O Love.
The book, and he who wrote
it, were [to us] Galeottoi
• I have loved, and love GUIS-
cardo, and will love him ai
long as I live.
He expected them.
I am a poor pilgrim.
I know not, whether thou
hast minded, how close we are
kept.
To thy sorrow thou wilt re-
member my name, as long as
thou livest.
Go away, fools ; you do not
know what you say.
He went out the palace,
and fled to his house.
The woman came, and asked
what had become of the good
man.
When the pronouns mt, ti, gli, ne or ci, vi, .si, are
immediately followed by the pronouns lo, la, gti, U, le,
ne, they are generally united and form a single word; as,
mi lo, MELO, him or it to me ; ci li, CELT, them to us ;
'ti la, TELA. her or it to thee ; vi gli, VEGLI, them to you.
10*
114 ANALOGS
Union of the Pronouns m, w, GLI, NE or ci, ri, si,
with the Pronouns LO, LA, GLI, LI, NE.
MI, to me y
mi lo, (inviate) MELO,* (send) him or it to me j
mi la, (mostrate) MELA, (show) her or it to me ?
m* #/*» ) C ,
mi /t, | (prestate) < MELI, > (7enrf) them to me ;
mi le, ) C MELE, 3
T (give) to me of it, or t<x
mi ne, (date) MENE? < me of them ; some of it,
( [or some of them,
TI, to thee ;
it lo, TELO* (invio), (I send) him or it to thee ;
ti Ja, TELA (mostro), (I show) her or it to thee ;
ti gli, TEGLI
ti li,
TELI > (presto), (I lend) them to thee ;
ti It, TELE )
GLI, to him or her ;
K fo, OLIELO (invia), J ^ sends) him ^
GLI^LA (mostra), | ^Ae slww
gK It, OLIELI ) /n-i-t,-, 5 ^e lends) them to him or
glile, OL,6LE ^Prt ^ [her;
f (he gives) to him or her of
7. 5GLIENE?Mi\ ) it, or to him or her of them;
**> \ — L^NE J ^A)» S _to her of it, or to her of
[them ; &c.
* Some writers use these pronouns, with exception of glielo^ &c., separate ;—
UK JLO 8E LO. NE LO OT CE LO, &e.
CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS. 115
NE or ci, to us 5
(mostrate) < (show) her or it to us ;
ne gli, ^ / NEGLI,
or ci glij I I or CEGLI,
or lift, / (P«*t*te) <^CELI, / (knd ' them to U8 '
ne le V / NELE,
or ci fe, / \ or CELE,
(date\ CENE J (8im) to us of i4' or to u*
tnc' NJE) ^ J [ofthem;&c.
vi, to you ;
vi lo, VELO (inviamo), (we send) him or it to you ;
vi Za, VELA (mostriamo), (we show) her or it to you ;
vi gli, VEGLI i
vi ft, VELI > (prestiamo), (we lend) them to you ;
vi /e, VELE )
^ne,, v^ (d^o), s^^r^Tr^Vc:
si, to one's self;
Vi lo, SELO (inviano), J ^% ^rf; him or it to
^ [themselves ;
M ia, SELA (mostrano), J ^e^ Mo^ r}!er or * to
^ [themselves ;
si gli, SEGLI ) r ,., , ,, .,
W /7 m?r T V rnv^^tann^ 5 I ^C3/ '€n«/ them to them-
S£ SLE S < [">«»!
C ^/iey g^vcj to themselves
sine, SENE (danno), < of it, or to themselves of
< [them; &c.
MeJo9 mo, glielo, nelo or celo, veto, selo, &c.,
before a verb beginning with a consonant, except z, and
^ followed by another consonant 9 often drop the o ;
116 ANALOGY.
and before a verb beginning with a vowel, drop the o
and take an apostrophe in its stead ; as",
MEL visse, he told it to me ; *>
TEL Trarrbj I will draw it for you ;
- non GLIEL ceZat, I did not conceal it from him ;
GLIEL' \ptrsi, I revealed it to him ;
CEL' Avetefatta, you have deceived us ;
SEN' vntrb, she entered.
When the pronouns mi, ti, ct, vi, gli, U> &c., are
preceded by the adverb ecco, c behold', they form with
this a single word ; as,
^ccomi, behold me ;
Decoct, behold us ;
cccoZc, behold them.
When the pronoun lo is preceded by the adverb non,
'no, not', it is, more elegantly, changed into il and joined
with the adverb in a single word ; as,
non t7, NOL vide, she does not see him ;
non il, NOL ntgo, I do not deny it.
EXAMPLES.
Tu dV (Z«/drMELO vedere ne' Thou sayest, that thou wilt
mm. (Bocc. g. 6. n. 4.) make rne see it amongst the
living.
MEL BISBE il padre mio, ch'io My father told me, that
mi guarddssi — Di per gid J, should take care never to
mdi nella Mcssenia il piede. set my foot in Messenia.
(MafivMer. 3. 4.)
Per vederfdre il tomo a qu& To see those v maccaroni
moGcherdni, e fcfrMENE una sa- falling down, and give myself
tolla. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 3.) a bellyful.
Sznza alcun maestro w TEL -Without any master, I will
TRARRO ottimamentc. (Bocc. draw it for you very well,
g. 7. n. 9.)
I'o non mene maravzglio, nl I do not wonder at it, nor do
TENE so ripigliare. (Bocc. g. I know how to reprove you for
3. n. 3.) it,
CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS.
117
Ifo ch'era d'ubbidir disideroso
— NoN GLIEL CELAI ma tllttO
GLIEL' APERSI. (Dant. Inf.
10.)
Gli amici noi albidmo quali
CEGLI eleggidmo. (Bocc. g.
La ddnna udendo questo, e
dopo molte riconfermazidni
/(i^eLENE dal Zeppa, credendolot
disse. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 8.)
Vedindo I'uomo la semplicitd
del fanciullo GLIENE vennc
pietd. (Matt. Vill. 10. 30.)
V6i CEL' AVETE FATTA.
(Bocc. g. 8. n. 9.)
Qudnte CENE vedete voi, It
eui bellezze si6n fdtte cdme It
mie? (Bocc. g. 4. n. 2.)
C6me questo aweniito mi sia^
iritvemente VEL faro chidro.
(Bocc. g. 10. n. 4.)
Mi place di /arvENE piu
chidre con una piccola novelUtta.
(Bocc. g. 1. n. 3.)
In processo di tempo SB LB
riprese. (Bocc. g. 7. n. 3.)
- SEN' ENTRO nella cdsa del
pover uomo. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 3.)
Lo scalar e, accostdtosi alVu-
sciOjdisse: " E^CCOMI qui, ma-
ddnna." (Bocc. g. 8. n. 7.)
E'CCOLE, die ella medesima
piang&ndo meV ha riportdte.
(Bocc. g. 3. n. 3.)
E'lla o lo spr6zza, o NOL VEDE,
o nons'avvede. (Tass. Ger. 2.
16.)
Ifo NOL posso negdr, e NOL
NEGO. (Petr. s. 202.)
I, who was desirous of obey-
ing, did not conceal it, but re-
vealed to him all.
*. We have such friends as we
choose them for us.
The lady hearing this, and
after many confirmations of it
made to her by Zeppa, believ-
ing it, said .
The man seeing the sim-
plicity of the boy, took pity up-
on him.
You have deceived us.
How many of them do you
see, .whose beauties are such
as mine ?
How this happened to me,
I will explain to you briefly.
It pleases me to make you
more conscious of it, with a
small tale.
In the progress of time he
took them back.
She entered in the house of
the poor man.
The scholar, coming to the
door, said : " Behold me here;
madam."
Behold them, which she her-
self weeping has brought back
to me.
She either despises him, or
does not see him, or does not
understand.
I cannot deny it, and do not
deny it.
118 ANALOGY.
EXERCISE IX.
But what wishest thou that I should say to her
Ma che vudi che dicaz 1
for you, I if it happens that I should speak
da tiia pdrte, \ se avvidne che favdlli*
to her? They will rob us, and perhaps will take
ruberdnnd* *, e% forsc4 torrdnno^
(to us) even I our I life. I will lodge you
5 dncke la \ vita. albcrgherd% 1
willingly, as I can. The youth told him every
volentieri, come potro. giovanttto disse2 J 6gni
thing. I will pardon him willingly, and pardon
c6sa. — perdoneroS 2 Voleniieril, e4 perdono7
him now. He gave to him his I benediction,
6 ,5ra5. _ Di^
lasua I bcnedizione,
holding him for a very holy man. How 1 doei
tentndo^, sdnto uomo. Che \
it appear | to thee? Have I well kept
1 ? ho'2 3 ben* serbdta5
my
la*
promise to you ? My brother writes to me, that
promessa* 1 ? mio3 frattllo* Scrive1^, *, che
without any fail, I I should send
sinza alcun fdllo, \ dbbia manddti*
gold florins ; I otherwise 1 I his
to him one thousand
<Wro2 Jiorino1 ; | se non? \ \ la"7
head will be cut oft*
testa8 sard6 taglidta*
(to him.) I have not deceived you I to I deprive
4. Ao3 non1 inganndta4 \ per \ tor^
you of I your property. I Certainly although thou
il vdstro. Certo quantunque
affirmest it, I I do not believe I that thou believes!
aftrmi* \. 3 | non crtdo4 \ che5 e creda*
it. Having turned himself to I his I wife, he
7. Volto I la I moglie, —
asked her if she had had them. If thou I dost
domando2 1 se3 avesse6 avuti4 5. Se \ non
not do it, I thou wilt repent thyself of it so many
fdi2 lo^y \ pentcrdi6 tdnte
times, that thou 1 wilt. die I of it.
volt*, cA« I vorrdi morire2 \ l.
RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 119
He granted it to him freely. I want to go
concedetteS Liber amente^. — Vdglio and arc
and I tell him, that he j should go away: Leave
a j dir^ 1, che \ sene vdda. Ldscia^,
me, I beg it of thee (thee of it). That which he
, prego* — — — 1 Quello che
afterwards said to me, I do not dare to tell it to
pot disse% 1 , non oso dir^,
you, if first you do not pardon me. The song
, se prima non per donate* 1. 2 canzone3
being finished, the master said : " What dost thou think
Finital, maestro disse : " Che — — —
of it (does it apvear to thee of it)?" You did not
— — — — pdre'2 non
believe it, when I told it to you. Having kept
eredevdte2 1, qudndo* dissi* 4 . Avendo^, serbdti2
them full a year I to I return them to him, I gave
gli1 len3 4 dnnob \ per6 \ render7^, 9 8^, 10 diedil~
them away for the love of God. BehoM me ; what
11 amdr Dw. ; che
I do you want I of I me ? Behold one (of them),
volete I da j f 1^ una3 z
behold another of them,
'x^ uridltra3 2.
RELATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE
P R O N O U N S .
Relative Pronouns.
Singular and Plural.
Chi, m. & f. who, he or she that, they that ;
$;£:&?:} wh°' which' that'
Singular. Plural.
quale, m. & f. who, which, qudli, m. & f
Chi refers to persons only ; che, ctii, qudte, both to
persons and things*
1QO ANALOGY.
Che is chiefly used in the subjective, and citi in all
other relations, but the subjective; chi, quale, are used
in all their relations ; as,
CHI qfftndc, 6dia, he that offends, hates ;
A cm non si mttte navi* to him who does not set him-
gdndo, self navigating;
qutlla, CHE io ctrco, she, whom I seek ;
gli occhi DI CHE io parldi, the eyes of which I spoke ;
A cui si amnidglia, to which she unites herself;
DACUI fosse. V ingiuria ri- from whom the offence was
ceviua, received ;
IL QUALE tra piactvole who was an agreeable young
giovane, man ;
pr6sso ALLA QUALE ska ri- near which should be situated
posto un diletUvole piano, a delightful plain ;
uno BE' quALi ira chiama- one of whom was called Pan>
to PanfUo, philus ;
i nomi DELLE QUALI roc- whose names I would relate*
conterti,
Cui is generally used instead of chi, che, qudle ; as,
non guarddndo cui [or CHI] not minding whom she jeered;
motteggidsse,
colti, cui [or CHE] tgli amd- she, whom he loved ;
va,
colui, cui [or IL QUALE] he, whom I killed,
io uccisi,
Che is sometimes used instead of qudle ; as,
un cavalitr, CHE [or IL QUA- a knight, whom Italy honors ;
LE] Italia onorat
la misiria in CHE [or NEL- the misfortune into which she
LA QU^LE] tra venuta, had fallen :
Sometimes, it is used with the article il, in the signifi-
cation of la qudl cosa, * which thing' ; as,
JL CHE [or LA QUAL COSA] which thing displeased them ;
dispidcque loro,
BEL CHE avvedutosi, which thing he having ob-
served.
RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 121
Sometimes it is used in the signification of cosa,
* thing' ; che cosa, c what thing' ; as,
un bel CHE [or una bella a fine thing j
cos A],
sinza saper CHE for CHE without knowing what thing
COSA] sperare, to hope :
And sometimes it is equivalent to the English pronoun
€ what' only; as,
CHE doldre io sento, what pain I feel ;
CHE dance tu di', what stories thou tellest
Che before a vowel drops the er and takes an
apostrophe in its stead ; as,
CHJ Eo-Zi e usdto, which is wont ;
di CH' io parlai, of which I spoke.
Quale is sometimes used instead of chi; as,
f6lle e QUALE [or CHI] crtde, foolish is he who helieves ;
QUALE [or CHI] piu possMe, he who [possesses] has more :
And sometimes it is equivalent to the English pronoun
* what ' ; as,
/o'sse la cagidne, what the cause was ;
quALE fosse V hnimo di lei, what her mind was.
Qudle, unless followed by z, or s followed by another
consonant, in the singular drops the e; and in the plu-
ral makes quai, and qua'? as,
QU^L amore, what love ;
la quAL cosa, which thing ;
t qu^i vizj, which vices ;
dlle quA* lettere, to which letters.
To avoid the ambiguity, which would arise in Ital-
ian, from the inversion of the different words of a sen-
U
122 ANALOGY.
tence, when the pronouns che, quale, refer lo the
object of the proposition, they are changed for the
pronoun cui. Thus the phrase, { the city which the
wood conceals', if * city' is the subject of the proposi-
tion, is rendered la cittd CHE or la Q.UA'LE il bosco ascon-
de, < the city which conceals the wood' ; but if c city' is
the object of the proposition, then it is rendered la citta
cui ilbosco ascbnde, ' the city which the wood conceals' ;
as,
Vuomo CHE Dio non teme, the man who does not fear
God;
f udmo cui sdnno piglia, a man who is seized by sleep.
Instead of di cui, del or dilla quale, dii or delle
quali ; da cui, ddl qudh ; con cui, col quale ; per cui,
per lo quale, &c., we often find used the adverb onrfe,
which then assumes the nature of a relative pronoun ; as,
quei sospiri ONDE [or DI those sighs with which I
cui] io nudriva il cuore, nourished my heart ;
nilla prigione ONDE [or in the prison from which she
DALLA QU^LE] k. sciolta, is released ;
ogni Idccio ONDK [or COL every tie with which my
QUALE] U mio core & heart is bound ;
awinto,
quillo usciuolo ONDE [or that little door through which
PER LO QUALE] 6ra en- he had entered.
trdto,
Before a vowel, onde drops the e, and takes an apos-
trophe instead of it ; as,
OND' io, of which I ;
OND' Era, through which he [was] had.
Chi, che, cui, are varied with the prepositions only ;
quale is varied both with the prepositions and the article
il or la, c the', according to the gender of the object it
refers to.
RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
123
The prepositions di} «, are often elegantly suppressed before
.';;; as,
in cdsa [di] cui era mortot
v6i [a] cui fortuna ha posto
in mdno ilfrdno,
in whose house he had died ;
you, into whose hands fortune
has put the reins.
EXAMPLES.
CHI Ol'FEIfDE, ODIA, 6 UOU
dimcntica. (Dav. Vit. Agr.)
Qucl piacere, CH' EGLI E
USATO di dare A CHI trdppo SON
si METTE n& suoi pclagki NA-
VIGANDO. (Bocc. Proem.)
QUELLA, CH'iO CERCO C 71071
ritrdvo in terra. (Petr. s. 34.)
GLI OCCHI DI CH'IO PARLAI
si caldamente. (Fetr. s. 251.)
Moltisongli animdli A ct7i
si AMMCJGLIA. (Dant. Inf. 1.)
Nella mente ritorndndosi chi
egli era, e qudl FOSSE L'lNGitJ-
RIA mcEVtJTA, c perche, e DA
cuj. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 7.)
Dioneo, IL auALE, ollre ad
ognidltro, ERA PIACEVOL GIO-
VANE. (Bocc. Introd.)
U'Tia montdgna dspra ederta,
PRESSO ALLA dUALE UN BEL-
j.issiMO pidno e dilettevolc sia
rip6sto. (Bocc. Introd.)
DE' Q.UALI 1JNO ERA chl(L~ *
mito PAMFILO. (Bocc. Introd.)
Sette gidvani donnc, i NOMI
DELLE auALi io in prdpria fdr-
maracconterei. (Bocc. Introd.)
NON GUARDANDO CUI MOT-
TEGGIASSE, credetido vlncere fu
-cinta.. (Bocc. g. 1. n. 10.)
COLEI maritdndOj cui EGLI
AMAVA. (Bocc. g. 10. n. 6.)
He that offends, hates, and
does not forget.
That pleasure, which it is
wont to give to him who does
not set himself navigating
too much through its seas.
She whom I seek, and do
not find on earth.
The eyes of which I spoke so
warmly.
Many are the animals to
which she unites herself.
Revolving in his mind, who
he was, and what the offence
received was, and why, and
;from whom received.
Dioneo, who was agreeable
beyond every other young
A mountain rough and steep,
near which is situated a very
beautiful and delightful plain.
One of whom was called
Pamphilus.
Seven young women, whose
names I Would relate in their
true form.
Not minding whom she
jeered, believing to conquer
she was conquered.
Marrying her, whom he
loved.
124
ANALOGY.
COLIJI, ctfi fo cccftfi.
(Bocc. g. 10. n. 8.)
S6pra zl mdnte Tarpeo, can-
zcn, vcdrdi — UN CAVALIER, CH'
ITALIA tutta ON6RA. (PetT. C.
6.)
Diana, che conosceva LA MI-
SERIA IN CHE Biancafidre ERA
VEstjTA, temper 6 le sue ire con
giiisto freno. (Bocc. Filoc. 1.
Avevan sentito perck£ presa
la Ninetta fdsse ; IL CHE fdrte
DispiAcoruE LORG. (Bocc. g. 4.
n.3.)
DEL CHE AWEDtfrosi Mar-
celto^ disse. (Dav. Stor. ). 4.)
Mi pareva UN BEL CHE Ves-
sernefudra. (Bern. rim. 1. 74.)
La gidvane prese Iu6no augic-
rio d' aver questo n6me udito,
e comincid a SPERAR SENZA
SAFER CHE. (BoCC. g. 5. D. 2.)
Dio il sa, CHE DOLC^RE to
SENTO. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 10.)
Po non so che rfndreuccio, ne
CHE CIANCE son quclle, che TU
Di*. (Bocc. g. 7. n. 5.)
F6LLE E QUAL CREDE, eke
per sudi consigli mudver possa
Vdrdine del citlo. (Dittam.)
QDAL PIU genie POSSIEDE —
Colui e piu da1 su6i nemici av-
v6Uo. (Petr. c\ 29.)
Laonde fdtto ckiamdre il
Siniscalco, e domanddto auiL
FOSSE del romlre LA CAGIONE.
(Bocc. g. 6. Proem.)
La donna, conoscendo CIUAL
r6ssE L'ANIMO pi LEI, lasciS
stare le parole. (Bocc. g. 2. n,
8.)
QUAL AMORE avrcble i sospiri
di Titofdtti a Gisippo nel cudr
serUire.se non costei? (Bocc.
g. 10. n. 6.)
He, whom I killed.
On the Tarpeian mountain,
O Song, thou wilt see a knight^
whom all Italy honors.
Diana, who knew the mis-
fortune into which Biancafiore
had fallen, moderated her anger
with a proper restraint.
They had heard why Ninetta
had been taken ; which thing
displeased them much.
Which thing Marcellus har-
ing observed, said.
Tt appeared to me a fine thin/^
to be out of ft.
The girl took it as a good
omen, to have heard this name,
and began to hope, without
knowing what [thing] to hope.
God knows [it] what pain I
feeL
1 know not what Andreuccio,
or what stories these are which
thou tellest.
Foolish is he who believes,
that be can change the decrees
of heaven by his deliberations.
He who has. more subjects,
is surrounded by more enemies.
Having, therefore, caused the
senechal to be called, and hav-
ing asked what the cause of the
noise was.
The woman, knowing what
her mind was, abandoned the
conversation.
What love could the sighs
of Titus, have caused Gisippus
to feel in his heart, if not that of
her.
RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
125
LA Q.UAL c6sA veggtndo An-
dreucdo. (Boec. g. 2. n. 5.)
vizj procedono da
<;uesta xclenosa radicc. (Aram.
Ant. 317.)
A'LLE Q.UA' LETTEKE io mi
rimctto. (Casa. lett, 18.)
Che atttnde ciascun UOM CHE
Dfo VON TEME. (Dant. Inf. 3,)
E cdddi c6me L' UOM cui
SONKO riGLiA. (Dant. Inf. 3.)
V6i che ascoltdte in rime
xpdrse il sudno — Di aujsi sospf-
RI OND* fo NUDRIVA IL CUORE.
(Petr. e. 1.)
NELLA BELLA PRIGIONE OND'
OR A E SCIOLTA — P6cO CTtt Stdtd
ancor V alma gentile. (Petr. e.
44.)
/' agglo in 6dio la spente, e i
deliri — Ed OGNI LACCJO ONDE'L
Mfo COR E AYVINTO. (Petr, S~
75.)
PER auELLo USCIUOLO, OND'
KRA ENTRATO, il miSC, fufoi.
(Bocc. g. 2. n. 2.)
It budn uomo, is CASA cui
MORTO ^RA, disse. (Bocc. g. 4.
n. 8.)
V6l, CIJI FORTUNA IJA POSTO
is MA NO it frtno — Dellc belle
conirdde. (Petr. c, 29.)
thing Andreuccie
Which
seeing.
Which vices proceed from
this venomous root.
To which letters I refer.
Which waits for every maa
who does not fear God.
And I dropped down, like a
man who is seized by sleep.
You who hear in scattered
rhymes the sound of those sighs
with which I nourished my
heart.
The gentle soul had been but
a short time in the beautiful
prison from which she is now
released.
I hold in hatred the hope,
the ravings, and every tie with
which my heart is bound.
She put him out of that little
door through which he had
entered.
good man, in whose
house he had died, said.
You, into whose hands for
tune has put the reins of the
beautiful countries.
EXERCISE X.
He determined i to find I
Pensd I di voler trovdre \
This wretched little man who is
Qussto cattivo — e'2
who had done this.
avcssc- fat to* questo1.
here, I saw there
(that
was) sleeping,
si dormiva,
whilst
mentrc
I
saw
vidi*
was dividing
divideva3
11*
the
i
]*26 ANALOGY.
things stolen with him whom afterwards I killed. Render
furto* colui -- ucdsi.
me at least the clothes I (of mine) \ (the) which I have
almeno pdnno \ miei ko3
left there. (The) Fiammetta, whose hair* was curly,
lascidiP ri2. , capello erano crespv,
long, and of the color of gold. This is the ring,
lungo, e — — 6ro. Qucsto £ anello,
which she already carried I to I France the first
gia? porto* in \ Frdncia prim*)
time that she made that journey I with her
rdlta fece quel cammino col
brother. Neither I, nor the one from whom J
fratello. , ne colui
received her, ever knew I whose daughter
r.hhi? * -n.nn sni;f>.rm,rma mAi? \ * •fi.fr1.itntl.aQ
she
si
was. I She, who knew well, that which she had
fdsse.* I , sapira bene, do
to do. Having turned herself to Pamphilus, who
a1 /arcs. - Rivolta — - Panfilo,
sat I at I her right, pleasantly said to him. The
sedeva* \ dlla1 \ sua* de strap piacevolmente* dissc? *. 3
first (of whom), to whom the queen gave
primo* i2567 rcgina?
such a
tal9
charge, was Philostratus, who began in this way.
cdn"c010, fu FildstratOj - comincio questo maniera.
Are you that woman, who must come to speak
Siete quello ddnna, dovetcz venire3 c4 parldre$
to him ? The young man is the son of Landolphus
1 1 gldvane e — figlMlo Landdlfo
of Procida, by (the) whose means thou art a king;
, per - dpera* se' — re;
the young woman is the daughter of Marin Bulgaro,
gidxane e — figliudla
(the) whose power causes that thou art not now sent
potenza fa 23 ^a& non* dggi* scac-
away I from I Tschia.
riti/fl \ di I
* Hair, in the plural number.
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 127
The woman, hearing him speak whom she held
donna j udcndo costiii parldre tencva
for a dumb man, was quite amazed.
tiitta stordl.
— mutolo
She went
sen' vsci9
out I of the church, hy that way through which he had
9 chiesa,™ Pen quello2 via* 4 5 — era9
come. Now, determine I without any other delay,
venuto.'* Or,
ti consiglia \ scnza dltro indugia,
and j take I that man whom you wish most. To
t J ti piglia* j - - * - ruck'3 piu.*
(the) which, I could not resist, for any thing in
i7 nonQ resistere* • ~ cdsa2
the world. By the hundred steps by which
3 mdndo.4 Per scaglidne per
j one ascends j to the Tarpeian rock. At I (the)
j si sdle I Tarpeo - . Di
which thing, all Uie others frightened began to
cosa. tutto dltro spavcntdti tomincidrcno^ a'
flee. He saw the lady, who loves my brother.
fuggire* vide ddnna, dma mw fratelh.
Behold the young man, whom his daughter loves,
E'cco gidvane, sua? figtia3 dma.'
'Interrogative Pronouns.
The relative pronouns chi, cAe, and quale or quali,
when used to ask a question, become interrogative
pronouns.
Chi always denotes a person : che denotes things, or
the quality of persons and things : qudle or quali denotes
both persons and things, or the qualities of persons and
things ; as,
CHI siete voi ? Who are you ?
CHI £ quESTi ? Who is this one ?
CHE [cosa] hdif What ails thee ?
CHE HOMO £ ? What man is he ?
CHE ORAZi6NE ? What prayer ?
ANALOGY.
DIAVOLO? What demon?
quAL PAURA ? What fear ?
QU^LI LEGGI ? What conditions ?
Although both c//<: and qudle denote things or the qualities of
persons and things, it is nevertheless to be observed, that, when
we inquire of an object without reference to its intrinsic merit,
qudle is generally used ; but if our inquiry refers to the intrinsic
ir.'-Tit of the object, we use chc in preference ; a?,
tuAL fu la ca.gi.6nf. ? What was the cause '".
fiUAL ducefia d6gno f What leader would be worthy ?
<JHE gentc c ? What [kind of] people are they ?
CHE peecdti kdifdtto ? What [kind of] sins hast thou com •
[mitted ?
Cut is often used as an interrogative pronoun, in-
stead of chi ; as,
Con cui [or con chi] sti With whom hast thou been?
stato?
are used also
The pronouns cAe, and qudle or quali,
in exclamations ; as,
CHE veduta amdra ! What a sad sight !
QUAL pdlvcre! What dust!
QUA i martin ! What torments !
Interrogative pronouns are varied with {he prepositions
only.
K X. A M P I. K S .
De' quai ne io, ne '/ duca mlo Of wliom neither I nor my
eaccorst — Se non qwindo gri- leader was aware until they
ddr : " cm SIETJE v6i ?" (Dant. exclaimed : " Who are you ?"
Inf. 25.)
CHI E auEHTi ckt coslslarnu- Who is this that sneezes
tisct? (Bocc. g. 5. n. 10.) thus?
CHE HAI TU, RAcca f (Dant. \Vhat ails thee, Bocca ?
Inf. 32.)
CBK UOMO vcostui? (Bocc. What man is this ?
£. 1. n. 1.)
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.
£ tdi CHK ORA7IONE \lSOte
di dire, eammindndo ? (Bocc.)
And what prayer are you
wont to say, when you travel ?
Qu AL DIAVOL ti toccaf (Dant.) What demon touches thee ?
QVALI LKGGI? qudli mindcce?
Q.UA.I. PAURA? (BOCC. g. 10.
n. d)
Ma ditemi, auAi. FD LA CA-
aioNR per la qualc v6i con lui vi
turbdstc? (Bocc. g. 3. n. 7.)
QUAL DtfcE FiA DEGNO di
ttro? (Tass. Ger. I. 52.)
CHE GENTK ^, che par nel
du-Sl si vint a ? (Dant. Inf. 3.)
CHE PECCATI HAI tU FATTO ?
(Bocc.)
CON CtJI ti CftlKDl tU JESSKRK
STATO ? (Bocc. g. 3. n. 6.)
Ah! CHE VEDtJTA AMARA «
(Tass. Ger. 19. 105.)
r^ per Varia stesa — POL-
VERB *' veggio ! (Tass. Ger.
3. JO.)
QuAi MAKTITU ! (Crusca.)
E se nonpidngi, DI che pidn-
ger sudli f (Danl. Inf. 33.)
What conditions ? what
threats ? what fear ?
But tell me, what wa§ the
cause that you were displeased
with him ?
What leader will be worthy
of them?
What people are these, who
seem so overcome with woe 7
What sins hast thou com-
mitted ?
With whom dost thou think
to have been ?
Ah! what a bitter and sad
sight !
What dust do I see spread
through the air !
What torments 1
And if at this, thou dost not
weep, at what art thou accus-
tomed to weep !
EXERCISE XI,
Who knocks below ? What fear have you ? Who
picchia laggiuf paura avete f
chastised you thus? What do we do? What do
tastigo* vi1 cosi? — * faccidmo1 f
we wait for? What ilo we dream of? What sleep,
— attendidmo? sognidmof s6nno1
or what lethargy has lulled thus I thy I virtue? What
o letdrgo ha sopite? cosi1 | la tua | virtu f
chains, what prison, what crosses I would be sufficient?!
catena^ cdrccre, cr6ce | ei lasterebbero ?
ISO
ANALOGY.
Who does not know that without money* (the) idleness
— non sa senza dendro poltroneria
c&nnot subsist ? " Woman, what dost thou do ?" to
non pud durdrc ? " D6nnat — tu? fa??*'
TV horn the woman replied! '< Dost thou not see it?"
ddnna rispcse : " - tu4 JVYm1^ vedi3 lo* ? "
What is this secret ? And
e cotes to secrcto f E
what is this supposition ?
£ questa supposizionc ?
What thing is that which you have made me eat ?
1 mangidre f
cosa e questo
— avete% fdtto%
" Sir,
The
*
I must
a me convene
a great fault."
gran faJ-lo.'*
What I wilt thou pay
2 [ pagkcrdi tu*
thou do me ? if
i?
ask
domanddr^
your
xi
pardon
perddno
for
di
me
3
thou
live
asked
master said : " And 1 for what ?"
maestro3 Disse :l "E \ di .*''
for? I What coulnst
Di?1 I potre.t?
doest so, what j shall v. e
fdi cost, * I vivrtm
I on ? I Alas ! and in what manner ? The admiral
I di1 ? j Oimc ,' e modo f 4 ammirdglio^
him then, what thing had brought him to
avesse9 condotto™
that.
Dost thou know i
2 Condsci1
ho
those
coldr
are,
sieno.
(the) whom
thou wishest (that)
VlXJl
the negative.
n6.
should be burnt ? The king replied I in
s'drdano? re rispose \ di
What sins hast thou committed, that thou
pcccdto kdi . fdttot
wishest to confess thyself. In
rude"3 confessdre? ti\ Di
two young men offended these? But
gidvanc6 offtso* 19 Ma
human faults, and usual faults.
wn&na* cdlpu,* i, usdta-
what
have
h&nno1
what?
these
questo*
they
are
son
Oh, what a bitter
O, — amdruz
What splendid spoils!
supirba spdglia !
is kindled for thee !
(*x£a3 l 2/
sight !
veditta /i
What glorious triumphs !
gloridso2 tridnfo1 i
O, my son,
O, mio2 figliudfi,
what fllame
fidmma
•j. in t{;p plaral number.
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 131
CHAPTER VII.
ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS.
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
THE Italian possessive pronouns are the following :
Singular. Plural.
Mio, m. mia, f. my or mine, miei m. mie, f,
tiio, m. tua} f. thy or thine, tufa,* m. die, f.
suo, m. sua, f. his, her, hers or its, su6i,* m. stie, f.
ndstro, m. ndstra, f. our or ours, nostri, m. ntstre, f.
vostro, m. rostra, f. your or yours, vostri, m. vostre, f.
*SS&.J their ^theirs, {g^ib*' ''
i7 M!O Ugno, my bark ;
la TUAjiglioletta, thy little daughter ;
i suoi avversdrj, their adversaries ;
/e NOSTRE pompe, our pomps ;
#LORO anddre, their deportment;
fe LORO parole, their words.
3/io, two, swo, nostroy vostro, and £dro, are sometimes used with
the article substantively, — 17 mzo, #*iio, il suo, &c.; and then the
word acere, { property', is understood ; and they are equivalent
to 'my property', ' thy property', &c. ; as,
mdngi DEL STJO, let him eat of his own [proper-
TiOTi mangerd DEL NOSTRO, he will not eat of ours, [ty ;]
* Poets for the sake of Rhyme, often use nti?', vwi, instead of no», « we*; »<Jt,
4 you'. This license is extended also to tuoi, sudi, which in poetry are often
changed into tui, * thy or thine j sui, < his, her, hers or its j their or theirs' ; aat
" Di rado—Incontra.," mi rispose^ " Seldom happens," replied he to
" che, di xv'i—Fdccia >l cammino atain, me, " that any one of us goes through
per qudl to vddo.— Ter1 t, ch* dltra the way, which I am going. But I
jSota quagffid Fv'it—Congiurdto da was there below once before, conjured
quiMa Eriton cruda,— Che richiamdva by that crue I Erich tho, who recalled th t
r<Jm&r«a'corptsu'i." (Dant. Inf. 9.) shades to their bodies."
Tosto ch' alpU d6lla sua ttmba FU'J, Aa noon as 1 reached the foot of hi*
— Guarddmmi un pdco, e pdi quasi tomb, he looked at me awhile, and
sdegnoso—Mi dimandd : " Chi fur li then, a'most with contempt, he ask««l
maggidr TUI." (Dant. Inf. 10.) me :•'* Who were thy ancestors."
JVVSi udiremo e parlertmo « vu'i. We will bear and f peak to you.
(Dant. Inf. 5.)
132 ANALOGY,
Miei, tudi, nostri, and Idro, are also used substantively, — t miei
i tuoi, i suoi, indstri, i Idro; and then the word partnti, * relations' ;
amid, * friends' ; compagni, 'companions'; familiarly * domes-
tics'; solddti, 'soldiers'; or scgudci, 'followers', is understood^
and they are equivalent to 'my relations', ' thy friends', s his com-
panions', ' our domestics', ' your soldiers', l their followers' ; as,
incdntra A' MJ£I, against my relations;
pregdto DA' suoi, requested by his friends.
Possessive pronouns are sometimes expressed bj the
conjunctive pronouns mi, ti,gli, le, &c., and we say * ME'/O
prendo in braccia, instead of loprendo nclle MI'E braccia,
' I take him in my arms' ; LE sigitto ai piedi, instead of
si gitto ai suoi piedi, ' he threw himself at her feet' ;
fac. ; as,
MI si strugge il cudre, my heart melts;
GLI si gittb at collo, she threw herself on his neck $
si lascib casc&r Vumino, he let his hook fall.
To avoid the ambiguity which in many instances
would arise, in Italian, from the indiscriminate use of
the possessive pronouns suo, sue, suoi, sue; when
these pronouns do not relate to the subject of the prop-
osition, they are changed for the personal pronouns di
/lit, di lei, eof him,' ' of her*. Thus in the phrase
* John loves Peter and his children,' if the pronoun his
relates to John, the subject of the proposition, it is ex-
pressed byi suoi ; as, Giovanni ama Pietro e i suoi^/Z-
fliuoli, ' John loves Peter and his [John's] children' ;
ut if Ax* does not relate to John, but to Peter, the 06-
ject of the proposition, then it is expressed by i di lui;
as, Giovanni dma Pietro* i DI IAII jigliuoli, * John loves
Peter and his [Peter's] childrenr :
mandb ad uccidere siio he sent to kill his father [the
pddre, father of him who sent] ;
sua sortlla e i ftgli DI her sister and her children [the
L£I, children of her sister].
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
133
The pronouns suo, sua, suoi, sue, are very often expressed by
lui, di tti, even in, cases when no ambiguity would arise ; as,
la ingratitudine DI LTJI, his ingratitude ;
alia cdsa DI LEI, to her house.
Possessive pronouns are generally varied with the
repositions and articles.
EXAMPLES.
Dictro al MIO LEGNO, che can-
ndo vdrca. (Dant. Par. 2.)
Se tu ti cont6nti di lascidre ap-
"esso di me questa TUA FIGLIO-
STTA, w la prenderd volenti6ri.
Jocc. g, 2. n. 8.)
A Hi tribuni pdrve luogo e t6m-
> d'assalire i suoi AVVERSARJ.
jiv. dec. 3.)
Pdssan vostri trionfij e VOSTRE
>MPE. (Petr. cap. 11.)
JVbn uman veramente ma divi-
» — LOR ANDAR era, e LOR sdnte
LROLE. (Petr. Trionf.)
Or MANGI DEL St7O, s'dgli 716 /ICt,
\ DEL JNOSTRO NON MANGERA
fM. (Bocc. g. 1. n. 7.)
PerM qu6lpopolo& si empio--
.contra AJ MIEI in ciascuna sua
%ge. (Dant. Inf. c. 10.)
Vdssene, pregdto DA' suoi, a
kidssi. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 8.)
Nel pensdrlo MI si STRUGGE IL
>RE. (Maff. Mer. 4. 7.)
Piangdndo GLI si GITTO AL
»LLO. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 7.)
Si LASCIO CASCAR L* UNCINO
piedi. (Dant. Inf. 21.)
EgH lo MANDO AD UCC1DERE
ro PADRE. (Class.)
Behind my bark, which singing
cuts its way.
If thou art willing to leave with
me this little daughter of thine, I
will take her with pleasure.
This appeared to the tribunes a
proper place and time to assail their
adversaries.
Your triumphs and your pomps
pass away.
Their deportment and their holy
words truly were not human, but
divine.
Let him eat of his own property,
if he has any, for he will not eat
of ours.
Why is that people so fell against
my kin in all their laws.
>
He goes to Chiassi at the re-
quest of his friends.
In thinking of it my heart melts.
Weeping, she threw herself on
his neck.
He let the hook fall at his feet.
He sent him to kill his father,
[the father of him who sent.]
12
134
ANALOGY.
Mia mddre dma egualmente
SUA SORELLA, E I F1GLI DI LEI.
(Crusca.)
Avendo rigudrdo dlLA INGRA-
TiTUDiNE^n LUI verso mm md-
dre mostrdta. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 5.)
Comincid a ripardrsi memo AL-
LA CASA DI LEI. (BOCC. g. 2. I).
8.)
My mother loves equally her
sister, and her children, [the chil-
dren of her sister.]
Considering his ingratitude
shown towards my mother.
He began to resort near her
house.
EXERCISE XII.
He loved more (the) my life than (the) your
amd piu vita
benevolence. Fearing that he
benevoUnza. Temendo —
should be
non fosse
reprehended,
he kept (the) his love concealed as much as he
— teneva6 3 4 am6re$ nascoso7 — * —
could. Since thou art my friend, I will show it
poteva2 Perche sei amico, insegnerd3 la1
to thee. (The) thy virtue is great, and known
virtu e molto, e conosciuto
every where. I In coming out (from) the church
per tutto. I Uscendo chiesa
he saw this count, and (the) his little children, who
— vide questo conte, e figliuolo,
asked alms. She refused to be familiar with
addomanddvano2 limosina1. rifiutdva — —
him — (the) (his familiarity.)
dimestichezza.
The holy Friar, who had
sdnto Frdte, avda*
confessed him, having asceniled (on) the pulpit,
confessato3 1 salito in sit pergamo
began to preach wonderful things of him, and
comincio3 a20 predicdre21 maravigliosa18 cosa19 l 2 e4
of (the) his life, of (the) his fastings, of (the) his
5 ' vita7, 8 9 digiuno™, " 12
simplicity, and of (the) his innocence. I often observed
semplicita™, e14 15 16 innocenza.11 spesso mirdva
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
135
how much the sun had run of (the) his luminous
qudnto 2 sole3 avesse1 trascorso4 5 6 luminoso*
But what
Ma
shall we say
diremo noi
to those who
coloro
(the) my hunger?
2 3 fame* 1
The
journey.
vidggio7
feel so much pity for
hdnno5 cotdnto6 compassione7 di1
public places of Rome are full of ancient likenesses
pubblico2 luogo1 Roma son pieno antica immdgine
of (the) my ancestors. It is not my intention I to I
maggiore. — e2 Non1 intenzione \ di \
explain
spiegdre
at
al
friendship demand.
amicizia vogliono.
present, that which the laws of (the)
presentej quello legge
attach
did not seek I
non cercdi
any blemish to the honesty, and to the purity
alcuno mdcola onesta, e chiarezza
imporre
of
(the) your blood.
sdngue.
Who could reply to (the) your
saprebbe rispondere
wise words? In (the) happiness they are unhappy,
felicita sono miserot
sdvio parola ?
in (the) riches poor, and in (the) their
ricchezza mendico, e
unfortunate.
sciagurdto.
adventures
ventura
The lady then said to that one: " Come,
donna allora* disse1 2 colui3 : " Vieni,
and
e
ask thy property — (the) (thine). I have not deceived you
damAnda ho3 non1 inganndto* *
domdnda
I to
I per
'ngannato
rob you of your property— (the) (yours). Not only
tor . . Non solamente
hast thou gambled my property— (tfie; (mine), but thou hast
nfhai - giuocdto — -- > ™a - ^ai
also
sopra1
1 his
it
prevented (the) my going. He
astonished ^ I
! impedito ' anddla. Fece maramglidre \
father, and all (the) his relations, and every
padre, e tutti , «
136
ANALOGY.
one else who knew him. Minghino with (the) his com-
cun dltro conosceva? l.
panions concealed himself in the house of a friend
ripose
— casa
of his.
Cimon, who had already descended with
Cimone, era* gia1 disc6so5
(the) his troops,
had determined
avea preso consiglio
flee
fuggire
into 1
some neighbouring" wood.
alcuno vicino2 selva1.
sat
Feigning
7atto sembidnte
not
non2
to
know him,
conoscer^ ,
she
si pose a
at his — (to him at the) feet. I set in
3 piede. posi2 —
my — (to me in the) heart
to I give thee that which
di \ ddr^, quello
thou wentest seeking, and I have given it to thee.
anddvi cercdndo, e - diedi^ 2 ^,l.
Perotto recognised him, and weeping threw himself
riconobbe2 *, e piangendo gitto3 si2
at his — (to him at the) feet, and embraced him, saying :
4 piede, e abbraccid^, llo, dicendo :
(< My father !" Tedaldo sj>eaks with the woman, and
<c miG2 Padre !"1 pdrla donna, e
frees her husband — (the husband of her) from death.
liber a — marito morte.
He sent him to kill his father — (the father of him
mando2 l ad uccidere padre —
who sent). My father loves his brother, and his
padre dma fratello, e —
children — (the children of him — his brother).
figlio — ,
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 137
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
Singular.
Qudsto, m. qudsta, f. this ;
quello, m. quella, f, that ;
cotesto. m. cotestaA. ") ., .
or codUto, m. eoMtta, f. \ that near y°u '
costuij m. he, this man ; eost6i, f. she, this woman.
j in. he, that man ; colei, f. she, that woman.
cotestui, or C he, the or that 7 cotesldi, or C she, the or that wo-
codestuij m. £ man near you. J codestei, f. ( man near you.
Plural.
Qutsti, m. qutste, f. these.
quelli, m. quelle, f. those.
cotdsti. m. coteste. f. ) ,,
orcod<Um. •MtfHl.i ^those near you.
costoro, m. & f. they, these men, these women.
coloro, m. & f. they, those men, those women.
cotestoro, or £ they, the or those men near you,
codestoro, m. & f . ( those women near you.
y 6sta, for ' questp, questa, l this,5 have become obsolete.
Questo, quello, and cotesto or codesto, may be used in
speaking of both persons and things ; cost&i, col&i, and
cotestui or codestui, denote persons only.
Questo and costui are employed to point out an object
near the person speaking ; cotesto or codesto, and cotes-
tui or codestui, to point out an object near the person
spoken to ; and quello and colui, to point out an object
at a distance from both the person speaking and the
person spoken to ; * as,
* From the pronouns questo, quello, and cotesto or codesto, some derive the adverbs
out a place at a distance both from the person speaking and the person spoken to. —
(The rule is correct; but as to the derivation, it appears to us, that the pronoun
questo is derived from the adverb qul and the pronoun 6sto, qu(*)6sto, and the pronoun
quello from the adverb qul and the pronoun ello, qu(i)611o ; rather than that qul w
derived from questo or quello.)
138 ANALOGY.
QUESTO dendro, this money ;
QUELLA [donna,] that lady ;
COTESTI pdnni, those clothes ;
COSTEI* e un sole, this woman is like a sun.
COLTJI che ne invia, that man who sends us.
batlete COTESTORO,* beat those [boys].
This rule is equally observed, when the pronouns
questo, quello, and cotesto or codesto, point out an abstract
substance, or a thing which is in the person speaking,
the person spoken to, or the person spoken of; as,
QUESTI sospiri, these sighs ;
QUELLA allegrtzza, that merriment ;
COTESTE parole^ those words.
Quello, followed by a noun beginning with a vowel drops the o and
takes an apostrophe in its stead ; and followed by a noun beginning
with any consonant but z, or s followed by another consonant, drops
its last syllable. Followed by a noun beginning with a vowel, z, or s
followed by another consonant, in the plural it makes quegli ; as,
QUEL Tossente k, Creole, that powerful one is Hercules ;
QUELL' Altro k, Demofonte, the other is Demophoon ;
QUEGH xngeli, those angels ;
QUEGLI spiriti, those spirits.
Qutlli, followed by a word beginning with a consonant, is contracted
into quei, and often written que'; as,
QUEI DO/ci lumi, those sweet lights ;
QUE' compdgni, those companions.
Qudsta, followed by the nouns mattina or mane, * morning ' ; sdra,
( evening ' ; notte, ' night ' ; often drops the first syllable, and forms with
them a single word ; as,
- . •
qutsta matlina, STAMATTINA, 7 ,.
or questa mdne, STAMANE, j thls mominS >
questasera, STASERA, this evening;
qu6sta notte, STANOTTE, to-night, or last night.
* Observe, that after the pronouns costiii, colbi, coiestbi or codesthi, &.c. we never
use the substantive uomo, ' man ', or ddnna, ' woman ', in the feminine ; and do not
say costiii urfmo, colei donna ; but simply costbi, for ' this man J ; coUi, for ' that wo-
man ' ; &c. : costiii, coltoi, cotestui, &c., containing in themselves both the adjective
pronouns questo, quello, cotesto, &c., and the substantive pronoun Hii, or lei in the
feminine, &c. — costui orquesto lui, ' this man ' ; colei or quetta lei, * that woman' j &c.
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 139
Questo, quello, and cotesto or codesto, are often used
substantively, and then they are equivalent to questa cosa,
6 this thing ' ; quella cosa, ' that thing ' ; &LC. as,
udito QUE'STO (or questa having heard this (or this thing) ;
cosa),
COTE'STO (or cotesta cosa) that (or that thing) ought not to
non si vorrdbbefdre, be done.
We say sometimes in questo, in questa, in quello, in
quella, and then the words istdnte, ' instant ' ; momento
stesso, c very moment ' ; bra stessa, £ very hour ' ; occasione
stessa, c very occasion ' ; are understood ; and in questo,
in quelld, are equivalent to ' in this very moment,' 6 in
that very hour ' ; &c. as,
IN QUESTO soppravvtnne la at this very instant came the
fdnte, servant ;
vidi IN j QUE'LLA una nave I saw at that very moment a
piccioletta, rather small bark.
Quello, in speaking of a city, territory, country, &c.,
is equivalent to cittd, territorio, paese, &c. ; as,
QUEL di Perugia, the territory of Perugia ;
QUEL di Bergamo, the country of Bergamo.
We very often use questi, quegli, and cotesti or codesti,
in the singular, in speaking of persons, but in the sub-
jective only ; and then questiis equivalent to quest9 uomo,
' this man ' ; quegli, to quell'' uomo, c that man ' ; cotesti,
to cotest' uomo, ' that man near you '; as,
QUESTI e il mio Signdre, » this is my master ; ,
QUEGLI e Cdco, that is Cacus ;
COTESTI, che ancor vive, that one who is yet alive.
When quegli is so used, in the plural, it makes queglino (quegli
uomini), t those men.'
Quegli followed by a word beginning with a consonant is, like quelli,
contracted into quei^ and often written qu6 ' ; as,
QUEI chefu presente, he who was present ;
QUE* rispose, that one answered.
140 ANALOGY.
Questo and quello, and questi and quegli, sometimes
serve to denote two objects already spoken of; questo
and questi being used for the near, and quello and quegli
for the distant object ; and then they correspond to the
English expressions the latter and the former ; as,
QUESTI 51 rredono aver da- the latter think to derive their
gli iddii il ministero ministry from the gods, the
QUELLI il segreto, former, their secret ;
QUEGLI vuole, che io ti perdo- the former demands that I
ni, e QUESTI, che in te in- should pardon thee, the latter
crudelisca, that I should be cruel with
thee.
To the above demonstrative pronouns may be added
do, 'this or that ' ; which is equivalent to questo,
quello, and cotesto or codesto ; in the signification of
questa, quella, or coiesta or codesta cosa, ' this, that, or
that thing near you ' ; but it never refers to a person ; as,
ci6 ch> io ne sento, that which I think of it ;
ch' k cio eke, tu d? ? what is that which thou sayest ?
ci6 udito, having heard this [thing.]
The Italian expressions, do che, questo che, quello che,
generally correspond to the English pronoun what, used
in the signification of c this which' or ' that which' ; as,
cio CHE tu hdi a fare, what thou hast to dp ;
QUELLO CHE dictva Mritino, what Adrian said.
Demonstrative pronouns are varied with the prepo-
sitions only.
Sometimes the ^preposition di, l of,' is suppressed before tbe pro-
nouns costui, coluij and cotestui or codestui, and the pronouns are
put before the noun with which they are connected ; as,
al COSTUI^ tempo {for al tempo in the time of this one ;
DI costui),
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 141
by the counsel of that one ;
for the deeds of those.
per lo COLXJI consiglio (for per
lo consiglio DI colui),
per le COSTORO opere (for per
le opere DI costoro),
E XAM PL E S .
Signora, tenete QUESTO DENA-
RO. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 1.)
Le mie nottifa triste, e i giorni
oscuri — QUELLA, che n'ha portdto
ipensier miei. (Petr. s. 250.)
Veggindom COTESTI PAJTNI, m
ho creduto lui. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 2.)
Cost COSTEI ch' E tra le donne
ujv SOLE. (Petr. s. 9.)
La donna, che COLUI CHE a te
KB INVIA — Spesso $al sonno la-
grimando desta. (Petr. s. 8.)
Perche BATTETE voi COTESTO-
RO ? (Nov. ant. 45.)
Che fdnno meco omai Q.UESTI
SOSPIRI, — Che nascean di dolor e ?
(Petr. c. 33.)
I'o giudicherei ottimamcnte fat-
to, che quellafesta, QUELLA ALLE-
GREZZA, che noi potessimo, pren-
dessimo. (Bocc. Introd.)
Voi mi parete uomo di Dio,
come dite voi COTESTE PAROLE 1
(Bocc. g. 1. n. 1.)
Colui cti f. secoe QUEL POSSEN-
TE e forte ERCOLE, QUELL' ALTRO
DEMOFOJVTE. (Petr. Tr. Am.)
QUEGLI ANGELI, 6 QUEGLI SP1-
RITI. (Cinon. t. 4.)
QUEI DOLCI LTJMI — S'acqmstctn
per ventura, e nonper arte. (Petr.
s. 224.)
E cosl la portd a QUE' suoi
CQMPAGNI. (Bocc. g. 9. n. 2.)
Madam, take this money.
That lady who has taken away
my thoughts makes my nights sad,
and my days gloomy.
Seeing you with those clothes, I
took you for him.
Thus this woman, who is like a
sun amongst the other women.
The lady, who often wakens from
his sleep, weeping, him who sends
us to thee.
Why do you heat those boys ?
What do these sighs which
sprung from grief do now with me?
1 should think it very well done
that we should take that enjoyment
— that merriment, which we could.
You appear to me to be a man
of God, how do you say those
words ?
That one who is with him, is
that powerful and strong Hercules,
the other is Demophoon.
Those angels and those spirits.
Those sweet lights are ac-
quired by good luck and not by
art.
And thus he carried her to those
companions of his.
142
ANALOGY.
Di questo di STAMATTINA sard
w tenuto a voi. (Bocc. g. 10. n.
9.)
STAMANE era unfanciullo, e or
sonvecchio. (Petr. c. 11.)
Egli ci e STASERA venuto un de'
suoifratelli. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 7.)
Ubbridco, fastidioso, tu non c'
entrerdi STANOTTE. (Bocc. g. 7.
n, 4.)
UDITO QUESTO. (Petr. Tr. Tern.)
Figliuola mia, COTESTO NON
SI VORREBBE FARE. (BOCC. g. 3.
n. 8.)
IN QUESTO LA FANTE di lei
SOPPRAVVENNE. (Bocc. g. 8. n.
I* V1DI UNA NAVE PICCIO-
LETTA — Venir per V dcqua verso
noi IN QUELLA. (Dant. Inf. 8.)
Passdndo per QUELLO DI PE-
RUGIA. (Stor. Pist 50.)
QUESTI i: IL MIO SIGNORE,
qnesti veramente e Messer Torello.
(Bocc. g. 10. n. 9.)
QUEGLI E CACO — Che sdtto il
sdsso di monte Jlventino, — Di sdn-
guefece spesse volte Idco. (Dant.
Inf. 25.)
COTESTI, CHE ANCOR VIVE, e
non si noma, — Guardare w per
veder, s' il condsco. (Dant. Par.
QUEGLINO rivoleano i loro strdc-
ci. (Bocc. g. 9. n. 2.)
E disse cose — IncredibiliaQVEi,
CHE FU PRESENTE. (Dant. Par.
17.)
. QUE' RISPOSE : " To sono cadu-
to in una fossa." . (Nov. ant. 36.)
Non solamente il popolo, ma i
n6bili, e i sacerdoti : QUESTI si
CREDONO AVER DAGLI IDDIl IL
MINISTERO, QUELLI IL SEGRETO.
(Dav. Germ.)
Of this of this morning I am in-
debted to you.
This morning I was a boy, and
now I am an old man.
There came this evening one
of her brothers.
Drunkard, troublesome man,
thou wilt not enter there to-night.
Having heard this.
My daughter, that ought not to
be done.
At this very instant her servant
came in.
As I saw at that very moment
coming through the water towards
us a rather small bark.
Passing through the territory of
Perugia.
This is my master, this is truly
Master Torello.
That is Cacus, who oftentimes
shed lakes of blood under the rock
of Mount Aventine,
I should like to look at that one,
who is still alive and does not tell
who he is, to see whether I know
him.
Those ones wanted again their
rags'.
And said things incredible to him
who was present.
That one answered : '« I have
fallen into a ditch."
Not only the people, but the no-
blemen, and the priests : the latter
think to derive their ministry from
the gods, the former, their secret.
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
143
QUEGLI VUOL.E, CHE 1O TI PER-
DONI, E QUESTI CHE, contro a mta
natura, IN TE INCRUDELISCA. —
(Bocc. g. 4. n. 1.)
Ji voUrvene dire cio CH* 10 NE
SEJVTO. (Bocc. g. 1. n. 3.)
Va via, figliudlo, CH' E cio,
CHE TU DI' ? (Bocc. g. 1. n. 1.)
Cio UDITO si addolordvano gli
aiutij efremevano i nostri. (Dav.
Stor. 1. 2.)
Tu sdi ben cio CHE TU HAI A
FARE. (Bocc. g. 9. n. 5.)
L* oste udendo quello che la
donna diceva, e QUEJLLO CHE DI-
CEVA ADRIANO ; comincid a cre-
dere, che Pinuccio sogndsse. —
(Bocc. g. 9. n. 6.)
AL COSTTJI TEMPO. (Giov. Vill.)
PER LO COLUI CONSIGLIO.
(Bocc.)
PER LE COSTOROOPERE. (Bocc.
g. 5. n.l.)
The former demands that I
should pardon thee, and the latter
that, against ruy nature, I should
be cruel with thee.
To tell you that which I think
of it.
Away with thee, my son, what
is that which thou sayest ?
Having heard this the auxiliary
troops were grieved, and our own
were in a rage.
Thou knowest well what thou
hast to do.
The host hearing what the lady
said, and what Adrian said, began
to believe that Pinuccio was
dreaming.
In the time of this one.
By the counsel of that one.
For the deeds of those.
EXERCISE XIII.
This sin is that which (the) divine justice has
peccdto e divino giustizia Ao2
not wished to leave unpunished.
non1 voluto lascidre impunito.
May God grant
Dio dia2
you that joy, and that good which you desire.
1 allegrezza, e benc desiderate.
you speak ?
parldte?
allegrez
What is that secret of which you speak? At this
secreto
none dared
niuno ardi
to
\di
answer. That was a trifling
rispondere. fu — picciolo
144
ANALOGY.
thing, and thou didst well to do with it what thou
cosa, e face'sti bene a fdr^ ne
didst (with it). There was in that court this us^age.
facesti* ne1. Era corte usdnza.
Passing by the cell of this one, he heard the
Passdndo davdnti cilia , — sentl
noise which they — (these ones) made together. He
schiamdzzo facevano2 insieme1.
I did not work I at all, but a thousand times I a I
non lavordva \ punto, ma - volta \ il \
day, he would run to the window I to see this
di, — correva finestra \ per vedere
woman. It appeared to him to be safe, and out
— pdrve3 2 6ssere sicuro, e fuor
of the hands of those who had taken him.
tndno avevano3 pr6sol
Those ones make me enter here
fdnno3 1 entrdre* ci2
to I deceive
per I inganndr^
Having departed from that one with (the) whom
Partitosi
he had been so long,
— era2 stdto3 lungamente1
he came
sene v6nne
to I England.
in I Inghilterra.
I will pay thee
paghero2 l
for this time, and for I
di volta, e di j
that. I have heard what you have spoken of me.
ho inteso avete4 ragiondto3 l 2
that he had I
And on this occasion I he perceived
a very beautiful
Ullo
woman for
donna
Cxlxl//
a
ac |
wife.
moglie.
UUCI t/
Dost thoi
Non odi
not hear
tu
what
he says ?
dice 1
This one is
the arch
arci
bishop Ruggeri.
vescovo
That one
is
e
Brutus.
Bruto.
Conceiving
Prendendi
a sudden hope of being able to return once ^more
- siibita sperdnza potere ritorndreb ancora1
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
145
in the royal state,
2 reale* stdto3,
by
per
the counsel of that one.
consiglio2 — i
All those who believe so are deceived. In Cyprus
Tutti credono2 cosl1 sono inganndti. Cipri
and the disturbances
e4 5 turlamento*
and in Rhodes the rumors
e Rodi 2 rumore3
were great, and lasted a long time I through I the
furono1 grdnde7 j e - lungo tempo \ per
deeds of these ones.
opera2 — J .
^rf,X.'-
* OF THE
[UNIVE;ESITT
INDEFINITE PRONO1
Of indefinite pronouns,
the singular, and cannot
plural number :
the following are used only in
be put before nouns in the
qualche, m. & f.
some, any ;
ogni, m. & f.
all, every ;
chiunque, m. & f.
chisivo'glia, m. & f.
chi che, m. & f.
chicchessia, m. & f.
/ whoever, whosoever ;
che che, m. & f.
checchessia, m. & f.
> whatever, whatsoever ;
qualunque, m. & f.
qucdsii'ogtiaj m. & f.
qualsisia, m. &. f.
nulla, m. & f.
niente, m. & f.
V whosoever, whatsoever ;
> nothing.
wno, m.
una, f. one ;
oj m. unallra, f. another ;
qualcuno, m. qualcuna, f. > some, some one, some
qualchvduno, m. qualcheduna, f. ^ body ;
13
146
ANALOGY.
ciascuno, m. ciascuna,
ciascheduno, m. ciascheduna, f.
ognuna, f.
ciascuna, f.
veruno, m.
veruna, f.
nessuno, m.
nessuna, f.
or russwno, m.
nissuna, f.
neuno, m.
neuna, f.
or niuno, m.
niuna, f.
nulloj m.
?iw#a, f.
every one, every body ;
no one, nobody.
EXCEPTIONS.
iy before numeral adjectives, as in the phrases (%m dwe mesi,
' eveiy two months ' ; ogni sei pdgine, l every six pages ' , ogni died
sold&ti, ' every ten soldiers ' ; and in the word ognissdnti, < the day of
All-saints ' ; is used with nouns in the plural.
Qudlche has been used, by some writers, with nouns in the plural, as,
qudlche verdi boschi, * some green woods ' ; but such examples are not
to be imitated.
The following are used in both numbers :
Singular.
tcde, m. & f. such ;
S such, such
colale, m. & f.
alcuno, m.
alcuna, f.
talunOj m.
taluna, f.
c^rfo, m.
a,f.
• certain ;
sttsso, m. 1
medtemo,!*. rsame5
medesima, f. 7
Plural.
^dZi, m. & f. such ;
IL m. & f. <
talune, f.
c^r/i, m.
ctrte, f.
^ some, some
' ones ;
• certain ;
st&sse, f.
medtsimi,m. £s5
mtdisime, f. j
INDEFINITE
PRONOUNS.
147
a/fro, m.
dltra, f.
V other ;
Altri, m.
ctltre, f.
> others ;
tutto, m.
tutta, f.
jail;
tutti, m.
> all, every one,
£ every body ;
alqudnto, m.
alqudnta, f.
? a little,
$ somewhat;
alqudnti, m.
alqudnte, f.
? a few, not
$ many ;
tanto, m.
^
tdnli, m.
^
frbita, f.
coldnto, m.
> so much ;
fcircte, f.
cotdnti, m.
> as many ;
cotdnta, f.
J
cotdnte, f.
)
altrettdnto, m.
altrettdnta, f.
? as much,
S as much more ;
altrettdnti, m.
altrettdnte, f.
? as many, as
J many more ;
^o'co, m.
? a little,
J a few ;
pochi, m.
> few;
mo'fto, m.
mdtta, f.
> much ;
molti, m.
wo'/^e, f.
V many ;
trdppo, m.
troppa, f.
> too much ;
troppi, m.
troppe, f.
> too many.
Chiunque, chisivoglia, chi che, chicchessia, qualcuno,
qualcheduno, ognuntf, taluno, are applied to persons only;
the others may be applied both to persons and things.
N&lla, niente, £ nothing,' mean also ' some or
any thing,' and nessuno or nissuno, neuno or niuno,
veruno, ' nothing, no one, nobody,' mean also * some or
any thing, any one, any body ' ; as,
57 Hid VUOl NTJLLA,
se tgli si sentisse NIENTE,
non rimarrebbe a sosientr
ptna NESSTJNA,
se va in NIUN luogo,
s' tgli ha bontdte VERONA,
if she wants any thing ;
if he felt any thing ;
there would not remain any pun-
ishment to suffer;
if he goes to any place ;
if he has any good quality.
148 ANALOGY.
Alcuno, 'some,' is sometimes used instead of nihno,
< nothing, no one ' ; as,
che ALCUNA gloria avrebbero, for they would derive no glory ;
che ALCUNA via darebbe, which would afford no way.
A'ltro is sometimes used instead of altra cosa, ' some
or any thing else ' ; as,
avresti detto ALTRO ; thou wouldst have said some-
thing else ;
hdifatto ALTRO ? hast thou done any thing else ?
Ji'ltn is often used in the singular, in speaking of per-
sons ; and then it is equivalent to altr' uomo, ' another
man,' or ' another person,' ' others ' ; as,
ne vdi, ne faTRipotra dire ch> neither you nor any other man
io non V abbia veduta, can say that I have not seen
it;
per nonfidarmene ad ALTRI, not to trust to other persons.
When altri is thus used, in any other relation, than the
subjective or the objective, it is changed into altrui; as,
ho detto male d' ALTRUI, I have spoken ill of another ;
le presterei ad ALTRUI, I would lend them to others ;
che io da ALTRTJI non sia that I should not be heard by
nditOy any other person,
A'ltri is also used in a distributive sense, and then it
corresponds to the English pronouns one — another;
the one — the other ; some — others ; as,
ALTRI fa remi, ed ALTRI vo'Z- the one makes oars, the other
ge sarte, twists ropes ;
ALTRI sen vdda errando^ AL- let some go wandering, let
TRI rimanga ucciso, ALTRI some be killed, let others
idol si fdccia un dolce place their happiness in a
sguardo, sweet
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 149
Altrui is sometimes used with the article, and then
the words avere, sostdnza, ' property ', £ patrimony ', are
understood, and V altrui is equivalent to c another's pro—
perty ', i patrimony ', &c. ; as,
domandar L' ALTRUI, to demand another's property
logordr DELL' ALTRUI, to use the property of others.
U'no and altro are sometimes used with the article,
V uno, V altro ; and then V uno corresponds to the one,
the former, and V altro to the other, the latter. U'no
and altro, when so used, in the plural make gli uni, gli
altri, for the masculine ; and le une, le dltre, for the
feminine ; as,
V etct L' UNO, e L' ALTRA avta age had changed the one and
trasformati, the other ;
e DELL' UNE, e DELL' ALTRA and with the one and with the
fdcci quello che cridi, other do what thou thinkest.
GLI UNI tem&nti Jlnnibale, GLI the former fearing Annibal, the
ALTRI Filippo, latter Philip.
The expressions V uno e V altro, V una e V altra ; gli
uni e gli altri, le une e le dltre, correspond to the Eng-
lish pronouns both± both of them ; as,
L' UNO E L' ALTRO corno, both horns ;
L' UNA E L' ALTRA stella, both stars.
L?*un V altro, V una V altra ; gli uni gli altri, le une
le dltre, are equivalent to the English pronouns one
another, each other ; as,
si AMAVANO L' UN L' ALTRO, they loved one another ;
L' UN L' ALTRO inttnti a ri- intent to look at each other.
guarddrsi,
Jn uno, is equivalent to the English expression at the same time ; as,
Mesta mi vdde, ma IN UN fug- he sees me sad, but at the same
gir dal suo cospetto, time to flee from his presence.
150 ANALOGY.
Senz* dltro sometimes corresponds in English to without doubt, cer-
tainly, &c. ; as,
6gli SEKZ' ALTRO sara col re, he without doubt is with the
king.
Per dltro means otherwise, this excepted, as for the rest, &c.; as,
PER ALTRO sdviOy e avveduto, as for the rest, wise and prudent.
Tale in the singular often drops the e and makes tal ;
and in the plural is contracted into tai, and sometimes
written to? ; as,
TAL/W mia stella, such was my star ;
TAI dimostrazioni, such demonstrations ;
TA* paldgi, such palaces.
Indefinite pronouns are generally varied with the pre-
positions only ; except stesso, medesimo, dltro 9 which are
varied with the prepositions and articles.
The prepositions di, a, are elegantly suppressed before the pronoun
altrui ; and sometimes the preposition di is suppressed, and altrui placed
between the article and the noun with which it is connected ; as,
le pidghe [di] altrui, the wounds of others ;
lafortuna si fa [a] altrui incontro, fortune goes to meet others;
bagndto^ nelV ALTRUI sdngue, [for bathed in another's blood,
nel sdngue di altrui] ,
To the above pronouns may be added chi, quale, pia,
meno, parecchi, parecchie, and si, which are also used as
indefinite pronouns.
Chi is sometimes used instead of alcuno ; as,
in questo loco pub arrivdr cm in this place may arrive some
ti frastorni, one who will disturb thee :
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 151
and somstimes instead of nessuno; as,
quivi non e CHI l<*gga, ne CHI there is no one there who reads,
scriva, and none who writes.
Chi is also used in a distributive sense, and then it is
equivalent to the English pronouns one — another; the
one — the other ; some — others ; as,
O) CHI Juki, CHI erbe carrying, some flowers, some,
odorifere, e CHI diverse ma- sweet herbs, and others, dif-
niere di spezierie, ferent kinds of spices.
Quale is used in a distributive sense, and corre-
sponds to one — another; as,
QUAL se ri> andb in contddo, e one went into the country, and
QUAL qua, e QUAL la, another here, and another
there.
Piu and parecchi, parecchie* as indefinite pronouns, are
equivalent to the English pronoun several ; as,
PIU giorni, several days ;
PARECCHI dltri, several others ;
PARECCHIE ore, several hours.
Piu and meno sometimes take the article, — il piu, il
meno ; i piu or le piu, i meno or le meno ; and then il
piu, i piu or le piu, are equivalent to the most, the
greater part ; and il meno, i meno or le meno, to the least,
the smaller part ; as,
IL PIU del tempo, the greater part of the time ;
i PIU morivano, the most of them died ;
LE PiO si trovdvano in Ber- the greater number of them
linzone, were found in Berlinzone ;
il Paradiso e DEI MENO, Paradise is for the smaller
number.
Si is used for both genders and both numbers in the
objective only, and corresponds to the English words
one, we, people, they, &c. ; as,
152
ANALOGY.
si v£de,
si e detto,
si videro.
si promettono [molte] cose,
one sees ;
we have said ;
people saw ;
they promise many things.
Si and the verb, in these and similar expressions,
hold the place of a passive proposition, and may be
equally well rendered in English by the verb to be ; as,
si rendessero gli onori a Gal- honors should be rendered
6a, e si ceifbrdsse la me- to Galba, and the memory
m&ria di Pisone, of Piso should be celebrated.
When si is followed by the particle we, we change the
i of si into e ; as,
non SE NE trovertbbe uno, they would not find one.
EXAMPLES.
Tu le dirdij s' ELLA VUOL NTJL-
LA. (Bocc. g. 9. n. 5.)
// domando SE EGLI si SENTIS-
SE NIENTE. (BOCC. g. 2. D. 3.)
Che NON RIMARREBBE A SOS-
TENER PENA NESST^NA nel pUTgCL-
torio per gli peccati, (Pass.)
SE Filippo VA oggi in NI^S
LUOGO. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 3.)
Per le tentazioni si prova T
U6m0, S* EGLI HA BONTATE VE-
RTJNA. (Pass. p. 47.)
CH' ALCUNA GLORIA i TCI
AVREBBER rf' clll (Bant. Inf. 3.)
Ch' ALCTJNA VIA DAREBBE fl
chi su fosse. (Bant. Inf. 12.)
ALTRO AVRESTI DETTO, se tu
m* avtssi vediito a Bologna. —
(Bocc. g. 8. n. 9.)
Thou wilt ask her, whether she
wants any thing.
He asked him whether he felt
any thing.
That there would not remain in
purgatory any punishment to suffer
for sins.
If Philip goes to-day to any
place.
By temptations it is proved
whether a man has any good qual-
ity.
For the guilty would derive
no glory from them.
Which would afford no way
to him who should be above.
Thou wouldst have said another
thing, if thou hadst seen me in Bo-
logna.
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
153
0, ALTRO HAI tU FATTO ? (BoCC.
n. 1.)
NE voi, NE ALTRI con ragione
mipotra piu DIRE CH' io NON L'
ABBIA VEDUTA. (BOCC. g. 1. D. 8.)
PER NON FIDARMENE ad ALTRI,
10 med6sima tel son veriuta a si-
gnified™. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 2.)
To ho DETTO MAL DJ ALTRUI.
(Bocc.)
CHE io DA ALTRUI che da lei
UDIJO NON SIA. (BOCC. g. 3. D. 5.)
ALTRI FA REMI, ED ALTRI
VOLGE SARTE. (Dant. Inf)
ALTRI disperse — SEN VADA
ERRANDO : ALTRI RIMANGA UC-
ciso : — ALTRI, in cure d' amor
sodve immerso, — IDOL si FAC-
CIA, UN DOLCE SGUARDO, im/is0.
(Tass. Ger. 4. 18.)
Con le voci umili, e mansuete
nel DOMANDAR L' ALTRUI. (BOCC,
g. 4. n. 2.)
Si dispose a voler LOGORAR
DELL' ALTRUI. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 10.)
TantO L5 ETA Ls UNO E L* AL-
TRO, da quello che esser solbano,
gli AVEA TRASFORMATI. (BOCC.
g. 2. n. 6.)
Che le mie cose ed ilia ti sieno
raccomanddte, E QUELLO DELL'
U\NE E DELL' ALTRA FACCI, CHE
CREDI, che sieno consolazlCne
delV dnima mia. (Bocc. g. 2. n.
7-)
Immagindi di voUr fare, sic-
come fecero i Saguntini, o gli
Jlbidei, GLI UNI TEMENTI ANNI-
BALE CartagMse, E GLI ALTRI
FILIPPO Macedonico. (Bocc.
Fiamm. 5. 53.)
Scalddva il sol gia L' TJNO E L'
ALTRO CORNO — Del Tduro. (Petr,
cap. 1.)
Oh, hast thou done any thins
else ?
Neither you, nor others can any
longer say rightly that I have not
seen it.
Not to trust to others, I myself
have come to inform thee of it
I have spoken ill of others.
That 1 should be heard by no
other, but by her.
Some make oars, and others
twist ropes.
Let some of them go dispersed,
and wandering : let some be killed :
let others, plunged in the cares
of pleasing love, place their hap-
piness in a sweet look, a smile.
With humble and mild words in
demanding the property of others,
She disposed herself to use the
property of others.
So much had age changed the
one and the other from what they
were used to be.
Let my things and her be re-
•commended to thee, and with the
one and with the other do what
thou thinkest would be of any con-
solation to my soul.
I thought of doing as the Sagun-
tines and the Abydeans did, the
former fearing Annibal the Cartha-
ginian, the latter Philip the Mace-
donian.
The sun was already warming
both the horns of Taurus,
154
ANALOGY.
Otf e n bel^ciglio, e L' UNA E
L* ALTRA STELLA CA' Ctl COTSQ
del mw viver liime denno ? (Petr.
s. 258.)
L* tJN L' ALTRO di egudle
amore si AMAVANO. (Bocc.)
L* UN L* ALTRO A RI GUARD AR-
si INTENTI. (Tass. Ger.)
MESTA ognor MI VEDE, mesta
& VCro, MA IN UN DAL StJO COS-
PETTO FUGGIR mi vede. (Alf.
Filip. 1. 1.)
EOLI SENZ* ALTRO SARA COL
RE. (Maff. Mer. 2. 3.)
RlCCO, e SAVIO, E AVVEDtJTO
PER ALTRO, ma avarissimo. —
(Bocc. g. 6. n. 2.)
Where is the beautiful brow and
both those stars which gave light
to my life ?
They loved oiie another with an
equal love.
Intent to look at each other.
He sees me always sad, sad it is
true, but at the same time he sees
me flee from his presence.
He without doubt is with the
king.
Rich, and wise, and prudent
otherwise, but very avaricious.
LE PIAGHE ALTRtii. (Petr. 8. The wounds of others.
6.)
Ricdrdati che una votia senzd
piii, suole avvemre, che LA FOR-
TTJXA SI FA ALTRVI INCQNTRO
col viso lieto, e col grembo aperto.
(Bocc. g. 6. n. 10.)
NELL* ALTRUI SANGUE gid
BAGNATO e tmto. (Petr. s. 29.)
TAL FU MIA STELLA, e tal niia
cruda sorte. (Petr. s. 182.)
Queste TAI dolorose DIMOSTRA-
ZIONI sow troppo vedute, e cono-
sciute. (Castigl. Cort. 1. 3.)
E fecer TA' PALAGI, e td' ma-
raviglie, che non si potr6bbe dire.
(Fr. Gior.)
Ix QUESTO LOCO di leggier PUO
ARRIVAR CHI TI FRASTORNI.
(Maff. Mer. 3. 4.)
QUIVI ivox E chi ragioni — Di
Cristo, ne CHI LEGGA, NE CHI
SCRIVA. (Dant. Par. 12.)
1 Remember" that Ottee and no
more, it is wont to happen, that for-
tune goes to meet others with joy-
ful countenance, and open bosom.
Already bathed and stained with
another's blood.
Such was my star, and such my
cruel fate.
Such painful demonstrations are
too often seen and known.
And they made such palaces,
and such wonderful things, that
cannot be described.
In this place may easily arrive
one who will disturb thee.
There is no one there who talks
of Christ, no one who reads, no
one who writes.
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
155
Molti anddvano attorno, POR-
TANDO nelle mdni, CHI FIORI, CHI
ERBE ODORIFERE, E CHI DIVERSE
MANIERE DI SPEZIERIE. (BOCC.
Introd.)
E le lor donne, e i figliuoli pic-
itttti, QUAL SE N' ANDO IX CON-
TADO, E QUAL QUA, E QUAL LA,
poveramente in arnese. (Bocc.
g. 2. n, 3.)
PIU GIORNI felicemente navigd-
rono. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 7.)
Many went about carrying in
their hands, some, flowers, some,
sweet herbs, and others, different
kinds of spices.
And of their wives, and young
children, one went into the coun-
try, and one here, and another
there, poorly provided.
They sailed happily several days.
Con PARE c CHI ALTRI. (Petr.) With several others.
Duro per lo spdzio di PAREC-
CHIE ORE. (Giov. Vill.)
IL PIU DEL TEMPO, SI Stdn-
no a mangidre, e poltrire. (Dav.
Germ.)
I PIU senza alcunafebbre, o 61-
tro accidente MORIVANO. (Bocc.
Introd.)
Mdso rispose, che LE PIU si
TROVAVANO IN BERLINZOJVE.
(Bocc. g.-8. n. 3.)
IL PARADISO E DEI MENO, 6
non del piii. (Seem. Mann. Marz.
31.)
Come si VEDE. (Bocc. g. 10.
n.2.)
Come s' E DETTO. (Dav. Ann.) As we have said.
It lasted for the space of several
hours.
The greater part of the time
they pass in eating and dozing.
The most of them died without
any fever, or any other symptom.
Maso replied, that the greater
number of them were found in
Berlinzone.
Paradise is for the smaller num-
ber, and not for the larger.
As one sees.
VIDERSI in quello esercito- sol-
ddti v cchi, che non avevanofdtto
mdi gudrdia. (Dav.)
Qudnto COSE gli si PROMETTO-
NO tutto '/ di. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 1.)
Propose, che si RENDESSERO
GLI ONORI A GALBA : che anche
SI CEI.EBRASSE LA MEMORIA DI
PISONE. (Dav. Stor. 1. 4.)
NON SE NE TROVEREBBE UN
maggior mdi. (Bocc. g. 2. fin.)
People saw in that army old sol-
diers, who had never been on
guard.
How many things they promise
him the whole day.
He proposed, that honors should
be rendered to Galba, and that the
memory of Piso should also be cel-
ebrated.
They would never find^ one
greater.
156 ANALOGY.
EXERCISE XIV.
Whoever does otherwise sins. There must be
fa2 altrimenti1 pecca. Vi deve essere
some deception. Let us give this bread to eat ^ to
ingdnno. Didmo pane a mangidre
some one. He commanded that every one should
— Comandd andds-
go to rest himself. That we I might not cause I
se2 a4 riposdre5 si1. Jlcciocche non dessimo
(to) any one I to I think of us. Each
3 4 I da1 I pensdre2 — — .
one* of us knows, that the greater part of (the)
sa, 4 5 pdrtt?
her friends — (hers) are dead.
2 sono3 motto."7
You will receive
riceverete
hundred for every one. Every mother is a nurse
mddre e - bdlia
of her children. Without any delay, he did what
figliuolo. Senza indugio, — fece
the king ordered. No f body perceived
re commanddva. persona accorse2
it.
sene.1
Here it seemed to me that I saw — (to see) noj sanctity, no |
jQuivi — pdrveu 13 veder12 l santita2, 3
devotion, no J good deed, or example of life.
divozione4, 5 buonoQ opera7, os esempio9 10 vita11.
Where every word, every phrase, every mode of
O've parula, frdse, modo —
expression is explained with clearness. To-morrow I
men spiegdto'3 con1 chiarezza2. domani2
shall dine with some friends. Some companies of
Pranzerd1 con amico. compagma
Belgians collected in haste, and a band of Vitellians.
Belgi fdtto furia, e mdno Vitellidni.
* Each one, in the feminine gender.
t No, here in the signification of not one, none.
J JVo, in the signification of not any.
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 157
Now I have nothing more to fear. Who — (to
Omdi - ho* l piu3 da temere.
(the) whom)* I had been obliged to live I for several
era convenuto vwere1 * *
years j like I a deaf and duml) person. I never
anno2 j a guisa di3 \ - sordo4- . e5 mutolo6. non
should come
days.
di.
to the end I of it j for | severttl
a capo* \ nel « \ in
Said the bafterer* I "Must I say] more — (any
Disse barattiere : " Ho w a dir -— -
H
other thing)." Not being able I to be seen l,y
Won
potendo esser3 veduto*
"any other, he threw himself I on his knees I beforo
2 — gittd7 si? ginocchione9 \
lier, and said. I determined (myself)
e disse. - Deliberdi^, mi
tell
it rather to you than to others. With (the) humble,
piuttosto umile2,
and mild words in (the) asking the property ci
€3 tnansueto* voce1 domanddre — —
Bothers — (the others'). He will be with him without
sard3 4 &
— (any other thing to the contrary). He sees
at the (one.) same time fly from his presence.
in fuggire cospetto.
Some make oars, and others twist ropes. Suppose
fa remo, e volge sdrta. Fingete
Ion the contrary, that that be not a comedy, but
a ^ontrdriO) sia2 non1 commedia^ mci
a tragedy, and that of the actors some should speak
tragedia, e recitdnte favelli
Bolognese, others Venetian, that one Bergamasque, this
Bergamdsco,
* PPhom, in the feminine gender.
14
158 ANALOGY.
one Neapolitan, and that one Milanese. (The) one*
Napoletdno,
of them had a beautiful and large mattress of
— avea bello* eb grdnde5 materdsso1
cotton I on
bambdgia? \ in
her head, and the other * a very
capo, e
large basket full of things. Some went
grdnde paniere pieno cosa. sen9 ando
the country, and some here, and some there.
contddo, e qua, e la.
into
in
CHAPTER VIII.
OF THE PARTICLES JVE, CJ, VI.
WITH pronouns are generally classed the particles
ne, ci, vi, f which never vary, and always refer to some
person, thing, or place, which has been spoken of
before.
Ne may refer to one person or thing, or to more
than one, according to the number of the objects, which
have been mentioned ; and then it is rendered in Eng-
lish by — of him, of her, of it ; of them ; with him,
with her, &c.; at him, &c. ; some of it, some of them ; as,
NE pare innamorato, he seems enamoured of her ;
a qudnti NE giacevano taglib he cut off the hair of as many
i capelli, of them as slept ;
* The one, the other, in the feminine gendef.
t These particles, in orthography, appear to be the same Words as the conjunctive
pronouns ne, ci, vi ; their difference in signification, however, is easily ascertained
by the moaning of the sentence in which they are used.
PARTICLES WE, CI, VI. 159
won NE poteva pagdre i cal- I could not pay for my shoes
zdn", with it ;
se NE maraviglib) he wondered at it ;
NE ho preso, I have taken some of it, or
some of them.
Ne may also refer to the place, which one comes
from, or goes to ; and then it corresponds to the Eng-
lish adverbs — hence, thence ; as,
E vennij I came thence ;
qudndo NE andrete ? when shall you go hence ?
and sometimes to an indeterminate place ; as,
NE e portdta dal vento, it is thence carried away by the
wind.
Ci, vi, refer to a place, ~and correspond to the Eng-
lish adverbs — here, there ; hither, thither ; as,
ci era venuto, I had come hither ;
won vi pole entrdre, he could not enter thither.
Ci, properly, refers to a place near the person
speaking, and vi, to a place at a distance ; as,
ci 50710 stdto dltre volte, ' I have been here formerly ;
<se tu mdi vi tdrni, if thou shalt ever return there.
This distinction, however, is not observed when the
particles ci, vi, and the conjunctive pronouns ci, vi9-
would be brought together, as in io vi vi condurro, —
voi ci ciavete condotti ; in which case, to avoid the harsh
sound produced by the repetition of the same word, *
we say, without regard to the distance of the place,
io vi cr condurrb, I will conduct you thither;
voi vi ci avete condotti, you have conducted us hither.
* An instance nevertheless, is met with in Boccaccio, in which ci is used
instead of vi, without the occurrence of the repetition of the word on account
-of the conjunctive pronoun:
JVbn ci s6no in nfan lutfgo abit&nie There aro nowhere dwellings so near ,
si presso, die tu di gitirno YI potessi that you could arrive there before sun-
arriv'are. (G. 5. n. 3.) set.
160 ANALOGY.
Ci, vi, may refer also to persons or things, and then
they take the signification of the persons or things,
which they refer to ; as,
-pensaste a me ? — ci pensai, did you think of me ? — I
thought of you.
baderete a ci'6, or a questo? will you attend to this? — yes,
— sij vi bQderb) I will attend to it.
Ci, vi, are used sometimes instead of questo, quello.
title, &c. in the signification of — - to it, in it, from it,
&LC. ; as,
ci troverimo buon compenso, we shall find in it a good com-
pensation ;
ascoltai queste parole senza I listened to these words with-
rispondervi, out replying to them ;
io non vi consentii, I did not consent to it.
When the particles ci, vi, are followed by the pro-
nouns To, la, li, gli, le, they are generally united to
them so as to form a single word ; as,
VELO avea condotto, he had conducted him there ;
ingegnati di ritenercE.i+o, contrive to keep him there.
The particle's ne, ci, vi, are often used as expletives ;
as,
NE andb per la camera, he went through the room ;
ciascun che ci nasce, every one who is horn ;
dove vi mori, where [there] died.
EXAMPLES.
J£gU,pianamente^ajidando, A He, walking softly, cut off tKe
QUANTI in quella casa NE GIACE- hair of as many of them as slept in
VANO TAGLJO 1 CAPELLI. (BoCC. that llOUSC.
g,3.n.2.)
Mi ddvan si poco saldro, che They gave me so small a salary,
io NON NE POTEVA appena PAGA- that I could hardly pay for my
B£ i CALZARI. (Bocc. g. 2, D. 1.) shoes with it.
PARTICLES JVE, C7, VI.
101
Quand' w MENE VENNI. — When I came thence.
(Bocc. g. 3. n. 1.)
La cenere posta in alto, NE K
PORTATA DAL VENTG. (PaSS. tf.
Hu. c. 4.)
The ashes placed on high, is
thence carried away by the wind.
Nay, I had come hither in order
to admonish him.
ERA VENUTO per do-
vergli ammonire. (Bocc. g. 1. n.
Si tardi m giunse, che, essendo
le parte serrate', e i ponti levdti,
ENTRAR NOJV VI POTE dentrO. —
{Bocc. g. 2. n. 2.)
Veramente ci SONO w ALTRE
VOLTE STATO ; ma si m* avea la
paura di me tratio, che cosi cdme
se mdi non ci fossi, d* esserci
stato mi ricordava. (Lab.)
Se igli avviene, che TU MAI vi
TORNI, fa che tu non sii mdi piu
geloso. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 8.)
V6l VI CI AVETE CONDOTTI.
(Fr. Sacch.)
PENSASTE A ME ? — si ci PEN-
SAI. (Bemb.)
Per avventura P opera nostra
potra essere anddta di modo, che
n6i ci TROVE RE MO, coll' aiuto di
DlO, BUON COMPENSO. (BOCC. g.
2. n. 7.)
QUEST E PAROLE, non una vol-
ta, e SENZA RISPONDERVI alci'i-
na cosa, ASCOLTAI con grave d~
nimo. (Bocc. Fiam. 1. 5.')
Ringranzidndo Iddio, CHE
CONDOTTO VEL' AVEA. (Bocc. g.
2. n. 4.)
Sappi se egli s<i lavordre, ed Learn whether he knows how
JNGEGNATI DI RiTENERCELO. — to work, and contrive to keep him
(Bocc.) there.
Chetamente NE ANDO PER LA Gently he went through the
CAMERA infino alia finestra. — room as far as the window.
(Bocc. g. 2. n. 7.)
14*
He arrived there so late, that,
the gates being shut, and the
bridges raised, he could not enter
thither.
Truly I have been here former-
ly ; but fear had in such a manner
deprived me of my senses, that I
recollected as little of having been
here, as if I never had been here.
If it happens that thou shaltever
return there, take care that thou
be no more jealous.
You have conducted us hither.
Did you think of me ? — yes, I
thought of you.
Perchance our business may
take such a turn, that we shall
find in it, with the assistance of
God, some compensation.
To these words, more than once,
and without replying to them any
thing, I listened with a serious
mind.
Thanking God that had con-
ducted him there.
162 ANALOGY.
Natural ragione & di CIASCUN It is a natural thing to every onej
CHE ci NASCE, la sua vita, quanta who is born to help^preserve, and
pud, aiutdre, e conservdre, e di- defend his life, as much as he can.
fendere. (Bocc. Introd.)
Costui disfece Jerusalem, DOVE This one destroyed Jerusalem,
vi MORI, tra d1 drWi e di fame, where there died, both by arms and
centindia di miglidia di Giudei. of hunger, hundreds of thousands
(Petr.Uom.ill. 28.) . of Jews.
EXERCISE XV.
The miserable Landolfo, although the day before
misero , ancorache 3 di* davdntv*
had called (the) death many times, seeing- it near,
avesse9 chiamdto8 6 morte1 molto1 volta,2 ved&ndo^, pr£sta,
was afraid of it. He wished that I should see
Me2 paura3 l. Voile vedessi
all the holy relics, and they were so many, that,
sdnto reliquia, e furon tdnto, r
if I wished to relate them to you, I never should
se voldssi3 contdre4- l, non ver-
come to an end (of them). "Oh, my master !'V
r^j2 3 __ C£p04, i . "Oh, mio* maestro !'n,
said Bruno, " I do not wonder (myself) at it,
diceva
non
maraviglicP
for I have heard say, that they say nothing —
ch& ho udito dire, —
I (do not say anything) of it." But yet coming
non dicono2 1." Ma pure uscito^,
out thence, he began to wonder^ (himself) I more
, — incomincid3 4 maraviglidre5 si2 an-
and more. I
cora piu.1
Cause (the) generosity 1 to he painted
cortesia* dipmgere3
here.
2
PARTICLES A'jE, C7, VL
163
Pretending
Sembidnte facendo
have
returned there
tomato* - *
with a great deal more merchandise than before.
con mercanzia prima.
I I cannot
I non so
well relate how I entered there.
ben ridire come entrap 1.
The
church is so full, of people, that no * person can
chiesa e si plena gente , persona pud3
any more
enter there.
entrdre4' 2.
Andreuccio, fearing, entered
, teme"ndo, entrd2
there, and entering there he thought within himself.
If I
Se
entrdndo.
can affect
so far vista
— penso
be d unify I shall bei
esser mutolo, 2 sard*
received there surely.
ricevuto5 3 per
They f replied: "It is
risposero : " - e2
very
Bene1
true, since thou
vero> perchb
art the one who makes us stay here. Alas! Z<§ppa,
s6i fdi3 2 stare4- l. Ohime ! r
what does this mean ? Have
vuol 2 dir?1 avcte*
you then made
" 5 Dunque1 fdtto*
me
2
come here for this ?
I
painted
gere*
here,
will cause
fard3
in such a manner,
di maniera.
it*
you nor any other one
ne —
will be able
potra2
I to be
j dipin-
that neither
ne
to tell me
dire4' l
l
any longer, that I have not seen it.| These persons §
piii,3 5 ff dbbia9 nori* veduta10 8.
make me enter here fto
fdnno3 l entrdre4 2 \ per
deceive me.
inganndr^,
We wish
voglidmo
* JVo, here in the signification of wo one. t They, in the feminine gender.
| It [the generosity — la cortes'ia], in the feminine gender.
§ These persons, for these men near me.
164 ANALOGY.
to go
anddre
and
see this holy man ; but I, for myself,
veddre santo ; ma , me.
do not see how we can get there.
non vedo come — possiatno* jpervenire3 J.
CHAPTER IX.
VERBS.
ALL Italian verbs are classed in three different conju-
gations, which are distinguished by the termination of
their infinitive.
The first conjugation comprehends those verbs,
which in the infinitive end in are ; as, awARE, ' to
love.'
The second comprehends those verbs, which in the
infinitive end in ere ; as terrtERE, ' to fear.'
The third comprehends those verbs, which in the
infinitive end in ire ; as, sentiRE, ' to hear,' or ; to
feel.'
All the verbs of these three different conjugations,
whether regular or irregular, are conjugated or varied
with one of the auxiliary verbs, avere, i to have, ' or
essere, ' to be '.
VARIATION OF VERBS.
Verbs may be varied in four different ways ; viz.
affirmatively, negatively, interrogatively, and interroga-
tive-negatively.
In the variation of Italian verbs, the personal pronouns
are generally suppressed, the persons being sufficiently
AUXILIARY VERBS. 16S
indicated by the different terminations ; but when dif-
ferent persons have the same termination, the pronouns
are expressed, to avoid the confusion which might thence
arise.
The pronouns are also expressed in the imperative
mood , and also when verbs are varied in the interrogative
form, since then the transposition of the pronoun distin-
guishes, in conversation, that form from the affirmative*
In varying the following verbs, we have given, between
parentheses, the poetical forms, or the peculiar inflexions
to which poets have submitted some of the persons of cer-
tain tenses of these verbs. Some of these are elegantly
used even in prose, and some are entirely confined to
verse ; in order to distinguish the latter from the former,:
the latter are printed in Roman characters.
AUXILIARY VERBS.,
Variation of the Verb Avere affirmatively.
I. INFINITIVE.
Simple Tenses. -
1. — Present,
rfvere, to have.
Compound Tenses.
2. — Past,
avere avuto, to have had-
3.— Future.
avere ad avere, ")
essere per avere, > to ™ve to have, or
dovere avere, 5 to be about to have-
4. — Present,
avendo, having..
5. — Past.
avendo avuto , having had.
V
166
ANALOGY.
PARTICIPLE.
avtnte, s.
aventi, p.*
6. — Present.
? having.
7. — Past.
avuto, m. s., avuti, p. >
avula, f. s., avute, p.* 5
had.
II. INDICATIVE.
SIMPLE TENSES.
Singular.
Plural.
1. — Present.
1st p. ho or 6 I have;
,
2d p. 7iai or ai, 'thou hast;
3d p.ha or a(ave), he, she, or it has ;
abbiamo (avemo),
avete,
j or anno,
we have ;
you have ;
they have.
. — Imperfect.
1st p. w av6va
[or «u^a,t
2d p. avevi,
Sd p. ^of/i ore^a
[avdva or a-
[t^a (avia),
I had, or did
[have ;
thou hadst ;
he or she had ;
\mo, ;we had ;
avevate, you had ;
avevano or ave- they had.
[cwo (avieno),
3. — Perfect.
1st p. 6bbi,
2d p. avesti,
3d p. <£W>e,
I had;
thou hadst;
he or she had ;
avtmrnoj
aveste,
ebbero,
we had ;
you had ;
they had.
4. — Future.
1st p. avro,
2d p. avrdi,
3d p. arra,
I shall or will ;
[have ;
thou wilt have ;
he or she will
[have ;
avremo,
avrete,
avrdnno,
we shall have ;
you will have >
they will have.
* The present participle of the verb avere agrees with the subject of the proposi-
tion in gender and number. The past participle agrees, sometimes, with the object
in gender and number.
•f Some say az'cro, ero, amd??o, &c. instead of orpra, ' I had'; era, 'I was';
arndt-a, ' I loved ' ; &c., but this usage which, indeed, presents the advantage of
distinguishing the first from the third person of the imperfect of verbs, is contrary
to the authority of the best classics.
AUXILIARY VERBS.
167
COMPOUND TENSES.
Singular. * Plural.
5. — Compound of the Present, or — Second Perfect.
1st p. ho avuto, |I have had ;
2d p. hdi avuto, thou hast had ;
3d p. ha avuto, he or she has
! [had ;
abbidmo. avuto,
avete avuto,
hdnno avuto,
we have had ;
you have had ;
they have had.
6. — Compound of the Imperfect, or — Pluperfect.
1st p. 10 aveva avuto, \ I had had,|| avevdmo avuto, \ we had had.
7. — Compound of the Perfect, or — Second Pluperfect.
1st p. ebbi avuto, \ I had had.
8* — Compound of the Future, or — Future Anterior.
1st p. avro avuto, \ I shall or will have had.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
SIMPLE TENSES.
1 . — Present.
1st p. io dbbia
2d p. tu abbia or
that I have, or
[may have ;
that thou have ;
abbidmo,
abbidte,
that we have j
that you have ;
3d p. egli or el-
\la dbbia
that he or she
[have ;
dbbiano, (aggia-
[no),
that they have.
•\
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. io avdssi,
2d p. tuavessi,
3d p. avesse,
if I had, or should
[have ;
if thou hadst ;
if he or she had ;
avessimo,
aveste,
avessero (aves-
[sino),
if we had ;
if you had ;
if they had.
COMPOUND TENSES.
3. — Compound of the Present, or — Perfect.
1st p. io dbbia I that I have had
r/7iMi#/> ' Tnr mav liavf
[or may have
[had;
abbidmo avuto,
that we have had,
168
ANALOGY.
4. — Compound of the Imperfect, or — Pluperfect.
1st p. io avessi avuto, \ if 1 had had, or should have had.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
Singular.
SIMPLE TENSE.
1. — Present.
1st p» avrei (a
[vrfa),
2d p. avresti,
3d p. avrebbe
[(avria),
I should, would,:
[or could have ;
[or might have;
thou wouldst
[have ;
he or she would
[have ;
Plural.
avreste,
avrebbero {avri-
[ano or avr'i- \
[eno),
we should of
[would have ;
you would have ;
they would have.
COMPOUND TENSE,
2. — Compound of the Present, or — Past.
1st p. cwrdi avu'
I should, would.;
[or could have
[had ; or might
[have had ;
avremmo avuto,
we should or
[would have had.
V. IMPERATIVE.
1st p
ft
dbbidnio not.
let us have «
2d p» dbbi (ag-
[gi) fw,
3d p. a66ia (ag-
[gia) egli or
[d//a,
have thou ;
let him or her
[have ;
abbidte voi,
dbbiano (aggia-
[rio) eglino or
[elleno,
have ye ;
let them have.
* The first person of the imperative in all verb* is wanting.
AUXILIARY VERBS. 169
Variation of the Perb Avere, negatively.
I. INFINITIVE.
Simple Tenses.
1. — Present.
Non avere \ not to have.
Compound Tenses.
2. — Past,
non avere avuto , \ not to have had.
3. — Future.
non avere ad avere. ) ,
non avere per avere, Y°r bf n^ to have or
non dovere avere, $ [not to be about to have.
GERUND.
4. — Present,
non avendo, \ not having.
5. — Past.
non av6ndo • I not having had.
[avutof I
II. INDICATIVE.
Singular.
SIMPLE TENSES.
1. — Present.
Plural.
1st p. [io]nonho,\l have not;
2d p. non hdi, thou hast not ;
3d p. non ha, 'he or she has not;
non abbidmo,
non avete,
non hdnno,
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. w non
[aveva,
2d p. non avevi,
\non aveva,
Jstp. non ebbi,
2d p. non avesti,
3d p. non dbbe.
I had not, or did
[not have ;
thou hadst not ;
3d p. egli or ilia he or she had not;
Inon avevdmo,
non avevdte,
non avevano,
3. — Perfect.
I had not ;
thou hadst not ;
he or she had not;
non avemmo,
non aveste,
non ebbero,
we have not ;
you have not ;
they have not.
we had not ;
you had not ;
they had not
we had not ;
you had not ;
they had not.
15
170
ANALOGY.
Singular.
Plural.
4. — Future.
1st p. non avrd,
2d p. non avrdi,
8d p. non avrd:,
I shall or will not
[have ;
thou wilt not
[have ;
he or she will
[not have ;
non avremo,
non awete,
non avranno,
we shall or will
[not have ;
you will not have;
they will not
[have.
COMPOUND TENSES.
5. — Second Perfect.
1st. p. \io~\ non ho aviito, I have not had.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1 . — Present.
1st p. w non
[Mia,
2d p. tu non
[abbia,
3d p. egli or ella
{non dbbia.
that I have not, or
[may not have ;
that thou have
[not;
that he or she
[have not ;
non abbidmOj
non abbidte,
non dbbiano,
that we have not}
that you have
[not;
that they have
[not.
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. w non
[avessi,
2d p. tu non
[avessi,
3d p. non aves-
[se,
if I had not, or
[should not have;
if thou hadst not ;
if he or she had
[not;
non avessimo,
non avdste,
non avesseroy
if we had not ;
if you had not ;
if they had not.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
1. — Present.
1st p. non avrei,
2d p. non avre-
[fit,
3d p. non avreb-
[be,
I should, would,
[or could not
[have ; or might
[not have ;
thou wouldst not
[have ;
he or she would
[not have ;
\non avr6mmo,
non avre"stet
non amebbero,
we should or
[would not have;
you would not
[have ;
they would not
[have ;
AUXILIARY VERBS.
171
Singular.
Plural.
1st p. ,
V. IMPE
RATI7E.
non abbidmo
[noi,
non abbidte voi,
non dbbiano
[eglino or elleno j
let us not have ;
have not ye ;
let them not
[have.
2d p. non avere*
[tu,
3d p. non dbbia
[egli or ella,
have not thou ;
let him or let her
[not have ;
Variation of Avere, interrogatively.
II. INDICATIVE.
SIMPLE TENSES.
1. — Present.
1st p.
2dp.
3d p.
ho w ?
Mi tu ?
ha egli or
[ella ?
have I ?
hast thou ?
has he or she ?
abbidmo noi ?
avete voi ?
hdnno eglino or
[elleno 1
have we ?
have you ?
have they ?
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. aveva w?
2d p. avevi tu 1
3d p. aveva 6gli
[or tola 1
had I ?
hadst thou ?
had he or she ?
avevdmo n6i ?
avevdte voi 1
avevano eglino
[or elleno ?
had we ?
had you ?
had they ?
.— Perfect.
1st p. ebbiio?
2d p. avesti tu ?
3d p. ebbe egli
[or ella ?
had I?
hadst thou ?
had he or she ?
avemmonoi ?
aveste voi ?
ebbero eglino or
[elleno ?
had we ?
had you ?
had they ?
* The second person of the imperative of Italian verbs, preceded by the nega-
tive particle non, is changed for the present of tho infinitive of the same verbs : as,
non avere (instead of non dbbi), 'have not [thou].' Poets, however, and Anoito
and Alfieri in particular, have used both forms indiscriminately.
172
ANALOGY.
Singular.
4. — Future.
1st p. avrd w ? jshall or will I ! ! avremo noi ?
[have?
\avrete voi 1
Plural.
shall or will we
[have ?
will you have ?
2d p. avrditu? wilt thou have r \u.v§ c**, w* i »»"- j--
Sd p. <M>ra e^ii will he or she Warano eglino will they have ?
[or ilia ? [have ? j [or elleno ?\
COMPOUND TENSES^
5. — Second Perfect.
1st. p. ho w avuto, or I have I had ?
[ho avuto w ?!
III. CONDITIONAL.
1. — Present.
1st p. avrei w ?
2d p. avrestitu?
3d p. avrebbe
[egli or ilia ?
should, would, or
[could I have ?
wouldst thou
[have ?
would he or she
[have ?
\avremmo noi 1
avrdste voi ?
avrebbero eglino
[or elleno ?
should or would
[we have ?
would you have ?
would they haver
Variation of Avere, interrogative-negatively.
I. INDICATIVE.
SIMPLE TENSES.
1. — Present.
1st p. non ho w?
2d p. wo/I hdi
\tu?
3d p. non ha
[egli or ilia ?
have I not ?
hast thou not ?
has he or she
[not ?
'non abbidtno ndi?
lnon avete voi ?
non hdnno egli-
[no or elleno ?
have we not ?
have you not ?
have they not ?
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. non auevalhad I not ?
[noi ?
had we not ?
3. — Perfect.
1st. p. non ebbi w ? \ had I not ?
AUXILIARY VERBS. 173
» „
4. — Future.
1st p. non avrd io ? \ shall or will I not have ?
COMPOUND TENSES.
5. — Second Perfect.
1st p. non ho w avuto,
have I not had ?
[or non ho avitto w ?
IV. CONDITIONAL.
1. — Present.
1st p. non avrei w ? I should, would, or
[could I not have ?
Variation of the Verb Essere.
I. INFINITIVE.
Simple Tenses. Compound Tensea.
1. — Present. 2. — Past.
\ to be.
essere stdto, m. s. 1
[stdti, p. f *0 havp
, . , ~ _ * ^ iw Have
essere^stata, f. s.i
[state, p.*^
been.
JSssere,
3. — Future.
•': '-,
GERUND.
4. — Present. 5. —
e55endo(sendot),| being. II essendo stdto,m. ) jiavin
, , .
t Some authors, and Machiavelli in particular, have used this form constan tly in
prose.
15*
ANALOGY.
PARTICIPLE.
6. — Present.
7. — Past.
(essente, s.,
essenti,p.,*)
stdto, m. s.
[stdti, p.
stdta, f. s.
[state, p.
been.
II. INDICATIVE.
SIMPLE TENSES.
Singular.
1. — Present.
1st p. to so'no,
2d p. sei or se',
3d p. *,
1st p. w era,
2d p. en,
3d p. dg-fo' era,
lam;
thou art ;
he is;
\\sidmo (semo),
(sete),
2. — Imperfect.
I was;
thou wast ;
he was ;
eravdmo (era-
[ino),t
eravate,
erano,
Plural.
we are ;
you are ;
they are.
you were ;
they were.
3. — Perfect.
1st p. /wi,
2d p. fosti,
3d p. /M (fue),
I was;
thou wast ;
he was ;
fummo,
foste,
furono (funnOj
[furnp, furo, fur,
[0r foro),
4. — Future.
1st p. sard (fia), I shajl or will be ;j saremo,
2d p. sardi,
3d p. sard (fia,
[fie),
thou wilt be ;
he will be ;
sarete,
sardnno (fiano,
[fieno),
we were ;
you were ;
they were.
we shall or will
[be;
you will be ;
they will be.
* These forms are obsolete.
| Old writers have used eramo even in prose, and Alfieri has followed their
usage in his Vita..
AUXILIARY VERBS.
175
Singular.
COMPOUND TENSES.
5. — Second Perfect.
1st p. io sono
[stdto,m.,
[stdta, f.,
2d p. sei stdto,
[-a,
3d p. e stdto, -a,
I have been ;
thou hast been ;
he or she has
[been ;
sidmo stdti, m.
[stdte, f.
siete stdti, -e}
eglino sono stdti,
[or elleno state,
Plural.
we have been j
you have been ;
they have been.
6. — Pluperfect.
1st p. w era std-
[to, -a,
I had been j
I eravdmo stdti, -e,]we had been.
7. — Second Pluperfect.
1st p. fui stdto, I had been ; \\fummo stdti, -e, I we had been.
.[-«,
8. — Future interior.
1st p. 8ardstdto,\l shall or will II saremo stdti, -e
[-a,| [have been; II
we shall or will
[have been.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
SIMPLE TENSES.
1. — Present.
1st p. io sia,
2d p. tu sia or
[lit,
3d p. egli sia,
that I be, or
[may be j
that thou be ;
that he be ;
sidmo,
sidte,
siano or sieno,
ihat we be ;
that you be ;
that they be.
2.— -Imperfect.
1st p. io fossi
[(fussi),*
2d p. tu fossi,
3d p. fosse,
if I were ; or
[should be ;
if thou wert ;
if he were ;
fossimo,
foste,
fossero (fossino),
if we were ;
if you were ;
if they were.
* This form, as well as/Usse, and fbssero used by Villani, Machiavelli, Guicciar-
dini, even in prose, has become obsolete.
176
ANALOGY.
Singular.
COMPOUND TENSES.
3. — Perfect
1st p. io sia std- that I have been,!! sidmo stati, -e,
[to, -a,
[or may have |
[been ',
4. — Pluperfect.
Plural.
that we have
[been.
1st p. w fossi if I had been ; M/ossimo stdti, -e.
[stdto, -a,
if we had been.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
SIMPLE TENSE.
1. — Present.
1st p. sarei £sa-
[ria, fora),
2d p. saresti,
3d p. sarebbe
[(saria, fora),
I should, would,
[or could be;
[or might be ;
thou wouldst be ;
he would be ;
saremmo,
sareste,
sarebbero (sari-
[ano or sarieno,
[forano),
we should or
[would be,
you would be ;
they would be.
COMPOUND TENSE.
2. — Past.
1st p. sarci std-
[to, -a,
I should, would,
[or could have
[been ; or might
[have been ;
saremmo stdti,
A-e,
we should,
[would, or could
[have been.
V. IMPERATIVE.
Istp
2d p. sia or sii be thou ;
[**;
3d p. sia egli, let him be ;
sidmo not, ilet us be ;
state voi, jbe ye;
siano or sieno let them be.
[eglino,
REGULAR VERBS. 177
REGULAR VERBS.
Variation of Active Verbs.
Active verbs, in the compound tenses, are varied with
the auxiliary verb avere, ' to have.'
FIRST CONJUGATION.
Variation of the Verb Am are.
(Paradigm of the verbs ending in are.)
I. INFINITIVE.
Simple Tenses.
1. — Present.
i
Am-dre to love.
Compound Tenses.
2. — Past,
avere amato, to have loved.
3. — Future.
GERUND.
±. — Present. „ 5. — Past.
am-dndo, loving. \\avendo amdto, having loved.
PARTICIPLE.
6. — Present. V. — Past.
am-dnte, s.. am-
'
am-dto, m. s,, ")
.["'"-^.IP- Cloved.
am-ata, f. s., i
[am-dte, p. j* )
* The present participle of active verbs, like that ofavtre, agrees with the subject of
the proposition in gender and number. The yos« participle agrees, sometimes, with
the 06/ec£ in gender and number.
178
ANALOGY.
Singular.
II. INDICATIVE.
SIMPLE TENSES.
1. — Present.
2. — Imperfect.
Plural.
1st p. am-0,
2d p. dm-i,
3d p. am-a,
I love, or do
[love, or am
[loving;
thou lovest ;
he loves ;
am-iamOy
am-dte,
dm-anOj
we love ;
you love ;
they love.
1st p. 10 am-ava,
2d p. am~dvit
3d p. egli am-
[-dva,
I loved, or did
[love, or was
[loving ;
thou lovedst ;
he loved ;
am-avamo,
am-avdte,
am-dvano,
we loved ;
you loved ;
they loved ;
3. — Perfect.
1st p. am-di,
2d p. am-dsti,
3d p. am-d,
I loved, or did
[love ;
thou lovedst ;
he loved ;
am-dmmo,
am-dstef
am-drono (am-
\-aro or am-dr),
we loved ;
you loved ;
they loved.
4. — Future.
1st p. am-erd,*
2d p. am-erdij
3d p. am-era,
I shall or will
[love 5
thou -wilt love ;
he will love ;
am-eremo,
am-erite^
am-erdnno,
we shall or wil
[lovej
you will love ;
they will love ;
* The rerbs of this conjugation in the future and the conditional, change the a oi
their terminations for e, and make am-erd, &c.; am-erei, &c.j instead of am-ard, &c.|
nm-n-rpi. Xrt*.
REGULAR VERBS.
179
Singular.
Plural.
COMPOUND TENSES.
5. — Second Perfect.
1st p. ho* amdto,
2d p. hdi amdto,
3d p, ha amdto,
I have loved ;
thou hast loved ;
he, she, or it has
j abbidmo amdto,
avete amdto,
hdnno amdto,
we have loved ;
you have loved ;
they have loved.
[loved ;
6. — Pluperfect.
1st p. to aveva I had loved ; ll&umfcmo amdto, I we had loved.
[amdto,
7. — Second Pluperfect.
1st p, ebbi amdto, \ I had loved.
8. — • Future interior.
1st p. avrd amdto, \ I shall or will have loved.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
SIMPLE TENSES*
1. — Present.
1st p. to dm-i
[(am-e),
2d p. tu am-i,
3d p. egli dm-i
[(am-e),
that I love, .or
[may love ;
that thou lovest ;
that he loves ;
am-idmo,
am-idte,
dm-ino,
that we love ;
that you love ;
that they love.
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. to am-dssi,
2d p. tu am-dssi,
3d p. am-dsse,
if I loved, or
[should love;
if thou lovedst;
if he loved ;
am-dssimo,
am-dste,
am-dssero (am-
[-assino),
if we loved ;
if you loved ;
if they loved.
COMPOUND TENSES.
3. — Perfect.
1st p. to dbbia amato,
that I have loved, or
[may have loved ;
180 ANALOGY.
4. — Pluperfect.
1st p. to avessi amdto, \ if I had loved.
Singular.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
SIMPLE TENSE.
1. — Present.
Plural.
1st p. am-erei
I should, would,
am-er6mmo,
we should, would
[(am-eria),
[or could love,
[or could love ;
2d p. am-eresti,
[or might love ;
thou wouldst
am-ereste,
you would love ;
[love ;
3d p. am-erebbe
[(am- ma),
he would Jove ;
am-erebbero(am-
[-eriano, am-
they would love.
[-erieno),
[COMPOUND TENSE.
2. — Past.
1st p. avrei amato,
I should, would, or could have
[loved ; or might have loved.
V. IMPERATIVE.
1st p. .
2d p. dm-a tu,
3d p. dm-iedi,
love thou ;
et him love ;
am-idmo noi,
am ate voi,
dm-ino dglino,
let us love ;
love ye ;
let them love.
Besides the foregoing changes of termination, there
are some verbs of the first conjugation, which undergo
in some persons and tenses a change of orthography :
Thus, verbs ending in care, gare, in order to preserve
the hard sound of c, g, in all their inflections, take an
h after those consonants whenever they are followed by
6, i • as, cercare, ' to search ' ; pregare, c to entreat.'
REGULAR VERBS.
183
Variation of the Verb Cercare.
(Paradigm of the verbs ending in care.)
II. INDICATIVE.
Singular.
Plural.
1. — Present.
1st p. cdrc-o,
2d p. cercH-i,
3d p. cere- a,
I search, or do
[search, or am
[searching ;
thou searchest ;
he searches ;
cercH-idmo,
cere-ate,
cerc-anO)
we search ;
you search ;
they search.
4. — Future.
1st p. cercn-erd,\I shall or will
[search ;
2d p. cercH-erdi, thou wilt search ;
3d p. cercH-ero;, |he will search ;
\ cercH-eremo,
cei'cis-erete,
I cercH-erdnno.
we shall or will
[search ;
you will search ;
they will search.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. io cercu-i that I search, or
[(cercH-e),
2d p. tu
3d p. egli cercH-i
[(cercH-e),
1st p. cercu-erei
[(cercH-eria),
2d p.
[may search ;
that thou search ;
that he search ;
cerciz-iamo,
cercu-idte,
cercn-ino,
that we search ;
that you search ;
that they search.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
1. — Present.
[sti,
,
3d p. cercH-ereb-
[be (cercH-eria) ,
I should, would,
[or could
[search ; or
[might search ;
thou wouldst
[search ;
he would search ;
cerc*L-eremmo9
cercn-ereste,
cercu-erebbero
[(cercH-enano,
[cercH-erieno),
we should, would,
[or could search ;
you would search ;
they would search.
16
182
ANALOGY.
V. IMPERATIVE.
Singular. \
Plural.
2d p. cerc-a tu,
3d p. cercH-i
[**,
search thou ;
let him, her, or it
[search ;
cercB-idmo noi,
cerc-6.te voi,
cercH-ino egli-
[no}
let us search ;
search ye ;
let them search.
Variation of the Verb Pregare.
(Paradigm of the verbs ending in gare.)
II. INDICATIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. preg-o,
2d p. pregTL-i,
3d p. preg-a,
I entreat, or do
[entreat, or am
[entreating ;
thou entreatest ;
he entreats ;
pregR-idmo,
preg-ate,
preg-ano,
we entreat ;
you entreat ;
they entreat.
4. — Future.
Istip.pregii-erd,
2d p. pregn-erdi,
3d p. pregn-era,
I shall or will en-
[treat ;
thou wilt entreat;
he will entreat ;
pregu-eremo,
pregK-erete,
pregu-erdnno,
we shall or will
[entreat ;
you will entreat ;
they will entreat.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1.— Present.
1st p. 10 pregu-i
[(pregn-e),
2d p. tu pregu-ij
3d p. eglipregK'i
[(pre'gH-e),
that I entreat, or
[may entreat ;
that thou entreat ;
that he entreat.
pregH-idmo
pregH-idte,
pregu-ino,
that we entreat ;
that you entreat ;
that they entreat.
REGULAR VERBS.
183
Singular.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
1. — Present.
Plural.
1st p. pregu-erei
[(pregH-eria),
2dp. pregu-ere-
[sti,
3d p.pregH-ereb-
[be (pregn-
[-eHa),
I should, would,
[or could en-
[treat ; or might
[entreat ;
thou wouidst en-
[treat ;
he would en-
[treat ;
pregu-ertmmo,
pregu-ereste,
pregu-er6bbero
[(pregu-eriano,
[pregH-erieno),
we should, would,
[or could en-
[treat;
you would en-
[treat;
they would en-
[treat.
V. IMPERATIVE.
2d p. preg-a tu,
3d p. prtgu-i
tfgli,
entreat thou ;
let him, her, or it
[entreat ;
pregH-idmo noi, let us entreat ;
preg-dte voi, entreat ye ;
pregn-ino egli- let them entreat,
[no,
Verbs ending in ciare, giare, drop the i, which follows
c, g, whenever a, gi, precede e, I ; as, baciare, c to
kiss ' ; fregiare, c to adorn.'
Variation of the Verb Baciare.
(Paradigm of the verbs ending in dare.)
II. INDICATIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. oaci-o,
2d p. 6ac-i,
3d p. bdci-a
I kiss or do kiss,
[or am kissing ;
thou kissest j
he kisses ;
bac-ldmo,
baci-dte,
bdci-ano,
we kiss ;
you kiss ;
they kiss.
L84
ANALOGY.
Singular.
Plural.
1st p. bac-erd,
2d p. bac-erdi,
3d p. bac-era,
4. — j
I shall, or will
[kiss ;
thou wilt kiss ;
he will kiss ;
Future,
bac-eremo,
bac-erete,
bac-erdnno,
we shall, or will
[kiss;
you will kiss ;
they will kiss.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p, io bdc-i
[(bac-e),
2d p tu bac-i,
3d p. egli bdc-i
[(bac-e),
that I kiss, or
[may kiss ;
that thou kiss ;
that he kiss ;
bac-ldmo,
baccate,
bdc-ino,
that we kiss j
that you kiss ;
that they kiss.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
1, •— Present.
1st p. bac-erti
[(bac-eria),
2d p. bac-eresti,
3d p. bac-er^bbe
[(faxoena),
I should, would,]
[or could kiss ;
[or might kiss ;
thou wouldst
[kiss ;
he would kiss ;
bac-eremmo,
bac-ereste,
bac-erebbero
[(5ac-mano,
[bac-erieno),
we should, would,
[or could kiss ;
you would kiss ;
they would kiss.
Istp
V. IMP
1
ERATIVE.
\bac-'idmo noi,
\baci-dte voij
\bdc-ino dgZina,
let us kiss ;
kiss ye ;
let them kiss.
2d p. bdci-a tu,
3d p. bdc-i egli,
kiss thou ;
let him kiss ;
REGULAR VERBS.
]85
Variation of the Verb Fregiare.
(Paradigm of the verbs ending in giareS)
II. INDICATIVE.
Singular.
Plural.
1. — Present.
1st p./reci-o,
2d p./hjG-i,
3d p./reoi-a,
I adorn, do adorn,
[or am adorning;
thou adornest ;
he adorns ;
freG-tdmo,
freGi-dte,
freGi-ano,
4.— Future.
1st p./rgG-erc),
2d p./rea-erdi,
3d p.freG-erd,,
I shall or will
[adorn ;
thou wilt adorn ;
he will adorn ;
\freG~eremo,
\freG-er6te,
\freG-erdnno,
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. w freG-i ithat I adorn, or
[(freo-e), [may adorn;
2d p. tufr6G-i, that thou adorn ;
3d p. egli fr€G-i that he adorn ;
egl
[(
freG-e),l
freG-ldmo,
freG'-iate,
frfa-ino,
IV. CONDITIONAL.
1. — Present.
we adorn ;
you adorn ;
they adorn.
we shall or will
[adorn ;
you will adorn ;
they will adorn.
that we adorn ;
that you adorn ;
that they adorn.
1st p. freG'erei
[(freo-eria),
2d ]>.freG-eresti,
3d p. freG-erebbe
[(freG-eria,
I should, would,
[or could adorn ;
[or might adorn ;
thou wouldst a-
[dorn ;
he would adorn ;
•
freG-erfmmo,
freG-ereste,
freG-er6bbero,
[(freG-eriano,
[frec-erieno),
we should, would,
[or could adorn ;
you would adorn ;
they would adorn.
16*
186
ANALOGY.
Singular.
Plural.
V. IMPERATIVE.
Istp |
2d p.frdGi-a tu, adorn thou ;
3d p.frfa-i egli, let him adorn;
frcG-ldmo noi,
freoi-dte voi,
freG-ino eglino,
let us adorn ;
adorn ye ;
let them adorn.
Verbs ending in rare, in which ia form one syllable,
drop the i whenever it is followed by another i ; as,
Noiare, 'to annoy.'
(Paradigm of the verbs ending in iare.)
II. INDICATIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. noi-o,
2d p. no-i,
3d p. noi-a,
I annoy, do an-
[noy, or am
[annoying ;
thou annoyest ;
he annoys ;
no-'idmo,
noi-dte,
noi-ano,
we annoy ;
you annoy ;
they annoy.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. 10 no-i
[(noi-e),
2d p. tu no-i^
3d p. egli no-i
[(noi-e),
that I annoy or
[may annoy ;
that thou annoy ;
that he annoy ;
no-ldmo,
no-tdte,
no-ino.
V. IMPERATIVE.
no-idmo,
Istp. . . . . j uno-ldm
2d p. noi-a tu, annoy thou ; I \noi-dte,
3d p. no-i egli, [let him annoy ; || no-ino,
that we annoy ;
that you annoy ;
that they annoy.
let us annoy ;
annoy ye;
let them annoy.
REGULAR VERBS.
187
Verbs ending in tare, in which ia form two syllables,
drop the i, only when it would be followed by the vowels
ta; as,
lyiviare, ' to send.'
II. INDICATIVE.
Singular.
1. — Present.
1st p. invi-o,
2d p. invi-if
3d p. invi-a,
I send, do send,
[or am sending ;
thou sendest;
he sends ;
inv-idmo,
invi-dte,
Plural.
we send ;
you send ;
they send.
SECOND CONJUGATION.
The verbs of this conjugation are commonly divided
into two classes, those ending in ere (long), and those
ending in ere (short) : both of these in the perfect have
two terminations, ei and etti ; except a few which have
the termination ei only.
Variation of the Verb Temere.
(Paradigm of the verbs ending in ere (long) ; and of
those which in the perfect end in ei and etti.)
I. INFINITIVE.
Simple Tenses.
1. — Present.
Tem-ere, jto fear.
Compound Tenses.
2. — Past .
|| avtre temuto, |to have feared.
188 ANALOGY.
3. — Future.
SSSM^rc.
GERUND.
4. — Present.
tem~6ndo, [fearing;
5. — Past .
11 avendo temuto, lhaving feared.
PARTICIPLE.
6. — Present.
7. — Past.
tem-ente, s.,
tern-tnti, p.,
> fearing ;
tetn-utOj m. s.} "J
[tem-uti, p., (
tem-uta, t. s., /
[<cm-wfe,p., )
II. INDICATIVE.
Singular.
SIMPLE TENSES.
1. — Present.
Plural.
1st p. tem-o,
I fear, or do
tem-idmo (tera-
we fear;
[fear, or am
[•emo),
[fearing ;
2d p. tem-i,
thou fearest ;
tem-ete,
you fear ;
3d p. tem-e,
he fears;
'• tem-ono9
they fear.
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. io tem-eva
I feared, or did
tem-evdmo,
we feared ;
[or tem-ea,
[fear, or was
[fearing ;
2d p. tem-evi,
thou fearedst ;
tem-evdte,
you feared ;
3d p. egli tem-
he feared ;
tem-evano or
they feared.
[•eva or tem-ea,
[tem-6ano,
[(tem-ieno),
REGULAR VERBS.
Singular. Plural.
189
3. — Perfect.
1st p. fem-Ei or
[fem-ETTi,
[(tem-e'),
2d p. tem-esti,
3d p. tem-E or
[tem-ETTE
[(tem-e-o),
I feared, or did
[fear;
thou fearedst ;
he feared ;
tem-emmo,
tem-este,
fem-ERONO or
[Jem-ETTERO
[(tem-ero, tem-er)
we feared ;
you feared ;
they feared.
4. — Future.
1st p. tem-erd)
2d p. tem-erdi,
3d p. tem-erb,
I shall or will
[fear;
thou wilt fear ;
he will fear ;
tem-eremo,
tem-erete,
tem-erdnnOy
we shall or will
[fear;
you will fear ;
they will fear.
COMPOUND TENSES.
5. — Second Perfect.
1st p. ho temutOj] I have feared ; || abbidmo temuto^we have feared.
6.— Pluperfect.
1st p. 10 aveva temuto, \ I had feared,
7. — Second Pluperfect.
1st p. ebbi temuto, \ I had feared.
8. — Future Anterior.
1st p. avrd temuto, \ I shall or will have feared.
III. CONJUNCTIVE,
that we fear 5
that you fear ;
that they fear.
SIMPLE TENSES.
1. — Present.
1st p. 10 tem-a,
3d p. tu t6m-a or
\tem-i,
3d p. 6gli tem-a,
that I fear, or
[may fear ;
that thou fear;
that he fear ;
tem-idmo,
tem-idte,
tem-ano.
190
ANALOGY.
Singular.
Plural.
-Imperfect.
1st p. w tem-essi,
2d p. tu tem-essi,
8d p. tem-6sse,
if I feared, or
[should fear ;
if thou fearedst ;
if he feared ;
tem-este,
tem-essero (tem-
[-essino),|
COMPOUND TENSES.
3. — Perfect.
1st p. w dbbia temuto, Ithat I have feared, or
\ [may have feared.
4. — Pluperfect.
1st p. w avessi temuto <t \ if I had feared.
if we feared >
if you feared ;
if they feared.
I should, would,
[or could fear ;
[or might fear >
1st p. tem-erei
[(tem-eria),
2d p. tem-eresti,
[fear ;
3d p. tem-er6bbe he would fear;
[(tern-era),
thou
IV. CONDITIONAL.
SIMPLE TENSE.
1. — Present.
tem-ertmmo,
wouldst
tem-ereste,
tem-erebbero
[(tem-erianO)
[tem-erieno),
we should, would,
[or could fear ;
you would fear;
they would fear.
COMPOUND TENSE.
2. — Past.
1st p. avrei temuto,
I should, would, or could have
[feared > or might have feared.
V. IMPERATIVE.
1st p. . . . .
£d p. t6m-i tu
8d p. t6m-a egli,
fear thou ;
let him fear ;
tem-idmo noi, ilet us fear ;
tem-ete voit fear ye ;
tem-ano 6glino, Jlet them fear.
REGULAR VERBS.
191
Variation of the Verb Tessere.
igm of the verbs ending in ere (short) ; and of
those which in the perfect end in ei only.)
I. INFINITIVE.
Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses. &,%••$
I. — Present. 2.— Past.
Ttss~ere, |to weave. j| avere tessuto, jto have woven.
3. — Future.
GERUND.
4. — Present. 5. — Past.
tess-endo, | weaving. J| avendo tessuto, [having woven.
PARTICIPLE.
6. — Present. 7. — Past.
less- Bute* s., ' 7
tess-enti,?:, Reaving.
„._, m. s.,
[tess-utij p.,
tess-uta, f. s.,
[tess-ute, p.,
Singular.
II. INDICATIVE.
SIMPLE TENSES.
1. — Present.
Plural.
1st p. ttss-o,
I weave, or do
[weave, or am
[weaving ;
tess-idmo (tess-
we weave.
192 ANALOGY.
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. w tess-eva or tess-ea, \ I wove, or did weave, or
[was weaving.
Singular. Plural.
3, — Perfect .
1st p. tess-£i9
2d p. tess-esti,
I wove, or did
[weave ;
thou wovest ;
3d p. tess-£(tess- he wove ;
tess-emmo,
tess-este,
we wove ;
you wove ;
they wove.
[-eo),
4. — Future.
1st p. tess-erd, \ I shall or will weave.
COMPOUND TENSES.
5. — Second Perfect.
1st p. ho tessuto, | I have woven.
6.— Pluperfect.
1st p. 10 aveva tessuto, \ I had woven.
7. — Second Pluperfect.
1st p. Mi tessuto, \ I had woven.
8. — Future Anterior.
1st p. avrd tessitto, \ I shall or will have woven.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
SIMPLE TENSE.
1. — Present.
1st p. 10 tess-at \ that I weave, or may weave.
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. w tess-essi) \ if I wove, or should weave.
COMPOUND TENSES.
3. — Perfect.
1st p.io tiblia tessuto9 \ if I wove, or should weave.
REGULAR VERBS. 193
4.— Pluperfect.
1st p. io av6ssi tessuto, \ if I had woven.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
SIMPLE TENSE.
1. — Present.
1st p. tess-erei (tess-eria), i I should, would, or could weave ;
[or might weave.
COMPOUND TENSE.
2.— Past.
1st p. avrei tessiilo, 1 1 should, would, or <
I [woven ; or might h;
V. IMPERATIVE.
1st p I .....
2d p. tess-i tu, \ weave thou.
could have
iave woven.
[For a list of Verbs of the Second Conjugation, that in the perfect end in #, or
in ei and etti, see APPENDIX, F.J
Verbs ending in cere (long), in order to preserve the
soft sound of c in all their inflections, take an i after
that consonant, whenever it is followed by a, o, u ; as,
Tacere, ' to be silent.'
(Paradigm of verbs ending in cere (long)*.)
I. INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLE.
7. — Past.
taci-utot in. s,, taci-uli, p., \ . ., t
taci-uta, f. s., taci-ute,?., 5 b< 'nt'
* These verbs are subject, also, to some irrtgularitiis, which will be noticed i
treating of Irregular Verbt.
17
194 ANALOGY.
II. INDICATIVE.
Singular.
1. — Present.
lstp.faci-o*(tac-
I am silent ;
tac-ldmo,
[ci-o),
2d p. tac-i,
thou art silent ;
tac-ete,
3d p. tdc-e,
he is silent ;
tdci-ono
(tacci-
[-ono),
Plural.
we are silent ;
you are silent ;
they are silent.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. io tdci-a
[(tacci-a),
2d p. tu tdci-a
[or tac-i (tacci-
[-a,)
3d p. egli tdci-a
[(tacci-a),
that I be silent, 0r
[may be silent ;
that thou be si-
[lent;
that he be silent ;
tac-'idmo,
tac-ldte,
tdci-ano (tacci-
[-ano),
that we be silent ;
that you be si-
[lent ;
that they be si-
[lent.
V. IMPERATIVE.
1st p. . : . .
tac-lamo noi, let
us be silent *
2d p. tac-i tu,
3d p. tdci-a (tac-
[ci-a) egli,
be thou silent ;
let him be silent ;
tac-ete voi, be
tdci-ano (tacci-|let
[-ano) eglino,}\
ye silent ;
them be si-
[lent
Verbs ending in cere (short) take an i after c, in the past participle
only ; as, I. pdsc-ere,^ to feed ' ; 7. — pasci-ulo, m. s.,pasci-uti, p. ;
pasci-uta, f. s. ; pasci-iite, p., « fed.'
Verbs ending in iere drop the i, whenever it is fol-
lowed by another i ; as3
Empiere, ' to fill.'
(Paradigm of the verbs ending in iere.)
1st p.
II. INDICATIVE.
j . — Present.
|I fill, or do fill, or \\emp-idmo (emp- we fill;
[am filling;" [-'iemo),
* Tdcio, pronounce both the Romans and Florentines, following the orthography
«>f the best prose writers (and not tdccio, as poets have, sometimes, been obliged to
say), to distinguish this from t'accio, a form of the verb taccidre, c to blame.'
REGULAR VERBS.
195
Singular.
Plural.
2d p. 6mp-i,
3d p. empi-e,
thou fillest;
he fills,
\empi-ete,
\empi-ono,
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. . . .
2d p. emp-i tu,
3d p. empi-a
V. IMPERATIVE.
fill thou ;
let him fill ;
emp'iamo,
empi-6te}
empi-ano j
you fill ;
they fill.
1st p. w empi-a
[(empi-e),
2d p. tu empi-a
[or emp-i,
3d p. egli empi-a
[(empi-e),
that I fill, or
[may fill ;
that thou fill ;
that he fill ;
emp-ldmo,
emp-late,
empi-ano,
that we fill ;
that you fill ;
that they fill.
let us fill j
fill ye J
let them fill.
THIRD CONJUGATION.
The verbs of this conjugation are divided into three
classes, those which, in the present of the indicative,
end in o ; those which end in isco ; and those which
have both of these terminations.
Variation of the Verb Sentire.
(Paradigm of the verbs of the third conjugation which,
in the present of the indicative, end in o only.)
Simple Tenses.
1. — Present.
Sent-ire, |to hear.
I. INFINITIVE.
Compound Tenses.
2. — Past.
|j avere sentitOj (to have heard.
196
ANALOGY.
3 — Future.
avere a sentire,
essere per sentire,
dovere sentire,
4. — Present,
sent-endoj |hearing.
to have to hear, or
to be about to hear.
j
GERUND.
5. — Past.
\\ avendo sentitot |having heard.
PARTICIPLE.
6. — Present.
(sent-6nte, s., ) , .
sent-enti,?.,) Bearing.
sent-ito, m. s.,
[sent-iti, p.,
sent-ita, f. s.,
[sent-ite, p.,
II. INDICATIVE.
SIMPLE TENSES.
Singular. Plural.
1. — Present.
1st p. sent-o,
2d p. s6nt-i,
3d p. sent-E,
I hear, or do
[hear, or am
[hearing ;
thou hearest ;
he hears ;
sent-idmo,
sent-ite,
sent-oxo,
we hear ;
you hear ;
they hear.
2. — Imperfect.
[or sent-ia,
2d p. sent-ivi,
3d p. egli sent-
[•iva or sent-ia,
1st p. sent-ii,
2d p. sent-istiy
3d p. sent-i(sent-
1 heard, or did
[hear, or was
[hearing ;
thou heardst ;
he heard ;
sent-ivdmo,
,.
sent-ivdte,
sent-ivano or
\sent-\ano
[(sent-ieno),
3. — Perfect.
I heard, or did
[hear ;
thou heardst ;
he heard ;
sent-immo,
sent'iste,
sent-irono (sent-
[-iro, sen-tir),
we heard ;
you heard ;
they heard.
we heard ;
you heard ;
they heard.
REGULAR VERBS.
197
Singular.
4. — Future.
1st p. sent~ird,
2d p. sent-irdi,
3d p. serit-irti,
I shall or will
[hear ;
thou wilt hear ;
he will hear ;
sent-iremo,
sent-irete,
sent-irdnno,
Plural.
we will hear ;
you will hear ;
they will hear.
COMPOUND TENSES.
5. __ Second Perfect.
1st p. ho sentitOj \ I have heard.
6. — Pluperfect.
1st p. io aveva sentito, \ I had heard,
7. — Second Pluperfect.
1st p. 6boi sentito, \ I had heard,
8. — Future Anterior.
1st p. avrd sentito, \ I shall or will have heard.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
SIMPLE TENSES.
1. — Present.
1st p. w sent-Aj
2d p. tu sent-A.
[or sent-i,
3d p. egli sent-A ,
that I hear, or
[may hear ;
that thou hear ;
that he hear ;
sent-idmo,
sent-idte}
$e"nt-Axo,
that we hear ;
that you hear ;
that they hear.
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. io sent-issi,
2d p. tu sent-issi,
3d p. sent-isse,
if I heard, or
[should hear ;
if thou heardst ;
if he heard ;
sent-issimo,
sent-iste,
sent-issero (sent-
[-fssino),l
COMPOUND TENSES.
if we heard ;
«iik
if you heard;
if they heard.
3. — Perfect.
1st p. 10 dbbia sentito,
IT*
that I have heard, or
[may have heard.
198 ANALOGY.
4. — Pluperfect.
1st p. w avessi sentito, \ if I had heard.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
Singular.
SIMPLE TENSE.
1. — Present.
Plural.
1st p. sent-irei
[(sent-iria),
2d p. sent-ir6sti,
3d p. sent-irebbe
[(sent-iria) ,
I should, would,
[or could hear j
[or might hear j
thou wouldst
[hear ;
he would hear ;
sent-iremmo,
sent-ireste,
sent-irebbero
[(sent-iriano),
we should, would,
[or could hear j
you would hear ;
they would hear.
COMPOUND TENSE.
2. — Past .
1st p. avrdi sentito,
I should, would, or could have
[heard ; or might have heard.
V. IMPERATIVE.
1st p ...
ll sent-idmo noi.
let us hear 5
2d p. sent-i tu,
3d p. sent-A. 6gli,
hear thou ;
let him hear ;
sent-ite voi,
\\ sdnf-ANO eglinoy
hear ye ;
let them hear.
Variation of the Verb Esibire.
(Paradigm of those verbs of the third conjugation,
which, in the present of the indicative, have the termin-
ation isco only.)
I. INFINITIVE.
Simple Tensei.
1. _ Present.
Esib-ire, |to offer.
Compound Tenses.
2. — Past.
|| avere esibito, |to have offered.
REGULAR VERBS.
199
3. — Future.
avere ad esibire, ) . , „
iner* peresMre, I * ^ave o offer or
dovere esibire,
4. — Present,
esib-endo, |offering.
to be about to offer.
j
GERUND.
5.-- Past.
|| avtndo esibito, |having offered.
PARTICIPLE.
6. — Present,
esib-ente, s.,
7. — Past.
esib-ito, m. s., J
eslb-ita^l'S [ offered-
[esib-ite, p., }
II. INDICATIVE.
SIMPLE TENSES.
Singular. Plural.
1. — Present.
1st p.
2dp.
3d p.
esib-iscoj
esib-isci,
esib-iscE,
I offer, or do
[offer, or am
[offering ;
thou offerest ;
he offers ;
esib'idmo,
esib-ite,
esib-iscoxo,
we offer ;
you offer ;
they offer.
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. w esib-wa or esib-ia, \ I offered, or did offer, or
[was offering.
3. — Perfect.
1st p. esib-ti, \ I offered, or did offer.
4. — Future.
1st p. esib-ird, \ I shall or will offer.
COMPOUND TENSES.
5. — Second Perfect.
1st p. ho esibito, \ I have offered.
200
ANALOGY.
6. — Pluperfect.
1st p. 10 aveva esibito, \ I had offered.
7. — Second Pluperfect.
1st p. ebU esibito, \ I had offered.
8. — Future Anterior..
1st p. avrd esibito, \ I shall or will have offered.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
SIMPLE TENSES.
Singular.
1. — Present.
1st p. 10 esib-
[-fscA,
2d p. tu esib-
[-ISCA, or esib-
[-1SCHI,
3d p. egli esib-
r-iscA.
that I offer, or
[may offer j
that thou offer;
that he offer ;
esib-idmo,
esil-idte,
esi6-iscAN
Plural. * *
that we offer ;
that you offer ;
that they offer.
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. w esib-issij \ if I offered, or should offer.
COMPOUND TENSES.
* !
3. —Perfect.
1st p. w dbbia esibito, i that I have offered, or
[may have offered.
4. — Pluperfect.
1st p. w avessi esibito, \ if I had offered.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
SIMPLE TENSE.
1. — Present.
1st p. esib-irdi (esib-iria), 1 I should, would, or could offer ;
[or might offer.
REGULAR VERBS. 201
Singular. Plural.
COMPOUND TENSE.
2.— Past.
1st p. avrei esib'ito, I I should, would, or could have
I [offered; or might have offered.
V. IMPERATIVE.
Istp
2d p. esib-isci,
3d p. esil
offer thou ; || esib-ite,
let him offer ;
let us offer ;
offer ye ;
let them offer.
Variation of the Verb Abborrire.
(Paradigm of those verbs of the third conjugation,
which, in the present of the indicative, end both in o
and isco.)
I. INFINITIVE.
Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses.
1. — Present. 2. — Past .
Jlbborr-ire, |to abhor. || av6re abborritot |to have abhorred.
3. — Future.
avere ad abborrire, } , , , ,
issere per abborrire t < fto ,hav° S^SS **
dovtre abbornret ) t0 be ab°Ut tO abh°r>
GERUND.
4. — Present. 5. — Past.
abborr-endo, {abhorring, \\av6ndo abborritot [having abhorred.
PARTICIPLE.
6. — Present. 7. — Past.
abborr-ente, s., > K, . abborr-ito, m. s.,
abborr-enti, p., Jab«o"ing. [abborr4ti, p., ^ abhorred.
abborr-ita, f. s.,
P-»
202
ANALOGY.
Singular.
II. INDICATIVE.
SIMPLE TENSES.
1. — Present.
l8tp.a&&orr-o,or I abhor, or do
[abborr-iscoj
3d p. a&60Vr-E,or
[aooorr-fscE,
[abhor, or am
abborr-idmo,
[abhorring;
2d p. abborr-i, or thou abhorrest ; abborr-ite,
[abborr-faci,
he abhors ;
abborr-ovo, or
[a&0orr-fscoNO,
2. — Imperfect.
Plural.
we abhor ;
you abhor ;
they abhor.
1st p. io abborr-wa or abborr-ia,< I abhorred, or did abhor, or
[was abhorring.
3. — Perfect.
1st p. abborr-ii, \ I abhorred, or did abhor.
4. — Future.
1st p. abborr-ird, \ I shall or will abhor,
COMPOUND TENSES.
5. — Second Perfect.
1st p. ho abborrito, \ I have abhorred.
6. — Pluperfect.
1st p. io at>eea abborritot \ I had abhorred.
7. — Second Pluperfect.
1st p. ebbi abborrito, \ I had abhorred.
8. — Future interior.
1st p. avrd abborrito, \ I shall or will have abhorred.
REGULAR VERBS.
203
Singular.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
SIMPLE TENSES.
1. — Present.
Plural.
Istp.t0a00<5rr-A,ithat I abhor, or
[may abhor ;
that thou abhor ;
that he abhor ;
[or abborr-i', or
[a&00rr-iscA,or
[«000rr-iscHi,
3d p. egli abborr-
~-A, or abborr-
[-A, or c
[-fsCA,
abborr-idmo,
abborr-idte,
TO,ora-&-
[oorr-iscANO,,
that we abhor ;
that you abhor ;
that they abhor.
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. 10 abborr-issij \ if I abhorred, or should abhor.
COMPOUND TENSES.
3. — Perfect.
1st p. 10 dbbia abborrito,
that I have abhorred, or
[may have abhorred.
4. — Pluperfect.
1st p. io avessi abborrito, \ if I had abhorred.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
SIMPLE TENSE.
1. — Present.
1st p. abborr-irei (abborr-iria).
I should, would, or could abhor ;
[or might abhor.
COMPOUND TENSE.
2. — Past .
1st p. avrei abborritot
I should, would, 0r could have ab-
[horred 5 0r might have abhorred.
204
ANALOGY.
V. IMPERATIVE.
Singi
1st p. ...
ilar,
i
Plur
abborr-idmo^noi,
abborr-ite voi,
«&5orr-ANo, or
[a&&orr-fscANO
[eglino,
al.
let us abhor ;
abhor ye ;
let them abhc
2d p. abborr-i, or
\abborr-i sci tuy
3d p. a65Jrr-A,or
[egli,
abhor thou ;
let him abhor ;
[For a list of Verbs of the Third Conjugation, that in the present of the indicative
end in 0, in tsco, or in o and *isco: see APPENDIX, G.]
Verbs ending in cire, in order to preserve the soft
sound of the c in all their inflections, take an i after that
consonant, whenever it is followed by a, o ; as,
Cucire, c to sew.'
(Paradigm of the verbs ending in are.)
II. INDICATIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. cuci~o,
2d p. cuc-ij
3d p. cwc-e,
I sew, do sew, or
[am sewing ;
thou sewest ;
he sews ;
cuc-ldmo (cuc-
[-imo),
cue-lie ,
cuci-ono,
we sew ;
you sew ;
they sew.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. w cuci-a,
2d p. tu cuci-a
[or cuc-i,
3d p. egli cuci-a,
that I sew, or
[may sew ;
that thou sew ;
that he sew ;
cuc-ldmo,
cuc-idte,
cuci-ano,
that we sew ;
that you sew ;
that they sew.
REGULAR VERBS. 205
V. IMPERATIVE.
Singular. Plural.
1st p. . . .
2d p. cuc~i tUj
3d p. cwci-i
sew thou ;
let him sew ;
^
cuc-ite voi,
cuci-ano eglino,
let us sew ;
sew ye ;
let them sew.
REMARKS ON THE FOREGOING VERBS.
There are some verbs of the third conjugation that
belong also to the second ; having two terminations in
the infinitive, one in ire, the other in ere ; as,
appetire, appttere, to desire ;
inghiottire, inghiottere, . to swallow :
some, that belong also to the first conjugation; having
the two terminations ire and are ; as,
impazzire, impazzare, to grow mad ;
incoraggire, incoraggiare, to encourage :
and some others, that belong to all three of the conju-
gations ; as,
ruggire, ruggere, rugghiare, to roar ;
olire, olere, olezzare, to be fragrant.
These verbs are differently varied, according to the
conjugation to which their different terminations re-
spectively belong.
The verbs of the second and third conjugation, in
the first, second, and third persons singular of the
present of the indicative and conjunctive, and in the
second and third persons singular of the imperative,
have constantly the accent on the penultimate syllable ;
as, temo, temi, teme, — tema ; sento, senti, sente, —
senta, &c. Of those of the first conjugation, some
have the accent on the penultimate syllable ; as, amo,
ami, ama, — ami ; and others, on the antepenultimate ;
18
206 ANALOGY.
as, mormoro ('I murmur '), mormori, mormora, — mor-
mori, &tc.
[For rules for determining when the verbs of the first conjugation, in the present
of the indicative, conjunctive, and imperative, have the accent on the penultimate or
the antepenultimate syllable, see APPENDIX, H.]
JLmbire, c to crave,' in the first person plural of the
present of the indicative, conjunctive, and imperative ;
— and in the second person plural of the present of the
conjunctive, makes abbiamo ambizione, — abbiate ambi-
zione, to distinguish these persons from the correspond-
ing ones of the verb ambiare, ' to amble.5
Jlrdire, c to dare,' in the first person plural of the
present of the indicative, conjunctive, and imperative ;
— in the second person plural of the present of the con-
junctive, — and in the gerund makes, abbiamo ardire
or ardimento, — abbiate ardire, &c., — avendo ardire ;
and not ardiamo, — ardiate, — ardendo, which come
from ardere, 'to burn.'
Bollire, ' to boil,' in the first person plural of tHe
present of the indicative, conjunctive, and imperative, —
and in the second person plural of the present of the
conjunctive, changes II into gl, and makes bogliamo, —
bogliate, to distinguish these persons from the corre-
sponding ones of the verb bolldre, ' to stamp,' < to set a
seal.'
Gioire, ' to rejoice,' in the first person plural of the
present of the indicative, conjunctive, and imperative,
— in the second person plural of the present of the
conjunctive, — and in the past participle, borrows the
corresponding forms of the verb goder^ and makes
godiamo, — godiate, — goduto.
Smaltire, 'to digest,' in the first person plural of the
present of the indicative, conjunctive, and imperative, —
and in the second person plural of the present of the
conjunctive, makes proccuriamo di smaltir e,-*-pr occur i-
dte di smaltire ; and not smaltidmo, — smaltidie, which
come from smaltdre, ' to enamel.'
REGULAR VERBS.
207
Suggere, ' to suck,' in the past participle borrows
that of succhiare, and makes succhiato, ' sucked.5
Many regular verbs, in some tenses, have also an
irregular formation, which will be noticed in treating of
Irregular Verbs.
EXAMPLES.
Egli e il vero, ch* w ho AMATO, It is true, that I have loved,
ed AMO Guiscdrdo, e. quanta and do love Guiscard, and I will
viverd w V AMERO ; e se ap- love him as long as I live ; and if
presso la morte s' AMA, non mi we love after death, I will not
rimarrd d' AMARZo. (Bocc. g. 4. cease to love him.
Qu6l che noi CERCHIAMO di
fuggire. (Bocc. Introd.)
Che noi non PREGHIAMO cose
sozze, e non le lascldmo PRE-
GARE. (Albert. 2. 10.)
BACERETE il pib a Nostro
Signore a nome mw. (Bernb.
Lett.)
Bonta non b che sua mem6ria
FREGI. (Dant. Inf. 8.)
Guardate, che '/ venir su non
vi NOI. (Dant. Purg. 9.)
TEMETTE di non dovervi 6s-
sere ricevuto. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 1.)
£ssi ruppero le uova degli
dspidi, e TESSERONO le tele de3
rdgnoli. (Mor. S. Gregor.)
Le leggi, cos}, le divine come
le umdne, TACIONO. (Bocc. g. 6.
n, 1.)
• That which we endeavour to
avoid.
For we do not ask for vulgar
things, nor let others ask for
them.
You will kiss the feet of Our
Lord [the Pope] for me.
No virtue Jends its lustre to his
memory.
Take heed that your coming up-
ward does not harm you.
He feared he should not be re-
ceived there.
They broke the eggs of the
asps, and wove spider's webs.
The laws, divine as well as
human, are silent.
208
ANALOGY.
JSssa, che la sera davdnti ce-
ndto non avea, da fame costretta3
a pdscere V Me si diede, e PAS-
CIUTA come pote, piangdndo, a
vdrj pensieri della sua futura
vita si diede. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 6.)
Sostien persona tu di capitdno,
— E di mm lontandnza EMPI il
difetto. (Tass. Ger. 11., 56.)
Esser non pud, che quell* an-
gelic* a/ma, — Non SENTA 'I suon
dell' amorose note. (Petr. c. 38.)
Vdssi per tdnto a Giac6bbe, e
si ESIBISCONO le soddisfazioni
maggiori, che darsi pdssano a
uomini forestidri. (Segn. Pred.
25.)
E lo sveglidto cid che x&de
ABBORRE. (Dant. Par. 26.)
She, that the evening before
had not supped, compelled by
hunger, began to feed herself on
herbs, and after she had fed her-
self as well as she could, weeping
abandoned herself to the various
thoughts of her future life.
Do thou support the office of
captain, and supply the want of
my absence.
It cannot be possible, that that
angelic soul does not hear the
sound of the amorous notes.
They go therefore to Jacob,
and offer him the greatest satis-
faction, which could be given to
strangers.
And the upstartled abhors what
he sees.
Jlblorrente, [doe] che ABBOR- Abhorring, [that is to say] that
RfscE. (Crusca.) " abhors.
Con tal cura viene, — Che
la pidga da sezzo si RICUCIA.
(Dant. Purg. 25.)
Tu ancora non s6i ben tempe-
rdto in qudsta virtu di APPETIRE
gli onori. (Casa, lett. 70.)
La meditazione le mostrdva,
che ella dovesse APPETERE, e do-
manddre. (Seal. S. Agost.)
E non par mica vergogna, —
Tra i bicchidri IMPAZZIR tre
volte r anno. (Red. Ditir. 37.)
La donna sentiva si fdtto do-
lore, che quasi ri> era per IM-
PAZZARE. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 10.)
E 9n sul cor quasi fero leon
r IE, — La nolte allor, quand'
posdr dovrei. (Petr. s. 228.)
It is with such care, that the
wound finally heals.
Thou hast not yet moderated
thyself in the virtue of desiring
honor.
Meditation taught her what she
ought to desire and ask.
And it does not seem to be a
shame to get crazy among glasses
three times a year.
The woman was so much af-
flicted, that she came near being
crazy.
And in my heart, like a fierce
lion, it roars in the night when I
ought to repose,
REGULAR VERBS.
209
Va come Ii6ne,che RUGGISCE, It goes, like a lion that roars,
cercdndo cui possa divordre. seeking whom he may devour.
(Cavalc. Med. cuor.)
Posciache 'Ifuoco alqudnto ebbe After that the fire had roared
RUGGHIATO. (Dant. Inf. 27.) awhile.
EXERCISE XVI.
[Let the learner change the terminations dre^ ere, ire, of the infinitive mood of
the following Italian verbs, for the particular terminations t"hey respectively take
in the person and tense indicated by the English, according to the foregoing
Paradigms.]
FIRST CONJUGATION.
J. 1.* — To love.
Jlmdre.
4. — loving. 7. — loved __ II.
am-dre. am-dre.
1. — I love, thou speakest, he sings, we play, you dance,
am-dre, parl-dre, cant-are, son-are, ball-are,
they study. 2. — I walked, thou passedst, he called,
studi-dre. cammin-dre, pass-dre, chiam-dre,
we prattled, you confessed, they ordered. 3. — I
ciarl-dre, confess-dre, ordin-dre.
confirmed, thou didst deliver, he considered, we preserved,
conferm-dre, consegn-dre, consider-dre, conserv-dre,
you advised, they disputed. 4. — I will expect, thou
consigli-dre, contrast-are. aspett-dre,
wilt imagine, he will assault, we will dedicate, you will
immagin-dre, assalt-are, dedic-dre,
assure, they will^ seek. 5. — I have praised.f - — IIL
assicur-dre, cere-are. lod-dre,
1. — I may fast, thou mayest besiege, he may ride, we
digiun-dre, assedi-dre, cavalc-dre,
may punish, you may prove, they may practise, 2. —
castig-dre, prov-dre, pratic.-dre.
* To facilitate reference, we use, in this and the following exercises on verbs, the
numbers, which we have affixed to the moods and tenses in the Paradigms.
•f The learner can form the compound tenses of any of these verbs by joining
their past participle to the simple tenses of the auxiliary verb avere, ' to have.'
18*
210 ANALOGY.
I might refuse, thou mightest invent, he might accept, we
rifiut-are, invent-dre, accett-dre,
might accompany, you might experience, they might ad-
accompagn-dre, speriment-dre, amministr-
mim'ster. IV. 1. — I would prolong, thou wouldst ven-
-dre. prolung-dre, arrisic-
ture, he would eat, we would pray, you would envy,
-are, mangi-are, preg-dre, invidi-dre,
they would tire. V. — ask thou, let him judge, let
annoi-dre. domand-dre, giudic-dre,
us change, carry ye back, let them wait.
cambi-drc, riport-dre, aspett-dre.
SECOND CONJUGATION.
I. 1. — To fear. 4. — fearing. 7. — feared __ II.
Tem&re. tern-ire,. tem-ere.
1. — I believe, thou feceivest, he sells, we repeat, you
cred-ere, ric6v-ere, vend-ere, ripet-ere,*
enjoy, they depend. 2. — I wove, thou didst beat down,
god-tire, dip£nd-ere. tess-erc, abbdtt-ere,
he rivaled, we debated, you exacted, they consented.
comp6t-ere, dibdtt-ere, esig-ere, accdd-ere.
3. — I mowed, thou didst beat, he groaned, we sheared,
miet-ere, bdtt-ere,. gem-ere, tond-ert,
you reflected, they turned. 4. — I will provide, thou
riflett-ere, intess-ere.
wilt fill, he will rage, we will feed, you will lose, they
etnpi-ere, frdm-ere, pdsc-ere, ptrd-ere,
will press. - III. 1. — I may cleave, thou mayest render,
prem-ere. jend-ere, rtnd-ere,
he may resolve, we may re-enjoy, you may unweave,
risolv-ere, rigod-6re, st&ss-ere,
they may succeed. 2. — I might yield, thou mightest
succed-ere. c6d-ere, assolv-
absolve, he might grant, we might dissolve, you might fill
-ere, conc6d-ere, dissolv~eret ridmpi-
REGULAR VERBS. 211
again, they might suck. IV. 1. — I would combat,
-ere, sugg-ere. combatt-ere,
thou wouldst precede, he would hang up, we would sell
prec6d-ere, append-ere, rivend-
over again, you would proceed, they would succumb.
-ere, proc6d-ere, soccomb-ere.
V. — desist thou, let him drink, let us accomplish, recede
desist-ere, b^v-ere, compi-ere, ricdd-ere,
ye, let them pour out.*
mesc-ere.
THIRD CONJUGATION.
I. 1. — To hear. 4. — hearing. 7. — heard. II.
Sentire. sent-ire. sent-ire.
1. — I sleep, thou consentest, he understands, we rejoice,
dorm-ire, consent-ire, cap-ire, gio-iret
you transfer, they serve. 2. — I fled, thou embellishedst,
trasfer-ire, serv-ire. fugg-ire, abell-ire,
he animated, we weakened, you attacked, they admonished.
anim-ire, indebbol-ire, assal-ire, ammon-ire.
3. — I constructed, thou conceivedst, he banished, we
costru-ire, concep-ire, band-ire,
assisted, you supplied, they finished. 4. — I will favor,
accud-ire, suppl-ire, Jin-ire. favor-ire,
thou wilt differ, he will cure, we will hinder, you will
differ-ire, guar-ire, imped-ire,
infer, they will grow proud. III. 1. — I may assent,
infer-ire, insuperb'ire. assent-ire,
thou mayest furnish, he may chide, we may boil,
forn-ire, garr-ire, boll-ire,
you may crave, they may establish. 2. — I might
amb-ire, stabil-ire. un~
unite, thou mightest betray, he might nurish, we
-ire, trad-ire, nutr-ire,
Irregular Verbs.
212 ANALOGY.
might warrant, you. might encourage, they might ^ plead.
• garant-ire, incoragg-ire, piat-ire.
IV. 1. — I would restore, thou wouldst quench, he
restitu-irej sop-ire,
would exhaust, we would define, you would ascertain,
esaur-ire, defin-ire, chiar-ire,
they would season. V. — act thou, let him hear, let
cond-ire. ag-ire, sent-ire,
us dare, obey ye, let them punish.
ard-ire, obled-ire, pun-ire.
VARIATION OF PASSIVE VERBS.
Passive verbs are formed by joining the verb essere,
6 to be,' to the past participle of active verbs.
Passive verbs, therefore, through all their tenses, are
varied with the auxiliary verb essere.
Variation of the Verb Essere Amato.
(Paradigm of the passive verbs.)
I. INFINITIVE.
Simple Tenses.
1. — Present.
famdto, m. s., \
3 H> P-> I to he
^ amdto, f. s., | loved.
Compound Tenses.
2. — Past.
f stdto amdto. m.s.. \ . ,
esse-) stdti amdti* p., ( J°have
re) s^aam^a,f.s., (,een,
v stofea?na^,p., ^ 1(
3. — Future.
avere ad tssere ^ am&i m ^ C to have to be loyed or
^sere per essere >amdta f < to be about to be loved,
doudre Essere > ' ^ (
* The past participle of passive verbs, like that of essere, agrees with the suljett
of the verb in gender and number.
REGULAR VERBS.
213
4. — Present.
f amdto, m. s.,
5. — Past.
amto, m. s., \
^1.ps:; Ltl
[-e,P.,J
s, f
s*n- \stdtaamdta,
do I **ife om&e, p..
II. INDICATIVE.
Singular.
Plural.
SIMPLE TENSES.
1. — Present.
1st p. to sono
[amdto, m.,
[amdta, f.,
2d p. sei amdto,
[-a,
3d p. e amdto,
I am loved ;
thou art loved ;
he is loved, she
[is loved ;
sidmo amdti, m,,
[amdte, L,
siete amdti, ~e,
eglino sono amd-
[ti, elleno -e,
we are loved;
you are loved ;
they are loved.
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. Co era ama-
I was loved ;
eravdmo amdti,
we were loved ;
[to, -a,
[-e,
2d p. en amdto,
thou wast loved ;
eravdte amdti,
you were loved ;
i-a,
[-e,
3d p. egli era
he was loved, she
erano amdti, -e,
they were loved.
[amdto, ilia -a,
[was loved ;
3. — Perfect.
1st p. fui amdto,
I was loved ;
fummo amdti, -e,
we were loved ;
[-a,
2d p. fosti amd-
thou wast loved ;
fbste amdti, -e,
you were loved ;
\to, -a,
3d p. fu amdto,
he was loved, she
furono amdti, -e,
they were loved.
[•«;
[was loved ;
4. — Future.
1st p. sard amd-
I shall or will be
saremo amdti,-e,
we shall or will
[to, -a,
[loved ;
[be loved ;
2d p. sardi amd-
thou wilt be lov-
sarete amdti, -e,
you will be lov-
\to, -a,
[ed;
[ed;
3d p. sard amd-
he will be loved,
sardnno amdti,
they will be lov-
\to, -a,
[she will be
[-e,
[ed.
[loved ;
214
ANALOGY.
Singular.
COMPOUND TENSES.
5. — Second Perfect.
Plural.
1st p. w sono std-
[to amdto,
[stdta amdta,
I have been lov-
[ed;
sidmo stdti amd-
[ti, state amdte,
we have been
[loved.
6.— Pluperfect.
1st p. w e"ra stdto amdto, std-
I had been loved.
[ta amata,
7. — Second Pluperfect.
1st p./wi stdto amdto, stdta I had been loved.
[amdta,
8. — Future Anterior.
1st p. sard stdto amdto, stdta} I shall or will have been loved.
[amdta,
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
SIMPLE TENSES.
1. — Present.
1st p. Co sia amd-
that I be loved,
pidmo amdti, -e,
that we be loved ;
[to, -a,
[or may be lov-
[ed;
2d p. tu sia amd-
that thou be lov-
sidte amdtij -e,
that you be lev-
Ito, -a,
[ed;
fed ;
3d p. egli sia
that he be loved ;
siano amdti, -e,
that they be lov-
[amdto, ella -a?
[she be loved;
[ed.
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. w fossi
if I were loved,
fossimo amdti,-e, if we were loved ;
[amdto, -a,
[or should be
[loved ;
2d p. tu fossi
if thou wert lov-
^
foste amdti, -e,
if you were lov-
[amdto, -a,
[ed;
[ed;
Sd p. fosse amd-
if he were loved,
fossero amdti, -e,
if they were lov-
l*o, -a,
[she were loved j
[ed.
REGULAR VERBS.
235
COMPOUND TENSES.
3. — Perfect.
1st p. 10 sia stdto amdto, stdta that I have been loved, or
[amdta, [may have been loved,
4. — Pluperfect.
1st p. iofossi stdto amdto, stdta
[amdla,
if I had been loved.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
Singular.
SIMPLE TENSE.
1. — Present.
Plural.
1st p. sarei amd-
[to, -a,
2d p. saresti
[amdto, -a,
3d p. sarebbe
[amdto, -a,
I should, would,
[or could be lov-
[ed ; or might be
[loved ;
thou wouldst be
[loved ;
he would be lov-
[ed, she would
l~hf» lovftrl :
saremmo amdti,
sareste amdtij -e,
sarebbero amdti,
we should,would,
[or could be
[loved ;
you would be
[loved ;
they would be
[loved.
COMPOUND TENSE.
2. — Past.
1st p. sam stdto amdto, stdta
[amdta,
I should, would, or could have
[been loved ; or might have been
[loved.
V. IMPERATIVE.
2d p. sii amdto ,
[-a,tu,
3d p. sia amdto ,
[egli, -a ilia,
be thou loved;
- -ift .! > -. • 1
let him be loved ;
[her be loved ;
sidmo amdti, -e,
[noi,
sidte amdti , ~e,
~voi,
let us be loved ;
be ye loved ;
siano amdti egli- let them be lov-
[no9 -e elleno,
216 ANALOGY.
Many active verbs become passive by taking the
particle si : — domandarsi, * to be asked ' ; but then
they are used in the third person only, — as, si domandk,
6 it is asked ' ; si E domandato, cit has been asked ' ; &c.
VARIATION OF NEUTER VERBS.
Neuter verbs are generally varied with the auxiliary
verb essere, ' to be,' according to the conjugation to
which they belong.
Variation of the Perb Par tire.
(Paradigm of the neuter verbs.)
I. INFINITIVE.
Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses.
1. — Present. 2.— Past.
Partire, |to depart. \\6sserepartito, m.s.-z,p., to have de-
[partita, f. s. -c, p.,* [parted.
3. — Future.
av6re a partire,
, ,
essereper partire, ° ^ave, to f,
doverepartire, 5 part>
. GERUND.
4. — Present. 5. — Past .
partendo, |departing. || ess6ndo partito, \ having departed.
* The past participle of the neuter verbs that are varied with tssere, agrees with
the subject of the verb in gender and number. .
pariito, m. s., \
partiti, p.,
partite, p. J
REGULAR VERBS. 217
PARTICIPLE.
6. — Present. 7. — Past.
J^J3?,'£;''' }**^S' j>r^'m's'>
partite
II. INDICATIVE.
SIMPLE TENSES.
1. — Present.
1st p. pdrto, I depart, or do depart, or
[am departing.
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. io partiva, I departed, or did depart, or
[was departing.
3. — Perfect.
1st p. partii, | I departed, or did depart.
4. — Future.
1st p. partirdj \ I shall or will depart.
COMPOUND TENSES.
5. — Second Perfect.
££o,-a,| I have departed.
6. — Pluperfect.
1st p. 10 erapartito, -a,| 1 had departed.
7. — Second Pluperfect.
1st p.fuipartito, -a, \ I had departed.
8. — Future Anterior,,
1st p. sard partito, -a, \ I shall or will have departed.
19
218 ANALOGY.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
SIMPLE TENSES.
1. -— Present.
1st p. 10 pdrta, | that I depart, or may depart.
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. io partissi, \ if I departed, or should depart.
COMPOUND TZNSES.
3. — Perfect.
lBtp.iosiapartitot-a, that I have departed, or
[may have departed.
4. • — Pluperfect.
1st p. wfossipartito, •«,[ if I had departed.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
SIMPLE TENSE.
1. — Present.
1st p. partireij j I should, would, or could depart ;
[or might depart.
COMPOUND TENSE. ^
2. — Past.
1st p. sarei partita, -a,
I should, would, or could have de-
parted j or might have departed.
V. IMPERATIVE.
Istp
2d p. parti tu,
depart thou.
REGULAR VERBS. 219
There are some neuter verbs which require to be
varied with avere ; as, vivere, ' to live ' ; dormire, c to
sleep ' ; tacere, £ to keep silent ' ; parldre, ' to speak ' ;
gridare, < to cry out ' ; ridere, ' to laugh ' ; scherzare,
6 to sport ' ; pranzdre, ' to dine ' ; cenare, ' to sup ' ;
passeggiare, ' to walk ' ; cavalcare, ' to ride ' ; navigare,
1 to sail ' ; tardare, ' to retard ' ; indugiare, ' to delay ' ;
&c.: — ho vivuto, £ I have lived ' ; ho dormito,.' I have
slept ' ; ho taciuto, ' I have kept silent ' ; &c.
Others are indifferently varied with the auxiliary
avere, or essere ; as, durare, ' to last ' ; succombere, ' to
sink under'; ammutire, 'to become dumb'; impallidire,
'* to grow pale ' ; &c.: — e durato or ha durato, ' it has
lasted ' ; &c.
Others may be varied with either avere, or essere ; as,
morire, guarire ; but the change of the auxiliary alters
their signification: — avere morto, ' to. have killed';
essere morto, ' to be killed,' or c to be dead ' ; avere gua-
rito, l to have cured ' ; essere guarito, ' to be cured,' or
* to have recovered.'
Dovere, ' to be obliged ' ; potere, ' to be able ' ; voUre,
i to be willing,' ' to will,' ' to wish ' ; when joined to a
pronominal verb ; as, arrendersi, ' to surrender one's
self ' ; frenarsi, c to restrain one's self '; perdersi, 'to
lose one's self ' ; require to be varied with essere : —
si e dovuto arrendere, ' he has been obliged to surrender
himself ' ; non mi son potato frenare, ' I have not been
able to restrain myself; ti sei voluto perdere, ' tbou
wishedst to lose thyself.'*
* Many of the foregoing verbs are irregular, as will be shown in their proper plae«.
220
ANALOGY.
VARIATION OF PRONOMINAL VERBS.
Pronominal verbs are varied with the auxiliary essere,
6 to be,' according to the conjugation to which their
termination belongs.
Variation of the J^erb Pentirsi.
(Paradigm of the pronominal verbs.)
I. INFINITIVE.
Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses.
1. — Present. 2. — Past.
Pentir-si, Ito repent one's \\esser-sipentito, I to have repented
[self. I' [one's self.
3. — Future.
to have to repent one's self, or
e' *> be about toP repent one's self.
GERUND.
4. — Present. 5. — Past.
pent6ndo-si,
repenting one's \\essendo-sipenti- having repented
[self. II \to, [one's self.
PARTICIPLE.
6. — Present.
7. — Past.
pentente-si, s., ) repenting one's
pententi-si, p., 5 se^-
pentito-si,m.s.j
lennto-si, m.s., j
[pentiti-si, p., f [having] repent-
ientita-si. f. s., ^ ed one's self.
pentita
[penti<e-si, p.,
Singular.
REGULAR VERBS.
II. INDICATIVE,
SIMPLE TENSES.
1. — Present.
221
Plural.
1st p. 10 mi pen-
[to,
Z^y.tipenti,
3d p. si pe'nte,
I repent myself;
thou repentest
[thyself;
he repents him-
[self;
noi ci pentidmo,
vi pentitej
si pentono,
we repent our-
[selves ;
you repent your-
[selves ;
they repent them-
[selves.
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. mipentiva, j I repented myself.
3. — Perfect.
1st p. mi pentiij \ I repented myself.
4. — Future.
1st p. mipentird, \ I shall or will repent myself.
COMPOUND TENSES.
5. — Second Perfect.
1st p. mi sono pentito, -a, \ I have repented myself.
6.— Pluperfect.
1st p. mi era pentito , -a, | I had repented myself.
7. — Second Pluperfect.
1st p. mifuipentzto, -a, \ I had repented myself.
8. — Future Anterior.
1st p. mi sard pentito, -a, II shall or will have repented
[myself.
222 ANALOGY.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
SIMPLE TENSES.
1. — Present.
1st p. mi penta, that I repent myself, or may
[repent myself.
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. mipentissij I if I repented myself, or should
[repent myself*
COMPOUND TENSES.
3, — Perfect.
1st p. mi sia pentito, -a, I that I have repented myself, or
[may have repented myself.
4. — Pluperfect.
1st p. mifossi pentito, -a, | if I had repented myself.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
SIMPLE TENSE.
1. — Present.
1st p. mi pentirdi, I I should, would, or could repent
I [myself ; or might repent myself.
COMPOUND TENSE.
2. _ Past.
1st p. w sareipentito, -a,
I should, would, or could have re-
[pented myself; or might have
[repented myself.
REGULAR VERBS.
223
V. IMPERATIVE.
Singular. Plural.
1st p. ...
pentidmo-ci noi,
let us repent oui-
fselves ;
2d p. penti-ti tu,
repent thyself ;
pentite-vi voi,
L •" }
repent your-
[selves j
3d p.sip6nta,or
[p£nta-si egli,
let him repent
[himself;
si pentano or
[pJntan-si
[eglino,
let them repent
[themselves.
A great number of active and neuter verbs may become
pronominal by the addition of the conjunctive pronouns
mi, ti, si, &c. either in the objective or in the relation
of attribution ; and then these verbs are varied with
the auxiliary essere, ' to be ' ; as, loddre, ' to praise ' ;
dare, ' to give ' ; tacere, c to keep silent ' :
mi sono ddto un colpo, I have given [to] myself a
blow ;
ti sii ddto per vinto, thou hast given thyself up as
conquered ;
si & loddtOj he has praised himself;
ci sidmo taciuti, we have kept ourselves silent.
Usage, however, in some instances allows us also
to employ the auxiliary avere, c to have ' ; but then the
conjunctive pronouns mi, ti, si, &c. are always in the
relation of attribution ; as,
melo sono or weT ho goduto,
Ulo s6i or teV hai creduto,
seV b or seV ha bevuto,
I have enjoyed it ;
thou hast believed it ;
he has drunk it.
224 ANALOGY.
VARIATION OF UNIPERSONAL VERBS.
Unipersonal verbs are generally varied with the aux-
iliary ayere, ' to have,' according to the conjugation to
which they belong.
Variation of the Verb Piovere.
(Paradigm of the unipersonal verbs.)
I. INFINITIVE.
Simple Tenses. Compound Tenses.
1. — Present. 2. — Past.
Piovere, jto rain. || avere piovuto 9 jto have rained.
3. — Future.
avere a piovere, > to have to rain, or
essereper piovere, $ to t>e about to rain.
GERUND.
4. — Present. 5. — Past .
piovJndo, [raining. || avendo piovuto , (having rained.
PARTICIPLE.
6. — Present. 7. — Past.
piov6nte, [raining. |j piovuto, trained.
II. INDICATIVE.
SIMPLE TENSES.
1. — Present.
Id p. piove, I it rains, it does rain, or it is rain-
[ing.
REGULAR VERBS. 225
2. — Imperfect.
3d p. pioveva, or piovea, I it rained, it did rain, or it was
[raining,
3. — Perfect.
3d p.piove, piove'tte, or piovve I it rained, or it did rain,
[(piobbe), I
4. — Future.
3d p. pioverci, \ it will rain.
COMPOUND TENSES.
5. — Second Perfect.
3d p. hapiovuto, \ it has rained.
6. — Pluperfect.
3d p. av6va piovuto , | it had rained.
7. — Second Pluperfect.
3d p. e'5&e piovuto, \ it had rained.
8. — Future Anterior.
2d p. avrti piovuto, \ it will have rained.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
SIMPLE TENSES.
1. — Present.
3d p. piova, \ that it rains, or may rain.
2. — Imperfect.
3d p. piovesse, \ if it rained, or should rain.
COMPOUND TENSES.
3. — Perfect.
3d n. dboia piovuto, that it has rained, or may have
[rained.
226 ANALOGY.
4. — Pluperfect.
3d p. avesse piovuto, \ if it had rained.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
SIMPLE TENSE.
1. — Present.
3d p. pioverdbbe (pioveria),| it would or could rain, or might
[rain.
COMPOUND TENSE.
2. — Past.
3d p. avrebbe piovuto, \ it would or could have rained, or
\ [might have rained.
V. IMPERATIVE.
3d p.piova, \ let it rain.
The following are the unipersonal verbs most in use :
aggiorndre, to be day ; I gelare v ? t f .
annottare, to grow night ; i ghiaccidre, $
balendre ? . i:^ut« rdighiacciare ? , .,
tO h-hten 5 I dimoidre, to thaw 5
tupnare, to thunder; \farfreddo, to be cold ;
pidvere, to rain ; [far chidro, to be light ;
f, to rain very hard ,\far buio, to be dark;
nevicdre, to snow ;
grandindre
tempestdre
e I to hail ;
> 3
far vento, to be windy ;
far buon tempo, to be good weather ;
far cattivo tempo^Q be bad weather.
The following verbs, though not unipersonal in them-
selves, are often used unipers anally, and may have the
third person plural, as well as singular ; and are varied
with the auxiliary essere, c to be ' :
REGULAR VERBS.
227
accaddre,
i inci^scere,
avvenire,
to happen ;
displace™.
to displease ;
occorrere,
spiactre,
aggraddre,
piacere,
to please ;
partre,
sembrdre,
to seem ;
appartenere, to belong ;
bastdre, to be enough ;
speitart,
toccdre,
to belong ;
bisogndre j> to be needful .
far uopo,
convenire, $
importdre, to be important;
dipendere, to depend ;
far d' uopo,
far mestieri,
far di mestieri,
to be necessary.
To these may be added all
passive by taking the particle
after them
verbs which become
si, either before or
which are varied in the third person both
singular and plural, and with the auxiliary essere ; as,
vedersi, ' to be seen ' :— si vede, c it is seen ' ; si sono
veduti, 'they have been seen'; biasimarsi, ' to be
blamed ' ; si sono biasimali, ' they have been blamed ' ;
fee,
E'ssere, c to be,' is also used unipersonally, both in
the singular and plural, when it is joined to the particles
ci or vi ; as, esserci or esservi, c to be here,' or * to be
there.' It is varied as follows :
Variation of the Verb Essere, unipersonally used.
I. INFINITIVE.
Simple Tenses.
1. — Present.
esser-ci or esser- 1 to be here or
[-t», I [to be there.
esser-ci
orlsser
>r esser-
~m>
Compound Tenses.
2. — Past.
stdtOjm.s.j
( stto>m's-> )
I *tdti> P-« ( to
< stdtajtS (be
I stdte, p., >
have
been there.
3. — Future.
6sser-ci or &sser-m per tssere, > t h t be ther QT
a^r-ci or avtr-m adtssere, S be about to be ^^
ao^Jer-c^ or aover-w essere, 3
228
ANALOGY.
4. — Present.
5. — Past.
^re being.
f8tdto,m.8.9 / h
essendo-ci or 1 [staft, p., 1 h .
essendo-vij A stata, f. s., 1 , 5
PARTICIPLE.
II. INDICATIVE.
SIMPLE TENSES.
Singular. Plural.
1 . — Present.
3d p. c' £ or u' £,ihere is, or thereiicisonoormsdnoJthere are.
[is; II
2. — Imperfect.
3d p. c' ^ra or v' there was ; lie' erano or t>'
3. — Perfect.
3d p. ci fu or m there was ; I lei furono or vi
[furono,
there were.
there were.
4. — Future.
3d p. ci sarva; orlthere shall or will I lei sardnno or m
Fm «or^J The:'' \saranno.
there shall or will
[be;" [saranno, [be.
COMPOUND TENSES.
5. — Second Perfect.
3d p. c' £ or t>' £|there has been ; II ci sono or vi sonolthere have been.
[S^o,m.,-a,f.,|
* Wanting.
REGULAR VERBS.
229
Singular.
Plural.
6. — Pluperfect.
3d p. cj ira or u'lthere had been ; lie' irano orw' era-lthere had been.
[6ra stdtOj -a,\ II [no stdti, -e,\
7. — Second Pluperfect.
3d p. d fu or wlthere had been ; \\ci furono or wlthere had been.
[fu stdto, -a,| II [/zmmosfafve,!
8. — Future Anterior.
3dp.cisarcL.orvi
[sard stdto, -a,
there will have
[been ;
ci sardnno or «i there will have
[sardnno stdti
[been.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
SIMPLE TENSES.
1. — Present.
3d p. ci sia or vi that there be, or
[sia,
[may be ;
ci stano, vi sia-
[no, or ci sieno,
[vi sieno,
that there be, or
[may be.
2. — Imperfect.
3d p. ci fosse orjif there were ; orllci fossero or vzlif there were; or
[vi fosse, \ [should be; H [ fossero ,1 [should be.
COMPOUND TENSES.
3.— Perfect.
3d p. ci sia or vi that there has 11 ci siano or vi sia-
[sia stdto, -a, been ; [no stdti, -e,
4. — Pluperfect.
3d p. ci fosse orlif there had been;! lei fossero or vi if there had beea.
—* -^ ' [/Sssero "-
that there have
[been, or may
[have been.
d p. cijosse orii
[vi/osse s^o,
[-a,
20
230
ANALOGY.
Singular.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
SIMPLE TENSE.
1.— Present.
Plural.
3d p. ci sartbbe
[or vi sarebbe,
there should,
[would, or could
[be ; or might
[be;
ci sarebbero or vi
[sardbbero,
there should,
[would, or could
[be ; or might
[be.
COMPOUND TENSE.
2. — Past.
3d p. ci sarebbe
[or vi sarebbe
[stato, -a,
there should,;
[would, or couldj
[have been; or
[might have
[been;
ci sarebbero or#t|there should,
[sardbbero std- [would, or could
[have been ; or
[might have
[been.
3d p. ci sia, vi
[sia, or sia-ci)
[sia-vi,
V. IMPERATIVE.
let there be ; \\ci smno, vi sie-
[no, or sian-ci,
\sitn-m,
let there be.
The verb avere, * to have,' is often substituted for
the verb essere when unipersonally used, and then it is
varied after the same manner ; as, averci or avervi, f to
be here ' or ' to be there'; ci ha or vi ha, * here is ' or
1 there isj ; ci hanno or vi hanno, ' there are '; &tc.
The verb avire, not only may be used with propriety for the verb
6ssere, but is also elegantly used in the singular, although the noun to
which it is joined is in the plural ; as, qudnte miglia ci HA? ' how many
miles is it ? ' EBBEVI molti uomini, l there were a great many men
there'; &c.
To express in Italian here or there is some of it, here
or there are some of them, we join the particle ne, ' of
it, of them,' to ci or vi, and say, essercene or esservene,
REGULAR VERBS.
231
avercene or avervene ; as, cen' e or ven' e, cen5 ^a or
ven* ha, ' here is some of it,' or £ there is some of it ' ;
cene sono or vine sono, cen' hanno or verf hanno, ' there
are some of them ' ; &c.
EXAMPLES.
Per certo chi non v' dma, da
voi non desidera d* ESSERE AMA-
TO. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 1.)
N6i ERAVAM PARTITI gltt da
illo. (Dant. Inf. 32.)
DORMITO HAI, bella donna, un
brtve so}ino. (Petr. s. 284.)
Fu accusdto falsam6nte che
dovea AVER MORTO un nomo, col-
la moglie, e con tutta lafarmglia.
(Vit. S. Franc.)
Tarquinio alia fine FU MORTO
per gli figliuoli del sopradetto
Marco Mdrzio. (Giov. Vill. 1. 1.
c. 2.)
Lascidie costui dlle mie muse
che LO GUARISCANO. (Varch.
Boez. 1.1.)
Mwfratello per raira grdzia di
Dio E GUARITO. (Red. lett. 1.)
E '/ PENTIRSI, e 7 conoscer
chiaramcnte, — Che quanta place
al mondo e un breve sonno.
(Petr. s. 1.)
Dalle qudli facilmente tu TI
SARESTI POTUTO ASTENERE.
(Mach. Com.)
Se io ddlla veritd del fatto MI
FOSSI SCOSTARE VOLUTA, OVI'^l
ben saputo sotto dltri nomi rac-
contdrla. (Bocc.)
Surely he who does not love
you, does not desire to be loved
by you.
We had already departed from
him.
Thou hast slept, beautiful wo-
man5 a short sleep.
He was falsely accused to have
tilled a man, with his wife, and
all his family.
Tarquin at length was killed by
the sons of the above mentioned
Marcus Martius.
Let him be cured by my muses.
My brother has recovered through
the mere mercy of God.
And to repent and to know
clearly, that what pleases the
world is a short dream.
From which thou wouldst have
easily abstained.
If I had wished to depart from
the truth of the fact, I should have
known how to relate it under dif-
ferent names.
232
ANALOGY.
rfcciocche male e scdndalo non
ne nascesse, ME ne SONO TACIUTA.
(Bocc. g. 3. n. 3.)
^ Ella fa sdvia certo, e di grand'
ammo, — Uh' dltra si SAKE*
[sarebbe] DATA sul pidngere.
(Cecch. Inc. 1. 1.)
Egli & notte buia, e piovigginaj
e par che sia per PIOVER piu for-
te. (Sacch. nov. 28.)
Ci SOJVQ delle dltre donne assdi.
(Bocc. g. 3. n. 3.)
Cavdlca, e qudndo ANNOTTA e
qudndo AGGIORNA. (Ariost. Fur.
27. 12.)
Non altramdnti a lui AVVENNE,
che al Duca AVVENUTO ERA.
(Bocc. 9. 2. n. 7.
E che i vizj d6bbano da tutti
BIASIMARSI. (PaSS.)
QUANTE MIGLIA CI HA ? —
HACCENE piu di milldnta. (Bocc.
g. 8. n. 3.)
La dove CEN' E una, che e
molto corta. (Bocc. g, 3. n. 4.)
That no evil or scandal should
arise from it, I have kept silent.
She was wise surely, and of a
great mind ; for another would
have given herself to weeping.
It is a very dark night, and it
drizzles, and seems as if it would
rain harder.
Here are many other ladies.
He rides botn when it grows
night, and when it is day.
It happened to him not other-
wise than it had happened to* the
Duke.
And that vices ought to be
blamed by all.
How many miles is it? It is
an infinite number.
Where there is one [way] which
is very short.
EXERCISE XVII.
PASSIVE VERBS.
I. 1. — To be loved.
JEssere umdto.
4. — being believed.
essere creduto.
2. — to have been feared.
dssere stdto ternuto.
5. — having- been heard.
essere stdto sentito.
REGULAR VERBS. 233
II. 1. — I am praised, thou art invited, he is expected,
loddto, invitdto, aspettdto,
we are called, you are assured, they are punished. 2.
chiamdtOj assicurdto, cdstigdto.
I was sought, thou wast advised, she was prayed, we
cercdto, consiglidto, pregdto,
were accompanied, you were envied, they were assured.
accompagndto, invididto, assicurdto.
3. — I was assailed, thou wast besieged, he was ordered,
assaltdtOj assedidto, ordindto,
we were confirmed, you were delivered, they were
confirmdto, consegndto,
accepted. 4. — I shall be proved, thou wilt be asked,
accettdto. provdto, domanddto,
she will be admired, we shall be paid, you will be
ammirdto, pagato,
honored, they will be blamed. 5. — I have been
onordtOj biasimdto,
robbed.* — — III. 1. — I may be believed, thou mayest
rubbdto. creduto, . ;
be received, he may be beatenj we may be preceded,
ricevuto, battuto, preceduto,
you may be provided, they may be sold. 2. — I
provveduto, venduto.
might be punished, thou mightest be furnished, she
punitot formto,
might be hindered, we might be attacked, you might
impedito, assalito,
be betrayed, they might be supplied. IV. 1. —
tradito, supplito.
I should be admonished, thou wouldst be wounded, he
ammonitOj ferito,
would be banished, we would be encouraged, you would
bandito, incoraggito,
* The learner can form the compound tenses of any of theso verbs by joining the
past participle to the compound tenses of the verb essere.
20*
234 ANALOGY.
be obeyed, they would be invested. V. — Be thou
obbedito, investito.
allured, let her be listened to, let us be employed, be
allettdto, ascoltato,
ye trusted, let them be saved.
fiddtot salvdto.
NEUTER AND PRONOMINAL VERBS.
I. 2. — To have departed. 5. — having repented
partita. ^ pentito3
one's self. II. 5. — I have delayed, thou hast kept
si.2 indugidto, 2 taciu-
silent (thyself), he has gone out, we have cured, you
to3 li,1 uscito, guarito,
have praised yourselves, they have lived. 6. — I had
2 loddto3 vLl vivuto.
wounded myself, thou hadst become dumb, she had
ferito3 mi,1 ammutito,
corrected herself, you had grown childish, they had
ricreduto3 si,1 rimbambito,
seized (themselves). 7. — I had dined, thou hadst soiled
impadronito3 si1. . pranzdto, 2 imbrottdto3
thyself, he had grown mad, we had lost ourselves, you
ft1, impazzito, 2 smarrito3 cil,
had spoken, they were dismayed (themselves). 8. —
parldto, 2 sbigottito3 si1.
I shall have sailed, thou wilt have complained (thyself),
navigate, 2 lamentdto3 ti1,
she will have recovered, we will have taken leave
guarito, licenzidto3
(ourselves), you will have walked, they will have married
ci1, passeggidto, 2 maritdto3
(themselves). III. 3. — I may have rejoiced (myself),
si1. 2 rallegrdto mi1,
thou mayest have sported, he may have colored himself,
scherzdto, 2 incolorito3 si1,
REGULAR VERBS. 235
we may have gone near, you may have risen (your 'selves ),
avvicindto, 2 alzdto3 tul,
they may have arrived. 4. — I might have enriched
arrivdto. 2 arricchito3
myself, thou mightest have slept, she might have
mi1, dormito, 2
instructed herself, we might have sunk under, you
istruito3 si1, succombuto,
might have assembled yourselves, they might have
2 riunito3 vil,
grown pale. - IV. 2. — I should have married myself,
impallidito. 2 ammoglidto3 mi1,
thou shouldst have grown proud, he would have rejoiced
insuperbito, 2 rallegrdto3
himself, we would have cried out, you would have
si1, griddto,
enamoured yourselves, they would have become cruel.
innamordto3 vil, jj£«s'; inferocito.
- V. — Defend thyself, let her imagine herself,
difendere^ ti, - immagindre2 si1, or immagindre^
let us help ourselves, ennoble yourselves, let them
si, . aiutdre^ ci, annobilire^ vi, rispet-
respect themselves.
2 i1 or risettdr
tare2 si1, or rispettdre^, si.
UNIPERSONAL VERBS.
I. 1. — To rain. 4. — raining. 7. — rained. To
Piovere. piovere. piovere.
have rained. - II. 1. — It is day. 2. — it grew
piovuto. aggiorndre. annot-
night. 3. — it lightened. 4. — it will thunder. 5. —
tare. balendre. tuondre.
it has snowed. 6. — it had happened, 7. — it had
nevicdto. avvenuto.
frozen. 8. — it will have seemed. - III. 1. — it
geldto. sembrdto.
236 ANALOGY.
may freeze. 2. — it might thaw. 3. — it may have
geldre. dimoidre.
been cold. 4.' — it might have displeased.- IV. 1. —
fdtto cdldo. dispiaciuto.
it would be important. 2 it would have belonged.
importdre. appartenuto.
V. — let it be sufficient.
bastdre.
ESSERCI Or ESSERVI, AVERCI OT AVERVI.
I. 4. — There being. II. 1. — here is, or there is,
ci2 JEsser1^,. ci essere, or vi averc,
there are. 2.. — there was, there were. 3. —
ci essere or avere. vi 6ssere, ci * avere.
there was, there were. 4. — there will be, sing., there
vi essere, ci essere. vi avere, ci
will be, plur. 5. — there has been some of it, sing.,
avere. vi essere* nel,
there has been some of them, plur. III. 1. — that there
ci avere2 ne} vi
may be, sing., that there may be, plur. 2. — if there
ave"re, ci essere. vi
were some of it, sing., if there were some of them, plur.
avere2 nel, ci dssere2 nel.
IV. 1. — there should be, sing., there should be
vi essere, ci avere2
some of them, plur. V. — let there be, sing.,
nel. ci avere, or 6ssere^ ci,
let there be some of them, plur.
vi essere2 nel, or avere^ vi^, ne.
IRREGULAR VERBS. 237
CHAPTER X.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
THE irregularities of Italian Verbs are chiefly confined
to the perfect tense of the indicative mood, and the past
participle.
Some verbs, however, are also irregular in the present
of the indicative ; and then they are irregular likewise
in the present of the conjunctive and in the imperative.
When verbs are contracted in the infinitive mood,
they are contracted also in the future tense, and in the
conditional mood.
In those tenses in which verbs are irregular, the
irregularity, generally, does not extend to all the
persons : thus, with very few exceptions, in the perfect
of the indicative, the second person singular and the
first and second persons plural ; — and in the present of
the indicative and conjunctive, and in the imperative,
the jirst and second persons plural, — are regular.
In the variation of these verbs, we will give only those
tenses in which they depart from the paradigms already
given, to which we must refer for the formation of the
other tenses. The persons which are irregular are
here printed in small capitals.
For the assistance of learners, we have added to each
verb, the auxiliary with which it is varied in its com-
pound tenses.
238
ANALOGY.
VARIATION OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE FIRST
CONJUGATION.
There are but four sim.ple verbs in the first conju-
gation, which are not varied like aware, viz.
dare,
to go ;
to give ;
fare, to do or to make ;
stare, to be, to dwell, to stand,
[or to stay..
Andare.
(Varied with essere.)
I. INFINITIVE.
Andare, \ to go.
GERUND.
anddndo, Igoing ;
PARTICIPLE.
anddtOj (gone.
II. INDICATIVE.
Singular. Plural.
1. — Present.
1st p. vo, or VA-
2d p. VAI,
3d p. VA,
[DO,*
I go, or am go-
thou goest ;
he goes ;
[ing;
andidmo,
anddte,
VANNO,
we go;
you go ;
they go.
4. — Future.
1st p. andrd [by contraction for I shall or will go.
\ander 6~\ ,
* Anddre is also a defective verb, and borrows these forms from the Latin verb
vftdere.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
239
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
Singular
Plural.
that we go ;
that you go ;
that they go.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
1. — Present.
1st p. andrei (andria) [by contrac- I I should, would, or could go; or
[tion for anderei (anderia)], | [might go.
1st p. 10 VADA,
2d p. tU VADA
[(vddi),
3d. p. egli VADA,
1.— 1
that I go or may
[go;
that thou go ;
that he go ;
^resent,
andidmo,
andidte,
VADANO,
V. IMPERATIVE.
Istp
2d p. VA (««') lu,
3d p. VADA egli,
go thou ;
let him go ;
I andidmo noi,
anddte voi,
\ VADAHO eglino,
let us go ;
go ye ;
let them go.
Andare is sometimes varied with the conjunctive pro-
nouns mi, ti, siy ci, vi, si, and the particle ne ; thus, ME
NE vo, c I go hence ' ; TE NE vai, ' thou goest hence ' ;
&tc. Me, te, &e. are then mere expletives.
The compounds of andare, as riandare, signifying
Ho go again', &c. have the same irregularities.
EXCEPTIONS.
Riandare
trasanddre
are, signifying * to examine ' or ' to go over again ' ; and
re, ' to go beyond ' ; are regular and varied like amdre.
The verbs manddre, c to send ' ; rimandare, ' to send
back again'; tramandare, Mo transmit'; comandare,
6 to command ' ; dimandare, ' to ask ' ; &c. are not
derivatives of andare, and are varied like amare.
240
ANALOGY.
Dare.
(Varied with avere.)
I. INFINITIVE.
| to give.
GERtfND.
dando, |giving.
PARTICIPLE.
da.to, |given.
II. INDICATIVE.
Singular.
Plural.
1. — Present.
1st p. do,
I give, or am
diamo,
we give ;
[giving j
2d p. DAI,
thou givest ;
date,
you give ;
3d p. dd,
he gives ;
DANNO,
they give.
3. — Perfect.
1st p. DETTl, OF
[DIEDI (diei),
I gave ; or did
[give ;
DEMMO,
we gave ;
2d p. DESTI,
thou gavest ;
DESTE,
you- gave;
3d p. DETTE, or
[DIEDE (dieo,
he gave;
DETTERO,OrDIE-
[DERO (dierono,
they gave.
Idle),
[didro,di6r,3er-
[no,dienno,den-
[rio),
4. — Future.
1st p. DARO, | I shall, or will give.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. 10 DIA,
2d p. tu DIA, 01
[D1I,
3d p. egli DIA,
that I give, or
[may give ;
that thou give ;
that he give ';
didmo,
didte,
DIANO,OrDfEXO,
that we give ;
that you give ;
that they give.
IRREGULAR VERBS. 241
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. w DESSI, | if I gave or should give.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
1. — Present.
1st p. DAREI (darfa), I I should, would, or could
[give ; or might give.
V. IMPERATIVE.
Singular. Plural.
1st p. ...
2dp. db(dtf)tu,
3d p. DIA egli,
give thou ;
let him give ;
diamo ndi,
date voi,
DIANOjOl1 DIENO
[eglino
let us give ;
*ive ye ;
let them give.
The compounds of dare, as ridare, c to give again ' ;
addarsi, c to devote one's self ' ; &c., have the same
irregularities.
The verbs abbondare, c to abound ' ; accommodare,
c to mend ' ; badare, ' to mind ' ; accordare, f to grant ' ;
circonddre, c to surround ' ; jidare, c to trust ' ; freddare,
i to cool ' ; gridare, ' to cry out ' ; guardare, ' to look ';
guidare, c to guide ' ; lodare, * to praise ' ; predare, c to
prey 5 ; ricordare, ' to remember ' ; rimediare, c to reme-
dy' ; scaldare, l to warm' ; secondare, c to second ' ; &c.,
are not derivatives of ddre, and are varied like amare.
21
242
ANALOGY.
Fare.
(Varied with avere.)
I. INFINITIVE.
FARE (facere),* | to do, or to make.
GERUND. PARTICIPLE.
facendo, \ doing. .; Jj FATTO, (done.
II. INDICATIVE.
Singular.
Plural.
1. — Present.
1st p.fo(fdccio),
2d p. FAI (faci),
3d p. fa (face),
I do or am do-|
[in
tnou doest;
he does ;
FACCIAMO,
fdte,
FANNO (fan),
we do ;
you do ;
they do.
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. iofaceva orfacea (fea), | I did or was doing.
3. — Perfect.
1st p. FE
2d p. FACESTI
[(festi-),
3d p. FECE (/e',
[feo),
I did;
thou didst ;
he did ;
facemmo (fem-
[mo)r
faceste (feste),
FECERO (ferono,
[ferno, fero, fer,
[fenno, fen),
we did j
you did ;
they did.
4. — Future.
1st p. FARO, I I shall or will do.
* This verb belongs properly to the second conjugation, it being but a contrac-
tion offdcere, now become obsolete, of which it retains many of the forms.
Singular.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
243
Plural.
1st p. W FACCIA,
2d p. tu FACCIA,
3d p. egli
that I do, or may
[do;
that thou do ;
that he do ;
FACCIAMO,
FACCIATE,
FACCIAJVO,
that we do ;
that you do ;
that they do.
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. wfacessi (fessi), | if I did or should do.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
1. — Present.
1st p. FAREI (faria, far6J), 1 I should, would, or could
[do ; or might do.
2d p./a (fd')tu,
3d p. FACCIA
do thou ;
let him do ;
V. IMPERATIVE.
FACCIAMO,
fate,
FACCIANO,
let us do ;
do ye;
let them do.
The compounds of/are, as assuefare, ' to accustom ';
confare, £ to suit,' ; to agree ' ; contraffare, { to mimic,'
' to imitate '5 disfare, ' to undo'; mis/are, ' to do wrong ' ;
liquefare, £ to melt ' ; sopraffare, c to overpower ' ; stu-
pefare, ' to stupefy,' ' to astonish ' ; Sic., have the same
irregularities.
Sodisfdre or soddisfdre, ( to satisfy,' is both regular and irregular.
The verbs olfare, < to smell' ; schifare, ' to shun ' ;
trionfdre, c to triumph,' are not derivatives of fare, and
are varied like amdre.
344
ANALOGY.
Stare.
(Varied with essere.)
stdndo,
I. INFINITIVE.
1. — Present.
Stare,
GERUND.
jstanding.
to stand, to stay,
to dwell, or to be.
stato,
PARTICIPLE.
[stood.
Singular.
II. INDICATIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. sto,
2d p. STAI,
3d p. sta,
1st p. STETTI
stand or am
[standing:
thou standest ;
he stands ;
state,
STANNO,
3. — Perfect.
I stood ;
2d p. STESTI,
3d p. STETTE
[(ste),
thou stoodst ;
he stood ;
Plaral.
STESTE,
STETTERO(sterO,
[ster, stiero,
[stier),
we stand ;
you stand ;
they stand.
we stood ;
you stood ;
they stood.
1st p. STARO,
4. — Future.
\ I shall or will stand.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. w STIA, fthat I stand or
[may stand ;
2d p. tu STIA, or that thou stand ;
['STII,
3d p. egli STIA,
that he stand ;
stidmo,
STIANO, or ST!E-
[NO,
that we stand ;
that you stand ;
that they stand.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. w STESSI, ^ | if I stood or should stand.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
•
1. — Present.
1st p, STAREI (staria), I should, would, or could
[stand; or might stand.
V. IMPERATIVE.
Singular.
Plural.
2d p. sta (sta'}
[tu,
3d p. STIA egli,
stand thou ;
let him stand ;
stidniOj
STIAJVO, Or STIE-
[NO eglino,
let us stand ;
stand ye";
let them stand.
Stare, is sometimes varied with the conjunctive pro-
nouns, mi, li, si, &,c., and the particle ne : thus, ME NE
sto, ' I remain here ' ; TE NE stai, ' thou remainest
here'; &c. — Me, te, &c. are then mere expletives.
The compounds of stare, as contrastare, signifying
fi to stand against ' ; distare, ' to be distant ' ; instare, ' to
entreat ' ; ristare, e to stop ' ; soprastdre or sovrastdre,
signifying c to delay,3 cto differ'^ &c. have the same
irregularities^
EXCEPTIONS.
Contrastare, signifying ' to deny,' ' to dispute ' ; soprastare or so-
vrastdre, signifying l to stand over,' { to threaten '; ostdre, ' to oppose J;
restare, ' to remain '; are regular, and are varied like amdre.
The verbs accostare, e to approach ' ; acquistare, ( to
acquire' ; costare, ' to cost '; manifestare, * to manifest ';
pestare, « to pound,' are not derivatives of stare, and are
varied like amare.
21*
246 ANALOGY.
The foregoing verbs, andare, dare, fare, and stare,
in all those forms in which, when they are simple, they
form but one syllable, have in their compounds the ac-
cent on the last syllable ; as, vo, da, fe', sta : — rivo,
c I go again ' ; rida, c he gives back again ' ; disfe',
c he destroyed ' ; insta, ' entreat thou' ; &c.
EXAMPLES.
VA il cavdl per Gio, — Per The horse goes by Gid, the ox
Anda VA il bd, — E V dsino per by rf'nda, and the ass by JL'rri.*
Arri. (Fran. Sacch., rime, 9.)
Or VA'^ ch* un sol voUre & Now go, for one only will is in
d' amendue. (Dant. Inf. 2.) both of us.
Qutsto.udito dal sdnto vecchio Having heard this he went to
SE NE ANDO molto consoldto. the holy man quite consoled.
(Vit. S. Ant.)
Prima ch' dltri dindnzi li RI- Ere any one repassed before
VADA. (Dant. Inf. 28.) him.
RIANDA le cose, che tu gli hdi Examine the things, which thou
ddtte di me. (Salv. Granch. 2., 5.) hast said to him of me.
Sono molti di s\ lieve fantasia. There are many of so light a
che in tutte le loro ragioni TRA- mind, that in all their reasonings
sANDANo.t (Dant. Conv. 178.) they [go beyond the question]
wander from the subject of them.
La sente'nza la qudle San Pi6- The sentence which saint Peter
tro DETTE coniro Jlnania. (Ca- gave against Ananias.
vale. Pungill. 97.)
Al cdnte pidcque molto qu6sta This request pleased the count
domdnda, e prestam6nte rispose much, and he immediately replied
di si, e gliele DIEDE. (Bocc. g. that he would, and gave them to
2. n. 8.) him.
* Different interjections used by the Italians in driving those animals.
| We are awate that some copies of the Convivio have trasvdnnoj Irasdndano,
however, is the better reading.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
247
E il buon maestro del parldr
proprio [Dante] disse : io mi
FECI al mostrato innanzi un poco;
e Ver me si FECE, ed io ver lui
mi FEI. (Dep. Decarn. 99.)
AlV inferno non SODISFANO
eziandw le preziose cose. (Fr.
Giord.)
E qu\ convien, ch* V questo
peso porti — Per lei, tdnto ch1 a
Dw si SODDISFACCIA. (Dant.
Pur. 11.)
VeggSndo che da niun cono-
sciuto v* 6ra, si STETTE. (Bocc.
g. 5. n. 6.)
Posso favellare, s' w voglio ; e
se nd, s\ ME NE posso STARE.
(Fr. Giord. S. Fred. 32.)
Ma paura e pietade CONTRA-
STETTE — JLl mw crudel ardire.
(Ovid. Pist.)
Rdde volte addividn, che air al-
te irnpr6se — Fortuna ingiuri-
6sa non CONTRAST i. (Petr.
c. 11.)
Martuccio, vegg&ndo la gio-
vane, maraviglidndosi^ SOPRA-
STETTE. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 2.)
Sdnza montdre al dosso —
Deir drcOj 6ve Io scoglio piu so-
VRASTA. (Dant. Inf. 18.)
And the good master of correct
speaking [Dante] said: / [made
myself] drew a little nearer to
him who had been shown me;
and He drew near me, and I drew
near him.
In hell even precious things
give no satisfaction.
And here I must bear for it this
weight, till satisfaction be made to
God.
Seeing that he was known by
none, he stayed there.
I can speak, if I'wish; if not, I
can refrain from it.
But fear and pity stood against
my fierce desire.
Seldom it happens that Fortune
does riot oppose great undertak-
ings.
Martuccio, seeing the lass, won-
dering at it, tarried.
Without ascending on the top
of the arch where the rock is more
jutting.
248 ANALOGY.
EXERCISE XVIII.
fin this and the following exercises on Irregular Verbs, have been introduced many
those verbs, which, although they are, or, from the similarity of their termina-
tions, seem to be, derived from the simple iiregular verbs here given, are yet regular.
This has been done whh a view of early accustoming the learner to make the neces-
sary discrimination.]
I. 1. — Togo* 4. — giving. 7. — made. — —II. 1. — I stay,
Jlnddre. dare. fare. stare,
thou sendest, he gives again, we melt, you entreat,
manddre, riddre, liquefdre, instdre,
they go over again. 2. — I gave, thou accustomedst,
rianddre. dare, assuefdre,
he stood against, we asked, you granted, they triumphed.
contrastdrej dimanddre, accorddre, trionfdre.
3. — I stayed, thou sendedst back, he devoted himself, we
stare, rimanddre, adddre2 si1, con-
imitated, you delayed, they transmitted. 4. — I will make,
traffdre, soprastdre, tramanddre. fare,
thou wilt oppose} he tvill go again, we will trust, you will
ostdre, rianddre, fiddre, so-
stand over, they will praise. 5. — I have gone, thou
vrastdre, loddre. anddto,
hast made over again, he has remained, we have given,
rifdtto, restdto, ddto,
you have commanded, they have manifested. III. 1. —
comanddto, manifest dto.
that I deny, that thou mayest go beyond, that he may
contrastdre, trasanddre, soddis-
satisfy, that we may pound, that you may attend, that
far ey pe stare, baddre,
they may cost. 2. — I might astonish, thou mightest
costdre. stupefdre, pre-
pray, he might approach, we might disdain, you might
dare, accostdre, schifdre, seal-
warm, they might abound. IV. J. — I would do wrong,
ddre, abbonddre* misfdre,
IRREGULAR VERBS.
249
thou wouldst acquire, he would command, we would scold,
acquistdre, comanddre, , gridare,
you would smell, they would cost. V. — go thou, let
olfdrej costdre. anddre,
him give, let us make, stay ye, let them dispute.
fddre, fdre, stdre, contestdre.
VARIATION OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE SECOND
CONJUGATION.
Variation of the Irregular Verbs in ere (long).
The simple irregular verbs in ere (long) are the
following ; viz.
cadtre,
to fall ;
dissuadere, to dissuade ;
doUre, to grieve ;
dovtre, to owe ;
giactre, .to lie down ;
pardre, to seem ;
ptrsuaddre, to persuade ;
piactre, to please ;
poUre, to be able ;
rimantre.
to remain ;
sapere,
to know ;
sedtre,
to sit down ;
tactre,
to be or keep si-
tentrc,
to hold ; [lent ;
valtre,
to be worth ;
vedtre,
to see ;
volere,
to wish, to will,
[or to be willing.
Cad ere.
(Varied with essere.)
I. INFINITIVE.
Cadire, |to fall.
PARTICIPLE.
| cadulo, (fallen.
250
ANALOGY.
II. INDICATIVE.
Singular.
Plural.
1. — Present.
1st p. cddo (cag-
2d p. cddi,
3d p, cade,
1st p. CADDI (ca-
[dei,cadetti),
2d p. cadesti,
3d p. CADDE (ca-
[deo, cadette,
I fall;
thou fallest ;
he falls ;
cadidmo (caggid- we fall ;
[mo, cademo),
caddie,
3.
I fell ;
thou fellest ;
he fell ;
cddono (cdggio-
[no),
— Perfect,
caddmmo,
\ cadeste,
CADDERo(cadero,
[cader ; cadero-
[no, cade'ttero),
you fall ;
they fall.
we fell ;
you fell ;
they fell.
4.—
1st p. caderd (cadro),
Future.
| I shall or will fall.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. io cdda
2d p. tu cada
[(caggia),
3d p. egli cdda
[(cdggia),
that I fall or
[may fall ;
that thou fall ;
that he fall ;
cadidmo (caggia-
[mo),
cadidte (caggia-
cddano (cdggia-
that we fall ;
that you fall ;
that they fall.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
1. — Present.
1st p. caderei (cadrei, caderia, I should, would, or could fall ; or
[cadria), [might fall.
V. IMPERATIVE.
1st p. ; . .
2d p. cadi tu,
fall thou.
IRREGULAR VERBS. «251
The compounds of cadere, as accadere, ' to happen ';
decadere, c to decline ' ; ricadere, ' to fall again ' ; &c.,
have the same irregularities. The poetical forms, how-
ever, aggio, aggia, aggiamo, aggiono, aggiano, are pe-
culiar to cadere and not met with in its compounds.*
Dissuadere.
(Varied with either avere or essere.)
I. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.
|to dissuade. H DISSUASO, [dissuaded.
II. INDICATIVE.
Singular, Plural.
3. — Perfect.
1st p. DISSUASI, |I dissuaded; II dissuademmo,
2d v-dissuadestilthou dissuadest; dissuadeste,
3d p. DISSTJASE, |he dissuaded ; || DISSUASERO,
we dissuaded ;
you dissuaded ;
they dissuaded.
Dissuadere^ properly speaking, is a compound of the
Latin verb suadere, as well as persuadere, c to persuade,'
which has the same irregularities.
Dolere.
»
(Varied with essere, and the conjunctive pronouns, mi,
ti, si, &c.)
I. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.
Dol6r-si, to grieve. || doluto-si, [grieved.
* Of ricadere, Galileo has used ricdggia.
252
ANALOGY.
II. INDICATIVE.
Singular.
Plural.
1. — Present.
1st p. mi DOLGO
[(doglio)
2d p. ti DUOLI,
3d p. si DUOLE he grieves ;
[(dole),
I grieve ;
thou grievest;
Cl DOGLIAMO (do-
[lemo),
vi dolete,
Si DOLGONO (d6-
[gliono),
3. — Perfect.
1st p. mi DOLSI, jl grieved ; 1 1 ci dolemmo,
2d p. ti dolesti, (thou grievedst ; vi doleste,
3d p. si DOLSE, |he grieved ; l| si DOLSERO,
4. — Future.
we grieve ;
you grieve ;
they grieve.
we grieved ;
you grieved;
they grieved.
1st p. dorrd [by contraction fon I shall or will grieve.
[dolerd*],\
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. mi DOLGA
[(doglia),
2d p. ti DOLGA
[(doglia),
3d p. si DOLGA
[(doglia'),
that I grieve or
[may grieve ;
that thou grieve ;
that he grieve ;
ci DOGLIAMO,
VI DOGLIATE,
Si DOLGANO (d6-
[gliano),
that we grieve 5
that you grieve ;
that they grieve.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
1. — Present.
1st p. dorrii (dorria) [by contrac-
[tion for dolerei (doleria)t],
I should, would, or could grieve;
[or might grieve.
V. IMPERATIVE.
1st p . . . .
; DOGLIAMO- Ci,
let us grieve ;
2d p. DUOLI-fi,
3d p. si DOLGA
[(ddglia),
grieve thorj ;
let him grieve ;
dolete-vi,
Si DOLGANO (d6-
[gliano),
grieve ye ;
let them grieve.
* To distinguish it from dolerd, future of the verb dolttre, « to defraud.'
t To distinguish them from dolerti (doleria), forms of the conditional of the verb
doldre, « to defraud.'
IRREGULAR VERBS.
253
The compounds of dolere, as condoUre, 'to condole ' ;
. have the same irregularities.
Dovere.
(Varied with avere.)
I. INFINITIVE.
Dove" re (devere*),|to owe.
PARTICIPLE.
dovuto, |owed.
II. INDICATIVE.
Singular. Plural.
1. — Present.
1st p. devo, or
I owe ;
DOBBIAMO (deb-
we owe ;
[DEBBO (deg-
[bidmo, deggid-
[gio),
[mo, devemo),
2d p. devi (dei),
thou owest ;
dovete,
you owe ;
3d p. deve, or
he owes;
dovono* or DEB*
they owe.
[DEBBE (dee,
[BONO (dtggio-
[rfej),
[noj deono, den-
t
[no),
3. — Perfect.
1st p. dovei or dovttti, \ I owed,
4 — Future.
1st p. doverd or dovrd, \ I shall or will owe.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. W DEBBA
[(dtggia),
2d p. tU DEBBA
OJ [(7^^«)5
3d p. egh DEBBA
[(Mggia),
that I owe, or
[may owe;
that thou owe ;
that he owe ;
-
DftBBIAMO (deg-
[(gidmo),
DOBBIATE (deg-
[gidte),
DEBBANO (d6g-
[giano),
that we owe ;
that you owe ;
that they owe.
* The Latin debere, from which dovcre derives some of its forms.
254 ANALOGY.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
1. — Present.
1st p. doverei or dovrei (doveria I should, would, or could owe ; or
[or dovria), [might owe.
V. IMPERATIVE.*
Giacere.
(Varied with either avere or essere.)
I. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.
Giacere, |to lie down. || giaciuto, jlain down.
Singular.
II. INDICATIVE.
1. — Present.
Plural.
1st p. GIACCIO,
2d p. giacit
3d p. gidce,
I lie down ;
thou liest down ;
he lies down ;
GIACCIAMO,
giacete,
GIACCIONO,
we lie down ;
you lie down ;
they lie down.
3.— Perfect.
1st p. GIACQUI,
2d p. giacesti,
3d p. GIACQUE,
I lay down ;
thou layest down;
he lay down ;
giacemtno,
giac6ste,
G1ACQUERO,
we lay down ;
you lay down;
they lay down.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
Istp.lOGIACCIA,
2d p. fttGIACCIA,
3d p. egli GIAC-
[CIA,
that I lie down or
[may lie down ;
that thou lie
[down ;
that he lie down ;
GIACCIAMO,
giacldte,
GIACCIANO,
that we lie down;
that you lie
[down ;
that they lie
[down.
* " Strictly is wanting." — Teor. Verb. Ital., Part. II., $. 48.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
255
V. IMPERATIVE.
Singula
1st p. ...
r.
Plu
GIACCIAMO noi,
giacete voi,
GIACCIANO 6gll-
\no,
al.
let us lie down ;
lie ye down ;
let them lie
[down.
2d p. gidci tu,
3d p. GIACCIA
E4*$
lie thou down ;
let him lie down;
The compounds of giacere, as soggiacere, £ to be
subject'; &c., as well as piacere, and its compounds
compiacere, ' to please '; dispiacere, * to displease ' ; &c.
have the same irregularities.
Piacire and its compounds compiacere, &c., in the second person
plural of the present of the conjunctive, and in the second person
plural of the imperative mood} make PIACCIATE, &c.
Par ere.
(Varied with ess ere.)
I. INFINITIVE.
Pare" re, |to seem.
|| paruto
II. INDICATIVE.
PARTICIPLE.
t |seemed.
Singular.
Plural.
1. — Present.
1st p. PAIO,
2d p. pdri,
3d p. pare (pdr),
1st p. PARVI
[(parsi),
2d p. paresti,
3d p, PARVE
l(pdrse),
I seem ;
thou seemest;
he seems ;
paridmo,
parete,
pdrono, or PAIO-
[NO,
3. — Perfect.
I seemed ;
thou seemedst ;
he seemed j
paremmo,
pariste,
PARVERO (parse-
we seem ;
you seem ;
they seem.
we seemed ;
you seemed;
they seemed.
256
ANALOGY.
4. — Future.
1st p. parrd [by contraction for
[parerd*],
I shall or will seem.
Singular.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. W PAIA,
2d p. tu PAIA,
3d p. egli PAIA,
that I seem or\ pariamo,
[may seem jl
that thou seem ;
that he seem ;
PAIATE,
PAIANO,
Plural.
that we seem ;
that you seem ;
that they seem.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
1. — Present.
1st p. parrei (parria) [by contrao
[tion for parerei (pareria)f],
I should, would, or could seem ; or
[might seem.
V. IMPERATIVE.
1st p. ...
paridmo noij
2d p. pdri tu,
3d p. PAIA egli,
seem thou ;
let him seem ;
parete voi,
PAIAJVO eglino,
let us seem ;
seem ye ;
let them seem.
Persuadere.
( See dissuadere, p. 251 .)
Placer e.
( See giacere, pp. 254 and 255.)
* To distinguish it from parerd, future of the verb pardre, ' to parry,' £ to adorn.'
t To distinguish them from parerei (pareria), corresponding forms of the verb
pardre, c to parry ' 5 &c.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
257
Potere.
(Varied with either avere or essere.)
I. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.
Potere, |to be able. H potuto, " |been able.
II. INDICATIVE.
Singular.
1st p. POSSO,
2d p. PUOI
3d p. FUO (puote,
[p6te),
I am able ;
thou art able ;
he is able ;
Plural.
Present.
POSSIAMO (pote- we are able ;
(pote-
[mo),
potete,
POSSONO (ponnOj
[pon),
you are able ;
they are able.
4. — Future.
1st p. potrd [by contraction for I shall or will be able.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. FOSSA,
I that I be able or may
[be able.
IV. CONDITIONAL,
1. — Present.
1st p. potr6i (potria) [by contrac-
[tion for poterci (poteria,tj
[poria),
I should, would, or could be able ',
[or might be able.
* To distinguish it frompoterb, future of the vetbpotbre, * to prune.'
t To distinguish them from poterei (poteria), corresponding forms of the verb potdrt,
* to prune.'
22*
258
ANALOGY.
V. IMPERATIVE.
Singular.
1st p
2d p. POSSA tu,
3d p. POSSA 6gli9
be thou able ;
let him be able ;
Plural.
POSSIAMO noij
POSSIATE VOl,
POSSANO 6glino,
let us be able ;
be ye able ;
let them be able.
Rimanere.
(Varied with essere.)
I. INFINITIVE.
Rimanere, |to remain.
PARTICIPLE.
HRIMASTO (n'waso), [remained.
II. INDICATIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. RIMANGO
[(rimagno),
2d p. rimdni,
3d p. rimdne,
1st p. RTMASI,
2d p. rimanestij
3d p. RIMASE,
I remain ;
thou remainest ;
he remains ;
rimanete,
RIMANGONO,
3. — Perfect.
I remained ; 11 rimanemmo,
thou remainedst; rimaneste^
he remained ; || RIMASERO,
4. — Future.
we remain ;
you remain ;
;they remain.
we remained ;
you remained ;
ihey remained.
1st p. rimarrd [by contraction for
[rimanerd],
I shall or will remain.
* " Observe that grammarians believe that this verb has no imperative j because,
they say, we cannot command any one to have a power which he has not. But they
have not reflected that one can give power, when he is able to do so j as in the case
with God in relation to all things j and us, to a smaller extent, may be the case with
man and certain relations of man. Which ideas being susceptible of being express-
ed also in the imperative mood, reason requires that this verb should not be so easily
deprived of it." — Teor. Verb. Ital., Part. If., $. 120.
Besides, the verb potere does not mean only " aver possa o virtd, ma volontd anc6-
ra, e satisfazi6ne, e contento ', ch& non i sempre il verbo del portatori, e degli bsini." —
Dep. Decam., 104.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
259
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
Singular.
Plural.
1. __ Present.
lstp.t0RiMA.NGA that I remain or
[(rimagna),
2d p. tu RIMANGA
[( rimagna),
3d p. egli RIMAN-
[GA,
[may remain ;
that thou remain ;
that he remain ;
rimanidmo,
rimanidte,
RIMANGANO,
that we remain ;
that you remain];
that they remain.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
1. — Present.
1st p. rimarrei (rimarria) [hy con- I should, would, or could remain ;
[traction for rimanerei (rimane- [or might remain.
V. IMPERATIVE.
rimaniamo noi, Slet us remain ;
rimanete voi, j remain ye ;
RIMANGANO
[eglino,
2d p. rimdni tu,
3d p. RIMANGA
•remain thou ;
let him remain ;
Sapere.
(Varied with avere.)
I. INFINITIVE.
Sapere (savere*),|to know.
PARTICIPLE.
| saputo, [known.
II. INDICATIVE.
1.—
Present.
1st p. so,
2d p. SAI,
3d p. SA (sape),
I know ;
thou knowest ;
he knows;
jlsAPPIAMO,
lisaptte,
||SANNO,
we know ;
you know;
they know.
* This /cm, met with in Dante, Alamanni, and other poets, has become obsolete.
260
ANALOGY.
Singular.
3. — Perfect.
Plural.
1st p. SEPPI,
2d p. sapesti,
3d p. SEPPE,
I knew;
ihou knewcst ;
he knew;
\sapemmo,
\sapeste,
ISEPPERO,
we knew ;
you knew ;
they knew.
4. — Future.
1st p. saprd [by contraction for I I shall or will know,
[sqpero], I
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. ' — Present.
1st p. w SAPPIA, | that I know, or may know.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
1. — Present.
1st p. saprti (sapria) [by contrac- | I should, would, or could know ;
[tion for saperei (saperia)], | [or might know.
V. IMPERATIVE.
2d p. SAPPI tu,
3d p. SAPPIA tgli,
know thou ;
let him know ;
j
SAPPIATE VOi,
let us know;
know ye ;
let them know.
The compounds of sapere^ as risapere, c to learn,5 or
6 to come to know ' ; follow the same irregularities.
Sedere.
(Varied with avere.)
I. INFINITIVE.
Sedere (seggere*), | to sit down.
* This verb, now become obsolete, is still used in many of the/oms of the modern
verb sedtre*
IRREGULAR VERBS.
261
GERUND.
sedendo (seggendo), [sitting.
PARTICIPLE.
sedutOj |seated.
Singular.
II. INDICATIVE.
1. — Present.
Plural.
1st p. SIEDO, or
[sEGGo(seggio),
2d p. SIEDI,
3d p. SIEDE (se-
[de),
I sit ;
thou sittest }
he sits ;
sedidmo or SEG-
[GIAMO (sede-
fmo),
sedete,
SIEDONO,Or SEG-
EGONO (seggio-
no),
we sit ;
you sit ;
they sit.
3. — Perfect.
1st p. sedei or sedetti, \ I sat.
4. — Future.
1st p. sederd* (sedro), | I shall or will sit.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. io siEDA,or
[sEGGA(seggia),
2d p. tu siEDA,or
[SEGGA (seggia
[orseggi),
3d p. egli SIEDA,
[or SEGGA,
that I sit, or may
[may sit;
that thou sit ;
that he sit ;
sedidmo or SEG-
[GIAMO,
sedidte (seggia-
[te),
SIEDANO, OrSEG-
[GANO (seggia-
[no),
that we sit ;
that you sit ;
that they sit.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
1. _ Present.
1st p. sederei (sedrei, sederia),
I should, would, or could sit ; or
[might sit.
* Mastrofini proposes siederd, and in the conditional siederei; but this, which
indeed would present the advantage of distinguishing these forms from the coire-
sponding ones of the verb sedare, 'to appease,' has not been adopted by the generality
of Italian writers.
262
ANALOGY.
V. IMPERATIVE.
Singular.
Istp .
Plu
sedidmo (seggia-
[mo) noi,
sedete voi3
SlEDANO,OrSEG-
[GAJVO eglino,
ral.
let us sit ;
sit ye ;
let them sit.
2d p. SIEDI tu,
3d p. SIEDA, or
[SEGGA e'gH,
>it thou ;
let him sit ;
Sedere is sometimes varied with the pronouns mi,
ti, si, &c., and then it requires the auxiliary essere ; as
mi siedo, £ I sit (myself) ' 5 ti sei seduto, ' thou hast sat
(thy self)5 -fee.
The compounds of sedere, as possedere, c to possess ' ;
risedere, { to reside ' ; soprassedere, < to supersede ' ;
have the same irregularities.
Tacere.
(Varied with avere.)
I. INFINITIVE.
Tacere, Ito be or keep si- 1 1 taciuto,
[lent J I
II. INDICATIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. tdcio (taccio), | I am silent.
PARTICIPLE.
been silent.
3, — Perfect.
1st p. TACQUI, IT was silent ;
2dp. tactsti
3d p. TACQUE,
thou wast silent ;
he was silent ;
tacemmo,
taceste,
TACQUERO,
we were silent ;
you were silent 5
they were silent.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
263
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. 10 tdcia (taccia), | that I be silent or may be silent.
V. IMPERATIVE.
1st p. ... I
2d p. tdci tUj I be thou silent.
Tacere is sometimes varied with the pronouns mi,
ti, si, &c., and then it requires the auxiliary essere ;
mi tacio, <I keep silent '; si e taciuto, 'he has kept
silent' ; &c.
The compound of tacfre, — ritacere, ' to become
once more silent ' ; follows the same irregularities.
Tenere.
(Varied with avere.)
I. INFINITIVE.
Tenere, |to hold.
Singular.
PARTICIPLE.
|| tenuto, jholden.
1st p. TENGO
[(tegno),
2d p. TiENi (te-
3d p. TIENE,
II. INDICATIVE.
Plural.
1. — Present.
I hold ;
tenidmo (tegna-
we hold ;
[mo),
thou boldest ;
tenete,
you hold ;
he holds ;
TENG050,
they hold.
264
ANALOGY.
Singular.
Plural.
3. — Perfect.
1st p. TENNI,
2d p. tencsti,
3d p. TENNE,
I held ;
thou heldest;
he held ;
I tenemmOf
\\ teneste,
TENJVERO,
we held ;
you held ;
they held.
4. — Future.
1st p. terro [by contraction for i I shall or will hold,
pcnerd], |
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. 10 TENGA
[(tegna),
2d p. tU TENGA,
3d p. egli TENGA
[(tegna),
that I hold or
[may hold ;
that thou hold ;
that he hold ;
tenidmo (tegna-
[mo),
<em'^^e(te2;nate),
TENGANo(tegna-
[no),
that we hold ;
that you hold ;
that they hold.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
1. — Present.
1st p. terrei (terria) [by contrac- I I should, would, or could hold ; or
[tion for tenerei (teneria)], | [might hold.
V. IMPERATIVE.
2d p. TIENI (tej)
[tu,
3d p. TENGA
[(tegna) egli,
hold thou ;
let him hold ;
[mo) noi,
tenete voi,
TENGANO (tegna-
[no) eglino,
hold ye ;
let them hold.
Tenere is sometimes varied with the pronouns mi,
ti, si, &c., and then it requires the auxiliary essere ;
as, mi sono tentito, ' I have holden or restrained myself;
IRREGULAR VERBS.
265
The compounds of tenere, as appartenere, c to be-
long ' ; astenere, ' to abstain ' ; attenere, < to attain ' ;
contenere, c to contain,' ' to refrain ' ; detenere, ' to de-
tain ' ; mantenere, ' to maintain ' ; ottenere, c to obtain ' ;
rattenere, ' to stop,' c to restrain ' ; sostenere, ' to sup-
port,' c to sustain ' $ &c. have the same irregularities.
Valere.
(Varied with either avere or essere.)
I. INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLE.
Fattre,
to be worth, or \\valuto (valso),
[to avail. 1 1
II. INDICATIVE.
been worth.
Singular,
Plural.
1. — Present.
1st p. VAL£O I am worth ;
J(vaglio),
lij
3d p. vale (vdl),
1st p. VALSI,
2d p. valesti,
3d p. VALSE,
thou art worth ;
he is worth ;
validmo,
vaUte,
VALGONO, Or VA-
[GLIONO,
3. — Perfect.
I was worth ; \\val6mmo,
thou wast worth; va/dste,
he was worth ; | VALSERO,
4. — Future.
we are worlh ;
you are worth ;
they are worth.
we were worth ;
you were worth ;
they were worth.
1st p. varrd [by contraction for
'
23
I shall or will be worth.
266
ANALOGY.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
Singular.
Plural.
1. — Present.
1st p. io v ALGA 5
that I be worth
valiamo,
that we be
[OF VAGLIA,
[or may be
[worth ;
[worth ;
2d p. tU VALGA,
that thou be
validie,
that you he
[OF VAGLIA,
[worth ;
[worth ;
3d p. egli VALGA,
that he be worth;
VALGANO, OF VA-
that they be
[Or VAGLIA,
[GLIANO,
[worth.
IT. CONDITIONAL.
1. — Present.
1st p. varrei (varria) [by contrac- |
[tion for valerei (Valeria)], I
I should, would, or could be worth j
£or might be worth.
1st p. . . .
2d p. vali tu,
3d p. VALGA
[(vaglia) eg
V. IMPERATIVE.
be thou worth ;
let him be worth
validmo no'?,
valete voi,
VALGANO, Or VA-
[GLIANO eglino,
Tet us he worth ;
be ye worth ;
let them be
f worth.
The compounds of valere, as disvalere, ' to hurt ' ;
equivaUre, ( to be equivalent ' ; invatere, ' to lose worth
or strength 5 ; prevalere, c to prevail ' ; rivaUre, ' to re-
cover worth or strength ' ; have the same irregularities.
Of the two forms of the present, however, that in algo
is better adapted to them; and disvalgo, 'I hurt';
equivalga, ' let it be equivalent ' ; invdlgano, c that the)r
lose strength ' ; &c., are oftener met with in books than
disvaglio, &c.
The poetical form prevdlso, < prevailed,5 of the past participle of
prevalere, has been used by good writers even in prose. Invalere,
in the same participle has invdlso, l [having] lost strength ' ; only.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
2G7
Vedere.
(Varied with avere.)
I. INFINITIVE.
Vedere, \ to see.
GERUND.
vedendo, or vEG-lseeing.
[GENDO,|
PARTICIPLE.
\\veduto (visto), Iseen.
II. INDICATIVE.
Singular. Plural.
1. — Present.
1st p. t?ed!0,vEG-
I see;
vedidmo, or VEG-
we see ;
[GO, or VEGGIO,
[GIAMO,
2d p. vedi (ve'),
thou seest;
vedete,
you see;
3d p. v6de,
he sees ;
vedono, -VEGGO-
they see.
[NO, or VEG-
[GIONO,
/3. _ Perfect.
1st p. VIDI (vid-
I saw;
vedemmOf
we saw;]
[di),
3d p. vedesti,
thou sawest;
vedeste,
you saw ;
3d p. VIDE,
he saw ;
VIDERO (vider),
they saw.
4. — Future.
1st p. vedrd [by contraction for L I shall or will see.
[vederd], \
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. w veda,
[VEGGA, or
[VEGGIA,
2d p. tu v6da,
[VEGGA, Or
[VEGGIA,
3d p. igli veda,
[VEGGA, or
[VEGGIA,
that I see or may
[see ;
that thou see ;
that he see ;
vedidmo, or VEG- that we see ;
[GIAMO,
vedidte, or VEG- that you see ;
[GIATE;
vedano, VEGGA- that they see.
[NO, or VEG-
[GIANO,
268
ANALOGY.
Singular.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
1. — Present.
Plural.
1st p. vedrdi (vedria) [by contrac-l I should,, would, or could see ; or
[tion for vederei (vederia)],) [might see.
V. IMPERATIVE.
1st p
vedidmOjOT VEG-
2dp.»&K(v6')fci,
3d p. veda, VEG-
[GA, or VEGGIA
te$
see thou ;
let him see ;
[GIAMO noi,
vedete voi,
vedano, VEGGA-
[NO, or VEG-
[GIANO eglino,
let us see >
see ye;
let them see.
The compounds of vedere, as antivedere, & to fore-
see ' ; avvedere, c to perceive ' ; divedere, ' to be sen-
sible of ' ; prevedere, £ to foresee ' ; provvedere, ' to pro-
vide ' ; ravvedere, c to amend ' ; rivedere, ' to see again ' ;
travedere, c to see one thing for another'; &c.3 have
the same irregularities.
JUntiveddre, avvedere, divedere^ travedere, in the past participle
make only antiveduto, l foreseen '; avvedittOj 4 perceived'; diveduto,
1 been sensible of ; traveduto, ' [having] seen one thing for another ' :
and dived6re, prevedere, provvedere, ravvedere, travedere, in the future
and conditional are sever contracted, and make divederd, f I will be
sensible of; prevederti, * I would foresee ' j &c.
Vo lere.
(Varied with avere.)
I. INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLE.
Vottre,
to wish, to will, II voluto, been willing
for to be willing J'
[or to be willing.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
269
Singular.
II. INDICATIVE.
1. — Present.
Plural.
1st p. VOGLIO, or
[vo',
2d p. vuoi (vuo-
[li, vuo9^
3d p. VUOL.E (vo-
tie),
1st p. VOLLI
[(volsi*),
2d p. vottsti,
3d p. VOLLE,
I am willing ;
thou art willing ;
he is willing ;
VOGLIA.MO (vole- we are willing;
volete,
VOGLIONO (von-
[no, von),
3. — Perfect.
I was williijg ;
thou wast wil-
ling;
he was willing ;
vottmmo,
voUste,
VOLLERO,
you are willing j
they are willing.
we were willing;
you were wil-
they were wil-
[ling.
4. — Future.
1st p. vorrd {by contraction fo
[voler '()t]
I shall or will be willing.
1st p. w VOGLIA,
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.,
that I be willing or may
[be willing.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
1. — Present.
1st p. vorrii (vorria) [by contrac- I I should, would, or could be wil-
[tion for volerei (voleria)J], | [ling ; or might be willing.
* Foist, as well as vtilse and volsero, has become obsolete ; and tho few examples
we find in Dante, Ariosto, Berni, and Tasso, ought not to authorize the use of these
forms, which properly belong to the perfect of vdlgere, ' to turn ' ; and not ofvolere,
1 to be willing.'
\ To distinguish it from the future of the verb volftre, ' to fly.'
J To distinguish them from the corresponding forms of voldre, ' to fly.'
270
ANALOGY.
V. IMPERATIVE.
Singular.
1st p* .
PlQ
VOGLIAMO noij
VOGLIATE v6iy
VOGLIANO
[eglino,
ral.
let us be willing j
be ye willing ;
let them be wil-
[lin£.
2d p. VOGLI tUj
3d p. VOGLIA
be thou willing ;
let him be wil-
[ling;
The compounds of volere, as disvolere, c to desire the
contrary of what one has wished ' ; rivoUre, £ to wish
again,' or c to be once more willing'; have the same
irregularities.
EXAM PLE S.
E CADDI, come corpo mdrto
CADE. (Dant. Inf. 5.)
11 timore, molto piu che la for-
za dille ragioni, lo DISSUASE.
(Fra. Gior.)
L& dove piu MI DOLSE [dolsi]
altri si DUOLE, e DOLENDO addol-
cisce il mw dolorc. (Petr. c. 22.)
i
Di niuna cosa durdr DOBBIA-
MO, la quale dbbiaforza d1 offen-
ders. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 10.)
Questi e colui, che GIACQUE
sopra n petto— Del nostro Pelli-
cdno. (Dant. Par. 25.)
And I fell, as a dead body falls.
Fear dissuaded him a great deal
more than the power of reason.
Others grieve for what I most
grieved, and grieving they assuage
my grief.
We ought to endure nothing
that has the power of offending.
This one is he, who lay upon
the bosom of our Pelican.
* It has been asserted that volere has no imperative, but the slightest acquaint-
ance with our classic writers might convince any one to the contrary :
VoGLifcne venir con meco. (Bocc. Be thou willing to come with me.
g. 2. n. 10.)
VOGLI avert caritd. (Gr. S. Gir. 13.) Have charity.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
271
Or ti PIACCIA gradir la sua
venuta. (Dant. Purg. 1.)
Now may his coming please
thee.
Non so, se a voi quello se ne I do not know, whether it will
PARRA, che a me ne PARREBBE. appear to you so as it would ap-
(Bocc. Introd.) pear to me.
Cosi veloci seguono i suoi vi- Thus swift follow their hoops,
mi, — Per simiglidrsi al Punto approaching in likeness to the
quanta PONNO, — E POSSON, Point as near as they can ; and
quanta a vedfr son sublimi. they can the more, Jhe loftier
(Dant. Par. 28.) their vision is.
I'o non mori', e non RIMASI I did not die, neither remained I
vivo. (Dant. Inf. 34.) alive.
O'nde, ben SEPPE che dirsi
Ddnte,qudndo,nel Canto Dtcimo
deir Inferno, indusse Farindta
a dirgli quelle parole. (Salviat.
Avvert. 1. 2. 12.)
Che SEGGENDO in piume in
fdma non si vie"n, ne sotto coltre.
(Dant Inf. 24.)
E giammdi poi la mia lingua
non TACQUE, — Mdntre poteo.
(Petr. c, 4.)
Morto che ebbero Costantmo
loro fratdllo, loro due TENNERO
r imperio. (Petr. Uom. ill.)
JV^ V un mi VARREBBE, ne
V altro VOGL.IO che mi VAGLIA.
(Bocc. g. 3. n. 1.)
./Voi eravdm partiti gia da £llo
— Ch' i* VIDI duo ghiaccidti in
una buca. (Dant. Inf. 32.)
Iddio VOLLE, in questa vita,
privdre ndi di questa luce.
(Dant. Conv. 114.)
Therefore, Dante knew well
what he said, when, in the Tenth
Canto of the Inferno, he induced
Farinata to say to him those
words.
For neither by reposing on
feathers, nor under a coverlet, is
fame won.
And never afterwards was my
tongue silent, whilst it could
[speak].
After they had killed Constan-
tine their brother, both of them
held the empire for themselves.
Neither the one could, nor I
wish that the other should, avail
We had now left him, when I
saw two spirits by the ice pent in
one hollow.
God wished to deprive us, in
this life, of this light.
272 ANALOGY.
EXERCISE XIX.
I. 1. — To fall. 4. — lying down, 7. — remained.
Cadere. giacere. rimane're.
— — II. 1. — I grieve, tbou art able, he sits, we seem,
dolere, potdre, sedere, parere,
you owe, they know. 2. — I dissuaded, thou heldest,
dov6re, sapere. dissuadere, tenure,
he wished, we pleased, you saw, they were worth.
voUre, piacere, vedtre, valere.
3. — I fell again, thou pleasedst, he was subject, we
ricad&re, compiac6re, soggiacere, ri-
learned, they sustained. I prevailed, thou maintainedsf,
sap6re, sosten6re. prevaUre, mantenere,
he was silent again, we declined, you foresaw, they
ritacere, decdddre, antivedere, ri-
wished again. 1 condoled, thou possessedst, he ab-
volere. condoUre, possedere, aste-
stained, we provided, you hurt, they super-
were, provvederej disvaUrej soprasse-
seded. 4. — I will grieve, thou wilt seem, he will be
dire. dolere, par6re, pote-
able, we will remain, you will know, they will hold.
re, rimanire, sap6re, . tenere.
III. 1. — I may entertain, thou mayest lose strength, he
trattendre, invalere, raw-
may amend, we may displease, you may reside, they
vedere, dispiacdre, riseddre, con-
may contain. 2. — I might foresee, thou mightest please
tenere. antivedere, ripiace-
again, he might see again, we might preside, you might
re, rivedere, presedere, appar-
belong, they might hate. IV. 1. — I should grieve
tenure, malvedere. ridoU-
again, thou wouldst come to know, he would attain,
re, risapere, attendre,
IRREGULAR VERBS. JJ73
we would be sensible of, you would provide, they would
divedere, _ provveddre, rav-
amend. -. V. — Know thou, let him seem, let us see,
vedere. sapere, par6ret vedtre,
please ye, let them be able.
piace're, potdre.
Variation of the Irregular Verbs in ere (short)*
There are about four hundred verbs in ere (short),
that are irregular ; but, as their irregularity, generally,
depends on the letters which precede that termination,
they may be reduced to the following forty-one; viz.
Verbs ending in
$re, preceded by a vowel
; as, ^T-AERE,
to draw. (Class 4th.*)
btre,
" ttSSOrBERE,
to absorb.
(2d.)
c$re, preceded by <{ ^ j
[r;
" CWOCERE,
" fORCERE,
to cook. > /<1U v
to allege. ^4th'>
to conquer. > ,^ ,1 \
to twist. 5
Cd;
" inVA.DEREt
to invade.
e;
ts /EDERE,
to offend.
" TIDERE,
to laugh.
6 ;
tl rODERE,
to gnaw.
•(1st.)
U '
; a//UDERE,
to allude.
dere, preceded by <j ^.
' ^RDERE,
* GCCENDERE,
to burn,
to kindle.
in;
c 5CINDERE,
to cut asunder.
(3d.)
on;
' mjpONDERE,
to answer.
(5th.)
iu;
{ cftlUDERE,
to shut.
(1st.)
it;
' C/^IEDERE,
to ask.
(5th.)
>;
4 COttCEDERE,
to grant.
(3d.)
&•
'!, fc™™;
to direct. 7 /u, x
to read. \ (4th>>
gere, preceded by < ™£ ,
tl VOL.GERE,
" SjOARGERE,
"- WIERGERE,
to turn. >(2d)
to arrive. } v
to spread. > (lgt }
to dive. 5
or;
" JOORGERE,
to offer.
(2d.)
I4ff3
« ^njGGERE,
to destroy.
(4th.)
* For the convenience of learners, and the purpose of rendering more simple the
variation of these verbs, they have been arranged .in classes. To facilitate rewt-
ence, we here indicate the class in which they will be found.
274
ANALOGY.
gliere,
as,
COGLTERE,
to gather.
-j
gnere,
guere,
M
£S»O*"M,
to extinguish,
to distinguish.
K2d.)
/ere,
«
SVf/LERE,
to root up.
j
mere, preceded by <
f<?
>w;
cj
it
OSSUMERE,
to express,
to assume.
(3d.)
(2d.)
nere,
tt
BONERS,
to put.
(5th.)
reret
it
COrRERE,
to run.
(1st.)
1
f*«
it
5CWOTERE,
to shake.
^
tere, preceded by •<
1:4;
|:-H
tt
dl.SCUTERE,
to discuss,
to return.
(1st)
1
l«i
it
conne'xTERE,
to connect.
(3d.)
I
r*;
n
SC/'IVERE,
to write.
(4th.)
vere, preceded by <
to
it
m«OVERE,
to move.
(3d.)
\
I*;
ti
VOL VERE,
to turn.
These verbs are chiefly irregular in the perfect of the
indicative, which ends in si or ssi ; and in the past
participle, which ends in so or sso, in to or tto, or in sto.
We shall, therefore, first classify them according .to the
termination of their perfect and participle, and then we
shall vary one of each class, and such of the same class
,as may be otherwise irregular, and note, by way of ex-
ceptions, those verbs which depart in any respect from
their paradigm.
[The letters- a, e, ae, between parentheses, prefixed to the following verbs, denote
the auxiliary with which they are varied: — (a), avere; (e), essere} (ae), either
avere or essere.]
FIRST CLASS.
Infinitive.
A -dere,
6 -dere,
i -dere,
6 -dere,
h -dere,
-dere
Perfect. Participle.
Infinitive.
iu -dere,
dr -gere,
er -gere,
-rere,
r -tere,
'a) ZE-DERE,
(a) ri-DERE,
(a) ro-DERE,
(a) a7Zu-DERE,
7 -u-c/c, i t i (ae) (IR-DERE, U./-0*,
en -dere, \ ' ' ~Si' ' ' "so' ' ' '^ (a) accEJV-DERE, acce-si, occ^-so.
(a) C/JIU-DERE, chiu-si, chiu-so.
(a) S/7AR-GERE, spdr-si,
(ae) ???ER-GERE;
(ae) cor-RERE,
Perfect.
invd-si,
le-si,
ri-si,
ro-si,
allu-si,
ar-si,
Participle.
invd-so.
16-so.
ri-so.
ro-so.
allu-so.
dr-so.
cor -si,
river-si ,
spar-so,
mer-so.
cor-so.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
275
SECOND CLASS.
Infinitive.
Perfect. Participle. Infinitive.
Perfect. Participle.
-bere,
"(ae) assor-BERE,
assor-si, assdr-To.
n -cere,.
(a) WIN-CERE,
vin-si, vin-To.
r -cere,
(a) £6>R-CERE,
tor-si, tor-TO.
-gere,
(a) t'OL-GERE,
vol-si, vol-To.
n -geret
or-gere,
-gliere,
-. . -51, . .-to-, . . as,<
(e) gmN-GERE,
(a) ^OR-GERE,
(a) CO-GLIERE,
giun-si, giun-To,
por-si, por-To.
col- si, edZ-To.
-gnere,
(a) S/?d-GNERE,
spen-si, spen-io.
-guere,
(ae) rfzs/m-GUER]
v,,distin-&i, distin-TO.
; -lere,
(a) Sud/-L.ERE.
sv6l-si, svel-To.
'i> -mere,
(a) ttSStJ-MERE,
assun-si, assun-TQ.
I -vere,
^) WL-VERB,
vol-si, vol-TO.
THIRD CLASS.
ce -dere, ~\
f (a) COttCE-DERE,
conce-ssi, conc^-sso.
\n-dere,
1 (a) SCIN-DERE,
sci-ssi, sc^-sso.
\ -mere, \
1 (a) esjori-MERE,
espre-ssi, espresso.
d -tere,
> . . -ssi, . . -sso', . . as,-( (a) SCMO-TERE,
sco-ssi, scd-sso.
u -tere,
1 (a) ^Z5CU-TERE,
discu-ssi, discu-sso.
t -tere,
1 (a) conne'T-TERE
, conne-ssi,conne-sso.
6 -vere, J
|^(a) 7HWO-VERE,
mo-ssi, md-sso.
FOURTH CLASS.
d -cere,'] ((a) CWO-CERE,
cd-ssr, ed-TTo.
u -cere, \
(a) addu-CERE,
addu-ssi, addo-TTo.
i .geteA
g -gere, J> . .-MI, . .-tto ; . . as,«
ug-gtre, I
(a) Z^G-GERE,
(a) distrUG-GER]
dire" -ssi, dire1 -TTO.
le-ssi, 16-TTO.
:, distru-ssi,distru-wo.
* -vere,
(A) seri-vERE,
scri-ssi, scri-TTo.
-ere, ^
L(a)^-ERE,
trd-BSi, trd-TTO.
FIFTH CLASS.
on -dere,
}f(a) m^ON'-DERE
, nspo-si, rispo-sTO.
ie -dere,
. . -st, . . -sto; . . asX (a) C^IE-DERE,
chie-si, chie-STO.
-nere,
^(a)^?0-NERE,
po-si, pd-STO.
276 ANALOGY.
Variation of the Verb Invadere.
(Paradigm of the First Class of the verbs in
ere (short).)
I. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.
|to invade. {] invd-so, |invaded.
II. INDICATIVE.
Singular. Plural.
3.__ Perfect.
1st p. invd-sit II invaded ;
2d p. invaddsti, thou invadest ;
3d p. invd-SE} |he invaded ;
invade ste,
we invaded ;
you invaded ;
i they invaded.
The verbs evadere, ' to evade '; — ledere, ' to offend ';
— ridere, ' to laugh ' ; dividere, c to divide ' ; conqui-
dere, c to conquer ' ; int rider e, ' to temper ' ; uccidere,
c to kill'; — rodere, cto gnaw'; — alludere, ' to allude';
deludere, ' to delude ' ; iUudere, c to illude ' ; — ardere,
c to burn ' ; mordere, ' to bite ' ; — accendere, c to kin-
dle '; incendere, ' to set on fire '; offendere, ; to offend ';
scendere, ' to descend ' ; spenders, ' to spend ' ; tendere,
6 to stretch ' ; mlipendere, < to vilify ' ; — chitidere, c to
shut ' ; — spargere, ' to spread' ; — mergere, ' to sink';
tergere, ' to wipe ' ; aspergere, c to sprinkle '; — correre,
6 to run ' ; — rivertere, c to turn ' ; and their compounds,
have the same irregularities.
The compounds of correre, — occorrere, { to occur ' ; soccorrere, < to
succour ' ; in ihe future and the conditional are often contracted ; and
make accorra, i it will occur ' ; soccorrebbe, l he would succour.'
Difendere, ' to defend ' ; pdrdere, t to lose ' ; and rendere, f to ren-
der,' are both regular and irregular; and make in the perfect, difendei
or difesi, ' I defended ' ; and in the participle, difenduto or difeso,
1 defended ' ; &c.
IRREGULAR VERBS. 277
Fendere, < to cleave ' ; is both regular and irregular ; and makes
in the perfect, fendei or fessi, l I cleaved ' ; and in the participle,
fenduto and /esso, « cleaved.'
Prdnderc, * to take ' ; and rddere, ' to shave ' ; are both regular and
irregular in the perfect ; but in the participle are irregular only, and
make prdso, ' taken ' ; and r^so, ' shaven.'
The verbs pendere, 'to hang' ; spUndere, fito glitter';
venders, ' to sell'; stridere* c to shriek'; and their
compounds, are regular, and are varied like tessere.
Variation of the Verb Assorbere.
(Paradigm of the Second Class of the verbs in
ere (short).)
1. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.
|to absorb. || assor-xo, [absorbed.
II. INDICATIVE.
Singular. Plural.
3. — -Perfect.
1st p. assor-sij
2d p. assorbe'stij
3d p. assdr-sE,
I absorbed ; II assorbdmrno,
thou absorbedst; assor&e'ste,
he absorbed ; || assor-sERO,
we absorbed ;
you absorbed ;
they absorbed.
Verbs ending in gliere, gnere, and ttre, besides the above, have alao
other irregularities, as will be seen by the following Paradigms :
* Alfonso Varano has written strlse, « he shrieked » } and strisero, l they shriektd.'
24
278
ANALOGY.
Cogliere.
(Paradigm of the Verbs ending in gliere.)
I. INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLE.
COGLIERE, or ito gather.
[CORRE (cor),'
HCOLTO,
[gathered.
Singular.
II. INDICATIVE.
] . — Present.
Plural.
1st p. coglio, or
[COL.GO,
2d p. cogli,
3d p. coglie,
1st p. COL.SI (co-
[Shei),
2d p. cogJi&sti,
3d p. COLSE (co-
[glie,cogliette),
[ gather or am
[gathering ;
thou gatherest ;
he gathers ;
cogllamo,
cogliete,
y or COL,-
[GONO,
3. — Perfect.
T gathered ;
thou gatheredst ;
he gathered ;
cogliemmo,
coglitste",
COLSERO (coglie-
[rono, cogliette-
we gather j
you gather ;
they gather.
\ve gathered ;
you gathered ;
they gathered.
4. — Future.
1st p. c0GLiEROj or C0RRO, | I shall or will gather.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. 10 coglia,
[orCOLGA,
2d p. tu cdglia,
[or COLGA (cogli
[or colghi),
3d p. egli coglia,
PorCOLGA.
that I gather or\
[may gather ;
that thou gather;!
that he gather ;
cogliamo,
coglidte,
\cogliano, or COL,-
[GANG,
| that we gather;
i
that you gather ;
that they gather.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
279
IV. CONDITIONAL.
\ • • ,__ x
J. — Present.
1st p. COGLIEREI, or coRREi (?o- I I should, would, or could gather;
[glieria, or conia), | [or might gather.
V. IMPERATIVE.
Singular.
Plural.
1st p. ...
2d p. cogli (co9)
[tu,
3d p. cogliat'»r
[c^JLGA egli,
gather thou ;
let him gather ;
coglldmo noij \
cogliete voi,
cogliano, or COL,-
[GANO tglino,
let us gather ;
gather ye ;
let* them gather.
Spegnere.
(Paradigm of the Verbs ending in gnere.)
PARTICIPLE.
I. INFINITIVE.
[SINCERE,
to extinguish.
(extinguished.
II. INDICATIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. sptgno, 01
2d p. spegniy
3d p, spegne,
I extinguish or
[am extinguish-
[i«g;
thou extmguisn-
[est;
he extinguishes;
i spegrrtdmo,
spegnete,
nonoy or
we extinguish ;
you extinguish ;
they extinguish.
1st p.
3. _ Perfect.
| I extinguished.
280
ANALOGY.
Singular.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
Plural.
1st p. w spegna,
[or sp^NGA,
8d p. tu spegna,
[or spe$GA
[(spegni),
Sd p. egli spegna,
that I extinguish,'
[or may extin-
[guish ;
that thou extin-
guish ;
that he extin-
[guish ;
spegnldmo,
spegnidte,
spegnano or
that we extin-
[guish ;
that you extin-
guish;
that they extin-
guish.
V. IMPERATIVE.
1st p. ...
spegnlamo noit
2d p. spegni tu,
8d p. spegna, or
[sjpeKGA egli,
extinguish thou ;
let him extin-
guish ;
spegnete vdi,
spegnano, or
[5-/)^NGANO
[eglino,
let us extinguish j
extinguish ye ;
let them extin-
guish.
Svellere.
(Paradigm of the Verbs ending in lere.)
I. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.
, [to root up. || sve/xo, |rooted up.
II. INDICATIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. svello, or
[svelco,
2d p. svtlli,
8d p. svelle,
I root up ;
thou rootest up ;
he roots up ;
svellidmo,
svelttte,
svellono, or svel-
[GONO,
we root up ;
you root up ;
they root up.
1st p.
3, — Perfect.
I I rooted up.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
281
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
Singular.
Plural.
**\ 1. — Present.
1st p. w svella,
[or svelGA,
2d p. tu svella, or
that I root up, or
[may root up ;
that thou root up;
svellidmo,
svellidtet
that we root up ;
that you root up ;
[or svelghi),
3d p. e'gli svellay
[or svelGA,
that he root up ;
svellano, or svel-
[GANO,
that they root up.
1st p
V. IMPE
RATIVE.
svellidmo noiy
svellete voi,
svellano, or svel-
[GANO eglino,
let us root up ;
root ye up ;
let them root up.
2d p. svelli tu,
3d p. svella, or
[sue/GA eg/i,
root up thou ;
let him root up ;
The compounds of assorbere, ' to absorb ' ; cogliere,
6 to gather ' ; and the verbs vincere, ' to conquer ' ; —
torcere, c to twist ' ; — volgere, ' to turn ' ; rifulgere,
c to shine ' ; — giungere, ' to arrive ' ; mungere, 6 to
milk ' ; pungere, fi to prick ' ; ungere, c to anoint ' ; —
pidngere, ' to weep ' ; frangere, £ to break ' ;' — cingere,
6 to gird ' ; finger e, £ to fain' 5 pingere, ' to paint';
spingere, ' to push ' ; tingere, ' to tinge ' ; — porgere,
6 to offer ' ; accorgere, { to perceive ' ; sorgere, { to rise ' ;
— scegliere, 'to choose'; sciogliere, £to untie'; togliere,
( to take away ' ; — distinguere, ; to distinguish ' ; estin-
guere, ' to extinguish ' ; — avellere, •' to pull by force ' ;
divellere, c to pluck up ' ; — assumere, ' to assume ' ; —
volvere, £ to turn ' ; and their compounds, have the same
irregularities.
Rifulgere has no participle.
Sorgere has been by poets changed into surgere, and so throughout
its inflexions : — sursi, c I rose ' ; surto, ' risen ' ; &c.
Strmgere, l to bind ' ; and its compounds, as astringere, t to con-
strain ' ; &c., in the participle makes strilio^ * bound ' ; astrettoy ' con^
strained ' ; &c.
24*
282 ANALOGY.
Espellere, f to expel ' ; impellere, ' to impel ' ; repellere, l to repel ' ;
in the perfect make espulsi, ' I expelled ' ; impulsi, t I impelled ' ;
repulsi, l I repelled ' ; and in the participle, espulso, l expelled ' ;
impulso, * impelled ' ; repulso, * repelled.'
Involvere, ' to involve ' ; and devolvere, ' to devolve ' ; in the parti-
ciple make involuto, l involved ' ; devoluto, l devolved.'
Presumere, l to presume ' ; and riassitmere, ( to re-assume ' 5 assol-
vere, * to absolve ' ; dissolvere, ' to dissolve ' ; and riaolvere, * to re-
solve ' ; in the perfect are both regular and irregular ; and make
presumti or presunsi, 1 1 presumed '; assolvdi or assolsi, 1 1 absolved ';
&c.
Assolvere, diss6lvere, and risolvere in the participle make, assoluto
1 absolved ' ; dissoluto* * dissolved ' \ risoluto, * resolved/
The verb solvere, { to untie/ ' to solve,' is regular
and is varied like tessere.
Variation of the Verb Concedere.
(Paradigm of the Third Class of the verbs in
ere (short).)
I. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.
[to grant. || conc6- sso, [granted.
II. INDICATIVE.
Singular. Plural.
3. — Perfect.
1st p. concd-ssi,
2d p. concedestij
3d p.
I granted ;
thou grantedst;
he granted ;
concedemmO)
concedeste,
we granted ;
you granted ;
they granted.
The verbs scindere, ' to cut asunder ' ; — esprimere,
4 to express ' ; — scuotere, c to shake ' ; percudtere, i to
* For this participle we, generally, substitute discidlto, a corresponding form of the
verb discitigliere, ' to dissolve7 ; to distinguish it from the word dissoluto, 'dissolute.*
IRREGULAR VERBS. 283
strike ' ; — discutere, ' to discuss '; concutere, * to shake ' ;
— connettere, ' to connect ' ; — muovere, ' to move ' ;
and their compounds have the same irregularities.
Redimere, ( to redeem ' ; in the perfect makes redtnsi, 1 1 redeemed ' ;
and in the participle) redento, ' redeemed.*
Me'ttere, ' to put ' ; and its compounds ammettere, t to admit ' ; com-
mette.re, ' to commit ' ; &c., in the perfect make misi, * I put J j ammi-
sit ' I admitted ' ; &c.
Conci&ere, ' to grant ' >. interce'dere, ' to intercede7 ; precedere, f to
precede ' ; and succederej l to succeed/ are both regular and irregular,
and make, in the perfect, concdssi or conced£i, * I granted '; and in the
participle, concesso or conceduto, ' granted ' ; &c.
Conn6ttere, signifying c to reason/ is regular, and makes, in jthe
perfect, connettdi, « I reasoned '; and in the participle, connettuto,
f reasoned.'
The verbs cedere, ' to yield ' ; accedere, c to accede ';
eccedere, fi to exceed ' ; procedere* ' to proceed ' ; —
prescindere, ' to prescind ' ; — premere, c to press ' ;
spremere, i to squeeze ' ; — riflettere, ' to reflect ' ; and
battere, ' to beat ' ; and its compounds, are regular, and
are varied like tessere.
Riflettere, when applied to * light/ ' sound/ &c., in the participle
makes riflesso, ' reflected.'
Variation of the Verb Cuocere.
(Paradigm of the Fourth Class of the verbs ending in
ere (short).)
I. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.
CWO-CERE, |to cook. || cd-Txo, |cooked.
* Of this verb, Castiglione hai used proctssc, < he proceeded.1
284
ANALOGY.
II. INDICATIVE.
Singular. Plural.
3. — Perfect.
Istp. c<5-ssi,
2d p. cocesti,
3d p. CO-SSE,
[ cooked ; 1 1 cocemmo,
thou cookedst ; cocdste,
he cooked ; || CO-SSERO,
we cooked ;
you cooked ;
they cooked.
Adducere.
(Paradigm of the Verbs ending in ucere.)
I. INFINITIVE.
or [to allege.
PARTICIPLE.
[alleged.
1st p.
II. INDICATIVE.
3. — Perfect.
1st p. addussij \ I alleged.
4. — Future.
[by contraction I I shall or will allege.
[for adducero], \
1st p.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
1 . — Present.
(addurria) [by
[contraction for adducerei (ad-
[duceria)],
I should, would, or could allege ; or
[might allege.
Rilucere, * to shine ' ; and tralucerey f to shine through ' ; are never
contracted in the infinitive, and make, in the future, rUucerci, ' it will
shine ' ; tralucera, * it will shine through ' ; and in the conditional
rilucerebbey l it would shine J ; &c.
IRREGULAR VERBS. 285
Distruggere.
I. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.
, orjto destroy. \\distruTTO, [destroyed.
II. INDICATIVE.
3. — Perfect.
1st p. distr&asi, \ I destroyed.
4. — Future.
1st p. distrvGGERo, or distruRRo, \ I shall or will destroy,
IV. CONDITIONAL.
1.— Present.
1st p. disfruGGEREi, or distruR- I I should, would, or could destroy ;
[REI (distruggeria or distrurria), | [or might destroy ..
StHtggere, e to melt ' ; is never contracted in the infinitive, and
makes, in the future, only struggerd, * I will melt ' ; and in the con-
ditional, struggerei, * I should melt.'
Trdere*
I. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.
TraERE, or trdn-
[RE,
to draw.
\\trdTiot
1 drawn.
* Fr&m the Latin trahere, converted also by the Italians into trdggert,
become obsolete, but of which it retains many of the forms.
286
ANALOGY.
Singular.
II. INDICATIVE.
1. — Present.
Plural.
1st
2d
3d
p. trdGGO,
p. trdi,
p. trde (trag-
[ge),
I draw ;
thou drawest ;
he draws ;
tr alamo j or trao-
[GIAMO.
i traete,
trdoGOso (tran-
[no),
we draw >
you draw ;
thjy draw.
3. — Perfect .
1st p. frassi,
| I drew.
4. — Future.
1st p. traiiRo [by contraction for I I shall or will draw.
[traerd], \
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. to trace A.,
2dtp. tu
3d p. egli trdo-
[GA,
that I draw or
[may draw ;
that thou draw ;
that he draw ;
traidmo, or trao-
[GIAMO,
tra'idte or trao-
[GIATE,
that we draw ;
that you draw ;
that they draw.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
1. — Present.
1st p. fraRREi (trarria) [by contrac-j I should, would, or could draw ; or
[lion for traerei (traeria)],! [might draw.
V. IMPERATIVE.
1st p
tratdmo or trctG-
let us draw j
2d p. trdi tuy
3d p. trdGGA.
[t§H,
draw thou ;
let him draw ;
[GIAMO.
traete,
iracGANO,
draw ye ;
let them draw.
IRREGULAR VERBS/ 287
The compounds of cuocere, ' to cook ' ; traere, * to
draw ' ; and the verbs inducere, ' to induce ' ; conducere,
Mo conduct'; deducere, { to deduct '; producers, 'to
produce '; riducere, ' to educe ' ; seducere, ' to seduce ';
traducere, ' to translate ' ; — dirigere, ' to direct ' ; m*
gere,* 6 to erect ' ; negllgere, ' to neglect ' ; prediligere,
' to have a predilection for ' ; — Uggere, ' to read ' ;
reggere, c to support'; proteggere, 'to protect';
striiggere, ' to melt ' ; — scrivere, l to write ' ; and^li
compounds, have the same irregularities. ^^Xv^*
jpv*' or THE
Figgere,\ l to fix ' ; infiggere, Mo infix ' ;
thrust into '
* to fry ' ; ajftigvere, « to afflict ' ; infliggere, ' to inflict ' ; end in
and make confliTTO, <• thrust into ' ; friTro, ' fried } ; if^mro, f inflict-
ed ' ; &c.
Rilucere, l to shine ' ; tralucere, l to shine through ' ; are both regu-
lar and irregular, and make rilucei or rilussi, 1 1 shone ' ; trained or
tralusse, t it shone through ' j but they have no participle.
Esigere, « to exact * ; in the perfect is both regular and irregular,
and makes e^gdi or csdssi, * 1 exacted ' ; arid in the participle makes
esdtto, ' exacted.'
Vivere, l to live '; in the participle makes vivuto or tnsstifo, ' lived J;
and in the future and conditional, is often contracted into tuun), ' I
will live '; and vivrei (vivria), * I would live.'
* Erigere is often by poet? contracted into trgere, but then bas no participle.
The 4rto raentioAed by Mastrofini, notwithstanding its derivation from erttto, parti-
ciple of er'igerC) is used in Italian as a» adjective, but not as a participle.
t Figgcre,&nd some of its compounds, as affiggere, &c., are sometimes spelt with
one ff only : — figere, affigere j and then make, in the jper/ec£,/isi, affisi j and in the
participle, fiso, qffiso ; &c.
288
ANALOGY.
Variation of the Verl Rispondere.
(Paradigm of the Fifth Class of the verbs in
ere (short).)
I. INFINITIVE.
, jto answer.
PARTICIPLE.
|j rispo-sTO, |answered.
II. INDICATIVE.
Singular.
Plural.
3. — Perfect.
1st p. mp-6si,
2d p. rispondesti,
3d p. ri
I answered ;
I rispondemmO)
thou answeredst;i rispondeste,
he answered; || rtsp-6s£RO,
we answered ;
you answered ;
they answered.
Chiedere.
I. INFINITIVE.
, |to ask.
PARTICIPLE.
II. INDICATIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. chiedo
I ask or am ask-
chiediamo(chieg-
we ask ;
[(chieggio),
[ing;
[gidmo, chiede-
[mo),
2d p. chiedi,
thou askest;
chiede'te,
you ask ;
3d p. chiedej
he asks ;
chiedono (chidg-
they ask.
[giono, chieg-
[gono),
3. — Perfect.
1st p. chicsi,
I asked.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
289
Singular.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
3. — Present.
Plural.
1st p. io chieda
[(chiezgia,
that I ask, or
[may ask ;
chiedidmo (chieg-
[gidmo),
that we ask ;
2d p. tu chirda
[(chiecrgia,
[chidgga,
[chie'gghi),.
3d p. egli r.hieda
[(chitggia,
[chiegga),
that thou ask ;
that he ask ;
chiedidte (chieg-
[gidte),
chiedano (chieg-
[gianOj chieg-
[gano),
that you ask 5
that they ask.
1st p
V. IMP!
• RATIVE.
chiedidmo noi,
chiedete voi,
chiedano (chieg-
[gano) 6glino:
let us ask ;
ask ye ;
let them ask.
2d p. chiedi tu,
3d p. chieda
(.(chiegga) egli,
ask thou ;
let him ask ;
Ponere.
I. INFINITIVE.
PONERE, or^ORRE,|to put.
j] jposxo,
PARTICIPLE.
|PUt.
II. INDICATIVE.
1.— Present.
1st p. ponoo
J(pono),
2d p. pom,
3d p. pone } .
I put;
thou puttest ;
he puts ;
ponidmoy we put ;
pone"te, you put ;
ponoosoy they put.
3. — Perfect.
1st p. JEWS i, | I put.
i
4. — Future.
1st p.
O [by contraction for 1 I shall or will put.
Iponerd], \ -^
25
290
ANALOGY.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
Singular,
Plural.
1. — Present.
1st p. w ponGA
[(pogna),
that I put ;
ponidmo,
2d p. tU pOHGA.
that thou put j
ponidte,
3d p. egli pone A
that he put ;
pOMGANO,
[(pogna),
IV. CONDITIONAL.
1. — Present.
1st p. J90RREI (porria) [bycontrac-
[tion for ponerei (poneria),
that we put ;
that you put ;
that they put.
I should, would, or could put; or
[might put.
V. IMPERATIVE.
2d p. poni tu,
3d p.ponoA. tgli,
put thou ;
let him put j
\\ponidmo noi,
\\pon6te voi,
let us put ;
put ye ;
let them put.
The verbs corrispondere, c to correspond ' ; ascondere,
c to conceal ' ; nascondere, ' to hide ' ; — richiedere, * to
request ' ; — and all the compounds of ponere, ' to put ' ;
have the same irregularities.
Jlscdndere and nascdndere, in the participle, end also in so, making
j l concealed' ; and nascoso, * hidden.'
Fondere, l to melt,' and its compounds confondere, l to confound ' ;
&c. in the perfect make fusi, 1 1 melted ' ; con/usi, * I confounded ' ;
&c.; and in the participle, fu so, l melted ' ; confirso, * confounded ' ; &c.
Fondere is also regular, making also, in ihe perfect, fondei, and
in participle, fonduto.
Tondere,* c to shear ' ; and scernere, c to distinguish ' ;f
discernere, c to discern ' ; concernere, ' to concern ' ; are
regular, and varied like tessere.
* The participle t6so, erroneously attributed to ttindere, is a contraction oftosdto,
participle of the verb tosdre, * to shear.'
t Manzoni has written scerse, 'she distinguished' ; and scerserOj « they distin-
guished.'
IRREGULAR VERBS.
291
Variation of other Irregular Verbs in ere (short), not
included in any of the preceding classes.
To the above five classes of verbs in ere (short)
must be added the verbs,
conoscere, to know ;
crescere, to grow ;
nuocere, to hurt ;
nascere,
rompere,
to be born ;
to break ;
which, in the perfect, end in bbi, cqui, ppi; and in the
participle, in uto, to, tto : thus,
Infinitive.
Perfect.
Participle.
COnOSCERE,
cono'-BBi,
COH05CI-UTO J
CT^SCERE,
cr^-BBi,
cresci-tJTo ;
ntlo'cERE,
no-cqui,
TlOCl'-UTO;
WffSCERE,
na-cqui,
rwi-To;
rOMPERE,
rw-ppi,
ro-TTO.
Conoscere.
(Varied with avere.)
I. INFINITIVE.
Conoscere, |to know.
PARTICIPLE.
TOj (known.
Singular.
II. INDICATIVE.
3. — Perfect.
Plural.
1st p. C0WO-BBI
[(conoscei),
2d p. conosce'sti,
3d p. £<WO-BBE
[(conosce),
I knew ;
thou knewest ;
\\e knew ;
conoscdmmo,
conosceste,
C0/10-BBERO,
we knew;
you knew ;
they knew.
ANALOGY.
The compounds of conoscere, — and the verb crescere,
'to grow,' and its compounds, — have the same irregu-
larities.
Nuocere.
(Varied with avere.y
I. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.
Nuocere, |to hurt. || noci-uxor jhurt
» II. INDICATIVE.
SlnguTar. Plurat
3. — Perfect.
I hurt ; || nocemmo, [we hurt ~,
thouhurtest; ?i<?ces<e, [you hurt ;
he hurt; ||no-cQUERO, fthey hurt
1st p.
2d p. nocesli,
3d p.
Rinuocere, c to hurt again, '— and the verb naseere?
f to be born ' ; and its compound rinascere, ' to be boro
again,' — in the perfect, have the, same irregularities.
Ndscere, and its compound rinascere, in the participle make nd-TO>
' been born' j rind-To, * been born again.".
The verb pdscere, 'to feed/ although it has the same termination as
conoscere, crdscere, nascere, is regular. The verb mescere, signity-
ing c to pour,' is regular, but signifying ' to mix/ in the participle^ is
irregular, and makes misto, l mixed/
Rompere.
(Varied with awe.)
I. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.
Rompere, |to break. [j TO-TTO, [broken.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
293
Singular.
Plural.
3.— Perfect.
1st p. rw-ppi
[(roppi,rompei),
2d p. rompesti,
3d p. rw-ppE
[(roppe,rompe),
I broke ;
thou brokest ;
he broke ;
rompenunc
rompiste,
fW-PPERO,
we broke ;
you broke ;
they broke.
The compounds of rompere, as corrompere, ' to cor-
rupt ' ; dirompere, * to break ' ; &c., have the same
irregularities.
Variation of the Verb Severe.
Severe, c to drink,' is a regular verb ; but, as it has
been by poets so contracted as to give it the appear-
ance of an irregular one, we will here give its variation.
Bevere.
(Varied with avere.)
I. INFINITIVE.
(Severe) bere, \ to drink.
GERUND. PARTICIPLE.
bevendo (beendo), [drinking.
| bevuto,
jdrunk.
II. INDICATIVE.
1. — Present.
1st
2d p. be'vi (b6i),
3d p. beve (bee),
I drink ;
thou drinkest;
he drinks ;
25*
I bevidmo, |we drink ;
bevete (beete), you drink;
I bevono (beono), (they drink.
294
ANALOGY,
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. w beveva or bevta, \ I drank.
Singular.
3, — Perfect.
1st p. bevei or
fbevetli, BEVVJ
[(W&«),
2d p. btvesti,
3d p. 6ev£ or 6e-
[vette, BEVVE
[(bebbe),
I drank ;
thou drankest;
he drank ;
PJural.
bev6mmot
beveste,
beverono or be-
[vettero, EEV-
[VERO (bebbe-
\ro, bevvono),
we drank ;
you drank ^
they drank.
4. — Future.
1st p. (beverdj
[bevro) berd,
2d p. (beveiai)
[beraiy
3d p. (beverd,
[bevra) bera,
I shaH or will
[drink :
thou wilt drink ; '
he will drink ;
(beveremo, be-
(beverete) berete,
(beverdnno) be-
[rdnno,
we will drink ;
you will drink }
they will drink.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. w beva
[(bea),
2d
tu beva
[(bevi}bea,bei),
3^ p. egli beva
[(bea),
that I drink or
[may drink ;
that thou drink ;
that he drink ;
levidmo,
bevidte,
bevano (beano),
that we drink ;
that you drink ;
that they drink.
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. w bevessi jif I drink ;
[(beessi)J
2d p. tu bevessiit thou drinkest ;
[(beessi),
3d p. bevesse if he drinks ;
[(beesse),!
bevessimo (bees-
[sinao),
beveste (beeste),
bevessero (bees-
I [sero,beessono),
if we drink ;
if you drink ;
if they drink.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
295
IV. CONDITIONAL.
Singular. Plaral.
1. — Present.
1st p. (beverei
[(beveria)) berei
[(beria),
2d p. (beveresti)
[btrtsti,
3d p. (bevertbbe
[(beveria)) be
[rebbe (beria),
I should, would,
[or could drink ;
[or might drink;
thou wouldst
[drink;
he would drink ;
(beveremmo) be-
[remmo,
(bevereste) ber6-
[ste,
(beverebbero (be-
[veriano, beveri-
[e?io)) berebbero
[(beriano, beri-
[eno), .
we would drink ;
you would drink ;
they would drink.
V. IMPERATIVE.
Istp
2d p. btm (bei) drink thou ;
[fw,
3d p. b6va (bea) let him drink;
bevidmo noi,
bevete (beete] voi,
bevano (beano)
[dglino,
let us drink;
drink ye ;
let them drink.
The compounds of bevere, as imbevere, ' to imbibe ' ;
ribevere, * to drink again ' ; have the same irregularities.
REMARKS ON THE FOREGOING VERBS.
All verbs ending in ucere, as adducere, ' to allege ' ;
inducere,- £ to induce ' ; &LC. in the participle, besides
changing cere into tto, change also the u into o ; and
make addotto, ' alleged ' ; indotto, ; induced ' ; &c.
Rilucere,
participle.
e to shine ' ; and tralucere, « to shine through ' ; have no
Verbs ending in gliere, as cogliere, 6 to gather ' ;
togliere, ' to take away *; &c., in the perfect and parti-
ciple retain the Z of their termination ; and make COLSI,
296 ANALOGY. i
6 I gathered '; coiJo, ' gathered ' ; toLsi, < I took away ' ;
&c.
All verbs ending in ndere, as accendere, 6 to kindle ' ;
scindere, ' to cut asunder ' ; rispondere, ' to answer '^
&c., in the perfect and the participle lose the n ; and
make accesi, ' 1 kindle '; acceso, ' kindled ';. scim", ' I
cut asunder ' ; &c.
Verhs ending in ngere may end also in gnere, and
wee versa; thus, giungere or giugxere, ' to arrive *£
spegwere or speygere, 6 to extinguish ' ; &ic. When
they end in gnere', in the perfect and participle they
retain the w of their termination ; and make spexsi,
6 1 extinguished '; spento, t extinguished ' ; &c.
The transposition of the n in verbs in ngere ought not to be made ex-
cept in those inflexions in which ng is followed by e or i ; as, giungo,
1 1 arrive,' giuGxi, ' thou arrives! ' ; gnt&jRe, ' he arrives ' ; giuGitidmo,
1 we arrive ' ; giucNdte, * you arrive ' ; giiingono, l they arrive J ; and
vice versd in verbs in gnere, it ought not to be made but in those inflex-
ions in which gn is followed by o or a; as, S/^NGO, 5 1 extinguish ';
sptgni, l thou exlinguishest ' ; &c., spexGa, * that I extinguish7 ; &c.
Verbs ending in igere and imere, as dirigere, { to di-
rect ' ; esprimere, ' to express ' ; &c., in the perfect and
participle change the i into e ; and make dirvssi, ' I
directed ' ; dirvtto, ' directed ' ; esprvssi, ' I expelled ' ;
e^prE.sso, c expressed ' ; &c.
The verb redtmere, c to redeem ' ; and verbs ending
in wmere, as assumere, c to assume ' ; &c., in the joer-
fect and participle, change the m of their termination
into n, and make redexsi> ' I redeemed ' ; assuxsi, ' I
assumed ' ; assuxto, ' assumed ' ; &c.
The verbs traere, l to draw * ; ponere, c to put,' and
their compounds ; and all verbs ending in gliere, ucere,
uggere ; as cogliere, ' to gather ' ; adducere, ' to allege ' ;
distruggere, 6 to destroy ' ; are, in the infinitive con-
tracted into trdrre, porre, corre, addurre, distrurre ;
IRREGULAR VERBS. 297
and make, in the future, — trarrd, c I will draw' ; porro,
* I will put ' ; &tc., and in the conditional, — trarrei, c I
would draw ' ; &c.
Rilucere, * to shine ' ; tralucere, l to shine through ' ; and struggere,
' to melt' ; are never contracted in any of the above inflexions.
All verbs ending in ere (short), preceded by the
diphthong wo (accented), as cubcere, ' to cook ' ; scuo-
tere, ' to shake ' ; mvbvere, c to move ' ; nubcere, ' to
hurt ' ; &o», in the perfect and participle, — and in all
the inflexions in which the diphthong loses the accent,
drop the u ; and make, cossi, ' 1 cooked ' ; cotto,
6 cooked ' ; scossi, ' I shook ' ; &c. — cociamo, ( we
cook ' ; scoteie, l you shake ' ; movero, ' I will move ' ;
nocerebbe, { it would hurt ' ; &,c.
EXAMPLES*
JLd ambidue questi fini ha qui To both these objects has the
ALLTJSO parimente il Signore con Lord here equally alluded with
un tal ditto. (Segn. Mann. Nov. such words.
16.)
Non ist6tte gudri, che egli PER- It was not long before he lost
DE la vista, c La parola. (Bocc. both his sight and speech,
g. 4. n, 7.)
Qu6sta volta w dird, come si This time I will say, as we are
dice, ~ /)' essermi PERSA ancW wont to say, that I have missed
\o la liscialura. (Buon. Fier. 2. 4.) the object in view.
Taglidndo il FENDE quasi in- With a cut he clove him as
fino a denti. (Bocc. Filoc. 1,) far as the chin.
Colui FESSE in grdmbo a Dio That one smote in the bosom of
^- Lo cuor che in sul Tanrigi an- God the heart which is yet hon-
cor si cola. (Dant. Inf. 12.) • ored on the Thames.
Che, per V effetto d& suoi mtf That, through the effect of fas
pensieri, — Fiddndomi di lui, 10 evU thoughts, I, trusting m mm,
298
ANALOGY.
fossi PRESO, — E poscia morto,
dir non £ mestieri. (Dant. Inf.
33.)
Prdsa la pidstra, la RADEI da
tutte e due le bdnde. (Benv.
Cell. Oref. 85.)
E seco avere una procella AS-
SORT o — Tdnti principi illustri.
(Ariost. Fur. 14. 6.)
Voi troverete lo spezidle per
la ma, che andrd a CORRE la
misura de' confetti. (Fir. Trin.
1.2.)
Ne poeta ne COLGA mdi, ne
Gidve — La privilegi. (Petr. s.
46.)
Se egli [il vino] sdppia di sec-
co o dbbia odor cattivo, cdccinvisi
dentro fidccole accese, e vi si
SPENGANO. (Sod. Colt. 99.)
Sempre la prossimdna 6rba
dattorno si SVELGA. (Cresc. 5.
1.)
Che Cristo appdrve d' due ch* 6-
rano in via, — Gid SURTO fuor
d6lla sepulcrdl buca. (Dant. Purg.
21.)
In onordre altrui ten6va la bor-
sa STRETTA. (Bocc. g. 1. n. 8.)
Del lei nido di L6da mi divelse,
— E nel del velocissimo m* IM-
PULSE. (Dant. Par. 27.)
Cft' e di torbidi nuvoli INVO-
LTJTO. (Dant. Inf. 24.)
Clddio diede moneta d' giudici,
efu ASSOLUTO. (Sen. Pist. 97.)
Questo possente mw nobile ar-
dor e — Mi solleva da terra, e por-
ta il core — Dov' ir per sua virtu
non gli e CONCESSO. (Buon. Rim.
50.)
was taken and afterward put to
death, there is no need that I
should tell.
Having taken the metal, I
shaved it on both sides.
And that along with him one
storm had swallowed up so many
illustrious princes.
You will find the apothecary on
the way, going to take the meas-
ure of the confections.
Never may a poet gather of it,
nor Jupiter give it any privilege.
If it [the wine] tastes too dry or
has a bad odor, let lighted torches
be thrown into it, and be extin-
guished in it.
Let the grass always be pulled
up around it.
That Christ appeared unto the
two upon their way, new-risen
from his vaulted grave.
He kept his purse close in hon-
oring others.
From the fair nest of Leda rapt
me forth, and wafted me on fnto
swiftest heaven.
Which is wrapt in turbid mists.
Clodius gave money to the
judges and was acquitted.
This powerful ardor of mine
elevates me from the earth, and
carries my heart, where by its
own power it is not" permitted .to
ascend.,
IRREGULAR VERBS.
JL che, e come CONCEDETTE
JLmore — Che conosceste i dub-
biosi desiri ? (Dant. Inf. 5.)
REDENTO, da Redimere. (Cru-
sca.)
M ]\IISE dentro alle segr6te
cose (Dant. Inf. 3.)
By what and how did Love grant
that you should know your uncer-
tain wishes?
Redeemed, from to redeem.
He led me on into those seclud-
ed regions.
Ne dnche ben capisco V ilia- Neither can I understand the
zione che fa Apelle, del doversi inference which Apelles makes,
concedere qualche lume RIFLESSO that some reflected light must be
alia terra. (Gal. Macch. sol. 168.) granted to the -earth.
Qudndo Fetonte abbandond li
freni, — Perche V del, come pare
ancor, si COSSE. (Dant. Inf. 17,)
Ddto che quest a ragione si
potesse ADDUCERE. (Borg. Rip.
30.)
JYot, sempre che verra proposi-
tOj ADDURREMO simili antichi e-
sempj. (Dav. Stor. 3.)
JE" suono, che si fa nelle selve
ddi cacciatori, perche li cdni
TRAGGANO al sudno. (But. Inf.
31.)
Via corta e spedita — TRAR-
REBBE a fin quest' dspra penat e
dura. . (Petr. c. 18.)
Sono FISO in un limo, che non
trovafondo. (Vit. SS. Pad.)
Lo TRAFITTO il mird, ma nulla
disse. (Dant. Inf. 25.)
Libero spirto od a' suoi mem-
bri AFFISSO. (Petr. s. 113.).
Tento di trar ddlla profonda
pidga la CONFITTA saetta. (Guar.
Past. Fid. 5, 7.)
E tdnta grazia sovra me RILUS-
SE. (Dant. Par. 22.)
When Phaeton abandoned the
reins, whence heaven, as it yet
appears, was wrapt in flames.
Even could this reason be al-
leged.
Whenever it shall be conven-
ient, we will always allege similar
ancient examples.
It is a sound, which is made by
hunters in the woods, that the dogs
may come to that sound.
A short and expeditious way
would bring to an end this severe
and hard pain.
I am fixed in a marshy soil
which has no bottom.
The pierced spirit looked on
him, but did not speak.
Free spirit of still confined to
its limbs.
He tried to draw from the deep
wound the fixed arrow.
La luce nelle tenebre RILU-
CETTE. (Arr. Vang.)
And so much grace shone over
me.
Light shone in the darkness.
300
ANALOGY.
ESATTO, da Esigere. (Crusca.) Exacted, from to exact.
Che gli fusse oscurdta la fdma That the fame of the beginning
(Li"1 principj delta sua milizia da of his military life should be ob-
un popolo VIVUTO in lunga pace, scured by a people who had lived
(Guicc. Stor. 5.) in long peace.
Ma il ben VISSUTO vecchio s' in-
gegndva di mostrdre la veritd del-
la cosa. (Firenz. Asin.)
VIVRO, com' io son visso.*
(Petr. s. lib.)
Jlllora dimandd come si chia-
mdvaqueW isola;fu RISPOSTO per
li marindri. che per antico si chia-
mdva Jerusalem. (Giov. Vill, 1.
4. c. 18.)
Ne pud grdzia negdr che tu gli
CHIEGGIA. (Alam. Colt. 1. 10.)
E se ne venne a FONERE oste a
Fiesole. (Pecor. g. 11. n. 1.)
Per duo fiammette, che vedem-
mo PORRE. (Dant. Inf. 8.)
Chi PORRA ben la mente e
r intelletto. (Franc. Barb. 15.8.)
Lo duca ed w,per quel cammi-
no ASCOSO, — Entrammo a ritor-
ndr net chidro mondo. (Dant.
Inf. 34.)
Lapietdde' duo eogndti, — Che
di tristizia tutto mi CONFUSE.
(Dant. Inf. 6.)
Tutte le campdne che erano in
qutllo trovdronsi qudsi tutte FON-
DUTE, come fossero coldte nella
forndce. (Matt. Vill. 3. 42. )
n Saladino CONOBBE costui ot-
timamente essere saputo uscir del
Idccio, il qudle davdnti d' piedi
teso gli avea. (Bocc. g. 1. n. 3.)
Ben ti dee ricorddr, che non ti
KOCQUE. (Dant. Inf. 20.)
But the well-lived old man en-
deavoured to show the truth of
the thing.
I shall live as I have lived.
Then he asked how that island
was called ; he was answered by
the sailors, that anciently it was
called Jerusalem.
Nor can he deny any favor that
you may ask.
And came to encamp at Fiesole.
By two small flames, which we
saw kindle.
He who will reflect well.
My guide and I entered by that
hidden way to return to the bright
world.
Pity for the kindred shades,
whence grief wholly overcame
me.
All the bells which were there,
were found almost all melted as if
they had been put in a furnace.
Saladin saw that he had known
how to get out of the snare, which
he had spread before his feet.
Thou oughtest to remember well,
for it did thee good service.
* By contraction for visstoto.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
301
Jlndbnne a Pavia per una dis-
cdrdia NAT A tra qutlli di Becche-
ria. (Din. Comp. 3.)
He went to Pavia on account of
a dissension sprung up among the
people of Beccheria.
La cittadindnza, che e or MISTA The citizens' blood, that now is
— Di Cdmpi, e di Certdldo, e di mixed from Campi, and Certaldo,
Figghine, — Pura vedcasi nelV ul- and Figghine, ran pure through the
timo artista. (Dant. Par. 16.) last mechanic's veins.
One of which I broke some few
years past, to save an infant who
was drowning in it.
U un de^lli qudli, ancor non &
molV dnni — RUPP' w per un>
che dtntro «' annegava. (Dant.
Inf. 13.)
E rndngia, e BEE, e dorme, e And eats, and drinks, and sleeps,
veste pdnni. (Dant. Inf. 33.) and puts raiment on.
EXERCISE XX.
I. 1. — To gather, to allege, to destroy, to draw.
Cogliere. adducere. distruggere. trdere.
to put. to take away.
ponere. togliere.
7. — cloven. taken. shaven.
ftndere. prendere. rddere.
kindled. devolved. bound. redeemed, extinguished.
accendere. devolvere. stringere. redimere. spegnere.
cooked, ^answered. born. directed. lived. broken.
cuocere. rispondere. ndscere. dirigere. vivere. rompere.
alleged. II. 1. — I gather, thou extinguishest, he
adducere. cogliere, spegnere, ri-
reduces, we ask, you draw, they take away.
ducere, chiedere, trdere, togliere.
I absorb, thou choosest, he rises, we assume, you
assorbere, scegliere, sorgere, assumtre, a-
compel, they root up.
string ere, svellere.
3. — I offended, thou vilifiedst,
ledere, vilipendere,
he ran, we^ bite, you sprinkled, they kindled.
correre, mordere, aspergere, accendere.
[ expelled,
thou invadedst,
invddere,
26
he knew, we wiped,
conoscere, tergere.
302 ANALOGY.
you shut, they descended. 1 cut asunder, thou
chiudere, sc6ndere. scmdere, con-
grantedst, he redeemed, we ^sheared, you chose, they
cddere, redimere, tondere, scegliere, mdt-
put. 4. — I will succour, thou wilt drink, it will occur,
tere. soccorrere, btvere, occorrere,
we will shake, you will draw, they will destroy.
scuotere, trdere, distruggere.
I will put, thou wilt move, he will turn, we will untie,
ponere, muovere, volvere, sciogliere,
you will reflect, they will melt. III. 1. — I may
riflettere, struggere. dis-
distinguish, thou mayest milk, he may know, we may
tinguere, miingere, ndscere, proUg-
protect,
gere,
choose,
gliere,
you may cook,
cuocere,
thou mayest fry,
friggere,
they may conquer.
vincere.
he may request
richiddere,
, we may
contrap-
oppose, you may hurt, they may drink. IV. 1. —
ponere, nuocere, btvere.
I should drink again, thou wouldst break, he would
ribevere, frdngere, rilu-
shine, we would live, you would produce, they would
cere, vivere, producere, cre-
grow. V. — write thou, let him feign, let us answer,
scere. scrwere, flngere, rispondere,
pour ye, let them feed.
mtscere, pdscere.
IRREGULAR VERBS. 303
VARIATION OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE THIRD
CONJUGATION.
The following are the simple irregular verbs of the
third conjugation ; viz.
dire,
to tell ;
morire, to die ;
satire, to ascend ;
seguire, to follow ;
udire, to hear ;
uscire, to go out ;
venire, to come.
Dire.
(Varied with avere.)
I. INFINITIVE.
DIRE (dicere),* | to say.
GERUND. PARTICIPLE.
[saying. J| DETTO (ditto), jsaid.
II. INDICATIVE.
Singular. Plural.
1. — Present.
1st p. dicn,
2d p. did or DI%
3d p. dice,
I say ;
fhou sayest ;
he says ;
II dicidmOj
DITE,
(I dicono,
we say ;
you say ;
they say.
2.—
Imperfect.
1st p. w
dicdva or dic6a, \ I said.
* This verb^belongs*, properly, to the second conjugation, it being but a contrac-
tion of dicere, now become obsolete, of which it retains many of the forms.
304
ANALOGY.
Singular.
Plural.
3. — Perfect.
1st p. oissi,
2d p. dicestij
3d p. DISSE,
I said ;
thou saidest ;
he said ;
t/icdmmo,
dic^ste,
DISSERO,
we said ;
you said ;
they said.
4. — Future.
1st p. DIRO [by contraction for I I shall or will say.
dicerd], \
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. _ Present.
1st p. io dica, \ that I say or may say.
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. w dicessi, \ if 1 said or should say.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
1. — Present.
1st p. DIREI (diria) [by contraction I I should, would, or could say; or
[for dicerii (diceria)], | [might say.
V. IMPERATIVE.
1st p. ... |
2d p. DI' tu, (say thou ;
3d p. dica egli, I let him say ;
dic'idmo not,
DITE <7oi,
dicano eglinO
llet us say ;
pay ye ;
tlet them say.
The compounds of dire, as ridire, ' to say again ' ;
contradire or contraddire, ' to contradict ' ; interdire,
to forbid ' ; bendire, ' to speak well of ; maldire, * to
speak il
bave tbe same irregularities.
Bened'tre, l to bless,' and maladire or maleflire, t to cuise,' in the
perfect, are boih regular and irregular, and make benedii or benedissi,
' I blessed ' ; maledii or maledissi, * I cursed.'
IRREGULAR VERBS.
305
Morire.
(Varied with essere.*)
I. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.
Morire, |to die. || MORTO, [dead.
II. INDICATIVE.
Singular. Plural.
1. — Present.
1st p. MUORO, Or
I die;
moriaMQ)
we die ;
[MUOIO (uioio).
2d p. MUORI,
thou diest ;
inorite,
you die ;
3d p. MUORK
he dies;
MUORONO.OrMUO-
they die.
[(wwor).
[IONO (naoio-
[no;,
4. — Future.
1st- p. inorird or morro, \ I shall or will die.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1st p. 10 MUOR A,
[orMUOiA(m6iii).
2d p. tu MUOR A,
[or MUOIA (inora
[ormoia, nioii),
3d p. egli MUO-
[RA, or MUOIA
[(mora or moia),
1. — Present.
that I die, orjj moridmo,
[may die ;
that thou die ;
that he die ;
MUOR \ NO, or
[MUOIA NO (mo-
[rauo ormoiano),
that we die ;
that you die ;
that they die.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
1. — Present.
1st p. morirdi or morrei (moriria I I should, would, or could die ; or
[or tnorria), | [might die.
* Morire may be varied also with av6re.\ hut then, as wo have already observed
(p. 219j, it takes the nature of uu active verb, and signifies ' to kill,' and uot 'to die.'
2G*
306
ANALOGY.
V. IMPERATIVE.
Singular.
Plural.
1st p. ... i
2d p. MUORI tu, die thou ;
3d p. MUORA. or let him die ;
[MUOIA (mora
[or inoia) egli,
\ moridmo noi,
morite voi,
MUORA NO, or
[Mu6iANo(rn6-
[rano or rnoia-
[no) dglino,
let us die ;
die ye ;
let them die.
The compounds of morire, as premorire, c to die be-
fore'; &c., have the same irregularities.
Salire.
(Varied with either avere or essere.)
I. INFINITIVE.
Salire (saglire*),)to ascend.
PARTICIPLE.
[ascended.
II. INDICATIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. SAL.GO, Ol
I ascend ;
salidmo, or SA-
we ascend ;
[sa/iscr>(saglio),
[GLIAMO,
2d p. sdli or sa-
thou ascendest;
salite,
you ascend ;
[/iscit (sagli),
3d p. sale or sa-
he ascends;
SALGONO, or sa-
they ascend.
[lisce (saglie),
[liscono (sd-
[gliono),
* From this vorb, now become obsolete, are derived many of the forms of the
modern verb satire.
{• The forms soUsci and saglibmo, of the present of the indicative and of the
imperative ; and sagliamo and saglidte, of the present of the conjunctive mood, are to
be preferred when sali, saliamo, salidte, might be confounded with s&li, salidmc,
and satiate, corresponding tenses of the verb saldre, ' to salt.'
IRREGULAR VERBS.
307
Singular^
Plural.
3. — Perfect.
1st p. salii(sdlsi),
2d p. salistii
3d p. sail (sdlse,
[salio),
I ascended ;
ihou ascendedst;
he ascended ;
saliste,
salirono(sdlsero,
[saliro, salir),
we ascended ;
you ascended ;
they ascended.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p.£0SAL,GA,Or
[salisca(sdglia),
2d p. iwsALGA,or
[sa/isca(salghi),
3d p. egli SALGA,
[or salisca,
that I ascend, or
[may ascend ;
that thou ascend;
that he ascend ;
salidmo, or SA-
[GLIAMO,
satiate, or SA-
[GL.IATE,
SALGANO, or sa-
[liscano (sa-
[gliano),
that we ascend ;
that you ascend ;
that they ascend.
V. IMPERATIVE.
2d p. sdli, or sa-
\lisci tu,
3d p. SALGA, or
[salisca egli,
ascend thou ;
let him ascend ;
salidmo, or SA-
[GLIAMO ndi,
salite vdi,
SALGANO, or sa-
[liscano eglino,
let us ascend ;
ascend ye ;
let them ascend.
The compounds of salire, as risalire, ' to reascend ' ;
assalire, ' to assail'; &LC., have the same irregularities.
308
ANALOGY.
Scguire.
(Varied with cither avere or essere.)
I. INFINITIVE.
Segmre, |to follow.
II. INDICATIVE.
PARTICIPLE.
seguito, jfollowed.
Singular.
Plural.
1. — Present.
1st p. seguo, or
[SIEGUO,
2d p. se^ui, 01
3d p.
[SIEGUI.
t6gw, or
[SIEGUE,
I follow ;
thou followest ;
he fol'ows ;
segU'.amo,
seguono, or
[SIEGUONO.
we follow ;
you follow ;
they follow.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p w s^gua.
[or SIEGUA
2dp.
[SIEGUA
[siegui),
3d p. egli segua,
[or SIEGUA
that T follow ; or
[may follow ;
that thou follow;
that he follow ;
seguidmo,
seguidte,
s6guano, or
[SIEGUANO,
that we follow ;
that you follow ;
that they follow.
V. IMPERATIVE.
1st p. . .
2d p. sezui, or'
[SIEGUI tu.
3d p. segua, o
[SIEGUA egli,
follow thou ;
let him follow ;
seguiamo^noi,
seguite voi,
seguano, or SIE-
[GUANO 6glino,
let us follow ;
follow ye ;
let them follow.
The compounds of spguire, as conseguire, f to obtain ' ;
inseguire, ' to pursue ' ; proseguire, e to prosecute ' ;
susseguire, ' to follow immediately after ' ; have the
same irregularities.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
309
Udire.
(Varied with avere.)
I. INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLE.
Udire (od
ire*), jto hear; ,:,
| udito, [heard.
II. INDICATIVE.
Singular. Plural.
1. — Present.
1st p. ODO, [ hear;
2d p. ODI, thou hearest ;
3d p. ODE, he hears ;
udidmO) we hear ;
udite, you hear ;
ODONO, they hear.
4. — Future.
1st p. udird or udrd, \ I shall or will hear.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. W ODA,
2d p. tu ODA
3d p. egli ODA,
that I hear or
[may hear ;
that thou hear ;
that he hear ;
udidmo,
udidte,
ODANO,
that we hear ;
that you hear ;
that they hear.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
1. • — Present.
1st p. udirei or iidrii (udiria or I should, would, or could hear;
[udria), [or might hear.
V. IMPERATIVE.
1st p
udidmo noi,
let us hear ;
2d p. ODI tu,
3d p. ODA egli,
hear thou ;
let him hear ;
udite voi,
ODANO iglino,
hear ye ;
let them hear.
* From this form, now obsolete^ are derived 6dot <Jdit &c.5 of udire*
310
ANALOGY.
The compounds of u !'ire, as riudire, ' to hear again '5
&,c. have the same irregularities.
Esaudire, ' to grant ' ; is regular, and varied like esibire.
TJscire.
(Varied with essere.)
I. INFINITIVE.
Uscire (escire*),|to go out;
PARTICIPLE.
uscito, |gone out.
Singular.
II. INDICATIVE.
J . — Present.
Plural.
1st p. ESCO,
2d p. ESCI,
3d p. ESCE,
T go out ;
thou goest out;
he goes out ;
nsridmoj
uscite,
ESCOJVO,
we go out ;
you go out ;
they go out.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. ZO ESCA,
2d p. tu ESCA,
3d p. igli ESCA,
that I go out, or
[may go out ;
that thou go out ;
that he go out ;
uscidmo,
uscidte,
ESCANO,
that we go out ;
that you go out ;
that they go out.
V. IMPI
1st p .....
:RATIVE.
usciamo noi,
uscite vdi,
ESCAJVO eglino,
let us go out ;
go ye out ;
let them go out.
2d p. ESCI tu,
3d p. ESCA egli,
The compr
the same irre
2:0 thou out ;
let him go out;
und of uscire, — riuscire, 'to succeed,' has
^ularities.
* From this verb, now become obsolete, are derived the forms esco, 6sca, &c.} ot
the verb uscire.
IRRE&ULAR VERBS.
311
I. INFINITIVE.
Venire, |to come.
Singular.
Venire.
(Varied with essere.}
PARTICIPLE.
|come.
II. INDICATIVE.
1. — Present.
Plural.
1st p. VENGO
[(vegno),
2d p. VIENI,
3d p. VIENE,
1st p. VENN I,
2d p. venisti,
3d p. VENNE,
I come ;
thou comest ;
he comes ;
venidmo (vcgnd-
vemte,
[mo),
YEN GO NO( vegno-
[no),
3. — Perfect.
I came ;
thou earnest ;
he came ;
venwwio,
veniste,
VENNERO (veni-
[ro)
we corne;
you come ;
they come.
we came ;
you came ;
they carne.
4. — Future.
1st p. verro [by contraction for I shall or will come.
[venird],
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. W VENGA
[(vegna),
2d p. tU VENGA
[(vegni),
3d p. egli VENGA
[(vegna),
that I come or
[may come ;
that thou come ;
that he come ;
venidmo (vegna-
[mo)r
veniate (vegna-
[te),
VENGANO (VC-
[gnano),
that we come j
that you come ;
they they come.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
i ri
1. — Present.
1st p. verrei (verria) [by contraction I I should, would, or could come ;
[for venirei (veniria)], | [or might come.
312
ANALOGY.
V. IMPERATIVE.
Singular.
Plural.
1st p
veniumo noit
let us come ;
2d p. VIENI tUj
3d p. VENGA
[(vegna) 6gli9
come thou ;
let him come;
venite voi,
VENGANo(veg;na-
[no) 4giino.
come ye ;
let them come.
Venire is sometimes varied with the conjunctive
pronouns mi, ti, si. &,c. and the particle ne ; thus, ME
NE vengo, ' I am coming thence ' ; TE NE vieni, ' thou
art coming thence ' ; &ic. — Me, te, &tc., are then mere
expletives.
The compounds of venire, as convenire, ' to agree';
divenire, c to become' ; invenire, ' to find ' ; prevenire,
'to anticipate'; sovve .1. e, ' to assist'; &c. have the
same irregularities.
Variation of the Verb Offerire.
Offer ire, c to offer,' is both regular and irregular ;
and it has, besides, been so contracted by poets, as to
render it important to give here its variation.
Offerire.
(Varied with avere.)
I. INFINITIVE.
Offerire or offrire, \ to offer.
PARTICIPLE.
offerindo or offering.
[offrendo,i
1 1 (offer! to) OFFER- I offered.
[TO,|
IRREGULAR VERBS.
II. INDICATIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. offerisco or offro, \ I offer.
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. w offerwa or offriva,or offeria I I offered,
[or offria, \
313
Singular.
Plural.
3. — Perfect.
1st p. offeni, of-
Ifrii, or OFFERSI,
2d p. offensti or
[offnsti,
3d p. offeri.nffri,
[Or OFFERSE,
1st p. offerird or offrird,
I offered ;
thpu offeredst ;
he offered ;
offerimmo or of-
[frimmo,
offeriste or offri-
Iste,
offenrono or of-
[frirono (offeri-
[ro or offiiro,
[offeriroroffrir),
[or OFFERSERO,
we offered ;
you offered ;
they offered.
4. — Future.
I I shall or will offer.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1 . — Present.
1st p. £0 offer'isca, offrisca, or o/?ra, | that I offer, or may offer.
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. to offerissi or offrissi, \ if I offered, or should offer.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
1. — Present.
1st p. offerirei or offrirei (offeriria I I should, would, or could offer ;
[or offriria), | [or might offer.
V. IMPERATIVE.
1st p. . . . I ....
2d p. offerisci or offri tu, \ offer thou.
27
314 ANALOGY.
The verb sofferire, * to suffer,' has the same irregu-
larities.
Conferire, ' to confer ' ; differire, ' to differ ' ; inferire, ' to infer ' ;
profeiire, Mo proffer'; riferire, Mo refer'; trasferire, ' to transfer';
are never contracted ; and in the perfect and participle have the
terminations in li and ito only ; and make, conferii, 1 1 conferred ' ;
differii, ' 1 differed ' ; conferito} * conferred ' ; &c.*
REMARKS ON OTHER VERBS IN ire.
The verbs convertire, ' to convert ' ; sovvertire, ' to
subvert ' ; are both regular and irregular, and in the
perfect make convertii or CONVE'RSI, ' I converted ' ;
sovvertii or SOVVE'RSI, ' I subverted ' ; and in the parti-
ciple, convertito or CONVE'RSO, { converted ' ; sovvertito
or SOVVE'RSO, ' subverted.'
Divertire, l to divert ' ; pervertire, ' to pervert ' ; have the termina-
tions in ii and ito only ; and make divertii, 1 1 diverted ' ; pervertii,
' I perverted ' ; divertito, i diverted ' ; pervertito, ' perverted.'
Jlpparire and compar'ire, 6 to appear ' ; and their
compounds, are both regular and irregular, and in the
perfect make apparii or APPAXRVI (apparsi) ; comparii
or COMPA'RVI (comparsi), c I appeared ' ; &LC., and in
the participle, apparito or APPA'RSO ; (cornparito) COM-
PAXRSO, c appeared ' ; &c.
Apnre, c to open ' ; coprire, ' to cover ' ; and their
compounds, in the perfect are both regular and irregu-
lar, and make opm* or APE'RSI, ' I opened,' coprii or
COPE'RSI, ( I covered ' ; &c., but in the participle are
irregular only ; and make APE'RTO, c opened ' ; COPE'R-
TO, ' covered ' ; &c.
* A few instances may be found among the classics in which rifersij ' I referred,'
and profersij ' I proffered ' j proferto, ' proifered ' j have been used.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
315
EXAMPLE S.
A cui il frate DISSE : " DfZ/o
sicurame'nte" (Bocc. g. 1. n. 1.)
E MUOIONO in questa folle
sperdnza. (Gr. S. Gir. 2.)
D6esi inttndere, per lo padre e
per lo figliuolo, tutti coloro, che
SALGONO, e isc6ndono per retta
linea. (Maestruzz. 2. 28.)
Ond' w per lo tuo mi"1 penso,
e discerno, — Che tu mi SEGUI,
ed w sard tua guida. -(Dant. Inf.
To whom the friar said : " Say
it frankly."
And die with this foolish expec-
tation.
For father and son, must be
understood, all those who ascend
or descend in a direct line.
Wherefore I, pondering for thy
profit, devise, that thou mayest
follow me, and 1 will be thy guide.
Fiorentino — Mi s6mbri vera-
mente quand' w V ODO. (Dant.
Inf. 33.)
Qudl ESCE alcuna volta di
galoppo — Lo cavalier di schi6ra,
che cavdfchi. (Dant. Purg. 24.)
Jlvendo fdtto fare un grandis-
siino fuoco in una sua cammind-
ta, in quella SE NE VENNE,
(Bocc. g. 2. n. 2.)
Dindnzi agli occhi mi si fu
OFFERTO — Chi per lungo silen-
zio par&afioco. (Dant. Inf. 1.)
Tali cose, PROFERITE cos\ in
astrdtto, hdnno qualche difficoltcL
all' esser comprise. (Gall. 228.)
Per lo qual e chi crbda — Piu
volte Jl mondo in Caos CON VER-
SO. (Dant. Inf. 12.)
APPARI una gran mortalitd,
ec ...... Stdndo costui nel
principio del suo capitandlo, AP-
PARVE un cdso, ec. .....
(Franc. Sacch. n. 158.)
Gli accorgimenti e le COPERTE
me — I'o seppi tutte. (Dant. Inf.
27.)
Florentine thou seemest to me,
in truth, when I hear thee.
As sometimes one knight pricks
forth at a gallop from a troop of
ranked chivalry.
Having caused a large^fire to be
made in one of her halls, there she
came.
There presented itself to my
sis;ht, the form of one, whose voice
seemed faint through long disuse of
speech.
Such things, spoken so in ab-
stract, are difficult to be compre-
hended.
Whereby, there are some who
deem that the world has often
been turned into chaos.
There came a great mortality,
&c He being yet in the
beginning of his captaincy, an ac-
cident there happened, &c.
I knew all subtleties, and cov-
ered ways.
316 ANALOGY.
EXERCISE XXI.
I. 1. — To say. 4. — contradict. 7. — blessed, come.
Dire. contradire. benedire. venire.
died. advised. offered. transferred. II. 1. — I die,
morire. avvertire. offerire. trasferire. . morire,
thou ascendest, he follows, we hear, you go out,
salire, seguire, udire, uscire,
they come. 2. — I languished, thou saidst again, he
venire. languire, ridire, pre-
anticipated, we contradicted, you re-opened, they re-
venire. contradire, riaprire, rin-
covered their senses. 3. — I cursed, thou reascendedst,
venire maledire, risalire,
he became, we suffered, you diverted, they referred. —
divenire, sofferire, divertire, riferire.
I appeared, thou finishedst, he opened, we heard, you
apparire, finire, aprire, setitire, con-
agreed, they covered. 4. — I will say, thou wilt arrive,
venire, coprirc. dire, pervenire,
he will die, we will differ, you will discover, they will
morire, differire, scoprire, as-
assail. III. 1. — I may die before, thou mayest obtain,
salire. premorire, conseguire,
he may hear again, we may convert, you may find,
riudire, convertire, invenire,
they may sufcceed. 2. — I might say, thou mightest contra-
riuscire. dire, con-
diet, he might bless, we might forbid, you might say again,
tradire, benedire, interdire, ridire,
they might curse. IV. 1. — I would assist, thou wouldst
maledire. sovvenire, sof-
suffer, he would forbid, we would re-assail, you would come
feiire, interdire, riassalire. riveni-
again, they would hear one thing for another. V. — con-
re, traudire, pro-
DEFECTIVE VERBS.
317
tinue thou, let him grant, let us prevent, proffer ye, let
segmre, esaudire, prevenire, proferire, nor-
thern subvert.
vertire.
[For a Table of Irregular Verbs ^ see APPENDIX.]
CHAPTER XL
DEFECTIVE VERBS.
Defective verbs ending in Ire (long) :
CaUre, to care for ;
coiere or co7ere, to adore ;
lectre & lid- )
re, or Ucert > to be lawful ;
& licere, )
pavtre,
silere,
solere,
stuptre,
to fear ;
to be, or keep,
[silent ;
to be wont ;
to be astonished.
Defective verbs ending in ere (short) :
A'lgere,
to be chill ;
riedere,
to return ;
dngere,
to afflict;
serpere,
to creep ;
arrogere,
cdpere,
to add ;
to contain ;
soffolcere or
soffolgere,
> to support ;
chtrere,
to ask ;
taiigere,
to touch ;
convellere,
to convulse ;
toller 6,
to take away ;
fi&dere,
to wound ;
torptre,
to be benumbed;
lucere.
to shine ;
urgere,
to urge ;
molcere,
to assuage ; | vigere,
to be vigorous.
/'re,
gire,
Defective verbs ending in ire :
to go ;
olire,
to smell.
27*
318
ANALOGY.
VARIATION OF DEFECTIVE VERBS.
[These verbs are used only in the tenses and persons, which are here given.]
CaKn.
I. INFINITIVE.
1. — Present. 2. — Past .
CaUre, |to care for. || issere caluto, |to have cared for.
GERUND. PARTICIPLE.
|caring for. || caluto, [cared for.
II. INDICATIVE.
Singular. Plural.
1. — Present.
3d p. cale or cdl}\he cares for. II
2. — Imperfect.
3d p. calevp or 'he cared for.
\caUa, |
3. — Perfect.
3d p. CALSE, I he cared for. II, . . .
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
3d p. CAGLIA,
that he care for,
[or may care for.)
4. — Imperfect.
3d p. caUsse,
if he cared for, or
[should care for.
DEFECTIVE VERBS.
Singular. Plural.
V. IMPERATIVE.
3d p. CAGLIA cgli,*\\et him care for.
319
CaUre is generally used with the conjunctive pro-
nouns mi, 1i) ci, vi, gli ; thus, mi cale, ' I care for ' ; ci
caleva, ' re cared for ' ; &c.
CoUre or colere.
1st p. (colo),
I. INFINITIVE.
(Colere or colere), | to adore.
II. INDICATIVE.
1. — Present.
I adore ;
3d p. (cole),
he adores.
Lecere & licere, or Ucere & licere.
I. INFINITIVE.
(Lecere & licere, or 1 to be lawful. I \essere ttcito or 1 to be lawful.
[lecere & licere), \ \licitoj \
* As it has been questioned whether calere is used in the imperative, we cite from
the classics the following examples to prove that it is ao used :
JVon ve ne CA'GLIA no, io so ben io cid Do not trouble yourselves about it, I
che mi/0. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 6.) know very well what I am doing.
Del c6me non ti CA'GLIA, il percM ti Do not trouble thyself about the how,
dird. (Bocc. Filoc. 6 )
I will tell thee the why.
Or se frattdnto — Son le ndstre castella Now if, in the mean time, our castles
orpprtsse, e serve — Non ce ne CA'GLIA. are oppressed and conquered, let us not
(Tass. Ger. 6. 11.) care about it.
t From this form are derived e lecito, * it is lawful ' ; era or fu Idcito, ' it was law-
ful » ; sard lecito, ' it will be lawful ' ; &c., which are used to supply the tenses in
which lecere is defective.
320 ANALOGY.
If. INDICATIVE.
Singular. Plural.
1. — Present.
8d p. Uce or lice, jit is lawful.
Pavere.
I. INFINITIVE.
(Pavere), | to fear.
II. INDICATIVE.
1. — Present*
3d p. (pave), Ihe fears. »'
SiUre.
I. INFINITIVE.
(Silere), | to be, or keep, silent.
II. INDICATIVE.
1. — Present.
2d P. (sili),
3d p. (sile),
thouart, orkeep-
[est, silent ;
he is, or keeps,
[silent ',
DEFECTIVE VERBS. 321
SoUre. .
I. INFINITIVE.
Solire, |to be wont. \\essere solito,* |to be wont
GERUND.
soUndo, | being wont. ||
II. INDICATIVE.
Singular. Plural.
1. — Present.
1st p. SOGLIO,
2d p. SUOLI,
I am wont ;
thou art wont;
3d. p. SUOLE (so- he is wont;
SOGLIAMO (sole-
soUte,
SOGLIONO,
[mo),
we are wont ;
you are wont ;
they are wont.
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. io soleva or solea, \ I was wont.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. 10 SOGLIA, ) that I am wont, or may be wont.
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. 10 soUssi, | if I were wont, or should be wont.
Stupere.
I. INFINITIVE.
(Stupere), | to be astonished.
* From this form are derived s6no sdlito, ' I nm wont ' ; dri s6litot * thou wast
wont ' j &c,, which are often used instead ofsoglio j solevi j &c.
322
ANALOGY.
II. INDICATIVE.
Singular, Plural.
1. — Present.
3d p. (stupe), heisastonished.il ..... |. .
Mgere.
I. INFINITIVE.
(Algere), | to be chill.
Istp.(alsi),
2d p. (algesti),
3d p. (alse),
II. INDICATIVE.
3. — Perfect.
I was chill ; jj (algemmo),
thou wast chill j
he was chill ;
1 (alsero),
we were chill ;
you were chill ;
they were chill.
Jlngere.
I. INFINITIVE.
(^.ngere), j to afflict.
II. INDICATIVE.
1 . — Present.
3d p. (ange), |it afflicts.
2. — Imperfect.
3d p. (angeva),
it afflicted.
DEFECTIVE VERBS.
323
Jlrrogere.
I. INFINITIVE.
JLrrogere, | to add.
GERUND. PARTICIPLE.
arrogdndo, jadding. ||ARROTO; or ARRoso,|added.
II. INDICATIVE.
Singular. Plural.
1. — Present.
1st p.
3d p. arroge,
he adds ;
I arrog'idmo,
I arrogono,
2. — Imperfect.
let p. to arrogeva or arrogea,\l added.
3. _ Perfect .
1st p. ARROSI,
2d p. arrogesti,
3d p. ARROSE,
I added ;
arrogemmo,
thou addedst ; arros;este,
he added ;
| ARROSERO,
we add;
they add.
we added ;
you added ;
they added.
Capere.
I. INFINITIVE.
(Capere), | to contain.
II. INDICATIVE.
1. — Present.
I.
3d p. (cdpe), lit contains. ". . . .
2. — Imperfect.
8d p. (captva),
it contained.
324
ANALOGY.
Cher ere. *
I. INFINITIVE.
(Cherere), | to ask.
II. INDICATIVE.
Singular.
Plural.
1. — Present.
1st p. <
3d p. (chere),
I ask ;
he asks.
Con veil ere.
I. INFINITIVE.
Convellere, \ to convulse.
GERUND. PARTICIPLE.
convellendo, |convulsing. jj coNvtiLso, [convulsed.
II. INDICATIVE.
I.— Present.
3d p. convelle, Ihe convulses ; \\conv6llono, [they convulse.
2. — Imperfect.
3d p. convelleva he convulsed ; convellevano or
[or convell6a,\
[convelle ano,
4. — Future.
they convulsed.
3d p. convellerct,\he shall or willi convellerdnno,
\ [convulse ;||
they shall or wi
[convulse
DEFECTIVE VERBS.
325
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
Singular. Plural.
2. — Imperfect.
3d p. convelldsse,
if he convulsed,|
or should con-
vulse ;
convell6sserp)
if they convuls-
[ed.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
1. — Present.
3d p.
convelle-
[rebbe,
he should, would,
[or could con-
[vulse ; or might
[convulse ;
convellercbbero,
they should,
[would, or could
[convulse.
Fiedere.
I. INFINITIVE.
Fiedere , * |to wound.
GERUND.
\\fiedendo, [wounding.
II. INDICATIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. fi6do,
2d p. fitdi,
3d p. fiede,
I wound;
thou woundest;
he wounds; \\Ji6dono,
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. lofiedeva ovfiedea^ \ I wounded.
1st p.fiedti,
3. _ Perfect.
\ I wounded.
they wound.
* Ancient writers said also feggcre, ' to wound, to strike '; from wliich aro de-
rived the forms fdggono, ' they strike '; which we meet in tho Jlminacstramenti ;
and feggia, « it strikes,' in the Inferno of Dante.
28
326
ANALOGY.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
Singular. Plural
1. — Present.
1st p. wfieda jthat I wound ;
[(fieggia),j
3d p. eglifieda that he wound ;
[(fieggia)J
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. iofiedessiy \ if I wounded.
that they wound
Lucere.
I. INFINITIVE.
Lucere, |to shine.
GERUND.
lucendo, |shining,
II. INDICATIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. .
luciamo,
Incite,
\ we shine ;
lyou shine.
2d p. luci,
3d p. luce,
thou shinest;
he shines ;
2. — Ii
nperfect.
1st p. '\o luceva,
I shone.
3.—1
^erftct.
| lucemniOy
\ Iuc6ste,
we shone ;
you shone.
2d p. luctsti,
3do. .
thou shonest ;
1st p. lucerd,
4. — Future.
I I shall or will shir;e.
DEFECTIVE VERBS.
327
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
Singular. Plural.
1. — Present.
1st p
2d p
3d p. 6gli (luca),
.... 1 1 lucldmo,
.... I lucidte,
that he shine ; || (lucano),
that we shine ;
that you shine ;
that they shine.
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. to lucessi) | if I shone or should shine.
IV. CONDITIONAL.
1. • — Present.
1st p. lucerei (luceria), I if I should, would, or could
[shine ; or might shine.
(Molcere),
2d p. (molci),
3d p. (molce),
Molcere.
I. INFINITIVE.
| to assuage.
II. INDICATIVE.
1. — Present.
thou assuagest ;
he assuages.
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. w (molc^-
[va),
2d . (raolcevi),
3d p. egli (mol-
[ceva),
I assuaged ;
thou assuagest ;
he assuaged.
328 ANALOGY.
Riedere.
I. INFINITIVE.
Riedere, \ to return.
Singular.
II. INDICATIVE.
1. — Present.
Plural.
1st p. ritdo,
2d p. riedi,
3d p. riede,
I return ;
thou returnest ;
he returns ;
I riedono,
they return.
2. — Imperfect.
1st p< io rie"deva\I returned ;
[or riedea,
2d p. riede'vi,
3d p. egli riedeva he returned ;
[or riedea,
thou returnedst ;
riedevano or rie-
\deano,
they returned.
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
\ st p. to rteda,
2d p. tu rieda,
3d p. dgli rieda, that he return ;
that I return ; or '
[may return ;
that thou return ;
riedanoj
that they return.
Serpere.
I. INFINITIVE.
(Serpere), |to creep/j
GERUND.
| (serpendo), (creeping.
DEFECTIVE VERBS.
II. INDICATIVE.
329
Singular.
Plural.
1. — Present.
1st p. (s6rpo)j
2d p. (serpi),
3d p. (serpe),
I creep ;
thou creepest ;
he creeps ;
I (s6rpono),
they creep.
2, — Imperfect.
1st p. w (serpe-
,[*a),
2d p. (serpevi),
3d p. egli (serpe-
thou creptest *
he crept ;
(serpevano),
they crept
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. io (se'rpa).
2d p. tu (sirpa},
that I creep ; or
[may creep ;
that thou creep ;
that he creep ;
I (serpano),
that they creep.
Soffolcere or Soffolgere.
I. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.
(Soffolcere or to support. || (soffolto), Isupported.
[soffolgere,
II. INDICATIVE.
1. — Present.
3d p. (soffolce or
Isoffolge),
be supports.
3. — Perfect.
3d p. (soffol'se,) I he supported.
28*
330 ANALOGY.
Tangere.
I. INFINITIVE.
(Tangere), | to touch.
II. INDICATIVE.
Singular.
1, — Present.
3d p. (tange), Ihe touches. II
Plural.
Tollere.
I. INFINITIVE.
(Tollere), | to take away.
II. INDICATIVE.
1. — Present.
2d p. (tolli),
3d p. (tolle),
thou takest awa;
he takes away.
H .
11
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
2d p. tu (tolla), that thou take
[away ;
3d p. egli (tolla), I that he take a way.
DEFECTIVE VERBS.
331
V. IMPERATIVE.
Singular. Plural.
3d p. (tolla) egli,
let him take
[away.
Estolhre, ' to lift ' ; compound of tollere, is not de-
fective, but in the participle, and in all the persons of
the perfect of the indicative.
Torpere.
I. INFINITIVE.
(Torpere), . | to become numb.
II. INDICATIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. (torpo),
3d p. (torpe),
I become numb ;
hebecomesnumb.il
III. CONJUNCTIVE.
1. — Present.
1st p. w (torpa),
2d p. tu (torpa),
3d p.egft(torpa),
that I
become
[numb ;
that thou become
[numb ;
that he become
[numb.
332
Singular.
ANALOGY.
/
Urgere.
I. INFINITIVE.
/
Urgere, \ to urge.
II. INDICATIVE.
1. — Present.
Plural.
3d p. urge, ]he urges.
2. — Imperfect.
3d p. egliurgeva he urged ; urgevano or ur- they urged,
[or urgea, [gtano,
Vigere.
j. INFINITIVE.
(Vigere), | to be vigorous.
II. INDICATIVE.
1. — Present.
3d p (vige), I he is vigorous ; ||
4. — Future.
3d p vigera),
it will be vigor-
tons.)
DEFECTIVE VERBS.
333
Gire.
I. INFINITIVE.
Gire, | to go.
PARTICIPLE.
| gito, |gone.
1st p.
2dp.
II. INDICATIVE.
Singular. Plural.
1. — Present.
.... \\gidmo,
1st p. gwa or gia,
1st p. io gii,
1st p. gird,
1st p.
2d p.
we go;
you go.
2. — Imperfect.
| I went.
3. — Perfect.
| I went.
4. — Fidure*
| I shall or will go.
III. CONJUNGTIVE.
1. — Present,
glamo,
gldte,
that we go, or
[may go ;
that you go.
1st p. io gissij
2. — Imperfect.
| if I went, or should go.
334
ANALOGY.
1st p. girei (giria),
1st p.
2d p.
V. CONDITIONAL.
I should, would, or could go ; or
[might go.
V. IMPERATIVE,
gite,
let us go ;
go ye.
Ire.
I. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.
Ire, | to go. || ito, Igone.
II. INDICATIVE.
Singular. Plural.
1. — Present.
2d p.
lee,
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. 10 iva,
3d p. egli wa,
I went ;
he went.
wano,
2d p. istit
3d p. . .
3. — Perfect.
thou wentest ;
(iro, ir),
you go.
l-
we went.
they went.
1st p.
2dp.
3d p.
3d p.
2dp.
DEFECTIVE VERBS.
4. — Future.
335
Singular.
ire mo,
irete,
IV. CONDITIONAL.
(iriano),
V. IMPERATIVE.
fce,
Plural.
we shall or will
you will go ;
[they will go.
they should,
[would, or could
[go ; or might
[go-
ye.
Olire.
I. INFINITIVE.
OZire, | to smell.
II. INDICATIVE.
2. — Imperfect.
1st p. w oliva,
2d p. olivij
3d p. egli oliva,
I ymelied ;
thou smelledst ;
he smelled.
I olivano,
they smelled.
336
ANALOGY.
EXAMPLES.
CALEXDOGLI vie piu la salute
propria che gV inter6ssi de* Stmi-
font6si. (Stor. Semif. 36.)
Lo cuor che 'n sul Tamigi an-
cor si COLA. Dant. Inf. 12. —
COLA, doe COLE. (Buti. Com.
Dant.)
Quanlunque alia natura umd-
na LECE — Jiver di lume. (Dant.
Par. 13.)
E dfr nemwi PATE e d6' sog-
gttti. (Tass. Ger. 1. 83.)
Preso dalnuovo canto, STUPE e
SILE. (Boez. Varch. 3. 12.)
I'o dubito che Vossignoria non
dblia occupdto il primo luogo
nella grazia di Siia Beatitiidinc,
il qudle SDLEVA tssere il mio.
(Cas. lett. 19.)
ALSI ed drsi gran tempo.
(Varch. Rim. 3.)
Tdnta paura e duol V alma
trista ANGE. (Petr. s. 236.)
ARROSERO gtrte nuova per sei
Priordti. (Giov. Vill. 9. 2.)
Se di saper ch' w siq, ti CAL,
cotdnto. (Dant. Inf. 19.)
Chi sa come difende e come
fere, — Soccorso d' suoi perigli
dltro non CHERE. (Tass. Ger. 2.
85.)
Dopo alcuni strdni avvolgimdn-
ti cased morta, CONVULSA e in-
tirizzita. (Red. Vip. 1. 83.)
" O figliuol," disse, " qudl di
qu6sta greggia — 6" arresta pun-
to, gidce poi cent' dnni — Sdn-
za arrostdrsi qudndo '/ foco il
FEGGIA." (Dant. Inf. 15.)
Caring more for his own safety
than for the interests of the Seini-
phontians.
That heart which is yet honored
on the [bank of the] Thames.
Whatever of light is allowed to
human nature.
And fears both his enemies and
his subjects.
Transported by the new song,
he is astonished and keeps silent.
I doubt whether your Lordship
has not occupied the first place in
the favor of His Holiness, which
was wont to be mine.
I was chill and burned for a great
while.
So much fear and grief afflicts
my sad soul.
They added new people for six
successive Piiorates.
If it imports thee so much to
know who I am.
He who knows how It [the hand
of God] defends, and how it of-
fends, asks no other assistance in
his perils.
After some strange whirlings, she
fell down dead, convulsed and stiff
with cold.
" O son," said he, " whoever of
this throng stops one instant, lies
then a hundred years, without any
ventilation, when the fire smites
him."
DEFECTIVE VERBS.
337
LUCE VAN- gli occhi suoi piii
the la Stella. (Dant. Inf. 2.)
E gia il sole a mezza t6rza
RIEDE. (Dant. Inf. 34.)
Chi pud dir come SERF A, o
come crdsca, — Gia da piu Idti il
foco 1 (Tass. Ger. 12. 45.)
Perche la vista tua pur si SOF-
FOLGE — Lag giii tra V ombre tri-
ste smozzicdte ? (Dant. Inf. 29.)
fo sonfdtta da Dio, sua tnerce,
tale — Che la vostra miseria non
mi TANGE. (Dant. Inf. 2.)
Che dona e TOLLE ogni dltro
benfortuna. (Arios. Fur. 27. 84.)
S\ la gran front e e le gran cor-
na ESTOJLLE. (Tass. Ger. 4. 7.)
Jf Greci — Ilfavellar non TOR-
PE infra le Idbbra. (Buon. Fier.
2.5.5.)
Che V una pdrte e V dltra tira
ed URGE — Tin tin sondndo con
s\ dolce nota. (Dant. Par. 10.)
Per mostrdre che la caritd sent-
pre VIGERA in loro. (But. Par.
7.)
E la ingegnosa pecchia^ al pri~
mo albore — GIVA preddndo or
uno or dltro fiore. (Poliz. St. 1.
25.)
ITE, cdldi sosp'iritalfreddo core.
(Petr. s. 120.)
Mescoldto insi&me con quello
di molte dltre cose, che per lo
giardino OLIVANO. (Bocc. g. 3.)
Her eyes were brighter than the
star [of day].
And now the sun returns within
one hour and a half of noon.
Who can say how the fire
creeps, and already increases on
every side.
Why dost thou fasten thy sight
below among the maimed and
miserable shades ?
I am so made by God, thanks
to his grace, that no sufferance of
your misery touches me.
For fortune gives and takes
away every other good.
So high he raises his great brow
and horns.
To the Greeks the speech does
not languish in their lips.
In which the one part draws and
the other pushes, sending out a
tinkling sound of note so sweet.
To show that charity will al-
ways be in vigor among them.
And the industrious bee, at the
first dawn, was rifling now this
and now the other flower.
Go, warm sighs, to the cold
heart.
Mingled with the scent of many
other things, which through the
garden spread their fragrance.
As most of the foregoing defective verbs are of rare occurrence, and
can be used with propriety only in verse, an Exercise upon them has
been here thought needless.
29
338 ANALOGY.
GENERAL REMARKS ON ITALIAN VERBS.
Verbs, which in the infinitive end in are, ere or ere,
ire ; as /A'RE, ' to make ' ; tessvRE, ' to weave ' ; WC/I'RE,
1 to hear ' ; followed by a word beginning with a con-
sonant, except z or s followed by another consonant.
often drop the last vowel ; as,
FAR mfesa, to make defence ;
TESSER Fiscette, to weave baskets ;
UDIR novella, to hear news.
Those verbs, which, by contraction, end in arre, orre,
tirre; as, ^A'RRE from traere, ' to draw' ; imponnE from
imponere, 'to impose'; tnfrWu'RRt from introducere,
' to introduce ' ; drop the last syllable ; as,
TRAR Non puote, he cannot draw ;
IMPOR leggi, to impose laws ;
INTRODU'R costume, to introduce a custom.
The first and third persons plural of tenses of
verbs ending in mo, and no, ro ; as, erai'aivio, ' we
were ' ; parlavaxo, c they spoke ' ; caddeno c they fell ' ;
often drop the last vowel ; as,
ERAVAM rartiti, we had departed ;
PARLAY AN Rado, they spoke seldom ;
they fell into the boiling lake.
Those persons which end in nno;~ as, saranno, l they
will be ' ; hanno, c they have ' ; drop the last sylla-
ble ; as,
tutti SARAN serrdli, they shall all be closed ;
V HAN prdprio a noia, they really hate him.
Infinitives of verbs, and the first and third persons
plural of their tenses, drop constantly the last vowel
REMARKS ON VERBS. 339
or syllable, when they are followed by a conjunctive
pronoun ; as,
FARLARne, to speak of it ;
AND i AM vi, let us go thither ;
they assisted me ;
they gave him.
The third person singular of the present of the in-
dicative of the verbs calcre, 6 to care for ' ; dolere, ' to
grieve ' ; rimanere, ' to remain ' ; solere, ' to be wont ' ;
tenere, ' to hold ' ; valere, ' to be worth ' ; volere, ' to
be willing ' ; venire ' to come ' ; and the second person
singular of the imperative of the verbs rimanere, tenere,
venire; drop the last vowel, especially when they are
followed by a conjunctive pronoun ; as,
se vi CAL m" me, if you care for me ;
vuoLti ch? 10 ti vinco ? does it grieve thee that I con-
quer thee ?
suoLmi abbaglidre, it is wont to dazzle me ;
- TIEN DaZ Cie/o, she holds from Heaven ;
RiMANfa* con n6i, remain with us ;
non si VUOL Dire, it must not be said ;
viENwe qua, come [thence] hither.
The first person singular of the present of the indica-
tive of the verb e'ssere, ; to be ' ; and the second person
singular of the imperative of the verb ponere, ' to put ' ;
drop the last vowel, and \\henfollowed by the conjunc-
tive pronoun mi, they change n into m ; as,
r SON colei, I am she ;
poivmi 6ve n Sol uccide i put me where the sun kills the
fiori, flowers.
All forms of verbs followed by a conjunctive pronoun
(as we have already observed, p. 110, and the foregoing
examples clearly show,) are joined to them so as to form
one single word. Now, if the form of the verb consists
340 ANALOGY.
of one syllable ; as, c, ' it is ' ; ha or a, ' it has ' ; dV,
1 tell thou ' ;/a', ' make thou ' ; sa, ' he or it knows ; '$vo,
* I go ' ; &c. ; or if it bears the accent on the last sylla-
ble ; as, diro, ' I will tell ' ; mostro, ' he showed ' ; &c. ;
in being joined to a conjunctive pronoun, the consonant
of the pronoun is doubled^ and the accent when mark-
ed is suppressed ; as,
cvt>i cadiUo ddlla memoria ? has it escaped from your mind ?
haumi a tal condutto, she has reduced me to such a
condition ;
avvi letti, there are beds ;
ij ma&stro mio, tell me, my master ;
ti ben sentire, make thyself to be heard well ;
Iddio, God knows it ;
a guisa (ToV6o, I go on like a blind man ;
diroTti perch* V venni, I will tell thee why I came ;
mostrocci un1 6mbrar he showed us a spirit.
EXCEPTION.
The g of the pronoun glit is never doubled, although the accent
of the verb is always suppressed; as,
MANDOGLI dicendo, sent him word.
The forms trai, ' thou d rawest ' or i draw thou ' ; trae,
6 he or it draws ' ; of the verb traere or trarre^ ' to draw ' ;
when joined to a conjunctive pronoun, drop the last
vowel, and require that the consonant of the pronoun be
doubled ; as,
frawNe lo Scricca, except Scricca ;
frctMMt di mortal letdrgo, it draws me from a mortal leth-
argy.
Finally, infinitives of verbs, like present participles in
English, are often used in Italian as substantives ; as,
il parlare, c the speaking' ; /' abbracciare, « the embrac-
ing' ; il favellare, ' the manner of speaking ' ; and then
REMARKS ON VERBS.
341
have a plural, which they form like substantives, by
changing e into i; as,
li sdzzi parldn, immodest [speakings or] con-
versations ;
gli abbraccidn, the [embraeings or] embraces ;
i proprj favelldri, one's own manners of speaking.
EXAMPLES.
Dindnzi a lui non Me —
NASCONDER, ne FUGGIR, ne FAR
DIFESA. (Petr. s. 203.)
E vede un uom c.anuto alV om-
bre amene — TESSER FISCELLE
dlla sua greggia accdnto. (Tass.
Ger. 7. 6.)
Ed ilia — Di questa cosa UDIR
Non vuol NOVELLA. (Bern. Oil.
1.9.)
TRAR Motto il debit fidnco oltra
NON PUOTE. (Tass. Ger. 19. 28.)
E ttggi imporre, ed i:
COSTUME, — Ed drti e culto di
verdce JVwme. (Tass. Ger. 1. 9.)
Noi ERAVAM PARTITI gid da
ello. (Dant. Inf. 32.)
PARLAVAN RADO convoci sodvi.
(Dant. Inf. 4.)
E amendue — GADDER NEL
mezzo del BOLLENTE STAGNO.
(Dant. Inf: 22.)
Tt/TTI SARAN SERRATI Qudll-
do di JosaffoL qu\ tornerdnno.
(Dant. Inf. 10.)
Tdnto L'^HAN PROPRIO i suoi
figliuoli A NOIA. (Bern. Rim.)
29*
Before him it does not avail to
conceal, to fly, or to make defence.
And she sees a hoary old man in
the pleasant shade, weaving, bas-
kets by the side of his flock.
And she does not wish to hear
speaking about this thing.
He cannot draw his feeble frame
much further.
And to impose laws, and to in-
troduce customs, and arts, and the
worship of the true God.
We had already^ departed from
him.
They spoke seldom, but withjme-
lodious voices.
And both fell into the middle of
the boiling lake.
They [the sepulchres] shall all
be closed, when they [the spirits]
shall have once more come here,
returning from Jehosaphat.
So much his own children hate
him.
ANALOGY.
£gli mi pidte di PARLARNE.
(Bocc. g. 1. n. 7.)
AND i AM vi, ben mi pidce [di
vederlo]. (Nov. Ant.)
AIUTARONMI elle bine. (Bocc.
g. 4. Proem. )
DlEDERGLI (BOCC. g. 7. D. 4.)
SB vi CAL DI ME, venite meco
bino a paldgio. (Bocc. g. 8. n 5.)
Che avesti, Anichino 1 DUOLTI
cos\ CH' io TI VINCO ? (Boee. g.
7. n. 7.)
Morte ha spinto qu&l sol, che
ABBAGL1AR SUOLMI. (Petr. S. 111.
E 'I nobile ing£gno che DAL,
CIELO — Per grdzia TIEN deir
immortdle Apollo. . (Petr. c. 5.)
StdtTi C RIMANTI CONKOl^Se ti
pidce. (Vit. SS. PP. 2. 317.)
Comdre, egli NON si VUOL DIRE.
(Bocc. g. 4. n. 2.)
Jldridno disse : " 5i, VIENJVE
QUA." (Bocc. g. 9. n. 6.)
I' SON COLEI, che ti die tdnta
guerra. (Petr. s. 261.)
POMMI OVE 'L SOL UCCIDE I
FIORI e n erba. (Petr. s. 113.;
Ora EVVI cosi tosto DALLA. ME-
MORIA CADUTO ? (BOCC. g. 10.
n. 6.)
E1 gita. al Cidlo ; ed HAMMI A
TAL CONDUTTO. (Petr. s. 247.)
Ed AVVI LETTI, che vi parrib-
ber piit b6lli che quelli del Doge
di Vinegia. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 9.)
DlMMI, MAESTRO MIO ! DIMMI,
! (Dant. Inf. 4.,)
It pleases me to speak of it.
Let us go [thither], 1 should be
glad to see it.
They assisted me well.
They gave him.
If you care for me, come with
me as far as the palace.
What ails thee, Am'chino ? Does
it grieve thee thus that I conquer
thee ?
Death has extinguished that sun,
which is wont to dazzle me.
And the noble mind which he
holds from Heaven, through the
favor of the immortal Apollo.
Stay and remain with us, if thou
likest.
Gossip, it must not be said.
Adrian said : " Yes, come [thence]
hither."
I am she, who caused you so
much grief.
Put me where the sun kills the
flowers and the herbage.
Now has it so soon escaped from
your mind ?
She is gone to Heaven; and
has reduced me to such a condition.
And there are beds, which would
appear to you better than those of
the Doge of Venice.
Tell me, my master ! tell me,
my sire I
REMARKS ON VERBS.
343
Grida forte, FATTI BEN SEN-
TIRE. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 6.)
Cry out loud, make thyself to be
beard well.
SALLO IDDIO. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 5.) God knows it.
VOMMENE A GUISA D* ORBO SCTl-
za luce. (Petr.)
DIROTTI PERCH' £' VENNI, e
quel ch' w 'ntesi. (Dant. Inf. 2.)
MOSTROCCI UN* OMBRA dalV UH
canto sola. (Dant. Inf. 12.)
E per Uttera MANPOGLI DICEN-
DO, cne da Brandizio si dovesse
levdre. (Gio. Vill.)
TRANNE LO SCRICCA, — Che sep-
pe far le moderate spese. (Dant.
Inf. 29.)
O'do to la voce — Di David ?
. . . TRAMMI DI MORTAL LETAR-
GO. (Alf. Saul. 3. 4.)
E *I« SUO PARLARE, e 'I bel VI'
so> e le chidme — Mi pidcquer si
(Petr. c. 7.)
Non hdnno parole ne FAVELLA-
RI PROPRJ. (Varch. Ercol. 329.)
Li sozzi PARLARI corrompono
li buoni costumi. (Albert, c. 10.)
Le ttnere. Idgrime, GLI ABBRAC-
CIARI, e gli onesti bdci. (Bocc.
g. 2. n. 5!)
O elttti di Dio / gli cui SOFFRI-
RI — E giustizia e sperdnza fdn
men durit — Drizzate noi verso
GLI ALTI SALIRI. (Dant. Pur. 19.)
I go on like a blind man without
light.
I will tell thee why I came, and
what I heard.
He showed us a spirit by itself
retired apart.
And send him word by letter,
that he should depart from Brun-
dusium.
Except Scricca, who knew how
to lay out his fortune temperate-
ly-
Do I hear the voice of David ?
It draws me from a mortal
lethargy.
And her conversation, and her
beautiful countenance, and her hair
pleased me so .....
They have neither words nor
manners of speaking of their own.
Immodest conversations corrupt
good morals.
The affectionate tears, the em-
braces, and the chaste kisses.
O ye elect of God ! whose suf-
ferings both justice and hope rniti-
gate, direct our way towards the
steep ascents.
344 ANALOGY.
CHAPTER XII.
PARTICIPLES.
ITALIAN participles may be considered either as forms
of the verbs from which they are derived, or as adjec-
tives.
Considered as adjectives, 'they follow the same rules
as adjectives with regard to gender and number.
Present participles end in e, are of the common gen-
der, and form the plural by changing e into i ; as,
{imperator^ trionfantE, m. s.,
*»* tfiS*$Lf.3%&
[ing militia ;
[uomim tempestdnti, m. p.,
[tost ships.
Present participles are sometimes used substantively, as, amdnte,
1 lover ' ; ascoltdnti, ' listeners ' ; they follow however invariably the
same rule.
Past participles end in o, are masculine, and become
feminine by changing o into a ; they form the plural by
changing o into t, and a into e ; as,
fordto, > -0 „ ,1 . S mewbro fordto, m. s., pierced limb ;
fcrdtA, 5 P ; ( golA. fordti, f. s., pierced throat ;
acc6si, ) . • .1 j . J cwori acc£si, m. p., kindled hearts ;
access, ) l ' \fidmmE access, f. p., kindled flames.
Some verbs have a future participle ; as, duraturo, * to last ' ;
fatturo, ' about to do ' ; futuro, l future ', or ' to be ' ; perituro, l about
to perish ' j venturo, l about to come ' ; which follow the same rul es
as past participles.
Many past participles of verbs of ihe first conjugation
are frequently contracted ; as, cerco for cercato, ' search-
PARTICIPLES. 345
ed * ; desto for destato. ' awakened ' ; mozzo for wiozzato,
'cut off' ; &c. ; these, when contracted, are alike the
first person of the present tense of the indicative mood,
and are subject to the same inflections as the other par-
ticiples which are not so ; as,
[»o] ctrco, I search ; cerco, searched ;
[io] ddsto, I awake ; desto, awaken ;
[»o] mozzo, I cut off; mozzo, cut off:
dtsto, awaken ; worno dtsto, m. s., man awakened ;
mozzji, cut off; mdno mozzA, f. s., hand cut off;
c6rch.E, searched ; provmcE cdrc^E, f. p., provinces
[searched.
Italian participles agree with substantives in gender
and number; as,
mentE avvtzzAi * mind accustomed ;
rdggi perduti, rays lost ;
COSE saputE, things known ;
COSE dtttE, things said.
[For a List of Contracted Participles, see APPENDIX I.]
Italian participles when used as adjectives form their
comparatives and superlatives, according to the rules
already given ; as,
lucente, bright; PIUL LUCENTE, more bright;
nocente, guilty ; ME.VO NOCE.VTE, less guilty ;
arndto, loved ; MOLTO AMATO, very much loved ;
riverito, revered ; IL PIU RI VERITO, the most revered j
intend6nte, versed ; INTENDENTJSSIMO, very well
[versed.
346
ANALOGY.
EXAMPLES.
Sicche 'I tuo cuor, quantunque
pud, giocondo — S' appresenti
alia TURBA TRIONFANTE, Che
lieta men per questo etera tondo.
(Dant. Par. 22.)
Una ndveportdnte UOMINI TEM-
PESTANTI, PERICOLANTI, SOGGIA-
CENTI a tdnti marosi. (Giov. Vill.
1. 11. c. 3.)
Qudndo leggemmo il disidto
riso — Esuer bad at o da cotdnto
AMANTE. (Dant. Inf. 5.)
do, die avvcnuto era, distmta-
mente narro, con gran maramglia
degH ASCOLTANTI. (BOCC. g. 10.
n. 4.)
. . . E qual FORATO suo MEM-
BRO, e qudl TA<.o — Mostrdsse,
d'agguaglidr sarebbe nulla — //
modo del la nona bolgia sozzo.
(Dant. Inf. 23.)
Un dltro che FORATA av6a la
COLA. (Dant. Inf. 28.)
Superbia, invidia, e avarizia
sono — Le tre famlle c' hdnno i
CUORI ACCESI. (Dant. Inf. 6.)
E vdde presso a s& le FIAMME
ACCESE. (Dant. Inf. 23.)
E che il principe ne nomindsse
dodici, DURATURI cinque dnni.
(Dav. Tac. Ann. 2. 40.)
Eat to avea prima e poi era
FATTURO. (Dant. Par. 6.)
Tempo FUTTJRO m9 e gid nel
cospdtto. (Dant. Pur. 23.)
Piu ardentemente cercano i se-
coldri le cose PERITVRE, che noi
le utili. (Cavalc. Espos. Simb. 1.)
Vigil ate d1 ogni tempo, sicche
sidte degni di fugg'ire V ira VEN-
TTJRA, (Cavalc. Frutt. Ling.)
So that thy heart should present
itself as joyful as it can to the tri-
umphant militia [church], which
joyfully proceeds through this
round space.
A ship carrying men, wrecked,
endangered and subject to so many
storms.
When we read of those dear lips
so rapturously kissed by one so
deep iii love.
He related distinctly what had
happened, to the great wonder of
the listeners.
. . . And if some should have a
limb pierced, and some cut off, they
could badly equal the vile mode of
punishment of the ninth bolge.
Another who had his throat
pierced.
Pride, envy, and avarice are the
three sparks which have kindled
their hearts.
And sees near her the flames
kindled.
And that the prince should ap-
point twelve of them, who were to
las.t [or remain in office] five years.
He had done [that sign], and
afterward he was to do again.
Future time is already in my
presence.
Men in the world seek with more
eagerness perishable things, than
we do useful ones.
Be always diligent that you
may deserve to avoid approaching
wrath.
PARTICIPLES.
347
£, essdndo DESTO, gli pdr-
ve seniire scdndere nella cdsa per-
sone. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 7.)
Uny ch* avea V una e V 6Ura
MAN MOZZA. (Dant. Inf. 28.)
Av&ndo CERCHE molte PROVINCE
Cristidne. (Bocc. g. 10. n. 9.)
Lassdi quil, ch* i' piu brdmo ;
ed ho si AVVEZZA — La MENTE a
contempldr sola costei. (Petr. s.
93.)
Avio. la luna PERDUTI i RAGGI
Bu6i. (Petr. c. 38.)
I'o non ho qu,6ste COSE SAPtJTE
da* vicini, el la medesinia niele ha
DETTE.. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 3.)
Ond* 6llaf6ssi — LUCENTE PIU
assdi di quel ch* eW era. (Dant.
Par. 5.)
E'ssa tdnto piu impazi&nte
sosteneva quista noia, qudnto
MENO si sentiva NOCENTE. (Bocc.
g. 7. n. 5.)
0 MOLTO AMATO cuore, ogni
mio vfficio verso te & fornito.
(Bocc. g. 4. n. 1.)
Tra i qndli il maggiore e IL PIU
RIVERITO da tutti, a quelle stagio-
ni, 6ra Jdcopo di Carino. (Matt.
Vill. 1. 72.)
Aristofane & persona INTEN-
DENTISSIMA — Delia sci'ittura.
(Cecch. Spir. 5. 5.)
Because, being awake, he seem-
ed to hear people descend into the
house.
One who had the one and the
other hand cut off.
Having searched through many
Christian provinces.
I left what I desire most, and
I have my mind so accustomed to
contemplate her alone.
The moon had lost her rays.
I have not heard these things
from the neighbours, she herself
has told them to me.
Whence she became far more
bright than she had been.
She bore this vexation so much
the more patiently, the less she felt
guilty.
O very much loved heart, I have
done towards thee all that I could.
Amongst whom the greatest and
the most revered by all, at that
time, was Jacopo di Carino.
Aristophanes is a person very
well versed in writing.
348 ANALOGY.
EXERCISE XXII.
Before (to the) his eyes they slew her crying
Presente suo2 occkio1 svendre* el(a? griddre4
for mercy and assistance. To him, residing1 in Flan-
— mcrce5 .aiiito7. 6gli, dimordre Fidn-
ders, cnme a desire I to I hear. Apollo holding- that
dra, venire — vogtia \ di \ senlire. tenure quello3
part of the Heaven, which he nov/ traverses, was embel-
pdrte4 1 Ciclo2, — 6ra trascurrere, abbel-
lishing more (the) their works. In a book which I intend
lirt4 piu1 lavoro3. libra intendere
I to I make, God granting- it, on vulgar eloquence.
di I /are, Dio concedere — , di volgdre tloquenza.
It happened that durmg the war the queen of France
— Jlvvenire durdre guerra reina Frdncia
I fell very sick.
I ammalo graveminte.
After that the lady had made herself to be
Poicchb donna avdre2 fdre* si1 pre-
besought very much. They had I all their heads
gdre? assdi3. Esso essere \ tutto
surrounded I with I oak leaves — leaves of oak.
inghirlanddre5 \ di1 \ fonda2 3 qu6rcia4.
(The) my skin is bronzed ( on me ), and (the)
mio pelie essere abbrunire sopra di iot
my bones are dried up I on account of I the heat
osso essert4 diseccdre5 per1 \ 2 cdldo3.
Nor were the faults of the Vitellians punished, but
JVd esstre fdlta Vitellidno pumre, ma
well paid I on I the other side. The jealous man
ben pagdre \ da \ dltro pdrte. 2 gdoso* Messer1
had put some little stones in I his
averc5 mettert6 alciina7 pietra* 9 | *'4
mouth. There
bocca.
is a tree more above, I whose fruit I was bitten
essere9 — Legno1 piu sit, che \ essere mordent
ADVERBS.
349
by Eve.
Eva.
How many versos I have already spread
Quanta verso — avere gia spar-
verso
about. All were beaten with (the) rods in the middle
gere. Tulto essere Idttere verga mezzo
of the square, and had (the) their head cut off. They
piazza, avtre 2 testa3 taglidre1.
have promised, and sold me to a merchant, who
avere2 promettere3, 4 vtndcre5 M'1 mercdnte,
is to
de'5
Let
the
3
carry
portdr3
ages
eta.*
me
mi4
to the Sultan in the Levant.
1 Solddno2 — Levdnte.
to come
venire?
judge from this who
estimdre2 Quinci1 6
Otho was. The present (age shall hear) and the
Ottone8 esserc1. 5 presente7 mondo6 udire* — 9
future ages shall hear (the) my protestations.
6sserel° — udirv8 2 protesto3.
CHAPTER XIII.
ADVERBS.
SIMPLE ADVERBS IN COMMON USE.
Adverbs of Time.
n~r»'
Uggi,
to-day ;
dianziJl
^
iM*,
yesterday ;
innanzi,\
> before ;
domani,*
to-morrow ;
prima,
)
dm,
1
teste,
just now ;
adisso,
> now ;
jodi,§
mo,f
)
ddpo,\\
> afterwards ;
p6sciay
5
* From the Latin de and mane. f From the Latin modo.
I From <&, in, and the Latin ante : — the Celtic ant, l opposite.'
$ From the Latin pone : — the Celtic bwo or 6on, changed into yon, ' the last.*
j| From the Celtic do, « after,' and pan, « the last.'
30
350
sempre,*
mat,
spesso,
sovtvtej
talvdlla,
tcddra,
tuitora,
ognpra,
allora,
subito,
ANALOGY.
always ;
tosto,
never ;
presto,
often :
adagio,
passo,
sometimes ;
pertempo,
tdrdi,
c-till •
intdnto,
always ;
frattdnto,
then;
mentre,
immediately ;
soon ;
quick ;
> slow ;
early ;
late ;
already ;
? in the mean
\ time;
whilst.
Adverbs of Place.
aufc' here, hither ;
altrove,
altronde,
> elsewhere ;
£A there, thither ;
ovunque,
dovunque,
> wherever ;
co| there, thither;
su,
giu,
up;
down ;
cofd there near you;
sopra,**
upon, above ;
under, below ;
lquivi, 1 lhere ;
dentro.
> within ;
indi, thence ;
quindi, from thence ;
fuora$§
> without ;
quinci,^ from hence ;
av&nti,\\\\
before ;
costinci, \ fr°m thence'
} where you are ;
dietro^
accanto,
behind;
aside ;
dtoe, Swhere;
attorno,***
rim petto,
around ;
opposite ;
dnrfe, J i
vicino,
near;
donde, J W
lungi,
far;
oltre,
beyond.
* From the Latin semper : the Celtic chemp or semp, ' without,' and ar or er, 'end.'
I From the Latin svbinde. | From the Latin hanc koram.
$ From the Latin illic, iliac. \\ From the Latin quo and istic,istac.
IT From the Latin qui and hinc.
** The Latin super : — the Celtic 5wp, < upon.'
ft The Latin sub, subtus : — the Celtic sub, * under.'
Jt From the Celtic particles en and tre.
$$ The Latin/oris,/0r<w: — the Celtic for, 'out.'
|| || From the Celtic ab, * far,' and ant, ' opposite.'
HIT From the Celtic dre, « back.' *** From the Celtic tor, « circle.'
ADVERBS.
Adverbs of Order.
351
Pr*a> first;
prima,
Pj?' then;
dopo,
Adverbs of Qwan
Piu, more ;
mino, > , .
mdnco, $
wo«o, , .
assai, * much >
itirfi, ^
quindi, > afterwards ;
appresso,* )
infine, finally.
^i^y and Quality.
troppoj too much ;
or?/ari,| not much ;
/an^o, so much ;
jt?oro, little ;
qffdtto, any at all.
JSene, well; " ]
Adverbs of Affirmation
Si, I yes,
g-i&, $ indeed ;
certo, certainly ;
6ene, well ;
male, badly.
, Negation, and Doubt.
davvero, ? indeed, truly,
difdtti, J in truth ;
appunto, exactly so.
JVb, no,
non, not ;
J&*S, never '
mica, *l
punto, > not at all.
affdtto, )
Forse, perhaps ;
circa, about ;
Adverbs of Comparist
cok ^o,thus;
come, as ;
siccome, so, as ;
/nw, more ;
presso, about ;
quasi, almost.
m and Interrogation.
mcno, less ;
tdnto, so much, as ;
quanta^ as ;
a-guisa, 1 ljk
a-mdrfo, S 11J
* From the Celtic prem, * near.'
f From the Celtic tropa, ' troop,' c multitude.'
J From the Latin gerra t — the Celtic gcr,
352 ANALOGY.
Ove ? > where,
dove ? $ whither ?
donde? whence?
qudndo ? when ?
£!, \*™>
perche? why?
quanta ? how much ?
Adverbs of Choice and Demonstration.
Anzi,
prlma,
/
jEcco,
eccoqui,
eccoquu,
( rather;
piuttosto,
piupresto,
> sooner.
> there is,
\ there are ;
when lo.
behold ;
) here is,
J here are ;
tccoli,
eccold,
quand1 icco,
The adverbs oggi, l to-day ' ; ieri, ' yesterday ' ; and
domani, ' to-morrow ' ; are often used as substantives ;
as,
questo di rf' OGGI, this day ;
il giorno di IERI, yesterday ;
DOMANI e VmerdU, to-morrow is Friday.
Mai, £ never,' is sometimes used in the signification of
' ever ' ; as,
qudi bdrbarefur MAI ? what savage women were
there ever ?
cost Mllo comefu MAI, as beautiful as ever was.
Qui, qua, ' here'; and quinci, ' from hence '; indicate
a place near the person speaking : costi, costd, ' there
near you ' ; and costinci, i from thence where you are ';
indicate a place near the person spoken to: and li, la;
coli, cola; ivi, quivi, ' tliere ' ; indi, 'thence', and
quindi, ' from thence ' ; indicate a place at a distance
from both the person speaking and the person spoken
to ; as,
cost qui mi disst^ so he said to me here ;
ADVERBS.
353
QDINCI nonpdssa mdi dnima
buona,.
tdnte belle giovani che COST!
s6no,
ditel COSTING i,
ne LI gudri lontdno,
vuolsi cosl COL! dove si puote
cid che si vuole,
QUIVI 51 pidngon li spietdti
ddnni,
comandolle che INDI non u-
scisse,
Si, ' yes ' ; and no, ' no '
used as substantives ; as,
il mio NO,
il suo si,
si e NO nel cdpo mi tenzona9
no good spirit ever passes
hence ;
so many beautiful girls as
there are there near you ;
tell it from where you are ;
not far from thence ;
so it is willed there, where
will is power ;
here they wail their merci-
less wrongs ;
he ordered her not to go out
from thence.
or ' not ' ; are sometimes
my negative ;
his affirmative ;
yes and no struggle in my
head.
Si is used sometimes instead of the conjunction e,
' and,' and may be rendered in English by the word
both ; as,
si per la sua forma, e si per la both for his personal heauty and
nobiltti, del pddre, for the nobility of his father.
JVb sometimes takes the place of a whole sentence ;
as,
o voUssero, o NO [o non voles- whether they wished, or not
sero], [or they did not wish] ;
quillo che io avrd fdtto, e quel what I shall have done, and
che NO [e quel che non avr6 what not [and what I shall
fatto], not have done],
JVb is used only in answering a question, or when
used absolutely : non, in all other instances, and par-
ticularly when the negative is followed by a verb or
another adverb ; as,
signor, NO, no, sir ;
30*
354 ANALOGY.
NONfarnetico, NO, I do not rave, no ;
NO, per quello NON rimwrcl il no, the bargain will not be
mercdto, broken oft' on this account.
O've, ' where,' in poetry, is often changed into u' ;
as,
u' sono i vtrsi? where are the verses?
uj son giunte le rime ? where are the rhymes gone ?
The adverbs lene, gia, mat, mica, punto, non, ecco,
are often used as mere expletives ; as,
si BENE, yes indeed ;
Gil Dio non voglia, may God forbid ;
sigidce MAI sempre inghidccio, lies always frozen ;
non MICA dipoco ajfdre, not at all of little conse-
quence ;
non e PUNTO morto, he is not at all dead ;
append ancora NON ha, he has hardly yet;
ECCO, non so dir di no, . I cannot say no.
E X AMP L E S .
QUESTO DI D' OGGI e stdto ddto This day has been given to kings,
a re, e a solddni, e a slfdtta gen- and to sultans, and to similar peo-
te. (Bocc. g. 10. n. 10.) pie.
Quanta mi fu IL GIORNO DI What was ordered to me yester-
IERI imposto alia sua partenza. day at your departure.
(Red. Lett.)
DOMANI E VENERDI, e il se- To-morrow is Friday, and the
guente di Sdbato. (Bocc. g. 2. n. following day Saturday.
I-)
QUAI BARBARE FUR MAT, qudi _ What savage women, what Sara-
Saracine ? (Dant. Purg. 23.) cens were there ever ?
Cosi e oggi BELLO il cielo The sky is as beautiful to-day as
COME FD MAI. (Bocc. g. 6. n. 10.) it ever was.
Qui fui con Pamfilo. e cosi Here was I with Pamphilus,
etui MI DISSE, e cosi quifacemmo. and so he said to me here, and so
(Bocc. Fiamm. 4.) we did here.
ADVERBS.
355
QUINCI NON PASSA MAI ANIMA
BUONA. (Dant. inf. 3.)
Veggendo TANTE BELLE GIO-
VANI CHE COSTA SONO. (BOCC.
J-iloc. 2.)
DITEL COSTINCI, *e won, Z' drco
tiro. (Dant. Inf. 12)
NE Li GUAKI LONTANO /HOT di
via — Un suo bcl veto lascidva
fuggendo. (Bocc. Vis. Am. 20.)
VUOLSI COSl COLA DOVE SI
PTJOTE — ClO CHE SI VUOLK,epiu
non dimandare. (Dant. Inf. o.)
QUIVI SI PIANGON LI SPIKTATI
DANNI : — Quivi e dlensdndro, e
Diomsio feto — Che f& Sicilia
av6r dolorosi anni. (Dant. Juf.
12.)
COMAND6LLE CHE INDI NON
USCISSE infino a tantu, che cgli
che r avea rinckiuxa, non V a-
prisse. (Passav. 78.)
Tanto vale IL MIO NO quanta
IL suo si. (Cecch. Esalt. cr. 2.
3.)
Che Sl E NO NEL CAPO MI TEN-
ZONA.* (Dant. Inf. S.)
Era Cimone, si PER LA SXJA
FORMA, e S1 PKR LA NOBILTA e
ricchdzza del padre, quasi nbto a
ciascuno. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 1.)
fo vi diro QCELLO CHE 10 AVRO
FATTO, E QUEL CHE NO. (BOCC.
g. 2.n. 1.)
llfamiglidre rispose : ' SIGNOR,
NO.' (Bocc. g. 1. n. 7.)
Disse allora Pirro : * NON FAR-
NETICO, KO; Signora.' (Bocc.)
No, PER QUELLO NON RIMAR-
RA IL, MERCATO, (BoCC. g. 7. n.
2.)
Hence no good spirit ever pass-
es.
Seeing so many beautiful girls
as are there near you.
Tell it from where you are, or
else 1 draw my bow.
Not far from thence flying out of
the way, she left a beautiful veil.
So it is willed, there where will
is power, and ask no more.
Here they wail their merciless
wrongs : here dwells Alexander
and the fierce Dionysius, who
wrought for Sicily many years of
woe. » v
He ordered her not to go out
from thence until he, who had
shut her up there, should come to
open for her.
My negative is as good as his
affirmative.
For yes and no struggle in my
head.
Cimon was, both for his person-
al beauty, and for the nobility and
wealth of his father, known to al-
most every one,
I will tell you what I shall have
done, and what not.
The domestic replied : * No, sir.'
Then Pyrrhus said : ' I do not
rave, Madam, no.'
No, the bargain will not be brok-
en off on this account.
1 At war 'twixt will and will not.' — SHAKSPEARE, Measure for Measure.
356
ANALOGY.
U' SONO I VERSI, U* SON GIUN-
TB LE RIME ? (Petr. C. 46.)
Disse Cnlandrino : l Si BENE.'
(Bocc. g. 9. n. 5.)
// negromdnte disse : l GIA DIO
NON VOGLIA.' (BOCC. g. 10. D. 5.)
"U'na part* del mondo &, che si
GIACE — MA.I SEMPRE IN GH1AC-
Cio. (Petr. c. 5.)
U'na ne dird, JVON MICA d' uo-
mO Di POCO AFFARE. (BOCC. g.
10. n. 6.)
Teddldo NOIST E PTJJJTO MORTO.
(Bocc. g. 3. n. 7.)
Questo nostrofanciullo, il qudle
APPENA ANCORA KON HA qUdttOr-
did dnni. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 8 )
6cco, io NON so ora DIR DI NO.
(Bocc. g. 8. n. 7.)
Where are the verses, where
are the rhymes gone ?
Calandrino replied : « Yes in-
deed.'
The necromancer replied : 'May
God forbid.'
There is a part of the world
which lies always frozen.
I will tell you one, not at all of
a man of little consequence.
Tedaldo is not at all dead.
This hoy of ours, who is hardly
fourteen years old yet.
I cannot now say no.
COMPOUND ADVERBS.
Compound adverbs are formed of an adjective, and
the substantive mente,* ' manner.' Mente being of the
feminine gender requires that the adjective be of the
same gender ; as,
sdviA, wise;
onds^A, honest;
corttsE, courteous;
SAVIA-MENTE, in a wise manner, or wise-
["y;
ONESTA-MENTE, in an honest manner, or
[honestly;
CORTESE-MENTE, in a courteous manner,
[or courteously ;
prudentz, prudent; PRUDENTE-MENTE, in a prudent manner,
[or prudently ;
* From the Celtic menf., * minner.' It is from this language that tho Latins
borrowed their mens, and formed such expressions as forti mente, clard mente, devo-
id mente, &c., which afterwards passed to the Italians, as sana mente in Boccac-
cio (g. 9. n. 9.) ; affettudsa mente in Ariosto (Orl. Fur ); eterna mente in Monti (Bassv.)
may prove; ah hough they are now generally written in one word ; as,/0r£ewzen£«,
* strongly '; chiaramentc, ' clearly ' ; devotame'nte, ' devoutly ' ; sanamentc, ' wisely ' j
ttfettuosamente, l affectionately ' ; eternamente, ' eternally ' ; &c.
ADVERBS.
357
If the adjective ends in le,* or re, for the sake of
euphony the final e is dropped in the formation of the
adverb ; as,
festevolE, merry; FESTEVOL-MENTE, merrily ;
particoldrE, particular ; PARTICOLAR-MEJNTE, particularly.
Sometimes the adverb is an adjective only, without
the addition of the word metite ; as,
CHIARO [for chiaramdnte], clearly ;
DOLCE [for dolcemcnle,] sweetly.
The following are the
Adjectives commonly used as Adverls.\
Forte,
very strong ;
tan to,
so much ;
sodo,
fast, hard ;
rdro,
rarely ;
alto,
softly ;
solo,
only;
basso,
low ;
tutto,
all;
certo,
certainly ;
poco,
little ;
triste,
sadly ;
motto,
much ;
lieto,
merrily ;
troppo,
too much ;
dolce,
sweetly ;
b'ello,
handsomely ;
ckidro,
clearly;
buono,
very well ;
scuro,
darkly ;
aperlo,
openly ;
schietto,
candidly ;
sicuro,
surely ;
piano,
low, softly ;
dimesso,
lowly ;
lento,
slowly ;
sommesso,
humbly ;
pronto,
readily ; ,
vicino,
rear ;
ratio,
speedily;
lontdno,
far.
* This ruin with regard to adjectives ending in le is not without exceptions, as
may be seen in the following passages:
SimiL-Ementc it mal seme rf' Adamo. In like manner Adam's evil brood.
(Dant. Inf. 3.)
I'o la rive<r<rio stdrsi umiL.K.mente. I see her remaining humbly.
(Petr. a. 211.)
UmiLEmcnte vipriego. (Bocc.) I humbly entreat you.
C6sa rdde, iiolte usdta per lo carmine, ma A thin? seldom used by the community,
1tlii.Emenlefdr.ia. (AJutt. Vill. 9. 28.) but usefully done.
fin order to know when these words am arfjectioes, and wh'-n adverbs, it is suf-
ficient to observe whether, in the discourse, they are added to, or used for, a sub-
358 ANALOGY.
Adverbs formed of an adjective, and the adverbs
presto, sovente, pertempo, adagio, vohntieri, affatto,
may be used in a comparative and superlative degree,
which is formed thus :
tronqidllnmente, tranquilly;
pill tranquiUamente, more tranquilly;
tranquill-issiMA-mente, very tranquilly :
felicemente, happily ;
ME\o/e/iceme7?fe, less happily ;
ftlic-issiMA-mvnte, very happily:
schittto, candidly ;
PIU or MENO schitlto, more or less candidly;
schutt-issiMA-mente, very candidly:
lieto, merrily ;
PI\\ or MEN lieto, more or less merrily ;
e/ite, very merrily :
volenlieri, willingly ;
PIU or ME\O volenlieri, more or less willingly;
very willingly.
The adverbs kene, 'well'; and male, 'badly5 5 in
their comparative and superlative, make,
M^GLIO, better;
OTTI M Amente or 6enissiMO, very well :
PEGGIO, worse ;
PES SIM Amente or mcrZissiMO, very badly.
Jlssai, in the superlative makes assaissuvio, c very
much.'
Btantive, or not ; for, if so, they are adjectives j otherwise they are adverbs. Thus,
in these examples,
S' i' werildi di voi assdi o POCO. If I deserved of you either much or
(Dant. Inf. 26.) little.
Segno manifesto di POCO senno. (Bocc. A manifest sign of little wisdom,
g. 1. n. l.J
E per POCO, se tu mi dicessi, che w Howover little you should ask me to
anddssi di qui a Peretola, w credo cA' w go to Perctola, I believe that I should
vi andrci. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 9.) go there.
the word p6cn is an adverb in the first instance, where it modifies the verb meritdi ;
but it is an a>/jr.ctive in the other two, where, in the first, it is added to the sub-
stantive .-•<»«/»«, and, in the second, stands for a substantive ; being equivalent loptica
cosa, « liitle thing.'
ADVERBS.
359
Bine, poco, adagio, piano, tanto, as we have already
observed at p. 86, have also a diminutive,
benixo,
pockixo,
J50COL1NO,
pretty well ;
>> very little ;
adagixo,
very slow ;
i
• very little.
Bene, has also an augmentative : 6enoNE, * very
well.'
ADVERBIAL PHRASES IN COMMON USE.
Di subito, suddenly ;
di lotto, presently ;
in un bnltno, in an instant ;
in un batter d* occkio, in the
[twinkling of an eye ;
poco fa, a little while ago;
fra poco, in a short time ;
un pezzofa, some time ago ;
delle volte, at times ;
air improvviso, unexpectedly ;
alia ventura, at random ;
al^ avvenire, in future ;
a minuto, in detail ;
avicenda, by turns; -
a gdra, emulously ;
a cdso, by chance ;
a torto, wrongly ;
per accidtnie, }
per sorte, > by chance ;
per avventura, )
pur troppo* too truly, too well ;
di fresco, newly ;
di buon grddo, willingly ;
suo malgrddo, a gainst one's will;
senza meno, positively ;
qudnto prima, very soon ;
asuaposta, /at one's
a suo senno, $ pleasure ;
da senno, seriously ;
a bello studio,
abMap6sta,
a meno che, unless ;
non cha,\ except;
dapertutto ) everywhere;
per ogm dove, \
ad un trdtto, at once ;
infditi, . f t .
j-fit f »*^ IdCL ,
difatto, \
di gran lungn, by far ;
a tungo anddre, in the long
[run, in time ;
a piu potere, with all one's
[might;
di mala voglia, unwillingly ;
a un di presso, almost ;
</' allora in qua,since that time ;
d' 6ra inndnzi, henceforth ;
in quel mentre, in or at that time ;
dipunto in punto, exactly;
di punto in bianco, point blank;
di qudndo in qudndo, } now
di trdtto in trdtto, > and
di tdnto in tdnto, ) then ;
it piu per lo piu, on the whole,
[at the utmost.
* An elliptical expression for the phrases e PUR TROPPO vero, * it is too true 1; & PUR
TROPPO 6c/i<>, 'it is too well.'
f An elliptical expression for the phrase SE NON f6sse, or fosse stato, CHE, ( were it
not,' or ' had it not been.'
3GO
ANALOGY.
EXAMPLES.
SAVIAMENTE si spuosono loro
ambasciata. (Gio. Vill. I. 8. c. 1 )
Mdngiano co' forestieri FESJE-
VOLMEME. (Dav. Germ.)
V dltre dojme, vdila Pampinea,
amen gid i- 1 u PA RTI c o i. A K M E.\ T K
tra s& cotninciuto a trattdr del
modo. (Bocc. liitrod.)
Jlssdi la V)C.e lor CHIARO V ab-
bdia. (Dant. Int. 7.)
Come DOLCE pdrlat e DOLCE
ride. (Petr. s. 12(>.)
Qudii do pure nianca dcUe cose
nel luogo, dive noi siri/no, ce
ny andidmo in vn dltro FEL.ICIS
SIMAMErVTE. (G.'ll. ClrC. 1.31.)
un visse giammdi piu di
(Fetr. s. 7.)
Questa grossezza iwn impeili-
sec il riceviniento del mttdllo,
anzi V acccVa PIU V<»LENTIEKI
deW dltra terra. (Ben. Cell.
Oref.)
To m' asterrti VOLENTIERISSI-
MAMENTP: da cosi fatta prepaia-
zione. (Red. Cons.)
U qudle %ia OTTIMAMENTE la,
lingua sapta. (LJocc. g. 2. n. 9.)
Tu ti p'nti MALISSIMO con co-
lui al qudle in desideri che gli
Dei nocciuno. (Varch. Sen. Ben.
6.)
Oh, mi rallegro ASSAISSFMO —
Vedervi vivo e prosperoso. (Ainbr.
Cof. 5. 6.)
Egli stan pur BENIN con quelle
bdrse — Di rdsu al collo. (Buon.
Fier. lutiod.)
Thus wisely they delivered their
mess-age.
They eat merrily with strangers.
The other ladies, having heard
Pampinca, had already begun more
particularly to devise the means.
Their words reveal their fault too
clearly.
How sweetly she speaks, and
how sweetly she smiles.
Whenever things are wanting
in the place where we are, we
go to another very happily.
None ever lived more happy
than I.
This richness [of this earth]
does nqt prevent the metal being
received in it; on the contrary it
receives it better than the other
earth.
I would abstain very willingly
from such preparation.
Who knew already the language
very well.
Thou conductest thyself very
badly with him whom thou wishest
that the gods should injure.
Oh, I rejoice pretty much to see
you alive and prosperous.
They look pretty well with those
bags of satin hung to their necks.
ADVERBS.
361
Pidcciavi di prestdre un POCO- May you be pleased to lend to
LINO — A qutsta pinna lo stan- this pen for a very little while
cdto dito. (Dant. Rim.) your wearied finger.
Conviene un TANTINETTO lo- You ought to praise me a little.
ddrmi. (Salvin. Pros. Tosc. 1.)
Assicurdtevi, che io vi porto un Be assured, that I love you
BENONE grandone. (Car. lett. 1.) hugely.
EXERCISE XXIII.
Where
wast
fosti
thou yesterday a little before (to the)
gior-
day? Where dost thou run ? What fury urges thee
no ? 2 correre1 ? furia sospingere* l
on ? Where dost thou go ? Wait for me. Ah !
2 anddre1 ? Aspettdre^— . Deh !
how can this be ?
d6e poier qu6sto2 esser1 1
to-day. There 1 must be
4. convidne2 esser3
I have seen him here
veddre3 1 6
there some places 1 covered I
with small bushes and grass,
virgulto erba,
1 - luogo nascoso
where the hares now
lepre
and then I can
I possano3
conceal themselves.
nascondere1 2.
this the earth, which I touched before.
terreno, toccdre
not answering him,
1 rispondere2^, 3,
he began to call
comincidre chiamdre
It is not
— essere* l
The boy
more loud.
You ^are now already old and
essere vecchio
can
potete
ill endure
durdr
fatigue. Without I thinking at-all, as if he had J
fatica. S6nza \ pensdre* *, quasi3 — av6sse6 \
thought a long time — (much time), he I said.
pensdre6 — 4 tempo5, — | disse.
31
It
M<i'» ANALOt.'Y.
i ..... :•«'«. II I.. ri.U.Ml.T All ' \»-M,
u
for ti"' love of God I lot it bo done I quick, 1
IIKI- ,1111,11 | f,,,Y,,,.M |
received, a littlo while ago, Jetton from Meatlna,
who erica «bovo. How (much)
I., .
i» nro wo from (tKe) our quartor* P I Boo
• ..,,/,,,/„ •
knooka below, Ho hoped I to I bo able to havo
\.-. -..-. I ,/j I /.,..-,.
ntv oi Luooa oaaily. Ho I goon I running hort
• Wwft', I i-,i I
thorn aa if ho were oraay. The good woman
/MMM
if — dllfff flflfO, /MMM,' ,'. /JH/<J>|,|
returned I urtor | fjtAfj I..T .-heiti and oarried it baok
i *
Uieru iroin-whenoe the had taken u. r< n mo, whence
' - iNHlr«» Itv4rt» ». XH1^
and of what condition art thou?
And he I replied 1 : u I am I from I Syria, and I am
..,»<• | •• <atiftj .1, \
a kipg.11 He aeti oareleialy. And I having been
fiF ^fNr4ff liHit«vr<il§«
put I in pridon, he I w«s I mu>i)y treated by them.
mtf«a* I jir^dnt , — | /W | r »i4iM(r trfttfcto4 *
Obnerve it more particularly. .A M.I living departed
fKim*r(/%j from tlienoe, he I went I flAtntf) t, \
'f< |t*J*1 I Mr'
lu> I h\c».\ I most
PREPOSITIONS.
CHAl'TKIl XJV.
PREPOSITIONS.
PREPOSITIONH IN COMMON USE.
Di*
of j
accdnto, \
ii:-:iil«', nhoill,
*t
to, in, :«f ;
alUito, ;
i near, by ;
</«,!
tn,§
from, by, on, at ;
in, on, upon ;
tillnrno, i
about, arouml ;
con,
with ;
tti/<t<'>H80j
on, upon, about ;
per,
throiin-li, by, on nr-
[countor,inorder
prfaao, J
(tpprtssO)
;near, almost ;
[to, for ;
vicliiQ)
9U,
s6pra,
j on, upon 5
lungi, I
lontdno, (
' far, from j
s6tto
under ;
dppo,\\
at, with, in com-
£'
> amongst, within ;
vtrsofft
parison with ;
towards ;
i£
> in, in about ;
6ltrat \
| beyond, beside*;
prima,
before ;
lun%o,
along ;
ddpo,
after ;
flno,
)
dnzi,
\
slno,
' till, untilf
inn&nzi,
din&mi,
davdnti,
f before, in the
) prcsen<:e °f ' Mj
inflno, |
inalno,
c6ntra,**
c6nlro,
^Mftr as ;
against ;
dtttro,
didtttro,
> behind ;
(nnfS
> opposite ;
t$h
> in, within ;
Ssff9!
1
without ;
fu6ra,
fu6riy
) out of, without,
Hldm,
eccttto.
> except, excepted ;
infu6ri,
except, excepted'; tranne,
* From the C«Itlo rf«, a »\gn ofqualiflcation. J From the Ccllic 4at < tt.'
t From the Celtic a, < near/ 'joining with.' $ From the Celtic «n, ' in.'
(I From the Latin «/m// / — Celtic ap, 'joint,' 'attached.'
IT From the Latin vertui i — Celtic gwero, *to turn.'
** From the Celtic con, a lign ofoppoHition ; an4 trac/t, ' iide.'
tf From the Latln/r«n« / — -Celtic /row, ' before.'
U (And «dnxa and »an, uiod by old writer*,) from the Latin tint i — Celtic «y,
1 want.' ' privation.'
364 ANALOGY.
circa, }
tncirca, > about, almost ;
intorno, }
secondo,
S^sl.a* £ according
giusto, t
conforme,
The nature of most of the foregoing prepositions is
such as to admit of no other significations than those
which have been given ahove ; there are however some
which are made, in Italian, to express so many different
relations, that it has been thought indispensable to add
the following remarks :
The preposition di may express a relation of posses-
sion, of extraction, or of qualification ; as,
il dendro DI Lt5i, his own money;
figlio DEL FIGLIUOLO, son of the son ;
la stdtua DI MARMO, the statue of marble ;
uomini di GROSSO INGEGNO, men of dull understanding.
Jl may express a relation of attribution, of end or
tendency of action, or of proximity to a place, person,
or thing ; as,
AL TEMPO deW IMPERADORE in the time of the emperor
FEDER!GO PRI'MO, Frederic the First ;
* From the Latin justa : — Celtic ajustayl to adjust.*
t Some of the foregoing prepositions are the same as the adverbs ; as, so-
pra, 60«o, pr'trna, appresso, dopo, dentro, difuori, &c., which, when they are
followed or preceded by a noun, a pronoun, or a verb which they govern, are
always prepositions, but otherwise are adverbs. Thus in the following ex-
amples,
Or via mettiti avdnti, to TI verrb AP- Now go before, I will follow after
PRE'SSO. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 5.) thee.
Dalla mddre delta giovane prima, e They were first surprised by the rno-
APPRE sso da Currddo soprappresi furo- ther of the girl, and afterwards by Cur-
110. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 6.) ratio.
the word appresso^ in the first instance is a preposition because it. governs the
pronoun ti ; but in the second is an adverb because it governs no other word.
PREPOSITIONS.
365
VENGA A VEDERLA,
che il vostro ligndggio AN-
DASSE A POVERTADE,
TROVANDOSI A PARlGI,
ALLATO ALLA DONNA,
S? AVVICINAVA ALLE TERRE
del Duca,
let him come to see her ;
that your lineage should be-
come poor ;
finding himself in Paris ;
by the side of the lady ;
he approached the land of the
Duke.
Da may express a relation of derivation, of departure,
of separation, of dependence, of difference, of designa-
tion, of destination, of similitude, of fitness, aptitude, or
capability, of presence, of passage through or by, of un-
certainty of number, of time, of place, of loneliness, or of
instrumentality ; as,
Cino DA PISTOIA,
le grdzie VENGONO DA Dio,
TORNANDO DA PARlGI,
PARTITI DA COTESTI,
m' ALLONTANA DAL VOLGO,
DIPENDE DA QUEL PTJNTO,
ALTR' UOMO DA QUELLO che
io sono,
Guglielmo DAL CORNO,
C6se DA MANGIARE,
uomo DA POCO,
avdnti DA se,
DALLA CASA dtllOL doUUtt,
DA NoviNTA M!LA bocche,
DA GRAN TEMPO,
DA qUESTA PARTE,
DA me, DA per vai,
edificdto DA TARQUINIO,
31*
Cino of Pistoia ;
favors come from God ;
returning from Paris ;
go away from those spirits ;
she separates me from the
common people ;
it hangs upon that point ;
a different man from what I
am now ;
William [surnamed] from the
Horn ;
eatable things ;
a foolish man ;
before himself ^
before the house of the lady ;
above ninety thousand mouths ;
a long time since ;
to this side ;
of me ; by yourself;.
built by Tarquin*
366 ANALOGY.
Besides the above relations, the preposition da is
often used to express with brevity the habitation of a
person ; and is equivalent to the words a casa, a casa
di, ' to one's house ' ; * as,
DA [or a casa, di] me, to me [or to my house] ;
DA [or a cdsa di] lui, to his house ;
DA [or a cdsa di] lei, to her house ;
DAL [or a cdsa del] Cardindle, to the Cardinal's.
In expresses a relation of inferiority, or a relation
between two objects of which the one contains, and the
other is contained ; as,
dormiva IN UN LETTICCIUO- he slept in a little bed;
1*0,
com IN MERCATO, I ran to the market ;
era IN PAIUGI, IN UN ALBER- there were in Paris, in a ho-
GO, tel.
The Italians consider as containing-objects, the di-
visions of time, the parts of one's body, the apparel ive
wear, and sometimes even the surface of bodies ; as,
cinto noville raccontdte IN one hundred stories related in
DIECI GIORNI, ten days ;
pudica IN FACCIA, chaste in her countenance ;
la corona IN FRONTE, the crown on the forehead ;
IN ABITO di peregrini, in pilgrim's dress ;
gli furono straccidti i pdnni all the clothes he had on were
IN DOSSO, torn ;
IN MARE, e IN TERRA, on the sea, and on the land.
Con expresses a relation of company ; and the Italians
* The Italian has derived this usage from the Celtic language, in which the word
da was a synonyme of, and often used for, the word cae or c/tae, ' habitation ' ; —
the cdsa of the Italian.
PREPOSITIONS.
367
generally consider as companions the instruments, the
means, or the manner in which an action is performed, —
vengo a desindre CON voi,
che CON lo STJLE, CON la PEN-
NA, 0 COL PENNELLO 71071
dipignesse,
facendogli cenno COLLA MA-
NO,
incomincib a dire CON UMIL
VOCE,
CON FATICA gli rispose,
I come to dine with you ;
which with his style, with his
pen, or with his pencil, he
could not paint ;
making him a sign with her
hand ;
began to say with a humble
voice ;
with difficulty he replied to
him,
Per expresses the way through, or the means by, which
a thing is done; the reason why, or the object for which,
it is done ; it expresses also a relation of space with
regard to time or place ; and a relation of instrumentali-
ty, of qualification, of destination, or of distribution ;
as,
PER ME si va nella citta do-
lente,
PER LI CtTI PRIEGHI COStui
sovvenni,
non PER CRUDELTA delta
donna amdta, ma PER so-
VERCHIO FUOCO,
vo PE' DOLCI POMI,
PER piti DI dimordndo,
PER li CAMPI, PER le VIE, C
PER le CASE morieno,
promessi a me PER to VERA-
CE DIJCA,
e riputdto PER SANTO,
farei PER Currddo ogni cosa,
died ducdti.pER uno,
through me you go into the
city of woe ;
at whose entreaties I have
aided this one ;
not on account of the cruelty
of the beloved lady, but on
account of an excesssive
flame ;
I go for the sweet fruit ;
remaining for several days ;
through the fields, through
the streets, and in the hous-
es they died ;
promised to me by my sure
guide ;
he is reputed a holy man ;
I would do for Currado every
thing ;
ten ducats each.
368
ANALOGY.
Per is also used to entreat or to swear by ; as,
PER quelia pace che per voi by that peace which is pie-
s' aspttti, ditene , . . . , pared for you, tell us . . . .;
TI Gitf RO, PER qutllo amort I swear to thee, by that love,
che io tiporto, che . . . . , which I bear thee, that ....
The preposition a, as it was mentioned p. 37, fol-
lowed by a word beginning with a vowel takes a d
after it, and su followed by another u takes an r ;fuora,
fuori, and fino, sino, infino, insino, followed by a word
beginning with a consonant often lose the last vowel ;
and verso, loses the last syllable ; as,
CD ud/no c?' intelletlo,
SUR un' dsse,
IN FIN DM dm,
volta VER MC,
to a man of sound judgment ;
upon a board ;
henceforth ;
turned towards me.
EXAMPLES.
E COn IL DENARO DI LTJI U
pagd. (Bocc.)
FU FIGLIO DEL FIGLTUOLO del
Conte d> Jlrtese. (Gio. Vill. 11.
54.)
LA STATUA DT MARMO, 0 di
Ugno, o di metdllo, rimdsa per
memoria d' alc.un valente uomo.
(Dant. Conviv.)
UOMINI e femmine DI
GROSSO INGEGNO. (Bocc. Intr.)
AL TEMPO DELL' IMPERADORE
FEDERIGO PRIMO. (Bocc. g. 10.
n. 9)
Chi nol cr6de, VENGA egli A.
VEDERLA. (Petr. s. 210.)
And paid him with his own
money.
He was son of thfr son of the
Count of Artois.
The statue of marble, or of
wood, or of metal, remaining there
in memory of some great man.
They were men and women of
dull understanding.
In the time of the emperor
Frederic the First.
He who does not believe it, let
him come to see her.
PREPOSITIONS.
369t
A voi noil vi sarebbe onore
CHE JL VOSTRO LIGNAGGIO ANDAS-
SE A POVERTADE. (Nov. Ant. 46.)
TROVANDOSI egli una volta A
PARIGI in povero stdto. (Bocc.)
ALLATO ALLA DONNA la pose.
(Bocc.)
ALLE TERRE DEL DUCA s' AV-
VICINAVA. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 7.)
Ecco GIN DA PISTOIA. (Petr.
Fr. Am. 4.)
DA DlO VENGONO LE GRAZIE.
(Bocc. g. 10. n. 3.)
DA PARIGI a Genova TORNAN-
DO. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 9.)
E tu che s6' costi, dnima viva,
— PARTITI DA COTESTI che son
morti. (Dant. Inf. 3.)
Questa sola DAL VOLGO M' AL-
(Petr. c. 19.)
DA QUEL PtTNTO — DlPENDE
il Ciilo e tutta la natura. (Dant.
Par. 28.)
Quand9 era in pdrte ALTR' UOM
DA QUEL CH' i' SONO. (Petr. s.
It would not be honorable to
you, that your lineage should be-
come poor.
Finding himself once in Paris in
poor circumstances.
By the side of the lady he put it.
He approached the lands of the
Duke.
Behold Cino of Pistoia.
Favors come from God.
Returning from Paris to Genoa.
And thou who standest there,
living spirit, go away from those
spirits who are dead,
She alone separates me from the
common people.
Heaven and nature hangs upon
that point.
When I was in part a different
man from what I am now.
II qudle av£a nome GUGLIELMO
DAL CORNO. (Gio. Vill. 9.)
Le COSE DA MANGIARE WOW si
stimano dalV itso o dalV affetto,
ma ddlla consuetudine . (Varch.)
Tu se' piii DA POCO che Maso,
che s\ lascidva fuggire i pesci
cotti. (Lasc. Spir. 5. 7.)
POCO AVANTI DA SE, vide le
c6neri rimdse d' A!ttila> flagello
diDio. (Bocc. Floe. 4.)
Dal f rate partitosi, DALLA CASA
w' ando DELLA DONNA. (Bocc.
g. 3. n. 3.)
Who was named William [sur-
named] from the Horn.
Eatable things are not valued
from their use or their taste, but
from habit.
Thou art more foolish than Ma-
so, who let the cooked fish escape
from him.
At a little distance before him-
self, he saw the ashes left by
Attila, the scourge of God.
Leaving the friar, he passed be-
fore the house of the lady.
370
ANALOGY.
Stimdvasi av6re in Firinze DA
NOVANTA MILA BOCCHK, tra UO-
mini, fctnniine. e fanciulli. (Gio.
Vill. 11. 93.)
Gid. DA GRAN TEMPO nilllo pill
ne conosci. (Alf. Fil. 4. 2.)
Si dura poca fatica a fdrlo in-
chindre DA QUESTA o DA QUEL-
LA FARTE. (Mach.)
Poscia rispose lui : " DA ME
non vtnni." (Dant. Pur. 1.)
Voi ve ne avvedrete DA PER
v6i nel Uggere quisto frammin-
to. (Red. lelt.)
H campidogHo fu EDIFICATO
DA TARQUINIO, assedidto DA
Brenno, e libcrdlo DA Camilla.
(Vanz.)
Torna qui DA ME. (Mach.)
ddunque, andatevene DA i,th.
(Bocc. g. 2. n. 6.)
Essjindo Salabattto DA LEI an-
dato ima sdra. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 10.)
DAL CARDINAL di Morone, ap-
P&na ar rivet to, andarono tiitli gli
ambasciaduri. (Pall.)
IN UN LETTICCIUOLO assdi plC-
colo si DOKMI VA. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 7.)
I'O COR.SI IN MERCATO per dlT-
telo. (Mach. Coin.)
' ERA IN PARIGI, IN UN ALBER-
GO, alqudnti mercatdnti Italiani.
(Bocc.)
Initndo di raccontdre
NOVELLE, RACCONTATE IN
GIORM. (Bocc. Intr.)
PUDICA IN FACCIA, 6 TielV
dvre onista. (Dant. Puf. 3r)
It was thought that there were
in Florence about ninety thousand
mouths, among men, women, and
children.
It is already a long time since
thou forgottest them all [thy pangs
of remorse].
One meets with very little diffi-
culty in making him lean to this
or to that side.
Then he replied to him : " I
did not come of myself."
You will perceive it by yourself
in reading this fragment.
The capitol was built hy Tar-
quin, besieged by Brennus, and
delivered by Camillus.
Return here to me [or to this
my house].
Go, then, to his house.
Salabaetto having gone one eve-
ning to her house.
All the ambassadors went to the
Cardinal of Morone's, as soon as
he arrived.
He slept in a very small bed.
I ran to the market to tell it to
you.
There were in Paris, in a hotel,
a number of Italian merchants.
I intend to relate one hundred
stories, to be related in ten days.
Chaste in her countenance, and
modest in her carriage.
PREPOSITIONS.
371
Fulgevami gift IN FRONTE LA
CORONA. (Dant. Pur. 8.)
IN AB1TO DI PEREGRINI. (BoCC.) '
Tutti i PANNI GL1 FURONO IN
DOSSO STRACCIATI. (BoCC. g. 1.
n.l.)
Comandamento dbbero dal lor
comurte d' abbdttere la forza d6J
Viniziani IN MARE, E IN TERRA.
(Gio. Vill.)
Sign6re, io VENGO A DESINARE
CON VOI, 6 CON LA VOSTRA BRIGA-
TA. (Bocc. g. 9. n. 3.)
Niuna cosa fu, che egli CON
LO STILE, CON LA PENNA, O COL
PENNELLO NON DIPIGNESSE Simile
a quella. (Bocc. g. 6. n. 6.)
E V invito ad avvicinarsi, FA-
CENDOGLI CENNO COLLA MANO.
(Bocc.)
Incomincid CON TJMIL VOCE A
DIRE — Qwe7 ch" w vo' air altro
canto differire. (Arios. Fur.)
Tito, non restando dipidngere,
CON FATICA COSI GLI RISPOSE.
(Bocc. g. 10. n. 8.)
PER ME SI VA NELLA CITTA
DOLENTE, PER ME SI VA ntlF
et6rno dolore^ — PER ME si VA
tra la perduta g6nte. (Dant.
Inf. 3.)
Donna scese dal cielo, PER LI
cui PRIEGHI — D6lla mm com-
pagnia COSTUI SOVVENNI. (Dant.
Purg. 1.)
NON PER CRUDELTA DELLA
DONNA AMATA, MA PER SOVER-
CHIO FUOCO ntlla m&nte CONCET-
TO da. poco regoldto appetito.
(Bocc. Proem.)
Ldscio lo fele, e vo PE* DOLCI
POMI — PKOMESSI A ME PER LO
VKRACE DUCA. (Dant. Inf. 16.)
The crown shone already on my
forehead.
In pilgrim's dress.
All the clothes he had on were
torn.
They were ordered by their com-
munity to destroy all the forces,
which the Venetians had on the
sea, and on the land.
Sir, I come to dine with you,
and with your company.
There was nothing, that he
could not with his style, with his
pen, or with his pencil, paint like
it.
And she invited him to approach,
making him a sign with her hand.
He began to tell with an humble
voice what I choose to leave for
the next canto.
Titus, without ceasing from
weeping, with difficulty replied to
him thus.
Through me you go into the
city of woe, through me you go
into eternal pain, through me you
go amongst the damned spirits.
A dame descended from heaven,
at whose entreaties I have aided
this one with my guidance.
Not on account of the cruelty
of the beloved lady, but on ac-
count of the excessive flame kin-
dled in his mind by an unruled
passion.
I leave the gall, and go for the
sweet fruit promised to me by my
sure guide.
ANALOGY.
Quivi PER piii DI DIMORANDO.
(Bocc. g. 2. n. 1.)
PI.K le VILLE, c PER LI
PER LE Vffi, E PER LE CASE, dl
di e di n6tte, moricno. (Bocc.
Iiitrod.)
Essdndo stdto un pdssimo u6-
mo in vita, in m6rte i RIPUT^TO
PER SA.NTO. (BOCC. g. 1. n. 1.)
fo FAR]£l PKR CuRRji.DO 6GNI
c6sA, che io polessi. (Bocc. g. 2.
n. 7.)
E die I6ro DIE"CI DUC^TI PER
tfNO. (BOCC.)
O spiriti eUtti, — PER QUE"LL A
P.ACE — Ch* io credo CHE PER vox
tutti s' ASP^TTI, — DfrENE d6ve
la montdgna gidce. (Dant. Pur.
3.)
I'o TI OIT^RO PER QU^LLO. f/l-
di$8olubile AM^RE CHE io TI
nii; r<>, CHE i7 qudrto m6se non
uscira, che tu mi rivedrdi. (Bocc.
1-iaiu. 2.)
JVbn pare inddgno AD
D' INTELL^TTO. (Dant. Inf. 2.)
Battuti in SUR UN' ASSE col
coltdllo. (Dav. Colt.)
O'gni dUra c6sat sia v6stra li-
beramdnte iNFfN DA 6RA. (Bocc.
g. 4. n. -I.)
V<$LTA VER ME, mi disse. (Fi-
renz. Asin. ; '2^.}
There remaining for several
days.
Through the villages, and through
the iu'lds ; through the streets, and
in the houses, both by day and by
night, they died.
Having been a very bad man in
his life, he is in death reputed a
holy man.
I would do for Currado every
thing that I could.
And gave them ten ducats each.
0 chosen spirits, for that peace,
which, as I deem, is for all of you
prepared, tell us where the moun-
tain low declines.
I swear to thee by that indisso-
luble love, which I bear thee, that
the fourth month will not pass,
ere thou wilt see me again.
It does not seem undeserved to
a man of sound judgment.
Beaten upon a board with a
knife.
Let every other thing be freely
yours henceforth.
Turned towards me, she said.
PREPOSITIONS. 373
EXERCISE XXIV.
He gave us the key of his house. This gentle
— dare2 1 3 chidve* 5 7 cdsa.6 2 gentiP
lady being very often urged by the messages and
donna3 JEssere1 stimoldre ambascidta
by the entreaties of each one of them. Both in-
priego in-
flamed by a fierce vengeance, turned towards (to) these
fiammdre — feroce2 vendetta1, rivolgere
civil blood.
civile2 sdngue1.
walls (the) their sword still warm I with
muro f&rro cdldo di
It is believed that he is
Si cre'de che sia
the richest prelate that
ricco preldto
there is in I has 1 the church of God (from)
— — dbbia \ chiesa Dw
the Pope excepted. They were all garlanded 1 with I
Pdpa essere tutto inghirlanddre5 \ di1 \
leaves of oak. We will give thee so many blows
foglia? 3 quercia*. dare2 l
with
d'
one of these iron bars bars of iron
— — pdlo f&rro
upon (the) your head, that we will make thee fall
fdre* l cade-
down dead. I have a farm very near to the bank
re morto. av6re podere riva
of the river. Then came the time of going out
fiume. venire tempo uscire
against the prince, who was approaching (himself)
prence, avvicindre3
already to the lands of the Duke. They made him
terra Duca. —
1 he ;was put to sit down just opposite to the
— JEssere me" Mere seder e
door of the room, whence the abbot was obliged
uscio cdmeraj abate dottre
32
374
ANALOGY.
to come out into the
— uscire
seest a temple by-the-side
vedere tempio
dining room
sdla a mangidre
of
a
the sea.
mare.
Here thou
The em-
2 im-
the
peror being one day between these two sages,
peratore3 JEssere1 giorno sdvio,
one stood on the right I of him I , and the other
stare2 a3 — destra* \ gli1 | ,
on the left. Having gone out from the city they
« — sinistra. Uscire cittd
put themselves on the way.
metterc2 si1 — via.
the finger of
— dito2 a3
face at him
He put a ring on
— Mettcre 5 anello6 l
Looking fixedly in his
Guarddre^ — —
fixedly in the face, in order to
flso mso,
Torello.
4
see whether
vedere se
he was speaking seriously.
dire
Having
put (himself) on a great black pelisse, he arranged
Mettere^, nero2 l, — acconcidre4
himself in that in such a manner, that he looked like
gmsa,
— parere
a bear.
orso.
With the best harmony in the world all
miglior pace mondo tutto
(and) four dined together. He began with the
qudttro desindre insieme. — incomincidre2 3 4
piece of wood to give him the greatest blows in
st6cca5 6 ddre7 GV1 maggiore colpo
the
world, now on
mondo,
(the)
his head, and then on
— ttsta, e
•(the) his sides. I wish first to go to Rome, and
— fidnco. volere — anddre Roma,
there to see him (the) whom thou sayest to be —
— vedere dire — —
that he is — vicar of God on earth.
6ssere vicdrio Dio terra.
There sounded
Suondre
PREPOSITIONS. 375
through the city a wonderful report, that the tombs
cittd mirdbile2 voce1, 3 5 tomla6
of the Scipios were discovered I . By that steep
7 8
Scipione9
si fossero scoperte* \ . scosctso
way I arrived at the tombs of the valorous race.
via — giungere avello valoroso2 stirpe1.
Neither by letter did she dare
JY2 Uttera — ardire
let him hear it.
fdre^, 2 sentire3 l^,.
Not seeing through the wood any path. You will
vedere selva sentiero. ri-
receive a hundred (of them) for every-one. He went to
c6vere2 — cento5 3 ciascuno4. anddre
Ravenna in-order-to speak to the army. No, I never
parldre armdta. , —
will mention it will not mention it ever. With
— — l dire3 2 4.
a low voice he replied thus. This ferocious man,
— basso voce — rispondere2 l. feroce2 uomo1,
acts of
having usurped with (the) frauds and with (the)
< - usurpdre frode
violence I a throne not his own, sought
lenza \ trono — , cercdre* di9 \ man-
serve it with (the) terror and with (the) cruelty.
n 2 terrore3 4 5 6 crudeltd7.
to i pre-
Without any fail I promise to thee, upon (the) my
alcun fdllo promettere2 l} mio
faith, that within - among a few days thou wilt
fe, - — poco d/l tro-
find thyself with me. I wish that we should de-
ware2 ! 4 3. volere - seen-
scend (until) there below.
dere giu.
376 ANALOGY.
CHAPTER XV.
CONJUNCTIONS.
CONJUNCTIONS IN COMMON USE,
E,
0,
and ;
or, either ;
non gia,
I not at all, not
j indeed ;
ne,
nor, neither ;
non solo,
' not only,
se,
if, whether ;
non eke,
| not merely ;
ma,
f Vint •
pur che,
provided ;
perd,
> UU L ,
a meno che,
unless :
che,
that;
dnzi che,
rather, sooner;
,
Syet, neverthe-
(
f rather than not,
pure,
less ;
dnzi che no, *
rather so than
gia,
yet, already ;
(
; otherwise ;
dnzi,
inay, rather, on
the contrary ;
si,
cost,
so, thus ;
dnche,
^
come,
ri
dnco,
eziandio,
> also, even ;
siccome,
sicche,
as, IIKG ;
so, thus,
altresl,
N
cosi che,
wherefore ;
ancora,
( also, even, a-
l gain ;
talche,
giacche,
so, so that ;
sine* ;
eppure,
ossia,
( yet, neverthe-
l less ;
doe,
doe a dire,
vale a dire,
that is ;
that is to say ;
ovvero,
> or, either ;
almeno,
at least *
oppure,
)
almdnco,
nemmeno,
]
di piu,
moreover ;
nemmanco,
inoltre,
)
neppure,
! neither,
oltrecche, 1
besides,
nednche,
} not even ;
oltracdb, j
' besides this 5
tampoco,
dj altronde,
nettampoco,
se mdi,
? if ever,
dunque,
adunque,
; then,
\ therefore j
se pure,
J if indeed ;
onde,
| , p
se perd,
if however ;
laonde,
> wnerefore,
se non,
? unless, except,
quindi,
; -
se non che,
I but;
percio,
> therefore, for
[ which reason \
CONJUNCTIONS.
377
accid,
in sdmma, \
in short,
acciocche,
in order that,
in fine, (
' in conclusion ;
affine,
to the end that;
sia che,
whether,
ciffinchb,
vuoi,
or, either ;
ch&
for, why ?
del resto,
otherwise,
perchd,
because ;
per dltro,
besides ;
poiche, ? because, since,
tdnto,
as;
posciache, $ as, after ;
qudnto,
as ;
perocche,
qudndo,
when ;
imperocche, \ because,
quand* dnche,
even when ;
perciocche, [> whereas,
in guisa che, ^
imperciocchb, \ as, since ;
conciosiacche, \
in modo che,
inmani&rache,
so that, in such
quantunque, \
di modo che,
a manner ;
sebbene,
dimanierache,;
benchd, }> although ;
intdnto
1 in the mean
comeche,
avvegnache, J
frattdnto, J
time, mean-
' while, whilst ;
ancorche, > ,
mentre, ]
whilst,
, . i \ f even tliat i
contuttoche, $
mentrecche, (
' whilst that ;
nonostdnte,
salvo,
1
nondimeno,
eccetto, \
> save, saving,
nientedimeno,
Qtill
trdnne, |
> except ;
con tutto cid,
non per tdnto,
non per questo,
cid non ostdnte,
bllil,
nevertheless,
notwithstand-
ing, for all that;
fuorchb,
forse,
6ra,
perhaps ;
now.*
cid nondimeno,
tuttavia, * J
Many of these conjunctions, as nondimeno, cid non ostdnte, &c.
contain in themselves & pronoun, & preposition, an adverb, &c.; but,
from their office of joining1 sentences together, they are commonly
reckoned amongst conjunctions, though in fact they are but conjunctive
phrases.
* Some of these conjunctions might be mistaken for prepositions or adverbs, and
the conjunction CHE, for the relative pronoun CHE, 'who,' 'which,' 'that'; their
character however will soon be ascertained by considering the office which they per-
form in a sentence. Thus in the following examples :
Iddto mi ha fatto tdnta gratia^ che 'to God has granted me such a favor as to
A'NZI la mta morte ho veduto alcitni de' enable me to see some of my brothers
before my death.
She was a little advanced in years and
rather proud.
I was indeed not naturally so, but by
\ mta
-m.iiifra.taii. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 5.)
Attempattlla era, e A'NZI superba che
no. (Bocc. g. 6. n. 1.)
To £ra ben cosi, ma non per natitra.
KI u> c/e/e ci/ot, ma, nun, per /tan*/ it, ws n
per iina infermitd. (Bocc. g. 3. a disease,
n. 1.)
tho word dnzi is a preposition in the first instance because it governs la mia mdrtc :
32*
378 ANALOGY.
The conjunction ne is sometimes used in the signifi-
cation of e, ' and ' ; as,
ddlci NE cdri, sweet and dear ;
parldi NE scrissi, I spoke and wrote.
Ma is often used in the signification of piu, < more ' ;
as,*
MA die uriOj more than one ;
non MA che di sospiri, no more than sighs,
Che is sometimes used in the signification of fra or
tra, ' between ' ; as,
meglio di diecimila ddbbre, more than ten thousand pis-
CHE in gioie, e CHE in toles between jewels and
dendri, money.
Pure is often used in the signification of ancora,
i also,' < even ' y solo, solamente, < only ' ; as,
e PURE peccdto, it is also a sin ;
s' io avessi avuto PURE un had I had even the slightest
pensieruzzo, thought ;
natura non avea ivi PUR di- nature had not only painted
pinto, there.
The conjunctions quantunque, sebbene, bencke, come-
che, avvegnache, ancorche, contuttoche, are generally
followed by one of the following conjunctions, pure,
it is an adverb in the second because it modifies the verb era : and it is a conjunction
in the last because it connects the clause (era) per natbra with ^era) per una
infermitd.
And in the following :
Comincidrono a dire, CHE quello, CHE They began to say that what he had
earli av6oa rispdsto, non ventva a dir ntol- replied was without meaning
la. (Bocc. g. 6. n. 9.)
the first che is a conjunction, because it connects dire, with what follows j and
the second is a relative pronoun, because it refers to quello, its antecedent.
* From these and similar examples it seems as if the Italian ma were derived from
the Latin magis : — the Celtic mai, * great.'
CONJUNCTIONS. 379
nonostante, nondimeno, nientedimeno, con tutto do, do
non ostante, do non di meno, non pertanto, non per
questo tuttavia ; as their correlatives ; as,
COMECHE vdrie cose gli an- although it passed through his
ddsse per lo pensiero di mind to do various things,
/are, PURE deliberd . . . . , yet he determined
Often the correlative conjunction is suppressed ; as,
Jlrriguccio, CONTUTTOCHE Arriguccio, although a mer-
fosse mercatdnte, era fnon- chant, was a proud man.
dimerio] unfiero uorno,
Non soloy non che> are followed by ma, ma ancora ;
as,
sta bene di coslfdtte cose NOW it is well to reprimand for
CHE gli amici, MA gli stra- such things, not only friends,
nieri di ripiglidre, but even strangers ;
il vino NON SOLO conforta il wine not only assists the
natural calore, MA ANCORA natural heat, but it clears
chiarifica il sdngue, the blood.
JVbw che is often an elliptical expression for the
phrase NON solamente dico CHE, ma, ' I say not only
that, but ' ; as,
spero trovdr pieta NON CHE I hope to find not only par-
perdono [NON SOLAMENTE don, but pity ;
rico CHE spero trovdr per-
dono, MA pieta],
avrebbero potuto muover la they could have not only
guerra, NON CHE difender- defended themselves, but
si [D!CO NON SOLAMENTE even waged war.
CHE avrebbero potuto di-
fendersi, MA muover la
gutrra],
Tanto is followed by quanto, and sometimes by che ;
corresponding to the English words both . . . and 5 as,
TANTO crudi QUANTO c6tti, both raw and cooked ;
TANTO mdschi, CHE feminine, both men and women.
380
ANALOGY.
The conjunctions e, o, followed by a word beginning
with a vowel often take a d after them ; and pure, ep-
pure, oppure, alrneno, nemmeno, ora, ancora, followed
by a consonant drop the last vowel ; as,
hard and severe battles ;
whether a spirit or a living
man;
which to think of oppresses
rny heart ;
which he hopes to see also
there in heaven.
diire, CD dspre baltdglie,
OD ombra, OD uomo certo,
che il cuor mi preme gia PUR
pe.nsdndo,
ch* AN COR lassu vedere spe-
ra,
Pure, gid, ora, are sometimes mere expletives ; as,
la cosa andd PUR cost, the thing passed just so ;
fossero essi pur GI! disposti, would that they were disposed;
6RA le parolefurono assdi, now the words were many.
EXAMPLES.
Se gli occhi suoi ti fur DOLCI,
NE CARI. (Petr. c. 40.)
Qudnto di lei PARLAI,NE SCRIS-
si. (Petr. s. 296.)
Or cui chidmi tu Iddio ? JEgli
non b MA CHE tfNo. (Nov. Ant.
78.)
Quivi, secondo che per ascol-
tdre, — JVon av6a pianto, MA CHE
DI SOSPIRI — Che V aura eterna
facevan tremdre. (Dant. Inf. 4.)
Donolle CHE IN GIOIE, e CHE
in vasellamenti d' oro e d' ariin-
tO, E CHE IX DENARI, quillo che
vdlse m6glio D' dltre DIECIMILA
DOBBRE. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 9.)
E pogndmo, che non lo faccid-
mo a malizia, pure nienledime-
no E PTJRE PECCATO. (Cavalc.
Pungil. 195.)
If her eyes were sweet and dear
to thee.
How much I spoke and wrote
of her.
Now whom callest thou God ?
There is no more than one.
There, as well as my ear could
note, no other plaints were heard
than sighs, which caused the eter-
nal air to tremble.
He gave her between jewels,
and gold and silver vases, and
money, what would be worth
more than ten thousand pistoles.
And let us suppose, that we do
not do it through malice, yet
nevertheless it is also a sin.
CONJUNCTIONS,
381
0, S* fo AVESSI AVtTTO PURE
UN PENSIERUZZO di fare V una
di quelle cose, che voi dite, credete
voi, che Iddio m' avesse tdnto so-
stenuta ? (Bocc. g, 1. n. 1.)
NON AVEA PUR NATtJRA 1VI
DIPINTO, — Ma di soavitd di mil-
le odori — Vi facea un incdgnito
indistmto. (Dant. Pur. 7.)
COMECHE VARIE COSE GLI AN-
DASSE PER LO PENSIERO DI FA-
RE, PURE, vedendo il re, DELIBE-
RO (Bocc. g. 2. n. 2.)
ERA ARRIGUCCIO, COWTUTTO-
CHE FOSSE MERCATANTE, UN FIE-
RO UOMO. (BOCC. g. 7. II. 8.)
A VOI STA BENE DI COS1 FATTE
COSE, NON CHE GLI AMICI, MA
GLI STRANIERI DI RIPIGLIARE.
(Bocc. g. 2. n. 3.)
IL VINTO NON S6LO CONFORTA
IL NATURAL CALORE, MA ANCORA
CHIARIFICA IL SANGUE tOrbldo.
<Cresc. 4; 48; 2.)
SPERO TROVAR PIEXI, NON CHE
PERDONO. (Petr. s. 1.)
Tdnte miglidia armdti, a pie e
a cavdllo, AVREBBERO, con dltro
Cdp0} POTUTO MUOVER LA GUER-
RA, NON CHE DIFENDERSI. (DaV.
Stor.)
I frutti sono samssimi TANTO
CRUDI, QUANTO COTTI. (Red.
Lett. 2.)
Dimorano salvfiremente in
queir aria di collirta, TANTO MAS-
em, CHE FEMMINE. (Lib. Cur.
Malatt.)
'Le detle nazioni ebbero DURE,
ED ASPRE BATTAGLIE. (Gio. Vill.
b. 6. c. 29.)
" Miserere di me" griddi a lui,
?— " Qudl che tu sii, OD OMBRA,
OD UOMO CERTO." (Dant Inf. 1.)
Oh ! had I had even the slight-
est thought of doing one of those
things which you say, do you be-
lieve that God would have assisted
me?
Nature not only had painted there,
but of the sweetness of a thousand
smells had made an unknown, un-
distinguishable fragrance.
Although it passed through his
mind to do various things, yet,
seeing the king, he determined
Arriguccio, although a mer-
chant, was a proud man.
It is well for you to 'reprimand
for such things, not only your
friends, but even strangers.
Wine not only assists the natu-
ral heat, but it clears also the
turbid blood.
I hope to find not only pardon,
but pity.
So many thousand armed men,
on foot and on horseback, would
have, under another captain, not
only defended themselves, but
waged war.
Fruits are very wholesome, both
raw and cooked.
In that mountain air both men
and women live in very good
health.
Said nations had hard and se-
vere battles,
" Take pity upon me," cried I to
him, "whatever thou be, whether
a spirit or a Hying man."
382 ANALOGY.
Tu vuoi ch* w rinuovelli — Thou wishest that I should re-
Disperdto dolor che il cuor mi call the desperate grief, which to
prime — GIA PUR PENSANDO, pria think of oppresses my heart, before
eh' w nefavelli. (Dant. Inf. 33.) I tell it.
f Per mirdr la sembidnza di Co- In order to see the image of
luit — CH' ANCOR LASSU nel del Him whom he hopes to see also
VEDERE SPERA. (Petr. s. 14.) there in heaven.
LA COSA AXDO PUR cosl. (Bocc. The thing happened just so.
g. 2. n. 5.)
O'ra FOSSERO ESSI PUR Gil Now would that were disposed
DISPOSTI a venire. (Bocc. Int. to come.
6RA LE PAROLE FtjRoivo AS- Now the words were many, and
SAI, ed il rammarichio della don- the sorrow of the lady great.
na grdnde. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 6.)
EXERCISE XXV.
The waters, and the air, and the branches, and
dcqua, dura, rdmo,
the little birds, and the fishes, and the flowers, and
uccello, pesce, fiore,
the grass speak of love. | I do not go away
erba parlare arnore. \ . non10 mi11 allontdno12
neither from (the) Mount Parnassus, nor from the
3 Monte4' Parndsso?
Muses. And it appears to me to see with-her la-
Musa9. -^ardre4^ 5 ved6r2 3 ddn-
dies and damsels, and they are savins and beech-trees.
na donzdlla, — essere abete f&ggio*
Neither by message, nor by letter did she dare to I
ambascidta, lettera — ardire di \
I let him know it. 1 Nimrod was the first king, or
fdrglielo sapere. \ Nembrotte essere re,
ruler, or collector (of assemblage) of people.* I will
rettore, ragunatore congregazidne gente. di-
* People, in the plural — peoples.
CONJUNCTIONS.
883
tell perhaps a thing not credible, but true. He was
re cosa credibile, tiiro. — JEssere
not only killed, but devoured even to the bones.
ucciderej l divorare5 3 osso*.
He lost every hope, not only of ever having her
— perdere* Ogni1 speranza2, doverla mdi
again,
riavere.
but even
of seeing
vedere
her.
1 And for what rea-
ca-
son ? " said Ferondo : " Because thou wast jealous.*'
gione?" dire : " essere geloso."
Alexander although
Alessandro
I remained
stette
he had
great fear, yet
•rd.n.tJ.pl rtn.i'/.rnZ.
he
paura2,
quiet.
cheto.
Surely, although thou affirmest
Certo, affermdre*
it, I do not believe, that thou
believest
credo?
it.
'Go
then," said the lady, " and call him."
," dire donna, " chiamdre^ ."
l. "Anddre
Since you
pardon me, I will tell it to you.
perdondre*^, 5, 6 dire9 7.
Therefore I stop (myself) ; but why goest thou ?
_ nrroeirtre'*' 'l 2 fl.YldnrP ?3 !
promise me
promettere2 l
— arrestdre
Although we are in the month of July — - be of July,
— — — essere3 1 Luglio2,
I thought
mi son creduta
this morning I should freeze — to
mattina — as-
freeze. I wish, that she I should send I me a small
siderdre. — Volire, mdndi2 l
lock of the beard of Nicostratus. Now it happened,
cidcca bdrba Nico strata. — avvenire,
that the king of France He was guarding I the
re Frdncia — Era a guarddre \
passes with more than three thousand horsemen, between
ptisso tremila cavalierc,
German and (between) Lombards. Provided I you^ have
Tedesco Lombardo. \ a voi dia
the mind
il cuore
to
di
keep secret what — that which I
tener secreto
384
ANALOGY.
will say to you.
' are2 ».
have I only one
non hdnno
The cranes
gru
leg and one foot. I see, that he wishes, that I
vedere,
volere.
gamba pie.
should do I what — that which, I never — not ever,
fdccia I , 3,
should relate
wished to do, that is, that I
volere* fare, ,
his wickedness.
» cattivitci2.
raccdnti
(the)
CHAPTER XVI.
INTERJECTIONS.
INTERJECTIONS IN COMMON USE.
Ak!
ah ! ha 1 alas !
ahime! aime!
\
eh ! e !
ih!
eh!
ih!
chime! eime!
ohime! oime!
>alas (me) !
oh ! o !
oh ! ho !
[ome !
\
uh!
uh!
oite !
alas (thee) !
dhi!
ah ! alas !
oise !
alas (him or her)!
*/»-»* /
^ here ! ho hey !
gudi !
woe !
em, .
I ho there !
aiuto !
help !
old ! 6i !
ah ! oh !
o Dio !
oh Heavens !
uhi!
ah ! alas !
lasso !
^
/fj>Ji i
Sah ! alas ! pray !
lasso me !
> alas !
Utfi I
prithee !
dhi Idsso !
^
doh!
ah, ah !
oh ! pshaw !
ah, ah !
povero me !
( wretched that I
am ! unfortun-
eh, eh!
oh, oh !
poh !
eh, eh !
oh, oh !
poh !
misero me !
meschino me !
dolente me !
< ate that I am !
wretched me !
l^poor me !
puh ! pu !
pu ! pooh !
o me bedto !
eia !
halloo !
o me felice !
happy that I am!
old!
holla! ho there !i bedto me !
happy me !
\felice me !
INTERJECTIONS.
385
cost !
so ! thus !
Alto !
halt!
si!
> yes, certainly !
sta!
ohl ! j
stop !
take care !
pure !
yet !
gudrda I
. have care !
f I
< how! how then!
largo ! }
i beware !
come !
su!
\ why ? why so !
piano, }
adagio, \
softly ! gently !
slowly !
orsu !
f up, up ! come !
zl ! zilto !
st! whist! hush!
su, su !
£ come then !
cheto !
quiet ! still !
via!
via, via !
away !
non piu !
bdsta !
enough !
eh via !
fie ! fie upon !
silenzio !
silence '
vergogna !
for shame !
tacete !
oibb !
o fie ! o fough !
anddte !
away !
dnimo !
•\
baddte !
| mind !
cordggio !
fate cuore !
( courage !
i cheer up !
aW erta !
state aW erta!
> have care !
} beware !
bene !
well !
di grdzia !
pray!
bravo !
J bravo !
\ very well !
per caritd !
for charity's
[sake !
buono !
good ! v
per amor del tie- for heaven's
viva !
long live !
lo!
[sake !
eh viva ! evviva /huzza !
mercl !
> mercy !
cdpperi !
cdppita !
poffdre !
t ay ! heyday !
I marry !
misericordia I
possibile !
appunto !
£ mercy upon us !
is it possible !
exactly ! just !
oh bella !
fine!
pensdte !
just think ! *
ecco !
lo ! behold !
The interjections lasso, povero, misero, meschino,
beato (me ! ), are mere adjectives, and when used by
female, take the feminine termination: — lassa, pove-
ra, miser a (me I), &c. ; and in the plural make, lassi,
poveri (noil), &tc.3 for the masculine; and lasse, pove-
re (noil), &c. for the feminine ; as,
LASSA ME ! in che maV 6ra alas ! in what evil hour was I
ndcqui, born ;
MisERi NOI ! che sidm, se Id- miserable that we are ! what
dio ci Idscia ? becomes of us, if God for-
sakes us ?
* It in important to observe, that, as some of these interjections are used to
express different, and oven contrary, emotions or affections of the mind, their exact
signification can only be determined by the sense of the words which accompany them,
™ give rise to the exclamation.
33
386 ANALOGY.
Bravo ! zitto ! cheto ! are also adjectives, and, when
used in speaking to a female, or to more than one male
or female, follow the same rule ; as,
BRAVA ! come qudndo ? bravo ! as when ?
ZITTI, un po' I hush, a little !
Bravo ! is also used in its superlative, and makes
bravissimo ! bravissima ! bravissimi ! bravissime, l bravis-
simo ! '
EXAMPLES.
Oime ! LASS A ME ! doUnte me ! Alas ! unfortunate that I am !
IN CHE MAL,' ORA NACQTJi. (Bocc. in what evil hour was I born.
g.7.n.2.)
MISERI NOI ! CHE SIAM, SB ID- Miserable that we are ! what be-
DIO ci L.ASCIA ? (Alf. Saul. 1. 1.) comes of us, if God forsakes us.
BRAVA! COME QUANDO? (Manz. Bravo! as when?
Prom. Spos. c. 1.)
ZITTI, -UN PO' ! ch* elle dormo- Hush a little ! for they are sleep-
no. (Buon. Fier.) ing.
Many of the foregoing interjections are elliptical
expressions of, and equivalent to, perfect sentences ; as,
ola, for instance, which stands for O [tu, che sei] LA, ' O
thou, who art there ' ; orsu, for 6na [levati or levatevi]
su, 'now rise up';vvt«, for [va' or andate] VIA ; cheto,
for [sta or state] CHE'TO, * be still ' ; coraggio, for [abbii
or abbiate] CORA'GGIO, c have courage ' ; viva, for VIVA
[egli or etla lungamente,] l may he or she live long '; bene,
for [sta or va] BE'NE, 6 it is well ' ; bravo, brava, for [sei
or siete] BRA'VO, BRA'VA ; oh bella, for OH [questa e] BE'L-
LA, 'oh this is fine '; &c. ; to which may be added manco
male, or meno male, ' less evil,' ' not so bad,' c better so ';
which is often used as an interjection, and is equivalent
to the phrase [il] MAXLE [e~\ MAXNCO, or MEXNO, [che non
INTERJECTIONS. 387
sarebbe stato, se la cosa fosse andata altrimenti,~\ ' the
evil is less than if the thing had happened otherwise,'
( it is not so bad as if it had happened otherwise,' c bet-
ter so than otherwise.'
EXERCISE XXVI.
Ah ! how many steps thou Ipsest through the for-
pdsso — perdere* * 2 sel-
est ! " Ah ! " I said he, I " valiant men, ah ! corn-
ea3 / I dicea — , I " valente uomo, com-
panions, ah ! brothers, keep (the) your place." Alas !
pdgno, fratello, tenure ludgo."
mercy ; for heaven's sake ! Alas ! blind ungrateful world !
orbo ingrdto'2 mondo1 !
0 ! happy souls ! Wretched that I am ! I have
felice2 dnima1 ! avere?
loved thee more than (the) my own life. Fie ! go
amdre3 l — vita. anddre
on. Is it possible, that thou I art I alive ? Marry !
oltre. | sii \ vivo ?
1 recant (myself.) How many tears, alas ! have I
ridire* *. Idgrima, avere —
already shed ! Woe to you, perverse souls !
sparger -e ! prdva? dnima1 !
never
non is-
hope
perdte mdi
to see the heaven again. Hush ! hush ! other-
veder ci6lo .
wise we begin again. Holla ! where art thou ? Come !
— essere da-capo. essere 1
let us see. Up, up ! citizens, let every-one arm himself
vedere. cittadino, — 3 armdre2 , l
speedily to the defence. Oh ! thou art in great haste
veloce difesa. avere — gran fretta-
Alas ! how miserable is (the) our fortune ! " The cava-
qudnlo misero2 essere1 fortuna ! 2 cava-
388 ANALOGY.
lier said : " I wish to leave thee, and serve God."
litre3 Dire1 : '« volere — lascidr^ servir Dio."
The demon replied : u Pshaw ! why wishest thou to
2 demonio3 Rispondere1: " vottre2
leave me ? " O poor me ! (that) I I shall never be good
lasciare l ? " | non sard mdi piu buo-
again I I for any thing. Pray ! my friend, why wishest
no I I a 2 arnica1, voltre
thou to give thyself I this trouble ? " Alas ! " said the
entrdre in \ fatica ? " " dire
other, " what is that which thou sayest ? " Come !
" essere dire ? "
go, I will wait for thee in the house. Away ! do
anddre, aspettdre2 — — cdsa. —
not have any fear, I will carry thee to the house
av£r — paura, ponere2 l — cdsa
safe and sound. Silence, son, do I not make noise I ;
sdlvo3 sdno1. . , figliuolo, — | non far romore \ ;
let f (the) thy father sleep. Oh ! you make me laugh.
lasciare * — genitdre* dor mire1. fare2 1 ridere.
He cried out : « Oh, oh ! "
— Griddre : "
at
per
(the) which cry the
grido
cranes began to fly. Oh, blind ! oh, wretched ! oh,
grit, comincidre fuggire. cieco. ! !
foolish man ! oh, how infirm thou art ! Alas (him) !
mdtto — ! qudnto infermo* — tssere1 ! !
wretched (him) ! that the hog had been stolen from
/ , * pdrco essere2 imboldre3
him — to him. Heyday ! how well in tune she is !
l. — 3 tuono* l stare2 !
Courage, youn^g men, let us assault manly, and with
, giovane, assaltdre virile,
cheerful front, these drowsy people. Away, stay there
allegro fronte dormiglidne. , —
with the other dogs.
cdne.
PART III,
ITALIAN SYNTAX
CHAPTER I.
ORDER AND POSITION OF WORDS.
WORDS may be arranged in. Italian either in the
natural order of the ideas which they are used to con-
vey ; as, io son r{cco, e spendo il mio in metier tavola,
' I am rich, and spend; my money in keeping a good
table ' ; or in a somewhat different order, in which eu-
phony or emphasis is consulted ; as, in quella dimoran-
do, poco o niente potrebbe del suo valor dimostrare
[for potrebbe dimostrare poco o niente del suo valor,
dimorando in quella], c He could show little or nothing
of his valor, remaining there*' Hence there are two
different constructions, the one called simple or direct,
the other inverse or indirect.
SIMPLE CONSTRUCTION-..
In the simple construction, the subjective is always put
before the verb. It is generally a pronoun, a noun, an
adjective or a verb used as a noun, or a phrase ; as,
io Amo,, 1 love ;
PIETRO fugge, Peter flies ;
IL BKLLO pidce, the beautiful pleases;
33*
390 SYNTAX.
IL suo PARLARE mi pidcque [her speaking] her conversation
si, pleased me so;
CHE TU CON NOI Ti RiMAN- we should be very glad,i/*£/um
<*A, n' e caro, wouldst remain with us.
The objective is put after the verb. It is generally
SL pronoun, a noun, an adjective, a verb, or a phrase; as,
guardate ME, look at me ;
dmo GUISCARDO, I love Guiscard ;
perdono IL BELLO, they lose [the beautiful] the
beauty ;
avendo compiuto IL suo CAN- having finished her ringing ;
TARE,
signified IL FATTO COME STA- declared the fact as it was.
VA,
If the subjective or objective have an article, this
article is put before them ; as,
GLI uomini sono capo delle [the] men are the head of wo-
femmine, men ;
IL capitdno cadde, e sconcios- the captain fell, and sprained
si IL piede, [the foot] his foot.
The adjectives belonging to the subjective and objec-
tive are put immediately after them ; as,
gli scoldri MORIGERATI e DI- the well-behaved and diligent
LIGENTI studiano, scholars study ;
U maestro primia gli scoldri the master rewards the atten-
ATTENTI e STUDIOSI, tive and studious scholars.
Any other word which is dependent on the subjective
or objective is also put immediately after them ; as,
la virtu DI PAOLO fa rico- the virtue of Paul was ac-
nosciuta, knowledged ;
nconosciva nei discendenti it acknowledged in the de-
la virtu DEL PADRE, scendants the virtue [of the
father} of their father.
The relative pronoun is put after its antecedent ; as,
ORDER OF WORDS. 391
Lo sco/are, il QUALE nascdso the scholar, who had concealed
era, himself.
The adverb is put immediately after the verb, which
it modifies ; as,
dma ARDENTEMENTE la glo- he loves glory ardently.
ria,
The preposition is put before the word, which it gov-
erns ; as,
DI selva IN silva DAL crudil she flies from wood to wood to
5' invdla, avoid the pursuit q/*^e fero-
cious animal.
The conjunction is put between those parts of a sen-
tence, which it connects ; as,
gli augelletti, E i p&sci, E i the little birds, and the fishes,
Jioriy E T 6r6a, and the flowers, anc? the
grass.
The interjection has no fixed place, it having no in-
trinsic relation to the other words ; it is, however, gen-
erally put at the beginning of the phrase ; as,
OIME ! che e quello, che tu alas ! what is that you say ?
EXAMPLES.
Io SONO RICCO, E SPENDO IL I am rich, and spend my money
MIO IN METTER TAVOLA, ed ono- in keeping a good table to enter-
ro i miei concittadini. (Bocc. g. tain my fellow-citizens.
9. n. 9.)
IN Q,UELLA DiMORANDO, poco He could sbow little or nothing
o NIENTE POTREBBE DEL stjo of his valor, remaining there.
VALOR DIMOSTRARE. (BOCC. g.
10. n. 1.)
Io ho amdtOj e AMO GUISCAR- I have loved, and love GUIS-
DO. (Bocc. g. n. I.) card.
PiETRoBoccamdzzctFtiGGEcon Peter Boccamazza flies away
/' Jlgnoldlla, e truova ladroni. with Agnolella, and meets with
(Bocc. 5. n. 3.) thieve3.
392
SYNTAX.
IL BIZLLO PIACE dgli occhi, e si The beautiful pleases the eyes,
ammira. (Vas.) and is admired.
E 'L StJO PARLARE, fi '/ 6^/ 01S0,
e le chiome MI PIACQUER si, ch9
io Z' 7»o dindnzi dgli occhi. ( Petr.
c.7.)
CHE TU CON NOI TI RIMAN-
GA per questa sera, N' E CARO.
(Bocc. g. 5. n. 3.)
GUARDATE ME, eke SOtl dl Vistd
priva. (Pign. Fav.)
Le donne, qudndo arrivano a
quardnta dnni, PERDONO IL BEL-
LO dilla gioventudine, e acqui-
stano il billo matrondle. (Lib.
Adorn. Donn.)
AVENDO gid COMPITJTO la J)6lla
ninfa IL stro CANT ARE. (Bocc.
Am.)
A lui si raccomandd, e SIGNI- He recommended himself to
nco IL, F^TTO COME STAVA. him, and declared the fact as it
(Ser. Giov. Fior. Pecor.) was.
And her conversation, and her
beautiful face, and her hair pleas-
ed me so, that I have her before
my eyes.
We should be very glad, if thou
wouldst remain to-night with us.
Look at me, that am deprived
of sight.
Women, when they arrive to
the age of forty, lose the beauty
of youth, and acquire that of ma-
trons.
The beautiful nymph having
finished her singing.
GLI UOMINI SONO DELLE FEM-
MINE CAPO, e senza V or dine loro
rdde volte riesce alcuna nostra
opera a laudevol fine. (Bocc.
Intr.)
IL CAPITANO CADDE, E SCON-
ciossi IL PIEDE in forma, che
non pote stare in piedi. (Matt.
Vill. 9. 11.)
GLI SCOLARI MORIGERATI E The well-behaved and diligent
DILIGENTI STUDIANO. (Cort. Os- scholars study,
serv.)
Men are the head of women,
and without their management it
seldom happens that any under-
taking of ours succeeds well.
The captain fell, and sprained
his foot in such a manner, that he
could stand no more.
IL MAETSTRO PREMIA GLI S COL A-
RI ATTENTI E STUDIOSI. (BuOHl.
Ling. Tosc.)
LA VIRTU DI PAOLO FU debita-
ininte RICONOSCIUTA. (Cavalc.)
Ma la ricordtvol pdtria RICO-
NOSCEVA NE5 DISCENDENTI LA
VIRTU DEL PADRE. (Bott. StOf.
Am. 1. 9.)
The master rewards the atten-
tive and studious scholars.
The virtue of Paul was duly ac-
knowledged.
But the grateful country ac-
knowledged in the descendants the
virtues of their father.
ORDER OF WORDS.
393
LO SCOLARE, IL QUALE, in SUl
fare della ndtte, col suo fdnte,
presso della torretta, NASCOSO
ERA. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 7.)
PietrO AMA ARDENTEMENTE LA
GLORIA. (Cort. Osserv.)
Dl SELVA IN SELVA DAL CRU-
DEL s' INVOLA. (Ariost. Fur. 1.
34.)
V deque pdrlan d' amore, e
r dura, e i rdrni, — E GLI AUGEL-
LETTI, E I PESCI, E I F1ORI, E
ERBA ; — Tutti insieme pre-
gdndo ch' i* sempr* ami. (Petr.
s. 239.)
OlME ! CHE £ £tll!li.O, CHE
TU DI' ? (Bocc. g. 3. n. 1.)
The scholar, who, when it grew
night, had concealed himself, with
his servant, near the small tower.
Peter loves glory ardently.
She flies from wood to wood to
avoid the pursuit of the ferocious
animal.
The waters speak of love, and
the air, and the boughs, and the
little birds, and the fishes, and the
flowers, and the grass ; entreating
all together that I should always
love.
Alas ! what is it you say ?
INVERSE CONSTRUCTION.
With regard to inverse construction no certain rules
can be established, it varying according to the taste and
ear of the speaker or writer. It can only be said, that
in this construction the subjective may be put after the
verb ; as,
chiese i/ IMPERATORE dlla the Emperor asked of the Diet
Dieta tremila cavdllr, three thousand horses ;
presemi allora LA MIA SCOR- then my guide took me by the
TA per mdno, hand.
The objective may be put before the verb ; as,
s^ingcgnano IL LORO TEMPO they endeavour to pass away
di consumdre, their time ;
GRANDI BESTIE hdnno ntf 16- they have large beasts in their
ro boschi, woods.
The adjectives belonging to the subjective or the
objective, may be put before them ; as,
394
SYNTAX.
quantunque fosse TONDO e although he was a. foolish man.
GROSSO
The other words dependent on the subjective or 06-
jective, may also be put before them ; as,
il [DI] cui nowie era Efige- whose name was Ephigenia.
nia,
The adverb may be put before the verb, which it
modifies ; as,
PIETOSAMENTE U chiamdva, she did call him with a lamen-
table voice.
•
The preposition may be put after the ivord, which it
governs ; as,
io TI vend AFPRESSO, I will come after thee.
EXAMPLES.
CHIESE L* IMPERATORE ALLA
DiETA, per tale impresa, TREMI-
LA CAVALLI, e seditimila fanti.
(Mach. lett,)
PRESEMI ALLORA LA MIA SCOR-
TA PER MANO. (Dant. Inf. 13.)
S* INGEGiVANO IL LORO TEMPO
DI CONSUMARE. (Bocc. g. 1. n. 8.)
GRANDI BESTIE HANNO NE' LO-
RD BOSCHI. (Day. Germ.)
QUANTUNQUE FOSSE TONDO E
GROSSO UOMO. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 3.)
IL GUI NOME ERA EriGENIA.
(Bocc. g. 5. n. 1.)
Assdi volte, la notte, PIETOSA-
MENTE IL CHIAMAVA. (BOCC. g.
4. n. 5.)
Or via ! mettiti avanti, io TI
VERRO APPRESSO. (BOCC. g. 2.
n, 5.)
The Emperor asked of the Diet,
for such an undertaking, three
thousand horses, and sixteen thou-
sand foot-soldiers.
Then my guide took me by the
hand.
They endeavour to pass away
their time.
They have large beasts in their
woods.
Although he was a foolish man.
Whose name was Ephigenia.
A great many times, during the
night, did she call him with a la-
mentable voice.
Come ! walk before, I will come
after thee.
ORDER OF WORDS. 395
These inversibns are very common in Italian, and
add great expression and beauty to the phrase ; but in
using them we must always consult euphony. A learner
ought never to avail himself of such liberties, until, by
a competent knowledge of the language, and a long
perusal of the classics, he be able to appreciate their
value and to make use of them with propriety.
EXERCISE XXVII.
Rome was full of funerals, the capitol of victims.
Roma pieno mortorio, campidoglio vitiima.
I routed three legions, and three lieutenants. This house
atterrdre legione, legato. cdsa
is built 1 on I a high situation ; it has gar-
fabbricdre \ in \ emin6ntez sito1 ; — av6re giar-
dens, it has groves, it has plains and hills. The
dino, — bosco, — pianura collina.
conversation of Montanus pleased so- much the sen-
parldre Montana piacere send-
ate, that Elvidius Priscus hoped to be able to
to, Elvidio Prisco sperdre di pot&re ab-
conquer even Marcellus. Many wives have spoiled
bdttere Mar cello. moglie3 l guastdre
(the) their husbands. He made him dress nobly.
marito. — fdre* l vesttre4 nobile3.
Fulvius, who had been consul, and had already I tri-
Fulvio, — — 6ssere console, — — | tri-
umphed over the
onfatore d6*
Gauls, the most illustrious of (the)
Gdllo, illustre
thy followers, was killed by the Patricians in a bath
stgudce, uccidere Padre bdgno
together with a son I of his I as beautiful as innocent.
figliuolo* I — l I — leggiddro innocent^.
396 SYNTAX.
There came a merchant I of Cyprus,
— Venire mercatdnte \ Cipridno,
much beloved
3 amdre4
by him. Thou seest, that it is useless to pray
2. ved6re, inutile — —
and to weep (the praying and the weeping.)
pregdre pidngere.
Nothing else has been left to me of the inherit-
8 — dssere11 — rimanen? 10 * 2 eredi-
ance of (the) my ancestors, except (the) my honor ;
td3 4 56 dvolo1, 12 13 — onestci;
and that I intend I to
2 intendere1 di
guard, and I to I preserve
guarddre, \ di \ servdre
as long as I live (the life will last to me).
— — durdre* l
To be contented (the being contented) I with (the)
essere contento \ di
his own condition, to moderate (the) excessive desires,
proprio stdto, moderdre soverchio2 desiderio1,
not to allow himself neither to be transported 1 by I
lascidre^^ — trasportdre \ ad \
excessive joy in (the) prosperities, nor to be overcome
eccessivo gioia prosperita, — abbdttere
| by (the) misfortunes, form the character of a wise
I in disgrdzia, formdre cardttere sdggio2
man. He could not appease the angry mother with
udrno1. — potereb 4 attutdre6 l irdto2 mddre3
any act of generosity. Plato asserts, that in
niuno — — larghezza. Platone2 "^ - — f
literary disputes (in (the) disputes of (the) letters)
disputazione letter a
it is more useful to be conquered (the being
— utile — — essere
conquered) than to conquer.
mncere mncere.
CONCORDANCE OF WORDS. 397
CHAPTER II.
CONCORDANCE OR AGREEMENT OF WORDS.
CONCORDANCE OF ARTICLES.
ARTICLES agree with nouns, in gender and number ;
as,
iisfratello, LA sorell^ the brother, the sister ;
LI pddn, LE mddrij the fathers, the mothers ;
LA donnA, IL marlto9 the wife, the husband ;
i Jigliuoli, the children.
EXAMPLES.
L* unfratello V altro abbando- One brother abandoned the
ndva,ei*A. SORELLA IL FRATELLO, other, and the sister the brother,
e sptsse volte LA. DONNA IL suo and oftentimes the wife her hus-
MARITO. (Bocc. Intr.) band.
E che maggior cosa £, LI pi- And what is more, the fathers
DRI e JLE MADRI, i FiGi.iuoLi di and the mothers shunned to visit
visit are e di servire schivdvano. and serve their children.
(Bocc. Intr.)
CONCORDANCE OF ADJECTIVES.
Adjectives, as we have already observed at p. 63,
are to agree with their substantives, in gender and num-
ber 5 as,
uomo DOTTO, buonA GENTE, a learned man, good people ;
BELLE donnE, LEGGIADRI fair women, pretty youths*
fanciulli,
34
398 SYNTAX.
Adjectives are also to agree with personal, conjunc-
tive, and relative pronouns^ in gender and number ; as,
10 (fern.) son VIVA, I arn alive ;
voi (masc.) siite LONTANI, you are far ;
vi (fem.) Idscio LIBE.RA di I leave you at the disposal of
Nicoluccio, Nicoluccio ;
per renderci (masc.) FORTI to make us strong and invin-
ed INVINCIBILI, cible ;
qudndo LA videro SOLA, when they saw her alone ;
11 QUALI erano motto LTJNGHI, which were very long.
When two or more substantives singular of the same
gender come together, the adjectives belonging to them
are put in the plural, agreeing with a noun of the same
gender understood ; as,
LICTA e CALLIMACO [quest! Lycias and Callimachus [these
due individui] sono RICCHI, two individuals'] are rich ;
MAIUA e LuciA [queste due Mary and Lucy [these two girls]
fanciiille] sono FOVERE, are poor.
If the substantives are of different genders or different
numbers, the adjectives are put in the plural, agreeing
with a masculine noun understood ; as,
IL PADRE e LA MAD RE del- the father and the mother of
la Lisa, CONTE.NTI, ftcero Lisa, both glad, expressed
grandissimafestaj very great joy ;
LA CORTE TUTTA, I SOVRAjNI the whole COUrt, the SOV6-
sono sommamente CONTEN- reigns are well satisfied.
EXCEPTION.
If, however, one of the substantives is preceded by the preposition
con, ' with,' ' in company with ' ; then the adjective or participle used
as an adjective, may agree either with the other substantive, or with a
noun in the plural understood ; as,
essendosi PIONEO con gli dltri Dioneo and the other youths hav-
giovani MESSD a giucdre, ing set themselves to play ;
esse"ndosi LA DONNA COL GIO- the lady and the young man hav-
VANE POSTI a tdvola, ing sat down to table.
CONCORDANCE OF WORDS.
399
When there are in a phrase several substantives of
different gender and different number, separated from
their adjective by a verb either expressed or understood;
the adjective is put in the plural, agreeing with a mascu-
line noun understood
as,
LE mie CASE ed i LUOGHI
pubblici di Roma, SON PIE-
NI d* antiche immdgini,
IL PADRE di lei e LA MAD RE,
[essendo] DOLOROSI di
questo accidente, V atdvano,
my houses and the public pla-
ces of Rome are filled with
ancient images ;
both her father and her mother,
[being] grieved at this acci-
dent, relieved her.
If several names of inanimate beings occur in the
same phrase, and they are not separated from their'
adjective by a verb ; this adjective agrees with the near-
est noun ;* as,
onori e GLORIA NUOVA,
con bdrba e CRINI BAGNATI,
V una e V ALTRA MAN MOZZA,
new honors and glory ;
with a dripping beard and hair ;
both hands cut off.
The adjective agrees also with the nearest noun,
when there are in the same phrase several substantives,
and the quality expressed by that adjective is affirmed
or denied to belong, successively or alternatively, to
either of them ; as,
Pittro o MARIA £ MORTA, either Peter or Mary is dead ;
ne Francesco, ne GIOVANNI neither Frances nor John has
71071 & PARTITO,
gone ;
un tizzo, un carbone, TJNA a brand, a coal, a spark might
TAVILLA e ATTA ad appic- set fire.
cdrfuoco,
* Contrary to this rule is the following example in Boccaccio:
Se cosi giidato aveste, ella avrebbe cost
L? A'LTRA CO'SCIA, e V tiltro pi& fudr
MANDA'IA. (G. 6. n. 4.)
If you had cried out so, it (the crane)
would have likewise put out the other
leg and the other foot.
400 SYNTAX.
EXCEPTIONS.
An adjective accompanied with a substantive feminine applicable to
a man, is put in the masculine gender ; as,
LA PERSONA qudndo e TRIBOLA- when a person is afflicted ;
TO,
QUELL A BESTIA [di Tofano] era that stupid ass [Tofano] was dis-
pur DISPOSTO, posed.
The adjective mezzo, l half,' when it precedes a substantive, agrees
with it in gender ; but when it follows , it remains invariable ; as,
in sulla MEZZA NOTTE, about midnight;
una libbra e MEZZO di castrone, one pound and a half of mutton ;
ventitre e MEZZO cardti, twenty-three carats and a half.
The adjective salvo, signifying 'except'; remains invariable', as,
SALVO la Mdrca Tnvigidna, except the Trevisan March ;
SALVO quelli delle case eccettu- except those of the families ex-
ate per Ghibellini, ' eluded as Ghibellines.
EXAMPLES.
UOMO DOTTO delle Scritture. A man learned in Holy Writ.
(Cavalc. Att. Apost. 113.)
Ndta di BUONA e virtuosa Born of good and virtuous peo-
(Aiiost. Fur. 18. 82.) pie.
Qvdnte BELLE DONNE, quanti How many fair women, how
LEGGIADRI FANCitiLLi, la s6ra many pretty youths, the coming
vegntnte, nelV dltro mdndo ce- evening, supped in the other
ndrono con li loro passdti! (Bocc. woild with their departed friends !
Intr.) .
Io SON VIVA, la Dio merce. I am alive, thank God.
(Bocc. g. 9. n. 9.)
Considerdndo, che voi SI^TE Considering, that you are far
dalle vostre donne LONTANI. from your wives.
(Bocc. g. 10. n. 9 )
Madonna, omdi da ogni pro- Madam, I free you from all your
messa fdttami io vi assolvo. e LI- promises to me, and I leave you at
BERA vi LASCIO DI NicoLuccio. the disposal of Nicoluccio,
(Bocc. g. 10. n. 4.)
CONCORDANCE OF WORDS.
401
jfcgli mine ad unire la sua pos-
sanza colla ndstra deboltzza, PER
RENDERCI FORTI ED INVIJVClBILI.
(Gang.)
Li quali, QUAIVDO LA VIDERO
SOLA, dissero. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 3.)
Jllessdndro, levdtosi presta-
m6nte, con tutto che i pdnni del
morto avesse inddsso, LI QUALI
EUANO MOLTO LUNGHi,/?wre andd
via altresl. (Bocc. g. 9. n. 1.)
Messer LICIA E CALLIMACO
SON RICCHL (Mach. Com.)
Ma MARIA E LUCIA SONO PO-
VERE. (Mach. Com.)
Perdicone, e 'L PADRE E LA
MADRE BELLA LlSA, ed Hid al-
treSl CONTENTI, GRANDfsSIMA
FESTA FECERO. (BOCC. g. 10.
n.7.)
Dovevate dirmi, che LA CORTE
TUTTA, Che I SOVRANI SONO SOM-
MAMENTE CONTENTI, (Metast.
lett)
ESSENDOSI DlONEO CON GLI AL-
TRI G1OVANI MESSO A GIUCARE.
(Bocc. g. 6. n. 10.)
ESSENDOSI LA DONNA COL GIO-
VANE POSTI A TAVOLA per cendre.
(Bocc. g. 5. n. 10.)
LE MIE CASE ED I LUOGHI PUB-
BLICI DI ROMA SON P1ENI DJ AN-
TICHE IMMAGINI d&* miH mag-
giori. (Bocc. g. 10. n. 8.)
TL PADRE DI LEI E LA MADRE,
DOLOROSI DI QUESTO ACCIDENTE,
in cid che si pvtdva, L,' ATAVANO.
(Bocc. g. 10. n. 7.)
E cosa manifestissima, che 6g-
gi non mine in consulta se ha
a rifiutdre V oocasione d* acqui-
stdre ONORI E GLORIA NUOVA.
(Guicc.)
34*
^He comes to unite his strength
with our weakness, to make us
strong and invincible.
Who, when they saw her alone,
said.
Alexander, getting up quickly,
although he was dressed in the
clothes of the deceased, which
were very long, went away like-
wise.
Messer Lycias and Messer Cal-
limachus are rich.
But Mary and Lucy are poos.
Perdicone, and the father and
the mother of Lisa, and herself, all
glad, expressed great joy.
You ought to have told me, that
the whole court, and the sove-
reigns are well satisfied.
Dioneo and the other youths
having set themselves to play.
The lady and the young man
having sat down to supper.
My houses and the public places
of Rome are filled with ancient im-
ages of my ancestors.
Both her father and her mother,
grieved at that accident, did all in
their power to relieve her.
It is a manifest thing, that none
comes now to a consultation
whether he is to refuse the oppor-
tunity of gaining new honors and
glory.
402
SYNTAX.
V Oceano si far a ddlla destra,
un omaccione CON BARBA E CRI-
NI BAGNATI. (Ann. Car. lett.)
Ed un, che avea L' UNA E
I/ ALTRA MAN MOZZA, DlSSC.
(Daut. Inf. 28.)
PIETRO o MARIA i: MORTA.
(Mach. Com.)
NE FRANCESCA NE GIOVANNI
NON E PARTITO. (Buon. Tanc.)
UN TIZZO, UN CARBONE, UNA
FAVILLA E ATTA AD APPICCAR
FUOCO. (Cavalc.)
LA PERSONA QUANDO E TRIBO-
LATO si dice e pinsa, che Iddw
V dbbia in 6dio. (Fra. Giord.
Pred.)
Li pritghi non giovdvano al-
cuna cosa, perchb QUELLA BES-
TIA ERA PUR D1SPOSTO a VoUfC
(Bocc. g. 7. n. 4.)
VUntene IN SULLA MEZZA
NOTTE. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 7.)
TdgU UNA LIBBRA E MEZZO DI
CASTRONE. (Burch. p. 2. s. 1.)
LA montta di VENTITRE E MEZ-
ZO CARATI,. (Giov. Vill. 1. 8.
c. 58.)
Rendtgli la Signoria di Lorn-
bardia, SALVO LA MARC A TRIVI-
GIANA. (Giov. Viil. 1. 3. c. 5.)
Fecero ordine e decrito, che
ciascuno potesse uscire dal bdndo,
SALVO QUELLI DELLE CASE EC-
CETTUATE PER GHIBELL1NI.
(Giov. Vill. 1. 6.)
As for the Ocean, it is to be
rej resented on the right, as a
large man with a dripping beard
and hair.
And one, who had both hands
cut off, said.
Either Peter or Mary is dead.
Neither Frances nor John has
gone.
A brand, a coal, a spark might
set fire.
When a person is afflicted, peo-
ple say and believe God hates
him.
Entreaties were of no use, be-
cause that stupid ass [Tofano]
was disposed to wish
Come about midnight.
Take a pound and a half of
mutton.
The coins of twenty-three ca-
rats and a half.
He restored to him the Signo-
ry of Lombardy, except the Tre-
visan March.
They ordained and decreed, that
every one could return from ban-
ishment, except those of the fam-
ilies excluded as Ghibellines.
CONCORDANCE OF WORDS.
403
CONCORDANCE OF NUMERAL ADJECTIVES.
Numeral adjectives agree
gender and number ; as,
Plafond vivttte OTTANTUNO
ANNO,
pare descenders dltre NO VAN-
TUNA RUOTA,
it TERZO GIORNO dalV appa-
rizione dti sopradetti se-
gni,
in quei PRIMI GIORNI, vi vo-
id sopra la testa uri> dqui-
with their substantives, in
Plato lived eighty-one years ;
he seems to descend ninety-
one more circles ;
the third day after the appear-
ance of the abovementioned
symptoms ;
in those first days, an eagle
flew over your head.
EXAMPLES.
Jlbbidmo di PLATONE, che es-
80 VIVETTE OTTANTUNO ANJVO.
(Dant. Conv.)
Poi per la medesima via PARE
DESCENDERS ALTRE NOVA^TUNA
RUOTA. (Dant. Conv.)
JVnzi quasi tutti, infra IL TER-
ZO GIORNO DALL' APPARIZIONE
DEI SOPRADETTI SEGN I,m0rivan0.
(Bocc. Intr.)
E Che IX QUEI PRIMI GIORNI,
di sul nwnte dejla Trinity, vi
VOLO SOPRA LA TESTA UN* AQUI-
LA. (Bemb.)
They say that Plato lived eighty-
one years.
Then he seems to descend nine-
ty-one more circles by the same
way.
Nay almost all died the third
day after the appearance of the
abovementioned symptoms.
And that in those first days, on
the mountain of the Trinity, an
eagle flew over your head.
CONCORDANCE OF PRONOUNS.
Adjective pronouns agree with their substantives, in
gender and number 5 as,
teneie QUEST o DEN^RO, take this money ;
404 SYNTAX.
non rimarrebbe a sostentr there would not remain any
NESSUNA PENA, punishment to suffer.
EXCEPTION.
The pronoun tutto, preceded by the preposition per, « through ' ; re-
mains invariable j as,
per TtfTTo Rojna, [through all or] all over Rome ;
per TUTTO la cdsa, all over the house.
Possessive pronouns agree with the thing possessed,
and not with the possessor ; as,
Monna Giovdnna sen9 andd- Monna Giovanna used to go
va con questo suo FI- with this son of hers ;
GLIUOLO,
Fresco aveva una SUA NEPO- Fresco had a niece.
TE,
The relative pronoun quale, c which ' ; agrees with its
antecedent, in gender and number \ as,
quel CUORE, IL QUALE la lie- that heart, which propitious
tafortuna non avea potuto fortune had not been able to
aprire, move.
If the antecedent consists of two .or more nouns of
different gender or number, the relative quale agrees
with the nearest noun ; as,
la virtu e I9 ONORE DEL QUA- the virtue and honor with
LE e dotdta, which she is endowed ;
i QUALI TEMPJ e cappelle ri- which temples and chapels he
empie di paramentij filled with ornaments.
EXAM PLES.
Sig7i6ra, TENETE QUESTO BE- Madam, take this money.
NARO. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 1.)
Che NON RIMARREBBE A sos- That there would not remain
TENER PEN A NEssuNA nel purga- in purgatory any punishment to
torio per gli peccdti. (Pass.) suffer for sins.
CONCORDANCE OF WORDS.
405
Sono stato PER TUTTO ROMA.
— L' ho cercdf.o PER TUTTO LA
cisA. (Salv. Avvert. vol. 1. 1. 3.)
GlOVANNA CON QUESTO
StJO- FIGLIUOLO SEN' ANDAVA. f»
contddo. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 9.)
£7/10, cfte si chiamd FRESCO,
AVEVA UNA SUA NEPOTE. (BoCC.
g. 6. n. 8.)
QUEL CUORE, IL QUALE LA LIE-
TA FORTUNA DI GlllOLAMO NON
AVEA POTUTO APRIRE, la misdria
V aperse. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 8.)
LA VIRTU E L' ONORE DEL
^UALE E DOTATA. (BoCC. g. 5.
n. 6.)
OUre di quest o, f^ce fare altdri
e cappelle splendidissime, i QUALI
TEMPJ E CAPPELLE RIKMPIE DI
PARAMENTI. (Mach. Sior. Flor.
1.7.)
I have been all over Rome. —
I have looked for it all over the
house.
Monna Giovanna used to go
into the country with this son of
hers.
A certain man, called Fresco,
had a niece.
That heart, which the propitious
fortune of Jerome had not been
able to open, was opened by his
misery.
The virtue and honor with which
she is endowed.
Besides that, he caused very
splendid altars and chapels to be
built, which temples and chapels
he filled with ornaments.
CONCORDANCE OF VERBS.
Verbs are to agree with their sutyectives, either ex-
pressed or understood, in number and person ; as,
1O ti CONSOLER6,
v6r non UDISTE,
[io] BRAMO la mdrte,
I will gratify thee ;
you did not hear ;
I desire death.
When the subjective consists of several nouns, which
all concur simultaneously to perf>rm the action of the
verb, the verb agrees with a noun in the plural under-
stood ; as,
CONSIGLIO e RAGIOIVE [qu6- advice and reason [these two
ste cMc cose] coNotfcoNO things] lead to viatory ;
la vittoria,
406
SYNTAX.
CALANDRISO, BRTJNO,^ BUF-
FALMACCO [qu6sti tre sog-
getti] VANNO cercdndo di
trovdr V elitropict,
nt LA SUA PARTITA, 716 LA
St7A LU.NGA DIMORA, 7l£ LA
SVE.NTURATA SUA MORTE,
me V HA N NO POTUTO trdr-
re dal cuore,
Calandrino, Bruno, and Buflfal-
macco [these three persons]
go in search of the helio-
trope ;*
neither his departure, nor his
long absence, nor his la-
mentable death, has been
able to take him out of my
heart.
When there are in a phrase several subjectives, and these are of two
or more different persons ; as, io e tu9 ' I and thou '; tu ed egli, ' thou
and he ' ; £c., the verb agrees with a personal pronoun in the plural
understood.
Thus, if one of the subjectives is io, ll 7; the pronoun understood
with which the verb will agree, is not, l we ' ; if one of the subjectives
is tUj and w is not one of the others, the pronoun understood is voi,
1 you ' ; and if the subjectives are all of the third person, the pronoun
understood is eglino, ellenot or essi, * they ' ; as;t
STECCHI thou on one side and Stecchi on
TU dalV un Idto e
daW dltro [v6i].7wi VERRETE
SOSTENENDO,
come sdi tu, chi MIO MARITO o
io [noi] ci SIAMO ?
the
me
other [you] will support
how dost thou know who my hus-
band and I [we] are ?
EGLI e ELLA [essi] CFNARONO he and she [they] supped on a lit-
un poco di cdrne saldta, tie salt beef;
TU, EGLI, SfRO, e io [noi] PI- thou, he, Cyrus, and I [we] will
GLIERAMO uno per take a man for
vorrei che voi o EGLINO mi DI- I wish that eitfier you or they
CESTE, would tell me.
If the subjective consists of several nouns, and the ac-
tion of the verb can be performed, either -successively or
* A kind of precious stone, which was believod to possess the virtue of render-
ing invisible the persona who carried it about them. — See Dant. Inf. 24 ; Bocc. g. 8.
n. 3j Franc. Sacch. Op. Div. 93.
t There are two examples in Dante in which this rule appears to have been dis-
regarded for the sake of rhyme :
Tdsto che IL DU'CA. ed i'o net leg-no
FU'I. (Daut. Inf 8.)
De> quai n£ i'o, n& IL DU'CA MI'O
s' ACCO'RSE. (Dant. Inf.)
but such licenses are not to be followed.
As soon as my leader and I entered in
the boat ;
Of whom neither I nor my leader was
aware :
CONCORDANCE OF WORDS. 407
alternatively, by either of them, the verb agrees with the
nearest noun \ as,
MUOVASI LA CAPRAIA e la may Capraia and Gorgona rise
Gorgona, from their foundations ;
qudlforluna o DESTINO quag- what fortune or destiny brings
giu ti MENA ? thee here below ?
non Cinna, non SILLA si- neither Cinna nor Sylla ruled
GNOREGGIO lungamente, long.
Sometimes one of the nouns, which form the subjective
of the verb, is a word which in itself includes the signi-
fication of all the others, and then the verb agrees di-
rectly with this word ; as,
nl voi, ne ALTRI mi POTRA neither you nor any other one
piu dire ch? io non V dbbia will be able to tell me any
veduta, longer that I have not seen
it;
ne piopgia'caduta, nk dcqua neither the rain which had fal-
giitdta,n£ ALTRO UMIDORE len, nor the water which
gli SPEGNEVA, they threw on it, nor any
other wet thing extinguished
them.
If the subjective .consists of two nouns, the one of
which is, as it were, a part of the other which expresses
the whole, the verb agrees with the whole, and not with
the part ; as,
la maggidr pdrte dP suoi so- the greater part of his friends
NO mortiy are dead ;
una infinitti di STROMENTI a great number of instruments
FURONO prepardti, were prepared.
Sometimes the noun expressing the whole is under-
stood ; as,
la maggior partita [di indi- the greater part [of the indi-
vidiii] FURONO morti, viduals] were killed.
408 SYNTAX.
When the subjective is a collective noun, the verb is
put in the singular ; * as,
perche QUEL POPOLO E si tm- why is that people so fell ?
pio?
m' APPARI tfNA GENTE rf' <$- a troop of spirits appeared to
nime, rne ;
VENIA MAGGIOR FROTTA di there came a greater crowd of
Romdni, Romans,
If the subjective is a verb used as a noun, or a phrase,
the verb is put in the singular ; as,
IL VOLERE SOTTOMETTERE LE the wish to oppose my strength
Mis FORZE A GROSsisstMi to very heavy burdens is the
PESI, m' E tagione di que- occasion of this weakness.
sta infermitti,
Sometimes the subjective of the verb is represented
by the relative pronoun che, ' who,' ' which ' ; and then
the verb agrees with the noun or pronoun, represented
by che ; either expressed or understood ;f as,
i' son Beatrice che ti FACCIO I am Beatrice, who bids thee
an dare, to go ;
* Instances may be quoted from tho classics, however, in which the verb is put in
the plural ; as,
L'innoche ^UE'LLA GE'NTE all6r CAN- The hymn, whith those people then
TA'RO. (Dant. Purg. 32.) sung.
Potetevedere c6me IL COMU'PTE PO'POLO You may see how ignorant of the true
E'BANO ignordnti del vero Iddio. (Giov. God the common people were.
Vill. 1. 1. c. 26.)
LA SU'A FAMI'GLIA AVE'VANO un di One day his family took a potter for
preso un pentoldio per malleveria. (Nov. bail :
Ant. 83.)
but this usage is carefully avoided by modern writers.
t Examples may be found, nevertheless, in which the verb agrees directly with
the relative pronoun che, without any reference to the noun or pronoun, which it
represenis j as,
J'o son colei, CHE ti Die tdnta guerra, I am she, who caused thee so much
— E COMVIC siia giornala inndnzi aera. trouble, and who closed her day before
(Petr. s. 3b'l.) its evening.
Or sP tu quclla Cor'isca, CHE trad'ito Now art. thou that Corisca, who has
tn' HA in tdntt rn6dil — Corisca son ben betrayed me in so many different ways?
io, — CH' dgli occhi tuoi — Un tempo — I am indeed that Corisca, who was
FU si cdra. (Guar. Past. Fid. 2. 6.) once so dear in your eyes.
CONCORDANCE OF WORDS.
409
io son colui, che TENNI dmbo
le chidvi,
poeta, [tu] che mi GU!DI,
O frdti, [voi] che SIETE
giunti all* occidente,
uno de* sette REGJ, che Assi-
SI^RO Tebe,
uno di QUEGLI, cheil POSERO
in croce.
I am he, who held both the
keys;
poet \ [thou] who art my guide ;
O brothers ! [you] who have
now reached the west ;
one of the seven kings, who be-
sieged Thebes ;
one of those, who put him on
the cross.
EXAMPLES.
IO TI CONSOLERO dl COsl lllHgO
desio. (Bocc. g. 7. n. 7.)
Graziose donne, voi NON UDI-
STE forse mdi dire. (Bocc. g. 3.
n. 10.)
Che per minor martir LA MOR-
TE BRAMO. (Bocc. g. 4. Canz.)
CONSIGLIO E RAGIONE CONDtJ"
CONO LA VITTORIA. (DaV. St.)
CALANDRINO, BRUNO, E BUF-
FALMACCO VANNO CERCANDO DI
TROVAR L' EL1TROPIA, 6 Cdlan-
drino se la crede aver trovdta.
(Bocc. g. 8. n. 3.)
NE LA SUA PARTITA, NE LA
SUA LUNGA DIMORA, NE LA SVEN-
TTJRATA StJA MORTE, ME L' HAN-
NO POTUTO TRARRE DAL CUORE.
(Bocc.)
Tu DALL' UN LATO, E STECCHI
DALL' ALTRO, MI VERRETE sos-
TENENDO. (BOCC. g. 2. D. 1.)
" COME," disse la donna, c< SAI
TU CHI M£O MARITO O IO CI SIA-
MO ? "
EGLI E ELLA CENARONO UN
POCO DI CARNE SALATA. (BOCC.
g. 7. n. 1.) ^
35
I will gratify thee in so long a
desire.
Charming ladies, perhaps you
never heard say.
I desire death to lessen my suf-
ferings.
Advice and reason lead to vic-
tory.
Calandrino, Bruno, and Buffal-
macco go in search of the helio-
trope, and Calandrino believes he
has found it.
Neither his departure, nor his
long absence, nor his lamentable
death, have been able to take him
out of my heart.
Thou on one side, and Stecchi
on the other, will support me.
" How dost thou know," said
the lady, " who my husband and
I are ? "
He and she supped on a little
salt beef.
410
SYNTAX.
Tu, EGH, SlRO, E IO PIGLIE-
REMO TJNO PER ..... (Mach.
Mandrag.)
VORREI CHE VOI O &GL18O MI
DICESTE. (Ben. Varch.)
MUOVASI LA CAPRAIA E LA
GORGONA, — E fdccian siepe ad
A'rno in su la foce. (Dant. Inf.
c. 33.)
QUAL FORTTJJVA O DESTINO, —
A'nzi V ultimo di, QUAGGIU TI
MENA ? (Dant. Inf. 15.)
NON ClNNA, NON SfLLA, 81-
GNOREGGIO LUNGAMENTE. (DaV.
Stor.)
" Fated dipmgere la Cortesia."
— " I'o cela faro dipmgere di
maniira> die mai NE voi, NE
ALTRI, con ragione, MI POTRA
PIU DIRE, CH' 10 NON I/ ABBIA
VEDUTA, ne conosciuta." (Bocc. ,
g. 1. n. 8.)
NE PIOGGIA CADTJTA, iXE AC-
QUA GITTATA, NE ALTRO UMIDO-
RE GLI SPEGWEVA. (Dav. Ann.)
Ciascuna di noi sa che PEJ
SUOI SONO LA MAGGIOR PARTE
MORTI. (Bocc. Intr.)
UNA IJVFINITA DI STROMENTI
da dar martorio FI^RONO PRE-
PARATI. (Fir. As. 71.)
LA MAGGIOR PARTITA FURONO
MORTI e taglidti, e pdrte presi.
(Giov. Vill. 1. 7. c. 19.)
Dimrni, PERCHE Q.UEL POPOLO
i; si EMPIO — Incontr* 6} mici in
ciascuna zua l&gge? (Dant. Inf.
10.)
Da man sinistra M' APPARI
UNA GEXTE D^ ANIME, Che mO-
vieno i pie ver noi. (Dant. Purg.
3.)
Thou, he, Syrus, and I, will
take a man for
I wish that either you or they
would tell me.
May Capraia and Gorgona rise
from their foundations, and dam up
the mouth of Arno.
What fortune or destiny brings
thee here below, before thy last
day?
Neither Cinna, nor Sylla ruled
long.
" Cause Liberality to be- paint-
ed there."- — " I will cause it to
be painted there in such a manner,
that neither you nor any other
one, will be able to tell me any
longer, that I have never seen it,
or known it."
Neither the rain which had fal-
len, nor the water which they
threw on it, nor any other wet
thing extinguished them.
Every one of us knows, that
the greater part of our friends are
dead.
A great number of instruments
of torture were prepared.
The greater part were killed
and cut to pieces, and some taken.
Tell me, why is that people so
fell against my kin in all their
laws ?
On the left hand appeared to
me a troop of spirits, that moved
their steps towards us.
CONCORDANCE OF WORDS.
411
P6lj VENfA MAGGIOR FROTTA
DI ROMANI. (Franc. Sacch. Rim.)
Signor ?nio, IL VOLERE w LE
MIE FORZE SOTTOMETTERE A
GROSSISSIMI FESI M' E CAGIONE
DI QUESTA INFERMITA. (BoCC. g.
10. n. 7.)
I* SON BEATRICE, CHE TI FAC-
cio ANDARE. (Dant. Inf. 2.)
lO SON COLtjI, CHE TENWI AM-
BO LE cHiAvi — Del cuor di Fe-
derigo. (Dant. Inf. 13.)
Ifo comincidi : " POETA, CHE
MI GUIDI, — Gudrda la mia vir-
tu s' eW & possdnte." (Dant. Inf.
2.)
" 0 FRATI," dissi, " CHE per
c6nto milia — Perigli SIETE
GIUNTI ALL' OCCIDENTS." (Dant.
Inf. 26.)
Dicendo : " Qu&l fu I9 UN DE'
SETTE REGI, — CH' ASSISER TE-
BE." (Dant. Inf. 14,)
Se tu fossi stdto TJNO DI QUE-
GLI, CHE IL POSERO IN CROCE.
(Bocc. g. 1. n. 1.)
Then, there came a greater crowd
of Romans.
My lord, the wish to oppose my
strength to very heavy burdens is
the occasion of this weakness.
I am Beatrice, who bids thee
to go.
I am he, who held both the keys
of the heart of Frederick.
I began : " Poet ! thou who art
my guide, consider well if there is
sufficient virtue in me."
" O brothers ! " said I, " who
through perils without number
have now reached the west."
Saying : " That was one of
the seven kings, who besieged
Thebes."
If thou had been one of those,
who put him on the cross.
CONCORDANCE OF PARTICIPLES.
Participles, a& it has been already mentioned p. 345,
when used as adjectives, agree with substantives in gen-
der and number, and follow in this respect the rules
already given with regard to the concordance of that part
of speech ; as,
LEI, in vdno merci ADDO- he killed her, while begging
MANDANTE, uf else, in vain for mercy ;
dlle DONNE ASPETTANTI si he addressed himself to the la-
rivolse, dies [who were] waiting ;
412
SYNTAX.
il cavaliere, UDITA LA DO-
MANDA € LA PROFERTA,
propose,
poiche il giardino, e LA
CAS A di Messer Neri ebbe
VEDUTA,
le DONNE e I CAVALIERI fid
paldgio RADUNATI,
L' ANELLA € LA CORONA
AVUTE dal nuovo sposo,
IL RE C(5' SUOI COMPAGNI
RIMONTATI a cavdllo,
the gentleman, having heard
the request and the proposal,
resolved ;
after having viewed the gar-
den and the house of Messer
Neri ;
the ladies and gentlemen [that
had] collected in the palace ;
the rings and the garland,
[which she had] received
from her new husband :
the king with his attendants
having mounted their horses.
[For Rules how to determine when Participles are used as adjectives and when not, ice
CHAPTER on PARTICIPLES.]
EXAMPLES.
Folco, da dolor vinto, tirdta
fitori iina spdda, LEI, IN VANO
MERGE ADDOMANDANTE, TJCCISE.
(Bocc. g. 4. n. 3.)
DONNE ASPETTANTI si
RIVOLSE, e dissc. (Bocc. g. 9.
n. 10.)
IL CAVALIERE, UDITA LA DO-
MANDA E LA PROFERTA dilld
donna, seco PROPOSE. (Bocc. g.
10. n. 5.)
n qudle, POICHE IL GIARDIN
tuttO, E LA CASA DI MESSER NE-
RI EBBE VEDtJTA. (BOCC. g. 10.
n. 6.)
E sentdndo LE DONNE E' CAVA-
LIERI NEL PALAGIO del COnte RA-
DUNATI. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 9.)
La donna e L' ANELLA E LA
CORONA AVtJTE DAL NUOVO SPOSO
quwi lascid. (Bocc. g. 10. n. 9.)
IL RE CO* SUOI COMPAGNI, RI-
MONTATI A CAVALLO, al redle
ostidre se ne torndrono. Bocc.
g.lO.n. 6.)
Folco, overcome by grief, hav-
ing drawn a sword, killed her while
begging in vain for mercy.
He addressed himself to the
ladies who were waiting, and said.
The gentleman, having heard
the request and the proposal of
the lady, resolved.
Who, after having viewed the
garden and the house of Messer
Neri.
And hearing that the ladies and
gentlemen had collected in the
palace of the count.
The lady left there the rings
and the garland which she had
received from her new husband.
The king with his attendants,
having mounted their horses, re-
turned to the royal palace.
CONCORDANCE OF WORDS. 413
EXERCISE XXVIII.
Then that magnanifnous Pompey, who (the which)
magndnimo Pompeo, —
boasted (himself) continually, that where he I struck
vantdre2 l contmuo, \percuotesse
the earth with (the) his foot (the) entire legions
tdrra — pid 4 intiero^ legione9
would come out
sar6bbero2 usctie3
from it I , fled not only from
nel \jfuggire
Rome, but from (the) Italy also. He is of a won-
— Itdlia — . mara*
derful agreeableness _and (of a wonderful) vivacity.
viglioso6 piacevoUzza1 2 '3 4 brio5.
And the preparation, and the joy, and the other
appar&cchio, allegrezzay dltro
things were described to-him beyond (of) the truth.
cosa 2 dipingere3 1 maggiore vero.
(The) my guide and I descended the mountain.
— duca scendere m6nte.
The greatest part of (the) men are ambitious. He
maggior pdrte uomo ambizioso.
commanded that all (the) his family should appear
Comanddre tutto famigUa venire2
before him. Know, that I am Bertrand de Born,
l. Sapere, Bertram dal Bornio,
he who gave (to the) King John the mischievous
ddre re Giovdnni mdlo
counsels. The filial respect and (the filial) love.
conforto. l filidle6 riverenza2 34 — amor5.
Great,* small,* rich,* and poor,* no one can escape
Grande, piccolo2 ricco,1 povero, ne.ssuno potere sottrdrre^
(himself to the) death. Many were accused this year.
morte. Molto 3 accusdre* l anno2.
Great, small, rich, poor, are here used in the plural number.
35*
414 SYNTAX.
And she embracing (the) her infant. I have looked
abbraccidre figliuolo. cercdre
all over the street. Callimachus and Ligurius have
tutto* per1 strdda. Callimaco Ligurio
told me, that the doctor and the ladies are coming
dire3 19 dottore donna venire
to (the) church. Neither thou nor I am rich. I
chiesa. ricco.
am the ghost of Capocchio, who falsified (the) metals
ombra , falsdre metdllo
I by the power of alchemy. He I fell in love I
con
alchimia. — s' innamoro4
I with I a noble-lady, held in (the) his time * for
I J9'1 I 2 gentildonna* tenere8 6 tempo7 —
one of the most beautiful, and of the most amiable
b6lla, leggiddra
that were in Florence. Pride, envy, and avarice
3 1 Firdnze2. Superbia, invidia, avarizia
are the three sparks, which have inflamed all
favilla, accendere3 —
(the) hearts. I saw a man, who had both (the)
1 cuore2. — Vedere uomo, dtnbo
his hands cut-off, and another who had (the) his
— mdno mozzo, 23 —
throat pierced. For (the) which, reasons, (the) our
gola* fordto1. cosa,
supper having been disturbed, I not only have not
etna — sturbdrej
eat it, but not even (have) tasted it. Nor
trangugidre* 2, 32 assaggidre* l.
the excessive maternal pity and joy permitted it.
soprabbonddnte materna4 pieta1 2 allegrezza3 permtttere6 5.
* Time, in the plural.
GOVERNMENT OF WORDS. 415
CHAPTER III.
REGIMEN OR GOVERNMENT OF WORDS.
REGIMEN OF SUBSTANTIVES.
A substantive may be dependent on, or in relation
with, another substantive ; and this dependence or rela-
tion, which may be expressed in different manners,
forms what is called the regimen or the complement of
the signification of substantives.
When of two substantive nouns the second, which is
dependent on the first, conveys an idea of possession,
extraction, or qualification, (as when it expresses prop-
erty ; paternity, or filiation; the material, the place, or
the quantity of a thing ; a family name ; or similar cir-
cumstances ;) it requires to be preceded by the preposi-
tion di ; as,
V occhio DEL CUORE, the eye of the heart ;
gli dnni dtlla Incarnazione the years of the Incarnation of
del Figliuolo DI Dio, the Son of God ;
vergogna e mddre DI ONESTA, shame is the mother of modes-
ty ;
unafontana DI MARMO bian- a fountain of very white mar-
chissimo, ble ;
Certdldo e un casttllo DI Certaldo is a castle of Valdel-
VALDELSA* sa ;
torchietti DI LIBBRA, e tor- wax-tapers of a pound, and
chittti DI M,EZZA LIBBRA, wax-tapers of half a pound
each;
fu salvdto da certi di cdsa he was saved by some people
DE' BARDI, belonging to the house of
the Bardi.
416 SYNTAX.
There are some adjective pronouns, which when used substantively
follow the same rule ; as,
factva un POCO DI BANCO, he kept a little bank;
spalancdndo TANTO DI GOLA, opening his throat [rnouth] wide.
The preposition di is often elegantly suppressed after the word cdsa
followed by a family name ; as,
in CAS A [di] Messdr GUASPAR- in the house of Messer Guaspar-
RINO, ririo ;
me ASA [de] gli ALBIZZI, in the house of the AlbiSzi.
When the second substantive expresses the form or
similitude of the first, it requires to be preceded by the
preposition a ; as,
dtnti A BiscHERi, teeth like pegs ;
berettdccia A GRONDA, a cap like the ' eaves of a
house ;
bdrba A LUCIGNOLI, a heard like two wicks of a
candle.
When the second substantive expresses suitableness,
convenience, or derivation as to one's country,* it re-
quires to be preceded by the preposition da ; as,
etcL DA MARITO, an age suitable for marriage ;
tempo DA CONFORTO, time of consolation ;
Guidotto DA CREMdNA, Guidotto of Cremona ;
Giacomin DA PAviA, James of Pavia.
* Thte is limited, however, to the case when the substantive is a proper name of
a city, town, village, or castle ; for, when the substantive is a proper name of a king-
dom, province, or island, it is always preceded by the preposition di ; as,
Disse il mdnaco : " Fo s6no anche m6r- The monk replied ; " I am dead also,
to, efui DI SABDIGNA.." (Bocc. g. 3. n. 8.) and I was of Sardinia."
Instances are also met with amongst the classics, in which the preposition di is
used even in the case when, according to the rule, da ought to be used j as,
Lo pr'tmo Podestd flie Messer Pazzino The first Podesta was Messor Pazzino
d& Pdzzi DI FIRE'NZE. (Stor. Pist. 50.) de' Pazzi of Florence.
Cdlla forza de> detti Ors'ini DI RdMA. With the assistance of the said Orsini
(Gio. Vill. 1. 9. c. 39.) of Rome.
n Signtir Oismdndo Malatesta DI Ri- Gismondo Malatesta of Rimini.
MINI. (Car. lett. 3.)
GOVERNMENT OF WORDS.
417
EXAMPLES.
L' amore private chiude LS 6c-
CHIO DEL CUORE. (Amm. Ant. d.
5. r. 3.)
Gid irano GLI ANNI BELLA
frultifera INCARNAZIONE DEL Fi-
GLIUOLO DI Dio al nitmero per-
venuti di 1348. (Bocc. Intr.)
VERGOGNTA 35; MADRE DI ONE-
STA, e maestro, d1 innocenza.
(Amm. Ant. d. 5. r. 7.)
Nel mezzo del qudl prdto era
UJVA FONTANA DI MARMO BIAN-
CHISSIMO. (Bocc. g. 3. Intr.)
CERTALDO E UN CASTELLO DI
VALDELSA, il qudle quantunque
picciol sittj gid di molti uomini ed
agidti fu abitdto. (Bocc. g. 7.
n. 10.)
Una grand9 area tutta fornita
di TORCHIETTI DI L1BBRA, E la
chiesa e le cappelle d' intorno
piene di TORCHIETTI DI MEZZA
LissRA, e spesso di que* DI LIB-
BRA. (Borgh. Arm. Fam. 23.)
Fu scampdto e SALVATO DA
CKRTI DI CASA DEJ BARDI. (Gio.
Vill. 1. 12. c. 17.)
VI era, un certo Ludovico, il
qudle avea di molti dandriy e
FACEVA UN POCO DI BANCO.
(Firenz. As. d' Or.)
E SPALANCANDO p6i TANTO DI
GOLA. (Lip. Malm. 7. 85.)
Stettero piit dnni i due giovani
IN CASA MESSER GUASPARRINO.
(Bocc. g. 2. n. 6.)
Con grdnde paura e pericolo
si fuggl IN CASA GLI ALBIZZI.
(Gio. Vill. 1. 12. c. 17.)
Selfishness shuts the eye of the
heart.
The years of the fruitful Incar-
nation of the Son of God had
reached the numher of 1348.
Shame is the mother of modesty,
and the mistress of innocence.
In the middle of which field
there was a fountain of very white
marble.
Certaldo is a castle of Valdelsa,
which, although small, was for-
merly inhabited by many and
wealthy people.
A great coffin surrounded with
wax tapers of a pound, and the
church and the chapels full of
wax-tapers of half a pound, and
often of some of a pound each.
He was rescued and saved by
certain people belonging to the
house of the Bardi.
There was a certain Ludovico,
who had a great deal of money,
and kept a little bank.
And opening his mouth wide.
The two youths remained for
several years in the house of Mes-
ser Guasparrino.
In great fear and danger he took
refuge in the house of the Albizzi.
418
SYNTAX.
Con qudi suoi DEXTI A BIS-
CHERI. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 2.)
Con qMla BERETTACCIA A
GRONDA, e con quella BARBA A
LUCIGNOLI. (Buon. Fier. 2. 3.)
Essdndo ella gib di ETA DA
MARITO. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 4.)
La donna a cut piit TEMPO DA
CONFORTO, che DA ripreiisione
par£a. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 8.)
GTJIDOTTO DA CREMONA Idscia
a 'GiAcoMiN DA PAVIA itna sua
fanciuUa. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 5.)
With those teeth of his like
pegs.
With that cap of his like the
eaves of a house, and that beard
like two wicks of a candle.
age
She being already of an
suitable for marriage.
The lady to whom this appeared
more a time of consolation, than of
reprehension.
Guidotto of Cremona leaves a
daughter of his to James of Pavia.
REGIMEN OF ADJECTIVES.
The regimen or complement of adjectives is generally
a substantive, a pronoun, a verb, or a phrase preceded
by a preposition.
Adjectives signifying knowledge or ignorance, praise
or blame, possession or privation, abundance or scarcity,
require that their complement be preceded by the prepo-
sition di; as,
learned in the Scriptures ;
very ignorant of medicine ;
dotto DE#e SCRITTTJRE,
ignorantissimi DE//« MEDICI-
NA,
giovine DI ETA, bellissima of youthful age, of very beau-
DI FORMA, chidra DI sA^- tiful form, and of distinguish-
GUE € DI COSTUMI,
prdde DE//C ARMF, ma DE'
, COSTUMI vizioso,
abbonddnte DI GRANO, DI 6R-
ZO, DI BESTIAME, € DI
PESCI,
ed birth and manners ;
brave in arms, but of vicious
habits ;
abundant in grain, barley, cat-
tle, and fish.
Adjectives signifying similitude, inclination, suitable-
ness, advantage, tendency, or thereon trary, require their
complement to be preceded by the preposition a ; as,
GOVERNMENT OF WORDS.
419
the beard like his locks ;
things more becoming to
drunkards, than to sober la-
dies ;
provinces addicted to arms ;
nothing is so unfavorable to a
speaker ;
odious to men of wicked habits.
la bdrba A' suoi CAPEGLI
simiglidnte,
cdse piu dtte A' BEVITORI,
die klle SOBRIE DONNE,
province dedite ALLE ARMI,
niuna cosa e cosl contrdria
AL DICITORE,
grave AGLI UOMINI di perver-
si costumi,
Jldjectives signifying departure, distance, separation,
equire that their complement should be preceded by the
Deposition da ; as,
esuli vLlle LORO PATRIE, exiles from their countries ;
/e' disgiunto DA//' ANIMO il made the soul disjoined from
passibile intelletto, his passive intellect ;
una navicella di pescatori a small fishing boat distant
separata vLW ALTRE NA- from the other vessels.
Some adjectives, as contento, ' contented,' ' satisfied ' ;
presto, 'prompt,' ; ready '; acconcio, ' disposed,' fi in-
clined ' ; may have a complement preceded by either the
Deposition di or a; as,
CONTENTO DI QUELLO, che content with what was given
glieraddto, to him ;
state CONTENTI fdla VOLON- be satisfied with the will of
TA di Dio, God ;
PRESTA DI FARE FESTA al prompt to greet his fellow-
suo cittadino, citizen ;
PRESTI A MORDERE ogui ready to slander every praise-
laudevol cosa, worthy thing ;
sono ACCONCIA D' IMPEGNAR I am disposed to pav^ these
queste robe, garments ;
piit, ACCONCIA A CREDERE il more inclined to believe the
male, evil.
420
SYNTAX.
EXAMPLES.
Essindo mdlto DOTTO DELLE
ScRiTTURE,ed ammaestrdto della
fede di Cristo. (Cav. At. ap. 113.)
Molti vi sono DELLA MEDIC IN A
IGNORANTISSIMI. (Lib. Cur. mal.)
U'na di loro DI ETA GIOVINE,
DI FORMA BELLISSIMA, CH1ARA
DI SANGUE E DI COSTtJMI. (BOCC,
Fiam. 1. 1.)
Cavaliere PRODE DELLE ARMI,
MA DE' COSTTJMI vizioso. (Pass.
Spec. Ver. Penit.)
Hpa6se k, grandissimo, e molto
ABBONDANTE DI GRANO, DI OR-
ZO, DI BESTIAME, E DI PESCI.
(Giamb. 1. 5.)
Lunga LA BARB A, e di pel
bidnco mista, — Portdva, A' suoi
CAPEGLI SIMIGLIANTE. (Dant.
Pur. 1.)
COSE PIU ATTE A' BEVITORI
CHE ALLE SOBRIE ed Gn6ste DON-
NE. (Bocc. Intr.)
PROVINCE naturalmdnte DE-
DITE ALLE ARMI. (Giatllb. 1. 3.)
NlTJNA COSA E COS1 CONTRARIA
AL DICITORE, come il manifesto
acconciamento. (Amm. Ant. d.
11. r. 3.)
La vita d6* buoni & s&mpre
GRAVE AGLI UOMINI DI PERVERSI
COSTUMI. (Amm. Ant. d. 14.
r. I.)
Coloro, che sono ESULI DALLE
LORO PATRIE, desiderano di tor-
ndrvi. (Fra Giord. Prei!.)
Siccht, per sua dottrma, FE'
DISGITJNTO — DALL' ANIMO IL
PASSIBILE INTELLETTO. (Dant.
Pur. 25.)
Being very learned in the Scrip-
tures, and well instructed in the
Christian faith.
There are many very ignorant
of medicine.
One of them of youthful age, of
most beautiful form, and of distin-
guished birth and manners.
A cavalier bfave in arms, but of
vicious habits.
The country is very vast, and
very abundant in grain, barley,
cattle, and fish.
His beard, mixed with hoary
white, like his locks, descended
low down.
Things more becoming to drunk-
ards, than to sober and modest la-
dies.
Provinces naturally addicted to
arms.
Nothing is so unfavorable to a
speaker as the evident dressing up
of language.
The life of the good is always
odious to men of wicked habits.
Those, who are exiles from their
countries, are desirous to return
there.
So that, by his wisdom, he made
the soul disjoined from his passive
intellect
GOVERNMENT OF WORDS. 421
Trovd per avventiira, alquanto He found by chance, a small
SEPA«RATA DALLE ALTRE NAVI, fishing boat somewhat distant from
UNA NAVICELLA Di PESCATORi. the other vessels.
(Bocc. g. 5. n. 2.)
CONTENTO DI DUELLO, CHE DA- Content with what was given
TO GI.I ERA, piu non chiedea. to him, he asked no more.
(Vit. S. Ant.)
E perb, padre e mddre mia, Therefore, my parents, be satis-
STATE CONTENTI ALLA VOLONTA. fied With the will of God.
DI Dio. (Vit. S. Gio. Batt.)
Quell9 anima gentil fu cosl That gentle spirit was so prompt
PRESTA — Di FARE AL ciTTADfN to greet there his fellow-citizen,
suo quivi FESTA. (Dant. Pur. 6.)
Dar matiria dgV innidiosi, To give occasion to envious per-
PRESTI A MORDERE OGNi LAU- sons, ready to slander every praise-
DEVOL COSA. (Bocc. Intr.) worthy thing.
Per me soisro ACCONCIA D' IM- As for me, I am disposed to
PEGNAR per te QUESTE ROBE, pawn for thee these garments.
(Bocc. g. 8. n. 10.)
Let gknte & PIU ACCONCIA A People are more inclined to be-
CREDERE IL MALE, che il bene. lieve the evil, than the good.
(Bocc. g. 3. n. 6.)
REGIMEN OF VERBS.
Verbs may govern, or have for a complement, a noun,
a pronoun, another verb, or a phrase.
The nouns and pronouns governed by the verb may
be in the subjective, in the objective, or in any other re-
lation preceded by a preposition.
The verbs governed by another verb may be in the
indicative, in the conjunctive, or in the infinitive mood,
either in the objective or in any other relation, except
the subjective, preceded by a preposition.
The verb essere governs a noun in the subjective, and
is consequently construed with two subjectives, called, the
36
422 SYNTAX.
one, the subjective before, and, the other, the subjective
after ', the verb ; as,
io sono LA SVENTURATA I am the unfortunate Ginevra :
GlNEVRA,
i veri amici sono TJ.NA COSA true friends are one thing
insieme, together.
Active verbs govern a noun or a pronoun in the objec-
tive ; as,
io ho amdto ed dmo GUIS- I have loved and love Guis-
CARDO, card ;
m6lti sdnno MOLTE COSE, e many know many things, and
non sdnno SE MEDESIMI, do not know themselves.
Many active verbs, besides having a noun or a pronoun
in the objective, or, what is the same, a direct regimen,
may govern a noun or a pronoun in any other relation,
except the subjective, preceded by a preposition, and
thus have also an indirect regimen ; as,
io non la vendei LORO, ma I did not sell it to them, but
tssi ME L' avrdnno imbold- they must have stolen it
ta, from me ;
per premidre il cavaliere in order to reward the gentle-
DELL' ONORE riceviito, man for the honor received ;
s£ AD OGNI suo sERvicio of- he -offered himself to serve her
ftrse, in every thing;
5' ingegno di rivolgerla DA he endeavoured to dissuade her
PROPOJS JMENTO sijitro, from so cruel a proposal.
Passive verbs govern a noun or a pronoun in the re-
lation of derivation preceded by the preposition da ; as,
tgli DA ME tra egualmente he was equally loved by me ;
amdto,
Efigenia DA MOLTE NOBILI Iphigenia was received by
DONNE di Rodifu ricevuta, many noble ladies of Rhodes.
GOVERNMENT (fr WORDS. 423
Sometimes instead of da we find the preposition per used by good
writers ; as,
la piu bdlla cosa, che giammdi the handsomest object that was
PER ALCTJNO veduta fosse, ever seen by anybody ;
PER FALSA LODE di stollo essere to be deceived by the false praise
inganndto, of fools.
Neuter verbs, strictly speaking, have no regimen; but
as some of them are often used, in Italian, actively, they
follow, when so used, the same rules as q%
as,
cendrono UN POCO ui CARNE
SAl/ATAj
quantunque Jlmore i LIETI although iX^e Dwells ' nJ
PALAGI, piu vo'entieri che willingly nK gaiy palaces,
LE POVERE c APANNE, a6z7i, than in poor cottages.
Pronominal verbs govern the pronouns mi, ti, ci, vi,
si, with which they are varied, in the objective ; as,
io MI levdi diritta, I stood up ;
lo scoldre s' esercitdva, the scholar took exercise.
Many pronominal verbs, besides the above, which is
their direct regimen, may have an indirect regimen, or,
what is the same, may also govern a noun in any other
relation, but the subjective, preceded by a preposition ;
as,
?- attristi BELLA M!A DIMO- thou grievest for my^stay ;
RA,
la cittci, 5' arrendeo A CE- the city surrendered to Caesar.
SAKE,
Unipersonal verbs, generally, have no regimen ; there
are instances, however, in which some of them govern
424
SYNTAX.
a word in the relation of attribution, preceded by the
preposition a ; as,
come accdde A' BUONI, cosi
accdde A' CATTIVI,
questa novella, la qudle A ME
tocca di dover dire,
as it befalls good people, so it
befalls bad people ;
this novel, which I am to re-
late.
EXAMPLES.
Signor nrio, 10 SONO LA misera Sir, I am tbe unfortunate, wretch-
SVENTURATA GINEVRA. (Bocc. ed Ginevra.
g. 5. n. 9.)
I VERI AMfci SONO "UNA COSA
INSIEME. (Am. Ant. d, 18. r. 1.)
lO HO AMATO ED AMO GuiS-
CARDO, e quanta viverd io V ame-
rd. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 1.)
MOLTI MOLTE COSE SANNO, SE
TOEDESIMI NON SANNO. (Am, Ant.
d. 5. r. 3.)
lO NON LA VENDEI LORD, MA
ESSI questa ndtte ME L* AVRANNO
IMBOLATA. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 10.)
PER PREMIARE IL CAVALIERE
DELL' ONORE RICEVUTO da lui.
(Bocc. g. 10. n. 6.)
Soddisfece alia sua domdnda,
€ SE AD OGNI SIJO SERVIGIO OF-
FERSE. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 3.)
Con parole assdi s' INGEGNO
DI RIVOLGERLA DA PROPONIMEN-
TO si FIERO. (Bocc. g, 2. n. 6.)
COSI EGLI DA ME ERA EGUAL-
MENTE AMATO, com' 6gli me amd-
va. (Bocc. Fiam. 1. 6.)
EFIGENIA DA MOLTE NOBILI
DONNE DI RODI FU RICEVtJTA.
(Bocc. g. 5. n, 1.)
Costei esser LA PIU BELLA
COSA, CHE GIAMMAI PER ALCUNO
VEDUTA FOSSE. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 1.)
True friends are one thing to-
gether.
I have loved and love Guiscard,
and I shall love him as long as I
live.
Many know many things, and do
not know themselves.
I did not sell it to them, but
they must have stolen it from me
last night
In order to reward the gentle-
man for the honor he had received
of him.
He complied with her request,
and offered himself to serve her in
every thing.
With a great many words he
endeavoured to dissuade her from
so cruel a proposal.
So he was equally loved by me,
as he loved me.
Iphigenia was received by many
noble ladies of Rhodes.
She was the handsomest object
that was ever seen by anybody.
GOVERNMENT OF WORDS.
425
MtgUo b 6sser corritto dal sa-
VIO, Che PER FALSA LODE DI STOL-
TOESSER INGANNATO. (Am HI. Ant.
d. 3. r. 6.)
CENARONO UN poco DI CARNE
SALATA. (Bocc. g. 7. n. 1.) ,
QUANTUNQUE AMORE i LIETJU
PALAGI e le morbid? cdmere, PIU
VOLENT1ERI CHE LE POVERE CA-
PANNE, ABIT*. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 10.)
fo MI LEVAI DIRITTA. (BOCC.
g. 7. n. 6.)
Lo SCOLARE S' ESERCITAVA
per riscalddrsi. (Bocc. g. 8. n.
*•>:
. DELLA MIA lunga DIMORA
T* ATTRISTI. (BOCC. g. 4. D. 5.)
S* ARRENDEO LA CITTA A Cfi-
BARE. (Gio. Vill.)
COME ACCADE A' BUONI, cosi,
fratttlo, mi pare che accdggia
A' CATTIVI. (Fra. Guitt. lett.)
QUESTA NOVELLA, LA QUALE A
ME TOCCA DI DOVER DIRE, VOgllO
ve ne renda ammaestrdle. (Bocc.
g. 1. h. 10.)
It is better to be corrected by
the wise, than to be deceived by
the false praise of fools.
They supped on a little salt
meat.
Although Love dwells in gay
palaces and sumptuous apartments,
more willingly than in poor cot-
tages.
I stood up.
The scholar took exercise to get
warm.
Thou grievest for my long stay.
The city surrendered to Caesar.
Brother, I think that as it befalls
good people, so it befalls bad peo-
ple.
I wi«h, that the novel, which I
am to relate, may make you wise.
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS - Continued.
A verb governs another verb that depends upon it, in
the infinitive mood, whenever the subject of the princi-
pal (governing) verb is the same with that of the rfe-
pendent (governed) verb ; as in the following example
of Boccaccio, Proem. :
assai manifestamMe pdsso I can easily believe, that that
coMPRENDERE,<?we//oesser is really true, which wise
men are wont to say, name-
ly, that poverty alone is not
envied ;
o, che SOGLIONO i SAVJ
DIRE, CHE SOLO LA MisE-
RIA e senza invidia,
where posso and sogliono govern comprendtre and dire
426 SYNTAX.
in the infinitive ; because, in the first instance, io, which
is understood, is the subject of posso and at the same
time of comprendere, that depends upon it ; and in the
last, savj is the subject of sogliono as well as of dire,
that depends upon it.
The infinitives, depending on another verb which
governs them, may be either in the objective, as in the
foregoing example ; or in any other relation, except the
^subjective, preceded by a preposition ; as,
niga D' AVER RICEVTJTO il he denies to have received the
beneficio, benefit ;
dobbidmo impardre A TACE- we must learn how to keep
RE, silent.
If the subjects of the two verbs be different, then the
principal verb governs the dependent verb in a tense of
the indicative or conjunctive mood, preceded by the con-
junction che ; as,
so io bene, CHE EGLI ne I know well, that he carried
PORTO (ind.) V dnima mia, away my soul ;
io CREDO, CHE LE SUCRE I think, that the nuns are
SIENO (conj.) a dormire, asleep.
By a peculiarity of language the conjunction che is sometimes sup-
pressed ; as,
credo, [che] egli se n9 ANDO I believe that he went away.
(ind.),
tem6ndo [che] non gli ATVE- fearing lest it should happen to
NISSE (conj.), him.
The dependent verb is put in the indicative, when
the principal verb implies affirmation, knowledge, or
certainty of action ; as.
vi DICO, ck* egli E morto, I tell you, that he is dead ;
so ch* tgli E cost, I know that it is so ;
egli STA Mne, s6lvo che gU he is well, except that he has
DUOLE il cdpo, the headache.
GOVERNMENT OF WORDS.
427
The dependent verb is put in the conjunctive, when
the principal verb implies will, desire, entreaty, com-
mand, hope, fear, pleasure, displeasure, permission, pro-
hibition, negation, shame, blame, adulation, wonder,
surprise, supposition, conjecture, judgment, belief, ques-
tion, doubt, ignorance, uncertainty, or future action ;
as,
io vo' che SAPPI,
I wish thatthou shouldst know ;
che SIA posto in I desire that it should be put
in execution ;
she begged him to come ;
he ordered one of his domes-
tics to bring him into his
house ;
dost thou hope [or believe]
that Nicostratus would ob-
serve loyalty ?
I fear that excessive grief
will destroy the heart;
esecuzidne,
PREGAVA che ne
COMANDO ad un de' suoi
famiglidri che nella sua
cdsa il MENASSE, *
SPERI tu che Nicostrato AN-
DASSE la lealtti ritrovdn-
rfo?
TEMO [che] il soverchio af-
fdnno non DISTRUGGA il
cor,
DISPIACQUE lorOj che i Peru-
gini AVESSERO roita la
lega,
SUPPONGASI che Juppiter si A
dnimo di qutsto mondo,
quello che V dnimo GIUDICA
che SIA benfdtto,
CREDO [che] mi PORTASSE
amore,
DOMANDAVA, che db FOSSE,
non so che mene PEN si, o che
mi DICA,
it displeased them, that the
Perugians should have brok-
en the league ;
let us suppose that Jupiter be
the soul of this world ;
that which the soul judges to
be well done ;
I believe that he loved me ;
he asked, what that was;
I know not what to think, or
what to say.
The verb is put in the conjunctive, when it is depend-
ent upon a unipersonal verb, such as sembrdre, £to seern ';
parere, 6 to appear ' ; mostrare, ' to show ' ; bisognare,
i must ' or c to be obliged ' ; &tc. ; as,
SEMBRAVA, che AVESSE it appeared to me as if he had
voglia di ridere,
a wish to laugh ;
428
SYNTAX.
e' PAR che tu si A morto,
che.Roma si REG-
GESSE a signoria di re,
BISOGNAVA Che PART1SSE
V indomdni,
it seems as if thou wert
dead;
it shows that Rome was under
the government of kings ;
it was necessary that he should
set out the next morning-.
The dependent verb is put -in the conjunctive, when
preceded by a comparative or a superlative ; as,
costei fu dal padre
AM AT A, QUAKTO
figliuola da padre FOSSE
giammdi,
tra IL PIU SAVIO ed IL PIU
AWEDUTO uomOj che al
mondo FOSSE,
this young woman was as dear
to her father, as any other
child ever was to a parent ;
%
he was the wisest and the
most prudent man that there
ever was in the world.
quivi non bra CHI le smarrite
forze RIVOCASSE,
dicendoli QUALE VOLESSE,
The dependent verb is likewise put in the conjunctive
when it is preceded by the relative pronouns, chi, 'who';
and qualej 6 which,' ' what ' ; as,
there was no one there who
could restore to her her lost
spirits ;
asking him which he would
prefer.
The verb is also put in the conjunctive after the
conjunction se, 'if';* the adverb quando, used in the
signification of ' if,' ' provided ' ; and the adverbs ove,
dove, both in the signification of ' if,' ' when,' ' in case
that,' and in their proper signification of ( where ' ;
as,
SE rf' esser mentovato laggiu if thou dost not disdain to be
mentioned there below ;
* Instances arc, nevertheless; to be found, in which the verb is put in the indicative
after se ; as,
JVbn so, SE a v6i quillo se ne PAKR&,
t,hi a me ne PARRE'BBE. (Bucc. Intr.)
I do not know, whether it will seem
to you, as it would seem to me.
GOVERNMENT OF WORDS.
429
io voglio porre fine dlle tut
angosce QUANDO TU VOGLI,
6vE cosi non FOSSE,
DOVE tu non VOGLI cosi fare,
vommene in guisa, d? oV&o,
che non sa OVE si VADA,
io non so DOVE io mifugga,
I wish to put an end to thy
suffering, if [or provided]
thou wishest it ;
if [or when] it will not prove
so ;
if [or when, or in case that]
thou dost not wish to do so ;
I move along like a blind man,
who does not know whither
he goes ;
I know not whither I should
fly.
[For a List of Verbs governing a noun or another verb, either in the objective, or in
any other relation, preceded by a. preposition, see APPENDIX K.J
EXAMPLES.
Ingrdto e chi il beneficio NEGA
D* AVER RICEVTJTO. (Alll. Ant.,
d. 17. r. 2.)
DOBBIAMO pctrldndo IMPARARE
A TACERE. (Am, Ant. d. 7. r. 3.)
So fo BENE, CHE StCLUOtte EGLI
NE PORTO L' ANIMA MIA. (BoCC.
g. 4. n. 2.)
IO mi CREDO, CHE LE SUORE
SIEN tiltte A DORMIRE. (BoCC.
g. 8. n. 1.)
I'O CREDO, EGLI SE N* ANDO
disperdto. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 7.)
TEMENDO, NON GLI AVVENISSE
quello, che gli avvenne. (Bocc.
g. 5. n. 6.)
Vl D1CO, CH5 EGLI E MORTO.
(Bocc.)
So CH' EGLI E cosi, ma non
ne comprendo la ragione. (Class.)
EGLI STA BENE, SALVO CHE GLI
DUOLE IL CAPO. (Barb. Gr. Gr.)
He is ungrateful, who denies to
have received a benefit.
We must, in speaking, learn how
to keep silent.
I know well, that last night he
carried away my soul.
I believe that the nuns are all
gone to sleep.
I believe, he went away in de-
spair.
Fearing, lest it should happen
to him, what in fact happened to
him.
I tell you, that he is dead.
I know it is so, but do not
understand the reason.
He is well, except that he has
the headache.
430
SYNTAX.
Sennuccio, fo vo* CHE SAPPI
in qudl maniera — Traltdto sono.
(Petr. s. 89.)
Percid DESIDERO CHE SIA PO-
STO IN ESECUZIONE. (Cas. lett.
15.)
II chiamdva, e PREGAVA CHE
NE VENISSE. (BOCC. g. 4. D. 5.)
COMANDO AD UN DE* SUOI FA-
MIGLIARI CHE NELLA^SUA CASA
IL MENASSE, e gli focesse dar da
mangidre, per Dio. (Bocc. g. 2.
n. 7.)
SPERI TU, CHE NlCOSTRATO AN-
DASSE LA LEALTA. RITROVANDO,
che tu servdr vuoi a lui ? (Bocc.
g. 7. n. 9.)
Ch1 io TEMO, lasso ! KO SL so-
VERCHIO AFFANNO DlSTRUGGA
IL COR. (Fetr. s. 84.)
DISPIACQTJE LORO grctndemente,
CHE i PERUGINI ROTTA AVESSERO
LA LEGA. (Gio. Vill.)
SUPPONGASI pero, CHE JUPPI-
TER SIA, a modo loro, ANIMO DI
QDESTO MONDO. (St. Allg. Clt.
Dio.)
Che tu fdcci, QUELLO CHE
L* ANIMO ti GltJDICA CHE BEN
SIA FATTO. (BOCC. g. 1. n. 6.)
CREDO MI PORTASSE AMORE,
e che di me non FOSSE m6no ar-
dente. (Ariost.)
DOMANDAVA, CHE CIO FOSSE.
(Bocc. g. 7. n. 4.)
NON SO CHE MENE PENSI, O CHE
MI DICA. (Petr.)
Ml SEMBRAVA,CHE AVESSE VO-
GLIA DI RIDERE. (BoCC.)
E' PAR CHE TU SIA MORTO. che
tistntitu? (Bocc. g. 9. n. 3)
Sennuccio, I wish that thou
shouldst know in what manner I
am treated.
Therefore I desire that it should
be put iii execution.
She called him, and begged him
to come.
He ordered one of his domes-
tics to bring him into his house,
and cause something to eat to be
given to him, for God's sake.
Dost thou believe, that Nicos-
tfatus will observe the loyalty to-
wards thee, that thou dost towards
him ?
So that I fear, alas!, that ex-
cessive grief will destroy the heart
It displeased them exceedingly,
that the Perugians should have
broken the league.
But let us suppose, that Jupiter,
as they will have it, be the soul
of this world.
That thou shouldst do, what
thy soul judges to be well done.
I believe that he loved me, and
that he was no less ardent in love
than I.
He asked, what that was.
I do not know what to think, or
what to say of it.
It appeared to me, as if he had a
wish to laugh.
It seems as if thou wert dead,
what ails thee ?
GOVERNMENT OF WORDS.
431
JE COSl MOSTRA CHE ROMA SI
REGGESSE A SIGNORIA DI RE c6n-
to cinquantaqudltro dnni. (Gio.
Vill. 129.)
E Chf BISOGNAVA CHE PARTISSE
L* INDOMANI. (BOCC.)
COSTEI FU DAL PADRE TANTO
tencrarninie AM ATA, Q.UANTO AL-
CtJNA dltra FIGLIUOLA DA PA-
DRE FOSSE GIAMMAI. (BOCC. g. 4.
n.l.)
EgH ERA IL PIU SAV1O ED IL
PIU AVVEDtTTO UOMO CHE AL MON-
DO FOSSE. (Bocc. g. ]0. n. 10.)
QUIVJ NON ERA CHI con dcqua
frtdda o con dltro argomento
LE SMARRITE FORZE R1VOCASSE,
(Bocc. g. 2. n. 6.)
DlCENDOLI QUALE VOLESSE, 0
subito restituirc il suo porco, o che
igli anddsse al rettore. (Franc.
Sacch. 146.)
Grdzie riportero di te a Uit —
SE D' ESSER MENTOVATO LAGG1U
DEGNI. (Dant. Purg. 1.)
fp VOGLIO ALLE TUB ANGOSCE,
QUANDO xu medtsimo VOGLI,
PORRE FINE. (BOCC.)
6vE cosi NON JFOSSE, w mi ri-
marro giudeo com9 io mi sono.
(Bocc. g. 1. n. 2.)
E DOVE TU NON VOGLI COS1
FARE, raccomanda a Dio V dni-
ma tua. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 4.)
VOMMENE IN GD1SA D5 ORBO
stnza luce, — CHE NON SA OVE
si vADA,,e pur si pdrte. (Petr.
s. 16.)
i tutti fuori ; io NON so
DOVE 10 MI FUGGA, dOV6 IO ml
nasconda. (Mach. Com.)
And thus it shows, that Rome
was under the government of kings
one hundred and fifty-four years.
And that it was necessary that
he should set out the next day.
This young woman was as ten-
derly loved by her father, as any
other child ever was by a parent.
He was the wisest "and most
prudent man that ever there was
in the woild.
There was no one there who
could either with cold water or
by any other means, restore to her
her lost spirits.
Asking him which he would
prefer, either that he should return
him immediately his hog, or that
he should go to the rector.
I will return thanks to her for
thy favor, if thou dost not disdain
to be mentioned there below.
I wish to put an end to thy
troubles, if thou thyself wishest
it.
If it will not prove so, I will
remain a Jew as 1 am.
And if thou dost not wish to
do so, recommend thy soul to
God.
I move along like a blind man,
deprived of light, who does not
know where he goes, and yet he
departs.
Here they are all out ; I know
not whither 1 should fly, where I
should conceal myself.
432
SYNTAX.
REGIMEN OF PREPOSITONS.
The regimen or complement of prepositions is gen-
erally a noun, a pronoun, or a verb, either in the objec-
tive, or in any other relation, except the subjective,
preceded by another preposition ; as.
io non ddva loco PER LO aiio
CORPO al trapassdr d& rag-
&
volgeansi CIRCA JNOI le due
ghirldnde,
un giorno, DIETRO MANGIA-
RE, laggiit venutone,
comincio a pidgnere SOFRA
DI LEI,
assdi PRESSO A SALERNO e
ima costa,
DA OGNI UOMO,
I gave no way for the rays to
pass through my body ;
the two garlands [of unfad-
ing roses] wreathed about
us;
one day having come there be-
low, after dinner ;
he began to mourn over her ;
very near Salerno there lies
a coast ;
far from every man.
[For a List of Prepositions governing the objective or any other relation preceded
by a preposition^ see APPENDIX L.]
EXAMPL ES.
Qudndo s' accorsdr ch' io NON
DAVA LOCO PER LO MIO CORPO
AL TRAPASSAR DE5 RAGGI. (Dant.
Purg. 5.)
Co si di quille sempit6rne rose
— VOLGEANSI CIRCA NOI LE DUE
GHIRLANDE. (DantvParad. 12.)
IJjY G10RNO, DIETRO MANGIARE,
LAGGIU VENUTONE, in UH CCLHtO
sopra un carcllo si pose a seder e.
(Bocc. g. 4. n. 1.)
COMINCIO A PlAGNERE SOPRA
DI^ LEI, non altramente -che se
morta fosse. (Bocc. g. 8. D. 7.)
When th«y perceived, thai
through my body I gave no waj
for the rays to pass.
Thus about us wreathed the
two garlands of unfading roses.
One day having come there be
low, after dinner, he seated himsel
in a corner upon a cushion.
He began to mourn over her
not otherwise than if she had beei
dead.
GOVERNMENT OF WORDS.
433
ASSAI PRESSO A SALERNO E Very near Salerno there lies a
TJNA COSTA il mare riguarddnte, coast looking upon the sea, which
la qudle gli abitdnti chidmano la the inhabitants call the coast of
costa di Mdlfi. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 4.) Amalfi.
Da una pdrte della sdla, assdi In one corner of the hall, very
I/ONTANO DA oGNi uoMO, co//a don- far from every man, he sat down
na si pose a sedere. (Bocc. g. 5. with the lady,
n. 5.)
REGIMEN OF CONJUNCTIONS.
There are some conjunctions, in Italian, which have
a ver6 for their regimen, which they require to be put
either in the indicative, or the conjunctive mood.
The following are those, which require the verb to
be put in the conjunctive mood :
ajSf' § - order that;
comunque,
conciosiachb,
however ;
whereas, since ;
abbenche,
ancorche,
cdso che,
in cdso che,
> in case that ;
avvegnache,
ddto che, (
suppose,
benche,
comeche,
contuttoche,
though,
" although ;
supposto che, |
Jinche,
Jintdntoche,
' grant that ;
quantunque,
injino che,
> till, until ;
sebbene,
insino che,
tuttochc, ,
sinche,
avdnti che9 ^
dnzi die, f before,
nonostdnteche, <
j notwithstanding
\ that ;
inn&nzi che, £ sooner than ;
prima che, J
per tema che,
for fear that,
lest;
a meno che, except, unless ;
a condizione J
qualora,
if, when,
whenever ;
che, f on condition,
quand' dnche,
' even when ;
con patio che, ^ provided that ;
se,
if;
purche, )
stnza che,
without ;
come se, as if;
solo che,
only that.*
* The following instances are, nevertheless, met with in the classics, in which
37
434 SYNTAX.
To which may be added the conjunction perche, used
in the signification of ' although,' and ' in order that ' :
also the conjunctions che, 'that';se, ' if ' ; quando, in
the signification of ' if,' ( in case that,' c provided ' ; and
the adverbs ore, dove, both in their own signification and
that of the conjunctions ' if,' ' when,' ( provided ' ; as
has been already mentioned at p. 428, in treating of the
regimen of verbs.
Se requires the verb in the conjunctive, when it expresses something
contingent or doubtful : but when it expresses a sure, natural, or
expected circumstance, or when the action of the verb is entirely past,
the verb is put in the indicative ; as,
SE tu ti CALI w non ti verrd if thou do cast thee down, I can-
dietro di galoppo, not chase thee on foot ;
dimmi SE w POSSO adoperdre tell me whether I can do any
alcuna cosa, thing for thee ;
noi glidlo farem fare, SE tu we will make her do it, if thou
VORRAI, wishest it ;
s' w MERITAI di voi vnlntre if, living, I merited aught of you,
ch' w vissi, non vi movete, move ye not ;
SE gli occhi suoi ti FUR dolci if her eyes were dear and sweet to
nh cariy thee ;
s' w DISSI fdlso, e tu FALSASTI if I spoke false, thou falsely stamp-
il conio, edst the coin.
the conjunctions avvegnacM, benchd, comeche, contuttochd, sebbenej are used with a
verb in the indicative mood :
AVVEGNACHG quel di niiino E'RA AN- Since, that day, no one had gone to
DA'TO a lavordre. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 7.) work.
BENCHC a me non PA'RVE mdi chs vdi Although I never thought you were a
gibdicefdste. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 10.) judge.
La qudle il gidvanc focosamente dma, Whom the young man ardently loves,
COMECHB ella non se ne ACCORGE, per although she does not perceive it, for
:jucllo ch' to vegga. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 8.) what I see.
Si ricomincib la guerra c6ntro gli Are- They renewed the war against the
tini, CONTUTTOCHC iiel segreto RIMA'- Aretines, although in secret the Aretines
BERG gli Aretini in trattdto d* accdrdo remained on terms of peace with the
c6> Fiorentini. (Gio. Vill. 1. 11. c. 58.) Florentines.
Perchi SEBBE'NE i giovani V AOME'N- For, although young men enlarge them
TANO, 6* non sdnno di poi mantenerle. (the cities), they know not how to gov-
Gell.) ern them afterwards.
GOVERNMENT OF WORDS.
435
EXAMPLES.
ACCIOCCHE piu avdnti non
POTESSE il prince venire. (Bocc.
g. 2. n. 7.)
Perocche Jlmor V avea giaferi-
ta, — ABBENCHE le PARESSE £s-
ser tradita. (Bopc. Ninf. Fies.)
•Alessdndro, ANCORCHE gran
paura AVESSE, stette pur cheto.
(Bocc. g. 9. n. 1.)
JViuno dltrOjper QUANTUNQUE
AVESSE aguto r avvedimdnto,
potrebbe chi w mifossi conoscere.
(Bocc. Fiam.)
TUTTOCHE questa gente ma-
ladetta in vera perfezion giain-
mdi non VADA. (Dant. Inf. 6.)
I'D non ti concederd quello che
seguita,perche, DATOCHE noi ce
li DIAMO, non percio restidmo
debitori. (Varch. Sen. ben. 5. 9.)
Dico, che COMUNQUE si si A,
egli ha tdnte 6re la notte qudnte
il di. (Ser. Brun. Tes. 2. 44.)
La medicma da guarirlo so io
troppo bene fare, PURCHE a voi
DIA il cudre di segreto tenure cid
che w vi ragionerd. (Bocc. g. 3.
n. 8.)
NONOSTANTE CHE fosse pregd-
to da tutti i cittadmi, che gli do-
vesse perdondre. (Zibald. Andr.
3. 3.)
Or vo' che sdppit INNANZI CHE
piu ANDI, — Ch' ei non peccdro.
(Dant. Inf. 4.)
Seguiro r 6mbra di quel dolce
Iduro, — FINCHE /' ultimo di
CHitJDA quest' occhi. (Petr. c. 7.)
Ch* io spero — Far mi immor-
tal, PERCHE la came MUOIA.
(Petr. c. 18.)
In order that the prince should
not approach any further.
Because Love had already
wounded her, although she thought
she was betrayed.
Alexander, although he
great fear, remained quiet.
had
No one else, however acute
perception he may have, could
know who I am.
Though this accursed race never
can reach true perfection.
I will not grant thee what fol-
lows, because, suppose we should
give them to them, we shall re-
main no less debtors.
I say, that however it may be,
there are as many hours in the
day as in the night.
The medicine to cure him, I
know well how to apply, provided
you have a mind to keep secret
what I shall tell you.
Notwithstanding he was begged
by all the citizens to pardon him.
Now I wish thou mayst know,
before thou passest any farther, that
these did not sin.
I will follow the shade of that
sweet laurel, until death close
these eyes.
So that I hope to make myself
immortal, though the body die.
436
SYNTAX.
La 'ncomincid a bdttere PER-
CHE '/ PASSASSE. (BoCC. g. 9.
n.9.)
SE TU TI CALI, IO NON TI VER-
HO DIETRO DI GALOPPO. (Dant.
Inf. 22.)
Cdccia via la paura, e DIMMI
SE IO POSSO ADOPERARE ALCTJ-
NA COSA. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 8.)
Noi GLIELO FAREM FARE, 0
voglia ilia o no, SE TU VORRAI.
(Bocc. g. 9. n. 5.)
O Viii che siete due dentro ad
unfuoco, — S' io MERITAI DI voi
MENTRE CH' io vissi, — S' io
MERITAI DI VOI ttSSdi 0 pOCO,
Qudndo nel mondo gli alii versi
scrissi, — NON vi MOVETE. (Dant.
Inf. 26.)
Alnzi la voce al suo nome
rischidrij — SE GLI OCCHI sudi TI
FUR DOLCI NE CARI. (Petr. S. 40.)
S' IO DISSI FALSO, E TU FAL-
SASTI IL CONIO, — Disse Sinone.
(Dant. Inf. 30.)
He began to beat her in order
to cure her.
If thou do cast thee down (into
the pitch) I cannot chase thee on
foot.
Drive away fear, and tell me
whether I can do any thing for
thee.
We will make her do it, whether
she is willing or not, if thou wish-
est it.
O ye, who dwell two spirits
within one fire, if living I merited
aught of you, whatever may have
been the measure of that desert,
when in the world I wrote my
lofty verses, move ye not.
Nay let thy voice celebrate her
name, if her eyes were ever dear
and sweet to thee.
If I spoke false, thou falsely
stampedst the coin, said Sinon.
EXERCISE XXIX.
A good man, destitute of money, and of poor mind.
buon uomo, povero montta, 2 strdtto1 dnimo.
Deprived of every virtue, and full of every pride.
Voto valor, pieno orgoglio.
Of ancient blood, and (of) noble manners. The
2 Antico1 sdngue,3 4 6 nobileb costume.
Marquis of Monferrato was a man of great valor.
Marchese uomo alto valore.
With some good wine, and some preserves she re-
alquanto buon vino, alqudnto confetto — ricon-
.GOVERNMENT OF WORDS. 437
cruited him. (The) pride is hated by (is odious
fortdre2 l superb la — — — odioso
to) God and by (to) (the) men. They foment that
Dw uomo. — Fomentdre
i bad disposition of theirs, inclined to (the) evil.
genidccio
Ready to do virtuously
Pronto1 * operdre7 virtuoso6
to
inclindre mdle.
others that, which she
would (that) should be done I to her. In exchange
"\ cdmbio
vol6r en 12 6ssere13 operdreu j m9
for that, which I received. She left at liberty
, ricevere. — conctdere9 10 liberta?
e very-one until (to) the hour of (the) supper. This
11 i 27 3 Ora4 5
young-woman is neither from Cremona, nor from Pavia,
giovane 2 non1 , ,
nay she is from Faenza (a Faentine). He wished,
— — — Faentino. — VoUre,
that I should see all the holy relics. Show me
vedere sdnto reliquia. Mostrdre^,
the way, that goes to Rome. I myself know not,
cammino, anddre Roma. medesimo sapere2 *,
what (that which) I wish (for myself). I know
4 5 volere7 — 6. sapdre2
not, who thou mayst be, nor by what means thou hast
1. , modo — 6ssere2
come here-below.
Being much pleased
Piacendogli molto
with the
manners of the boy, he asked who he was.
m6do fanciullo, — domanddre
He began pleasantly to speak, and to ask who
— Comincidre piacevole ragiondrc, — domanddre
he was, whence he came, and where he was-going.
— , — venire, — anddre.
He was disposed to go wherever it was (to) her
disposto anddre 3 l
37*
438
SYNTAX.
I pleasure I to go. As I arrived on the other side, f
a grddo* \ — — . giungere di la,
there was one who seemed to know (that he
parere — —
Do thou
knew) all (the) my sins
3 peccdto*
by heart
a mente
sapere0
stay (thyself), whom by 1 the fashion of thy garb
Sostdre1^, a \ — — dbito
we deem to be (seemest to-us to be) some native
— — sembrdre2 l —
(some one) of our evil land. If I had this
prdva2 terra1.
money,* I would lend it* to thee immediately. Who
dendro, prestdre3 1 incontanente .
would fare better than I, if that money f were mine ?
stare , dendro ?
Whenever you wish, I will take you a great part
— volere, portdre2 l — gran pdrte
He might govern such
— rcggere6 qudle3
of the way I on horse-back
via a cavdllo
a pjart (of it) as he should wish. He asked of the
1 pdrte2 volere'1. — Domanddre —
host where he could sleep. (The) virtue will not
oste esso potere dormire. virtu
be conquered
essere vincere
come into m
by (the) misery.
miseria.
mi si paran
ly m
d* av
mind
avdnti*
to
be
| perdovereesser1
Many novels
• novella
related by me.
raccontdre* 2 3.
God feeds the angels and (the) his servants I with
Iddio pdscere dngelo 2 servo1 \ di
love and I (with)
amort di
eternal
sempiterno
joy.
»2 crAiirJin^
Let there be this
law in (the) friendship, that
legge2 3 4
of
da8
(the) friends we
9 amico10 —
* This money — it, — to be used in the plural.
t That money, in the plural
GOVERNMENT OF WORDS. 439
should ask but an honest thing. Deliberate all (the) thy
domanddre13 — — onesto11 cosa12. Deliberdre'1 l * —
things with (the) thy friend, but always before (of) him.
cosa3 45 — amico6, • — - .
I A friend who is a time-server (according to
L' amico — — — —
the time) will not be constant in the day of (the)
tempo stare fermo di
tribulations. I refrained (myself) from speaking
tribolazidne. — trdrre9 7 dib parldr6
until we reached (to) the river. The flatterer is
1 — 3 flume*. adulatore
I (even) I like that voice, which replies 1 from I the
I dnco I voce, rispdndere \ dopo \
mountains and the walls to him-who cries-out. In
monte muro griddre.
order that the world should know her and love her.
mondo conoscere2 l amdre — .
Although positively it displeases her. And what dif-
stretto — dispiactre2 l. dif-
ference there is between these and the other visions,
ferenza — av6re visione,
since the learned^ men speak of it, I will not write
dottore parldr e? l, — — 3 scrwere5
it here. In order to prevent, I say, in case that
4 . salvdrej — dire,
we should do I otherwise, that this I should be I the
facendo2 \ altramente1, — — | fora6
cause of blame and ignominy to us. Whereupon he
— — bidsimo3 4 ignominia* — — .
said to me : " Although thou rendest away all my
" , dischiomdre2 mi1
hair, I will neither tell (thee), nor show (it to)
3 dire5 4 , 9 ?nostrdre10^ n^ —
thee, who I am."
12 67 8 »
440 SYNTAX.
CHAPTER IV.
USE OF ARTICLES.
Articles are used, in Italian, before all common nouns
employed in a determinate sense.
Nouns may be employed in a determinate sense in
three different ways :
First, when, in naming an object, we intend to desig-
nate the whole species or kind, to which that object
belongs ; as, gli UOMINI, < [the] men ' ; the noun uomini
being taken in the whole extent of its signification, the
article gli shows that all the individuals composing the
human kind are here spoken of.
Secondly, when we intend to designate a class of ob-
jects of any kind ; as, gli UOMINI virtuosi, ' [the] virtuous
men ' ; here the noun uomini, expresses only a certain
number of men, its signification being restricted by the
adjective virtuosi.
Thirdly, when we intend to designate one particular
object of a kind or of a class; as, /' UOMO di cui vi
pdrlo, ' the man of whom I speak to you ' ; the noun
uomo being taken, in this case, individually, and the
article used to express the man spoken of :
GLI UOMINI sono rfeLLE FEjvi- men are the head of women ;
MINE capo,
GLI udiviiNi di questa terra the people of this land will rise
si leverdnno a romore, in an uproar ;
se L' UOM [con cui tu parli] if the man [with ivhom thou
ti faccia liberamente do, speakest] will do for thee
che H tuo dir prega, ancor freely, what thou entreatest,
ti pidccia di dime, do thou further be pleased
to declare to us.
USE OF ARTICLES.
441
When the noun is sufficiently determined by the
nature of the thing, or by the circumstances of the case,
the article is generally suppressed ; as,
cosl CAVALLI, UOMINI fur thus horses and men were vic-
vittime,
quivi SOSPIRI, PIANTI, ed
ALTI GUAI risondvan,
SONI, CANTI, VEST1R, GIUO-
CHI, VIVANDE, quanta pub
cuor pensdr, pud chieder
bocca,
tims ;
there sighs, lamentations, and
loud moans resounded ;
music, singing, dresses, games,
viands, all that the heart can
think of, and all that the pal-
ate can desire. .
The article is also suppressed when the noun is used
as a mere sign of qualification of the objects expressed.
This is generally the case,
First, when the noun is preceded by the verb essere,
6 to be ' ; as,
ERANO UOMINI 6 FEMMINE
di grosso ingegno,
tu9 che SE' UOMO, dovresti sa-
pvre delle cose del mondo,
they were men and women of
dull understanding ;
thou, who art a man, ought to
be acquainted with the af-
fairs of the world.
Secondly, when the noun is preceded by one of the
prepositions, 0, di^ da, con, in, per, senza ; as,
uscirono fuochi di sotterra,
che si appresero A CAMPI,
viLLE, CASALI,
si nutrlsce DI PANE e D' Ac-
QUA,
morsi DA PULCT, DA MOSCHE,
0 DA TAFANI,
CON BE' MOTTI, € CON RI-
SPOSTE PRONTE,
venne crescendo IN ANNI, IN
PERSONA, ed IN BELLEZZA,
PER PAURA d' altrui) e per
servdre la miafdma,
there issued flames from under
the earth, which set fields,
villas, and hamlets on fire ;
he feeds on bread and water ;
bitten by fleas, by flies, or
gadflies ;
with witty sayings, and prompt
replies ;
grew up in years, in stature,
and in beauty ;
for fear of other people, and
also to preserve my fame ;
442
SYNTAX.
cosl penserd di fare, SENZA I shall do so, without fail.
FALLO,
Thirdly, in comparisons of equality, when the noun is
preceded by the adverb come, ' as,' 'like ' ; as,
non COME UOMINI, ma quasi they died not like men, but
COME BE s TIE morivano,
pareva che ruggisse COME
LEONE, e beldsse COME PE-
CORA, e ragghidsse COME
ASINO,
almost like beasts ;
he appeared to roar like a lion,
to bleat like a sheep, and to
bray like an ass.
When a noun is employed in an indeterminate sense
the article is never used ; as,
qudl che tu sii, od OMBRA od whatever thou art, whether a
shadow or a living man ;
now I am not a man, man I was
formerly ;
pdrmi vedere DONNE e DON- I seem to see ladies and dam-
sels, and they are firs and
beeches.
UOMO CERTO,
?? on UOM, UOMO giafui,
ZELLE, 6
FAGGI,
50710 ABETI 6
The article is also never used when a noun is preceded
by a demonstrative or indefinite pronoun ; as,
this little boy began to be fa-
miliar ;
how do you say those words ?
QUESTO GARZONCELLO 5 IU-
comincio a dimesticdre,
come dile voi COTESTE PA-
ROLE?
INFER-
MITA trasporldre,
COn OGNI SOLLECITtfDINE,
COn OGNI INGEGNO, C COH
OGNI ARTE si proccdcciano
di riducere a nulla la Cri-
stidna religione,
it appeared to communicate
that same sickness ;
they strive with all their zeal,
and their power, and their
skill, to overthrow the Chris-
tian religion.
USE OF ARTICLES. 443
EXCEPTION.
When a noun is preceded by the indefinite pronoun tittto, the article
is used after the pronoun ; as,
Tt/TTi i PENSIERI, TUTTO Lo all the thoughts, all the attentions,
STUDIO, e TUTTE i,E OPERE, and all the actions.
The article, however, is omitted when tutto is used as a mere sign
of qualification ; as,
noi sidm TUTTE FEMMINE, we are all women ;
tinne il ponte contra TUTTA kept possession of the bridge
TOSCANA, against all Tuscany.
When several nouns come together before or after
the verb, and the article is used or omitted before the
first of them, this article is to be repeated or omitted
before every other noun in the sentence j * as,
Lucio Silla vinse LA VIRTU., Lucius Sylla surpassed Caius
e i TRIONFI, e i SETTE Marius in courage and in the
CONSOLATI di Cdio Mario, number of his triumphs and
consulships ;
nt> VECCHIEZZA, ne INFER- neither age, nor sickness, nor
MITA, n& PAURA di morte, the fear of death, could deter
ddlla sua malvagita V han- him from his wicked course.
no potuto rimuovere,
* Examples are found in the classics, nevertheless, in which this rule is not
rigorously observed j as,
AMORE, e L' IRA. del re. (Bocc. g. 5. Tho love and anger of the king,
n. 6.)
Crepdta per LO LU'NGO e per TRAVE'R- Broken lengthwise and breadthwise,
so. (Dant. Pur. 9.)
Fra FOLTI BOSCHI, e LE RioiDE A'LPI, In the thick woods, and among the
e DISE'RTE SPELONCHE. (Bocc. g. 3. rugged Alps, and in lonely caves.
n. 10.)
In the following examples :
Sopravvennero i CONFORTI cd OFFE'R- There arrived the encouragements and
TE de> Ve.neiia.rn. (Guicc. Stor. Ital.) the offers of the Venitians.
Se, COL NOME su'o e RIPUTAZIO'NE del Whether, with his name and the rep-
padre, ritomdre negli stdti sudi di Pe- utation of his father, he could not return
ritgia poteva, (Mach. Stor. Fior.) to his own estates at Perugia:
the omission of le before offerte, and of la or COLLA before ripulazidne, are manifest
errors of grammatical concordance.
444
SYNTAX.
EXAMPLES.
GLI yoMiNi SONO DELLE FEM-
MINE CAPO, e senza V or dine loro
rdde volte riesce alcuna nostra
opera a laudevol fine. (Bocc.
Intr.)
GLI UOMINI DI QUESTA TERRA,
vedendo cid, si LEVERANNO A RU-
MOKE. (BOCC.)
SE L* UOM TI FACCIA — LlBE-
RAMENTE CIO, CHE *L, TUO DIR
PREGA, — fSpirito 'ncarcerdto, AN-
COR TI PlACCIA Dl D1RNE COTTie
r dnirna si lega — In questi noc~
chi. (Dant. Inf. 13.)
COSI CAVALLI, UOMINI FUR
VITTIME. (Dav. Ann.)
Quivi SOSPIRI, FIAIVTI, ED ALTI
GUAI — RISONAVAN per r dere
sinza sttlle. (Dant. Inf. 3.)
SONI, CANTI. VESTIR, GIUOCHI,
VIVANDE, QUANTO PUO CUOR
PENSAR, PUO CH1EDER BOCCA.
(Ariost. Fur. 4. 32.)
ERANO UOMINI E FEMMINE DI
GROSSO INGEGXO. (BoCC. Intf.)
Tu, CHE SE* UOMO, DOVRESTI
SAPERE DELLE COSE DEL MOJVDO.
(Bocc. g. 7. n. 2.)
USCIROIV FUOCHI DI SOTTERRA,
CHE SI APPRESERO A CAMPI, V1L-
LE, CASALI. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 3.)
Si NUTRISCE DI PANE E D* Ac-
QUA. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 3.)
Non altrimenti fan di state i
cdni — Or col ceffo or c(? pie,
quando son MORSI — 0 DA PULCI,
O DA MOSCHE, 0 DA TAFANI.
(Dant. Inf. 17.)
CON BE* MOTTI, E CON RISPOSTE
PRONTE. (Bocc. g. 5. fin.)
Men are the head of women,
and without their management it
seldom happens that any under-
taking of ours succeeds well.
The people of this land, seeing
this, will rise in an uproar.
If he [this man] will do for
thee freely, what thou entreatest,
O imprisoned spirit I do thou fur-
ther be pleased to declare to us,
how in these gnarled joints the
soul is tied.
Thus horses and men were vic-
tims.
There sighs, lamentations, and
loud moans resounded through the
starless air.
Music, singing, dresses, games,
viands, all that the heart can think
of, and all that the palate can de-
sire.
They were men and women of
dull understanding.
Thou, who art a man, ought to
be acquainted with the things of
the world.
There issued flames from under
the earth, which set fields, villas,
and hamlets on fire.
He feeds on bread and water.
Thus use the dogs in summer
to ply now with their jaws and
now with their feet, when bitten
by fleas, or flies, or gadflies.
With witty sayings, and prompt
replies.
USE OF ARTICLES.
445
La Violdnte VENNE CRESCEN- Violante grew up in years, in
DO ed IN ANNI, ed IN PERSONA, stature, and in beauty.
ED IN BELLEZZA. (BOCC. g. 2.
n. 8.)
Cosi m? & convenuto fdre, e I have been obliged to do so,
PER PAURA D; ALTRUI, E PER for fear of other people, and also to
SERVARE LA FA&iA delta mm preserve my character.
onesta. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 5.)
Sol tdnto m dire, che come im- I only tell you that I shall,
pdsto w* avete, cosl PENSERO DI without fail, do what you have
FARE SENZA FALL©. (Bocc. g. 3. ordered,
n. 5.)
They died riot like men, but
almost like beasts.
NON COME COMINI, MA QUASI
COME BESTIE MORIVANO. (BOCC.
Intr.)
PAREVA CHE RUGGISSE COME He appeared to roar like a lion,
LEONE, E BELASSE COME PEcoRA, and to bleat like a sheep, and to
E RAGGHIASSE COME AsiNo. (Dial, bray like an ass.
S. G;eg. m.)
" Miserere di me" griddi a luit
— " QUAL CHE TU SII, OD OMBRA
OD VOMO CERTO." — Risposemi :
u NON UOM, UOMO GIA FUI."
(Dant. Inf. 1.)
Ch' io r ho negli occhi, e VEDER
seco PARMI — DONNE E DONZEL-
LE, € SONO ABETI E FAGGI. (Petr.
s. 143.)
QUESTO GARZONCELLO S5 IN-
COMINCIO A DIMESTICARI COH
questo Federico. (Bocc. g. 5.
n. 9.)
Voi mi parete uomo di Dio,
COME D1TE VOI COTKSTE PAROLE ?
(Bocc. g. 1. n. 1.)
Ma ancora il toccdre i pdnni
ddgli infdrmi adoperdti PAREVA
siCQ QUELLA COTALE INFERMITA
neJtoccaforTRASPORTARE. (Bocc.
Intr.)
38
(( Have mercy on me," cried
I to him, " whatever thou art,
whether a shadow, or a living
man." He answered me : (i Now
I am not a man, man I was for-
merly."
Whom I have before my eyes,
and I seem to see ladies and dam-
sels with her, and they are firs and
beeches.
This little boy began to be fa-
miliar with this Frederic.
You appear to me to be a man
of God, how do you say those
words ?
But even to touch the clothes
used by the sick appeared to com-
municate with it the same sickness
to the one who had touched them.
446
SYNTAX.
E per qucllo che io
OGNI SOLLECITI^DINE, CON OGNI
INGEGNO, K CON OGNI ARTE, mi
pare che si PROCACCIANO DI RIDU-
CERE A wtfLLA, e di caccidre del
mondo LA CRISTIANA RELIGIOSE.
(Bocc. g. 1. n. 2.)
TUTTI i PENSIERI delle fern-
mine^ TtJTTO LO STUDIO, TUTTE
LE OPERE, a niuna dltra tosa
tiranOj se non a signoreggidre
gli uomini. (Bocc. Lab.)
Ricordivi che NOI SIAM TtJTTE
FEMMINE. (Bocc. Intr.)
E qu^l, chet solo, — CONTRA
TtfTTA TOSCANA TENNE IL PONTE.
(Petr. Trionf. Fam. c. 1.)
O'nde LTJCIO SILLA, che VINSE
LA VIRTU, E I TRIONFI, E I SETTE
CONSOLATI DI CilO MARIO, SI
f<? chiamareil Felice. (Davan.)
Che uomo e costui, il qudle NE
VECCHIEZZA, NE INFERMITA, NE
PAURA DI MORTE DALLA StJA
MALVAGITA. L' HANNO POTUTO
RIMUOVKRE ?
And by what I can judge, it
seems that they strive with all
their zeal, and their power, and
their skill to overthrow the Chris-
tian religion, and to drive it from
the face of the earth.
All the thoughts, all the atten-
tion, and all the actions of women
tend to nothing but to rule over
men.
Remember that we are all wo-
men.
And he, who alone kept pos-
session of the bridge against all
Tuscany.
Therefore Lucius Sylla, who
surpassed Caius Marius in cour-
age, and in the number of his
triumphs and consulships, made
himself to be called the Happy.
What a man is this, whom nei-
ther age, sickness, nor the fear of
death, could deter from his wicked
It has been said, that articles are used before nouns
employed in a determined sense ; adjectives, verbs, ad-
verbs, and prepositions, therefore, when used as nouns,
in that sense, require the article before them ; as,
from the same clear fountain
springs the bitter and the
sweet ;
to be born in high life is a
chance and not merit ;
I should be happy to know
[the] when ;
I have already thought [of the]
sol d1 una chidra fonte muo-
Ve IL DOLCE e L' AMARO,
IL NASCER grdnde e cdso e
non virtu,
sarei contento di sapere IL
QUANDO,
IL DOVE io ho gib pensdto,
IL COME ho io ben veditio,
where ;
I have already seen [the] how ;
USE OF ARTICLES.
447
I.L FERCHE ti diro,
ci e IL PRO, e 'L CONTRO,
son certa deL si,
ciascuno rispose dei, NO,
I will tell you [the] why ;
there is something to say for
and against ;
I am certain of the affirmative ;
every one answered in the
negative.
EXAMPLES.
COS\ SOL D' UNA CIIIARA FON-
TE Viva MUOVE IL DOLCE E
L' AMARO. (Petr. s. 131.)
IL NASCER GRANDE E CASO
E NON VIRTU. (Metast. Artas.
1.1.)
SAREI CONTENTO DI SAPERE IL
QUANDO. (Petr. s. 306.)
IL DOVE lo HO GIA PENSATO.
(Bocc. g..2.)
IL COME HO 10 BEN VEDUTO.
(Bocc. g. 8. n. 6.)
Del come non ti caglia, IL
PERCHE Tl DIRO. (BOCC. FHOC.
6.)
Sicche ci E IL PRO E 'L CON-
TRO. (Gio. Vill.)
SON CERTA DEL SI. (BOCC.
g. 7. n. 7.)
CIASCUNO RISPOSE DEL NO.
(Bocc. g. 1. n. 7.)
Thus, from the same clear, living
fount, springs the bitter and the
sweet.
To be born in high life is a
chance and not merit.
I should be happy to know [the]
when.
I have already thought [of the]
where.
I have already seen [the] how.
Do not trouble thyself about
[the] how, I will tell you [the]
why.
So that there is something to
say for and against.
I am certain of the affirmative.
Every one answered in the
negative.
The names of abstract substances, and those of gems,
metals, liquids, and provisions, require the article before
them, when used in a generic sense ; as,
laudevol c6sa e ne* principi prudence is praiseworthy in
LA PRUDENZA, rulers ;
L' 6RO, e LE PERLE, e i fior the gold, and the pearls, and
vermigli e bidnchi, the red and white flowers ;
448
SYNTAX.
meppiu dolce si trova L' Ac- water and bread are sweeter
quA e 'L PANE, che LE than gems and gold.
GEMME e L9 ORO,
EXAMPLES.
LAUDEVOL COSA, e necessaria
molto E NE' PRINCIPI LA PRU-
DENZA. (Bocc. Filoc.)
L* ORO, E LE PERLE, E I FTOR
VERMIGLI E BIANCHI,^ — Son per
me acerbi e velenosi stecchi.
(Petr. s. 38.)
VlEPPIU DOLCE SI TKOYA L' AC-
QUA t 'L PANE, — CHE LE GEM-
ME E L' ORO. (Petr. Trionf. c. 6.)
Prudence is praiseworthy, and
very necessary to rulers.
The gold, and the pearls, and
the red and white flowers, are to
me sharp and poisonous thorns.
Water and bread are sweeter
than gems and gold.
The names of heaven, the earth, and the sea ;
of the cardinal points ; of the four quarters of the
world ; also of kingdoms, provinces, mountains, and
rivers, when, in speaking of them, we consider their
whole extent, take the article ; — but when we speak of
any indeterminate part of them, they refuse it ; as,
era stdto tdnto timpo senza he had been so long without
vedere IL CIELO, seeing the heavens [the sky] ;
LA TERRA efredda e secca, the earth is cold and dry ;
anddvi super LO MARE,
era gia L' ORIENTE tutto
bianco,
non solamente IL LEVANTE,
ma quasi tutto IL PONENTE,
il conosceva,
tutta L' EUROPA e ripututa
stretto confine,
thou didst walk on the sea ;
the east was already bright ;
L' ITALIA e stdta piu volte
soggiogdta da* bdrbari,
salvo LA MA RCA TRIVIGIA-
NA,
inghiottita da una eruzione
dei, VESUYIO,
not only the east, but also the
freatest part of the west,
new him ;
all Europe is considered to be
a narrow limit ;
Italy has been several times
subdued by barbarians ;
except the March of Trevigi ;
overwhelmed by an eruption
of Mount Vesuvius ;
USE OF ARTICLES. 449
ilia & taglidta dai^iS ADIGE, it is intersected by the Adige :
Visse sdnto in TERRA ed ora He lived a saint on earth and
£ in CIELO, now is in heaven ;
il cdmpo Cristidno passb in the Christian camp passed to
ORIENTE, the east ;
le glorie d' ITALIA, the glories of Italy ;
cdme fdlde di neve in ALPE like flakes of snow on the
sinza vento, summit of the Alps, when
the wind is hushed ,•
mi dissetdi con dcqua di SEN- I quenched my thirst with the
NA, water of the Seine.
H LdziOj l [the] Latium ' ; whicfe always takes the article : and
I' da, ' Ida ' ; O'ssa, ' Ossa ' ; which always refuse it.
Names of seas take the article ; as,
IL MEDITERRANEO, L' ADRI- the Mediterranean, the Adri-
ATICO, atic ;
L' EGEO, the Egean ;
L' ATLANTICO, IL PACIFICO, the Atlantic, the Pacific.
Names of cities, islands, and lakes take no article ; as,
FIRENZE, ROMA, MARSI- Florence, Rome, Marseilles ;
GLIA,
CipRO, Scio, CRETA, Cyprus, Scio, Crete ;
Idgo MAGGIORE, di LUGANO, lake Maggiore, of Lugano, of
di COMO, Como.
EXCEPTIONS.
The following names of cities and is/ands, however, take the article ;
viz. IL Cairo, ' Cairo ' } LA Mirdndola, ' Mirandola ' ; LA Roccella,
1 Rochelles ' ; L' A'ia, « Aix ' ; — IL Giglio, « Giglio ' ; LA Caprdia,
1 Capraia ' ; LA Gorgona, l Gorgona ' ; and perhaps a few more : ajso
the names of those islands which are spoken of in the plural ; as,
LE Baledri, l the Balearic islands ' ; LE Filippme, l the Philippine
islands ' ; LE Molucche, * the Molucca islands ' ; &c.
The names of the following islands, may or may not take the
article ; viz. £lba or L' Elba, ' Elba ' ; Sardegna or LA Sardegna,
38*
450
SYNTAX.
* Sardinia ' ; Corsica or LA Corsica, l Corsica ' ; Sicilia or LA Sicilia,
' Sicily ' ; Inghilttrra or L' Inghilttrra, < England ' ; Irldnda or
L' Irldnda, l Ireland.'
Names of cities, &c., always take the article when preceded by an
adjective ; as, la b6lla Firinze, ' [the] beautiful Florence ' ; &c.
EXAMPLES.
TAN-TO TEMPO ERA STATO SEN-
ZA VEDERE IL CIELO. (BOCC,
g. 3. n. 8.
LA TERRA E FREDDA E^ SEC-
CA, — U acre e cdldo e umido.
(Brun. Tes. 1.)
Per la qudl tu su PER LO MARE
ANDAVI. (Dant. Par. 24.)
ER\ GIA L' ORIEN/TE TUTTO
BIANCO. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 1.)
NON SOLAMENTE IL LEVANTE,
MA GIA QUASI TUTTO IL PONENTE
perfdma IL CONOSCEVA. (Bocc.
g. 10. n. 3.)
TUTTA L' EUROPA E RIPUTATA
STRETTO CONFINE. (Buom.)
Voi sapdte che L' ITALIA E
STATA PIU VOLTE SOGGlOOATA
DA molti BARBARI. (Buom.)
Rendegli la Signoria di Lorn-
bardia, SALVO LA MARCA TRIVI-
GIANA. (Gio. Vill. 1 3. c. 5.)
O've restd un tempo INGHIOT-
TITA la citta d' Ercoldno DA TJNA
ERUZIONE DEL VESUVIO. (Gang,
lett.)
ELLA i; TAGLIATA DALL' ADI-
GE, fiume, come sdij amenissimo.
(Algar. lett.)
VlSSE SANTO IN TERRA, ED ORA
E IN CIELO. (Tass. Ger.)
Gia '/ sdsto anno voJgea che 'N
ORIENT* — PASSO IL CAMPO
CRISTIANO all9 dlta imprtsa.
(Tasg. Ger.)
He had been so long without
seeing the sky.
The earth is cold and dry, and
the air warm and damp.
By which thou didst walk on
the sea.
The east was already bright.
Not only the east, but also the
greatest part of the west, knew
him by reputation.
All Europe is considered to be
a narrow limit.
You know that Italy has been
several times subdued by many
barbarians.
He restored to him the signiory
of Lombardy, except the March
of Trevigi.
Where the city of Herculaneum
was overwhelmed by an eruption
of Mount Vesuvius.
It is intersected by the Adige,
a very pleasant river, as thou
knowest.
He lived a saint on earth, and
now is in heaven.
It was already six years since
the Christian camp passed to the
East on their great undertaking.
USE OF ARTICLES.
451
LE sotntne GLORIE D' ITALIA. The very great glories of Italy.
(Buom.)
Piov6an difuoco dilatdtefdlde,
— COME DI NEVE IN ALPE SENZA
VENTO. (Dant. Inf. 14.)
There fell down dilated flakes
of fire, as flakes of snow on the
summit of the Alps, when the
wind is hushed.
Ml DISSETAI CON ACOJJA DI
SENNA. (Vanz.)
Ma L* EGEO, ma L' ATLAN-
TICO, non cerca di comprinde-
re, e sa b£ne che ei non pud.
(Da van.)
Perche FIRENZE e citta domi-
ndnte, e imitatrice di ROMA.
(Davan.)
MARSEILLES [MARSIGLIA], sic-
come voi sapete, e antica e nobi-
lissima citta. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 3.)
Guiscdrdo, re di CIPRO. (Eriz.
Giorn.)
Che le bidde — Ogri isola di
Gricia a lui sol miita, — E Scio
pietrdsa gli vendemmi e GRETA.
(Tass. Ger. 1. 78.)
Vidggio a? tre Idghi : MAG-
GIORE, DI LUGANO, e DI COMO.
(Amor.)
II conte Guido dem*. MIRAN-
DOLA, mosso ddlla munificenza
di Lorenzo, pose la sua abita-
zione in Firenze. (Mach. S(or.
Fior. 1. 8.)
Muovasi LA CAPRAIA « LA
GORGONA. (Dant. Inf. 33.)
I quenched my thirst with the
water of the Seine.
But he does not try to compre-
hend the Egean sea; and the
Atlantic ocean, and he knows he
cannot.
Because Florence is a powerful
city, and the rival of Rome.
Marseilles is, as you know, an
ancient and very noble city.
Guiscard, king of Cyprus.
That every island of Greece
should reap corn, and stony Scio
and Crete should make wine for
him alone. .
A journey to the three lakes :
Maggiore, of Lugano, and of Co-
mo.
Count Guido of Mirandola,
pleased with the munificence of
Lorenzo, fixed his residence in
Florence.
May Capraia and Gorgona rise
from their foundations.
Dio or Iddio, l God ' ; and names of persons, when
used in their full meaning, never take the article ; but,
when we limit their signification to designate a particu-
lar object, they always take the article ; as,
Dio ct mdndi bene, God help us ;
452 SYNTAX.
IDDIO dispdse altramente, God ordained otherwise ;
APOLLO fu veduto saetlare il Apollo was seen shooting the
Pitdne, serpent Python ;
ov' ERCOLE segno li suoi where Hercules fixed his boun-
rigudrdi, daries ;
OMERO, VIRGILIO, e DANTE, Homer, Virgil, and Dante:
IL Dio dttla guerra, The God of war;
L' APOLLO del Belvedere, the Apollo of Belvedere ;
L' ERCOLE Farnese, the Farnese Hercules ;
L' OMERO Ferrarese, the Ferrarese Homer [Ariosto].
Agreeably to this principle the nouns Diot Iddw, in the plural,
when speaking of the deities of the heathens, take the article ; as,
se fdsse piaciuto dGLi DEI, if it had pleased the Gods ;
GL' iDofi, lif qudli governano the Gods, who govern our affairs.
le nostre cose,
They take also the article, when they are preceded
by an adjective ; as,
L' onnipotente Dio, the almighty God ;
IL grdnde ACHILLE, the great Achilles;
L' infelice PRIAMO, the unhappy Priamus.
They take the article when they are used to desig-
nate persons familiarly or publicly known ; as,
ckiamdto IL GERBINO, having called Gerbino ;
aveva amdta LA NINETTA, he had loved Ninetta ;
LA MADDALENA, LA MARI- Magdalen, Marianna.
ANNA,
But when names of persons are preceded by one of
the nouns Sere, ' Sir ' ; Messere, ' Master ' ; maestro,
' master ' ; Don, ; Don ' ; Donna, ' Donna ' ; Frate,
' Friar or Brother ' ; Santo or Santa, '• Saint ' ; they re-
fuse the article ; as,
SER Brunitto, Sir Brunetto ;
USE OF ARTICLES. 453
MESBER Gugliilmo, Mr. William ;
MAESTRO Mdmo, master Adamo ;
DON Pietro, Don Pedro;
. FRATE AlUrlo, Friar Albert;
SAN Maurizio, Saint Maurice ;
SANTA Verididna, Saint Veridiana.
Names of persons, preceded by the nouns Papa, ' Pope ' ; Re,
1 King,' are better used without the article ; as,
Papa Giovdnni, Re Carlo, Pope John, King Charles.
Surnames or family names take no article, when pre-
ceded by names of persons ; but when they are used to
specify a person of such a family, also when we speak
of celebrated men, and when they are preceded by a
title, the article is used ; as,
Guglielmo Rossiglidne, Gu- William Rossiglione, William
glielmo Guardastdgno, Guardastagno ;
IL GUARDASTAGNO, IL Ros- Guardastagno, Rossiglione ;
SIGLIONE,
IL PETR^RCA, IL BOCCAC- Petrarch, Boccaccio;
CIO,
IL cardindl MAZZARINI, cardinal Mazzarini.
Names of the months take no article ; as,
il sesto di GENNAIO fu V dsce, the sixth of January was for
the axe ;
il primo e JZ secondo di AGO- the first and second of August
STofuron le marietta, were for the hammers.
Names of the days may be used with or without the
article ; as,
MERCOLEDI, dopo desindre, Wednesday, after dinner ;
IL SABATO mattina si parti on Saturday morning he left
di Firenze, Florence.
454
SYNTAX.
EXAMPLES.
Entrdndo dentro disse : " Dio
ci M!NDI BENE ; chi e qu&?"
(Bocc. g. 8. n. 2.)
IDDIO, giusto riguarddtore de-
gli altrui m6riti, ALTRAMENTE
DISPOSE. (Bocc. g. 2 n. 8.)
Chi FU verame'nte
APOLLO SAETTARE IL velenoso
PITONE. (Davan.)
foei compdgni eravdm vecchi
e tdrdi, — Qudndo venimmo a
quella foce stre'tta, — Ov' ERCO-
LE SEGNO LI SUOI RIGUARDI.
(Dant. Inf. 26.)
OMERO, VIRGILIO, E DANTE
han lascidto n6lle pitture loro
molto di che fare alV immagina-
tiva del leggitore. (Fosc.)
IL Dfo DELLA GUERRA. (Ce-
sar.)
L' APOLLO DEL BELVEDERE.
(Miliz. Art. Dis.)
LJ OMERO FERRARESE. (Me-
last, lett.)
SE AGLI DEI FOSSE P1ACIUTO.
(Bocc. Filoc.)
GL' IDDII, LI QUALI dispongo-
no e GOVERNAN noij e LE NOSTRE
COSE. (Bocc. g. 10. n. 8.)
L' ONNIPOTENTE Dio, e mise-
ricordioso giudice, nasconde dal
suo giudicio i nostrifdlli. (Pass.
Ver. Pen.)
E Vldi 5L GRANDE ACHILLE, -
Che con amore alf'ine combattto.
(Dant. Inf. 5.)
// qudle mdlto AMATA AVEVA
LA NlNETTA. (BOCC. g. 4. D. 3.)
On entering said : " God help
us ; who is here ? "
God, the just rewarder of peo-
ple's merit, ordained otherwise.
For Apollo was really seen
shooting the venomous serpent
Python.
I and my companions were tar-
dy with age, when we came to
the strait pass where Hercules
fixed his boundaries.
Homer, Virgil, and Dante have
left in their pictures much to do
for the imagination of the reader.
The God of War.
The Apollo of Belvedere.
The Ferrarese Homer [Ariosto].
If it had pleased the Gods.
The Gods, who dispose of, and
govern, us and our affairs.
The almighty God, and merciful
judge, conceals our sins from his
judgment.
And I saw the great Achilles
who fought with love to the end.
Who had ardently loved Niuet-
ta.
USE OF ARTICLES.
455
E chindndo la ruano dlla sua
fdccia — Risposi : l( Siete v6i qulj
SER BRUNETTO ? " (Darit. Inf.
15.)
MESSER GUGLIELMO Rossiglio-
ne dcL a mangidre dlla moglie sua
il cuore di ME^SER GUGLIELMO
Guardastdgno. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 9.)
Di88* egli a noi : «« Guarddte,
ed attendee — Alia miseria del
MAESTRO ADAMO." (Dant. Inf.
30.)
Torto farei dlla infinita virtu
delV eccellentissimo DON PIETRO
de Toledo. (Bern. Tass. lett.)
FRATE ALBERTO d& a vedere
ad una donna, che V dgnolo Ga-
bricle (Bocc. g. 4. n. 2.)
Con una bolla istitui V ordine
di SAN MAURIZIO. (Den. Riv.
Ital.)
Pareva pur SANTA VERIDIANA,
che da a beccdre dlle serpi. (Bocc.
g. 5. n. 10.)
Morto PAPA GIOVANNI, e non
avendo potuto RE CARLO otteni-
re che si fosse rifdtto un Pdpa
Franzese. (Gian. Stor. Giv. Nap.
1. 20. c. 5.)
IL GUARDASTAGNO rispose, che
senzafdllo il di seguente andrdb-
be a cendr con lui. IL Rossi-
GLIONE, udendo questo, pensd il
timpo esser venuto di poterlo uc~
cidere. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 5 )
U esquisitezza dei* PETRARCA,
dltro nume dilla nostra volgdr
poesia. (Buom.)
U Decameron dei, BOCCACCIO
e di gran lunga il miglior libro,
che abbidmo infdtto d* eloqucnza
Italidna. (Den. Sag. Letter.)
And inclining my hand towards
his face, I answered : {< Sir Bro-
netto, are you here ? "
Mr. William Rossiglione give?
to his wife the heart of Mr.
William Guardastagno to eat.
And he said to us : " Regard
attentively the woe of master
Adamo."
I should do wrong to the im-
mense merit of the most excellent
Don Pedro de Toledo.
Friar Albert gives a woman to
understand, that the angel Gabriel
With a bull he instituted the
order of Saint Maurice.
She seemed Saint Veridiana,
feeding the serpents.
Pope John having died, and
King Charles having not been
able to obtain that a French
Pope should be re-elected.
Guardastagno answered, that he
would without fail sup with him
the following night. Rossiglione,
hearing this, thought the time of
murdering him was come.
The exquisite elegance of Pe-
trarch, another god of our Italian
poetry,
The Decameron of Boccaccio
is by far the best book which we
have in point of Italian elequence.
45(5
SYNTAX.
IL CARDINAL MAZZARINI, Itali-
dno ancor esso. (Den. Riv. Ital.
I. 23. c. 12.)
Se IL SESTO DI GENNAIO ru
L' ASCE, € IL PRIMO E IL SECONDO
D* ACOSTO FtTRONO LE MARTELLA.
(Davan. Stor.)
MERCOLEDI, DOPO DESINARE,
assalirono da piii pdrti qutgli del
Idto dtgli Mimari. (Gio. Vill.
c. 20.)
Venuta in Firdnze la novella
il Venerdi s6ra, IL SABATO MAT-
TINA Mess6r Giambertdldo si
PARTI DI FIREISTZE. (Gio. Vill.
1. 7. c. 31.)
Cardinal Mazzarini, an Italian
also.
If the sixth of January was for
the axe, and the first and second
of August were for the hammers.
Wednesday, after dinner, they
assailed from different quarters
those who sided with the Adimari.
The news having reached Flor-
ence on Friday evening, Messer
Giambertaldo left Florence on Sat-
urday morning.
A noun preceded by an adjective takes the article
before this adjective ; as,
IL GRAN mdle, IL GRAN pec- the great evil, the great sin,
cdto, IL GRAN fdtto adopt- the great crime committed
rdti da Gisippo, by Gisippus.
Nouns also take the article when preceded by an
ordinal number, or a possessive pronoun ; * but they
* This rule with regard to possessive pronouns has not been strictly followed by
the early writers, as may be seen by the following examples :
Com' c' vedrdnno quel volume aperto, As soon as they shall see that book
— JYel qual si scrivon tittti suoi DISPRE'- open, in which all their sins are written.
01. (Dant. Par. 19.)
Pdssan VOSTRI TRIONFI e VOSTRE
POMPE. (Petr. Trionf. Temp.)
Quesla tra di D'to a NOSTRA CORREZI-
ONE manddta sdpra i mort&li. (Bocc.
Intr.)
Your triumphs and your pomp pa»s
away.
This wrath of God sent down upon
mortals for our correction.
Besides there are in Italian several modes of expression, such as a mia posta, ' at
r pleasure ' ; in sito ndme, * in his name ' ; cdntra sua vdglia, ' against his will ' ;
;., in which, by a peculiarity of language, the article is elegantly suppressed; as,
fo non posso far caldo e freddo A M!A I cannot make warm and cold weather
POSTA. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 4.) at my pleasure.
Qutsti sgrida, IN so'o NOME, il trdppo This one blames, in his (Godfrey's)
ardire. (Tass. Ger. 3. 53.) name, their excessive daring.
"J'jo, CONTRA SU'A VOGLI A, altrdnde 'I And I guide him elsewhere against
his will.
y
men*. (Petr. 8. 39.)
USE OF ARTICLES. 457
refuse it when they are preceded by a demonstrative,
interrogative, or indefinite pronoun ; as,
IL VENTESIMO Canto, the twentieth Canto ;
LA PRIMA canzone, the first song ;
LA MIA pdtria, my country ;
IL VOSTRO amico, your friend :
QUESTI sospiri, these sighs ;
QUAL paura ? what fear ;
QUALUNQUE ^LTRA fdnte, any other woman ;
UNA COT!L mezzanita, such a middling course.
EXCEPTIONS.
When the nouns are preceded by the indefinite pronouns, uno,
'one'; dltro, 'other'; st6sso or meddsimo, 'same'; they are used
with the article ; as,
L' UNA e L' ALTRA mdno, the one and the other hand ;
MEDESIMA citth, neL ME- in the same city, in the same day.
DESIMO giorno,
Sometimes the noun, which is preceded by an ordinal
number or a possessive pronoun, is understood ; as,
non stringendosi nelle vi- not confining themselves in
vdndc quanta i pRiMi, ne eating like the former, nor
nel here quanta i SECONDI, in drinking like the latter ;
soma d? altri omeri che ddi a burden for stronger shoul-
TUOI, ders than thine.
When the noun, which is preceded by a possessive
pronoun, is one of those which express kindred or rela-
tion, quality or rank, and this noun is in the singular
number, the article is suppressed ; * but, if the noun is
in the plural, the article is always used ; as,
* Notwithstanding this, instances are often found in excellent writers, in which
39
458 SYNTAX.
MIO FIGLIO ovj £? where is my son?
suo PADRE cijece mdlti dan- his father did us many injuries :
ni,
MIA MADRE, un frdtello mi- my mother, a younger brother,
ndre, ed io, and I ;
mtna teco TUA MOGLIE, take thy wife with thee ;
il nobile dtto di Filippo, usdto the noble action which Philip
a salute di suo MARixo, had done for the safety of
her husband ;
il diro a MIO FRATELLO, I will tell it to my brother ;
VOSTRA SORELLA, VOSTRA your sister, your aunt ;
Z1A,
SUA ECCELLENZA It bacio la His Excellency kissed her
raano, hand ;
stidmo assdi btne con SUA we stand very well with His
ALTEZZA, Highness ;
gV interessi di SUA MAESTA, His Majesty's interests :
Guarded nel viso di MIEI I looked upon the countenance
FIGLIUOLI, of my sons;
ringrdzio LE LORO SIGNORIE, I thank your Lordships.
EXCEPT
When the noun is separated from the pronoun by an adjective
the article is used before nouns of kindred and quality in the singular, preceded
bj possessive pronouns j as,
E'cco IL TU'O FiGLio. (Guar. Past. Behold thy son.
Fid. 1.)
Arete Cirendica, che dopo la morte dei. Arete of Cyrene, who, after her fa-
su'o PA'DRE, resse la scudla. (Firenz. thor's death, directed the school,
lett.)
Veder pudi con quanta affetto, — La Thou mightest see with what affection
vtte s' avviticchiaaL su'o MAKiro. (Tass. the vine entwines itself round her hus-
Amint. 1. 1.) band [the oak].
Jtcendo riguardo <ILLA VOSTRA ECCEL- Paying regard to your Excellency.
LE'WZA. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 9.)
jJrrfiro di p6rgere i prieghi miei <ILLA I will take the liberty of advancing
VOSTRA ALTE'ZZA. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 5.) my prayers to your Highness.
LA SU'A MAESTa. (Dav.) His Majesty.
USE OF ARTICLES. 459
placed between them ; and when it is preceded by the pronoun lore,
1 their ' ; in which cases the article is used even in the singular ; as,
AL, mio DISPIETATO pddre, to my cruel father ;
LA LORO figlia, LA LORO so- their daughter, their sister.
rella,
The article is also suppressed, when the noun, pre-
ceded by a possessive pronoun, is also preceded by a
numeral adjective, or a demonstrative or indefinite pro-
noun ; as,
con QUESTO suojigliuolo, with this son of hers ;
QTJALCHE suo amico, some of his friends;
OGNI mio ufficio, all my obligations ;
NITJN vostrofdtto, none of your business;
CERTI suoi amid, certain friends of his.
The relative pronoun quale, c which,' when preceded
by its antecedent, requires the article ;* but it refuses the
article when it is used in the signification of chi, ' he
who ' ; when it expresses doubt, or when it expresses
similitude ; as,
SETTE GIOVANI DONNE, i no- seven young women, whose
mi deLLE quAn raccon- names I would relate ;
terei,
QUAL piu ginte possiede, he who has most people [sol-
diers] ;
QUAL guerriero Cristidno, like a Christian warrior ;
quAL piu vi place dtlle due, which of the two you like best.
The words signore or signora, when used substan-
tively in the signification of the master or mistress of a
* In poetry, however, the article is often suppressed ; as,
0 oivA LU'CS, Q.UA'LE, in tre persdne O divine light, who, one substance in
— Ed iina essenza, il del governi e 'I three persons, governest Heaven and the
mtndo. (Bocc. Amet. 98.) world.
E quei ; " Di rado — Incdntra," mi And he replied to me : " It seldom
risptfse, " che di wUi — Fdccia 'L cAjMMi- happens, that any one of us makes the
NO alciin, per O^UA'LE io vddo." (Dant. journey which I am going."
Inf, 9.)
460
SYNTAX.
thing, take the article; but when used adjectively as
titles or epithets, they take the article, when we jpeofc
o/, and they refuse it, when we speak to, a person ; as,
IL SIGNORE [di qu6sta casa] the master [of this house] is
e uscito, gone out;
LA siGtftfRA £ occupdta, the mistress is engaged ;
v6i qul siite IL siowdRE, you are the master here ;
IL siGNdR Cdrlo Ddti ed IL Mr. Charles Dati and Mr. An-
SIGN^R Andrea Cavalcdnti, drew Cavalcanti ;
IL siGNdR Cardindle Spl- Cardinal Spinola ;
nola,
IL siGN6R marchese e LA the marquis and the countess :
SIUNOKA contdssa,
O Mr. Achilles !
vedtte, siGNdRi, com? igli see, sirs, how he had left me ;
m' avea lascidto,
SIGNORI e d6nne, v6i dovite gentlemen and ladies, you
sapere, must know.
Agreeably to this rule, the words signore and signdra, take the
article , when used to express ' our Lord' [God], and * our Lady'
[the Virgin] ;* and refuse it, when used with the adverbs si, « yes ' ;
and no or non, f no ' ; in affirmative and negative phrases ; as,
IL SIGNORE, Jesu,
LA SIGWORA delle Grdzie,
SlGNOR 81,
NON SlGNORA,
our Lord, Jesus ;
our Lady of the Graces ;
yes, Sir ;
no, Madam.
* In the following instances the article is suppressed before the word signdre,
preceded by the possessive pronoun ndstro ;
i: iii.-( 'ni le chidvL
To whom our Lord [Christ] loft the
keys.
What treasures did our Lord demand
of $t. Peter, before he put the keys into
se le chitivi in sua balla 1 (Dant. Inf. 19.) his charge ?
Si d&e 6ssere lo cavaU6re astindnte, e A knight ought to be abstinent, and
digiun&re il fencrdi, in rimem.brd.ma di ought to fust on Friday, in commemora-
WOSTUO SiGwdKJB. (Nov. Ant. 51.) tion of [the death of J our Lord,
A cui N6sTRO S
(Dant. Par. 24.)
Qudnto tesdro v6lle — N^STRO Siowd-
: /// /ir'nnu da San Pidtro — Che ponds-
USE OF ARTICLES.
461
Finally, there are several expressions in Italian, in
which the article is always suppressed ; as,
anddre A C^SA, A PALAGIO to go home, to court, to a
wedding, to a feast, to
church ;
to live or to be at home, in the
shop, in the square, in the
city, in the country ;
Or A CORTE, A NOZZE, A
FESTA, A CHIESA,
stare or essere IN CASA, IN
BOTTEGA, IN PIAZZA, IN
CITTA, IN CAMPAGNA Or
CONTADO,
uscire DI CASA, DI CITTA, DI
CONTADO,
aver FAME, SETE, C!LDO,
FREDDO,
avere IN MA.NO, mettere IN
BOCCA,
to go out of the house, of the
city, of the country ;
to be hungry, thirsty, warm,
cold ;
to have in hand, to put into
one's mouth ;
mendre A SPAS so, tenir TA- to take one to walk, to give a
VOLA, dinner ;
correr Riscmo, render CONTO, to run a risk, to give account ;
dare ORDINE, prestdr FEDE, to give orders, to give credit.
EXAMPLES.
Questo e dunque IL GRAN
MALE, IL GRAN PECCATO, IL GRAN
FATTO ADOPERATO DA GlSIPPO?
(Bocc. g. 10. n. 8.)
Di nuova pena mi convien far
versiy — E dar materia CL VEN-
T^SIMO CANTO — D^LLA PRIMA
CANZONE, ch' e dey sommersi.
(Dant. Inf. 20.)
LA MIA PATRIA mi ha nutri-
cdto saviamente. (Am. Ant. d.
2. r. 6.)
Fo vi voglio dire ciocche IL
VOSTRO AMICO mi fecc stamdne.
(Bocc. g. 3. n. 3.)
Che fdnno omdi meco QUEST i
SOSPIRI ? (Petr. c. 33.)
Qudli leggi, qudli mindcce,
QUAL PATERA ? (BoCC. g. 10. D. 8.)
39*
Is this, then, the great evil, the
great sin, the great crime com-
mitted by Gisippus ?
I must write verses respecting
new torments, to be the subject of
the twentieth canto of the first
song, which treats of those who
are sunk in woe.
My country has brought me up
wisely.
I wish to tell you what your
friend did to me this morning.
What do these sighs do with
me ?
What laws, what threats, what
fear ?
462
SYNTAX.
S6* tu piu che QUALUNQUE
ALTRA dolorosetta FANTE. (Bocc.
g. 8. n. 7.)
Per UNA COTAL MEZZANITA, 6
per contentdre il popolo, elessero
due cavalitri Frdti Gaudenti.
(Gio. Vill. 1. 7. c. 13.)
Ed un, ch' avea L' UNA E L' AL-
TRA MAN mozza. (Dant. Inf.)
E NELLA MEDES1MA CITTA, WfiZ
inese medesimo di Mprile, NEL
MEDESIMO GIORNO s6l, UelV aniW
mille trecento quarantotto^da
questa luce quella luce fu tolta.
(Petr. lett.)
Molti dltri servdvano una mez-
zdna via, NON STRINGENDOSI NEL-
LE VIVAlVDE QUANTO I PR1MI, NE
NEL BERE QUANTO I SECONDI.
(Bocc. Intr.)
Che farle onore — E D' ALTRI
OMERI SOMA,CHE DA' TUOI. (Petr.
s. 5.)
Mio FIGLIO ov5 E, e perche
non e teco ? (Dant. Inf. 10.)
StJO PADRE CI FECE MOLTI
DANNI. (Dav. Stor. 4.)
MlA MADRE, UN FRATELLO
MINORE, ED io, sidmo restdti
neir estrema miseria. (Soav.
Nov.)
To voglio che tu ti vdda, e
MENI TECO TUA MOGLIE. (BOCC.)
InteSO IL NOB1LE ATTO DI
FlLIPPO, USATO A SALUTE DI SUO
MARITO. (Giral. lett.)
I'O IL DIRO A Mio FRATELLO.
(Bocc.)
VOSTRA SORELLA mi mandd
a cdsa Monna Lessdndra, VO-
STRA ZIA. (Cecch. Dot. 2. 2.)
E SlJA ECCELLENZA LE BACIO
LA MANO. (Car. lett.)
Art thou more than any other
weeping woman.
To observe such a middling
course, and to satisfy the people,
they elected two knights [of the
order of] Joyous Friars.
And one, who had the one and
the other hand cut off.
And in the same city, in the
same month of April, on the same
sixth day, in the year one thou-
sand three hundred and forty-
eight, that light (Laura) was
taken from this light.
Many others chose a method
between the two, not confining
themselves in eating like the for-
mer, nor in drinking like the latter.
For to do her honor is a burden
for stronger shoulders than thine.
Where is my son, and why is he
not with thee ?
His father did us many inju-
ries.
My mother, a younger brother,
and I, have remained in extreme
misery.
I wish that thou shouldst go,
and take thy wife with thee.
Having heard of the noble ac-
tion, which Phillip had done for
the safety of her husband.
I will tell it to my brother.
Your sister sent me to Monna
Lessandra's, your aunt.
And His Excellency kissed her
hand.
USE OF ARTICLES.
463
N6i due, secondo che a me We two, as it seems to me,
pare, STIAMO ASSAI BENE CON stand very well with His High-
STJA ALTEZZA. (Firenz. disc. an. -ness.
14.)
GL' INTERESSI DI StJA MAE-
STA. (Bent, lett.)
Ond* io GUARD Ai — NEL viso
A' MIE' FIGLIUOLI senzafar mot-
to. (Dant. Inf. 33.)
A che. rispondoi prima che w
RINGRAZII LE LoRO SlGNORIE.
(Bemb. lett.)
Pose Iddio nell- dnimo AL MIO
DISPIETATO PADRE. (BOCC.)
Sentendo gli Jlmidei, die Mes-
ser Buondelmonte av^va tolta
un* dltra mogUe, e non voUva
LA LORO [FIGLIA, SORELLA], fu-
rono insieme. (Gio. Fior. Pecor.)
Monna Giovanna CON QUESTO
stjo FIGLIUOL.O sen* anddva in
contado. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 9.)
Per consiglio di Q.UALCHE STJO
AMIGO. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 1.)
O molto amdto cuore, OGNI
BIIO UFFICIO v6rso te £ fornito.
(Bocc. g. 4. n. 1.)
j&SSl di NltJN VOSTRO FATTO
s' impdcdano. (Bocc. g. 10. n. 8.)
Gli venne un messo da CERTI
suoi grandisshni AMICI. (Bocc.
g. 4. n. 10.)
SETTE GIOVANI DONNE, i NOMI
DELLE QUALI w in proprid forma
RACCONTEREI. (Bocc. Intr.)
QUAL Pill GENTE POSSIEDE,
Colui e piu dd' suoi nemici av-
volto. (Petr. c. 29.)
Vivesti QUAL GUERRIERO CRI-
STIANO, e sdnto. (Tass. Ger. 3.
68.)
His Majesty's interests.
Whence I looked upon the coun-
tenances of my sons without say-
ing a word.
To which I reply, before thank-
ing your Lordships.
God put into the mind of my
cruel father.
The Amidei hearing, that Mes-
ser Buondelmonte had taken an-
other wife, and wished no longer
for their [daughter, sister] met to-
gether.
Monna Giovanna used to go
into the country with this son of
hers.
By the advice of some friend
of his.
O beloved heart [object], all
my obligations towards thee are
satisfied.
They do not meddle with any
of your business.
He received a message from
certain very great friends of his.
Seven young women, whose
names I would relate in due form.
He who has most people [sol-
diers], is surrounded by most ene-
mies.
Thou livedst like a Christian
and holy warrior.
464
SYNTAX.
Nella vostra elezione sta di
torre QUAL PIU vi PIACE DELLE
DUE, o,se volete, amendue. (Bocc.
g, 7. n. 2.)
IL SIGNORE E USCITO. (Gram.
Gram.)
LA SIGNOBA E OCCUPATA.
(Vanz.)
V6l QUl SIETE IL SIGNORE.
(Bocc.)
IL SIGNOR CARLO DATI, IL
SIGNOR AGOSTINO* NELLI, ED IL
SIGNOR ANDREA CAVALCANTI vi
salutano cara?n6nte. (Red. lett.)
IL SIGNOR CARDINALE SPINO-
LA, nostro legdto. (Bent. lett. 1.)
IL SIGNOR maestro, IL SIGNOR
MARCHESE, E LA SIGNORA CON-
TESSA. (Gram. Gram.)
O SIGNOR ACHILLE ! (Guid.)
E d' villdni rivolto, disse :
11 VEDETE, SIGNORI, COM' EGLI
M' AVEA LASCIATO nelV albergo
in arndse." (Bocc. g. 9. n. 4.)
SlGNORI E DONNE, VOI DOVETE
SAPERE, che (Bocc. g. 6.
n. 10.)
Jlndctrono, e pensomi che tro-
vdrono IL SIGNORE; GESU. (Vit.
S. G. Bat.)
E dal buon uomo furono
SIGNORA DELLE GRAZIE racco-
manddte. (Vit. S. Cater.)
" SIGNOR si, da cavalttre"
gridd il conte. (Manz. Prom.
Spos.)
NON SIGNORA ; £ in compagnia
d1 unforesti&re. (Gold. Avvent.)
Giunti A CASA del padre d6lla
fanciulla. (Bocc. g. 10. n. 10.)
It is at your option to take
which of the two you like best,
or, if you wish, both of them.
The master is gone out.
The mistress is engaged.
You are the master here.
Mr Charles Dati, Mr. Augustine
Nelli, and Mr. Andrew Cavalcanti
salute you affectionately.
Cardinal Spinola, our legate.
The master, the' marquis, and
the countess.
O Mr. Achilles !
And turning to the rustics, he
said : " See, sirs, in what condi-
tion he had left me at the inn."
Gentlemen and ladies, you must
know, that
They went, anl I imagine that
they found our Lord, Jesus.
And by that good man they
were recommended to our Lady
of the Graces.
"Yes, sir, [it is the act] of a
nobleman," cried out the count.
No, madam ; she is accompa-
nied by a stranger.
Having arrived at the house of
the father of the girl.
USE OF ARTICLES.
465
Benche i cittadini non dlbiano
a far cosa del mondo A PAL AGIO,
pur talvolta vi vdnno. (Bocc.
g. 8. n. 5.)
N&^giti aresti amico si caro,
per cui mallevadore tu anddssi
A CORTE. (Senec. Pist.)
Che A NOZZE, O A FESTA, 0 A
CHIESA anddr potesse. (Bocc.
g. 7. n. 5.)
Gli sbanditi uscirono quasi
tuttl DI CITTA, e DI CONTADO.
(Gio. Vill.)
The citizens sometimes go to
court, though they have nothing
in the world to do there.
You would not have so dear
a friend, for whom you would go
into court as bail.
That she might go to wedding,
or to a feast, or to church.
Almost all the outlaws went
out of the city, and out of the
country.
When we wish to designate a portion or a number
of the objects in a class, this may be done in four differ-
ent ways :
First, by naming only the objects of the class ; as,
ho buon vino, or buoni vini, ' I have good wine,' or
6 good wines.'
Secondly, by using the preposition di, cof; as, ho
DI buon vino, or DI buoni vini, £ I have [of] good wine,'
or ' [of] good wines.'
Thirdly, by using the same preposition and the arti-
cle ; as, ho DEL buon vino, or DEI buoni vini, * I have
[of the] good wine,' or i [of the] good wines.'
Fourthly, by using the indefinite pronoun uno, una,
6 a' or £ an,' in the singular; akuni, alcune, ' some,' in
the plural; as, ho UN buon vino, or ALCUNI buoni vini,
c I have a good wine, or ( some good wines.' Thus,
great beasts ;
GRANDI BESTIE,
VIE AM Pis SI ME,
DI belli gioitlli,
pi buone merende,
DELLE canzoni, e DEJ sonetti,
very extensive walks ;
[of] beautiful jewels ;
[of] good luncheons ;
[of the] songs and [of the]
sonnets :
466
SYNTAX.
DEGLI amid, e DE' servidori, some [of the] friends, and some
[of the] servants ;
lor sorella, a sister of theirs ;
suoi vicini, some of his neighbours.
EXAMPL ES.
GRANDI BESTIE hdnno ne' loro
boschi. (Dav. Ann.)
JEsso av6a VIE AMPISSIME.
(Bocc.)
I'O ho DI BELLI GIOIELLI.
(Bocc.)
Jlvevan da lui DI BUONE ME-
RENDE. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 9.)
Comincid a fare DELLE CAN-
ZONI, E DE' SONETTI. (BoCC.
g. 7. n. 3.)
Fdtli prestamente chiamare
DEGLI AMICI, E DE* SERV1DORI,
(Bocc. g. 10. n. 9.)
Jjv6vano TJNA LOR SORELLA,
chiamdta Lisabttta. (Bocc. g. 9.
n. 5.)
Trovollo con ALCUNI suoi vici-
NI. (Bocc. g. 9. n. 8.)
They have great beasts in their
woods.
It had very extensive walks.
I have beautiful jewels.
They had from him good lun-
cheons.
He began to write songs and
sonnets.
Having caused some friends and
some servants immediately to be
called.
They had a sister of theirs,
called Elizabeth.
He found him with some of his
neighbours.
The English make use of the article before an or-
dinal number joined to a proper name ; as, Leo THE
Tenth, &c. ; before a noun in apposition, or imme-
diately following another, of which it expresses a
quality ; as, Mr. Grant, THE son of John, &e. ; also
in speaking of quotations, or of the division of a book ;
book THE first, chapter THE second, &c. : in Italian,
however, the article is suppressed ; as,
il cardindle Richelieu, primo cardinal Richelieu, THE prime
ministro di Luigi Decimo- minister of Louis THE Thir-
terzo, teenth ;
USE OF ARTICLES. 467
giorndta nona, novtlla ottdva, the ninth day, novel the eighth.
In speaking of buying and selling any thing, the
English article a or an, used with nouns of number,
measure, or weight, is expressed in Italian by the arti-
cles il, lo, la ; as,
il frumento si vendeva ad the wheat was sold at eighty
ottdnta lire IL moggio, livres A bushel.
The same article, a or an, in Italian is suppressed :
First, after the verbs to be, to become, with a noun
expressing the country, profession, dignity, or any other
quality of the subject of the verb ; as,
Vittorio Siri, Italidno, Vittorio Siri, AN Italian;
fui poita, I was A poet ;
sarete capitano, you will be A captain ;
diverra cardindle, he will become A cardinal.
Secondly, with a noun of the same kind after the
verbs to make, to create, to appoint, to elect, to choose,
to declare, to proclaim, whatever may be the subject of
the verb ; as,
fecelo maliscdlco, he made him A marshal ;
10 dichiarb mdtto, she declared him A madman.
Thirdly, before a noun in apposition, or qualifying
another which precedes it ; as,
11 Tamigij fiume d' Inghil- the Thames, A river in Eng-
ttrra, land.
Fourthly, before the title of a work ; as,
discorso di Luigi Guicciar- A discourse of Luigi Guicciar-
dini, dini.
EXAMPLES.
IL CARDIJVALE RICHELIEU, Cardinal Richelieu, the prime
PRIMO MINISTRO DI LUIGI DECi- minister of Louis the Thirteenth,
MOTERZO. (Den. Letter.)
468
SYNTAX.
The ninth day, novel the eighth.
He fixed the price of bread, as
if the wheat were sold at thirty-
three livres a bushel ; and it was
selling as high as eighty.
GlORNATA NONA, NOVELLA OT-
TAVA. (BOCC.)
Fissd la tneta del pdne al
prezzo che il pdne avrebbe avuto,
se IL FRUMANTO si fosse venduto
a L!RE trcntatre IL MOGGIO ; e
SI VENDEVA FINO AD OTTANTA.
(Manz. Prom. Spos.)
VITTORIO SIRI,^ ITALIANO, fu
storiografo della corte di Frdncia.
(Den. Letter.)
POETA FIJI, e contdi di quel I was a poet, and sang of that
giusto — Figliuol d* Jlnchise, che just son of Anchises, who came
venne da Troia. (Dant. Inf. 1.) from Troy.
In luogo di quello che morto He substituted him for the one
era, il sostitm, e FECELO siio who had died, and made him his
MALISCALCO. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 8.) marshal.
Vittorio Siri, an Italian, was
historian to the court of France.
SUL TAMIGI, FITJME D' INGHIL-
TERRA. (Bocc. Com. Dant.)
On the Thames, a river in Eng-
land.
DISCORSO DI LUIGI GUICCIAR- A discourse of Luigi Guiccardini
DINI di magistrdti. (Mach.) to the magistrates.
EXERCISE XXX.
The good, which man can derive from a thing,
giovamentOj uomo potere cavdr cosa,
consists either in (the) its utility, or (in the) pleasure.
consistere — utile, piacere.
He advised the king to wish for peace, and not war.
— Confortdre re volere — pace, guerra.
I know (of) many fine things, and (of) beautiful little-
sapere molto bello cosa, bello can-
wish
songs, and I
zone, —
to tell thee one* of them.
dire3 1VX 4 2.
One, in the feminine gender.
USE OF ARTICLES.
469
The queen having turned (herself) to Filomena, or-
regina torndre^ im-
dered her
porre2 l
to I continue.
1 seguitdre.
Now you say, that if.
2 dire\
of I all things created for man, the faculty of
fra I tutto cosa credte — — ,
speech (speaking) is that which properly and par-
parldre, proprio par-
ticularly belongs to (is for) man, speaking I may
ticoldre — uomo, parldre si
be said
pud dir
with reason to be an excellent thing.
ragione — — — ottimo2 cosa1.
And being asked by her (of) the reason (why), he
— domanddre , —
related to her
raccontdre3 2
word for word
ordinatamente1
his whole dream.
not say how, nor if the effect is true ; but
1 dire , effetto vero ;
I believe it for certain. I hope, (that) you will
credere* l certo. — Sperdre,
not permit, that I, for I the great love I bear
sofferire, , | tdnto e tale amore — —
you, should receive death I as a reward. It ap-
— , ricevere2 mdrte1 \ per — guiderdone. — pa'
peared to him, that he gave away, now to one,
rere2 l, 3 esso* dondre12, 5 6 7,
and then (now) to another, castles, cities, and
8 — 9 10 i\9 castello, cittd,
baronies. We have arms, men, and
baronia. drme, uomot
well-fortified
ben muniti
quarters, and provisions for a long war. Speak to
him of past and present things, and of new fears.
— passdto2 3 presente4^ cosa1, 5 — nuovo7 paura6.
Weakness, fear, melancholy, and ignorance are the
Debolezza, timore, rnalinconia, ignordnza
40
470 SYNTAX.
sources of superstition. The Romans were inured
sorgente superstizione. Romano assuefdre
to hardship, fatigue, and a military life. Italy is
disdggio, fatica, — militdre* vita1. Italia
situated between two seas. Cane della Scala was
situdre mare.
one of the greatest lords, that from the time of
piii notdbile aignore,
the emperor Frederic the Second
— imperadore Federigo
to this
in qua
has
been known I in Italy. The Tiber washes a great
sapesse \ Italia. Tevere bagndre — gran
portion of the state I of the Pope I . King Charles
pdrte Stdto \ Pontificio \ . Re Carlo
died, when (the) his son was still in Burgundy
morire, — 3 — figliuolo* essendo1 £orgogna
I under the care of I the Duke Philip. The Arno
appresso a Duca Filippo. 3 4
separates it,* which, as you know, flows from east
divider ez 19 — sapere, cdrrere oriente
to west. Rinieri king of Cyprus. Three younjj
ponente. re Cipro. gio-
men love three sisters, and elope (themselves) with
vane amdre sorella, fuggire*
them to Crete. I see Fracastoro, Bevazzano, Trifon
elleno* Creta. vedere
Gabriel, and farther on (more far) I see Tasso.
— 2 lontdno3— — l.
The Greeks attributed them to their Gods, and to
Greco attribute* l Iddio,
those who performed those great deeds, which are
colui fare gran cosa,
recorded of Hercules and Theseus, of Hector and
tcrivere Ercole Teseo, Ettore
* It, in the feminine gender-
USE OF ARTICLES. 471
Achilles. He has thy sister for his wife. Thou wilt
Achille. sorella — moglie. — Hi-
remember (thyself) to I tell to thy father, that thy
corddre.
di \ dire padre,
children, and his and my nephews, are not descendants
figliuolo, nepote, 1 ndscere6
of I a pal try- fellow. She
da I — paltoniere.
| on their mother's side
per3 mddre*
made (to) her brother, and (to) her sisters, and (to)
Fare fratello, sorella,
every other person, believe, that by the power of de-
persona, crddere , — indozzamento de-
mons this had appeared to them. Have you heard
monio issere accaddre2 *. — udire
how your good brother-in-law treats your sister. This
buono cogndto tr attar e 2 sorella1.
is my master. Without preserving faith to his friend
signore. serbdre fede* l 2 amico3
and to his master. Gentlemen, it is well to taste
456 signore7. Signore, egli buono — —
(that we should taste) (some of) the wine of this
assaggidre vino
able man. Shall I tell it to the master or to
valenV uomo. — dire2 * signore
the mistress ? O, my Lord, when shall I ever
signora ? 0, *, qudndo3
be happy ? A treatise on I painting and
lieto 1 Trattuto
di I pittura
on
di
sculpture I by
scultura di
Leon-Battista Alberti. Guided by
(with the guidance of) Ulamane, a Persian. Having
guida , Persid.no.
left Tauris, a royal city. In the times of the
abbandondre Tduri.de, redle* cittd1. tempo
emperor Frederic the Second. Under the pontificate
mperatore Federigo . pontificdto
472 SYNTAX.
of Pope Clement the Seventh. Tasso, Jerusalem
Pdpa Clemtnte • , Gerusatemme
Delivered, Canto the fourth, stanza the third, the
Liberdta, , >
first verse.
2 verso1.
CHAPTER V.
POSITION OF ADJECTIVES.
ADJECTIVES in Italian, as we have already observed
at pp. 390 and 393, may be placed either before or
after the substantives, which they are to qualify ; as,
[new spouse] bride;
vini BUONI, good wines ;
BUONE vivdnde, good meats.
The adjective is often separated from its substantive by another
word; as,
un monastero di donne assdi a convent of nuns very much re-
FAMOSO, nowned ;
due cose molto ai miei costumi two things very much contrary to
CONTRARIE, my habits.
/There are, however, some adjectives which are to be
placed after their substantives, and others which are to
be placed before them ; as,
Jiera CRUDELE, cruel monster ;
inclinazione BISBETICA, extravagant disposition ;
BEGLI occhi, beautiful eyes ;
GRAN mdle, great evil.
POSITION OF ADJECTIVES.
473
Adjectives of nations ; adjectives expressing taste,
smell, or hearing ; denoting shape or form ; expressing
colors ,* the state of the elements, and physical or
mental qualities ; adjectives that may be wsed as sw6-
stantives ; that are formed of participles ; that govern,
or are connected with, any other part of speech ; are to
be placed after the substantives ; as.
dbito ARABESCO,
favilla LATiNA,
vino DOLCE,
6rbe ODOIUFERE,
voci so AVI,
t6rri RITONDE,
rosdi B i AN CHI,
TEMPESTOSO,
INFERM1CCIO,
persone DOTTE,
[un gob bo], sdrto GOB BO,
Arabian dress ;
Latin tongue ;
sweet wine ;
sweet herbs ;
sweet voices ;
round towers ;
white rose-bushes ;
stormy weather ;
sickly old man ;
wise persons ;
[a hunchback], a hunchbacked
tailor ;
[acc^so, da accendere], lam- [lighted, from to light], a light-
pada ACCESA,
tdzze PIENE di vino,
ed lamp ;
cups filled with wine :
To which may be added the following adjectives, which,
generally, are put after the substantives ; viz.
l&ngo,
long;
Idnguido,
languid ;
corto,
short ;
importuno,
importunate ;
pigro,
lazy;
vizioso,
vicious ;
lento,
slow ;
virtuoso,
virtuous ;
neutro,
neuter ;
pauroso,
fearful ;
intiero.
entire ; coraggioso,
courageous :
* Instances are found, notwithstanding, among the poets, in which adjectivea of
colors are put before the substantives j as,
Colddir'ttto sopra'l VE'RDE SMA'LTO,— Thereon the green enamel [verdure]
Mi far ruostrdti gli spiriti mdgni. (Dant. were soon shown me the great spirits.
V 6sser covtrto pdi di BIA'NCHB PIU'-
ME. (Petr. c. 4.)
40*
To be then covered with white feathers.
474 SYNTAX.
And adjectives ending in e/e, and He ; as,
crwc?ELE, cruel ; | CIVILE, civil.
Numeral adjectives, both cardinal and ordinal, and
the adjective pronouns questo, ' this ' ; quello, ' that ' ;
cotesto or codesto, 6 that near you ' ; are to be placed
before the substantives ; as,
Dtf E dnnij two years ;
6TTO miglia, eight miles ;
il TERZO giornoy the third day ;
la SETTIMA COSA, the seventh thing ;
QUESTO castello, this castle ;
QUELL' anno, that year ;
COTESTE Zagrime, those tears.
When the ordinal numeral adjectives are joined to a proper name,
or are used in speaking of the division of a work ; in which case they
are put after the substantives ; * as,
Urbdno OTTAVO, LEONE DE- Urban the Eighth ; Leo the
CIMO, Tenth ;
pdrte PRIMA, canzone QUARTA, part the first ; song the fourth :
And the cardinal numeral adjectives ventuno, * twenty-one ' ; trentu-
no, ' thirty-one '; quarantimo, ' forty-one *; &c. ; which may be put
either before or after the substantives.
Numeral adjectives, as we have already observed at p. 403, agree
with their substantives in gender and number. Now, by a peculiarity
of language, if the numeral adjectives ventuno, trentuno, &,c., precede
the substantive, this substantive is put in the singular ; but if the
* But, when, in speaking of books, the article is used, we find them, in good
writers, both before and after the substantives j aa,
JVeL VENTE'SIMO CA'NTO del Purgatd- In the twentieth canto of the Purgato-
rio, egli ricdrda la genealog'ia dp Cape- ry, he [Dante] traces the genealogy of
tingi. (Fosc.) the Capets.
Machiavelli, neL L!BRO PR!MO dtlle Machiavel, in the first book of the
Isttirie Florentine. (Den.) History of Florence.
POSITION OF ADJECTIVES. 475
numeral adjectives follow the substantive, then the substantive is put
in the plural ; as,
novantuna RUOTA, ninety-one circles ;
ANNI ventuno9 twenty-one years.
If there is any other word connected with the substantive, and this
word precedes the adjectives ventimo, &c., it is put in the plural,
though the substantive following the adjectives be in the singular ; but,
if the word follows the adjectives, it is put in the plural if it comes
after the substantive, and in the singular if it comes before ; as,
ALTRE novantuna ruota, ninety- one circles more ;
anni trentuno INTERI, thirty-one whole years ;
ventuna PICCOLA STELLA, vici- twenty-erne small stars, very near
NISIME tra di I6ro* to each other.
To which may be added the following adjectives,
which, generally, are put before the substantives ; viz.
• buono, good ;
cattivo, bad ;
grdnde, great ;
picciolooT ? n
piccolo, $
7/77 $ handsome,
m°> ] fine ;
brutto, ugly, bad ;
ricco, rich ;
poor.
There are some adjectives which may be placed
either before or after the substantives, but whose posi-
* This usage may appear contrary to reason ; but it is to be observed that these
and similar expressions are elliptical and stand for, — A'LTRE NOVA'NTA rudte, e U'NA
RUOTA, * ninety cirdes and one circle more ' ; VE'NTI piccole stelle, ed U'NA PICCOLA
STE'LLA, tutte viciNissiME TRA DI LORO, 'twenty small stars, and ono small star, all
very near to each other'; &c., which sentences were first abbreviated into, —
A'LTRE NOVA'NTA, e u NA FUOTA, ' ninety and one circle more ' : VE'NTI ed U'NA
piccoLA STE'LLA, ViciNissiME, &c.,' ' twenty and one small stars, very near, &c.J
and afterwards into, — A'LTHE NOVANTU'NA RUOTA; — VENTU'NA piccoLA STE'LLA,
viciNissiME, &c.
Notwithstanding this, there are instances of some writers using the substantive in
the plural, even when preceded by the numeral adjectives ventuno, &c. ; as,
Enta, eddscanio, suo figliudlo, e ttiita ^Eneas, and Ascanius his son, and all
sba ginte DE'LLE VENTU'NA NA'VI, la the crews of the twenty-one ships, were
d6tta reina accdlse con grande ondre. received by the said queen with great
(Vill.) honors.
Troverete V O'pera delV Alessdndro You will find the Opera of Alexander
nell* 1'ndie piti edrta di qudllo, chefindra in India 561 lines shorter, than it has
i stdta, di 561 VE'RSI. (Metast. lett.) been hitherto.
476
SYNTAX.
tion affects the signification ; as, galante, gentile, solo,
certo, doppio, semplice. Thus,
un GAL ANT' wdmo,
un uomo GALANTE,
un GEN TIL' uomo,
un uomo GENTILE,
un SOLO u6mo,
un uomo SOLO,
una CERTA notizia,
una notizia CERT A,
un DOPPIO amico,
un amico DOPPIO,
un SEMPLICE contadino,
un contadino SEMPLICE,
a good, an honorable man ;
a courteous, a galant man ;
a gentleman, a nobleman ;
a civil, gentle, courteous, kind
man ;
a single man [one only] ;
a single man [not married,
without family] ;
certain [not well ascertained]
news;
certain [undoubted] news ;
a double friend [two or equal
to two friends]';
a double [false] friend ;
a single [no more than one]
countryman ;
a simple [inexperienced] coun-
tryman.
Two or more adjectives, qualifying the same substan-
tive, may be placed before or after the substantive ; as,
VARIE e DIVERSE novita, various and different new
things ;
conpdnni LARGHI e LUNGHI, with garments full and long,
e voci UMILJ e MANSUETE, and language humble and
meek.
Sometimes they are separated by putting one of them
before and the other or others after the substantives,
which adds grace and elegance to the phrase ; as,
NOBILE giovane e BE
a noble and beautiful young
woman ;
NOBILI vestimenti e RICCHI, rich and elegant clothes.
POSITION OF ADJECTIVES.
477
EXAMPLES.
Di* da mia pdrte alia NUOVA
SPOSA, che nelle mie contrdde
s' usa, qudndo alcun forestiere
mdngia al convito della SPOSA
NUOVA .... (Bocc. g. 10. n. 9.)
Ma V 6ra del mangidre venuta,
V abate e tutti gli dltri e di BUONE
VIVANDE e di VINI BUONI sermti
furono. (Bocc. g. 10. n. 2.)
In queste nostre contrdde fu,
ed & ancora, UN MONASTERO DI
DONNE ASSAI FAMOSO di Sttntltd.
(Bocc. g. 3. n. 1.)
Mi converra far DtiE COSE
MOLTO AI MIEI COSTtJMI CONTRA-
RIE. (Bocc. g. 10. n. 8.)
Cerbero, FIERA CRUDELE e di-
v6rsa, — Con tre^gole canina-
m&nte Idtra — Sovra la gdnte,
che quivi g sommersa. (Dant,
Inf. 6.)
Gli storpidti capricci della sua
naturaJe INCLINAZIONE BISBETI-
CA. (Alleg. 157.)
EW e de' suoi BEGLI OCCHI
ved6r vdga. (Dant. Purg. 27.)
Questo e dunque il GRAN MALE,
il GRAN peccdto, il GRAN fdtto
adoperdto da Gisippo ? (Bocc.
g. 10. n. 8.)
U abdte, con tutto che egli in
ABITO ARABESCO fosse, dopo al-
qudnto il rajffigwd. (Bocc. g. 10.
n. 9.
La giovane udendo la FAVELLA
LATINA, dubitd, non fbrse dltro
vento r avisse a Lipari ritorndta.
(Bocc. g. 5. n. 2.)
U uve troppo mature fdnno il
VINOJOIW DOLCE, ma meno potin-
te. (Gr. 4. 22.)
Tell the bride from me, that it
is a custom in my country, when
any foreigner goes to the banquet
of the bride
But when the hour of dinner was
come, the abbot and all the others
were helped to good meats and
good wines.
In this neighbourhood of ours
there was, and there is still, a con-
vent of nuns very much renowned
for sanctity.
I shall be obliged to do two
things very much contrary to my
habits.
Cerberus, cruel and strange
monster, through his threefold
throat barks as a dog over the
multitude which is immersed there.
The lame caprices of his natural
extravagant disposition.
She is charmed to behold [in
the glass] her beautiful eyes.
Is this, then, the great evil, the
great sin, the great crime com-
mitted by Gisippus ?
Although he had on an Arabian
dress, the abbot soon recognised
him.
The young woman, hearing the
Latin [Italian] tongue, feared, lest
a contrary wind had brought her
back to Lapari.
Grapes, when too ripe, make
more sweet wine, but less power-
ful.
478
SYNTAX.
Mdlti anddvano attorno, por-
tdndo nille mdni, chi fiori, chi
ERBE ODORIFERE, € chi diverse
maniere di spezierie. (Bocc. Intr.)
Parldvan rddo con voci soAvi.
(Dant. Inf. 4.)
Sopra le mura d6lla cittd edi-
fied TORRI RITONDE ni6ltO Sp6sS6.
(Gio. Vill. 1. 1. c. 38.)
/ Idti delle qudli vie, tutti di
ROSAI EIANCHI e vermigli, e di
gelsomini 6rano chiusi. (Bocc.
g. 3. n. 1.)
Con 6ssa surse un TEMPO fie-
rissimo e TEMPESTOSO. (Bocc.
g.5.n. 1.)
Fo non vorrei, che noi piglids-
simo un grdnchio, e ch* 6' fosse
qudlche VECCHIO debole o IN-
FERMICCIO. (Mach. Mandr. 4. 9.)
Ma dopo se fa le PERSOJVE
DOTTE. (Dant. Pur. 22.)
Costui fu uno de* piu infdmi
nwstri di quella corte, allidvo di
un SARTO GOBBO. (Dav. Ann. 15.)
Nelle mdni le si ponga una
LAMPADA ACCESA. (Ann. Car.
leti.)
Con alcune TAZZE in mdno
PIENE DI VINO. (Car. lett.)
La VESTA, chi vuol che sia
LT^JVGA fino a? pi6di, chi CORTA
/ ino dlle ginocchia. ( Car. lett.)
Del lungo 60 10 CIVIL ti pregan
fine. (Petr. c. 41.)
JVel ditto anno si comincidj e
fu DUE ANNI seguenti, grdnde
cdro di srdno in Firenze. (Gio.
Vill.)
Many went about carrying in
their hands, some, flowers, some,
sweet herbs, and others, different
kinds of spices.
They spoke seldom, but their
words were sweet.
Upon the walls of the city he
built round towers very frequent.
The sides of which ways were
all lined with white and red rose-
bushes, and jasmine.
With it [the night] arose stormy
and very severe weather.
I should not wish, that we
make a mistake, and that he is
some feeble and sickly old man.
But make the persons, that fol-
low them, wise.
This one was one of the most
infamous monsters in that court,
and a pupil of a hunchbacked
tailor.
Let a lighted lamp be put into
her hands.
Holding some cups filled with
wine.
As for her dress, some will
have it to reach to her feet, others
to her knees.
They beg that you will put an
end to the long civil hatred.
In the said year, began in Flor-
ence a great scarcity of corn,
which lasted for the two following
years.
POSITION OF ADJECTIVES.
479
E QUESTO CASTELLO pOStO prO-
pinquo a Firenze ad OTTO MIGLIA.
(Mach. Stor.)
Quasi tutti, infra il TERZO
GIORNO, monvano. (Eocc. Intr.)
LA SETTIHA COSA che c' induce
afar penitenza, £ . . . . (Pass.)
Le viti facevano gran vista di
dovere QUELL,* ANNO assdi uve
fare. (Eocc. g. 1. n, 2.)
Al qudle la donna disse: " Tan-
cr6dij serba COTESTE LAGRIME a
meno desiderata fortiina." (Bocc.
g. 4. n. 1.)
1 pittori, gli scultori, e gli
architetti del tempo di Paolo
QUINTO, e di URBANO OTTAVO,
non cedevano quasi per dltro ri-
gudrdo a quelli che vissero sotto
LEONE DECIMO, e Paolo TERZO,
fuorchi nel merito di avire aper-
ta e disegndta la strdda. (Den.
Riv. Ital. 1. 23. c. 12.)
Petrdrca, PARTE PR£MA, CAN-
ZONE QUARTA. (Crus.)
Poi per la medisima via pare
des<:e"ndere AL.TRE NOVANTUNA
RUOTA. (Dant. Conv.)
Tennemi amor ANNI VENTUNO
ardendo. (Petr. s. 312.)
Cantdndo ANNI TRENTUNO IN-
TERI sp6si. (Petr.)
La nubilosa d* Orione gli ap-
pari formdta da VENTUNA PIC-
COLA STELLA, VICINfsSIME TRA
DI LORD. (Tris. Elog. Galil.)
n Signor Giovanni Corvino
richi^dea d* esser fdtto GENTILE
UOMO Vinizidno. (Bemb.Stor.4.)
DONNA ^ GENT|L nel ciil> che
si compidnge — Di questo im-
pedimento.
This castle is situated eight
miles from Florence.
Almost all died within the third
day.
The seventh thing which in-
duces us to do penance, is
The vines seemed as if they
would produce an abundance of
grapes that year.
To whom the lady said : " Tan-
cred, save those tears against
worse fortune than this."
The painters, the sculptors, and
the architects of the times of Paul
the Fifth and Urban the Eighth,
were not inferior, perhaps, to those
who lived under Leo the Tenth,
arid Paul the third, in any other
respect than the merit of having
opened and marked the way.
Petrarch, part the first, song the
fourth.
Then he seemed to descend
ninety-one more circles by the
same way.
Love kept me in a flame twenty-
one years.
I consumed thirty-one years in
the study of the Muses.
The nebula of Orion showed
itself to him to be formed of
twenty-one small stars, very near
to each other.
Mr. John Corvino, asked to be
made a Venetian nobleman.
There is a courteous lady in
Heaven who mourns this hin-
drance.
480
SYNTAX.
Jlvendo stco Tancredi VARIE E
DIVERSE NOVITA, pensdtc. (Bocc.
g. 4. n. 1.)
II qudle dmpia materia mi
presto, a, dimostrdre quanta e
qudle sia la ipocresm de* religiosi,
CO5 PANNI LARGHI E LtJ^NGHI, 6
co* visi artificialmente pdllidi, E
VOCI UMILI E MANSUETE
nel domanddr V altrui. (Bocc.
g. 4. n. 2.)
Ormisda, stdto^ in lungo trat-
tdto di dover torre per moglie
Una NOBILE GIOVANE E BELLA,
chiamdta Cassdndra. (Bocc. g.
5. n. 1.) *.
Maestro Mazzio> av6ndo presa
per miglie una bella e gentil
giovane, di NOBILI VESTIMENTI E
RICCHI la tentvafornita. (Bocc.
g. 4. n. 10.)
Tancred having revolved in his
mind various and different new
things.
Which [proverb] affords me am-
ple matter to show how great is
the hypocrisy of the religious,
who have garments full and long,
and faces made pale artificially,
and language humble and meek
for the purpose of getting men's
property from them.
Ormisda, who had been long
talked of as about to marry a
noble and beautiful young woman,
called Cassandra.
Master Mazzeo, having married
a beautiful and noble woman, kept
her well provided with rich and
elegant clothes.
EXERCISE XXXI.
There was once (one time) a man of a ben-
— JEssere — volta uomo be-
eficent heart. This courtier had the misfortune
nefico* cuore1. 2 cortigidno3 l
(bad fortune) of losing the favor (falling in dis-
fortuna — — — cadere dis-
grace) of his master. The astrologer of the Caliph,
grdzia signore. astrologo Califfo,
after various observations, said. I have been writing
vdrio osservazione, dire. — —
so long (it is so long that I write), that my
tdmpo scrivere,
hand I ought to be I accustomed to it. The affairs
mdno dovrebbe essere^, avvdzza? l. 2 c6se*
POSITION OF ADJECTIVES. 481
of the Lombards being prosperous. No* sinful woman
4 Lombdrdo5 l prospero. , rto femmina
was ever more deserving (of) the fire than I (a?
degno3 l fuoco2 — — *
I should be). People really pious, are wise. Although
5. Persona vero pio, sdvio.
he had a very long beard (the beard great).
— — — — — barba grdnde.
Having, I from I a very rich and great merchant,
JEssej'e, \ di \ ricco gran mercatdnte,
become a nobleman. He showed to him a noble-
divenire2 cavali6rel. — Mostrdre^, cava-
man, called Philip Argenti, a man large and robust,
litre, chiamdre Fillppo , uom grdnde nerboruto,
and very disdainful, irascible, and passionate. She
forte sdegnoso, iracondo, bizzdrro.
is to hold
Tens a
her
la
hands up, and I in
mdno dllOj \ da
(the) one
hand a white child asleep (that sleeps), I to 1
bianco fanciullo — dormire, \ per \
represent sleep ; in the other a black onef seemingly
significdre sonno ; da nero
asleep — - (that seems to be asleep),
parere — — dormire,
to represent
sigmfichi
death. Immediately he collected a large, fine, and
morte. Presto — congregdre grdnde, bello,
powerful army.' Some (of the) cherries are sweet,
poderoso oste. certo3 1 ciriegid2 dolce,
and some sour. I have many valuable precious stones.
— certo dgro. mdlto ricco prezioso pietra.
The Pope had kept in the college of Pisa (Pisan
2 Papa3 l tenere Pisdno
college), to learn Divine letters, Raphael of Riario,
studio, impardre Ponlificio lettera, Raffaello ,
a nephew of Count Jerome. The first and most
nipoie Conte Girolamo.
* JVo. for no one. t O/w, for another.
41 •
482 SYNTAX.
essential advantage, which ought to have been do-
• S, f ' At '- i i n . t mt
essenziale jrutto,
rived
si5 dovtva? ricavdre7
from I the new studies, was the knowledge
dil 2 nudvo3 studio*, cognizidne
of the ancient Latin and Greek authors. The Academy
antico Latino Greco autdre. Accademia
of (the) Inscriptions and Belles Lettres is posterior
Iscrizidne E6lla L6tttra postcridre
to the Florentine Academy, and that of the Crusca.
Fiurentmo rfccademia,
Lulli was the father and creator of the French music.
padre creatdre Francise musica.
A certain kind and charitable little-woman. Com-
c6rto compassiontvole carit&tivo doruia. Com-
punction does a great pood, and renders man humble,
punzione fare gran bene, r&ndere uoino umile,
and charitable. He was tall, and of very pleasing
caritativo. grdnde, piacevote
and graceful deportment, and (a young man) of a middle
graziuso maniira^ giooant mizzo
age. (The) their conversation* having been long, and
etd. 3 ragionamdnto* 2 lungo,
the heat excessive. Giving her to eat ^ some roots
caldo grdnde. Ddre^_, da mangidre radice
of herbs, and wild fruits, and dates,
er&a, salvdtico pfano, ddttero.
* Conversation in the plural.
USE AND POSITION OF PRONOUNS. 483
CHAPTER VI.
USE AND POSITION OF CERTAIN PRONOUNS.
PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
ITALIAN personal pronouns, as it has been already men-
tioned at pp. 105, 164, 165, when they form the subject
of the verb may be either expressed or understood ; as,
io vidi wn' area non troppo I saw a good-sized chest ;
grdnde,
Marsilia, come VQI sapete, e Marseilles, as you know, is an
antica t nobilissima cilia, ancient and famous city :
wVe a negdre, ne a pregdre I am neither inclined to deny,
[io] son disposta, nor to pray ;
il che littamtnte [voi] com- which thing you will take in
porterete, good part.
When personal pronouns are expressed, they are gen-
erally put before the verb ; hut they may also be placed
after it ; as,
EGLI avea V anello assdicdro, he held the ring very dear :
JVe voglio [io] qul tralascidr nor do I wish to omit saying
di dire una cosa, one thing.
When, however, a command is given, or a question is
asked, or when, in narrations, the sayings or doings of
a person are mentioned, the pronouns are always put
after the verb ; as,
mdngi [EGLI] del suo, s' egli let him eat of his own proper-
ne ha, ty, if lie has any.
che vdi [TU] factndo per what art thou doing in this
quista contradat street?
" dimmi il perche,' diss" io, " tell mo the cause," said I.
io non piangiva ; piangevan I wept not ; they wept.
ELLI,
484 SYNTAX.
When personal pronouns are preceded by the adverbs
come, siccome, ' as ' ; quanta, ' so much', ' as ' ; they are
put in the objective ; and consequently io, ' I ' ; tu,
i thou ' ; egli, ' he ' ; ella, £ she ' ; eglino, elleno, ' they ' ;
are changed into me, c me ' ; te, ' thee ' ; lui, ' him ' ; lei,
i her ' ; loro, ' them ' ; if the verb of which they are sub-
jects is not expressed] — but they remain in the subjec-
tive, and are never changed, if the verb of which they are
subjects is expressed ; as,
irano SICCOME LUI maliziosi, they were as malicious as he ;
QDANTO ME, puote issere al- any one may be as afflicted as
cun dolente, I :
Se 10 fossi nellavia COME E If I were in the street as he
EGLI, is ;
se tgli fosse in cdsa COME if he were within the house as
SONO io, I am.
When two of these pronouns come, one before, and
the other after, the verb essere, i to be ' ; or credere,
( to believe'; and these verbs imply an idea of transmu-
tation from one to the other of the two pronouns ;
that which precedes the verb, is put in the subjective, and
that which follows it, is put in the objective ; as,
credtndo, c/t' io FOSSI TE, believing me to be thee ;
maravigliossi, che [EGLI] wondered much that he should
FOSSE CREDtfTO Lui, be taken for him.
If the pronouns io, tu, egli, ella, eglino, elleno occur
with an infinitive, and this infinitive follows the pro-
nouns, the pronouns are put in the objective ; but if the
infinitive precedes the pronouns, the pronouns remain in
the subjective ; as,
uddndo Lth con gli altri ES- hearing that he and his com-
SER morto, panions were dead ;
conosctndo LEI non ESSERE knowing that she was not of a
di buon legndggio, good condition :
USE AND POSITION OF PRONOUNS.
485
Non bastdndogli cT ESSER
EG LI divenuto riccJussimo,
dispose di A.NDARE
desima per 6sso9
He not being satisfied with
having become very rich ;
she determined to go herself
after him.
EXAMPLES.
Madonna, fo vfoi questa sera
al i£rdi UN' ARCA NON TROPPO
GRANDE. (BOCC. g. 4. II. 10.)
MARSILIA, COME voi SAPETE,
E in Proven za sopra la marina
sitvdta, ANTICA E NOBILISSJMA
CITTA. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 3.)
Tancredi, NE A NEGARE NE A
PREGARE SON DlSl'6sTA. (BoCC.
g. 4.n 1.)
IL CHE, se sdvj siete, LIETA-
MENTE COMPORTERETE. (BoCC.
g.lO.n.8.)
ECU AVEA L' ANELLO ASSAI
CARO per alcuna virtu, che stdto
gli era ddto ad intendere, che
egii avca. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 9.)
N£ VOGLIO QUl TRALASCIAR DI
D!RE TJNA COSA, la quale mi par
molto vera. (Bott. Stor. Airier.
). 6.)
Or MANGI DEL StJO, S* EGLI NE
HA, che del nostro non manger &
egli. (Boec. g. 1. n. 7.)
O figliuola, CHE VAI TU a
quest' urttj cosi sola, FACENDO PER
QUESTA CONTRADA ?
" DlMMI JL PERCHE," DISS' 10 J
tf per tal convegno, — Che se tu
a ragion di lui ti pidngi, — Sap-
piendo c/ii voi siete^ e la sua p6c-
ca, — JW/ mondo suso ancor w te
ne cdngi." (Dant. Inf. 32.)
io NON PIANGEVA, si dentro
impietrdi : — PIANGEVAN ELLI ;
ed Anselmuccio nuo — Di&sn :
" Tu gnardi si, padre ! cht hdi ? "
(Dant. Inf. 33.)
41*
Madam, I saw late in the even-
ing a good-sized chest.
Marseilles, as you know, is an
ancient and famous cily in Prov-
ence, situated on the sea coast.
Tancred, I am neither inclined
to deny nor to pray.
Which thing, if you be wise,
you will take in good part.
He held the ring very dear, on
account of some virtue, which
they had made him believe it pos-
sessed.
Nor do I wish to omit mention-
ing here one thing, which appears
to me to be very true.
Let him eat of his own prop-
erty, if he has any, for he will not
eat of ours.
Daughter, ;vhat art thou doing
in this street, alone, at this hour ?
" Tell me the cause," said I,
" on such condition, that if right-
fully thou giievest for him, know-
ing who you are, and his sins, I
may repay thee in the world
above."
I wept not ; so petrified was I
within : they \vept ; and my little
Anselrn cri»d : '* Thou lookest so,
father! what ails thee ? "
486
SYNTAX.
Costoro, che dair dltra pdrte
ERANO SICCOME Ltll MALIZIOSI.
(Bocc. g. 1. n. 4.)
SlCChe, QUANTO ME, PUOTE ES-
SERE ALCTJN DOLENTE. (BoCC.
Filoc.)
Che difdste voi, SE 10 FOSSI
NELLA V!A COME £ EGLI,^0d!
EGLI FOSSE IN CASA COME SONO
fo?
CREDENDO dsso, CH' io FOSSI
TE, m' ha con un lastone tutto
rdtto. (Bocc. g. 9. n. 7.)
MARAVIGLIOSSI forte Tedaldo,
che alcuno in tdnto il somiglidsse,
CHE FOSSE CREDUTO Lth. (BoCC.
g. 3. n. 7.)
La giovane, UDENDO LUI CON
GLI ALTRI ESSER MORTO, lunga-
mintc pidnse. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 2.)
CONOSCENDO LEI NON ESSERE
DI LEGNAGGIO che dlla SUtt 710-
biltd bene st6ssej tutto sdegndso
disse. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 9.)
Ma NON BASTANDOGLl D' ^S-
«ER EGLI e' suoi compdgni in
brieve tempo DivENtrxi Riccnfs-
SIMI. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 2 )
Seco DISPOSE di non manddre,
ma D* ANDARE ELLA MEDESIMA
PER ESSO. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 9.)
These, who, on the other side,
were as malicious as he.
So that, anybody may bexas
afflicted as I.
What would you say if I were
in the street as he is, or he within
the house as I am ?
Believing me to be thee, he
has broken all my bones with a
cudgel.
Tedaldo wondered much, that
any one should be so much like
himself, as to be taken for him.
The young woman, hearing,
that he and his companions were
dead, was very much grieved.
Knowing that she was of a
condition that did not well com-
port with his nobility, he said with
disdain.
But he and his friends not being
satisfied with their having become
very rich in a short time.
She determined hot to send,
but to go herself after him.
CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS.
We observed (p. 109), that conjunctive pronouns are
used instead of personal pronouns, when these pronouns
are in the objective or in the relation of attribution,
and are closely connected with a verb, of which they
are the direct or indirect regimen.
USE AND POSITION OF PRONOUNS.
487
This is always the case when there is but one per-
sonal pronoun in the phrase in the afrovementioned rela-
tions^ when the emphasis does not fall upon this pro-
noun, and when this pronoun is not in apposition with
the subject of the verb ; as,
MI potele torre qudnlo tengo you can take away from me
[for, A ME potete torre, all I have ;
&*.],
pieiosamente IL chiamava she called him with a piteous
[for, chiamava LUI], voice ;
ci faceste la leffa [for, A NOI you should put a trick upon
faceste, &c.], us;
LE vi donerd [for, A voi do- I will give them to you.
ner6 LORO],
But, if there are more than one personal pronoun in
the phrase, in the objective or in the relation of attribu-
tion; if the emphasis falls upon the pronouns; and if the
pronouns are in apposition with the subject of the verb,
or in apposition with each other; the conjunctive pro-
nouns are not used and the personal pronouns retain
their places ; as,
thou shalt not murder me ;
I am wont to say that he is,
another self;
you might console both your-
self and me ;
offesi ME per non offender I injured myself not to injure
Ltf i, him ;
it was, to both her and me,
given as a punishment, to
her to flee before me, and to
me to pursue her.
ME non ucciderdi tu,
uso dire, che E' sia un dltro
ME,
potreste voi e ME consolare,
ne fu, ed A LEI ed A ME, per
p<?na dato, A LEI di Jug-
girmi dav&nti, ed A ME di
seguitdrla,
Conjunctive pronouns are commonly put before the
verb, but may also be placed after it. When before
the verb, they are placed immediately after the personal
pronouns ; and when after, they are, as it has been
488
SYNTAX.
already stated at p. 110, always joined to the verb, so
as to form a single, word ; as,
he loves you ;
he gave him his benediction ;
they will run to our houses,
and rob us of our property ;
to send him out of our house
would be in us a great fault ;
they assisted me well ;
6gli vi ama,
dMeoL} la siia benedizione,
cprrerannoci dlle case, e V a-
vtre ci ruberdnno,
U manddrLO fuor di cdsa NE
SAKEBBE gran bidsimo,
ajuldronwi bene,
^TTI uscito di infaite ?
moslrocci un' ombra,
has it escaped thy mind ?
he showed us a spirit.
We have already observed (pp. 338-340), that infinitives and some
other forms of verbs, when joined to conjunctive pronouns, drop their
last vowel, and that the consonant of conjunctive pronouns (gli only
excepted) must be doubled when joined to those forms of verbs,
which either consist of one syllable, or end with an accented vowel.
When the verb is in the infinitive, in the gerund, in
the participle, or in the imperative mood,* the con-
junctive pronouns are always to be put after the verb ;
as,
ricomincio a fdrGL.1
gior piaceri,
trovdndosi egli una volta a
Parigi,
son venula a ristordrTi dP
ddnni avuti,
mag- she began to do him again the
greatest kindnesses ;
he finding himself once in
Paris ;
I am come to make thee some
amends for the evils sus-
tained ;
* Notwithstanding this rule the following examples may be cited from the
classics, in which the conjunctive pronoun is put bfjorc the imperative-. v
Famuli ritornare alia prigidne, e quivi
quanio ti place MI fa ujjliggere. (Bocc.
g. 2. n. 6.)
jQuddfe v6i e Siro a Irovar Callimaco,
e GLI dite die la cdsa & proccdiua bcne.
(Much. Coinm.)
FA in a liii: " Con ]>iangere e con Hitto,
— Spirito malcdcltOj TI riindni." (Dunt.
Inf. 8. )
Cause me to be carried back to my
pri-on, and there cause me to be tor-
mcnted as much as thou pleascst.
Co you and Syrus to find Callimnchus,
and tell him that the affair went on
well.
And T said to him : " In mourning and
ia woe, cursed spirit, do thou remain."
USE AND POSITION OF PRON017NS. 489
ricordandoTi della tua pre- bringing to thy mind thy past
Urita vita, life ;
muovaTi questo solo mio dtto, let this act of mine alone move
thee ;
salutatoio, il domando se egli after he had saluted him, he
si scntisse nitrite, asked him, whether any
thing ailed him ;
sidleMi ludn amico, be my good friend ;
fdttdLA. pi'tndere, having caused her to be taken.
EXCEPTIONS.
When the adverb non, ' no,' or ' not ' ; precedes the verb in the im-
perative, the conjunctive pronouns must be put before the verb ; as,
non si renda ridicola, do not make yourself ridiculous ;
non LE date rttta, do not mind her.
Conjunctive pronouns are sometimes put before, even when the
verb is in the infinitive and in the gerund, preceded by the adverb
non ; as,
mi avea prome'sso di non s* al- she had promised me, that she
lontandre, would not depart ;
non MI vedtndo giungere, not seeing me arrive.
The conjunctive pronoun 76ro, c to them,' or 'them '5
is always to be put after the verb ; as,
veduti LORO in slpoveracon- having seen them in so mis-
dizione, erable a condition ;
mando LORO dicendo . . , . , sent to them, saying
When loro is in the objective, the pronouns gli or Li, for the mascu-
line gender, and le for the fern inine, sometimes take its place, but then
they follow the general rule ; as,
faccndoGi.1 [or, facendo LORO causing them [her children'] to
(i suoi figli)] da buoni mae- be instructed by good masters;
slri insegndre,
GLI fece [or, fece LORO] irn- she made them learn all good
pard.re tutte le buone drti, arts.
When more than one conjunctive pronoun occur with
490 SYNTAX.
the same verb, they follow the same rules, as when they
occur with it singly ; as,
cd' compagni suoi SEGLI he ate them with his com-
mangib, panions ;
deliberdrono di rfdroLiELA they determined to give her to
per mogiie, him as his wife.
Conjunctive pronouns occurring in the same sentence
with two verbs, one of which is in the infinitive, are
generally put before the other verb.; as,
to TI voglio dire, I wish to tell thee ;
non GLIELO voliva dire, she would not tell it to him.
When the other verb is in the imperative, for then they must be pot
after it; as,
faTTi sentire, make thyself heard ;
ZdsciaMiTi vedere, let me look at thee.
When conjunctive pronouns occur with the indefinite
pronoun si, this is always put after, and sometimes
joined to them ; as,
il bel che mi si mostra, the good which shows itself to
me ;
qudnte cose gli si promittono, how many things they promise
to him;
attribuiscecisi a ndstrofdllo, it is attributed to our fault.
Conjunctive pronouns occurring with the adverb ecco ;
and the pronoun lo occurring with the adverh non ;
are put after them ; and, as it has been already stated
at p. 116, form with them one single word.} as,
&COMI, here I am ;
noL niego, I do not deny it.
USE AND POSITION OF PRONOUNS.
491
The particles ne, t of him,' ' of her,' { of it ' ; 'of them';
and ci, ' here, hither ' ; vi, ; there, thither ' ; follow the
same rules as the conjunctive pronouns. They may be
put either before or after the verb, except when the verb
is in the infinitive, in the gerund, in the participle, and
in the imperative ; in which cases they are always put
after it ; as,
it pleases me to speak of it ;
seeing no one of them ;
having taken out her beautiful
robe ;
i fondamenti il re King Tarquin laid the founda-
tions of it ;
I am disposed to go there ;
the cook having employed
there [or in it] all his art ;
mi place
niuno veggendo N E,
la sua bella rqba,
Tarquinio,
son disposto ad anddrvi,
il cudco postovi tiitta V Me,
fdteci diplngere la Cortes'ia,
cause Liberality to be painted
there.
If the particles ci, vi, occur with one of the conjunc-
tive pronouns mi, ti, ci, vi, usage strictly requires that
the particles . should be placed after the pronouns; but
they are sometimes put before them, particularly if eu-
phony demands it; as,
costoro mi ci fanno entrdre
io ti ci vtdo simpre,
they make me enter there [or
into it] ;
I see you here always:
Vi ti porro iina tavoluccia, I shall place for thee there a
small table ;
diro che vi ci ablia fdtta ve- I will say that he has caused
nlre per dcndri, you to come here for money.
When the particles ci,vi, o-ccur with the pronouns, Io,
la, li, gli: le, they are generally put before the pronouns,
and, as has been mentioned at p. 160, form with them
a single ivord ; but they may be placed also after them,
separately ; as,
ingtgnati di rilentrcEio, contrive to keep him there ;
492
SYNTAX.
ringrazidndo Iddio che con-
ddtto VEL' aieva,
thanking God that he had con-
ducted him there :
sua camera il mise, e she put him in her room, and
dentro IL vi serrb, there she locked him in.
EXAMPLES.
V6i MI POTETE TORRE QUANTO
TEN GO, e dondrmi, siccume vostro
uomo, a chi vi pidce. (Bocc. g.
3. n. 9.)
Assdi volte, la nittey PIETOSA-
B1ENTE IL, CHIAMAVA. (BOCC. g.
4. n. 5.)
Ma guarddte che voi non ci
FACESTE LA BEFFA. (BOCC. g.
8. n. 1.)
S' elle m pidcciono, w LE vi
DONERO. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 9.)
J3 udendo che egli av6a morti
due confessori, disse fra se me-
desimo : " ME KON UCCIDERAI
TU." (Pass.)
Tdnto posso disporre di lui,
che io uso DIRE, CHE certo E'
SIA UN ALTRO ME. (Firenz. )
Ma, dove voi voUste, per av-
ventura. voi POTRESTE voi E ME
COKSOLARE. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 9 )
OFFESI ME PER NON OFFENDER
Ltfi. (Petr.)
COSI NE FU, ED A LEI ED A
ME, PER PENA DATO, A LEI DI
FUGGIRMI DAVANTI, ED A ME,
che gid cotdnto /' amai, DI SE-
GUITARLA. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 8.)
I'o so che EGLI vi AHA. (Bocc.
g.S.n.7)
DlEDEGLI LA stTA BENEDIZI-
6NE. (EOCC. g. I. n. 1.)
CORRERANNOCI ALLE CASE, E
L* AVERE CI RUBERANNO. (BOCC.
g. 1. n. 1.)
You can take away from me
all I have, and give me, like one
of your men, to whomsoever it
pleases you.
A great many times, during the
night, did she call him with a
piteous voice.
But beware putting a trick upon
If you like them, I will give
them to you.
And hearing that he had mur-
dered two confessors, he said to
himself: " Thou shall not murder
me"
I can so much depend on him,
that I am wont to say, that he
is certainly another self.
But, if you wishe<), you might
perhaps console both yourself and
me.
I injured myself not to injure
him.
Thus it was, to both her and
me, given as a punishment, to her
to flee before me, and to me, who
loved her so much, to pursue her.
1 know that he loves you.
He gave him his benediction.
They will run to our houses, and
rob us of our property.
USE AND POSITION OF PRONOUNS.
493
IL MANDARLO FUOR DI CASA
nostra, cwsl infermoy NE SAREB-
BE GRAN BIASIMO. (BOCC. g. 1.
n. 1.)
AJUTARONMI elle BENE. (Bocc.
g. 4. Proem.)
ETTI igli da stamdne USCITO
DI MENTE ? (BOCC. g. 7. D. 8.)
MOSTROCCI UN' OMBRA doll' un
cdnto sola. (Dant. Inf. 12.)
RlCQMINCIO A FARGLI I MAG-
GIOR PIACERI. (BOCC. g. 8. D.
10.)
TROVANDOSI EGLI TJNA VOLTA
A PARIGI. (Bocc. g. 1. n. 7.)
10 SON VENTJTA A RISTORARTI
DE' DANNi, U qudli tu hdi giti
AM^Tiper me. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 9.)
Federigo, RICORDANDOTI DEL-
LA TIJA PRETERITA VITA. (BOCC.
g. 5. n. 9.)
MUOVATI alqudnto QUESTO SO-
LO MIO ATTO. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 7.)
SALUTATOLO, IL DOMANDO SE
SI SENTISSE NIENTE. (BOCC.)
SIATEMI, adunque, sdmpre BUON
AMICO. (Gang, lett.)
FATTALA prestamente PREN-
DERE. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 7.)
NON SI RENDA RIDlcOLA CWCd
le usdnze del mondo. (Gang,
lett.)
NON LE DATE RETTA, U& plU
lafrequentdte. (Vanz.)
NON MI VEDENDO GltJNGERE
in t6mpo, se ne ritornd, benchb
MI dVtsse PROMESSO DI NON s' AL-
L.ONTANARE flUO ttl miO CLTr'lVO.
(Vanz.)
42
To send him out of our house,
so sick as he is, would be in us
a great fault.
They assisted me well.
Has it, since this morning, es-
caped thy mind ?
He showed us a spirit by itself
apart.
She began to do him again the
greatest kindnesses.
He finding himself once in
Paris.
I am come to make thee some
amends for the evils thou hast
sustained on my account.
Frederic, bringing to thy mind
thy past life.
Let this act of mine alone move
thee at least.
After he had saluted him, he
asked him, whether any thing
ailed him.
Be, then, always my good
friend.
Having caused her immediately
to be taken.
Do not make yourself ridicu-
lous respecting the customs of the
world.
Do not mind her, nor visit her
any longer.
Not seeing me arrive in time,
she went back, although she had
promised me, that she would not
depart before my arrival.
494
SYNTAX.
VEDUTI LORD IN si POVERA
CONDIZIONE ridotti. (Pecor.)
E MANDO LORD DICENDO ....
(Bott. Stor. Amer.)
/ quali [i suoi figli] facevano
stupire chi GLI conoscdva, e la
mddre FACENDOGLI DA BUONI
MAESTRI INSEGXARE, GLI FECE
IMPARARE TtJTTE LE BUONE ARTI.
(Pecor. g. 10. n. 1.)
Comprdti i capponi insidme
CO* COMPIGNI SUOI SEGLI MAN-
GIO. (Bocc. g. 9. n. 3.)
DELIBERARONO DI DARGLIE-
LA PER MOGLIE. (BOCC. g. 2.
n. 8.)
Mendi quello che 10 TI VOGLIO
DIRE. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 3.)
La ddnna rispose, che NON
GL.IELO VOLEVA DIRE. (BOCC.
g. 7. n. 5.)
Grtda forte, FATTI ben SENTIRE.
(Bocc. g. 8. n. 6.)
LASCIAMITI VEDERE a mio
senno. (Bocc.)
IL BEN, CHE MI SI MOSTRA 171-
torno. (Petr. c. 7.)
QUANTE COSE GLI SI PROMET-
TONO tiitto Jl dl. (Bocc. g. 3.
n. 1.)
ATTRIBUfsCESI A NO3TRO FAL-
LO. (Cavalc.)
Lo s^coldre^accostdtosi alV u-
scio, disse: * ECCOMI qu\t Madon-
na.' (Bocc. g. 8. n. 7.)
In drmi egli 6ra prode, — NOL
NIEGO io9 no. (Alf. Saul. 2. 1.)
Egli MI PIACE DI PARLARNE.
(Bocc. g. 3. n. 7.)
NltJNO VEGGiNDONE. (BOCC.
g. 2. n. 2.)
Having seen them reduced to
so miserable a condition.
And sent to them, saying ....
Who [her children] astonished
all those, who knew them ; and
their mother, causing them to be
instructed by good masters, made
them learn all good arts.
Having bought the capons, he
ate them with his companions. »
They determined to give her to
him as his wife.
Listen to what I wish to tell
thee.
The lady replied, that she would
not tell it to him.
Speak loud, make thyself heard.
Let me look at thee at my plea-
sure.
The good, which shows itself
about me.
How many things they promise
to him all day.
It is attributed to our fault.
The scholar, coming to the
door, said : ( Here 1 am, Madam."
He was brave in arms, I do not
deny it, no.
It pleases me to speak of it.
Seeing no one of them.
USE AND POSITION OF PRONOUNS.
495
TRATTANE celatamente LA stf A
BELLA ROBA. (BoCC. g. 8, U. 9.)
GETTONNE i FONDAMENTI IL
RE TARQuimo. (Dav. Stor. 1. 3.)
Fo SON del tutto Dfsposxo AD
ANDARVI. (BOCC. g. 1. H. 2.)
IL cuoco^ presolo, e POSTOVI
xtrxTA L' ARTE .... (Bocc. g.
4. n. 5.)
FATECI DIPINGERE LA CORTE-
SIA. (Bocc. g. 1. n. 8.)
COSTORO MI CI FANNO ENTRARE
per inganndrmi. (Bocc. g. 2.
n. 5.)
r *
lO TI CI VEDO SEMPRE. (NOV.
Ant. 67.)
JPO VI TI PORRO T^NA TAVOLtJC-
CIA. (Bocc. g. 8.)
VO DIRO CHE VI CI ABBIA FAT-
TA VENIRE PER DENARI. (BOCC.
g. 3. n. 6.)
INGEGNATI DI RITENERCELO.
(Bocc. n. 5.)
RlNGRAZIANDO IDD1O CHE CON-
DOTTO VEL* AVEVA. (BOCC. g.
2. n. 4.)
NELLA stfA CAMERA IL MISE,
E DENTRO IL VI SERRO. (BOCC.)
Having taken out secretly her
beautiful robe.
King Tarquin laid the founda-
tions of it.
I am entirely disposed to go
there.
The cook having taken it, and
having employed in it all his art,
Cause Liberality to be painted
there.
They make me enter into it [the
chest] in order to play Some trick
upon me.
I see thee here always.
I shall place for thee there a
small table.
I will say that he has caused
you to come here for money.
Contrive to keep him there.
Thanking God that he had con-
ducted him there.
She put him in her room, and
there she locked him in.
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
Possessive pronouns rnay be placed either before or
after the nouns expressing the things possessed ; as,
la MIA persdna, i MIEI mdli, my person, my misfortunes ;
le membra MIE, il sdngue my limbs, toy blood ; </^
gli 6cM suoi, Vordine L6no, her eyes, their management.
496 SYNTAX.
In addressing a person, however, and in exclamations,
possessive pronouns are to be put after the nouns ; as,
padre uioyJigUuM MIO ! my father, my son !
Italia MIA, Signdr MIO ! my Italy, my Lord !
Possessive pronouns are always to be repeated before
nouns of different gender and number ; as,
la LOR virtu, i LOR costumi, their virtue, their customs, and
e It LORO manie'rc, their manners.
But if the nouns are of the same gender and number,
they may be used only once, after the said nouns ; as,
It sirocchie e It mogli LORO, their sisters and their wives.
We have already observed (p. 132), that possessive
onouns may be expressed in Italian, by the conjunc-
tive pronouns of that person to which the possessor be-
longs. This is always the case when they are accom-
panied by a noun expressing the limbs of the body or
denoting a part of one's dress ; as,
st MI caccidsser gli OCCHI if they should tear out my
[for, se cacciasser i MIEI eyes ;
OCCHI],
non \ijiaccate il COLLO .[for, do not break your neck.
non fiaccate il VOSTRO
COLLO],
The English possessive pronouns his, her, their, when they refer to
one's own limbs or parts of dress, are expressed in Italian by the con-
junctive pronoun si ; but when they refer to another person's limbs
or parts of dress, they are expressed by the conjunctive pronouns gli,
le, lorOj according1 to the gender and number of the possessor ; as,
si levd r anello di DITO [for, he took off the ring from his
levo P anello del suo DITO], [own] finger] ;
risolve di levdrzi le SCARPE he resolved to take off his [own]
[for, di levare le SUE SCAR- shoes :
PE],
GLI ruppe tutto il viso [for, he disfigured all his [another per"
ruppe tutto il suo (or, il di son's] face ;
lui) vfso],
USE AND POSITION OF PRONOUNS.
497
straccidtaLE la CTJFFIA [for,
stracciata la stJA (or, la di Ui)
having torn her [another per-
son's] headdress.
Often the personal pronouns accompanying a noun
expressing the limbs of the body, or denoting the parts
of one's dress, are entirely suppressed when they relate
to the principal subject of the proposition ; as,
c6rsi a cercdrmi il l&to cdtta I laid immediately my hand on
mdno [for, colla MIA ma- my side ;
no],
asciug&ndosi gli occhi col bel drying her eyes with her beau-
ve/o, [for, col stfo bel v£- tiful veil,
lo],
EXAMPLES.
E siccome LA MIA PERSONA
cresce"va, cosl le MIE belldzze, de1'
MIEI MALI special cagione, multi-
plicdvano. (Bocc. Fiam.)
Non son rimdse ac6rbe ne ma-
ture — LE MEMBRA MIE di la, ma
son qui me'co — COL SANGUE suo,
e con le stfE giunture. (Dant.
Purg. 26.)
Ed tra.no GLI OCCHI suoi di
qu6l color e che lo grifone. (Buti.
com. Inf. 4.)
S&nza L' ORDINE ^LORO rdde
v6He riisce alcuna NOSTRA opera
a Iaud6vol fine. (Bocc. Intr.)
Gdddo mi si gittd dist&so d'
piedi, — Dic6ndo : " PADRE MIO,
che non m' aiuti ? J> (Dant. Inf.
33.)
O FIGLIUOL MIO ! non ti dis-
pidccia, — Se Erunitio Luting un
poco teco — Ritorna indietro.
(Dant. Inf. 15.)
42*
And as [my person or] I grew
up, my beauty, the first cause of
all my misfortunes, increased.
I have not left yonder my limbs,
either crude or in mature age ; but
they bear me here, fed with blood
and sinew-strung.
And his [Caesar's] eyes were
as black as those of a raven.
Without their management it
seldom happens that any under-
taking of ours succeeds.
Gaddo stretched himself at my
feet, saying : " My father, why
dost thou not assist me ? "
O my son ! do not disdain that
Brunetto Latini should turn back
a little, and go with you.
498
SYNTAX.
ITALIA MIA, benche il parldr
sia inddrno — Alle pidghe mor-
tdli, — Che nel bel corpo tuo si
spesse veggio. (Petr.)
O SIGNOR MIO ! qudndo sard
w liito — A veder la^ vendetta,
che, nascosa, — Fa dolce V ira
tua nel tuo segreto ? (Dant. Purg.
20.)
Rigudrda tra tutti i tuoi no-
bill uomini, ed esdmina LA LOR
VIRTU, I LOR COSTUMI, E LE LORO
MANIERE. (BOCC. g. 4. D. 1.)
Jlppresso costoro^ LE SIROC-
CHIE E LE MOGLI LORO VenHCTO.
(Bocc. g. 3. n. 7.)
O SE CSSi MI CACCIASSER GLI
OCCHI o MI traessero i DENTI, o
mozzdsserMi le MANI, a che sare*
io ? (Bocc, g. 9. n. 1.)
Egli e gran peccdto che voi
NON vi FIACC!TE IL COLLO.
(Bocc. g. 9. n. 6.)
E COS\ SI LEVO L' ANELLO DI
DITO, e diello al giudice. (Pecor.)
Gudrda se dltri lo scorge, ed
alfine si RISOLVE DI LEVARSI LE
SCARPE. (Lod. Nov.)
E cost diccndo con le pugna
TtJTTO IL V1SO GLI RtJPPE. (BoCC.
g. 9. n. 8.)
E STRACCIATAL.E LA CUFFIA,
diceva. (Bocc. g. 9. n. 8.)
Di che io sentiva si fdttc dolo-
re, che, desto, COLLA MANO CORSI
subitamente A CERCA.RMI IL LA-
TO. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 6.)
E fdccia forza al Cielo, —
ASCIUGANDOSI GLI OCCHI COL
BEL V£LO. (Petr. c. 11.)
My Italy, although words will
have no power to heal the mortal
wounds which I see, in so great
a number, in your beautiful body.
O my Lord ! when shall I re-
joice to see the vengeance, which
thy wrath, well pleased, broods in
secret silence ?
Look among all your noblemen,
and examine their virtue, their
customs, and their manners.
After these, came their sisters
arid their wives.
If they should tear out my
eyes, or draw out my teeth, or
lop off my hands, to what should
I be reduced ?
It is a great pity you do not
break your neck.
And thus he took off the ring
from his finger, and gave it to the
judge.
He looked around lest he should
be seen, and at last he resolved to
take off his shoes.
And thus saying he disfigured
all his face with blows.
And having torn her headdress,
he said.
Which gave me such a pain,
that, having awaked, 1 laid imme-
diately my hand on my side.
And should compel Heaven [to
have pity upon me], drying her
eyes with her beautiful veil.
USE AND POSITION OF PRONOUNS. 499
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
The indefinite pronouns, stesso, medesimo, c same ' ;
and sometimes tutto, * all,' ' every'; are put either be-
fore or after the noun ; as,
quel dl STESSO ; in quel ME- that same day ; in that same
DESIMO dbito, dress ;
TtiTTE le notti ; le qudli cose every night ; all which things.
T1JTTE,
Tutto, followed by a numeral adjective, takes the
particle e after it ; as,
tutti E trt, all three.
The indefinite pronouns veruno, nessuno or nissuno,
neuno or niuno, nullo, i no one,' * nobody ' ; and nulla,
niente, ' nothing ' ; as we have already mentioned at
p. 147, may have also the signification of c any one,'
c anybody' ; and 'some or any thing'; according to
their respective position in the sentence.
They have the first signification, — (of ' no one,' * no-
body ' ; and c nothing '), when they are placed before
the verb, or when they are placed after a verb preceded
by the adverb non ; as,
per VERUN modo poteva, she could do it in no manner ;
NON/a cdldo VERTJNO, it is not at all warm :
NESSUN si dolse di servitii, no one complained of servi-
tude ;
NON si pud fare NISSUNA co- no-thing can be done :
sa,
NEUNO ebbe gli Dei sifavore- no one had the Gods so favora-
voli, ble ;
NON ve n' e NI^NO si cattivo, there is no one so had :
N^LLO martirio sarebbe do- no torment were a well-pro-
lor compito, portioned pain ;
500 SYNTAX.
NON gli mdnca N# LLA, he wants nothing i
di NTJLLA fti dispesi, let him despair of nothing ;
NON nefard NTJLLA, I will do nothing about it :
NIENTE dico del tuo sldto, I say nothing about thy con-
dition ;
NON gli parribbe NIENTE, it would seem to him nothing.
But when they are placed after a verb not preceded
by the adverb non, and when the phrase in which they
occur implies a question, or expresses a doubt, the
abovernentioned pronouns have the last signification, —
(of *any one,' 'anybody'; and 'some or any thing ');*
as,
senzafdre a voi VERTJN pro, without doing any good to
yourself;
se VERUNO vede la pena mia, whether any one observes my
sorrow ;
qudndo s' accdmpano in NES- when they encamp in any
STJNO Iu6go, place ;
trovossi NITJNO che contradi- was there found any one who
dsse alia podestdde ? opposed public power ?
le dirdi se vuol NTJLLA, thou wilt ask her, whether she
wants any thing ;
* There are instances, however, in good writers, which seem in contradiction
with these rules ; as may be seen by the following examples :
E qudndo NESSU'NO «' era preso, sti- And when any one was taken, he was
bito era impiccdto per la gola. (Stor. directly hung by the neck.
Pistol.)
Che NON rimarrebbe a sostenere pena That there would not remain in pur-
NESSU'NA nel purgattirio per gli peccdti. gatory any punishment to suffer for sins.
(Pass.)
NON c' i ragione NESSU'NA per la There is no [or not any] reason why it
quale 6' debba entrdre in un tal determi- should enter in such a determinate de-
ndto grddo di velodtd. (Gal. Sist.) gree of velocity.
Mai NON menefardpid NID'NA. (Bocc. He will never do me an- [or, any]
g. 8. n. 3.) other [thing like this.]
C6me ilia vide un giovlnetto di fdrma As soon as she sees a youth somewhat
NIE'NTE riguardevolc, tlla s' accende del- handsome, she falls in love with his
le site bellezze. (Fir. Asin. 40.) beauty :
'In whieh the pronouns nessuno, nessuna, niitna are used instead of alcuno, alcii-
na, ' any,' ' any person,' * any thing ' ; and niente instead of un p6co, alqudnto, ' a
little,' ' somewhat.'
USE AND POSITION OF PRONOUNS.
503
il domando se si seniisse he asked him whether he felt
NIENTE, any thing.
EXAMPLES.
Creduto abbidmo che costei We supposed, that she had been
nella cdsa> che mi fu Q/UEL DI burnt that same day along with
STESSO drsaj ardesse. (Bocc. g. the house.
5. n. 5.)
Guarddndo tra molte, che qm-
vi n' erano IN QUEL MEDESIMO
ABITO. (Bocc. Lab.)
E 'I rossignuol — TUTTE LE
NOTTI si lamenta e pidnge.
(Petr.)
LE QUALI COSE TUTTE SOHO da
esser diligentemente considerate.
(Cresc. 12. 2.)
Fratelli miei} che anddte voi
cercdndo, a quest' 6ra} TUTTI E
TRE ? (Bocc. g. 7. n. 8.)
Qudndo venne il tempo, quella
misera PER VERUN MODO POTE-
VA. (Vit. SS. PP. 2. 21.)
Anzi NON FA egli CALDO VE-
RTJNO. (Bocc, g. 5. n. 4.)
NESSUN DI SERVITU giammdi
si DOLSE, — Ne di morte, quant'
w dilibertdte. (Petr. Tr.Mort. 1.)
NON SI PUO COSA NISSUNA FARE
a lor modo. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 1.)
NETJNO EBBE mdi GLI DEI si
FAVOREVOLI, che nel futiiro gli
potdsse obbligdre. (Bocc. Fiam,
5. 84.)
EgU NON VE N' E NIUNO SI CAT-
Tfvo, che non viparesse uno im-
peratore. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 9.)
NTJLLO MARTIRIO, fuorche la
tua rdbbia, — SAREBBE al tuo
furor DOLOR COMPITO.
Inf. 14.)
(Dant.
Looking among so many wo-
man, who were there, clad in that
same dress.
And the nightingale every night
laments and weeps.
All which things ought to be
carefully considered.
Brothers, what are you looking
for, all three, at such an hour ?
When the time arrived, that un-
fortunate one could not do it in
any manner.
Nay it is not at all warm.
No one ever complained of
servitude or death, as much as I
do of liberty.
Nothing can be done in their
manner.
No one even had the Gods so
favorabla as to oblige them to
favor him in future.
There is no one so bad, that
you would not take him for an
emperor.
No torment, save thy rage, were
to thy fury a well-proportioned
pain.
502
SYNTAX.
O'nde felice dicono tsser colm,
Che NON GLI MANCA NtJLLA.
(Fr. Giord. 20.)
Chi in alcuna cosa pud spe-
rdre, DI NTJXLA si DISPERI.
(Bocc. Fiam. 5. 85.)
Altriminti mdi NON NE FARO
NtJLLA. (BOCC. g. 1. n. 2.)
DEL Ttfo presente STATO
NIENTE DICO. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 6.)
Se V uomo magndnimo desse
ogni cosa per amore, NON GLI
PARREBBE AVER DATO NIENTE.
(Cavalc. Speech. Cr.)
Fare"ste ddnno a noi, SENZA
FARE A VOI PRO VER1JNO. (BOCC.
g. 8. n. 9.)
Allora. gudrdo intornot SE VE-
RIJNO — VKDE LA PENA MIA,
che m' ha conquiso. (Rim. Ant.
96.)
QuiNDO S* ACCAMPANO IN NES-
ST^NO LUOGO per cagione di guer-
ra. (Buti. Purg. 7.)
TROVOSSI in Mildno NIXJNO,
CHE CONTRADIA.SSE ALLA PO-
DESTADE ? (Nov, Ant. 21.)
TU LE DIRAl S* 6lla VUOL Nt7L-
LA. (Bocc. g. 9. n. 5.)
IL DOMANDO SE 6gU SI SENTIS-
SE NIENTE. (BOCC. g. 9. n. S.)
Whence they call him happy
who wants nothing.
Let him, who can hope in any
thing, despair of nothing.
Otherwise I will never do any
thing about it.
I say nothing about thy pres-
ent condition.
If the magnanimous man should
give every thing for love, it would
not seem to him that he had given
any thing.
You would injure us without
doing any good to yourself.
Then I look around me to see
whether any one observes that
sorrow, which has subdued me.
When they encamp in any
place on account of war.
Was there found any one in
Milan, who opposed the public
power ?
Thou wilt ask her whether she
wants any thing.
He asked him whether he felt
any thing.
EXERCISE XXXII.
They rob you.
rubdre
Have pity
compassione
di
the afflicted.
afflitto.
Dost thou know the daughter of Cidippe ? May you
conoscere3 l figliuola? ?
USE AND POSITION OF PRONOUNS. 503
be pleased to bless (the) my soul. Let him call
VoUre benedire 2 dnima1. Chiamdre
the leaders to a council. What thou wishest that
duca — consiglio. volere
1 should say. She said : " How can that be " ?
dire. Dire : « potere questc? l " ?
He replied : " Thou wilt see it, if thou comest im-
Dire: " vedtre venire to-
mediately." I am here with one, who, I having I
sto" , I per avere \
my name, wishes to be I myself | in every thing
nome, volere — io ogni cosa
he does, or rather, that I should be he. He
t •>
saw himself I deprived I of the hope of having her
ved6re \ privdre \ sperdnza
for his wife - — ( I to have to have I her himself),
I dov6re avere \ 6gK>
if Ormisda did not marry her.
prendere
The Turk then said : " If I were thou, I should
Turco dire : tl ,
perhaps infringe the law ; but as I am myjself and
forse violdre legge ; perche io
not thou, I will never do it."
non1 mai* fdre* 2."
I will tell thee the truth, companion, I like
voUre dire vero, sozio,
her (she pleases me) so much, that I could not
piac6re , potere
tell it to thee. He sent her I word I that, with-
dire . — Manddre \ a dire \ ,
out any more delay, she should do what (that
indugio, . — dovere fare —
which) he had told her. I order thee to go
— avere3 dire1 2. — Comanddre — —
504 SYNTAX.
(that thou go) immediately I after I thy father. You
anddre* incontanente1 \ per padre.
promised me 1 to I make me speak with (the) your
promettere \ di \ fare parldre
wife. I Pray, leave me in peace. Why dost thou
donna1. \ In grdzia,
lascidre pace. Che
not reply, wicked man ? Art thou become dumb
rispdndere, reo udmo ? divenire tnutolo
in hearing me ? Having raised (herself upon I her
— udire ? Lerare in \ —
feet), she said : " Brother, you are (the) welcome."
pfct — dire : " Fratdllo, benvcnuto."
No, she would not believe it, and would turn me
, credere , scaccidre
out of her house. He begged him that he would
— cdsa. — Pregdre — inse-
show him how they did. " Then," said he, " let
gndre — fare. " ," dire , «'
us do it." Say it frankly. (I), as for me, do
fare .'-' Dire sicuro. , — ,
not remember (myself of) it. Having caused a purse
ricorddre . -7- Fare 2 bdrsa3
to be brought to her- (self), she put it (to him) 1 into I
venire1 , — mettere \ in \
his hand, and said : " Count if they are five-hun-
— mdno, dire : " Annoverdre —
dred." He conquered Scotland, and was crowned
." conquistdre Scozia, corondre
king of it. I did not discern there any thing.
re . discfrnerc cosa.
There is Minos I who I grins horribly. 1 will
stdre I c* | ringhidre3 orribile.1 fd-
cause it to be painted there. Where art thou, good
re dipingere . — , buona
woman ? Here I am (behold me), what dost
donna ? — — — ?
- USE AND POSITION OF PRONOUNS. 505
thou wish ? We are (behold us) ready to obey
2 domanddre1 ? — — pronto ubbidire
you.
My friend and not the friend of fortune. My
amico fortuna.
father told (it to) me, that I should take care (my-
4 dire3 l, guarddre
self) of ever setting- foot in Messenia. O Samuel,
giammdi2 porre* piede5 3 4.
once my true father, dost thou command it ? I As
vero pddre, imponere ? \ Per
mu»ch as
qudnto
thou
valuest I my affection. I In order
dbbii. cdro I amor. Per
to die as your daughter, and not as your enemy.
mor'ire — ' fi&lif^ nemica.
He let fall his hook at his (own) feot. Weeping
— Lascidre cascdr uncino — piede. Pidngere
he threw himself I on
— gittdre a
his (another person's) neck.
— — collo.
The unfortunate ones wept, scratched their (own) faces,*
meschina — pidngere, sgraffidre — viso,
tore their (own) hair.f In thinking of it I shud-
strappdre — capello. pensdre — — racca-
>
der (myself all\ over) and my heart melts (itself),
priccidre tutto — cuore struggere
He remained there all the ni^ht with certain
— Stare — notte cdrto
snares of his I to
artifizio2 — J | per
ceived (himself) of it. There is no one|| of them
cdrgere
so young, who could not know well how wowen
fanciulla, potere conoscere2 ben} femmine
* Faces to be put, i n the Italian, in the singular.
f Hair, in the plural. t all, in the feminine.
$ JVo, for no one. \\ A*o one, for not any one, in tho/er/miine.
catch a bat. No§ person per-
piglidre pipistrello. persona ac-
sanctii
santitw
506 SYNTAX.
are. I have not slept any last night. Let no
— — dormzre passdto notte.
one move himself, or say a word, if he does not
muovere , fdre motto,
wish to die. There it seemed to me to see no*
voUre morire. l — parere15 14 vedtrt19 2
jtity, no* devotion, no* good work, or example
ita?, 4 divozione5, 6 buono1 opera8, 9 es6mpiow
of life. Has any one been here ? If there is
» vita12. 4 l 1
any one, who wishes I to bet I a supper, I will
, vottre I matter su \ c6na, met-
do it willingly. If Philip goes any where (in
tere volentidri. Filippo anddre — —
any place), follow him (approach thyself to him)
luogo, — accostdre
in some manner. I have nothing I to I fear now.
qudlche modo. \ da \ temere omdi.
Thou knowest nothing then.
sapere dunque.
CHAPTER VII.
VERBS.
POSITION OF VERBS.
Verbs are generally placed after their subjectives 5
but if a command is given, or a question is asked, or a
wish or imprecation is expressed ; the verb is to be put
before the subjective ; as,
JVo, for no one*
VERBS.
507
SPENGASI nei vostri pttti let every spark of venomous
OGNI SCINTILLA di pesti- disdain be extinguished in
fero sdegno, your hearts ;
ACCENDASI in quelli ARDEN- let there [in your hearts] be
TE FIAMMA di sinccro kindled a fervent flame of
amdre, sincere affection ;
die VUOL dir QUEST o ? what can this mean ?
VOLESSE IDDIO che il gua- would to Heaven that his gaz-
tdrmi gli fosse bastdto, ing at me had satisfied him ;
MALADETTA S!A LA CRUDEL- cursed be the cruelty of him,
TA di colui, eke mi ti fa who causes that I should
vedere, see thee.
The verb is likewise put before the subjective, when
it is neuter and is preceded by a sentence or part of it ;
when it is preceded by a negative ; and when an em-
phatical adjective introduces the sentence ; as,
standosi cosi, VENNE Alia vol-
ta SUd UN GAMBERO,
ne me ne HA mdi PARLATO
dolce i IL
[the bird] being so, a crab
came up to him ;
nor has any one ever spoken
to me of her ;
to do good is pleasing.
Finally, the verb is put before the subjective, when in
narrations the sayings or doings of a person are re-
lated ; when in exclamations it is accompanied by the
word come or quanta ; and when one of the following
words ci, vi, qui, qua, ivi, quivi, dove, qu'indi, quanta,
cosi, — begins a sentence or phrase ; as,
the lady said : " How can that
be?"
oh ! how often do old men fall
into this error !
D1SSE LA D6NNA :
pud tsser questo 1 "
oh! come spisso CASCANO i
VECCHI in questo errore !
se ce ne vENissE ALCUNA,
qUl SONO GIARD1NI,
if some one should come here ;
here are gardens ;
chi t qutllo che now sdppia who does not know how in-
quanto si A EGLI infe- ferior he is ?
riore ?
508
SYNTAX.
EXAM PLE 9 .
SPENGASI, SPENGASI NEI vo-
STRl PETTI OGNI SCJNT1LLA DI
PEST1FERO SDEGNO J ACCENDASI
IN QUELLI ARDJENTE FlARIMA DI
8IN-CERO AMORE. (Cavalcanti.)
CHE VUOL DIR QUESTO ?
(Bocc.)
E VOLESSE IDDIO, che il pas-
Sarvi O IL GUATARMI GLI FOSSE
BASTATO. (BOCC. g. 3. D. 3.)
MALADETTA SIA LA CRUDELTA
DI coLth, CHE con gli occhi dtl-
la fr^nte or MI TI FA VEDERE.
(Bocc. g. 4. n. I.)
E STANDOSI cosi di mala vo°
glia VENNE ALLA VOLTA SUA UN
GAMBERO. (Firenz.)
NE ME NE HA MAI PARLATO AL-
CUNO, che non mel* dbbia dip'in-
ta egudle alia nria Costanza.
(Gell.)
DOLCE in ogni tempo E IL
BENEFICIO. (Soave, Nov.)
DlSSE LA DONNA I " COME PDO
ESSER QUESTO ? " — " DlSSE MeS-
ser Lizio : " Tu il vedrdi, se tu
vitni presto" (Bocc. g. 5. n. 4.)
OH ! COME SPESSO CASCANO I
VECCHI IN QUESTO ERRORE !
(Gell.)
E se per isciagura -CE NE VE-
NISSE ALCtiNA. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 3.)
QUI SONO GIARDINI, qua dltri
luoghi dilett&voli. (Bocc. Intr.)
Perche, CHI E QUELLO CHE
NON SAPPIA QUANTO SIA EGLI
di forze ? (Tolom.)
Let every spark of venomous
disdain be extinguished in your
heart ; let there be kindled a fer-
vent flame of sincere affection.
What can this mean ?
And would to Heaven, that his
passing by, and gazing at me, had
satisfied him.
Cursed be the cruelty of him,
who causes that my eyes should
see thee now.
And being [the bird] so mel-
ancholy, a crab came up to him.
Nor any one has ever spoken
to Hie of her, without describing
her to me as equal to my Con-
stanza.
To do good is pleasing at all
times.
The lady said : " How can that
be ? " — Mr. Lizio said : " Thou
wilt see it thyself if thou comest
immediately."
Oh ! how often do old men fall
into this error !
And if, for our misfortune, some
one should come here.
Here are gardens, there pleasant
places.
Because, who does not know
how inferior he is in strength ?
VERBS. 509
USE OP THE IMPERFECT AND FIRST AND SECOND-PERFECT,
The preterite of English verbs answers to the imper-
fect as well as to the first and second-perfect. In Italian
these three tenses are rendered in three different forms;
I loved, for instance, may be rendered by io amava, io
amai, or io ho amato ; but these forms are not indfFerent-
]y used.
We make use of the first, the imperfect, when the
action of which we speak was present in respect to
another action past at the same time; — CANTA'VA qudn-
do voi veniste, ' I was singing when you came ' ; E'RANO
a tavola qudndo noi entrammo, ( they were at table when
we entered ' ; as,
mentre STAVAN CENANDO, while they were at supper, her
vtnne il mar'Uo, husband came ;
incontro la Catella, che VEN!- he met Catella, who was com-
VA, ing.
The imperfect is also used when we speak of an ac-
tion become habitual, or continued, or repeated several
times ; as,
io LAVORAVA un loro giar- I had the care of their garden ;
dino,
ANDAVA al bosco per le 16- I used to go to the forest for
gne, wood ;
ATTIGNEVA ticqua, 6 FAC^VA I drew water, and did other
dltri servigttti, services ;
le donne mi DAVAN si poco, the ladies gave me so little,
che io non ne POTEVA ap- that with it I could scarcely
pena pagdre i calzdri, pay for my shoes.
Finally, we use the imperfect in speaking of the
age, name, actions, dispositions, and good or bad quali-
ties of persons and things that exist no more ; as,
ne pur tre lustri AVEA/ornifo', he [Rinaldo] had scarcely fin-
ished his third lustrum ;
43*
510
SYNTAX.
la moglie, che Isabella AVEA
wo'me,
ERA di buona mente, e di fe-
lice ingegno dotdto, e bd-
lissimo favellatore,
p A R E v A San la Feridiana,
che da beccare dlle serpi,
£RA qutsto giardino vago
molto,
his wife, who was called Isa-
bella ;
he [Joseph Warren] was of
good mind, endowed with a
happy genius, and a very
fine speaker ;
she appeared Saint Veridiana
feeding the serpents ;
this garden was very pleasant.
It may, perhaps, assist the learner in making a proper use of this
tense, to observe further, that whenever the preterite in English may
be turned into was or were and the present participle of the same
verb, or into used "and the infinitive of the same verb ; it is to be
rendered by the imperfect tense in Italian : thus, if, without altering
the meaning, I or we LOOKED for, may be changed into / WAS or we
WERE LOOKING for, or into 7 or we USED TO LOOK /or, it must be
rendered by w CERCAVA, or noi CERCAVAMO.
The first-perfect is used to denote an action done in
a period of time completely past ; as,
poiche a mdrte mi SENTII fe-
rito,
AVVENNE che il re di Frdncia
MORI,
Colombo PARTI per la sco-
perta del nuovo mdndo
V anno 1492,
io altresl questa notte pass&ta
FECI un sognoy
The second-perfect is used to express an action done
in a period of time not specified; or, if specified, not
completely past ; as,
after I found myself mortally
wounded ;
it happened that the king of
France died ;
Columbus departed for the dis-
covery of the new world the
year 1492 ;
I also had a dream last night.
dnzi V HO SKmpre AMATO. e
AvtiTO cdro,
voi r AV£TE COMPERATO,
ed io non V HO
nay, I always loved thee, and
held thee dear ;
you have obtained it by pur-
chase, without my selling it
to you ;
VERBS.
511
m* AVETE FATTO pirl&re con
iina stdtua di mar mo,
gia sono otto anni, V HO pih
che la mia vita AMATO,
mdlte {tlili scop&rte
FATTE nel presinte stcolo,
you hav^ made me speak with
a marble statue ;
for these eight years have I
loved thee more than my
very life ;
many useful discoveries have
been made within the pres-
ent century.
The phrase / saw him this morning, if used in the foren&on,
when the morning is not yet elapsed, is rendered by V HO vEDtiTO
stamattinai but, if used in. the afternoon, when the morning is
already elapsed, it must be rendered by lo vioi stamattina.
EXAMPLES.
MENTRE STAVAN CENANDO, While they were at supper, her
VENNE IL MARITO. (Bocc. g. 1. husband came,
n. 3.)
jfrgli INCONTRO LA CATELLA,
CHE VENIVA. (BOCC. g. 2. n. 5.)
lO LAVORAVA UN LORO GIARDI-
JPTO bcllo e grande, e, dltre a qu6-
sto, ANDAVA alcuna volta AL BO-
SCO PER LE LEGNE, ATT1GNEVA
ACQUA, E FACEVA COtdll ALTRI
SERVIGETTI ; ma le DONNE MI
DAVANO SI POCO, CHE £o NON NE
POTEVA APPENA PAGARE I CAL-
ZARI. (Bocc. g, 4. n. 1.)
AU6r NE PUR TRE LtJSTRI AVEA
FORNITI. (Tass. Ger. 1. 60.)
LA MOGLIE, CHE ISABELLA
AVEA NOME. (BOCC. g. 5. n. 1.)
ERA DI EUONA MENTE, E DI
FELICE 1NGEGNO DOTATO, E BEL-
LisSIMO FAVELLATORE. (Bott.
Stor. Amer. 1. 5.)
U'na vtcchia, che PAREVA SAN-
TA VERIDIANA,CHE DA BECCARE
ALLE SERPI. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 10.)
ERA Q,UESTO GIARDINO VAGO
MOLTO. (Bemb.)
He met Catella, who was com-
ing-
I had the care of a large and
beautiful garden of theirs, and be-
sides this I used sometimes to go
to the forest for wood ; 1 drew wa-
ter, and did other like services for
them ; but the ladies gave me so
little, that with it I could hardly
pay for my shoes.
Then he [Rinaldo] had scarcely
finished his third lustrum.
His wife, who was called Isa-
bella.
He [Joseph Warren] was of
good mind, endowed with a happy
genius, and a very fine speaker.
An old woman, who appeared
Saint Veridiana feeding the ser-
pents.
This garden was very pleasant.
512
SYNTAX.
POICCHE A MORTE MI SENTfl
FERITO. (Petr.)
AVVENNE CHE 1L RE DI FKAN-
CIA MORI, ed in suo luogo fu
corondto ilfigliuolo. (Bocc.)
COLOMBO PARTI PER LA sco-
PERTA DEL NUOVO M6NPO L* AN-
NO 1492. (Vanz.)
Se w fossi voluto anddre dii-
tro dj sogni, w non ci sarei venu-
fo, non tdnto per lo tuo, quanta
per unOy che io ALTRESI QDESTA
NOTTE PASSATA HE FEC1. (BOCC.
g. 4. n. 6.)
ANZl T' HO SEMPRE AMATO, E
AVUTO CARO inndnzi ad dgni
dltro. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 5.)
Ed or volcsse Iddto che iofdtto
V av6ssi, percid che voi L' AVETK
COMPERATO, ED fo NON L* HO
VENDtJTO. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 5.)
" Che ti pare ? HotV io Une
la promessa servdta ? " — " Mes-
ser, no ; voi M' AVETE ri.TTO
PARLARE CON T?NA ST^TUA DI
M^RMO." (Bocc. g. 3. n. 5.)
To, misera me ! CIA SONO OTTO
ANNI, T' HO PIU CHE LA M!A
VITA AMATO. (BoCC. g. 3. D. 6.)
MOLTE T^TILI SCOPERTE SONOSI
FATTE NEL PRESENTE SECOLO.
(Vanz.)
After I found myself mortally
wounded.
It happened that the king of
France died, and his son was
crowned in his stead.
Columbus departed for the dis-
covery of the new world the year
1492.
If I had any faith in dreams, 1
should not have come here ; and
not so much for the sake of yours,
as of one I also had last night.
Nay I always loved thee, and
held thee dear beyond every other
person.
And now would to Heaven that
I had done so, because you have
obtained it by purchase, without
my selling it to you.
" What dost thou think of it ?
Have I not kept my promise ? "
— " No, sir ; you have made me
speak to a marble statue."
Alas ! for these eight years have
I loved thee more than my very
life.
Many useful discoveries have
been made within the present cen-
tury.
USE OP CERTAIN TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE FOR SOME OTHER
TENSES OF THE SAME MOOD ; AJJD OF THE INFINITIVE FOR
CERTAIN TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE, AND FOR THE CON-
JUNCTIVE AND IMPERATIVE MOODS.
The present of the indicative is sometimes used, in
narrations, for the first-perfect ; as,
ESCE [for, usci] veloce da he went quickly out of that
qutlla tomba, tomb ;
VERBS.
513
or, CORSE] alpaldgio, he ran to his palace ;
non & [for, BRA] piii dubbia the way was no longer doubt-
la via, ful ;
non E piii oscura la notte, the night was no longer dark.
It is also used for the future ; as,
domdne E [for, SARA] /' ulti- to-morrow will be the last day ;
mo dij
die fardi tu, se ilia il DICE what wilt thou do, if she will
[for, DIRA] a? fraUlli ? tell it to her brothers ;
se to infra otto giorni non vi if I shall not cure you in eight
GUAnisco [for, GUARIR6], days, have me burnt ;
fdtemi brugidre,
se tu ti CALI [for, CALERAI], if thou wilt cast thee down, I
10 non ti verro dtitro di cannot chase thee on foot.
galoppo,
The first-perfect may be used for the present ; as,
or che AVESTI [for, che HAI], now what ails thee, that thou
che fdi cotdl viso, makest such a face ;
Anichino gittd un gran so- Anichino gave a deep sigh.
spiro. La donna disse : The woman said : " What
" Che avesti, Anichino ? " ails thee, Anichino ? "
The first-perfect may be used, also, for the second-
perfect ; as,
6nde FOSTI tu [for, SEI STATO where hast thou been this
tu] stamane ? — wYbn so morning ? — I know not
dve w mi FIJI [for, SONO sWhere I have been ;
STATO],
sceglitsti? [for, HAI SCELTO?] hast thou chosen? — I have.
Ho scelto. — Em6n 2 — —^Emon ? - Death. — Thou
Morte. — U avrdi, shalt have it.
The second-pluperfect may be used for the first-per-
fect ; as,
lire FU GIUNTO [for, GI^NSE] the king arrived and said:
c disse : " Cavaliere, a qudl " Knight, what lady dost
donna se? tu?" thou belong- to ? "
alzdtala lanterna, EBBER VE- having raised the lantern, they
D^TO [for, VIDERO] il cat- saw that rogue Andreuccio.
tivtl di Andreuccio,
514
SYNTAX.
The future is used for the present, in doubtful ac-
tions ; as,
PARR! [for, forse PARE] a
voi, eke non vi vSglia bene,
gente si appressa : Elvira
SARA [for, forse & Elvira],
The future-anterior is
in doubtful cases ; as,
AVRO DETTO [for, foTSB HO
DETTO], che ho da andare
a Venezia,
perhaps it seems to you, that
she does not like you ;
people approach : perhaps it
is Elvira.
used for the second-perfect,
perhaps I have said, that I am
to go to Venice.
The infinitive may be used for the third person
singular of the present and of the imperfect of the
indicative, and their compounds, depending on another
verb of the same mood; as,
conosco liii ESSERE [for, che
egli E] un malvdgio uomo,
udendo il re il maliscdlco ES-
SER [for, che il maliscalco
ERA] m&rto,
ti converra avere nella memo-
ria, Iddio ESSERE STATO
[for, che Iddio ic STATO]
creatore del cielo, e della
terra,
S* accorse V'abale AVER MAN-
GIATO [for, che V abate AVEA
MANGIATO] fdve secche,
It may likewise be used for the third person singular
of the present and of the imperfect of the conjunctive,
and their compounds ; as,
si crede ESSERE [for, che egli he is thought to be one of the
I know that he is a wicked
man ;
the king hearing that his far-
rier was dead ;
thou must keep in thy mind,
that God has been the crea-
tor of heaven and earth ;
he found out, that the abbot
had eaten dry beans.
S!A] uno de' piit ricchi pre-
Idti del mdndo,
ella, credendo lui ESSER [for,
che egli FOSSE] Gisippo,
rispose di $i,
richest prelates in the world ;
she, believing that he was
Gisippus, answered yes ;
VERBS.
515
di Guiscardo ho io gict m'eco I have already determined
preso partilo che FARne within myself what to do
[for, che ne DEBBA FARE], with Guiscard ;
credendo lui ESSER TORNATO believing that he had returned
[for, che egli FOSSE TOR- from the wood.
NATO] dal 6<5sco,
Finally, the infinitive is used for the second person
singular of the imperative rnood, when preceded by the
negative ; as,
do NON TEMER,* do not fear that ;
NON mi TOCCARE, do not touch me.
E X AMP L E S .
ESCE VELOCE DA QUELLA TOM-
BA, CORRE AL PALAGIO } 71011 E
piu incerto il siio pas so, JVON E
P1U DUBBIA LA VIA, NON E PIU
osctJRA LA NOTTE. (Alberg. Nov.)
Quello che mi dite di fare, si
fdccia tosto, perciocche DOMANE
E L' ULTIMO DI che w debbo 6s-
sere aspettdto. (Bocc. g. 10. n. 9.)
CHE FAR.il TU, SE ELLA IL
DICE A' FRATELLI ? (BoCC. g. 3.
n. 3.)
SE io INFRA OTTO GIORNI NON
VI GUARISCC), FATEMI BRUCIARE.
(Bocc. g. 3. n. 9.)
SE TU TI CALI, fo NON TI VER-
RO D1ETRO DI GALOPPO. (Dtmt.
Inf. 22.)
OR CHE AVESTI, CHE FAl
COTAL viso. (Bocc. g. 7. n. 9.)
ANICHfNO GITTO UN GRANDfs-
SIMO SOSPIRO. LA DONNA, guar-
ddtolOj DISSE : " CHE AVESTI,
ANICHINO ? Du6lti cost, che w ti
mnco" (Bocc. g. 7. n. 7.)
He went quickly out of that
tomb, ran to his palace ; his steps
were no longer uncertain, the way
was no longer doubtful, the night
was no longer dark.
What is to be done, let it be
done immediately, for to-morrow
will be the last day of my being
expected.
What wilt tho'u do, if she tells it
to her brothers ?
If I shall not cure you in eight
days, have me burnt.
If thou wilt cast thee down
[into the pitch], I cannot chase
thee on foot.
Now what ails thee, that thou
makest such a face.
Anichino gave a very deep
sigh. The lady, having looked at
him, said : " What ails thee, Ani-
chino ? Art thou sorry, that 1 con-
quer thee ? "
* These and similar expressions ought to be regarded, however, as equivalent to
the phrases (ti comdndo, — ti csdrto, — ti consiglio a) cio NON TEME RE, (a) NON
MI TOCCA'RE, &.C., ' (1) do (command, — exhort, — counsel thee) not (to) fear that,
not (to) touch me ' ; &c. ; in which tho words contained within parentheses are
generally suppressed by ellipsis.
516
SYNTAX.
FOSTI TU STAMANE ? —
NON so OVE MI FUI. (Bocc. g.
3. n. 3.)
SCEGLIESTI ?^ — Ho SCELTO.
— EMON ? — MORTE. — L' AVRAI.
(Alf. Antig. 4. 1.)
lo anddva per grdnde bisogno
in servigio de'lla mia donna, IL
RE FU GIUNTO, E DISSE : " CA-
VALIERE, A QUAL DONNA SEJ
TU ? " (Nov. ant. 35.)
ALZATA dlquanto LA LANTER-
NA, EBBER VEDUTO IL CATTIVEL
DI ANDREUCCIO. (Bocc. g. 2. n.
5)
Eh ma ! cdro amico, PARR! A
VOI, CHE NON VI VOGLIA BENE.
(Gold. Ver. Am.)
GENTE si APPRESSA : ELVIRA
SARA. (Alf. Fil. 4. 1.)
AVRO DETTO, CHE HO DA AN-
DARE [A VENEZIA], per una lit-
tera che tratta di mw zw. (Gold.)
CONOSCO LUI ESSERE UN MAL-
VAGIO UOMO. (Gr. Gr.)
UDENDO IL RE d' Ing/iilte'rra
IL MALISCALCO ESSER MORTO.
(Bocc. g. 2. n. 8.)
Ti CONVERRA sirtipre AV^RE
NELLA MEMORIA, IDDIO ESSERE
8TATO CREATOR DEL CIELO, E
BELLA TERRA. (BOCC, g. 3. n. 4.)
EgH S* ACC6RSE L' ABATE AVER
MANGIATO FAVE SECCHE. (BOCC.
g. 10. n. 2.)
Venne a corte V abate di Cli-
gniyil qudle si CREDE ESSERE UNO
DE* P1U R1CCHI PRELATI DEL
MONDO. (Bocc. g. 10. n. 2.)
ELLA, CREDENDO LUI ESSER
GISIPPO, RISPOSE DI si.
Where hast thou been this
morning ? — I know not where I
have been.
Hast thou chosen ? — I have.
— J3mon ? — Death. — Thou shalt
have it.
I was going on an important
errand in the service of my lady,
when the king arrived, and said:
«' Knight, what lady dost thou be-
long to ? "
Having raised the lanlern a
little, they saw that rogue An-
dreuccio.
Come ! dear friend, perhaps it
seems to you, that she does not
like you
People approach : perhaps it is
Elvira.
Perhaps I have said, that I am
to go to Venice on account of a
letter which concerns my uncle.
I know that he is a wicked
man.
The king of England hearing
that his farrier was dead.
Thou must keep always in thy
mind that God has been the crea-
tor of heaven and earth.
He found out, that the abbot
had eaten dry beans.
There came to court the abbot
of Cluny, who is thought to be
one of the richest prelates in the
world.
She, believing that he waa
Gisippus, answered yes.
VERBS.
517
Di GUISCARDO HO 10 GIA
MECO PRESO PART1TO CHE FARNE ',
ma di te sallo Iddio, chb w non
so chc FARMI. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 1.)
CREDENDO Ltfi ESSER TORNA-
TO DAL BOSCO, avvisd di ripren-
derlo forte. (Bocc. g. l.-n. 4.)
Cio NON TEM£R, che in cru-
delta son pdri — 1 tuoi ministri
a te. (Alf. Filip. 4. 2.)
Ldsciami, NON MI TOCCARE.
(Bocc.)
I have already determined with-
in myself what to do with Guis-
card ; but God knows what to do
with thee, for I do not.
Believing that he had returned
from the wood, he thought of
reprimanding him severely.
Do not fear that, for thy min-
isters are not inferior to thee in
cruelty.
Let me alone,
me.
A COMPOUND
OF THE TENSES OF THE DEPENDENT VE
SENTENCE.
When, in a compound sentence, the principal verb is
in the present of the indicative, or in the future, the
dependent verb must be put in the present of the con-
junctive, if we mean to imply the present or future time ;
and in the imperfect of the conjunctive, if we mean to
imply the past ; as,
«o CREDO omdi che monti e I believe that, by this time,
pidgge SAPPIAN di che tern- mountains and plains know
what is the condition ojf ray
pre SIA la mla vita,
CONVERRA. che tu GODA di tal
desio,
CREDO mi PORTASSE amdre,
life :
it is proper that this wish of
thine should be gratified ; _
I believe that he loved me ;
you will easily imagine how
to mt Fdssi rallegrato, much I rejoiced at it.
When the principal verb is in the imperfect or the
perfect of the indicative, or in the conditional, the de-
pendent verb is generally put in the imperfect of the
conjunctive ; as,
appena SAPE>A che far si he hardly knew what to do ;
DOVESSE,
44
518
SYNTAX.
DOMANDO qudl FOSSE fa Cd-
gione del loro romdre,
chi STAREBBE meglio di me,
st quilli dtndri rdssERO
miii?
she asked what was the cause
of their noise ;
who would be happier than I,
if that money were mine ?
In suppositive or conditional phrases, the imperfect of
the indicative in English, — had, was, or were, is ren-
dered in Italian by the imperfect of the conjunctive ; as.
se cosl non FOSSE, w non vi
potrti prestdre un grosso,
se non AVESSI paura di mio
padre, 10 gli insegnerti la
risp6sta,
se AVESSI qutsti dendri, iegli
prester&i incontantnte,
[if it was not so] were it not
so, I could not lend you a
farthing ;
[if I had not the fear — if I
was not afraid] were I not
afraid of my father, I would
teach him how to reply ;
if I had this money, I would
lend it to thee immediately.
EXAM PL E S.
SI ch' io mi CREDO OM Ai, CHE
MONTI, E PIAGGE, — E fiumi, 6
Stive SAPPIAN DI CHE TEMPRE —
SIA LA MIA viTA. (Petr. s. 22.)
Di TAL DESIO CONVERRA CHE
TU GODA. (Dant. Inf. 8.)
CREDO MI PORTASSE AMORE, e
che di me non FOSSE m6no ar-
dtnte. (Ariost.)
GlTJDICHERA FACILMENTE
qUANTO 10 MI FOSSI RALLEGRA-
TO. (Bent, lett.)
APPENA SAP^TA CHE FAR si
DOVESSE. (Bocc, g. 2. n. 8.)
DOMANDO LA REGINA QUAL
FOSSE LA CAGIONE DEL LORO RO-
MORE. (BOCC. g. 6.)
CHI STAREBBE MEGLIO DI ME,
SE Q.UELLI DENARI FO8SERO MIEI?
(Bocc. g. 2. n. 5.)
So that I believe, that, by this
time, mountains, and plains, and
rivers, and woods know what is
the condition of my life.
It is proper that this wish of
thine should be gratified.
I believe that he loved me, and
that he was no less ardent in love
than I.
You will easily imagine how
much I rejoiced at it.
He hardly knew what to do.
The queen asked what was the
cause of their noise.
Who would be more happier
I, if that money were mine ?
VERBS. 519
SE cosi NON FOSSE, fo NON vi Were it not so, I could not
POTREI PRESTARE UN GROSS©, lend you a farthing.
(Bocc. g. 8. n. 10.)
SE w NON AVESSI PAURA Di Were I not afraid of my father,
MIO PADRE, fo GLI iNSEGNEREi I would teach him how to reply.
LA RISPOSTA. (Mach. Com.)
SE^O AVESSI QUESTI DENARII, If I had this money, I would
w TE"GLI PRESTEREI INCONTA- lend it to thee immediately.
JVENTE. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 10.)
OF THE MANNER OF EXPRESSING THE ENGLISH PRESENT-
PARTICIPLE IN ITALIAN.
"The English present-participle may be expressed in
Italian :
First, by the gerund of the corresponding verb ; as,
consumdre c6me seeing him waste away like
la ntve al sdle, snow in the sun ;
DORMENDO gli pdrve di ve- [sleeping or] whilst he was
dire, la donna siia, asleep, it seemed to him
that he saw his lady.
Secondly, by the conjunction cAe, or the adverb
quando, and a tense of the indicative mood ; as,
poi CH' EBBI RIPOSATO il having rested my weary body
cdrpo lasso,
QUAND' EBBE DETTO cio, ri- having said this, he took up
prtee il teschio misero c6' once more that miserable
dinti, skull with his teeth.
Thirdly, by a preposition and the verb in the infini-
tive ; as,
consumo quella mattina IN he spent that morning in look-
CERcAR/i, ing after them ;
crtdo che k suore sttn tutte A I believe that the nuns are all
[sleeping or] asleep.
520 SYNTAX.
When the English present-participle has before it
preposition, such as cfjfrpm, with, on. in, for, without,
before, after, &c., it is always rendered in Italian by the
corresponding verb in the infinitive with a preposition.
If the participle is preceded by the prepositions of,
from, with, they are expressed in Italian by the preposi-
tion di, attended by the infinitive ; as,
6bbi il piactre DI VEDER^O, I had the pleasure of seeing
him;
Ma m' impedisce DI FAR/O, you prevent me from doing so ;
conUnto D' AVER?« trovdta, being content with having
found her.
The preposition on, before the participle, may be
expressed by the prepositions di, or in 5 as,
si vdnta D' AVER la loro co- he values himself on being ac-
noscinza, quainted with them ;
NEl PARTIRE gli sovvtnne di on his departure he recollected
Ui, her.
The preposition in is rendered by a, or in ; as,
che A FAR cio voUsse aitdrlo, that he would assist him in
doing that ;
avfa NEZ QUETAR popolo au- in appeasing the people he had
torita ed arte> both authority and art.
The prepositions for, without, before, after, &c., are
literally translated.
If the participle is preceded by the preposition by,
this preposition is generally omitted in Italian, and the
participle, rendered by the gerund of the corresponding
verb ; as,
gli scoldri impdrano le rtgole scholars learn the rules of a
di wm lingua STUDIANDO- language by studying them.
le,
VERBS.
521
But if we wish to express the preposition, then the
verb must be put in the infinitive, and by rendered by
con; as,
il divino Giulio rintuzzo la the divine Julius checked the
sedizione del suo estrcito sedition of his army by only
col DIR sdlo : « M Qui~ saykig : " Ah Romans ! "
r$/»
EXAMPLES.
^ CONSUMERS
COME Si fa LA NEVE AL SOLE.
(Bocc. g. 3. n. 7.)
DORMENDO GLI PARVE in SO-
gno DI VEDERE LA DONNA stlA
anddr per un bosco assdi bello.
(Bocc. g. 9. n. 7.)
POICH5 £BBI RIPOSATO IL COR-
po LASSO, — Ripresi ma per la
piaggia diserta. (Dant. Inf. I.)
QUAND' EBBE DETTO cio, cogli
occhi torti, — RIPRESE IL TES-
CHIO MISERO CO' DENTI — Che
fiiro aW osso, come d' un can,
forti. (Dant. Inf. 33.)
Tutto il rimanentc di Q.UELLA
MATTINA CONSUMO IN CERCARLI.
(Bocc. g. 8. n. 3.)
I'O mi CREDO CBE LE SHORE
SIEN TtJTTE A DORBlfRE. (BOCC.
g. 3. n. 1.)
JVbn prima di ieri EBBI IL PIA-
CKRE DI VEDERE, f'lt CttSa deW
ambasciaddre del re di Frdncia,
(Bent.)
Se non ch' £LLA M* IMPED! SCE
DI FARLO. (Metast. lett.)
CONT£NTO DI AVER TROVATA
Filomena. (Bocc.)
JEgll SI VANTA D* AVER LA
LORO CONOSCENZA. (Gold.)
44*
I seeing him waste away as the
snow does in the sun.
Whilst he was asleep, it seemed
to him that he saw, in a dream, his
)ing through a very beautiful
Having rested my wearied body,
I made my way through the de-
serted shore.
Having said this, with looks
askanse he took up once more that
miserable skull with his teeth,
which were as strong upon the
bone as those of a dog.
He spent all the rest of that
morning in looking after them.
I believe that the nuns are all
asleep.
Not before yesterday did I have
the pleasure of seeing, at the house
of the ambassador of the king of
France, ....
Except that you prevent me
from doing so.
Being content with having found
Philomena.
He values himself on being ac-
quainted with them.
522 SYNTAX.
NEL PARIIRE GLI SOVVENNE On his departure he recollected
DI LEI, che miscra rimdsa era. her, whom he had left so misera-
(Nov. Ant.) ble.
Pregdndolo CHE A FAR cio Begging that he would assist
VOLESSE AITARLO. (Bocc. g. 6.) him in doing that.
AVEA NEL QTJETAR POPOLO AU- In appeasing the people, he had
TORITA ED ARTE. (Dav. St. 3.) both authority and art.
GLI SCOLARI IMPARANO LE RE- Scholars learn the rules of a
GOLE DI UNA LINGUA sTUDiAN- language by studying them.
DOLE. (Rosasco.)
IL DIVINO GIULIO RINTUZZO The divine Julius checked the
LA SEDIZIONE DEL suo ESERciTO sedition of his army by only say-
COL DIR SOLO : '* AH QUIRITI ! " ing : " Ah Romans ! "
(Dav. Ann.)
OF THE WAT OF RENDERING INTO ITALIAN THE ENGLISH
PARTICLE to, BEFORE THE INFINITIVE OF VERBS,
The particle to prefixed to English verbs is used
sometimes as a mere sign of the infinitive, and some-
times as a preposition. When it is a mere sign, it is
never rendered in Italian, except when the infinitive is
used as a noun, and then it is expressed by the article
il or lo. When to has the force of a preposition, it is
rendered by the prepositions di, a, per.
When the infinitive of verbs can be expressed in Ital-
ian by a noun ; as, — ' to read is useful,' la lettura
e Mile ; — ' always to study is fatiguing,' lo studio
continuo efaticoso ;• — the particle to is rendered by the
article il or lo ; — il leggere e utile, l to read is useful ' ;
— lo studiar sempre e faticoso, c always to study is
fatiguing'; as,
le impose IL SEGUITARE [or, she ordered her to continue ;
IL PROSEGUIMENTO],
L' ASTENERSI* [or, L' ASTi- to abstain from what pleases,
NENZA] da qu&l che place, is true virtue ;
£ vera virtu,
VERBS. 523
la ddnna veggtndo che IL the woman, seeing that to
PREGARE non le valeva [or, pray was useless, had re-
che LE PREGHIERE non le course to threats :
valvvano], ricdrse AL MI-
NACCIARE [or, ALLE MI-
NACCE],
But if the infinitive cannot be expressed by a noun,
the particle to is rendered by a preposition.
If the particle to is preceded by a verb signifying re-
membering or forgetting, pleasing or displeasing, rejoic-
ing or grieving, owning or denying, permitting or pro-
hibiting, telling, declaring, affirming, supposing, suspect-
ing, fearing, commanding, asking, entreating, doubting,
promising, advising, concluding, finishing, proposing ;
or by any verb implying desire or aversion, it is rendered
in Italian by the preposition di ; as,
a me pidce DI dirvi una no- it pleases me to tell you a
vella, story ;
m' & caduto nelV dnimo DI it has occurred to my mind to
dimostrdrvi, show you ;
a me appartUne DI ragiond- it belongs to me to speak ;
. re,
dma D' essere sveglidto a he likes to be awakened by
su6n di trombe, the sound of trumpets.
The particle to is translated by the preposition a,
when it comes after verbs signifying beginning, teach-
ing, learning, attaining, insisting, persisting, proceeding,
remaining, continuing, opposing, contributing, engaging,
liking, accustoming, encouraging, obliging ; after verbs
implying inclination, difficulty, application, thought, re-
luctance, fitness ; and after verbs signifying motion ; as,
comincid A chiedere perddno, he began to ask pardon ;
egli b brutto A vedtre, he is ugly to look at ;
quanta m? era cib cdro AD how pleasing it was to me to
udlre I hear this !
chi not crede, v&nga A ve- let him who does not believe it,
derla, come and see her.
524
SYNTAX.
And whenever for the particle to, joined with the in-
finitive of English verbs, can be substituted the phrases
in order to, — with the design of} it is rendered in Ital-
ian by the preposition per ; as,
PER MOSTRARE (F aVCTC a
grddo la sua venula,
V agricola, che Cristo elesse
aW 6rto suo PER AIUTAR-
lo,
to show how agreeable his
visit was to him ;
the husbandman, whom Christ
chose to assist him [to be his
helpmate] in his own garden.
EXAMPLES.
La regina, a Filomena voltdta, The queen, having turned to
LE IMPOSE 11, SEGUITARE. (Bocc. Philomena, ordered her to con-
g. 3. n. 3.) tinue.
E VERA VIRTtJTE, IL SAPER-
SI ASTENER DA QUEL CHE PIACE,
— Se quel che place offende.
(Past. Fid. 3. 3.)
LA DONNA VEGGENDO CHE IL
PREGARE JNOJV LE VALEVA, RI-
CORSE AL MINACCIARE. (BOCC. g.
7. n. 4.)
A ME PIACE DI DfRVI UNA NO-
VELLA. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 8.)
M' E CADUTO NELL* ANIMO DI
DIMOSTRARVI nella novella, che
a me tdcca DI dire (Bocc.
g. 1. n. 5.)
A ME ornai APPARTIENE DI RA-
G ION ARE. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 9.)
AMA meglio D* ESSERE SVE-
GLIATO A SUON DI TROMBE, 6 TO-
mor d* drmej che a suon di cetra,
o di vivola. (Dav. Stor. )
11 medico COMINCIO A CHIEDE-
RE'PERDONO. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 9.)
EG LI E defbrme di cdrpo,
TO A VEDERE. (Vai'Ch.)
O qUANTO M* ERA CIO
AD UD1RE ! (BOCC.)
To know how to abstain from
what pleases, when that which
pleases is injurious, is true vir-
tue.
The woman, seeing that to
pray was useless, had recourse to
threats,
It pleases me to tell'you'a story.
It has* occurred to my mind to
show to you, in the story which I
am to tell you,
Now it belongs to me to speak.
He likes better to be awakened
by the sound of trumpets, and the
noise of arms, than by the sound
of citherns or viols.
The physician began to ask
pardon.
He is deformed in his person,
and ugly to look at.
O how pleasing it was to me to
hear this !
VERBS.
525
CHI NOL CREDE, VENGA EGLi Let him, who does not believe
A YEDEKLA. (Petr. s. 210.) it, come and see her himself.
Crcd6ndo costui tssere un gran
barbassoroj PER MOSTRARE DI
AVERE A GRADO LA stJA VENUTA,
una gran coppa dordta, la qudle
davdnti avtva, comandd, die fos-
se empiiita di vino, e portdta al
gentiluomo, (Bocc. g. 10. n. 9.)
Domenico fu detto, ed io ne
pdrlo, — Siccome delt,' AGRICOLA,
CHE CRISTO — ELESSE ALL* OR-
TO suo PER AIUTARLO. (Dant.
Par. 12.)
Believing that he was a great
man, to show how agreeable his
visit was to him, he ordered that
a large gilded cup, which he had
before him, should be filled up
with wine and given to the gentle-
man.
He was called Dominic, and
I speak of him, as of the husband-
man whom Christ chose to be his
helpmate in his own garden.
EXERCISE XXXIII.
Would to Heaven I that my fortune would allow me
Fdccia il Citlo \ fortuna ddre
They came in sight
to I put them in execution.
di I mitttre opera.
of (saw themselves near to) a small-castle I from I
— vedere memo castello \ di
which, having been seen,
, vedtre,
about I twelve men suddenly
da3 ; 4 fdnte5 subito1
rushed out upon them. Finally, no (not any) virtue
uscire* — — . finalmente* — Nel 5 virtu*
can be found
si trova2
finalmentfp
in those, who have given themselves
issere dare
up 1 to gluttony.
inpreda \ gola.
Oh ! how true these things
come vero cdsa
It was the castle of one of the family of the
— cast^llo — — —
Orsini, and by
, per
his) was there.
good fortune
ventura
his lady (a lady of
Words
Parola
are not necessary
non bisOgnano
in this
526 SYNTAX.
business (here). The mother said : " (O my) daughter,
mddre Dire: " fiaHLtu&a..
what warm I are you talking about ? "
cdldo I fa egli?"
The father,
padre,
on account of
per
the love (that) he bore
amore portdre
her, took no care (gave himself little care) I to I
, — — — dare3 poco1 cura2 \ di* \
marry her again, and it seemed not modest (thing) I in I
maritdre6 piii5, — — pardre12 ne7 ontsto10 cosa11 \ a8 \
her I to ask it (of him). Who was a very young
9 I il13 richiedere1* . — assdi giovane
and handsome I man » I . And he saw a knight
bello [ delta persona \ . l — vedere* 6 cavalier7
dressed in black following (to come after) her. But
— — bruno* — venire5 di6tro-a2 3.
the knight who saw this cried I from afar I to him.
cavalier e vedtre2 l griddre \ di lontdno \
The following daj the Saladin caused a most beautiful
seguente di 2 3 fdre1 9 bello10
and rich bed I to be put up I in a large hall.
11 ricco12 Utto™ I fdre* \ 5 6 gran7 sdla*.
Yesterday at I this hour we were in Mugello. He
leri
a 6ra —
was one of those men, who are more attached to liberty,
iLOrnn. 3 1 nfFp.rA.mnhicP' lihp.rtfi..
liberta,
than to life. Three months ago there was a conflagration.
vita. ntese fa incendio.
A noisy event happened this year. Ferondo was
strepitoso2 avvenimento1 accadere anno. 2 Essere1
quite pale.
tutto pdllido.
To-morrow will be a holy-day. If thou wilt touch
Domdni — festa. toccdre
her with this I written paper
scritta,
she will follow thee
venir di^tro
VERBS. 527
immediately. He said he was perfidious and vile. He
incontanente. — Dire pdrfido vile.
took a leap, and threw himself down from the other
Prdndere sdlto, gittdre —
side. He thought that I this man I was such as
pdrte. — Pensdre — j costui \ dovere essere
the wickedness of the Burgundians required (it). From
malvagitd Borgognone rickiedere
these 1 it was heard I in the neighbouring fields, that
I si seppe memo cdmpo, —
Terni was guarded by four-hundred horsemen. If he
guarddre quattrocento cavdllo.
thinks that the republic needs (has need) that the
credere — repubblica — bisogno
senators should speak freely, why does he enter into so
senatore parldre libero, entrdre
trifling details ? Do not make a noise. . She saw
debole3 cosa1 ? fare — strepito. — conoscere*
clearly that her vision had-been true. She, who was
Manifesto1 — 5 visione6 3 vero*. ,
not a physician, believed without any doubt, that he was
2 — m6dica\ credere* * ,5 fdllo*, — 7
dead. Do not flatter thyself.
morto. lusingdre
Come into the house, for I believe (that) it is
Venire cdsa, credere
1 better I that she should not see thee. What dost
I bene \ vedere
thou wish that I should say to her, if I should happen
vottre dire , — —
to (it happens that I should) speak to her ? He
— avventre favelldre
asked him what had become of the other leg of "the
Domanddre divenire — coscia
crane. He was disposed I to I go wherever she
grit. disponere \ di \ anddre dovunque —
528 SYNTAX.
pleased (it was agreeable to her). I never should
a grddo . —
have believed, that he would act so (was capable of
credere, capdce
doing this). Who would have been the one (that),
far . — — ,
that would not have (set himself to) run-away.
essere mettere fuggire.
The king having ordered. Setting fire
re erdindre. Jlppiccare
to
per
every place. I met them riding post. That day
luogo. — Incontrdre cdrrere pdsta. giorno
having passed. Having done writing. When she
passdre. finire scnvere.
began to sing.
comincidre cantdre.
He forbids him to produce the proofs of his
— vietdre produrre pruova
innocence. I am very glad to see you (I re-
innocenza. — — — — — — — — ral-
joice myself much at seeing you). It is a crime in
legrdre . vedere . — delitto
Tyre to have a great fortune.* It begins to rain.
Tiro gran bene. — Comincidre piovere.
I beseech you to grant me that favor. If it was
— pregdre accorddre favore.
a fault to leave thee, behold I make amends for
colpa latcidre , ecco — —
it (I amend it). He likes to play- I did
ammenddre . amdre giuocdre. — fare
so (it) to oblige you. She speaks thus to
obbligdre . — Parldre
vex me.
tormentdre
* Fortune, in the plural.
PARTICIPLES.
529
CHAPTER VIII.
PARTICIPLES, AND USE AND POSITION OF CERTAIN
ADVERBS.
AGREEMENT OF PARTICIPLES.
IT has already been observed (p. 344) that participles
in Italian are considered and often used as adjectives,
and that, when so used, (pp. 345, 411) they agree with
substantives in gender and number.
This is always the case with present-participles, which
constantly agree in gender and number with their sub-
ject ; as,
a ship carrying men tempest-
tossed, endangered, and sub-
ject to so many storms ;
una navE PORTANTE uomi-
ni TEMPESTANTI, PERICO-
LANTI, SOGGIACENTI a tdn-
ti marosi,
presente dgli 6cchi sudi 1^1
GRID ANTE merce" svendro-
no,
alh donnv ASPETTANTI si ri-
volse, e disse,
before his eyes they slew her
[who was] crying out for
mercy ;
he addressed himself to the la-
dies [who were] waiting, and
said.
By a peculiarity of language, and in imitation of the
ablative absolute of the Latin, we often find in good
writers a present participle with its noun or pronoun,
independent of any verb, and standing, as it were, alone
in a discourse ; as,
quando, SOPRAVVEGNENTE when, night coming on, there
LA NOTTE, surse un tempo came very severe and tem-
Jierissimo etempestoso, pestuous weather;
Cesare parlo asseltatamente, Cesar spoke much to the point,
Ndi, delta vita e [whilst] we [were] hearing
delta morte,
45
him, about life and death.
530
SYNTAX.
With regard to the agreement of past-participles, the
following are the most sure rules :
When the past-participle is joined to the verb essere,
6 to be ' ; or to such verbs as venire, restare or rima-
nere, vedersi, &;c., used in the signification of ' to be ' ;
it is to agree with the subject of the verb, with which it
is joined, in gender and number ; as,
issi iran di frondi di qutr- they were garlanded with oak-
IJVGHIRLANDATI,
leaves ;
nb ERANO /E fdltE de' Vitel- nor were the faults of Vitel-
lius' troops punished, but
well paid ;
whilst it [the language] is not
adopted by celebrated wri-
ters ;
lidni PUNITE, ma ben PA-
GATE,
mentre ch? ELLA [/A lingua]
]
non VENGA [for, non SIA
USATA dafamosi scritteri,
proccurero che [EGLI] RESTI I shall endeavour that he may
[for, sii] IMPIEGATO in be employed in this city ;
questa citia^
EGLI RIMASE [for, FU] MA- he was astonished ;
RAVIGLIATO,
U gidvanE infelicE si VIDE the unhappy youth was soon
[for, FU] tosto TRATTO in taken to prison.
prigione,
But when the past-participle is joined to the verb
avere, ' to have ' ; — if this verb is used, instead of
essere, in the signification of ' to be ' ; or is used in the 1
signification of ' to hold,' ' to possess ' ; &c., as an ac-
tive and notf an auxiliary verb ; the participle agrees
with the object of the verb in gender and number; as,
per non poterti vedtre C A- thou wouldst have torn out thy
VRESTI [for, ti SARESTI] eyes, not to see thyself ;
CAVATI gll OCchlj
s' AVEA [for, 5' ERA] BIESSE he had put some small stones
alciinE petruzzE in bocca, in his mouth ;
uno che FORATA AVEA [for, one who had his throat pierc-
TENEA, POSSEDEA] /A g"d/A, ed ;
AGREEMENT OF PARTICIPLES.
531
I have a mind so accus-
tomed to contemplate this
lady alone ;
although they had unsheathed
their swords ;
I did not hear these things
from the neighbours ;
the moon had lost her rays.
HO [for, TENGO] si AVVEZZA
/A mentE a contempldr so-
la costei,
benche AVESSERO [for, TE-
NESSERO] IE SpadE IGGUAI-
NATE,
won HO quests COSE
da* vicini,
AVEA la luna
suoi rdggi,
If the verb avere, to which the past-participle is joined,
is used as an auxiliary verb, in order to represent the
idea of past time, which could be equally expressed by a
single form of the verb, which the participle belongs to ;
then this participle remains invariable; as,
come 10 AVR6 DATO [or, DA-
RO] loro ogni cosa,
CERCATO HO [or, CERCAl]
sempre solitdria via,
w' HA DIMOSTRATO [or, mi
DIMOSTR6] la cagione del
tuo male,
chi queste c6se HA MANIFE-
STATO [or, MANIFESTO] al
maestro ?
When the past-participle is preceded by one of the
pronouns mi, ti, ci, vi, si, il, lo, la, li, gli, le, ne, che,
cui, quale, quali, quanti, as objects of the verb, the parti-
ciple agrees with the pronouns, or the objects represented
by them, in gender and number; as,
ella medesima me le ha DET- she herself has told them to
TE [or, mi ha DSTTE QUE- me ;
STE COSE],
il liberto diceva averm esso the freed-man said that he had
uccisA [or, avere esso uc- killed her himself;
CiSA LA D6NNA],
as soon as I shall have given
to them every thing ;
I have always sought a solitary
way;
he has manifested to me the
cause of thy evil;
who has told these things to
the master ?
532
SYNTAX.
tu ci hai oggi tdnto DILITI-
CATE [or, hdi DILITICATE
NOl],
la quote io raccontero per
fdrvi ACcdRTE [or, fare
ACC6RTE VOl],
si f& ddre V dcqu±, CHE il dl
davdnti aveva FATTA,
vedendo cosl fdttA. ddnnA, e
ctfi egli cotdnto AMATA
avea,
h ddnm, LI QUALI tu hdi
per me,
thou hast delighted us so much
to-day ;
which I will relate to show
you;
she caused the water to be
given to her, which she had
prepared the day before ;
seeing such a lady, and one
whom he had loved so
much ;
the evils which thou hast sus-
tained on my account.
The participle, however, remains invariable if it is
accompanied by an infinitive, and the abovementioned
pronouns are the objects of this infinitive ; as,
le cose che gia aveva UDITO
DIRE, che erano intervenute,
tiitti v* avrh F^TTO MORIRE,
la ddnna, la qudle il lungo
vagheggidre non aveva PO-
TATO MUOVERE,
the things which he had heard
of as having happened ;
he will have put you all to
death ;
the lady, whom his long admi-
ration had not been able to
move.
Finally, past-participles may be used, like present-
participles, absolutely ; the gerund of the verb essere, or
avere, being generally understood ; and then, if the
gerund understood is essendo, they agree with the sub-
ject, and if avendo, with the object of the proposition ;
as,
IL famiglidrv GIT^NTO [for,
ESSENDO GltflNTO], 6 DATE
[for, AVENDO DATE] ZE
ei/erE, e FATTA [for, A-
VEJSDO FATTA] F cmbascid-
t A, fu con gran festa rice-
vuto,
the domestic having arrived,
arid having consigned the
the letters and delivered the
message, was received with
great joy.
AGREEMENT OF PARTICIPLES.
533
EXAMPLES.
UNA NAVE PORTANTE UOMINI
TEMPE8TANTI, PERICOLANTI, SOG-
GIACENTI A TANTI MAROSI. (GIOV.
Fill. 11. 8.)
PRESE"NTE AGLI OCCHI suoi
LEI GRIDANTE MERCZ 6 CLluto
SVENARONO. (BOCC. g. 4. D. 4.)
ALLE DONNE ASPETTANTI sr
R1VOLSE, E DfsSE. (BOCC. g. 9.
n. 10.)
QuANDO, SOPRAVVEGNENTE LA
NOTTE, con 6ssa insieme SURSE
UN TEMPO FIERISSIMO E TEMPE-
STOSO. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 1.)
CESARE PARLO bello e ASSET-
TATAMENTE, UDENTI NOI, BELLA
VITA E BELLA MORTE, qudndo
disse (Brun. Tes, 8. 34.)
ESSI ERAN tutti BI FRONDI
QUERCIA 1NGHIRLANDATI. (BOCC.
g. 9. n. 1.)
NE .iRANO LE FALTE D^' Vl-
TELLIAJVI PUN!TE, MA BEN PA-
GATE. (Dav. Stor. 3.)
Ma siasi una LINGUA nobile,
p6co le gioverh M£NTRE CHJ ELLA
NON VENGA USATA DA FAMOSI
SCRITTORI. (Buom.)
Se non mi sara licito di spo-
sdrloj PROCCURERO almeno CHE
RESTI IMPIEGATO IN QUEST A CIT-
TA. (Gold. AVV.)
EGLI ^RIMASE MARAVIGLIATO
dblla brutta invenzione. (Boccal.)
E IL GIOVANE INFELICE SI
viDE T6sTo da una squddra di
satdlliti CIRCONDATO e TRATTO
IN PRIGIONE. (Soav. Nov.)
45*
A ship carrying men tempest-
tossed, endangered, and subject to
so many storms.
Before his eyes they slew her
[who was] crying out for mercy
and assistance.
He addressed himself to the
ladies who were waiting, and said.
" When, night coming on, there
came with it very severe and tem-
pestuous weather.
Caesar spoke finely and much
to the point, we hearing him,
about life and death, when he
said
They were all garlanded with
oak-leaves.
Nor were the faults of Vitellius'
troops punished, but well paid.
But however noble a language
may be, this will be of little use to
it, whilst it is Dot adopted by cele-
brated writers.
If I am not allowed to marry
him, 1 shall at least endeavour
that he may be employed in this
city.
He was astonished at the bad
invention.
And the unhappy youth was
soon surrounded by a band of
satellites and taken to prison.
534
SYNTAX.
Di te stessa vergogndndoti,
PER NON POTERTI VEDERE, T*
AVRESTI CAVATI GLI OOCHI.
(Bocc. g. 8. n. 7.)
M6sser lo geloso s5 AVEA MESSE
ALCUNE PETRUZZE IN BOCCA.
(Bocc. g. 7. n. 5.)
UN dltro CHE FORATA AVEA LA
GOLA. (Dant. Inf. 28.)
Lassdi qu£l, ch' £' piu brdmo :
ed HO si AVVEZZA — LA MENTE
A CONTEMPLAR SOld COStei, Ck*
dltro non v6de (Petr. s. 80.)
BENCHE tglino AVESSERO gift
LE SPADE ISGUAINATE e ttiendte.
(Amm. Ant 11. 1. 12.)
fo NON HO QUESTE COSE SA-
PUTE DA* VICINI ; ELLA MEDESI-
MA, forte di te dolendosi, ME LE
HA DETTE. (BOCC. g. 3. D. 3.)
AV£A LA LTJNA, ess6ndo nel
mizzo del ciilo, PERDTJTI i RAG-
GI suoi. (Bocc. g. 6. Intr.)
COME io AVRO LORO OGNI COSA
DATO. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 3.)
CERCATO HO SEMPRE SOLITA-
RIA VIA — Per fuggir quesV in-
gdgni sordi e loschi. (Petr. s
222.)
Domeneddio M' HA DIMOSTRA-
TO LA CAGIONE DEL TtJO MALE.
(Bocc. g. 5. n. 4.)
;Cm dltri c/<e tu, HA QUESTE
COSE MANIFEST ATO AL MAESTRO ?
(Bocc. g. 8. n. 8.)
iL LIBERTO DICEVA AVERLA
Esso UCCISA, e^vendicdta V in-
giuria del padron suo. (Dav.)
Se tu ierifci affligg£sti,TU ci
HAI OGGI TANTO DILITICATE cJl€
niuna di te si dee rammaricdre.
(Bocc. g. 5. n. 5.)
Being ashamed of thyself, thou
wouldst have torn out thy eyes,
not to see thyself.
*
The jealous man had put some
small stones in his mouth.
Another who had his throat
pierced.
I have forgotten what I most
desire : and my mind is so ac-
customed to contemplate this lady
alone, that it perceives nothing
else.
Although they had unsheathed
and used their swords.
I did not hear these things
from the neighbours ; she herself,
complaining bitterly of thee, has
told them to me.
The moon, although in the
middle of heaven, had lost her
rays.
As I shall have given to them
every thing.
I have always sought a solitary
way, iu order to avoid these deaf
and blind minds.
God has manifested to me the
cause of thy evil.
Who else but thou has told
these things to the master ?
The freed- man said that he had
killed her himself, and thus aveng-
ed the offence done to his master.
If thou didst afflict us yesterday,
thou hast delighted us so much
to-day that none of us can com-
plain of thee.
USE AND POSITION OP ADVERBS.
535
LA QUALE, piacev6li donne, 10
RACCONTERO PER FARVI ACCORTE
..... (Bocc. g. 3. n. 3.)
E questo detto, si FE* D^RE
V orciuoUtto, net qudle era L' AC-
QUA, CHE IL Dl DAVANTI AVEVA
FATTA, e tutta la b£vve. (Bocc.
g. 4. n. 1.)
11 qudle cosi FATTA DONNA,
E Ctfl EGLI COTANTO AMATA
AVEA, per moglie VEDANDOSZ.
(Bocc. g. 5. n. 9.)
To sono venuta a ristordrti d6'
DANNI, LI QUALI TU HAI gt'A
AVtJTI PER ME. (BOCC. g. 5. D. 9.)
LE COSE CHE GlA AVEVA TJDfTO
D!RE, CHE di notte ERANO INTER-
VENT^TE, (Bocc. g. 9. n. 1.)
Dunque, un uom solo — Si
partira, che non V am tie offeso,
— Qudndo TT^TTI v* AVR^. FAT-
TO MORIRE ? (Ariost. Fur. 17. 8.)
LA DONNA, LA QUALE IL
GO VAGHEGGIARE, /' armeggidre,
le mattindte MUOVERE NON AVE-
VANO POTATO, mossero le affet-
tuose parole. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 9.)
GitjNTO adunque IL FAMIGLIA-
RE a Genovaj E DA'TE LE LET-
TERE, E FA'TTA L* AMBASCIA'TA,
FU ddlla donna CON GRAN FESTA
RicEVtiTO. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 9.)
Which, kind ladies, 1 will re-
late to show you
And, having said this, she caus-
ed the vessel of water to be given
to her, which she had prepared the
day before, and drank it all off.
Who seeing himself united in
marriage with such a lady, and one
whom he had loved so much.
I am come to make thee amends
for the injuries thou hast sustained
on my account.
The things which he had heard
of as having happened by night.
Then, shall a single man depart
from hence, when he will have put
all of you to death, without having
been at all hurt by you ?
The lady, whom his long admi-
ration, tournaments, serenades,
were not able to move, was mov-
ed by his tender words.
The domestic, having arrived at
Genoa, and having consigned the
letters and delivered the message,
was received by the lady with
great joy.
USE AND POSITION OF CERTAIN ADVERBS.
Adverbs, as we mentioned at pp. 391, 394, may be
put before or after the verb ; they may be put, also,
between the auxiliary and the participle, and between
two participles ; as,
tu SAI BENE come io s6no thou knowest well how I am
agidto, situated ;
536 SYNTAX.
PRESTAMENTE s' AWENTA'- quickly [a wolf] seized her by
VA alia gola di costei, the throat ;
non HO mdi POSCIA POTATO I could sleep no longer after
dormire, that ;
era STA'TA MdLTo MA'LE she had been very badly ad-
CONSIGLU/TA, vised.
The adverb non, l no or not' ; is always put before
the verb ; as,
NON FARNETICO, madonna, I do not rave, Madam ;
NON v' ACCORGETE che uoi do you not perceive that we
Mm vermi ? are worms.
When the adverb non is employed to deny several
objects, and these precede the verb, the adverb is put
before the nouns, and not before the verb ; as,
NON PIOGGIA, NON GRAXNDO, neither rain, nor hail, nor snow,
NON NEVE, NON RUGIA'DA, nor dew, nor frost falls a-
NON BRiNA piu su cdde, bove.
The adverb mai, which in itself strictly means ' at any
time,' may be put either before or after the verb ;
when, however, it is put before, it takes the signification
of never, and when after, it takes that of ever ; as,
ti priego die MA'I Dicni I beseech thee never to tell,
d* avermi veduta, that thou hast seen me ;
i Ptrugini MA'I si VOLLERO the Perugians never wished to
dichindre ad alcun accordo, condescend to come to any
agreement ;
qudi bdrbare FUR MA'I ! what barbarians were ever !
U cielo e oggi cosl hello come the sky is as beautiful to-day
FU MAXI, as ever it was.
The adverbs non mai, ' not ever,' ' never ' ; occurring
in the same phrase, are generally separated by the verb ;
and then non, c no or not ' ; always precedes, and mai,
6 ever ' ; always follows that verb ; as,
io NON mdngio MA'I, I never eat ;
V drti NON istetter MA'I peg- the arts never fared worse ;
'
USE AND POSITION OF ADVERBS.
537
NON SPERAR di vedermi in never hope to see me again on
terra MAI, earth.
But they may be used, also, united ; and then, if mai
precedes non, they are to be put both before the verb ;
if it follows non, they may be put after it ; as,
io MAI NON odRMOj I never sleep ;
che ferro MAI NON STRINGE, who never knew how to use
arms;
giurogli di MAI NON DIRLO, she swore to him never to tell
it;
amid fedeti POSSON DIVEN- they can, indeed, become faith-
TAR bene, sudditi NON ful friends, but subjects nev-
MAI, er.
EXAMPLES.
Pinuccio, TU sXi BENE COME
io SONO AGIATO. (Bocc. g. 9. n.
6.)
II qildle PRESTAME'NTE 8* AV-
YENTAVA ALLA GOLA DI COSTEI.
(Bocc. g. 9. n. 7.)
J'O NON HO M^I POSCIA POTATO
DORM1RE. (BOCC. g. 9. n. 6.)
E Ck9 el? ERA STATA MOLTO
MALE CONSIGLIATA. (BoCC.)
Disse allora Pirro : " Now
FARNETICO, no, MADONNA."
(Bocc. g. 7. n. 9.)
NOI^V' ACCORGETE v6l, CHE
NOI si AM V£RMI, — Ndti a for-
mar V angelica forfalla. (Dant.
Purg. 10.)
Perchb INTON PIOGGIA, NON
GRANDO, NON NEVE,~NoN RU-
GIADA, NON BRIJVA PIU 3U CADE,
— Che la scaletta de1 tre grddi
breve. (Dant. Purg. 21.)
Ti PRIEGO CHE MAI ad alcuna
persdna DICHI D* AVERMI VEDT^-
TA. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 7.)
Pinuccio, thou knowest well
how I am situated.
Which [wolf] quickly seized her
by the throat.
I could sleep no longer after
that.
And that she had been very
badly advised.
Then Pyrrhus said : " I do not
rave, Madam, no."
Do you not perceive, that we
are worms, made to form the
winged insect imped with angel
plumes.
Because neither rain, nor hail,
nor snow, nor dew, nor frost, ever
falls above that short ladder of
three steps.
I beseech thee never to tell to
any ono that thou hast seen me.
538
SYNTAX.
I PERUGINI, per loro alterigia,
MAI VOLLERO DICHINA.RE AD AL-
CUN ACCORDO. (Matt. Vill. 8. 39.)
QUAI BARBARE FUR MAI,
Saracme ! (Dant. Purg. 23.)
COSI Z OGGI BELLO IL CIELO
COME FU MAI. (BOCC. g. 6. D. 10.)
Se tu digiuni, io NOJV MANGIO
Mix ; se tu vegghi, io MAI NON
DORMO. (Passav.)
In quisle mezzo, L' ARTI e la
mercanzia NON ISTETTER MAI
PEGGIO in Fir6nze. (Giov. Vill.
9. 12.)
NON SPERAR DI VEDERM1 IN
TERRA MAI. (Petr. s. 212.)
Popolo ignudo, pavdntoso, e
Unto, — CHE FERRO MAI NON
STRINGE. (Petr. c. 5.)
E GIUROGLI DI MAI NON DIRLO.
(Bocc. g. 3. n. 6.)
AMICI FEDEL.I POSSON DIVEN-
TAR BENE gli Jlmericani agV In-
fldSl, SUDDITI NON MAI. (Bott.
ton Amer. 1. 6.)
The Perugians, through pride,
never wished to condescend to
come to any agreement.
What barbarians, what Saracens
were ever !
The sky is as beautiful to-day
as ever it was.
If thou fastest, I never eat; if
thou art watching, I never sleep.
During this time, the arts and
commerce never fared worse in
Florence.
Never hope to see me again on
earth.
A race poor, fearful, and indo-
lent, who never knew how to use
arms.
And she swore to him never to
tell it.
The Americans can indeed be-
come the faithful friends of the
English, but subjects never.
EXERCISE XXXIV.
After he had spent some (of his) time I to con-
Poichi — 4 ponere5 alqudnto1 2 — t6mpo3 \ in6 dovdr7
sole I her weeping. To him, then residing in
racconsoldre™ \ 8 pidngere9. , — dimordre
Ireland, came the desire of hearing. (The) rivers
Irldnda, venire — voglia sentire. TWO
of (the) blood extinguished the rising flame. Happy,
sdngue estinguere4 l ndscere* fidmrna?. Felice,
and fortunate, and enjoying I for ever I the fruit
fortundto, godere4 \ in1 ogni2 ttmpo3 \ — —
USE AND POSITION OF ADVERBS. 539
of their love. You* are not the first, nor will you be
amore. primo,
the last, that is imposed upon. I know not whether
ultimo, inganndre. sapere se
thou hast ^ minded I how close wef are kept.
C hdi posto in mente \ stretto3 — l tenere*.
They having arrived at the city, went | with
Esso* l pervenire6 3 4 cittdb, ne anddrono13 \ 7
Mr. Torello to his house,:): where fifty of the
Messtr* 9 » » cdsa1*, cinqudnta
principal citizens were come to receive them. The
maggiore cittadino venire ricevere
message which I have given to him I to I deliver
commessione dare \ di \ riferire
to the king. Thou knowest what is the offence,
re. sapere ingiuria,
which thou hast given me. Master, I have seen
fdre . Maestro, vedtrc
a thing which troubles me. One who had
cosa dispiacere.
the one, and the other hand cut off. Each one§ of
uno, dltro man mozzdre.
them had her right breast cut off, I in order to I
i _ diritto3 mammilla^ taglidre*, \ per
carry
portare
j the shield
I lo scudo
in I battles. They|| are
alia I battdglia.
handsomer than the painted angels, which you have
bello dipmto2 dgnoli1,
oflen-tirnes shown me. ThoulF hast been with that
piit volte mostrdre • co~
lady, whom thou hast deceived.
Ui, inganndre.
I have caused the greater part of my possessions to-
jare 2 maggior3 pdrte4 8 6 possessione* ven-
* You, feminine gender. t We, feminine.
J House, in the plural. $ Each one, in the feminine.
|| They, feminine. * Thou, feminine.
540 SYNTAX.
be-sold. They were glad that they had (of having)
dere1. — Rimanere content o — — —
successfully (with success) known how to mock the
— successo , sapere — — schernire
avarice of Calandrino. I No sooner
avarizia . | Ne prima «
had she entered (into)
— — entrdre* l
the room, than the (beating of the arteries the) pulse
2 camera3, che battimento — polso
returned to the youth ; and having left it (she hav-
ritorndre giovane ;
ing departed), it [the pulse] left him also (it ceased).
partire, — — — — — — — cessdre.
Is not this the land, which I first
terrent pria
trod with
toe-
my feet I ? Ciacco replied : " Thou knowest very
care \ 1 2 Risp6nderel : " — sapere —
well, that I shall come." Who quickly opened
beney venire" prestamente aprire
the door. The Devil said once to St, Macarius :
pdrta. Diavdlo dire una volta San Macdrio :
" If thou art always watching (watchest), I never
" — vegliare,
sleep ; if thou I usest all thy efforts I in thy works
dormire ; ti affatichi
(working), I never rest (have never rest)."
operdre, non nidi riposo"
Did not thy master say, that we should carry
padrone dire, portdre
I home | these things ? Caring (himself) neither
a cdsa cosa ? Curare
for I the palaces, nor I for I the ox, nor
'
for 1 the
di
horse, nor
cavdllo,
paldgio, \ di \ biie,
for I the ass, nor I for I the money,* nor
di \ dsino, \ di \ dendro,
for I any other thing, which he had seen.
di I cosa, — 2 vederc1.
* Money t in the plural.
EXPLETIVES.
541
CHAPTER IX.
EXPLETIVES.
[Although many of the following words have been already mentioned in treating
of the different Parts of Speech, which they respectively belong to, it baa,
nevertheless, not been thought altogether useless to present them here once
more united in a single chapter.]
B&LLO :
IL vostro vestito e BELL' efdtto.
(Fir.)
per BELLA paura gitto le ban-
diere del comune. (Cron.
Mor.)
per BELLE scritte di lor mdno
s' obbligdrono V uno aW dl-
tro. (Bocc, g. 2. n. 9.)
Your suit of clothes is finished.
through fear he threw down
the standards of the com-
monwealth.
they were bound to each other
by fine, obligations written
with their own hands.
BENE, BEN, BE' :
Gli domanddi, se gli bastdva
V dnirno di caccidrlo via ; ed
egli rispose : " Si BENE."
(Bocc. g. 9. n. 5.)
egli e qua un malvdgio uomo,
che m' ha taglidto la borsa
con BEN cento fiorini d> oro.
(Bocc. g. 2. n. 1.) .
" BE'," rispos* io, "Messere,par-
lerem poi ; — JVbn fat e qul
per or questo fracdsso"
(Bern. Rim.)
CI:
Sempre che tu ci viverdi. (Bocc. As long as thou livest.
g. 6. n. 4.)
la donna e Ptrro dicevano : the lady and Pyrrhus said :
" Noi ci seggidmo." (Bocc. " We will sit down."
g. 7.n.9.)
CON:
Sldssi CON meco. (Petr.) He is with me.
spero dy avire assdi bu6n tempo I hope I shall have a fine time
CON teco. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 10.)
46
I asked him, if he had courage
to send him away ; and he
answered : " Yes, indeed."
here is a wicked man, who has
cut my purse with full one
hundred florins of gold.
" well, Sir," answered I, " we
will speak afterwards ; do
not make now such a noise
here."
with thee.
542 SYNTAX.
ECCO :
Ed ECCO Pietro chiamo alV And lo Peter called at the door,
uscio. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 10.)
ECCO, Giannotto, a te place here, John, thou wishest that I
ch? lo divenga Cristidno. should become a Christian.
(Bocc. g. 2. n. 2.)
EGLI :
EGLI e una compassione a ve- It excites pity to see him.
derlo. (Mach. Com.)
non ti fa mestieri il dlrlo, il it is not necessary to tell it,
viso tuofavella EGLI. (Sen.) thy face manifests it.
ELLA :
ELLA non andra cosl. (Bocc. It shall not go on so.
g. 9. n. 5.)
se non ch> ilia ha in cib voluto except that she wished to show
mostrdre, ch' ilia t gentile, by this, that she is courte-
ELLA. (Bocc. Corb, 79.) ous.
ESSO:
Andidmo a Roma con ESSO lui. Let us go to Rome with him.
(Bocc. g. 2. n. 3.)
JEsso, as an expletive, is invariable, and may be used equally welf
before a masculine and a feminine pronoun, both singular and plural ;
as, con esso meco, ' with me ' j con esso tecor ' with thee ' ; con esso
lui, *with him'; con essotei, 'with her,' or ^with^you'; con esso
noi, ( with us ' j con es«o voi, ' with you ' ; con esso loro, l with them/
or ' with you : '
fatti alia finestra, e chidmala, e go to the window, and call
dV die vfaga a desindre con her, and tell her to come
ESSO NOI. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 8.) and dine with us.
GIA:
Gil D'to non voglia. (Bocc. May God forbid,
g. 10. n. 5.)
non credo lo Gil che ne avete a I do not think you take it ill.
male. (Varch.)
10:
Che farebbe egli sj lo morlssi, What would he do if I should
io ? (Mach. Com.) die ?
EXPLETIVES. ;,i;>
6gni dltro uo
si lodi, io me
ddre io. Bo
n. 3.)
. ,
comeche 6gni dltro uomo molto although every other perton
di lid si lodi, io mene posso praises him much. I can
poco loddre, io. (Bocc. g. 10. praise him but little.
Mil :
Una pdrte del mondo e, che There is a part of the world,
si gidce — MAI stmpre in which lies always frozen.
ghidccio. (Petr. c. 5.)
* come," disse Ferondo, " dbn- " how," said Ferondo, u am I
que sono io morto ? " — Dis- dead, then ? " — The Monk
se il Mfinaco : " MAI si." replied : " Yes indeed."
(Bocc. g. 3. n. 8.)
MI:
to MI sono un povero pellegri- I am a poor pilgrim.
no. (Boce. Filoc. 1. 5.)
io MI credo che le suore sien I believe that the nuns are all
tutte a dormire. (Bocc. g. 3. asleep,
n. 1.)
MICA:
Son novelle e vere, non son These are true news, they are
MICA fdvole. (Fir. Trin.) aot fables.
on MICA idiota ne materidle ; not an idiot nor a vulgar man ;
ma scienzidto, e di aciito in- but learned, and of an acute
gegno. (Casa. Gal.) mind.
NE:
Chetamente N' ando per la cd- He went tranquilly through the
mera insino dtta Jinestra. room to the window.
(Bocc. g. 2. n. 7.)
didnNv l&, e laveremlo spac- let us go there, and we will
ciatamente. (Bocc. g. J. n. 5.) wash it immediately.
NON:
Temo che voi NON mi abbando- I fear you will abandon me.
nidte. (Bocc.)
la qual modestia dubito che which modesty, I doubt, may
NON gli sia danndsa. (Tolom. be hurtful to him.
lett.)
544 SYNTAX.
6RA :
Deh ! OR V avessero essi qffogd- Ah ! would that they had
to. (Bocc. g. 8. n. 9.) drowned thee.
ORA che vorrd dir questo ? now what does this mean ?
(Bocc. g. 7. n. 8.)
P6l:
Non e POI vero qudnto mi di- What you told me is not true.
ciste. (Bocc.)
io non mi sono POI risoluto di I have not come to the resolu-
partir di R6ma. (Car. lett.) tion of leaving Rome.
PtiNTO :
Sinza sbigottir PTJNTO. (Bocc.) Without being frightened at all.
Teddldo non e PTJNTO morto. Tedaldo is not at all dead.
(Bocc. g. 3. n. 7.)
PURE :
La cosa andd PUR cost. (Bocc. The affair went off so.
g. 2. n. 5.)
fa ptfRE che tu mi mostri qudl do hut show me him whomthou
tipidce. (Bocc. g. 5. n. 10.) likest.
Del paldgio s' uscl, e fuggissi He went out of the palace, and
a cdsa. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 8.) fled to his house.
Si e tdnta la benignita, e la So great is the goodness and
misericordia di Dio. (Bocc. the mercy of God.
g. 1. n. 1.)
TI :
I'o non so se tu T' hdi posto I know not, whether thou hast
in mtnte. (Bocc. g. 3. n. 1.) minded.
TU:
Tu dV tuepar6le,i:u. (Bocc. g. Thou mayest say what thou
7. n. I.) pleasest.
ELLIPSIS. .-,45
TUTTO :
La donna, udtndo costui par- The woman, hearing this man
Idre il qudle ilia, credeva speak whom she thought
mutolo, TTJTTA stordl (Bocc. dumb, was quite amazed,
g. 3. n. 1.)
tiJSO:
Vuoi tu quell9 tfw> ? (Bocc.) Dost thou want that one ?
VI:
Vol non sapete cib che v6i vi You do not know what you
dite. (Bocc. g. 6. n. 6.) say.
VIA:
" Va VIA," rispose ; " e cib che tu " Go away," answered he ; " and
vuoi, conta." ( Dant. Inf. 32.) relate what thou pleasest."
CHAPTER X.
OF THE ELLIPSIS.
ELLIPSIS is a figure in grammar, which consists in
the omission of one or more words in order to add con-
ciseness and elegance to the phrase, without affecting its
clearness. This figure is very frequent in Italian, and
offers one of the principal difficulties in the grammatical
analysis of the Classics. We will here give some exam-
ples in which the ellipsis is employed, supplying the
words which are omitted, that the learner may familiar-
ize himself with similar locutions.
ELLIPSIS OF THE Substantive:
Ruppe [la nave] in mdre. He made shipwreck.
(Crusca.)
mi scusdi [d611a colpa] di cib. I exculpated myself from that
(Class.) fault.
46*
546
SYNTAX.
Jllessdndro muore [per amore]
di quella vedova. (Bocc.)
conoscdndo che quivi non era
[luogo] da pidngere
(Bocc.)
bdstami [la disgrazia] di esse-
re stdto schernito una volta.
(Bocc.)
io ci tornerb, e darottene tdnte
[busse], ch> io ti farb tristo
per tutto il tempo, che tu ci
viverdi. (Bocc. g. 4. n. 2.)
niuno male si fece nella cadu-
ta, quantunque alqudnto ca-
desse da alto [luogo]. (Bocc.
g. 2. n. 5.)
Alexander dies for that widow.
knowing that there was no
place to weep
it is enough to have been in-
sulted once.
I will return, and give thee so
many blows, that I will make
thee sorry as long as thou
livest.
he did not hurt himself in fall-
ing, although he fell from
a high place.
ELLIPSIS OF THE Adjective :
E simpre poi per [buono] da
mdlto I' 6bbe, e per amico.
(Bocc. g. 6. n. SL)
fu [abile] da tdnto, e tdnto
seppe fare, ch' tgli pacifi-
cb il figliuolo col padre.
(Bocc. g. 2. n. 3.)
non suspicb, che cib Guccio
BaUna gli avessefdtto, per-
ciocche nol conosceva [ca-
pace] da tdnto. (Bocc. g. 6.
n. 10.)
il re gli chiamb, e quei, quan-
do il videro, tennersi [im-
mobili]. (Nov. Ant.)
And considered him always
afterwards as a very good
man, and as a friend.
he was so able, and knew how
to do so much, that he re-
conciled the son with the
father.
he did not suspect that Guccio
Balena had done this to
him, because he did not
think him capable of so
much.
the king called them, and
they, when they saw him,
stopped.
ELLIPSIS OF Relative Pronouns:
Esaminidmo se delle cose [che
si sono] dette ne hafdtto al-
cuna. (Mach. Princ.).
la donna gli fece apprestdre
pdnni [i quali erano] stdti
del marito. (Bocc. g. 2, n, 2.)
Let us examine if he has done
any of the things which have
been said.
the woman caused clothes to
be prepared for him, which
had been her husband's.
ELLIPSIS.
riscontrollo quivi Pet'dio Ce-
ridle [il quale e*ra] fugglto
dalle gudrdie di Fitellio.
(Dav. Stor.)
there met him Petilius Ceri-
alis, who had escaped from
the guards of Viteliiua,
ELLIPSIS OF THE Infinitive or Verbs:
[prendere] essi. Go after them.
And&le per
(Bocc.)
qu\ il sole non vi pub [pene-
trare]. (Class.)
to ira un asindccio che non
poteva [sostenere] la vita.
(Firenz.)
here the sun cannot penetrate.
I was a great ass that could
not endure life.
ELLIPSIS OF THE Verb IN THE Indicative Mood :
Tessa, 6di tu qu6l c/i5 to [odo] ?
(Bocc. g. 7. n. 1.)
questi & il capitdno, gli cdtri
[sono] da nulla. (Dav. Stor.)
ira parinte stretto di Vespa-
sidnOj e [era] solddto di con-
to. (Dav. Stor.)
Tessa, do
hear?
you hear what I
this is the captain, the others
are of no account.
he was a near relation of Ves-
pasian, and a good soldier.
ELLIPSIS OF THE Verb IN THE Conjunctive Mood :
Qut ha qutsta etna, e non
sar6bbe chi [potesse] man-
giarla. (Bocc. g. 2. n. 2.)
avrfa gridato, se non [f6sse
stato] che egli mi chttse
mercd per Dio, e per v6i.
(Bocc. g. 3. n. 3.)
ah ! ah ! se non [f6sse] cA' to
ho reverenza a vdi, p&dre,
to dirti pure il bell3 onore
ch> ei mi fa. (Mach. Com.)
Here is this supper, and there
is no one to eat it
I would have cried out, had
it not been that he besought
mercy both in the name of
God and in your name.
ah ! ah ! were it not for the
respect that I hear to you,
father, I would tell the grett
honor he does me.
ELLIPSIS OF THE Gerund :
[Essendo] durante la guirra. [Being] during the war.
(Bocc.)
548
SYNTAX.
[avendo] veduto il luogo soli-
tdrio. (Bocc.)
[essendo] giunto il famiglidre
a Genova, e [avendo] date
le lettere, e [avendo] fdtta
I3 ambascidta (Bocc.)
having seen the solitary place.
the domestic having arrived at
Genoa, and having consign-
ed the letter and delivered
the message
ELLIPSIS OF THE Participle :
Se is si mi caccidsser gli occhi If they should tear out my
a die sar& io [ridotto] ? eyes, to what should I be
(Bocc. g. 9. n, 1.) reduced ?
if it had not been for the High
Priest, whom curses light
se non fosse [stato] il Gran
Prete, a cui mal prenda.
(Dant. Inf. 27.)
se non fosse [stato] ch' egli
era giovane, 6gli avrebbe
avuto molto a sostenere.
(Bocc. g. 8. n. 7.)
had he not been a young
man, he would have had a
great deal to suffer.
ELLIPSIS OF Adverbs :
Ora [cosi] fossero essi pur
gia disposti a venire, che
veramente potremmo dire la
fortuna dssere favor eggidn-
te. (Bocc. Intr.)
al mondo non fur nidipersone
[talmente] rdtte, — JL far
lor pro ... — Cow3 io dopo
cotdi parole fdtte. (Dant.
Inf. 2.)
Would that they were dispos-
ed to come, that we might
truly say that fortune is fa-
vorable.
never among men did any with
such speed haste to their
profit ... as I when these
words were spoken.
ELLIPSIS OF Prepositions:
In cdsa [di] questi
(Bocc.)
serviva [a] cirti pescalori.
(Bocc. g. 9. n. 1.)
usdva mdlto [in] la chiesa.
(Bocc. g. 3. n. 4.)
sedette re [per] dnni quindici.
(Crusca.)
usurdi. In the house of these usurers,
she served certain fishermen.
he frequented much the church,
he reigned for fifteen years.
MODES OF ADDRESS. 549
n. 1.)
ELLIPSIS OF Conjunctions :
/o s6nola mlsera [e] ««en<u- I am the miserable and on-
rata Zmevra. (Bocc. g. 2. . fortunate Ginevra.
n. y. )
red; na^ro, [e] aflfflfco tnfei- a royal nature, and an angelic
lettoy — [e] Chiar* dlma, [e] mind, and " clear spirit,* and
prdnta vista, [e] 6cchio cer- a quick sight and piercing
vitro. (Petr. s. 201.) eyes.
REMARKS ON THE DIFFERENT MODES
OF ADDRESS IN ITALIAN.
THE Italians have three different modes of addressing
a person ; — viz. the second person singular, TU, ' thon ' ;
and its inflexion, TI, {to thee,' cthee': — the second per-
son plural, voi, ' you ' ; and its inflexion, vi, * to you/
* you ' : — and the third person singular, feminine, E'LLA,
and its inflexions, LE, LA; representing the title VOSTRA
SIGNORIA (generally contracted into VOSSIGNORJA, and
often written V. S.), 'your worship,' *your lordship,'
c your ladyship'; whether the person addressed be a
man or a woman.
The second person singular is used in addrtttin^ a
person of inferior condition ; as by a master speaking
to a servant, by a parent addressing a child. Likewise
husbands and wives, brothers and sisters, and any two
intimate friends adopt it in speaking to each other I
is also used in poetry, and in addressing the Divinity.
The second person plural is used in addresring a
person of egwa? rani with the speaker, but not par-
550 SYNTAX.
ticularly intimate with him. Also by children address-
ing their parents, by ladies speaking to gentlemen.
It is likewise used in addressing artisans, tradesmen,
dealers, &c.
The third person singular, feminine, is used in ad-
dressing a superior, or one- towards whom the speaker
wishes to exhibit special civility and respect ; as by a
servant to his master, by a tradesman to a gentleman,
&c. Ladies, and persons respectable for their age or
office, are addressed in this mode.
It is to be observed, that when the second person
plural, voi, and its inflexion, vi, are used, the verb is
put in the plural ; but all the other words, such as
adjectives, participles, &c., agreeing with the subject,
remain in the singular, masculine or feminine, accord-
ing to the gender of the person addressed ; as,
voi, SigndrE, SARETE rispet- you, Sir, will be respected ;
tdto,
voi, SigndrA, SIETE S&VIA, you, Madam, are wise.
When the third person singular, feminine, E'LLA, and
its inflexions, LE, LA; or the title VOSSIGNORIA, are em-
ployed, the verb is put in the singular • and the words
agreeing with them take the feminine gender, whether
the person addressed be masculine or feminine', as,
( you [Sir], or your lordship will
*A, or V. S. SAKX mpettflA, ] j^jflSjU your ladyship
£ will be respected :
C you [Sir] are, or your lordship
MA or V. S. * sdviA, 1 ybu [M^dam] are, or your lady-
f ship is wise.
Where two or more individuals are addressed in the
third person, the third person plural, feminine, E'LLENO,
MODES OF ADDRESS. 551
and its inflexion, LORO ; or the titles VOSTRE or LE
VOSTRE SlGNORlE, LE SlGNORlE LoHO, LoR SlONOBI,
are used ; the verb being put in the plural, and the
words agreeing with them, in the plural feminine ; as,
x,7 C y°u [gentlemen], or your lord-
etfENo, or IE FostrE Signo- 1 ships will be respected •
TIE SARANNO rispettdtE, \ you [ladies], or your ladyships
f will be respected :
I you [gentlemen], or your lord-
C//ENO, or IE Signonv 1,6110 1 ships are wise ;
sdNO $dw*E, \ you [ladies], or your ladyship*
f are wise.
Some Italian Grammariang assert, on the authority of Bembo, Benti-
vtigliOj Ganganelliy and other modern writers, that this agreement in
gender of adjectives and participles, with the word Vossignona or the
pronoun ella, when used in addressing a man, ought to take place only,
when the verb essere, ' to be/ stands between them ; as,
ell A, or V. S. £ molto ddttA, you [Sir] are, or your lordship b
very learned :
but if any other verb stands between the word Vossignona or the
pronoun ella and the adjective or participle, these are made to agree
with the person signified by those 3 as,
V. S., or ella PAR molto pensie- you [Sir] seem, or your lordship
roso, seems very thoughtful.
If the verb happens to be the auxiliary essere, and the participle of
another verb, then this participle agrees in gender with the won!
or the pronoun 6lla, and the following adjective or participle is made
to agree with the person signified by them ; as,
ellA. si % MOSTRATO, Stgndr*, you have shown yourself, Sir, both
non meno sdvio, che benigno, wise and kind.
Adjectives of nations agree always with the person signified by the
pronoun ella or the word V. S. j as,
ella senza dubbio e Romdno, you, Sir, without doubt are a
Roman ;
le Signorie L6ro sardnno certo you, gentlemen, are certainly llal-
Italian^ ians.
552 SYNTAX.
Besides the abovementioned modes of address, the
Italians often use the demonstrative pronouns quello,
quella, and the words giovane, uomo, donna, in speaking
to a person whose name is unknown to them ; and say
quel giovane, ' young man ' ; quell* uomo, ' good man ' ;
&c.; as,
avvertisci, QUEL GIOVANE, take care, young man, for thou
che tu V ingdnni, deceivest thyself;
QUELL' UOM DABBENE, che what is the matter, good man?
cosa e stata 1
v6i siete molto dtitra, QUEL- you are very proud, my good
LA DONNA, woman :
but this way of addressing people, is only used by
superiors towards their inferiors.
The following are the TITLES used by the Italians
in addressing the different qualities of persons : viz.
in speaking to a GENTLEMAN, Signore, ' Sir ' ; Fos-
signoria (written, V. S.), 'your worship,' c your lord-
ship ' : tO a PERSON OF RANK, Or tO a NOBLEMAN,
lllustrissimo (lllmo), ' most illustrious Sir '; Fossi-
gnoria Illustrissima (V. S. lllma), 'Your most illus-
trious lordship ' ; Eccellenza, c Excellency ' ; Vostra
Eccellenza (V. JE.), c Your Excellency ' : — to a
PRINCE OF THE BLOOD, JUtezza, c Highness ' 5 Pos-
tra Jlltezza, l Your Highness ' : — to a KING, Sire,
6 Sire ' ; JMaestd, { Majesty ' ; Fostra Maesta (V. M.),
c Your Majesty ' : — to an EMPEROR, Sire, c Sire ' ;
Maesta, ( Majesty ' ; Maesta Imperiale, ' Imperial Majes-
ty ' ; Fostra Maesta Imperiale (V. M. /.) 'Your Im-
perial Majesty ' ; Fostra Maesta Reale e Imperiale (F.
M. R. /.), 'Your Royal and Imperial Majesty5 : — to
a MONK, Padre, ' Father ' ; Fostra Paternitd (F. Pta),
' Your Paternity ' : — to a PRIEST, Reverendo, ' Rev-
erend'; Fostra Reverenza (F. R.), 'Your Rever-
MODES OF ADDRESS. .V^J
ence ' : — to a BISHOP, Monsignore, < Riu;ht Honorable ';
Eccellenza Reverendissima, ' Most Reverend Excellen-
cy ' ; Vostra Eccellenza Reverendissima ( V. E. Rtma),
'Your most Reverend Excellency' : — to a CARDINAL,
Eminenza, 'Eminence'; Vbstra Eminenza (V. Em£a),
6 Your Eminence': — to the POPE, Santita, * Holiness ;
Santo Padre, 'Holy Father'; Rostra Santita
'Your Holiness'; V6stra Beatitudine (F.
4 Your Blessedness.'
[For Illustrations of the above Remarks on the Dffircnt Modtt if .Mrttt in
Italian, see the Author's COKVERSAZIO'NE ITAUA'»A, whore they have beeo
fully exemplified.]
47
PART IV.
ITALIAN ORTHOGRAPHY.
-o| —
CHAPTER I.
OF ACCENTS.
THE accent, in Orthography, is a small sign placed
upon the vowels of words to determine their pronun-
ciation.
There are two accents in Italian, the grave and the
acute.
The grave accent is an oblique line drawn from the
left to the right (x) ; and the acute, an oblique line
drawn from the right to the left (').
These accents are generally put on all words in which a letter or
syllable has been suppressed; as in natw from nativot l native ' ;
in which v is suppressed ; virtu from w'rfatTE, virtuoE, or virtue,
t virtue ' ; in which te, de, e, are suppressed ; &c.
And on those words in which the sameness of spelling might pro-
duce a confusion of signification ; as in peidj l hut ' ; balia, ' power' ;
&c. to distinguish them frompero, ' pear-tree '; balia, * nurse J ; &c.
The grave accent is put
On all contracted nouns of more than one syllable ;
as,
caritJL [caritafe, or caritacfc], charity ;
merc& [mercerfe], mercy :
ACCENTS. 555
On the names of the days of the week ending in
Lunedi, Monday;
On the compounds of che ; as,
percn&, because ;
On the compounds of tre ; as
twenty-three ;
Vcnerdi, Friday:
although :
cenJoTHE,
one hundred
[and three :
On the first and third persons singular of the future
of all verbs ; as,
I will
temerb,
sentirb,
amerA, C love ;
/emerl, he will < fear ;
senfaYA, ( hear :
On the third person singular of the perfect of all
those verbs in which the first person of the same tense
terminates with two vcwels ; as,
[cantAi,
[credEj,
C sang ; ]
I < believed ;]
canto,
( sang ;
he < believed;
[dormii,
( slept ; ]
dormi,
( slept :
On the
words
mete,
half;
cremisi,
crimson ;
baccate,
cod-fish ;
SO/A,
sofa;
caffE,
taiiE,
/a/6,
coffee ;
tawny;
bonfire ;
tafetA,
alcali,
taffety ;
aloes ;
alkali ;
0166,
orsu.,
fy;
come ;
co/i,
cote,
> there ;
COSl,
so, or thus ;
costi,
testi,
aimjL \
OIWE !
just now ;
( alas !
ohs, •
ho there !
take care !
On the
words
ci6,
this, or that ;
ffi 9
already ;
^
gift.
below ;
quk,
S here ;
piu,
more ;
qul,
S
pub,
may, or can ;
•
556 ORTHOGRAPHY.
which are written with a grave accent in order to show
that the two vowels are to be pronounced both in out
syllable :
And on the words
cfi, (noun) day ;
w,
TIE,
SE,
I (adverb)
^ .«
there;
affirmative particle, or adverb) yes, or so ;
negative particle, or conjunction) nor, or neither ;
personal pronoun) one's self ;
(noun) tea ;
c^i, (conjunction) for, or because ;
in which the grave accent is used as a mark of distinc-
tion between them, and the words
£, S(prepOSiti°n) SfYoUorby;
e, (conjunction) and ;
,?' > (article, or conjunctive pronoun) \ H*6' or \
h, jy> ' } the, or them ;
si, (conjunctive pronoun) one's self;
ne, (relative particle) of it, or of them ;
se, (conjunction) if;
te, (personal pronoun) thee, or to thee ;
che, (relative pronoun) who, which, or that.
The acute accent is put
On the i of the terminations ia, io, of nouns, when the
two vowels are pronounced in two distinct syllables : as,
magia, magic ; desio, desire :
On words in which the stress of the voice, by a
poetical license, is transferred from one syllable to
another ; as,
simile [for simile], similar ; oceA.no [for oceano], ocean :
And, sometimes, on the words
Ancora, anchor; nvttare, nectar;
fblgore, thunderbolt ; tvnere, tender :
suite ;
APOSTROPHE. 557
to distinguish them from the words
rtttcora,
[ancdra],
yet, also, or again ;
folgore,
[folgdre],
splendor;
nettare,
[nettare],
to clean ;
tenere,
[tenerej,
to hold ;
seguito,
[seguito],
followed.
These are all the cases in which the accents are used,
except that, in some books which teach the principles of
the language, the acute accent is employed to facilitate
the pronunciation to learners.
CHAPTER II.
OF THE APOSTROPHE.
THE apostrophe is a small sign, like a comma ('),
inserted between two words to mark the elision of a
vowel.
The apostrophe is generally used at the end of those words that
terminate with a vowel, followed by a word that begins with the tame
vowel ', as,
[buonA Avventura] buori* \vvcntura, good fortune ;
[grandE Edifizio] grand* vdifizio, great edifice :
And at the end of words that terminate with a vowel followed by a
word that begins with any other vowal, whenever it is necestary, to
render the pronunciation more agreeable ; as,
[questo uomo] quest* uomo, this man ;
[quello Albero] quell* A.lbero, that tree.
The Italians write with an apostrophe
The articles 70, la, ' the,' making an elision of the
vowels o, a, before words beginning with a vowel ; as,
r Amico, the friend ; /' innocenza, the innocence.
47*
558 ORTHOGRAPHY.
These articles are also written sometimes without an apostrophe ; as,
Jo Amore, the love ; l\ JLnergia, the energy.
But when lo is followed by an o, and la is followed by an a, they
e always written with an apostrophe ; as,
V onore, the honor ; V imma, the soul :
The article gli, ' the,' when it is followed by an i ; as,
gV mgegni, the" geniuses ; gV idoli, the idols :
The article Ze, ' the,' when the following word begins
with e ; as,
V Eresie, the heresies : V vminde, the emendations.
Sometimes they write also with an apostrophe the article t7, ' the ' ;
after a word ending with a vowel, and make an elision of the vowel
i ; as,
tutto 'I mondoj all the world; sopr*. 'I petto, upon the breast :
The words mi, c me ' ; ti, c thee ' ; ci, c us,' or ' here' ;
vi, * you,' or ' there ' ; si, £ one's self ; we, ( of it,' or
4 of them '; 4 hence,' or { thence ' ; se, ' if ' ; di, f of ' ;
when they come before a voweZ ; as,
m' ingdnno, I deceive myself ;
V imcr, he loves thee ;
c' intende, he understands us ; &c.
And the words i', e\ de\ a\ dk\ co', ne\ pe\ be',
si\ di\fe\ re', po\ me\ mo\ vo\ te', &tc., abbreviated
from io, c 1 ' ; ci, * he,' or ' they ' ; dci, c of the ' ; ai,
c to the ' ; dai, ' from or by the ' ; coi, ' with the ' ; nei,
* in the ' ; pel, ' for or by the ' ; bei, or 6ene, c hand-
some,' or ' well ' ; sei, c thou art ' ; did, ' say thou ' ;
fece, * he made ' ; vedi, « see thou ' ; pdco, ' little ' ; me-
glio, * better ' ; morfo, c mode ' or ' manner ' ; voglio,
* I wish ' 5 *i'e>M, ' hold thou ' ; &tc.
APOSTROPHE. 55!)
The apostrophe ought never to be used when the
elision of the vowel might produce, in nouns or adjec-
tives, a confusion of gender, of number, or of relation
among themselves :
Thus die feminine of all the adjectives of the common
gender, like innocente, ' innocent ' ; errante, < wander-
ing ' ; &c. preceded by the article la, l the,' are written
without elision, L\. innocente, < the innocent woman ' ; /A
errante, 6 the wandering woman5; to distinguish them
from the masculine, V innocente [lo innoc&nte], * the in-
nocent man '; V err ante [lo errante], 'the wandering
man' :
Those nouns which in the plural do not change their
termination, as, effigie, ' image ' ; estasi, ' ecstacy ' ; pre-
ceded by the article le, 'the,' are written without elision,
/E ejffigie, < the images '; ZE estasi, ' the ecstacies ' ; to
distinguish them from the singular, V (ffigie [la effigie],
* the image ' ; /' estasi [la estasi], ' the ecstacy ' :
And the preposition da, c from or by,' expressing the
relation of derivation, followed by a noun beginning
with a vowel, as C?A amore, ' from or by love '; is written
without elision, to distinguish it from the relation of pos-
session, d' amore [di amore], ' of love.'
Nor is the apostrophe to be used when the elision of
the vowels would change the sound of the consonants ;
as in gli, ' the,' followed by the vowels a, e, o, u, where
the elision of the i would render hard the liquid sound
of the gl ; as in
gV AVfiri, ) C gli Avdri, the misers ;
gV Kditti, ff ) gliEdilti, the edicts;
gl1 6cchi, r J ) gli 6cchi, the eyea ;
gV uccttli, ) f gli vcctlli, the birds.
For the same reason, ci, < us,' or ' here ' ; and words
ending in ce, ci ; ge, gi, are never written with an apos-
trophe before the vowels a, o, u; since the elision of e, t,
would give to the consonants a hard sound ; as in
560 ORTHOGRAPHY.
c' Ama, "| f ci Ama, he loves us ;
fac' Ardente, /acE Ardente, burning light ;
dole1 Accenti, }> for <( dolci Accenti, sweet accents ;
piagg' Apriche, \ piaggE Apriche, sunny places ;
pogg' Ameni, ) ^ pdggi Ameni, pleasant hills.
Finally, words that end with two vowels, as cambw,
'exchange '; we66iA, ' fog ' ; though followed by another
vowel, do not receive an apostrophe ;
A few verbs, ending in to, as vogho, dogho, which followed by 10,
1 1,' are written
vogV io, I wish ; mi dogV io, I grieve.
Likewise words that are marked with a grave accent,
asfelicita, ' happiness ' ; gioventu, c youth ' ; &tc. do not
receive an apostrophe ;
EXCEPT
Perchb, benefit, and all the other compounds of che\ as,
perch' egli disse, because he said ; bench' 6llafdsse, although she was.
CHAPTER III.
REDUPLICATION OF CONSONANTS.
The Italians write all words as they pronounce them ;
and in those words in which a consonant is pronounced
with double force, they double the consonant in writ-
ing ; as,
fanligo, obligation ; ivrndgine, image ;
faccenda, business ; legtTTimo, lawful.
Consonants are generally doubled
REDUPLICATION OF CONSONANTS. 561
In words compounded of one of the particles a, o,
i or in, si, se, ne, co or con, so, su, da, ra, fra, and of
any other word beginning with a consonant ; as,
[A pena] appena, hardly ;
[o vero] ovvero, or else ;
[i or IN Rigare] iRRigdrv, to water ;
[si come] siccome, as ;
[SE Bine,} seBBene, although ;
[N& Meno], neyiweno, nor yet ;
[co or CON MUO- coMMuovere, to move ;
vere]
[so Levare] soi^i^evdre, to raise ;
[su ce*dere] succedere^ to succeed ;
[DA Be*ne] dasBene, honest ;
[RA conto] racconto, relation ;
[FRA Me*sso] frawMesso, put between :
In words compounded of a verb ending with a vowel
bearing the accent upon it, and of a conjunctive pronoun ;
as,
[hA LO] MLLO, he has it ;
[dir6 vi] dirovvi, I will tell you ;
When the verb is followed by the pronoun gli, when the g is never
doubled:
In all words compounded of an adverb, a preposition,
or a conjunction, ending with a vowel, and of any other
word beginning with a consonant ; as,
[61trE ci6] oltreccid, besides that ;
[11 oiu] fattGiic, there below ;
[gil Mai] giaMMdi, never;
[s6prA N(5me] sopranndme, surname ;
[E pure] epptire, and yet.
562 ORTHOGRAPHY.
CHAPTER IV.
INCREASE OF WORDS.
THE increase of words is the addition of a vowel or
a consonant, either at the beginning or at the end of a
word.
When the words in, ' in ' ; con, ' with ' ; won, ' no,'
or ' not ' ; per, ' for,' ' by,' or i through ' ; are followed
by a word beginning with an s followed by another con-
sonant, as, STrada, spavcnto, scrive, scherzo ; to avoid
the harshness produced by the meeting of these con-
sonants, the second word commonly takes an i before
it; as,
IN istrada, } C in STrdda, in the street ;
CON ispa&fnto, f jns|.eaj Of y c°n spavento, with fright ;
NON iscrive, ^ J 71071 scr* ye, does not write ;
PER ischerzo, } \per sc/ierzo, in jest. -
In poetry, however, this rule is not so strictly observed as in prose;
since the increase (adding a syllable to the word), would be often
incompatible with the measure of the verse.
The preposition a, 'to,' and the conjunctions e, ' and ';
o, ' or ' ; when followed by a word beginning with a
vowel, sometimes take a d after them, to prevent the
hiatus ; as,
CD tfno cm tfno, one after another ;
amore CD orfio, love and hatred ;
OD in cielo OD in terra, either in heaven or on earth.
And the prepositions su, insu, ' upon ? ; followed by
another u, take an r after them ; as,
SUR nn m6nte, upon a hill ;
uR un pdlco, upon a stage.
DIMINUTION OF WORDS. 563
CHAPTER V.
DIMINUTION OF WORDS.
THE diminution of words is the suppression or re-
trenchment of a letter or a syllable, either at the end or
in the middle of a word.
The Italians retrench the last vowel of words ending
in e, o, preceded by one of the consonants /, m, n, r,
forming with them a syllable by themselves ; as in
sa-LE, « salt ' ; WO-MO, c man ' ; wa-No, * hand ' ; CWO-RE,
' heart ' ; and followed by a word beginning with a con-
sonant ; as,
SAL comiine, common salt ;
UOM in" c6rte9 courtier ;
MAN DI donna, lady's hand ;
CUOR DolMe, grieving heart.
But if le, lo ; ne, no ; re, ro, do not form a syllable by themselves,
but in concurrence with any other consonant, as in Sofo-cL*, ' Sopho-
cles ' ; jfl'n-GLo,.' Englishman'; VI-GNE, vineyards '; J^-GNO, « pledge';
O-CRE, 'sour' ; ^i-ciio, «lazy' ; the words are never retrenched.
When e is preceded by rr, as in concteR-RE, « to
conduct'; and o is preceded by // or wn ; as in /an-
C/AL-LO, { youth ' ; AON-NO, ' they have ' ; they retrench
the whole syllable ; as, «
CONDOR s^co, to conduct with one's self;
FANCIUL vezzdso, handsome youth ;
L' HAN Kubdto, they have robbed him.
The last vowel of the words uno, < a or an ' ; bene,
{ well ' ; buono, ' good ' ; and the last syllable of the
words hello, 'handsome'; quello, < that'; grande, 'great \
564 ORTHOGRAPHY.
when they are followed by a word beginning with a
consonant, are always retrenched ; as,
UN Ft'o're, a flower ;
BEN TI sta, thou deservest it ;
Bu6N vino, good wine ;
BEL prdto, beautiful meadow ;
QUEL L*6ro, that book ;
GRAN MercdJo, great market ;
GRAN citta, great city.
The last vowel of the word Signore, ' Master ' ; and
the last syllable of the words Frate, < Brother [Friar] ' ;
Santo, ' Saint'; when they are used as titles; is also
retrenched before a consonant ; as,
SIGNOR CarZo, Master Charles ;
FRA Giovdnni, Brother John ;
SAN Paolo, Saint Paul.
Words ending in a are never retrenched ;
EXCEPT
Suora, l Sister ' ; which, when used as a title, loses the a ; as,
SUOR Maiia, Sister Mary ;
and 6ra, 'now,' with its compounds allora, ancora, talora, &c. which,
before a consonant, may be retrenched ; as,
OR DI', now say ;
ALLOR yidij then I saw ;
ANCOR ridnge, he weeps still ;
TALOR vtgghia, sometimes he is awake.
Words ending in i are never retrenched ;
Fucni, l out ' ; and the second person of the imperative of verbs
ending in ntre, mre; as ti6ni, l hold thou '; vteni, * come thou ' ; from
teNEnE, Mo hold'; rCNiRE, ' to come'; which before a consonant
lose their i ; as,
DIMINUTION OF WORDS. fxtf
FUOR DI citta, out of town ;
TIEN weslo, hold this ;
VIEN prfsto, come quick.
Words ending in u, and words accented on the last
syllable, are never retrenched.
Words ending with two vowels are never retrenched ;
EXCEPT
When the two vowels are preceded by n, as in Antomo, < Anthony ' ;
testiniomo, l testimony ' ; in which case they may be retrenched ; as,
ANTON-Mana, Anthony-Maria ;
TESTIMON verdce, true testimony.
Words retrenched in the singular, are never retrench-
ed in the plural ;
Grande, ' great J ; which in its plural grdndij also, loses the last
syllable ; as,
GRAN pericoli, great dangers ;
GRAN mcchezze, great riches;
and such words as cavaliere, l cavalier ' ; demdnio, l demon ' ; &c.
which, in poetry, may lose the last vowel or vowels, even in their
plurals ; as,
le donne, i CAVALIER, the ladies, the cavaliers ;
i DEMON duri, the cruel demons.
Words, which would be retrenched before a word be-
ginning with a consonant, are always written with an
apostrophe before words beginning with a vowel; as,
bell9 Aspetto, handsome appearance ;
qudV Arco, that bow ;
grand' uo'mo, great man ;
FraV Alberto, Brother Albert ;
Sani^ Andrea, Saint Andrew ;
48
566 ORTHOGRAPHY.
C77no, ' a or an/ and its compounds ; qudle, ' which ' ; buono,
' good ' ; bene, c well s ; Signore, ' Master ' ; Suora, ' Sister ' ; and the
infinitive, and forms of verbs ending in Z, m, n, r, which do not receive
an apostrophe ; as,
un AinicOj a friend ;
alcun odore, no smell ;
qudl \rdire , what daring ;
ftuon Home, good man ;
Z>en mciso, v well engraved ;
Signor Onofrio, Master Onofrio ;
Suor Angelica, Sister Angelica ;
andar A spdsso, to go and take a walk ;
abbidm Amdto, we have loved ;
andrdn Ese"ntit they will be exempted ;
sardbber Lrsij they would be burnt.
Words are never retrenched, when they are followed
by a z, or an s followed by another consonant ; or when
they are at the end of a sentence ;
In poetry where words are sometimes retrenched, even before a z,
or an s followed by another consonant^ on account of the measure of
the verse.
Some words, when they undergo some alteration, lose
a vowel in the middle, particularly if the tonic accent of
the word, by such alteration, is transferred to the fol-
lowing syllable ; as,
6o6no, good ; bonissimo, very good ;
tvono, thunder; tonare, to thunder;
suono, I play ; sonidmo, we play.
Some compound words lose a letter, or a syllable in
their composition ; as,
[ie*n sera] iersfra, last evening ;
DIMINUTION OF WORDS. 507
[s6tTO te*rra] sotttrra, under ground ;
[do.MANi mattina] domattina, to-morrow morning ;
[cenTO cinquanta] cencinqudnta, one hundred and fifty.
Infinitives, and those forms of verbs that end in /«,
ne, mo, no, when joined to a conjunctive pronoun, drop
their final vowel ; as,
[amarE lo] «W«RLO, to love him ;
[duolE ti] du6LTi, it grieves thee ;
[vienE s£ne] VI^NSENE, he comes thence ;
[andiamo vi] andidwvi, let us go there ;
[aiutarono ci] aiutaroxci, they assisted us.
The first and third persons singular, and the third
person plural, of the imperfect of the indicative of all the
verbs, which in the infinitive terminate in ere, ire,
generally drop the v ; as,
flgli 5*emfcT«J \°gli, H««' he \ feared :
[eglino temerano,] eglino, temeano, they feared ;
|°gli !sentiv^ fe, Sse«««' he Sheard;
[eglino sentivano,] tglino, sentiano, they heard.
The words cavalli, capelli, coltelli, fratelli, ruscelli,
quelli, belli, delli, alii, dalU, nelli, pclli, colli, sulli,
tralli, and quali, mali, tali, figliuoli, may be contracted
into cavai, capei, coltei, fratei, ruscci, quei, bei, dti, at,
dcvi, nei, pei, coi, sui, trai, quai, mai, tai, fifti***,
which, when they are followed by a consonant, it is more
elegant to abbreviate, and write with an apostrophe ; as,
cavtf leggtiri, light horses ; rusct' ridtnti, smiling brooks ;
capSbMnchi, white hair ; gut' signdri, those gentlemen;
coM pungenti, sharp knives ; 66' costumi, good manners ;
carndli, own brothers; dV nemlci, of the enemies ;
568 ORTHOGRAPHY.
d' parenti, to the parents ; trff b6schi, amongst the woods ;
dd* Iddrij by the robbers ; qua9 dolori, what pains ;
ne'bisogni, in the necessities ; md' pensieri, malicious thoughts ;
pff cdmpi, through the fields ; iff discorsi, such discourses ;
c6' denli, with the teeth ; figliuo* miser- very miserable sons.
stf monti) upon the mountains ; [rimi,
The word eglino, ' they ' ; often loses its last syllable
and makes egli ; and egli, ' he,' or ( they/ may be
contracted into ei, and written 'e', c he,' or * they.'
This is all that needs to be said on the diminution or
retrenchment of words ; except that the rule respecting
the retrenchment of e, 0, when preceded by /, m, n, r,
does not hold in certain instances, where such retrench-
ment would produce a harsh sound. Thus the words,
come, c how5; nome, ' name'; animo, ' courage'; chiarOj
4 clear'; raro, c rare'; nero, c black'; c^uro, c hard'; oscu-
ro, 'obscure '; &c., are never written com, nom, cmim,
c/iiar, ner, ror, ^wr, oscwr, &tc.
THE END.
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
PREFACE to the former Edition vii
" to the present Edition - - - - xi
A LIST OF WORKS examined with Reference to the Com-
pilation of this Grammar xvii
A TABLE of the Abbreviations of the Names of Authors
and of the Works quoted in this Grammar - xxiv
ITALIAN GRAMMAR.
INTRODUCTION 1-10
ITALIAN ALPHABET - - - - - - - 11, 12
PART L — ITALIAN PRONUNCIATION - 13-24
CHAPTER I. — Sounds of the Vowels 13
" II. — Pronunciation of the Consonants - - 14
« III. — Of J and H 16
« IV. — Double Consonants H
« V.— Of Syllables - - 19
" VI. — Diphthongs and Triphthongs - -20
" VII. — General Rules on the Italian Pronunciation 21
EXERCISE on the Pronunciation -
PART II. — ITALIAN ANALOGY - 25-388
PARTS OF SPEECH
CHAPTER I. — Articles
Union of the Prepositions with the Articles -
EXERCISE I.
CHAPTER II. — Substantive Mouns
Gender
Number, or Formation of the Plural
Variation of Nouns
EXERCISE II.
48*
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
CHAPTER III. — Adjective Nouns. — Comparatives and
Superlatives 62
Gender - 62
Formation of the Plural 62
Agreement of Adjectives ...--. 63
Comparatives --.-... 65
EXERCISE III. ...--.-.71
Superlatives -------- 72
EXERCISE IV. 78
CHAPTER IV. — Augmentatives and Diminutives - 80
Augmentatives -------.80
EXERCISE V. 83
Diminutives -------- 84
EXERCISE VI. 89
CHAPTER V. — Numerals ------ 90
Cardinal Numbers ------ -90
Ordinal " 94
Collective, Distributive, and Proportional Numbers 96
EXERCISE Vll. - - - 98
CHAPTER VI. — Substantive Pronouns - - - 100
Personal Pronouns - - - - - - -100
Variation of Personal Pronouns ----- 101
EXERCISE VIII. 107
Conjunctive Pronouns - - - - - 109
Union of the Pronouns miy ti, gli, ne or ci, wi, sz, with the
Pronouns lo, la, gli, li, le, ne 114
EXERCISE IX. 118
Relative Pronouns - - - - - -119
EXERCISE X. 125
Interrogative Pronouns - - - - - -127
EXERCISE XI. 129
» CHAPTER VII. — Adjective Pronouns ~ 131
Possessive Pronouns - - - - - -131
EXERCISE XII. 134
Demonstrative Pronouns - - - - - -337
EXERCISE XIII. 143
Indefinite Pronouns --___- 145
EXERCISE XIV. 156
CHAPTER VIII. — Of the Particles Ne, Ci, Vi - - 158
EXERCISE XV. 162
CHAPTER IX.— Verbs 164
Variation of Verbs - - - - - - 164
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
Auxiliary Verbs - - - . - - -
The Verb Avere, affirmatively 165
" negatively 169
" interrogatively - - . - - 171
, " " interrogative-negatively - - 172
Essere 173
Regular Verbs - - - - - - 177
Active Verbs — FIRST CONJUGATION ... 177
Aiflare, paradigm of the Verbs ending in dre - 177
Cercdre, paradigm of the Verbs ending in care - 181
Pregare, paradigm of the Verbs ending in gdre - - 182
Bacidre, paradigm of the Verbs ending in cidre • 183
Fregidre, paradigm of the Verbs ending in gidre - - 185
Noidre, paradigm of the Verbs ending in idre ... 186
Invldre, paradigm of the Verbs ending in lore • - 187
SECOND CONJUGATION - - 187
Temere, paradigm of the Verbs ending in the infinitive in
ere (long) ; and of those which in the perfect end in ii
and etti - 187
Tissere, paradigm of the Verbs ending in the infinitive in
ere (short) ; and of those which in the perfect end in
It only 191
Tacere, paradigm of the Verbs ending in cere
JSmpiere, paradigm of the Verbs ending in iere - 194
THIRD CONJUGATION ------ 195
Sentirc, paradigm of those Verbs of the third conjugation
which, in the present of the indicative, end in o only 195
Esibire, paradigm of those Verbs of the third conjugation
which, in the present of the indicative, end in isco only 198
Abborrire, paradigm of those Verbs of the third conjugation
which, in the present of the indicative, end both in o
and isco --------- 201
Cucire, paradigms of the Verbs ending in cire - 204
Remarks on the foregoing Verbs - 205
EXERCISE XVI. 20§
Passive Verbs 212
Essere Amato, paradigm of the passive verbs
Neuter Verbs - 216
Partire, paradigm of the neuter verbs -
Pronominal Verbs -
Pentirsi, paradigm of the pronominal verbs -
Unipersonai Verbs
Pidvere, paradigm of the unipersonal verbs •
Essere^ unipersonally used
EXERCISE XVII. 232
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
Order, quantity, quality, affirmation, negation, doubt, com-
j/arison, interrogation ------ 351
Choice, demonstration ...... 352
Compound Adverbs ------ 356
Adjectives commonly used as Adverbs - 357
Adverbial Phrases in common use - 359
EXERCISE XXIII. - 361
CHAPTER XIV. — Prepositions ----- 363
Prepositions in common use ------ 363
EXERCISE XXIV. 373
CHAPTER XV. — Conjunctions ----- 376
Conjunctions in common use ----- 375
EXERCISE XXV. 382
CHAPTER XVI. — Interjections - - - - 384
Interjections in common use - - - - - 384
EXERCISE XXVI. 387
PART III. — ITALIAN SYNTAX - - -389-553
CHAPTER I. — Order and Position of Words - - 389
Simple Construction - - - - - - - 389
Inverse " 393
EXERCISE XXVII. 395
CHAPTER II. — Concordance or Agreement of Words - 397
Concordance of Articles ------ 397
" of Adjectives 397
" of Numerals 403
<£ of Pronouns ------ 403
" of Verbs 405
" of Participles 411
EXERCISE XXVIII. - 413
CHAPTER III. — Regimen or Government of Words - 415
Regimen of Substantives ------ 415
" of Adjectives - 418
" of Verbs 421
" of Prepositions - - , - 432
«' of Conjunctions 433
EXERCISE XXIX. 436
CHAPTER IV.— Use of Articles 440
EXERCISE XXX. - > - - - - - - 468
CHAPTER V. — Position of Adjectives - 472
EXERCISE XXXI. 480
CHAPTER VI. — Use and Position of certain Pronouns - 483
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
Personal Pronouns .«.-..„ 453
Conjunctive " 486
Possessive " 405
Indefinite " 499
XXXII. 502
CHAPTER VII.— Verbs 506
Position of Verbs 506
Use of the Imperfect and First and Second Perfect - - 609
Use of Certain Tenses of the Indicative for some other
Tenses of the same Mood ; and of the Infinitive for cer-
tain Tenses of the Indicative, and for the Conjunctive and
Imperative Moods - - - - - - -512
Of the Tenses of the Dependent Verbs in a Compound
Sentence ...... . . 517
Of ihe Manner of Expressing the English Present-Participle
in Italian - 519
Of the way of Rendering into Italian the English particle
Tb, before the Infinitive of Verbs - - - 522
EXERCISE XXXIII. - 525
CHAPTER VIII. — Participles. — Use and Position of
certain Mverbs _....- 529
Agreement of Participles 529
Use and Position of certain Adverbs .... 535
EXERCISE XXXI V. - 538
CHAPTER IX. — Expletives - - - - - -541
CHAPTER X.— Of the Ellipsis 545
REMARKS ON THE DIFFERENT MODES OF ADDRESS IN
ITALIAN
PART IV. - ITALIAN ORTHOGRAPHY 554-568
CHAPTER!.— Of Accents - - - 554
« II.— Of the Apostrophe • 557
" III. — Reduplication of Consonants - - 560
« IV. — Increase of Words - 562
« V. — Diminution of Words -
CORRIGENDA.
Page
line,
For,
Read,
44
a subject and a quality, to
which it affirms that the sub-
a subject, and a quality of which it
affirms that it is, or is not, at-
23
15
ject is, or is not attributed,
gioeondo,
tributed to the subject,
gioeondo.
24
14
magndmino,
magn&nimo.
26
12
nouns begins,
noun begins.
33
8
MERCA'TANTE,
MERCATA'NTE.
35
22
pidngere,
pidngere.
36
]3
Erato,
E'ralo.
tt
25
Lapis,
Lapis.
43
41
delle cose,
che gli ho ddto.
44
13
eclissi,
ecclissi.
64
14
Dav. Tac. am.
Dav. Tac. ann.
65
6
Add. Cavalc.
Cavalc.
69
1
Id
To.
87
17
UMioizzo,
UMIDU'ZZO.
89
4
BACICCUHIA'I,
BACIUCCHIA'I.
cc
26
Nasccemmo,
Nascemmo.
155
34
Qudnto COSE,
Qudnte COSE.
161
4
Pass. tr. Hu. c. 4.
Pass. 276.
173
17
essere stdta,
Essere stdta.
179
20
that thou lovest,
that thou love.
<«
21
that he loves,
that he love.
193
24
2
in.
258
25
as in the case,
as H the case.
287
18
COTtfllTTO,
COn/XTTO.
296
6
* I kindle »,
« I kindled.'
299
6
M raise,
Mi mise.
"
40
Arr. Vang.
Ann. Vang,
300
14
Jerusalem,
Jerusalem.
348
23
f6nda,
frdnda.
369
10
Petr. Fr. Am.
Petr. Tr. Am.
n
37
Bocc. Floe.
Boec. Filoc.
370
30
Mach. Corn.
Mach. Com.
382
1
rinuovelli,
rinnovelli.
394
5
Ephigenia,
Iphigenia,
M
19
PRE'SEMI ALL^BA,
PRE SEMI ALLOR.
<«
27
Ephigenia,
Iphigenia.
395
20
E'lvidio,
Elvidio.
406
26
PIGLIEBA'MO,
PIGMERE'MO.
419
5
deaite,
dedite.
455
28
Gian. Stor. Giv. Nap.
Gian. Stor. Civ. Nap.
458
30
avviticchia,
avviticchia.
463
8
FIGLIUOLI,
FIGLT70I.
468
5
FRUMA NTO,
FRUME'NTO.
477
479
39
36
Lapari,
Tris. Elog. Galil.
Lipari.
Fris. Elog. Galil.
491
26
I see you,
I see thee.
495
5
msposTO,
DISP08TO.
500
2
dispesi,
disperi.
501
|
woman,
wom*n.
"
30
even,
ever.
In a ftw copies only
t
137
13
these,
those.
138
14
30
these near you,
STAMA'TTINA,
those near you.
STAMATTlNA,
143
19
COSTUI,
CO3TU I.
"
24
EXERCISES,
EXERCISE XIII.
ADDENDA.
409
35
add (Bocc. g. 3. n. 7.)
446
26
add (Bocc. g. 1 n. 1,)
479
42
add (Dant. Inf. 2.)
485
32
add (Bocc. g. 5. n. 3.)
486
10
add (Bocc. g. 7. n> 4.)
516
41
add (Bocc.)
THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE
STAMPED BELOW
AN INITIAL PINE OP 25 CENTS
WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN
THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY
WILL INCREASE TO 5O CENTS ON THE FOURTH
DAY AND TO $1.OO ON THE SEVENTH DAY
OVERDUE,
LD 21
.-lOOm-12,' 43 (8796s)
U.C. BERKELEY Lll
.
THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11